Connection Manual (Function) : FANUC Series 0+-MODEL D FANUC Series 0+ Mate-MODEL D

FANUC Series 0+-MODEL D
FANUC Series 0+ Mate-MODEL D
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)

(Volume 2 of 2)
B-64303EN-1/02
• No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form.
• All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.
The products in this manual are controlled based on Japan’s “Foreign Exchange and
Foreign Trade Law”. The export from Japan may be subject to an export license by the
government of Japan.
Further, re-export to another country may be subject to the license of the government of
the country from where the product is re-exported. Furthermore, the product may also be
controlled by re-export regulations of the United States government.
Should you wish to export or re-export these products, please contact FANUC for advice.
The products in this manual are manufactured under strict quality control. However, when
using any of the products in a facility in which a serious accident or loss is predicted due to
a failure of the product, install a safety device.
In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters.
However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be
done, because there are so many possibilities.
Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be
regarded as ”impossible”.
B-64303EN-1/02 TABLE OF CONTENTS
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Volume 1 of 2
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE .................................s-1
PREFACE ....................................................................................................p-1
1 AXIS CONTROL...................................................................................... 1
1.1 CONTROLLED AXIS ..................................................................................... 1
1.2 SETTING EACH AXIS ................................................................................... 2
1.2.1 Name of Axes ...........................................................................................................2
1.2.2 Increment System .....................................................................................................4
1.2.3 Specifying the Rotation Axis ...................................................................................7
1.2.4 Controlled Axes Detach .........................................................................................10
1.2.5 Outputting the Movement State of an Axis............................................................13
1.2.6 Mirror Image ..........................................................................................................14
1.2.7 Follow-up ...............................................................................................................16
1.2.8 Servo off/Mechanical Handle Feed ........................................................................17
1.2.9 Position Switch.......................................................................................................19
1.3 ERROR COMPENSATION.......................................................................... 22
1.3.1 Stored Pitch Error Compensation...........................................................................22
1.3.2 Backlash Compensation .........................................................................................28
1.3.3 Smooth Backlash ....................................................................................................30
1.3.4 Simple Straightness Compensation (M Series) ......................................................33
1.3.5 Gradient Compensation ..........................................................................................37
1.3.6 Bi-directional Pitch Error Compensation ...............................................................40
1.3.7 Differences between Pitch Error Compensation, Simple Straightness
Compensation, and Gradient Compensation (Reference) ......................................47
1.4 SETTINGS RELATED TO SERVO-CONTROLLED AXES.......................... 48
1.4.1 Parameters Related to Servo...................................................................................48
1.4.2 Absolute Position Detection ...................................................................................54
1.4.3 FSSB Setting ..........................................................................................................60
1.4.3.1 Series 0i-D-dedicated setting ............................................................................. 60
1.4.3.2 Series 0i-C-compatible setting........................................................................... 76
1.4.4 Temporary Absolute Coordinate Setting................................................................89
1.5 SETTINGS RELATED WITH COORDINATE SYSTEMS ............................ 92
1.5.1 Machine Coordinate System...................................................................................92
1.5.2 Workpiece Coordinate System/Addition of Workpiece Coordinate System Pair ..94
1.5.2.1 Workpiece coordinate system............................................................................ 94
1.5.2.2 Workpiece coordinate system preset ................................................................. 97
1.5.2.3 Adding workpiece coordinate systems (G54.1 or G54) (M series) ................... 98
1.5.2.4 Automatic coordinate system setting ................................................................. 99
1.5.2.5 Workpiece coordinate system shift (T series).................................................. 100
1.5.2.6 Each axis workpiece coordinate system preset signals.................................... 104
1.5.3 Local Coordinate System .....................................................................................109
1.5.4 Rotary Axis Roll Over..........................................................................................111
1.6 AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL........................................................... 113
1.6.1 Axis Configuration for Axis Synchronous Control..............................................113
1.6.2 Synchronization Establishment ............................................................................116
1.6.3 Automatic Setting for Grid Position Matching ....................................................118
1.6.4 Synchronization Error Check ...............................................................................118
c-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS B-64303EN-1/02
1.6.5 Methods of Alarm Recovery by Synchronization Error Check ...........................119

1.6.6 Axis Synchronous Control Torque Difference Alarm..........................................120
1.6.7 Automatic Slave Axis Parameter Setting .............................................................121
1.7 TANDEM CONTROL ................................................................................. 136
1.8 ARBITRARY ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL ................................................ 144
1.9 ELECTRONIC GEAR BOX (M SERIES) ................................................... 156
1.9.1 Electronic Gear Box (M Series) ...........................................................................156
2 PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION ................................................. 177

2.1 EMERGENCY STOP................................................................................. 177
2.2 CNC READY SIGNALS ............................................................................. 179
2.3 OVERTRAVEL CHECK ............................................................................. 180
2.3.1 Overtravel Signals ................................................................................................180
2.3.2 Stored Stroke Check 1..........................................................................................182
2.3.3 Stored Stroke Check 2, 3......................................................................................187
2.3.4 Checking the Stored Stroke Limit during the Time from Power–on to
the Reference Position Establishment ..................................................................194
2.3.5 Stroke Limit External Setting (M Series) .............................................................196
2.3.6 Chuck and Tail Stock Barrier (T Series) ..............................................................197
2.3.7 Stroke Limit Check Before Move ........................................................................206
2.4 ALARM SIGNALS...................................................................................... 209
2.5 START LOCK / INTERLOCK..................................................................... 210
2.6 MODE SELECTION................................................................................... 216
2.7 STATUS OUTPUT SIGNAL....................................................................... 222
2.8 VRDY OFF ALARM IGNORE SIGNAL ...................................................... 223
2.9 UNEXPECTED DISTURBANCE TORQUE DETECTION FUNCTION ...... 225
2.10 MACHINING CONDITION SELECTION FUNCTION ................................ 235
2.11 MACHINING QUALITY LEVEL ADJUSTMENT (M Series) ....................... 241
2.12 MALFUNCTION PREVENT FUNCTIONS ................................................. 243
2.13 OPERATOR ERROR PREVENT FUNCTIONS ......................................... 246
3 MANUAL OPERATION ....................................................................... 256
3.1 JOG FEED/INCREMENTAL FEED............................................................ 256
3.2 MANUAL HANDLE FEED.......................................................................... 262
3.3 MANUAL HANDLE INTERRUPT............................................................... 271
3.4 I/O Link β MANUAL HANDLE INTERFACE............................................... 276
3.5 MANUAL HANDLE RETRACE .................................................................. 279
4 REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT ..................................... 299
4.1 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN........................................... 299
4.2 REFERENCE POSITION SETTING WITHOUT DOG ............................... 320
4.3 AUTOMATIC REFERENCE POSITION RETURN AND RETURN FROM
THE REFERENCE POSITION .................................................................. 327
4.4 2ND REFERENCE POSITION RETURN / 3RD, 4TH REFERENCE
POSITION RETURN.................................................................................. 332
4.5 REFERENCE POSITION SETTING WITH MECHANICAL STOPPER ..... 334
4.6 DISTANCE CODED LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE ................................... 339
4.7 LINEAR SCALE WITH DISTANCE-CODED REFERENCE MARKS
(SERIAL) ................................................................................................... 351
c-2
4.8 EXTENDED FUNCTION OF THE DISTANCE CODED LINEAR SCALE

INTERFACE .............................................................................................. 361
4.8.1 Reference Position Established by the G00 Command ........................................361
4.8.2 Reference Position Establishment by Jog Feed....................................................365
4.9 CORRESPONDENCE OF ROTARY SCALE WITHOUT ROTARY DATA. 368
4.9.1 Setting Method by Rotary Axis Type and Movable Range .................................368
4.9.2 In the Case of a Rotary Axis B Type whose Movable Range is under
One Rotation ........................................................................................................369
4.9.3 In the Case of a Rotary Axis B Type whose Movable Range is over
One Rotation ........................................................................................................375
4.9.4 In the Case of a Rotary Axis A Type ...................................................................377
4.9.5 Method of Using Heidenhain Rotary Scale RCN223, 723 and 220.....................378
5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION ................................................................. 381

5.1 CYCLE START/FEED HOLD..................................................................... 381
5.2 RESET AND REWIND............................................................................... 384
5.3 TESTING A PROGRAM ............................................................................ 388
5.3.1 Machine Lock.......................................................................................................388
5.3.2 Dry Run ................................................................................................................389
5.3.3 Single Block .........................................................................................................391
5.4 MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON/OFF ................................................................. 393
5.5 OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP/ADDITION OF OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP ......... 395
5.6 SEQUENCE NUMBER COMPARISON AND STOP ................................. 397
5.7 PROGRAM RESTART .............................................................................. 397
5.8 RETRACE (M SERIES) ............................................................................. 403
5.9 EXACT STOP / EXACT STOP MODE / TAPPING MODE / CUTTING
MODE........................................................................................................ 413
5.10 RETRACTION FOR RIGID TAPPING ....................................................... 414
5.11 DNC OPERATION..................................................................................... 419
5.12 MANUAL INTERVENTION AND RETURN................................................ 422
5.13 DIRECT OPERATION BY C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR ............................ 425
6 INTERPOLATION FUNCTION ............................................................ 426
6.1 POSITIONING ........................................................................................... 426
6.2 SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING (M SERIES) .................................... 427
6.3 LINEAR INTERPOLATION ........................................................................ 430
6.4 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION................................................................... 432
6.5 THREADING.............................................................................................. 435
6.5.1 Threading .............................................................................................................435
6.5.2 Threading Cycle Retract (Canned Cycle) (T Series)............................................440
6.5.3 Threading Cycle Retract (Multiple Repetitive Canned Cycle) (T Series)............443
6.5.4 Variable Lead Threading (T Series) .....................................................................447
6.5.5 Continuous Threading (T Series) .........................................................................447
6.6 HELICAL INTERPOLATION ...................................................................... 448
6.7 POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION (T SERIES) ............................ 449
6.8 CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION ............................................................. 452
6.8.1 Cylindrical Interpolation ......................................................................................452
6.9 POLYGON TURNING (T SERIES) ............................................................ 454
6.9.1 Polygon Turning...................................................................................................455
6.9.2 Polygon Turning with Two Spindles....................................................................462
c-3
6.10 NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL (M SERIES)........................................ 480

6.11 LINEAR INTERPOLATION (G28, G30, G53) ............................................ 483
6.12 NANO SMOOTHING (M SERIES)............................................................. 484
6.13 GENERAL PURPOSE RETRACT ............................................................. 491
7 FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND DECELERATION
CONTROL ........................................................................................... 496
7.1 FEEDRATE CONTROL ............................................................................. 496
7.1.1 Rapid Traverse Rate .............................................................................................497
7.1.2 Cutting Feedrate Clamp........................................................................................499
7.1.3 Feed Per Minute ...................................................................................................499
7.1.4 Feed Per Revolution/Manual Feed Per Revolution ..............................................501
7.1.5 One-digit F Code Feed (M Series) .......................................................................502
7.1.6 Inverse Time Feed (M Series) ..............................................................................505
7.1.7 Override................................................................................................................505
7.1.7.1 Rapid traverse override.................................................................................... 505
7.1.7.2 Feedrate override ............................................................................................. 509
7.1.7.3 Override cancel................................................................................................ 511
7.1.8 Automatic Corner Override (M Series) ................................................................511
7.1.8.1 Inner corner automatic override (G62) ............................................................ 512
7.1.8.2 Internal circular cutting feedrate change ......................................................... 514
7.1.9 External Deceleration ...........................................................................................516
7.1.10 Acceleration-Based Speed Control in Circular Interpolation...............................521
7.1.11 High Precision and High Speed Functions (Advanced Preview Control
(T Series) / AI Advanced Preview Control (M Series) / AI Contour Control
(M Series) / AI Contour Control II (M Series)) ...................................................522
7.1.12 Speed Command Extension in Least Input Increment C......................................552
7.2 ACCELERATION/DECELERATION CONTROL........................................ 555
7.2.1 Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration ..................................................................555
7.2.1.1 Automatic acceleration/deceleration................................................................ 555
7.2.1.2 Rapid traverse block overlap ........................................................................... 559
7.2.2 Rapid Traverse Bell-shaped Acceleration/Deceleration.......................................560
7.2.3 Linear Acceleration/Deceleration after Cutting Feed Interpolation .....................562
7.2.4 Bell-Shaped Acceleration/Deceleration after Cutting Feed Interpolation
(M Series) .............................................................................................................565
7.2.5 Corner Control......................................................................................................567
7.2.5.1 In-position check signal................................................................................... 567
7.2.5.2 In-position check ............................................................................................. 568
7.2.5.3 In-position check independently of feed/rapid traverse................................... 570
7.2.6 Feed Forward in Rapid Traverse ..........................................................................572
7.3 JERK CONTROL (M Series) ..................................................................... 572
7.3.1 Speed Control with Change of Acceleration on Each Axis..................................572
7.3.2 Look-Ahead Smooth Bell-Shaped Acceleration/Deceleration before
Interpolation .........................................................................................................576
8 2-PATH CONTROL ............................................................................. 578

8.1 2-PATH CONTROL ................................................................................... 578
8.1.1 CNC Data Display, Setup, and Input/Output .......................................................583
8.1.2 2-path Functions ...................................................................................................583
8.1.3 Cautions on 2-path Control ..................................................................................585
8.2 WAITING M CODES.................................................................................. 591
8.3 PATH INTERFERENCE CHECK............................................................... 593
8.4 BALANCE CUTTING ................................................................................. 602
c-4
8.5 SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL AND COMPOSITE CONTROL................... 605

8.5.1 Synchronous Control............................................................................................607
8.5.2 Composite Control ...............................................................................................613
8.5.3 Hypothetical Cs Axis Control ..............................................................................646
8.6 SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL ................................................................... 650
8.7 SYNCHRONOUS, COMPOSITE, AND SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL BY
PROGRAM COMMAND ............................................................................ 663
8.8 PATH SPINDLE CONTROL ...................................................................... 665
8.9 MEMORY COMMON TO PATHS .............................................................. 675
8.10 PATH SINGLE BLOCK CHECK FUNCTION ............................................. 678
8.11 PATH SELECTION/DISPLAY OF OPTIONAL PATH NAMES................... 679
9 AUXILIARY FUNCTION ...................................................................... 682
9.1 AUXILIARY FUNCTION/2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION ............................. 682
9.2 AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK.................................................................. 694
9.3 MULTIPLE M COMMANDS IN A SINGLE BLOCK.................................... 695
9.4 HIGH-SPEED M/S/T/B INTERFACE ......................................................... 697
10 SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION............................................................. 700
10.1 SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S CODE OUTPUT) .................................. 700
10.2 DESIGNATION OF SPINDLE AXES ......................................................... 701
10.3 SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT ...................................................................... 705
10.4 SPINDLE ANALOG OUTPUT.................................................................... 715
10.5 SERIAL/ANALOG SPINDLE CONTROL ................................................... 719
10.6 SPINDLE SPEED CONTROL.................................................................... 722
10.7 SPINDLE OUTPUT CONTROL BY THE PMC .......................................... 749
10.8 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL ............................................. 755
10.9 ACTUAL SPINDLE SPEED OUTPUT (T SERIES).................................... 763
10.10 SPINDLE POSITIONING (T SERIES) ....................................................... 764
10.11 Cs CONTOUR CONTROL......................................................................... 797
10.11.1 Cs Contour Control ..............................................................................................797
10.11.2 Cs Contour Control Torque Limit Skip................................................................815
10.11.3 Cs Contour Control Axis Coordinate Establishment............................................818
10.12 MULTI-SPINDLE CONTROL ..................................................................... 826
10.13 RIGID TAPPING ........................................................................................ 843
10.13.1 Connection Among Spindle, Spindle Motor, and Position Coder........................844
10.13.2 Rigid Tapping Specification.................................................................................848
10.13.3 Commands for Feed Per Minute and Feed Per Revolution ..................................849
10.13.4 Acceleration/Deceleration after Interpolation ......................................................849
10.13.5 Override................................................................................................................851
10.13.6 Reference Position Return....................................................................................853
10.13.7 FS10/11 Format Command ..................................................................................854
10.13.8 Multi Spindle Control...........................................................................................856
10.13.9 Rigid Tapping with Spindle of Another Path (T Series (2-ptah Control)) ...........856
10.13.10 Optimum Acceleration/Deceleration for Rigid Tapping ......................................860
10.13.11 Notes.....................................................................................................................866
10.13.12 Diagnosis Display.................................................................................................867
10.13.13 Command Format.................................................................................................870
10.13.14 Position Control Loop Gain Parameter Switching ...............................................874
10.13.15 Signal....................................................................................................................875
10.13.15.1 Signals for the rigid tapping function ........................................................... 875
c-5
10.13.15.2 Signals related to S code output.................................................................... 875

10.13.15.3 Signals related to gear switching .................................................................. 876
10.13.15.4 Signals related to the addition of multi spindle control ................................ 877
10.13.15.5 Notes on interface with the PMC.................................................................. 880
10.13.16 Timing Charts for Rigid Tapping Specification ...................................................882
10.13.16.1 When M29 is specified before G84/G74 ...................................................... 883
10.13.16.2 M29 and G84/G74 are specified in the same block ...................................... 887
10.13.16.3 Specifying G84/G74 for rigid tapping by parameters................................... 891
10.13.16.4 When M29 is specified before G84/G88 ...................................................... 895
10.13.16.5 M29 and G84/G88 are specified in the same block ...................................... 897
10.13.16.6 Specifying G84/G88 for rigid tapping by parameters................................... 899
10.13.16.7 Timing of the M code for unclamping (T series).......................................... 901
10.13.16.8 Timing to cancel rigid tapping mode ............................................................ 901
10.13.17 Parameter..............................................................................................................902
10.13.18 Notes.....................................................................................................................923
10.14 SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL.................................................... 927
10.15 SPINDLE ORIENTATION .......................................................................... 945
10.16 SPINDLE OUTPUT SWITCHING .............................................................. 948
10.17 SIMPLE SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL (M SERIES) ................. 949
10.18 SPINDLE SPEED FLUCTUATION DETECTION (T SERIES) ................... 960
10.19 SPINDLE CONTROL WITH SERVO MOTOR ........................................... 970
10.19.1 Spindle Control with Servo Motor .......................................................................972
10.19.2 Spindle Indexing Function ...................................................................................996
10.19.3 Rigid Tapping with Servo Motor .......................................................................1002
10.19.4 Feed per Revolution ...........................................................................................1007
10.19.5 Spindle Output Control with PMC.....................................................................1008
Volume 2 of 2
11 TOOL FUNCTIONS ........................................................................... 1009
11.1 TOOL FUNCTIONS OF T SERIES.......................................................... 1009
11.1.1 Tool Offset .........................................................................................................1010
11.1.2 Tool Geometry Offset and Tool Wear Offset.....................................................1010
11.1.3 Offset ..................................................................................................................1011
11.1.4 Automatic Alteration of Tool Position Compensation (T Function)..................1017
11.2 TOOL FUNCTIONS OF M SERIES ......................................................... 1021
11.2.1 Tool Compensation Memory..............................................................................1022
11.3 TOOL COMPENSATION......................................................................... 1027
11.3.1 Cutter Compensation (M Series) and Tool Nose Radius Compensation
(T Series) ............................................................................................................1027
11.3.2 Tool Length Compensation ................................................................................1035
11.3.3 Tool Length Compensation Shift Types.............................................................1038
11.4 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT.................................................................... 1042
12 PROGRAM COMMAND .................................................................... 1059
12.1 DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING/POCKET CALCULATOR TYPE
DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING ........................................................ 1059
12.2 G CODE SYSTEM................................................................................... 1061
12.2.1 G Code List in the Lathe System........................................................................1061
12.2.2 G Code List in the Machining Center System....................................................1063
12.3 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION ............................................................... 1067
c-6
12.4 PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE / NUMBER OF REGISTERABLE

PROGRAMS............................................................................................ 1069
12.5 INCH/METRIC CONVERSION ................................................................ 1070
12.6 CUSTOM MACRO................................................................................... 1075
12.6.1 Custom Macro ....................................................................................................1075
12.6.2 Interruption Type Custom Macro.......................................................................1093
12.7 CANNED CYCLE FOR DRILLING........................................................... 1096
12.8 CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES) / MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNED
CYCLE (T SERIES) ................................................................................. 1111
12.9 IN-FEED CONTROL (FOR GRINDING MACHINE) (M SERIES) ............ 1120
12.10 CANNED GRINDING CYCLE (FOR GRINDING MACHINE)................... 1121
12.11 MIRROR IMAGE FOR DOUBLE TURRET (T SERIES) .......................... 1126
12.12 INDEX TABLE INDEXING (M SERIES)................................................... 1128
12.13 SCALING (M SERIES) ............................................................................ 1138
12.14 COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION...................................................... 1145
12.15 MACRO COMPILER/MACRO EXECUTER ............................................. 1146
12.16 OPTIONAL ANGLE CHAMFERING AND CORNER ROUNDING
(M SERIES) ............................................................................................. 1147
12.17 CHAMFERING AND CORNER ROUNDING (T SERIES)........................ 1148
12.18 DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSIONS PROGRAMMING (T SERIES) ......... 1150
12.19 PATTERN DATA INPUT.......................................................................... 1152
13 DISPLAY/SET/EDIT .......................................................................... 1166
13.1 DISPLAY/SET.......................................................................................... 1166
13.1.1 Run Hour and Parts Count Display ....................................................................1166
13.1.2 Software Operator's Panel ..................................................................................1170
13.1.3 8-Level Data Protection Function ......................................................................1178
13.1.4 Touch Panel Control...........................................................................................1183
13.1.5 External Touch Panel Interface ..........................................................................1188
13.1.6 Parameter Check Sum Function .........................................................................1191
13.1.7 Touch Panel Check Signal .................................................................................1201
13.1.8 CNC Screen Dual Display..................................................................................1203
13.1.9 Speed Display Function of a Milling Tool with Servo Motor............................1205
13.1.10 Screen Switching by Mode.................................................................................1208
13.1.11 Screen Switching at Path Switching...................................................................1211
13.1.12 Screen erasure function and automatic screen erasure function .........................1212
13.1.13 Screen Hard Copy Function ...............................................................................1214
13.2 EDIT ........................................................................................................ 1217
13.2.1 Memory Protection Keys....................................................................................1217
13.2.2 Memory Protection Signal For CNC Parameter.................................................1218
13.2.3 MDI Key Setting ................................................................................................1219
13.2.4 Compact-Type MDI Key Input Function ...........................................................1220
13.3 TWO PATH DISPLAY AND EDIT ............................................................ 1222
13.3.1 Two Path Display ...............................................................................................1222
13.3.2 Simultaneous Two Path Program Editing ..........................................................1224
13.4 MACHINE OPERATION MENU............................................................... 1228
13.4.1 Overview ............................................................................................................1228
13.4.2 Explanation.........................................................................................................1228
13.4.3 Parameter............................................................................................................1233
13.4.4 Signal..................................................................................................................1234
13.4.5 Limitation ...........................................................................................................1234
c-7
13.5 MACHINE OPERATION MENU TOOL.................................................... 1235

13.5.1 Overview ............................................................................................................1235
13.5.2 Explanation.........................................................................................................1235
14 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA ............................................................... 1243

14.1 READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE .......................................................... 1243
14.2 EXTERNAL I/O DEVICE CONTROL ....................................................... 1254
15 MEASUREMENT............................................................................... 1259
15.1 TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES) ...................................... 1259
15.2 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES) /
AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET (T SERIES) .............................................. 1260
15.3 SKIP FUNCTION ..................................................................................... 1267
15.3.1 Skip Function .....................................................................................................1267
15.3.2 High-speed Skip Signal ......................................................................................1274
15.3.3 Multi-step Skip ...................................................................................................1279
15.3.4 Torque Limit Skip Function ...............................................................................1286
15.4 COMPENSATION VALUE INPUT ........................................................... 1292
15.4.1 Input of tool offset value measured (T Series) ...................................................1292
15.4.2 Input of Tool Offset Value Measured B (T Series) ............................................1293
15.4.3 Workpiece Origin Offset Measurement Value Direct Input...............................1306
16 PMC CONTROL FUNCTION............................................................. 1309

16.1 PMC AXIS CONTROL ............................................................................. 1309
16.1.1 PMC Axis Control..............................................................................................1309
16.2 EXTERNAL DATA INPUT........................................................................ 1377
16.3 EXTENDED EXTERNAL MACHINE ZERO POINT SHIFT...................... 1390
16.4 EXTERNAL WORKPIECE NUMBER SEARCH....................................... 1393
16.5 EXTERNAL KEY INPUT .......................................................................... 1395
16.6 ONE TOUCH MACRO CALL ................................................................... 1400
17 EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION .............................................. 1407
17.1 EMBEDDED ETHERNET PORT AND PCMCIA ETHERNET CARD....... 1407
17.2 SETTING UP THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION ...................... 1408
17.2.1 Setting of the FOCAS2/Ethernet Function.........................................................1408
17.2.1.1 Operation on the FOCAS2/Ethernet setting screen ....................................... 1408
17.2.1.2 Example of setting the FOCAS2/Ethernet function....................................... 1411
17.2.2 Setting of the FTP File Transfer Function..........................................................1411
17.2.2.1 Operation on the FTP file transfer setting screen .......................................... 1412
17.2.2.2 Related NC parameters .................................................................................. 1414
17.2.2.3 Example of setting the FTP file transfer function.......................................... 1416
17.2.3 Setting Up the DNS/DHCP Function .................................................................1416
17.2.3.1 Setting up DNS.............................................................................................. 1416
17.2.3.2 Setting up DHCP ........................................................................................... 1417
17.2.3.3 Related NC parameters .................................................................................. 1420
17.3 SWITCHING BETWEEN THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET DEVICES ....... 1421
17.4 RESTART OF THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET ........................................ 1421
17.5 MAINTENANCE SCREEN FOR EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION . 1422
17.6 LOG SCREEN OF THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION .............. 1426
18 DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION ................................................................... 1429
18.1 SERVO WARNING INTERFACE............................................................. 1429
c-8
18.2 SPINDLE WARNING INTERFACE.......................................................... 1431

18.3 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS........................................................................... 1433
18.3.1 Outline ................................................................................................................1433
18.3.2 Trouble diagnosis guidance screen.....................................................................1435
18.3.3 Trouble diagnosis monitor screen ......................................................................1437
18.3.4 Trouble diagnosis parameter screen ...................................................................1441
18.3.5 Trouble diagnosis graphic screen .......................................................................1443
18.3.6 Trouble forecast level setting screen (only for servo axis).................................1444
18.3.7 Parameter............................................................................................................1446
18.3.8 Signal..................................................................................................................1447
18.3.9 Restrictions.........................................................................................................1447
18.4 MACHINE ALARM DIAGNOSIS .............................................................. 1448
18.4.1 Outline ................................................................................................................1448
18.4.2 Kind of additional alarm and operator message .................................................1448
18.4.3 Available diagnosis number ...............................................................................1448
18.4.4 Environment for making trouble diagnosis message..........................................1449
18.4.5 Guidance table for machine alarm diagnosis......................................................1450
18.4.5.1 Install ............................................................................................................. 1450
18.4.5.2 Uninstall......................................................................................................... 1450
18.4.5.3 Making a file to input trouble diagnosis messages ........................................ 1451
18.4.5.4 Structure of the file to input trouble diagnosis messages .............................. 1452
18.4.6 Making trouble diagnosis messages ...................................................................1453
18.4.6.1 Inputting guidance data.................................................................................. 1454
18.4.6.2 Checking input data ....................................................................................... 1456
18.4.6.3 Making a memory card format file ................................................................ 1457
18.4.6.4 Jump from CNC guidance table to MTB’s guidance table............................ 1458
18.4.7 Making messages for multi-languages ...............................................................1459
18.4.7.1 Making sheets for multi-languages................................................................ 1459
18.4.7.2 Inputting data in the sheet for multi-languages.............................................. 1461
18.4.8 Notice .................................................................................................................1461
18.4.9 Translating data used with the former series(Series 0i /0i Mate-B/C,
Series 16i /18i /21i-B) ........................................................................................1461
APPENDIX
A INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC......................................... 1465
A.1 LIST OF ADDRESSES ............................................................................ 1465
A.2 LIST OF SIGNALS................................................................................... 1502
A.2.1 List of Signals (In Order of Functions) ..............................................................1502
A.2.2 List of Signals (In Order of Symbols) ................................................................1523
A.2.3 List of Signals (In Order of Addresses)..............................................................1541
B DIFFERENCES FROM Series 0i-C .................................................. 1560

B.1 SETTING UNIT........................................................................................ 1561
B.1.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1561
B.1.2 Differences in Signals ........................................................................................1561
B.1.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1561
B.2 STORED PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION .......................................... 1562
B.3 WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM .................................................. 1563
c-9

B.4 LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEM ............................................................ 1564
B.5 AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL......................................................... 1565
B.6 ARBITRARY ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL .............................................. 1571
B.7 STORED STROKE CHECK..................................................................... 1572
B.8 CHUCK/TAIL STOCK BARRIER (T SERIES).......................................... 1574
B.9 MACHINING CONDITION SELECTION FUNCTION .............................. 1574
B.10 MANUAL HANDLE FEED........................................................................ 1576
B.11 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN......................................... 1577
B.12 RESET AND REWIND............................................................................. 1580
B.13 SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING (M SERIES) .................................. 1581
B.14 MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON AND OFF....................................................... 1581
B.15 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION................................................................. 1583
B.16 THREADING CYCLE RETRACT (CANNED CUTTING CYCLE/
MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNED CUTTING CYCLE) (T SERIES)....... 1583
c-10
B.17 HELICAL INTERPOLATION .................................................................... 1584
B.18 POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION (T SERIES) .......................... 1585
B.19 ADVANCED PREVIEW CONTROL (T SERIES)/AI ADVANCED
PREVIEW CONTROL (M SERIES) / AI CONTOUR CONTROL
(M SERIES) ............................................................................................. 1587
B.20 WAITING M CODES (T SERIES (2-PATH CONTROL)) ......................... 1590
B.21 PATH INTERFERENCE CHECK (T SERIES (2-PATH CONTROL))....... 1591
B.22 SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL AND COMPOSITE CONTROL
(T SERIES (2-PATH CONTROL)) ........................................................... 1592
B.23 SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL (T SERIES (2-PATH CONTROL)) ........... 1596
B.24 AUXILIARY FUNCTION/2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION ........................... 1598
B.25 SERIAL/ANALOG SPINDLE CONTROL ................................................. 1599
B.26 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL ........................................... 1600
B.27 SPINDLE POSITIONING (T SERIES) ..................................................... 1601
B.28 Cs CONTOUR CONTROL....................................................................... 1602
c-11

B.29 MULTI-SPINDLE CONTROL ................................................................... 1603
B.30 TOOL FUNCTIONS ................................................................................. 1604
B.31 TOOL COMPENSATION MEMORY........................................................ 1606
B.32 Y AXIS OFFSET (T SERIES) .................................................................. 1607
B.33 CUTTER COMPENSATION/TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION .. 1608
B.34 CUSTOM MACRO................................................................................... 1614
B.34.4 Miscellaneous.....................................................................................................1616
B.35 INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO............................................. 1616
B.36 CANNED CYCLE FOR DRILLING........................................................... 1617
B.37 CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES)/MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNED
CYCLE (T SERIES) ................................................................................. 1619
B.38 CANNED GRINDING CYCLE.................................................................. 1620
B.39 MULTIPLE RESPECTIVE CANNED CYCLE FOR TURNING
(T SERIES) .............................................................................................. 1621
B.40 OPTIONAL ANGLE CHAMFERING AND CORNER ROUNDING
(M SERIES) ............................................................................................. 1625
c-12
B.41 CHAMFERING AND CORNER ROUNDING (T SERIES)........................ 1626
B.42 DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSIONS PROGRAMMING (T SERIES) ......... 1627
B.43 RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT DISPLAY .......................................... 1627
B.44 SCREEN ERASURE FUNCTION AND AUTOMATIC SCREEN
ERASURE FUNCTION ............................................................................ 1628
B.45 MEMORY PROTECTION SIGNAL FOR CNC PARAMETER.................. 1629
B.46 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES)/
AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET (T SERIES) .............................................. 1630
B.46.1 Automatic Tool Length Measurement (M Series)..............................................1630
B.46.1.1 Differences in Specifications ......................................................................... 1630
B.46.1.2 Differences in Signals.................................................................................... 1631
B.46.1.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display .................................................................. 1631
B.46.2 Automatic Tool Offset (T Series).......................................................................1631
B.46.2.1 Differences in Specifications ......................................................................... 1631
B.46.2.2 Differences in Signals.................................................................................... 1632
B.46.2.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display .................................................................. 1632
B.47 SKIP FUNCTION ..................................................................................... 1633
B.48 INPUT OF TOOL OFFSET VALUE MEASURED B (T SERIES) ............. 1635
B.49 PMC AXIS CONTROL ............................................................................. 1636
B.50 EXTERNAL DATA INPUT........................................................................ 1642
B.51 SEQUENCE NUMBER SEARCH ............................................................ 1645
B.52 IN-POSITION CHECK ............................................................................. 1645
c-13

B.53 DATA SERVER FUNCTION .................................................................... 1646
B.54 POWER MATE CNC MANAGER ............................................................ 1647
B.55 PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER INPUT (G10) ..................................... 1647
B.56 EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAM CALL (M198)............................................. 1648
c-14
B-64303EN-1/02 11.TOOL FUNCTIONS
11 TOOL FUNCTIONS
Chapter 11, "TOOL FUNCTIONS", consists of the following sections:
11.1 TOOL FUNCTIONS OF LATHE SYSTEM..................................................................................1009

11.2 TOOL FUNCTIONS OF MACHINING CENTER SYSTEM .......................................................1021
11.3 TOOL COMPENSATION..............................................................................................................1027
11.4 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT.......................................................................................................1042
11.1 TOOL FUNCTIONS OF T SERIES

T
Overview
When address T followed by a numeric value is specified, the code signal and strobe signal are sent to the
machine and are used to select a tool on the machine side. Just one T code can be specified in a block.
When a move command and T code are specified within the same block, these commands are executed in
one of the following two ways:
(1) The move command and tool function command are started at the same time.
(2) After the move command ends, the tool function command is started.
Explanation
A numeric value following the T code specifies selection of a tool. Part of the numeric value is also
used as a tool offset number for specifying an offset value such as a tool offset value. Tools are selected
according to the specification method and parameter setting as follows:
Meaning of T code(*1) Parameter setting and offset No.

LGN(No.5002#1)=0 LGN(No.5002#1)=1 specification method(*2)
TXXXXXXXX TXXXXXXXX Tool wear offset No. is specified by
↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ lowest 1 digit of T code.
Tool selection Tool geometry/ Tool selection Tool wear offset
When parameter No. 5028 is set to 1
tool wear offset Tool geometry offset
↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ lowest 2 digits of T code.
↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ lowest 3 digits of T code
*1 The maximum number of digits of the T code can be specified in parameter No. 3032. (1 to 8 digits)
*2 If 0 is set in parameter No. 5028, the length of the offset number specified in the T code depends on the number of
tool offsets.
Example: When the number of tool offsets ranges from 1 to 9: Lowest 1 digit
When the number of tool offsets ranges from 10 to 99: Lowest 2 digits
When the number of tool offsets ranges from 100 to 200: Lowest 3 digits
- 1009 -
11.TOOL FUNCTIONS B-64303EN-1/02
11.1.1 Tool Offset

T
Overview
Tool offset is used to compensate for the difference when the tool actually used differs from the imagined
tool used in programming (usually, standard tool).
Standard tool
Actual tool
Offset amount
on X axis
Offset amount on Z axis
Tool offset
11.1.2 Tool Geometry Offset and Tool Wear Offset

T
Overview
Tool geometry offset and tool wear offset are possible to divide the tool offset to the tool geometry offset
for compensating the tool shape or tool mounting position and the tool wear offset for compensating the
tool nose wear. Total value of tool geometry offset value and tool wear offset value is set as the tool
wear offset value without option.
Point on the program Point on the program
Imaginary tool
X axis
geometry Offset
offset amount
value on X axis
X axis
wear Actual
offset tool
value
Z axis Z axis
wear geometry Offset
offset offset amount
value value on Z axis
If tool geometry compensation and tool wear compensation are distinguished

from each other (left) and if they are not (right)
- 1010 -
11.1.3 Offset
T
Explanation
- Compensation methods
Two methods are available to geometry compensation and wear compensation, compensation with tool
movement and compensation with coordinate shift. Which compensation method to select can be
specified with parameters LWT (No. 5002#2) and LGT (No. 5002#4). When the tool geometry/wear
compensation is not enabled (bit 6 (NGW) of parameter No. 8136 is 1), however, compensation with tool
movement is selected unconditionally.
Parameter
Parameter Compensation
NGW"(No.8136#6) element LWT="0" LWT="1" LWT="0" LWT="1"
LGT="0" LGT="0" LGT="1" LGT="1"
Wear and geometry
"1" Tool movement
not distinguished
Wear Tool movement Coordinate Tool movement Coordinate
compensation shift shift
"0"
Geometry Coordinate Coordinate Tool movement Tool movement
compensation shift shift
- Compensation with tool movement

The tool path is offset by the X, Y, and Z tool offset values for the programmed path. The tool offset
distance corresponding to the number specified by the T code is added to or subtracted from the end
position of each programmed block.
The vector with tool offset X, Y, and Z is called the offset vector. Compensation is the same as the
offset vector.
Tool path after offset
This move command block

contains the offset command
with T code
Programmed path
Compensation by tool offset X, Z (offset vector)
Offset operation with tool movement
NOTE
1 When G50 X_Z_T_ ; is specified, the tool is not moved.
The coordinate system in which the coordinate value of the tool position is (X,Z) is
set. The tool position is obtained by subtracting the offset value corresponding
to the tool offset number specified in the T code.
2 The G codes in the 00 group other than G50 must not be specified in the same
block as that containing a T code. Otherwise, alarm PS0245 is issued.
- Compensation with coordinate shift

The work coordinate system is shifted by the X, Y, and Z tool offset amounts. Namely, the offset
amount corresponding to the number designated with the T code is added to or subtracted from the
absolute coordinates.
- 1011 -
The movement to this point is

by an absolute command.
Programmed path after workpiece

coordinate system shift
Tool path after offset

Offset amount by offset in
X, Z axis (offset vector)
Programmed path before
work coordinate system shift
Offset operation with coordinate shift
- Starting and canceling offset by specifying a T code

Specifying an tool offset number with a T code means to select the tool offset value corresponding to it
and to start offset. Specifying 0 as a tool offset number means to cancel offset.
For offset with tool movement, whether to start or cancel the offset can be specified with parameter LWN
(No. 5002#6).
For compensation with coordinate shift, the offset is started and canceled when a T code is specified.
For the cancellation of geometry compensation, its operation can be selected with LGC (No. 5002#5).
Compensation method LWM (No.5002#6)=0 LWM (No.5002#6)=1

Tool movement When a T code is specified When an axial movement is specified
When a T code is specified
Coordinate shift
(Note that geometry compensation can be canceled only if LGC (No. 5002#5) = 1.)
- Canceling offset with reset

Tool offset is canceled under one of the following conditions:
<1> The power to the CNC is turned off and turned back on
<2> The reset button on the MDI unit is pressed
<3> A reset signal is input from the machine to the CNC
In cases <2> and <3> above, it is possible to select a cancel operation using parameters LVC (No.
5006#3) and TGC (No. 5003#7).
Parameter
Compensation method LVC=0 LVC=1 LVC=0 LVC=1
TGC=0 TGC=0 TGC=1 TGC=1
Wear compensation x Canceled. x o
Tool
Geometry compensation (When axial movement is (When axial movement
movement
specified) is specified)
Coordinate Wear compensation x Canceled. x o
shift Geometry compensation x x o o
o: Canceled.
x: Not canceled.
Notes and restrictions

• Helical interpolation (G02, G03)
Tool position offset cannot be specified in a block in which helical interpolation is used.
• Workpiece coordinate system preset (G50.3)

Performing workpiece coordinate system preset causes tool position offset with tool movement to be
canceled; this does not cause tool position offset with coordinate shift to be canceled.
- 1012 -
• Machine coordinate system setting (G53), reference position return (G28), second, third, and fourth
reference position return (G30), and manual reference position return
Basically, before performing these commands or operations, cancel tool position offset. These
operations do not cause tool position offset to be canceled. The following actions take place:
When the command or operation is When the next axial movement command
specified is specified
Tool movement The tool offset value is temporarily canceled. The tool offset value is reflected.
Coordinate shift Coordinates with the tool offset value Coordinates with the tool offset value
reflected are assumed. reflected are assumed.
Do not specify the G code and T code in the same block. Otherwise, alarm PS0245 is issued.
Parameter
3032 Allowable number of digits for the T code
[Input type] Parameter input

[Data type] Byte path
[Valid data range] 1 to 8
Set the allowable numbers of digits for the T code.
When 0 is set, the allowable number of digits is assumed to be 8.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DAP DRP
3129

[Data type] Bit path
#0 DRP For relative coordinate display:

0: The actual position considering a tool offset (tool movement) is displayed.
1: The programmed position excluding a tool offset (tool movement) is displayed.
#1 DAP For absolute coordinate display:

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
WNP LWM LGC LGT LWT LGN
5002

#1 LGN Geometry offset number of tool offset

0: Is the same as wear offset number
1: Specifies the geometry offset number by the tool selection number
NOTE
This parameter is valid when tool geometry/wear compensation is
enabled (bit 6 (NGW) of parameter No. 8136 is 0).
- 1013 -
#2 LWT Tool wear compensation is performed by:

0: Moving the tool.
1: Shifting the coordinate system.
NOTE
#4 LGT Tool geometry compensation

0: Compensated by the shift of the coordinate system
1: Compensated by the tool movement
NOTE
#5 LGC When tool geometry compensation is based on coordinate shifting, the tool geometry
offset is:
0: Not canceled by a command with offset number 0.
1: Canceled by a command with offset number 0.
NOTE
#6 LWM Tool offset operation based on tool movement is performed:

0: In a block where a T code is specified.
1: Together with a command for movement along an axis.
#7 WNP Imaginary tool tip number used for tool nose radius compensation, when the
geometry/wear compensation function is equipped, is the number specified by:
0: Geometry offset number
1: Wear offset number
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
TGC
5003

#7 TGC A tool geometry offset based on a coordinate shift is:

0: Not canceled by reset.
1: Canceled by reset.
NOTE
- 1014 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
ORC
5004

#1 ORC The setting of a tool offset value is corrected as:

0: Diameter value
1: Radius value
NOTE
This parameter is valid only for an axis based on diameter
specification. For an axis based on radius specification, specify a
radius value, regardless of the setting of this parameter.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
LVC
5006

[Data type] Bit
#3 LVC A tool offset (geometry/wear) based on a tool movement and wear offset based on a
coordinate shift are:
0: Not canceled by reset.
1: Canceled by reset.
5024 Number of tool compensation values
NOTE
When this parameter is set, the power must be turned off before
operation is continued.

[Data type] Word path
[Valid data range] 0 to number of tool compensation values
Set the maximum allowable number of tool compensation values used for each path.
Ensure that the total number of values set in parameter No. 5024 for the individual paths
is within the number of compensation values usable in the entire system.
If the total number of values set in parameter No. 5024 for the individual paths exceeds
the number of compensation values usable in the entire system, or 0 is set in parameter
No. 5024 for all paths, the number of compensation values usable for each path is a value
obtained by dividing the number of compensation values usable in the entire system by
the number of paths.
Tool compensation values as many as the number of compensation values used for each
path are displayed on the screen. If tool compensation numbers more than the number of
compensation values usable for each path are specified, an alarm is issued.
For example, 200 tool compensation sets are used, 120 sets may be allocated to path 1
and 80 sets to path 2. All of 200 sets need not be used.
- 1015 -
Number of digits of an offset number used with a T code command

5028

Specify the number of digits of a T code portion that is used for a tool offset number
(wear offset number when the tool geometry/wear compensation function is used).
When 0 is set, the number of digits is determined by the number of tool compensation
values.
When the number of tool compensation values is 1 to 9: Lower 1 digit
When the number of tool compensation values is 10 to 99: Lower 2 digits
When the number of tool compensation values is 100 to 200: Lower 3 digits
Example :
When an offset number is specified using the lower 2 digits of a T code, set 2 in
parameter No. 5028.
Txxxxxx yy
xxxxxx : Tool selection
yy : Tool offset number
NOTE
A value longer than the setting of parameter No. 3032 (allowable
number of digits of a T code) cannot be set.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
OWD
5040

#0 OWD In radius programming (bit 1 (ORC) of parameter No. 5004 is set to 1),
0: Tool offset values of both geometry compensation and wear compensation are
specified by radius.
1: Tool offset value of geometry compensation is specified by radius and tool offset
value of wear compensation is specified by diameter, for an axis of diameter
programming.
NOTE
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8136 NGW NDO
NOTE
When at least one of these parameters is set, the power must be
turned off before operation is continued.

[Data type] Bit
- 1016 -
#5 NDO Tool offset pairs 64-pairs (T series 1-path system) / 128-pairs (T series 2-path system) is:
0: Used.
1: Not Used.
NOTE
When the option of tool compensation count 99 (T series 1-path
system) / 200 (T series 2-path system) is added, this parameter
becomes invalid in T series. (Tool compensation count is fixed to 99
(T series 1-path system) / 200 (T series 2-path system).)
#6 NGW Tool geometry/wear compensation (T series) is:

0: Used.
1: Not Used.
Alarm and message

Number Message Description
PS0245 T-CODE NOT ALLOWED IN THIS The specified G code (G10, G04, G28, G29, G30, G50, or
BLOCK G53) cannot be used in the same block as a T code .
Modify the program.
11.1.4 Automatic Alteration of Tool Position Compensation (T

Function)
Overview
After cutting tools are changed manually, entering the tool number of a new tool enables the previous tool
position compensation values (tool geometry and wear compensation) to be changed to those for the new
tool.
NOTE
Automatic alteration of tool position compensation (T function) is optional
function.
Details
After changing cutting tools manually, place the CNC in the JOG or HNDL (INC), or REF mode, enter
the tool number of a new tool as a manual tool compensation tool number signal (MTLN<Gn068,
Gn069> or MT8N<Gn525-Gn528>) from the PMC, and set the compensation command signal
MTLC<Gn067.0> to "1". The CNC will read the tool number and change the previous tool position
compensation values to those for the specified tool. Upon completion of the compensation value change,
the compensation completion signal MTLA<Fn061.5> is output.
- 1017 -
Manual tool
change
Manual tool
compensation tool Tool number (4 or 8 BCD digits)
number signal
MTLN(PMC→CNC)
<Gn068,Gn069>
<Gn525-Gn528>
Compensation command
signal
MTLC(PMC→CNC)
<Gn067.0>
Compensation
completion signal
MTLA(CNC®PMC)
<Fn061.5>
Changing compensation values (CNC)
Four BCD digits are used to specify the manual tool compensation tool number MTLN<Gn068, Gn069>.
If it is necessary to specify the manual tool compensation tool number with a number exceeding 4 digits,
use MT8N<Gn525-Gn528> to specify it with 8 BCD digits. Which size to use can be selected using bit
7 (MTL8D) of parameter No. 11400. The same rules as for the T code command in automatic operation
are applied in specifying how many digits, 4 or 8, to use as the geometry or wear compensation numbers
(parameter No.5028).
This function is available only if the CNC is in the JOG, HNDL, or REF mode.
In any other operation mode, during automatic operation (running, pause, or stop), or in the tool-nose
radius compensation mode, (G41/G42 mode), setting the compensation command signal MTLC to 1 does
not enable compensation.
If compensation is unavailable, the compensation completion signal MTLA does not become 1. Instead
the compensation uncompleted signal MTLANG becomes 1. The reason for MTLANG = 1 can be
known from diagnosis display No. 560.
Manual tool
change
Manual tool
compensation tool Tool number (4 or 8 BCD digits)
number signal
MTLN(PMC→CNC)
<Gn068,Gn069>
C<Gn525-Gn528>
Compensation command
signal
MTLC(PMC→CNC)
<Gn067.0>
Compensation uncompleted
signal
MTLANG(CNC→PMC)
<Fn061.5>
Compensation
completion signal
MTLA(CNC®PMC)
<Fn061.4>
Compensation change is impossible (CNC)
Signal
Manual tool compensation tool number signal (4 digits) MTLN00 to
MTLN15<Gn068, Gn069>
[Classification] Input signal
- 1018 -
[Function] Specifies a tool number for manual tool compensation, using 4 BCD digits.
Manual tool compensation tool number signal (8 digits) MT8N00 to

MT8N31<Gn525-Gn528>
[Function] Specifies a tool number for manual tool compensation, using 8 BCD digits.
Manual tool compensation command number MTLC<Gn067.0>

[Function] Requests to perform manual tool compensation. Setting this signal from 0 to 1 causes
manual tool compensation to be performed. Re-set it to 0 when the compensation
completion signal becomes = 1.
Manual tool compensation completion signal MTLA<Fn061.5>

[Classification] Output signal
[Function] Informs that manual tool compensation is completed. This signal becomes 1 when a
compensation value is changed in manual tool compensation. It becomes 0 when the
compensation command signal MTLC becomes 0.
Manual tool compensation uncompleted signal MTLANG<Fn061.4>

[Function] Informs that manual tool compensation is uncompleted. This signal becomes 1 if an
attempt to perform manual tool compensation fails in changing a compensation value for
any reason. It becomes 0 when the compensation command signal MTLC becomes 0.
The reason for the failure of the attempt can be known from diagnosis display No. 560.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn068 MTL07 MTL06 MTL05 MTL04 MTL03 MTL02 MTL01 MTL00
Gn069 MTL15 MTL14 MTL13 MTL12 MTL11 MTL10 MTL09 MTL08
Gn525 MT8N07 MT8N06 MT8N05 MT8N04 MT8N03 MT8N02 MT8N01 MT8N00
Gn067 MTLC
Fn061 MTLA MTLANG
Diagnosis display
0560 Manual tool compensation status number
[Data type] Byte

[Unit of data] None
The following numbers are used to indicate whether compensation is completed or the
reason for uncompleted compensation (if occur).
0: Manual tool compensation is completed normally.
- 1019 -
1: The T code-specified data has exceeded the permissible range.

2: The offset value is out of range.
3: The offset number is out of range.
4: The CNC is undergoing automatic operation or axis movement.
5: The CNC is in the tool-nose radius compensation mode.
6: The CNC is in a mode other than the JOG, HNDL (INC), or REF mode.
7: A CNC parameter has specified an invalid number.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
MTL8D
11400

#0 MTL8D The number of digits in the T code used for automatic change of tool position
compensation is specified as follows:
0: 4 digits (Existing DI signals Gn068 and Gn069 are used.)
1: 8 digits (The DI signals Gn525 - Gn528 are used.)
Notes
If the CNC is in the following conditions, setting the compensation command signal MTLC to 1 cannot
change compensation values, and therefore, the compensation uncompleted signal MTLANG becomes 1.
1) The CNC is in a mode other than the JOG, HNDL (INC), or REF mode.
2) The CNC is at an emergency stop.
3) The reset button on the MDI unit is held pressed.
4) A reset signal is input on the machine side.
5) The CNC is in an alarm condition.
6) The CNC is undergoing automatic operation (start, pause, or stop).
7) The CNC is in the tool-noose radius compensation mode (G41/G42 mode).
With this function, shifted coordinate systems are returned to the previous state by the first T code in the
next session of automatic operation, and axis movement occurs by the amount of canceled shifting, thus
resuming the position and coordinate systems of the inherent movement type.
Example:
If the amounts of wear compensation are: T1 = 0.1, T2 = 0.2, and T3 = 0.4
1) The state that T1 compensation is applied during automatic operation (compensation of 0.1 axis
movement type):
2) The coordinate system is shifted by -0.1 (= T2 - T1) from the state mentioned in step 1 when
tool T2 is selected in manual tool compensation.
3) When compensation T3 is applied again during automatic operation, the coordinate system is
shifted by 0.2 (= T3 - T2), that is, totally by 0.3. The coordinate system, which has been
shifted by -0.1 in step 2, is shifted back to the previous state.
Once the T3 compensation command has been executed, the same position and coordinate system as
would be when the T3 compensation command is issued in the T1 compensation state are resumed.
When manual tool compensation ends properly, the T code modal changes to one where manual tool
compensation was carried out (the tool function code signals <Fn026 to Fn029> also change).
- 1020 -
11.2 TOOL FUNCTIONS OF M SERIES

M
Overview
Selection of tools can be done by commanding tool numbers with up to an 8-digit numeral after address
T.
Signal
Refer to “AUXILIARY FUNCTION/2ND AUXILIARY
FUNCTION”
Parameter
3032 Allowable number of digits for the T code

Set the allowable numbers of digits for the T code.
When 0 is set, the allowable number of digits is assumed to be 8.
Alarm and message

PS0155 ILLEGAL T-CODE COMMAND In a machining program, the T code specified in the same block as
M06 does not correspond to the group in current use. Modify the
program.
PS0245 T-CODE NOT ALLOWED IN The specified G code (G10, G04, G28, G29, G30, G50, or G53)
THIS BLOCK cannot be used in the same block as a T code . Modify the program.
NOTE
NOTE
When a move command and a tool function are specified in the same block, the
commands are executed in one of the following two ways:
(i) Simultaneous execution of the move command and tool function
commands.
(ii) Executing tool function commands upon completion of move command
execution.
The selection of either (i) or (ii) depends on the sequence program of PMC.
Reference item
Manual name Item name
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64304EN) Tool selection command
CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (This Auxiliary function
manual)
- 1021 -
11.2.1 Tool Compensation Memory

M
Overview
Tool compensation values include geometry compensation values and wear compensation values. (Fig.
11.2.1(a) Geometric compensation and wear compensation)
Tool compensation values can also be used without discriminating between geometry and wear
compensation values.
Reference Reference
position position
Geometry Tool
compensation compensation
value value
Wear Compensation value
(a) Geometry and wear (b) Geometry and were compensation

compensation are discriminated are not discriminated
Fig. 11.2 (a) Geometric compensation and wear compensation
Tool compensation values can be entered into CNC memory from the MDI or from a program.
A tool compensation value is selected from the CNC memory when the corresponding code is specified
after address H or D in a program.
The value is used for tool length compensation, cutter compensation, or the tool offset.
- Unit of range of tool compensation value

A tool offset unit and valid data range can be chosen from the following by setting the parameters:
Unit of range of tool compensation value (metric input)

OFC OFA Unit Range
0 1 0.01mm ±9999.99mm
0 0 0.001mm ±9999.999mm
1 0 0.0001mm ±9999.9999mm
Unit of range of tool compensation value (inch input)

OFC OFA Unit Range
0 1 0.001inch ±999.999inch
0 0 0.0001inch ±999.9999inch
1 0 0.00001inch ±999.99999inch
- Tool compensation memory

One of the tool compensation memory A/C can be selected according to the configuration of offset
amount. (parameter NGW(No.8136#6))
(1) Tool compensation memory A

(parameter NGW(No.8136#6)="1")
There is no difference between geometry compensation memory and wear compensation memory in
tool compensation memory A. Therefore, amount of geometry offset and wear offset together is set
as the offset memory. There is also no differences between cutter compensation (D code) and tool
length compensation (H code).
- 1022 -
(2) Tool compensation memory C
(parameter NGW(No.8136#6)="0")
Memory for geometry compensation and wear compensation is separate in tool compensation
memory C. Geometry compensation and wear compensation can thus be set separately. Separate
memories are prepared for cutter compensation (for D code) and for tool length compensation (for H
code).
The above description is summarized as follows:
Tool compensation memory Compensation amount

Tool compensation amount (Geometry compensation value +
A
Wear compensation value)
Geometry compensation value for H code
Geometry compensation value for D code
C
Wear compensation value for H code
Wear compensation value for D code
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3109 DWT

#1 DWT Characters G and W in the display of tool wear/geometry compensation amount

0: The characters are displayed at the left of each number.
1: The characters are not displayed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3205 OSC

[Data type] Bit
#4 OSC On the offset screen, offset value erasure by a soft key is:
0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3290 GOF WOF

#0 WOF Setting the tool offset value (tool wear offset) by MDI key input is:
0: Not disabled
1: Disabled (With parameter No.3294 and No.3295, set the offset number range in
which updating the setting is to be disabled.)
NOTE
When tool offset memory A is selected with the M series, the tool
offset set in the parameter WOF is followed even if geometric
compensation and wear compensation are not specified with the T
series.
- 1023 -
#1 GOF Setting the tool geometry offset value by MDI key input is:
0: Not disabled
1: Disabled (With parameter No.3294 and No.3295, set the offset number range in
which updating the setting is to be disabled.)
3294 Start number of tool offset values whose input by MDI is disabled
3295 Number of tool offset values (from the start number) whose input by MDI is disabled

[Valid data range] 0 to Number of tool compensation values - 1
When the modification of tool offset values by MDI key input
is to be disabled using bit 0 (WOF) of parameter No.3290 and bit 1 (GOF) of parameter
No.3290, parameter Nos. 3294 and 3295 are used to set the range where such
modification is disabled. In parameter No.3294, set the offset number of the start of tool
offset values whose modification is disabled. In parameter No.3295, set the number of
such values.
In the following cases, however, none of the tool offset values may be modified:
• When 0 or a negative value is set in parameter No. 3294
• When 0 or a negative value is set in parameter No. 3295
• When a value greater than the maximum tool offset number is set in parameter No.
3294
In the following case, a modification to the values ranging from the value set in parameter
No. 3294 to the maximum tool offset number is disabled:
When the value of parameter No. 3294 added to the value of parameter No. 3295 exceeds
the maximum tool offset number
When the offset value of a prohibited number is input through the MDI panel, the
warning "WRITE PROTECT" is issued.
[Example]
When the following parameter settings are made, modifications to both of the tool
geometry offset values and tool wear offset values corresponding to offset numbers 51 to
60 are disabled:
• Bit 1 (GOF) of parameter No. 3290 = 1 (to disable tool geometry offset value
modification)
• Bit 0 (WOF) of parameter No. 3290 = 1 (to disable tool wear offset value
modification)
• Parameter No. 3294 = 51
• Parameter No. 3295 = 10
If the setting of bit 0 (WOF) of parameter No. 3290 is set to 0 without modifying the
other parameter settings above, tool geometry offset value modification only is disabled,
and tool wear offset value modification is enabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5001
TPH OFH

- 1024 -
#2 OFH In cutter compensation (G40, G41, or G42), the address used to specify a compensation
number is:
0: Address D.
1: Address H.
NOTE
When this parameter is 1, if tool length compensation and cutter
compensation are specified in the same block, cutter compensation
is prioritized.
#5 TPH In tool offsets (G45, G46, G47, or G48), the address used to specify a compensation
number is:
0: Address D.
1: Address H.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 2 (OFH) of parameter No. 5001 is
0.
5013 Maximum value of tool wear compensation

[Data type] Real path
[Unit of data] mm, inch (offset unit)
[Min. unit of data] The increment system of a tool offset value is followed.
[Valid data range] The settings of bits 1 and 0 (OFC and OFA) of parameter No. 5042 are followed.
For metric input

OFC OFA Valid data range
0 1 0 to 9999.99mm
0 0 0 to 9999.999mm
1 0 0 to 9999.9999mm
For inch input
0 1 0 to 999.999inch
0 0 0 to 999.9999inch
1 0 0 to 999.99999inch
This parameter sets the maximum allowable tool wear compensation value. If an attempt
is made to set a tool wear compensation value, the absolute value of which exceeds the
value set in this parameter, the following alarm or warning is output:
Input from MDI Warning: Too many digits
Input by G10 Alarm PS0032: ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE IN G10.
When 0 or a negative value is set, no maximum allowable value is applied.
[Example]
When 30.000 is set
As a tool offset value, a value from -30.000 to +30.000 can be input.
5014 Maximum value of incremental input for tool wear compensation

- 1025 -
[Unit of data] mm, inch (offset unit)

[Min. unit of data] The increment system of a tool offset value is followed.
[Valid data range] The settings of bits 1 and 0 (OFC and OFA) of parameter No. 5042 are followed.
For metric input

0 1 0 to 9999.99mm
0 0 0 to 9999.999mm
1 0 0 to 9999.9999mm
For inch input
0 1 0 to 999.999inch
0 0 0 to 999.9999inch
1 0 0 to 999.99999inch
Set the maximum allowable value for the tool wear compensation value, input as an
incremental value. If the incremental input value (absolute value) exceeds the set value,
the following alarm or warning message is output:
Input from MDI Warning: Too many digits
Input by G10 Alarm PS0032: ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE IN G10.
When 0 or a negative value is set, no maximum allowable value is applied.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5042 OFC OFA

NOTE
#0 OFA
#1 OFC These bits are used to specify the increment system and valid data range of a tool offset
value.
For metric input

OFC OFA Unit Valid data range
0 1 0.01mm ±9999.99mm
0 0 0.001mm ±9999.999mm
1 0 0.0001mm ±9999.9999mm
For inch input

0 1 0.001inch ±999.999inch
0 0 0.0001inch ±999.9999inch
1 0 0.00001inch ±999.99999inch
- 1026 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8136 NGW NDO
NOTE

[Data type] Bit
#5 NDO Tool offset pairs 400-pairs (M series) is:

0: Used.
1: Not Used.
#6 NGW Tool offset memory C (M series) is:

0: Used.
1: Not Used.
Alarm and message

PS0032 ILLEGAL OFFSET VALUE IN G10 In setting an offset amount by G10 or in writing an offset
amount by system variables, the offset amount was
excessive.
Warning message Description

DATA IS OUT OF RANGE The value searched exceeds the permitted range.
TOO MANY DIGITS The input value exceeds the permitted number of digits.
11.3 TOOL COMPENSATION
11.3.1 Cutter Compensation (M Series) and Tool Nose Radius

Compensation (T Series)
Overview
M
- Cutter compensation (M series)
Use of cutter compensation can offset a programmed tool path by the tool radius set in the CNC when
machining is performed.
When the radius of the tool to be used for machining is measured and set as the offset value in the CNC,
the tool moves along the offset path to cut a programmed profile. Therefore, even when the tool
diameter changes, you must only change the offset value and need not modify the program.
Programmed path Tool center path
- 1027 -
To obtain the actual offset tool path, the CNC internally calculates intersections of a straight line and a
straight line, an arc and an arc, and a straight line and an arc automatically. The programmer only has to
program a machining profile, therefore, programming can be done very easily.
T
- Tool nose radius compensation
Use of tool-nose radius compensation can offset a programmed tool path by the tool nose radius set in the
CNC when machining is performed. When a machining profile is programmed using this function, and
the radius of the tool nose to be used for actual machining is measured and set as the offset value in the
CNC, the tool moves along the offset path to cut the programmed profile. Therefore, even when the tool
nose radius changes, you must only change the offset value and need not modify the program.
Workpiece
Tool center path

Tool nose
Machining profile
To obtain the actual offset tool path, the CNC internally calculates intersections of a straight line and a
straight line, an arc and an arc, and a straight line and an arc automatically. The programmer only has to
program a machining profile, therefore the programming can be done very easily.
NOTE
To enable cutter compensation (M series)/ tool-nose radius compensation (T
series), set bit 7 (NTL, NCR) of parameter No. 8136 to 0.
Signal
Tool offset direction signals G2RVX,G2RVZ,G2RVY<Gn090.0,.1,.2>
[Function] These signals change the compensation direction when using the tool offset.
The direction of the tool offset compensated by tool movement is:
0 : Identical to the sign.
1 : Opposite to the sign.
NOTE
1 G2RVY needs to enable the Y-axis offset function (bit 1 (YOF) of
parameter No. 8132 is 1).
2 This signal is invalid for compensation that shifts coordinates.
- 1028 -
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5000 SBK
[Input type] Setting input

#0 SBK With a block created internally for cutter compensation or tool nose radius compensation:
0: A single block stop is not performed.
1: A single block stop is performed.
This parameter is used to check a program including cutter compensation/tool nose radius
compensation.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5001
TPH EVR OFH

#2 OFH In cutter compensation (G40, G41, or G42), the address used to specify a compensation
number is:
0: Address D.
1: Address H.
NOTE
When this parameter is 1, if tool length compensation and cutter
compensation are specified in the same block, cutter compensation
is prioritized.
#4 EVR When a tool compensation value is changed in cutter compensation mode:

0: Enables the change, starting from that block where the next D or H code is specified.
1: Enables the change, starting from that block where buffering is next performed.
#5 TPH In tool offsets (G45, G46, G47, or G48), the address used to specify a compensation
number is:
0: Address D.
1: Address H.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 2 (OFH) of parameter No. 5001 is
0.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
WNP LGN
5002

#1 LGN Geometry offset number of tool offset

0: Is the same as wear offset number
1: Specifies the geometry offset number by the tool selection number
- 1029 -
NOTE
#7 WNP Imaginary tool tip number used for tool nose radius compensation, when the
geometry/wear compensation function is equipped (bit 6 (NGW) of parameter No. 8136
is 0), is the number specified by:
0: Geometry offset number
1: Wear offset number
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5003 SUV SUP

#0 SUP
#1 SUV These bits are used to specify the type of startup/cancellation of cutter compensation or
tool nose radius compensation.
CSC CSU Type Operation
0 0 Type A compensation vector perpendicular to the block next to the startup block or
A the block preceding the cancellation block is output.
Tool center path
G41
Programmed path
N2
N1
0 1 Type A compensation vector perpendicular to the startup block or cancellation block

B and an intersection vector are output.
Intersection point
Tool center path
G41 Programmed path

N2
N1
- 1030 -
CSC CSU Type Operation

1 0 Type When the startup block or cancellation block specifies no movement operation,
1 C the tool is shifted by the cutter compensation amount in a direction
perpendicular to the block next to the startup or the block before cancellation
block.
Intersection point
Tool center path
Shift
G41 Programmed path
N3
N2
When the block specifies movement operation, the type is set according to the
SUP setting; if SUP is 0, type A is set, and if SUP is 1, type B is set.
NOTE
When SUV,SUP = 0,1 (type B), an operation equivalent to that of
FS0i-TC is performed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5004
ODI

#2 ODI The setting of a cutter compensation value is corrected as:

0: Radius value
1: Diameter value
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5008 MCR CNV CNC

#1 CNC
#3 CNV These bits are used to select an interference check method in the cutter compensation or
tool nose radius compensation mode.
CNV CNC Operation
0 0 Interference check is enabled. The direction and the angle of an arc are checked.
0 1 Interference check is enabled. Only the angle of an arc is checked.
1 - Interference check is disabled.
For the operation taken when the interference check shows the occurrence of an reference
(overcutting), see the description of bit 5 (CAV) of parameter No. 19607.
NOTE
Checking of only the direction cannot be set.
#4 MCR If G41/G42 (cutter compensation or tool nose radius compensation) is specified in the
MDI mode, an alarm is:
0: Not raised.
1: Raised. (alarm PS5257)
- 1031 -
NOTE
Cutter compensation/tool-nose radius compensation is not
performed in the MDI mode, regardless of the setting of this
parameter.
5010 Limit for ignoring the small movement resulting from cutter or tool nose radius compensation

[Unit of data] mm, inch (input unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the reference axis
[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A))
(When the increment system is IS-B, -999999.999 to +999999.999)
When the tool moves around a corner in cutter compensation or tool nose radius
compensation mode, the limit for ignoring the small travel amount resulting from
compensation is set. This limit eliminates the interruption of buffering caused by the
small travel amount generated at the corner and any change in feedrate due to the
interruption.
If ΔVx ≤ ΔVlimit and ΔVY≤ ΔVlimit, ΔVx

this vector is ignored.
ΔV Y
S
r
Even if ΔVx ≤ ΔVlimit and
ΔVY ≤ ΔVlimit, vector to
r single-block stop point
Tool center path remains.
N1
Programmed path
N2
ΔVlimit is determined depending on the setting in parameter No. 5010.
5024 Number of tool compensation values
NOTE

Set the maximum allowable number of tool compensation values used for each path.
Ensure that the total number of values set in parameter No. 5024 for the individual paths
is within the number of compensation values usable in the entire system.
- 1032 -
If the total number of values set in parameter No. 5024 for the individual paths exceeds
the number of compensation values usable in the entire system, or 0 is set in parameter
No. 5024 for all paths, the number of compensation values usable for each path is a value
obtained by dividing the number of compensation values usable in the entire system by
the number of paths.
Tool compensation values as many as the number of compensation values used for each
path are displayed on the screen. If tool compensation numbers more than the number of
compensation values usable for each path are specified, an alarm is issued.
For example, 200 tool compensation sets are used, 120 sets may be allocated to path 1
and 80 sets to path 2. All of 200 sets need not be used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5042 OFC OFA

NOTE
#0 OFA
#1 OFC These bits are used to specify the increment system and valid data range of a tool offset
value.
For metric input

0 1 0.01mm ±9999.99mm
0 0 0.001mm ±9999.999mm
1 0 0.0001mm ±9999.9999mm
For inch input

0 1 0.001inch ±999.999inch
0 0 0.0001inch ±999.9999inch
1 0 0.00001inch ±999.99999inch
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
19607 NAG NAA CAV CCC

#2 CCC In the cutter compensation/tool nose radius compensation mode, the outer corner
connection method is based on:
0: Linear connection type.
1: Circular connection type.
#5 CAV When an interference check finds that interference (overcutting) occurred:

0: Machining stops with the alarm (PS0041).
(Interference check alarm function)
1: Machining is continued by changing the tool path to prevent interference
(overcutting) from occurring. (Interference check avoidance function)
- 1033 -
For the interference check method, see the descriptions of bit 1 (CNC) of parameter No.
5008 and bit 3 (CNV) of parameter No. 5008.
#6 NAA When the interference check avoidance function considers that an avoidance operation is
dangerous or that a further interference to the interference avoidance vector occurs:
0: An alarm is issued.
When an avoidance operation is considered to be dangerous, the alarm (PS5447) is
issued.
When a further interference to the interference avoidance vector is considered to
occur, the alarm (PS5448) is issued.
1: No alarm is issued, and the avoidance operation is continued.
CAUTION
When this parameter is set to 1, the path may be shifted largely.
Therefore, set this parameter to 0 unless special reasons are
present.
#7 NAG If the gap vector length is 0 when the interference check avoidance function for cutter
compensation/tool nose radius compensation is used:
0: Avoidance operation is performed.
1: Avoidance operation is not performed.
19625 Number of blocks to be read in the cutter compensation/tool nose radius compensation mode

This parameter sets the number of blocks to be read in the cutter compensation/tool nose
radius compensation mode. When a value less than 3 is set, the specification of 3 is
assumed. When a value greater than 8 is set, the specification of 8 is assumed. As a
greater number of blocks are read, an overcutting (interference) forecast can be made with
a command farther ahead. However, the number of blocks read and analyzed increases, so
that a longer block processing time becomes necessary.
Even if the setting of this parameter is modified in the MDI mode by stopping in the
cutter compensation/tool nose radius compensation mode, the setting does not become
valid immediately. Before the new setting of this parameter can become valid, the cutter
compensation/tool noise radius compensation mode must be canceled, then the mode
must be entered again.
Alarm and message

PS0033 NO INTERSECTION AT CUTTER The intersection cannot be obtained by the intersection
COMPENSATION calculation in cutter or tool-nose radius compensation. Modify
the program.
PS0034 NO CIRC ALLOWED IN STUP/EXT In cutter or tool-nose radius compensation, a startup or
BLK cancellation is performed in the G02 or G03 mode. Modify the
program.
- 1034 -

PS0035 CAN NOT COMMANDED G31 - G31 cannot be specified. This alarm is generated when a
G code (such as for cutter or tool-nose radius
compensation) of group 07 is not canceled.
- A torque limit skip was not specified in a torque limit skip
command (G31P98 or P99). Specify the torque limit skip
in the PMC window or the like. Or, specify the torque limit
override by address Q.
PS0037 CAN NOT CHANGE PLANE IN The compensation plane G17/G18/G19 was changed during
G41/G42 cutter or tool-nose radius compensation. Modify the program.
PS0041 INTERFERENCE IN CUTTER In cutter or tool-nose radius compensation, excessive cutting
COMPENSATION may occur. Modify the program.
PS0042 G45/G48 NOT ALLOWED IN CRC Tool offset (G45 to G48) is commanded in tool compensation.
Modify the program.
PS5445 CAN NOT COMMAND MOTION IN Corner circular interpolation (G39) of cutter compensation or
G39 tool nose radius compensation is not specified alone but is
specified with a move command.
PS5446 NO AVOIDANCE AT G41/G42 Because there is no interference evade vector, the
interference check evade function of cutter compensation or
tool nose radius compensation cannot evade interference.
PS5447 DANGEROUS AVOIDANCE AT The interference check evade function of cutter compensation
G41/G42 or tool nose radius compensation determines that an evade
operation will lead to danger.
PS5448 INTERFERENCE TO AVD. AT In the interference check evade function of cutter
G41/G42 compensation or tool nose radius compensation, a further
interference occurs for an already created interference evade
vector.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Overview of Tool Nose Radius Compensation (G40-G42)
(For lathe system) (B-64304EN-1) Details of Tool Nose Radius Compensation
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Overview of Cutter Compensation (G40-G42)
(For machining center system) (B-64304EN-2) Details of Cutter Compensation
11.3.2 Tool Length Compensation

M
Overview
When the difference between the tool length assumed at the time of programming and the tool length of
the tool actually used for machining is set in offset memory, the difference in tool length can be corrected
without modifying the program.
G43 and G44 specify the offset direction, and a number following the tool length compensation
specification address (H code) specifies the tool length compensation amount set in the offset memory.
- 1035 -
Tool assumed at Actual tool

programming
Set this difference as

tool length
compensation amount
One of the following three methods is available, depending on the type of axis that can be subject to tool
length compensation:
• Tool length compensation A
Compensates the value of the tool length on the Z axis.
• Tool length compensation B
Compensates the value of the tool length on one of the X, Y, and Z axis.
• Tool length compensation C
Compensates the value of the tool length on a specified axis.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3104
DAL DRL

#4 DRL Relative position

0: The actual position displayed takes into account tool length offset.
1: The programmed position displayed does not take into account tool length offset.
#6 DAL Absolute position

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5001
EVO TAL TLB TLC

#0 TLC
#1 TLB These bits are used to select a tool length compensation type.
Type TLB TLC
Tool length compensation A 0 0
Tool length compensation B 1 0
Tool length compensation C - 1
The axis to which cutter compensation is applied varies from type to type as described
below.
Tool length compensation A :
Z-axis at all times
- 1036 -
Tool length compensation B :
Axis perpendicular to a specified plane (G17/G18/G19)
Tool length compensation C :
Axis specified in a block that specifies G43/G44
#3 TAL Tool length compensation C

0: Generates an alarm when two or more axes are offset
1: Not generate an alarm even if two or more axes are offset
#6 EVO If a tool compensation value modification is made for tool length compensation A or tool
length compensation B in the offset mode (G43 or G44):
0: The new value becomes valid in a block where G43, G44, or an H code is specified
next.
1: The new value becomes valid in a block where buffering is performed next.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5003
LVK

#6 LVK Tool length compensation vector

0: Cleared by reset
1: Not cleared, but held by reset
The tool length compensation vector in the tool axis direction is handled in the same way
by this bit.
Alarm and message

PS0027 NO AXES COMMANDED No axis is specified in G43 and G44 blocks for the tool length offset type
IN G43/G44 C.
Offset is not canceled but another axis is offset for the tool length offset
type C.
Multiple axes were specified for the same block when the tool length
compensation type is C.
PS0336 TOOL COMPENSATION For a tool length compensation C, an attempt was made to command the
COMMANDED MORE offset to other axes without canceling the offset. Or, for a tool length
TWO AXES compensation C, multiple axes are specified in G43 or G44 block.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Tool length compensation
(For machining center system)
(B-64304EN-2)
- 1037 -
11.3.3 Tool Length Compensation Shift Types

M
Overview
A tool length offset operation can be performed by shifting the program coordinate system: The
coordinate system containing the axis subject to tool length compensation is shifted by the tool length
compensation value. A tool length compensation shift type can be selected with parameter TOS
(parameter No. 5006#6). If no move command is specified together with the G43, G44, or G49
command, the tool will not move along the axis. If a move command is specified together with the G43,
G44, or G49 command, the coordinate system will be shifted first, then the tool will move along the axis.
One of the following three methods is available, depending on the type of axis that can be subject to tool
length compensation:
• Tool length compensation A
Compensates the value of the tool length on the Z axis.
• Tool length compensation B
Compensates the value of the tool length on one of the X, Y, and Z axis.
• Tool length compensation C
Compensates the value of the tool length on a specified axis.
Explanation
- Offset direction
If the tool length compensation value specified with an H code (and stored in offset memory) is G43, the
coordinate system is shifted to the + side; if G44, to the - side. If the sign of the tool length
compensation value is -, the coordinate system is shifted to the - side if G43 and to the + side if G44.
G43 and G44 are modal G codes; they remain valid until another G code in the same group is used.
- Specifying a tool length compensation value

The tool length compensation value corresponding to the number (offset number) specified with an H
code (and stored in offset memory) is used. The tool length compensation corresponding to the offset
number 0 always means 0. It is not possible to set a tool length compensation value corresponding to
H0.
- Compensation axis
Specify one of tool length compensation types A, B, and C, using parameters TLC and TLB (No. 5001#0,
#1).
- Specifying offset on two or more axes

Tool length compensation B enables offset on two or more axes by specifying offset axes in multiple
blocks.
To perform offset on X and Y axes

G19 G43 H_; Performs offset on the X axis.
G18 G43 H_; Performs offset on the Y axis.
Tool length compensation C suppresses the generation of an alarm even if offset is performed on two or
more axes at the same time, by setting TAL (No. 5001#3) to 1.
- Tool length compensation cancel

To cancel offset, specify either G49 or H0. Canceling offset causes the shifting of the coordinate system
to be undone. If no move command is specified at this time, the tool will not move along the axis.
- 1038 -
- Staring and canceling tool length compensation

Once a command for starting or canceling tool length compensation (*2) is issued in a mode such as
cutter compensation (*1), no look-ahead block interpretation is carried out until the tool length
compensation start or cancel request block is finished. So, the following operations occur.
• The spindle decelerates to a stop in the start or cancel block.
• The compensation vector for tool compensation becomes perpendicular to the block just before the
start or cancel block, resulting in an overcut or insufficient cut, because no look-ahead interpretation
is carried out.
• No command specified after the start or cancel block is executed until the block is finished.
*1 No look-ahead block interpretation is carried out for the following commands:

- G codes, except G40, in group 07
(for such modes as cutter compensation (G41/G42))
- Smooth interpolation (G05.1Q2) mode
*2 The following commands are included.
- Tool length compensation (G43/G44)
- Operation when a tool compensation value is changed in the tool length

compensation mode
Bit 1 (MOF) of parameter No. 5000 can be used to specify what operation to perform when a tool length
compensation value is changed (*3) in the cutter compensation mode (*1) and tool length compensation
mode (*2).
• If bit 1 (MOF) of parameter No. 5000 = 0:
The axis is shifted by the amount of change in the tool length compensation value.
• If bit 1 (MOF) of parameter No. 5000 = 1:
Until an absolute command is issued to the compensated axis since the change of the tool length
compensation value, the axis is shifted by the amount of change in the tool length compensation
value.

- G codes, except G40, in group 07
Cutter compensation (G41/G42)

- Tool length compensation (G43/G44)
*3 “Changing a tool length compensation value” pertains to:

- Issuing the H code in a program
- Changing a compensation value on the offset screen, by the G10 command, system variables,
or the window function if bit 6 (EVO) of parameter No. 5001 = 1.
Caution
CAUTION
1 Specifying tool length compensation (a shift type) first and then executing an
incremental command causes the tool length compensation value to be reflected
in the coordinates only, not in the travel distance of the machine; executing an
absolute command causes the tool length compensation value to be reflected in
both the movement of the machine and the coordinates.
2 If a programmable mirror image is effective, the tool length offset is applied in
the specified direction.
3 No scaling magnification is applied to the tool length offset value.
4 No coordinate system rotation is applied to the tool length offset value. Tool
length offset is effective in the direction in which the offset is applied.
- 1039 -
CAUTION
5 The tool length offset operation is independent of the cutter compensation offset
operation.
6 With the WINDOW command, changing parameter TOS during automatic
operation does not cause the tool length offset type to be changed.
7 If offset has been performed on two or more axes with tool length compensation B,
a G49 command causes the offset to be canceled on all axes; H0 causes the
offset to be canceled only on the axis vertical to the specified plane.
8 If the tool length compensation value is changed by changing the offset number,
this simply means that the value is replaced by a new tool length compensation
value; it does not mean that a new tool length compensation value is added to the
old tool length compensation.
9 If using cutter compensation, set OFH (parameter No. 5001#2) to 0, specify tool
length compensation with an H code, and specify cutter compensation with a D
code.
10 If reference position return (G28 or G30) has been specified, tool length offset is
canceled for the axis specified at the time of positioning on the reference point;
however, tool length offset is not canceled for an un-specified axis. If reference
position return has been specified in the same block as that containing tool length
offset cancel (G49), tool length offset is canceled for both the specified and
un-specified axes at the time of positioning on the mid-point.
11 With a machine coordinate system command (G53), tool length offset is canceled
for the axis specified at the time of positioning on the specified point.
12 The tool length compensation vector canceled by specifying G53, G28, or G30
during tool length compensation is restored as described below:
For tool length compensation types A and B, if parameter EVO (No. 5001#6) is 1,
the vector is restored in the block buffered next; for all of tool length compensation
types A, B, and C, it is restored in a block containing an H, G43, or G44 command
if parameter is 0.
13 When a tool compensation shift type is used, no look-ahead interpretation is made
if a command for starting or canceling compensation such as tool length
compensation is issued in the cutter compensation mode. As a result, it is likely
that an overcut or insufficient cut may occur. To avoid this problem, issue the
command before the cutter compensation mode is entered or in a place where
machining is not affected.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5000
MOF

#1 MOF When the tool length compensation shift type (bit 6 (TOS) of parameter No. 5006 is set to
1) is used, if the tool length compensation amount is changed(NOTE 3) in the tool length
compensation mode (NOTE 1) when look-ahead blocks are present(NOTE 2):
0: Compensation is performed for the change in compensation amount as the
movement type.
1: Compensation is not performed for the change until a tool length compensation
command (offset number) and an absolute command for the compensation axis are
specified.
- 1040 -
NOTE
1 The tool length compensation mode refers to the following state:
• Tool length offset (G43/G44)
2 "When look-ahead blocks are present" means as follows:
• The modal G code of the G codes (such as tool radius/tool nose
radius compensation) of group 07 is other than G40.
One look-ahead block during automatic operation and multiple
look-ahead blocks in the AI/ advanced preview control/AI contour
control mode are not included in the state "when look-ahead blocks
are present".
3 Changes in tool length compensation amount are as follows:
• When the tool length compensation number is changed by H
code
• When G43 or G44 is specified to change the direction of tool
length compensation
• When the tool length compensation amount is changed using
the offset screen, G10 command, system variable, PMC window,
and so forth during automatic operation if bit 1 (EVO) of
parameter No. 5001 is set to 1.
• When the tool length compensation vector that was canceled
temporarily by G53, G28, or G30 during tool length
compensation is recovered.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5001
TAL TLB TLC

#0 TLC
#1 TLB These bits are used to select a tool length compensation type.
Type TLB TLC
Tool length compensation A 0 0
Tool length compensation B 1 0
Tool length compensation C - 1
The axis to which cutter compensation is applied varies from type to type as described
below.
Tool length compensation A :
Z-axis at all times
Tool length compensation B :
Axis perpendicular to a specified plane (G17/G18/G19)
Tool length compensation C :
Axis specified in a block that specifies G43/G44
#3 TAL Tool length compensation C

0: Generates an alarm when two or more axes are offset
1: Not generate an alarm even if two or more axes are offset
- 1041 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5006 TOS

[Data type] Bit
#6 TOS Set a tool length compensation operation.

0: Tool length compensation is performed by an axis movement.
1: Tool length compensation is performed by shifting the coordinate system.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Tool length compensation shift types
(For machining center system)
(B-64304EN-2)
11.4 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT

Tools are classified into several groups, and a tool life (use count or use duration) is specified for each
group in advance. Each time a tool is used, its life is counted, and when the tool life expires, a new tool
that is sequenced next within the same group is selected automatically. With this function, the tool life
can be managed while machining is being performed continuously. Data for tool life management
consists of tool group numbers, tool life values, tool numbers, and codes for specifying a tool offset value.
These data items are registered in the CNC.
NOTE
To use tool life management, set bit 0 (TLF) of parameter No. 8132 to 1.
Tool group number m

Tool life value l
1 Tool number (T) Code for specifying tool offset 1st-tool management data
value (H/D)
2 : : 2nd-tool management data
: : : :
: : : :
n : : nth-tool management data
Machining program Machine and CNC operations

: Machine CNC
Tool life
: Places a Automatically
management data selected tool selects, from tool
Command for selecting
Tool group number 1 in the wait group m, a tool
tool group m state. whose life has not
:
Select : expired.
: Attaches the Starts counting the
tool. :
Tool group number m tool in the life of the tool
Tool change command wait state to attached to the
: the spindle spindle.
(M06)
: (tool
: change).
Tool group number p
:
Fig. 11.4 (a) Tool selection from machining program
M
A group is selected by a T code, and tool life counting is started by the M06 command.
- 1042 -
T
For the T series, depending on the tool replacement system (turret type or ATC type), a group is selected
only by a T code, a tool compensation amount is specified, and tool life counting is started (turret type).
CAUTION
This function cannot be used if bit 1 (LGN) of parameter No. 5002 is set to 1 to
use the same number as the tool selection number to specify a geometric offset
number.
- Maximum number of tool life management groups

A maximum of 128 tool life management groups can be used for each path.
For each path, set a maximum number of groups to be used in parameter No. 6813.
The maximum number of groups must be a multiple of the minimum number of groups (eight groups).
If the setting is 0, 128 is assumed.
When tool life management is performed in a 2-path system (T series (2-path
control))
Suppose that, of the total groups in the system (256 groups), 128 groups are
allocated to path 1 and 128 groups to path 3. Then, set parameter No. 6813
as follows: Tool life management data file
Parameter No. 6813 (256 groups in total in system)
Path 1 Path 1
Set 128 in parameter Up to 128 groups
Path 2 Path 2
Set 128 in parameter Up to 128 groups
Fig. 11.4 (b) Group allocation in entire system
M
- Remaining tool count check function
This function outputs the remaining tool count notification signal (TLAL<Fn154.0>) when the number of
remaining tools in the group selected by the T code command is equal to or less than the value set in
parameter No. 6846.
Signal
Tool change signal TLCH <Fn064.0>
[Function] Informs that the life of the last tool in a group has expired.
[Output cond.] The signal becomes "1" when:
- The life of the last tool in a group has expired, after tool change was performed each
time the life of each tool in the group expired.
The signal becomes "0" when:
- There is no group whose life has expired.
When the signal is "1", it is reset to “0” by informing the CNC that tool change has
been finished for all groups in which the life of all tools had expired, by inputting
the tool change reset signal TLRST from the PMC or operating on the MDI.
- 1043 -
CAUTION
If the tool life is specified by use count, the tool change signal
TLCH becomes "1" when the CNC is reset by a command such as
M02 or M30 after the tool life has expired or when the tool life count
restart M code is issued.
If the tool life is specified by duration, the TLCH becomes "1" when
the tool life expires, even if machining is in progress. Machining,
however, continues until the end of the program.
Tool change reset signal TLRST <Gn048.7>

[Function] Clears all execution data, such as tool life count values and marks "*" and "@", for a
group.
After replacing all tools in the groups in which the life of all the tools has expired (as
shown on the screen) with new ones, input this signal by specifying a group number,
using the tool group number select signals (TL1 to TL512). Setting bit 4 (GRS) of
parameter No. 6800 to 1 can clear execution data for all registered groups without
inputting the tool group number select signal.
Execution data can be cleared also by operating on the MDI.
[Operation] When the signal changes from "0" to "1", the control unit behaves as explained below.
- If the lives of all tools in the group specified by the tool group number selection
signals (TL1 to TL512) have expired, the related information is cleared. Therefore,
when a subsequent program command specifies the group number, tools are selected
from the beginning. If the group specified by the tool group number selection
signals (TL1 to TL512) contains at least one tool whose life has not expired, no
special operation takes place.
NOTE
Set the tool change reset signal TLRST from "0" to "1" only when
the control unit is not in the reset state (the RST signal is "1") and
the following conditions are satisfied:
1) If bit 5 (TRS) of parameter No. 6805 = 0
Reset state (the OP signal is "0")
2) If bit 5 (TRS) of parameter No. 6805 = 1
<1> Reset state (the OP signal is "0")
<2> Automatic operation stop state (the STL signal and the
SPL signal are "0" and the OP signal is "1")
<3> Automatic operation stop state (the STL signal and the
SPL signal are "0")
(In the automatic operation stop state, automatic operation
pause state, and automatic operation start state (the STL
signal is "1") during execution of a data setting command
(G10 L3), however, the tool change reset signal TLRST is
invalid.)
Individual tool change signal TLCHI <Fn064.2>

[Function] When the tool life count is specified by duration, this signal informs that the life of the
currently used tool has expired. The signal can be used to cause an interrupt to program
execution, to run a tool change program, and, after tool exchange, to resume the
interrupted program execution.
- 1044 -
[Operation] The signal becomes "1" when:
- The life of the currently used tool has expired.
- An individual tool change reset is executed.
Individual tool change reset signal TLRSTI <Gn048.6>

[Function] Resets the individual tool change signal TLCHI to "0".
[Operation] When this signal becomes "1", the control unit behaves as explained below.
- The individual tool change signal is reset to”0”.
NOTE
1 These signals are valid only for tool life management in which the
tool life count type is specification by duration.
2 The individual tool change signal TLCHI is not cleared by a reset.
Tool skip signal TLSKP <Gn048.5>

[Function] Skips a tool whose life has not expired and selects the next tool forcibly. One of the
following two methods can be selected according to the setting of bit 3 (SIG) of
parameter No. 6800:
(i) Specifying a group number by using the tool group number select signals (SIG = 1)
Specify the group number of the tool to be skipped by using the tool group number
selection signals (TL1 to TL512), then set the tool skip signal to "1". The next T
code command will then select the next tool in the group which is specified to be
skipped.
(ii) Not specifying a group number by using the tool group number select signals (SIG =
0)
Set the tool skip signal TLSKP to "1" without specifying any group number. The
group to which the currently selected tool belongs is then assumed to be specified.
The next T code command will select the next tool in the group for which the skip is
specified.
When the tool skip signal TLSKP is set to "1" for the last tool, the tool change signal
TLCH is set to "1".
[Operation] When this signal is set from "0" to "1", the control unit behaves as explained below:
- Among the tools whose lives have not expired in the group for which a skip
operation is specified, the smallest tool number in the tool life management table is
marked with "#". When the group is specified again by a T code command, the
marked tool is skipped, and the next new tool is selected.
When the tool skip signal TLSKP is set to "1" for the last tool, the tool change signal
TLCH is set to "1".
CAUTION
The tool skip signal TLSKP can be used even in the automatic
operation start state (the STL signal is "1"), but a tool selection
from a group by a T command is made when the command is
buffered. This means that after the command is buffered,
inputting the tool skip signal TLSKP does not select the next tool.
Therefore, when supplying the tool skip signal TLSKP in the
automatic operation start state (the STL signal is "1"), disable tool
selection, for example, by suppressing buffering before setting the
signal from "0" to "1".
- 1045 -
New tool select signal TLNW <Fn064.1>

[Function] Notifies the PMC that a new tool has been selected from a group. This signal can be
used, for example, if the tool length offset value of a newly selected tool is to be
measured automatically when the tool is selected.
[Output cond.] The signal becomes "1" if:
A new tool in a tool group specified with a tool group number by a T code command
is selected because the life of the tool used so far in the group has expired.
After the code signal for the new tool is sent out, the TLNW becomes "1" at the
same time when the tool function strobe signal TF is sent out.
The signal becomes "0" if:
The completion signal FIN for the strobe signal TF becomes to "1" when the TLNW
is "1".
T command
Code signals T0 to T31
Strobe signal TF
New tool select signal

TLNW
Completion signal FIN
Tool group number selection signals TL01 to TL128 <Gn047.0 to Gn047.7>

[Function] These signals specify a tool group number. Before the tool change reset signal TLRST
or the tool skip signal TLSKP is input, the target group for the tool change reset operation
or tool skip operation is specified with these signals.
[Operation] The table given below shows the correspondence between tool group numbers and the
tool group signals by providing several examples. A binary number plus 1 indicates a
tool group number. A group with a specified number is then selected.
TL128 TL64 TL32 TL16 TL8 TL4 TL2 TL1 Tool group number
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 2
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 3
0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 4
0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 5
0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 10
0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 15
0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 20
0 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 30
0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 40
0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 50
0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 100
0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 127
0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 128
1 1 0 0 0 1 1 1 200
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 256
- 1046 -
Tool life count override signals *TLV0 to *TLV9 <Gn049.0 to Gn050.1>

[Function] If the life count is specified by duration, the life count can be overridden by setting bit 2
(LFV) of parameter No. 6800 = 1. Ten binary code signals are available, and they
correspond to override values as follows:
9
Override value = Σ {2i × Vi}
i=0
times
Keep the override values within the range stated above.

Where, if *TLVi is "1", Vi = 0
if *TLVi is "0", Vi = 1
Therefore, each signal has the following weight:
Signal Magnification
*TLV0 0.1
*TLV1 0.2
*TLV2 0.4
*TLV3 0.8
*TLV4 1.6
*TLV5 3.2
*TLV6 6.4
*TLV7 12.8
*TLV8 25.6
*TLV9 51.2
[Example] If *TLV7, *TLV6, and *TLV3 are "0", the override value is calculated as follows: 12.8
+ 6.4 + 0.8 = 20.0
So, the life count is multiplied by 20.
If all signals are "1", the override value is 0. So, set an override value within the range
from 0 to 99.9 in steps of 0.1.
If 99.9 times is exceeded, the actual override value is clamped by 99.9 times.
[Operation] The actual cutting time obtained by life counting specified by duration is multiplied by
the override value specified by these signals, and the multiplication result is assumed to
be the count time for tool life management. For example, let the override value be 0.1,
and the actual cutting time be 1000 seconds. Then, the tool life count time is assumed to
be 100 seconds.
Tool life arrival notice signal TLCHB <Fn064.3>

[Function] Specifying a remaining life value to be used till selection of a new tool enables the tool
life arrival notice signal to be issued when life counting shows that the remaining life
value of a group (life value minus life counter value) becomes lower than or equal to the
remaining life setting, in order to inform in advance that the tool life will expire soon.
Bit 4 (ARL) of parameter No. 6802 can be used to specify when (that is, when the life of
a specific tool has expired or when the life of the last tool in a specific tool group has
expired) to output the tool life arrival notice signal.
Parameters Nos. 6844 and 6845 are used for the remaining life setting.
[Output cond.] The signal is set to "1" if:
- Remaining life (life value - life counter value) ≤ remaining life setting
provided that bit 7 (RMT) of parameter No. 6802 = 0
- Remaining life (life value - life counter value) = remaining life setting
The signal is reset to "0" if:
- Remaining life (life value - life counter value) > remaining life setting
- 1047 -
- Remaining life (life value - life counter value) ≠ remaining life setting
NOTE
1 The signal changes when life counting is performed.
2 When using a life count override, reset bit 7 (RMT) of parameter
No. 6802 to 0.
3 When the life count is specified by duration, the unit of the
remaining life and remaining life setting to be compared varies
depending on the life count interval (bit 0 (FCO) of parameter No.
6805). If the tool life is counted every second, the unit of the
values to be compared is one minute; if the tool life is counted
every 0.1 seconds, the unit of the values to be compared is 0.1
minutes.
Tool life counting disable signal LFCIV<Gn048.2>

[Function] Disables tool life counting for selected tools.
[Operation] If the signal "1", the control unit behaves as explained below.
- No life counting is performed for selected tools.
NOTE
The tool life counting disable signal LFCIV<Gn048.2> is valid if bit
6 (LFI) of parameter No. 6804 is "1".
Tool life counting disabled signal LFCIF<Fn093.2>

[Function] Informs that tool life counting is disabled for selected tools.
[Output cond.] The signal becomes "1" when:
- Tool life counting is disabled because the tool life counting disable signal LFCIV is
"1".
- Tool life counting is enabled because the tool life counting disable signal LFCIV is
"0".
Remaining tool count notification signal TLAL<Fn154.0>

[Function] This signal notifies that the number of remaining tools in the group selected by the T code
command is equal to or less than the value set in parameter No. 6846.
[Output cond.] This signal becomes 1 when:
- The number of remaining tools in the group selected by the T code command is
equal to or less than the value set in parameter No. 6846.
This signal becomes 0:
- When parameter No. 6846 is set to a value
- When registration of life management data and removal of all groups by the G10
command is performed
- When a group containing more groups than the setting of parameter No. 6846 is
selected by the T code command
- When one of the following operations is performed for the group that generates the
tool remaining count notification signal
<1> Execution data is cleared on the list screen of tool life management.
- 1048 -
<2> Tool groups are deleted in a batch, tool data is added, or tool data is cleared on
the group editing screen of tool life management.
<3> Execution data is cleared by tool replacement reset signal (TLRST<Gn048.7>).
<4> Life management data is changed or deleted by the G10 command.
<5> One of the following FOCAS2 functions is executed. (cnc_clrcntinfo,
cnc_deltlifegrp, cnc_deltlifedt, cnc_instlifedt, cnc_wr1tlifedata,
cnc_wr1tlifedat2, cnc_wr2tlifedata)
[Example] When three tools are registered in a group, if the number of remaining tools is set to 1
(parameter No. 6846 is 1), then a timing chart of tool remaining count notification signal
TLAL is shown below.
Tool remaining count notification signal TLAL is output at the same time with the T code
of the third tool.
First tool Second tool Third tool
T-code
TF
TLAL
Timing chart of the tool remaining count notification signal
NOTE
When parameter No. 6846 is 0, tool remaining count notification
signal TLAL is not output.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0046 KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1
Gn047 TL128 TL64 TL32 TL16 TL08 TL04 TL02 TL01
Gn048 TLRST TLRSTI TLSKP LFCIV
Gn049 *TLV7 *TLV6 *TLV5 *TLV4 *TLV3 *TLV2 *TLV1 *TLV0
Gn050 *TLV9 *TLV8

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn064 TLCHB TLCHI TLNW TLCH
Fn093 LFCIF
Fn154 TLAL
- 1049 -
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6800 M6T IGI SNG GRS SIG LTM GS2 GS1

#0 GS1
#1 GS2 For the maximum number of groups set in parameter No. 6813, up to four tools can be
registered per group. The combination of the number of registrable groups and the
number of tools per group can be changed by setting GS1 and GS2.
GS2 GS1 Number of groups Number of tools

0 0 1 to maximum number of groups (No. 6813)/8 1 to 16
1 1 1 to maximum number of groups (No. 6813) 1 to 2
NOTE
After changing these parameters, set data again by using G10
L3 ;(registration after deletion of data of all groups).
#2 LTM The tool life count is specified by:

0: Count.
1: Duration.
NOTE
After changing this parameter, set data again by using G10
L3 ;(registration after deletion of data of all groups).
#3 SIG When a tool is skipped by a signal, the group number is:

0: Not input by the tool group number selection signals.
1: Input by the tool group number selection signals.
NOTE
When this parameter is set to 0, a tool of the currently used group is
skipped.
#4 GRS When the tool change reset signal (TLRST) is input:

0: If the life of the group specified by the tool group number selection signals has
expired, the execution data of the group is cleared.
1: The execution data of all registered groups is cleared.
If this parameter is set to 1, the execution data of all registered groups is cleared also
when the clear operation to clear execution data is performed on the tool life management
list screen.
#5 SNG When the tool skip signal (TLSKP) is input while a tool not controlled by the tool life
management function is being used:
0: A tool of the most recently used group or a specified group (bit 3 (SIG) of parameter
No. 6800) is skipped.
1: The tool skip signal is ignored.
- 1050 -
#6 IGI Tool back numbers are:
0: Not ignored.
1: Ignored.
#7 M6T A T code specified in the same block as M06 is:

0: Assumed to be a back number.
1: Assumed to be a command specifying the next tool group.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
M6E EMD LVF TSM
6801
M6E EMD LVF

#1 TSM In the tool life management function, life counting is performed as follows when more
than one offset is specified:
0: Counting is performed for each tool number.
1: Counting is performed for each tool.
#2 LVF When the life value is counted by duration in the tool life management function, tool life
count override signals *TLV0 to *TLV9 <G049.0 to G050.1> are:
0: Not used.
1: Used.
#3 EMD In the tool life management function, the mark "*" indicating that the life has expired is
displayed when:
0: The next tool is used.
1: The life has just expired.
NOTE
If this parameter is set to 0, the "@" mark (indicating that the tool is
in use) is kept displayed unless the next tool whose life has not
expired is used. If this parameter is set to 1, marks are displayed in
different ways depending on the life count type.
If the life count type is the duration specification type, the "*" mark
(indicating that the life has expired) appears when the life has
expired. If the life count type is the count specification type, one
count is not assumed until the end of the program (M02, M30, and so
on). Therefore, even when the life value and the tool life counter
value match, the "*" mark (life has expired) does not appear. The "*"
mark (life has expired) appears when the tool is used again by a tool
group command (T code) or tool change command (M06) issued
after the CNC is reset.
#7 M6E When a T code is specified in the same block as M06:

0: The T code is treated as a back number or the group number to be selected next.
Which number is assumed depends on the setting of bit 7 (M6T) of parameter No.
6800.
1: Life counting for the tool group starts immediately.
- 1051 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6802 RMT TSK E17 TCO T99

#0 T99 When M99 of the main program is executed, and there is a the life was expired tool
group:
0: The tool change signal is not output.
1: The tool change signal is output, and the automatic operation becomes a stopped
state.
If the life count is specified by use count and this parameter 1, the tool change signal
TLCH <Fn064.0> is output and the automatic operation becomes a stopped state if the
life of at least one tool group has expired when the M99 command is specified.
If the life count type is the duration specification type, the automatic operation becomes a
stopped state if the life of at least one tool group has expired when the M99 command is
specified.
M
If the life count is specified by use count, after the M99 command is specified, a tool
group command (T code) selects, from a specified group, a tool whose life has not
expired, and the next tool change command (M06) increments the tool life counter by
one.
T
If the life count is specified by use count, when a tool group command (T code) is
specified after the M99 command is specified, a tool whose life has not expired is
selected from a specified group, and the tool life counter is incremented by one.
#1 TCO
#2 E17
Specifies whether to allow the FOCAS2 or PMC window function to write tool
information of a group being used or a group to be used next during automatic operation
(the OP signal is set to "1").
6802#1(TCO)
1
Condition
0 6802#2(E17)
1 0
During Group being used or to be Tool being used × ○
automatic used next Tool not being used × ○ ○
operation Group neither being used nor to be used next ○ ○ ○
Not during automatic operation ○ ○ ○
○: Tool information can be written from FOCAS2 and PMC window.
×: Tool information cannot be written from FOCAS2 and PMC window.
When an attempt is made to write tool information from PMC window, completion
code 13 (REJECT ALARM) is returned.
: Tool information cannot be cleared.
- 1052 -
NOTE
When tool information of a tool being used (marked with "@") in the
group being used or to be used next or tool information of the most
recently used tool (marked with "@") in a group that is neither the
group being used nor the group to be used next is cleared, the life
counter is reset to 0.
It is possible to modify tool information of a tool in the group to be
used next. However, because tool selection is already completed,
the selected tool does not change even when the tool information is
modified.
This parameter has no influence on modifications to tool information
by edit operations from the tool life management screen.
#6 TSK If the count type in tool life management is the duration type, then when the last tool of a
group is skipped by a signal:
0: The count value for the last tool equals the life value.
1: The count value for the last tool remains unchanged.
#7 RMT The tool life arrival notice signal TLCHB is switched under the following conditions:
0: The signal is turned 1 if the remaining life value (the life value minus the life
counter value) is smaller than or equal to the remaining life setting. The signal is
turned 0 if the remaining life value (the life value minus the life counter value) is
greater than the remaining life setting.
1: The signal is turned 1 if the remaining life value (the life value minus the life
counter value) is equal to the remaining life setting. The signal is turned 0 if the
remaining life value (the life value minus the life counter value) is not equal to the
remaining life setting.
NOTE
When using the life count override feature, set bit 7 (RMT) of
parameter No. 6802 to 0. When the life count is specified by duration,
the unit used for determining the result of comparison between the
remaining life and the remaining life setting varies depending on the
life count interval (bit 0 (FCO) of parameter No. 6805). If the life is
counted every second, the comparison is made in units of 1 minute; if
the life is counted every 0.1 second, the comparison is made in units
of 0.1 minute.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6804 LFI ETE TCI

#1 TCI During automatic operation (the OP signal is "1"), editing of tool life data is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
- 1053 -
NOTE
When this parameter is set to 1, tool life data can be edited even
during automatic operation (the OP signal is "1"). If the target group
for editing is the group being used or the group to be used next,
however, only presetting of the life counter is permitted, and other
data cannot be modified.
#2 ETE In the tool life management screen, the mark of the tool at the life was expired of the final
tool in the group :
0: depends on setting parameter EMD (No.6801#3).
1: is "*" mark.
If bit 2 (ETE) of parameter No. 6804 is set to 1, when the life counter of the final tool in
the group becomes equal to the life value, display mark "*" in the final tool of the tool life
management screen.
When tool change signal TLCH<Fn064.0> is "1", the state of the life was expired of the
tool can be read by reading tool information on the final tool in FOCAS2 or the PMC
window.
#6 LFI In tool life management, counting of the life of a selected tool is:
0: Enabled.
1: Enabled or disabled according to the status of tool life counting disable signal
LFCIV<G048.2>.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6805 TAD TRU TRS FGL FCO

#0 FCO If the life count type is the duration specification type, the life is counted as follows:
0: Every second.
1: Every 0.1 second.
According to the setting of this parameter, the increment system of life values and tool
life counter values displayed on the tool life management screen is set as follows:
Parameter FCO 0 1
Increment system for display and setting of life values and 1-minute 0.1-minute
life counter values increments increments
NOTE
After changing the setting of this parameter, set data again by using
G10L3;(registration after deletion of data of all groups).
#1 FGL If the life count type is the duration specification type, life data registered by G10 is:
0: In one-minute increments.
1: In 0.1-second increments.
- 1054 -
#5 TRS Tool change reset signal TLRST is valid when reset signal RST is not "1" and:
0: The reset state (automatic operation signal OP is "0") is observed.
1: The reset state (automatic operation signal OP is "0"), automatic operation stop state
(The STL and SPL signals are "0" and the OP signal is "1"), or the automatic
operation pause state (the STL signal is "0" and the SPL signal is "1") is observed.
The TLRST signal, however, is invalid when the automatic operation stop state,
automatic operation pause state, and automatic operation start state (the STL signal
is "1") is observed during execution of a data setting command (G10L3).
#6 TRU When the life count type is the duration specification type, and the life is counted every
second (bit 0 (FCO) of parameter No. 6805 is set to 0):
0: Cutting time less than one second is discarded and is not counted.
1: Cutting time less than one second is rounded up and is counted as one second.
NOTE
If the life is counted every 0.1 second (bit 0 (FCO) of parameter No.
6805 is set to 1), cutting time less than 0.1 second is always rounded
up and is counted as 0.1 second.
#7 TAD With tool change type D (bit 7 (M6E) of parameter No. 6801 is set to 1), when a block
specifying M06 contains no T command:
0: An alarm PS0153 is issued.
1: No alarm is issued.
6810 Tool life management ignore number

[Data type] 2-word path
This parameter sets the tool life management ignore number.
When the value specified in a T code exceeds the value set in this parameter, the value
obtained by subtracting the parameter-set value from the T code value is assumed to be
the tool group number for tool life management.
6811 Tool life count restart M code

[Valid data range] 0 to 127 (except 01, 02, 30, 98, and 99)
When 0 is specified, it is ignored.
When the life is specified by count, the tool change signal (TLCH) is output if the life of
at least one tool group has expired when the tool life count restart M code is issued.
The T code (tool life management group command) specified after the tool life count
restart M code selects a tool whose life has not expired from a specified group, and the
next M06 command increments the tool life counter by one.
When the life is specified by duration, specifying the tool life count restart M code causes
nothing. When 0 is set in this parameter, the tool life count restart M code is invalid.
When the data of M code exceeds 127 values, set 0 in parameter No.6811, and set the
value of M code in parameter No.13221. The data range of parameter No.13221 is from 0
to 255.
- 1055 -
6813 Maximum number of groups in tool life management
NOTE
After this parameter has been set, the power must be turned off then
back on for the setting to become effective.

[Unit of data] Group
[Valid data range] 0, 8, 16 to 128
This parameter sets the maximum number of groups to be used for each path. As the
maximum number of groups, set a multiple of eight.
When this parameter is 0, 128 groups are set. Up to 128 groups can be set for each path.
NOTE
If the power is turned on after this parameter is changed, all data in
the tool life management file is initialized. Therefore, the life
management data of all paths that use the tool life management
function must be set.
6844 Remaining tool life (use count)

[Valid data range] This range is the same as the tool life range.
This parameter sets a remaining tool life (use count) used to output the tool life arrival
notice signal when the tool life is specified by use count. If a value greater than the tool
life value or 0 is set in this parameter, the tool life arrival notice signal is not output.
6845 Remaining tool life (use duration)

[Unit of data] min
[Valid data range] Not greater than the tool life value
This parameter sets the remaining tool life (use duration) used to output the tool life
arrival notice signal when the tool life is specified by use duration. If a value greater than
the tool life value or 0 is specified in this parameter, the tool life arrival notice signal is
not output.
NOTE
When the life is counted every 0.1 second (bit 0 (FCO) of parameter
No. 6805 = 1), the parameter value is in 0.1-minute increments.
6846
Number of remaining group tools

This parameter sets the number of remaining group tools.
- 1056 -
If the number of remaining tools in the group selected by the T code command is equal to
or less than the setting of this parameter, tool remaining count notification signal TLAL is
output. When this parameter is set to 0, tool remaining count notification signal TLAL
is not output.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8132 TLF
NOTE

[Data type] Bit
#0 TLF Tool life management is:

0: Not Used.
1: Used.
13221 M code for tool life count restart

[Valid data range] 0 to 255 (except 01, 02, 30, 98, and 99)
This parameter is ignored if it is 0.
See descriptions of parameter No. 6811 for explanations about the operation of the tool
life count restart M code.
This parameter is used if the restart M code exceeds 127.
Reset parameter No. 6811 to 0, and set this parameter with an M code value.
13265 H code for enabling tool length compensation in tool life management

Usually, issuing H99 makes the H code for a tool in current use usable for tool length
compensation. Specifying an arbitrary H code with this parameter causes the specified
H code to be used in place of H99. If 0 is specified with this parameter, H99 is assumed.
The valid data range is 0 to 9999.
13266 D code for enabling cutter compensation in tool life management

Usually, issuing D99 makes the D code for a tool in current use usable for cutter
compensation. Specifying an arbitrary D code with this parameter causes the specified
D code to be used in place of D99. If 0 is specified with this parameter, D99 is assumed.
The valid data range is 0 to 9999.
- 1057 -
Alarm and message

PS0149 FORMAT ERROR IN G10L3 In registration (G10L3 to G11) of tool life management data,
an address other than Q1, Q2, P1, and P2 or an unusable
address was specified.
PS0150 ILLEGAL LIFE GROUP NUMBER The tool group number exceeded the maximum allowable
value. The tool group number (P after specification of G10
L3;) or the group number given by the tool life management
T code in a machining program.
PS0151 GROUP NOT FOUND AT LIFE DATA The tool group specified in a machining program is not set in
tool life management data.
PS0152 OVER MAXIMUM TOOL NUMBER The number of tools registered in one group exceeded the
maximum allowable registration tool number.
PS0153 T-CODE NOT FOUND In registration of tool life data, a block in which the T code
needs to be specified does not include the T code.
Alternatively, in tool exchange method D, M06 is specified
solely. Modify the program.
PS0154 NOT USING TOOL IN LIFE GROUP The H99 command, D99 command, or the H/D code set by
parameters No. 13265 and No. 13266 was specified when no
tool belonging to a group is used.
PS0155 ILLEGAL T-CODE COMMAND The T code specified in the same block as M06 in the
machining program does not correspond to the block
currently being used. Modify the program.
PS0156 P/L COMMAND NOT FOUND The P and L commands are not specified in the beginning of
a program for setting a tool group. Modify the program.
PS0157 TOO MANY TOOL GROUPS In registration of tool life management data, the group setting
command block counts of P (group number) and L (tool life)
exceeded the maximum group count.
PS0158 TOOL LIFE VALUE OUT OF RANGE The life value that is being set is too large. Change the
setting.
PS0159 ILLEGAL TOOL LIFE DATA Tool life management data is corrupted for some reason.
Register the tool data in the tool group or the tool data in the
group again by G10L3; or MDI input.
PS0431 ILLEGAL T/R DATA OF TOOL LIFE The arbitrary group number (T) or remaining amount setting
(R) is invalid.
IO1104 OVER MAXIMUM TOOL LIFE PAIRS The maximum number of tool life management pairs is
exceeded. Modify the setting of the maximum number of
tool life management pairs in parameter No. 6813.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64304EN) Tool life management
- 1058 -
B-64303EN-1/02 12.PROGRAM COMMAND
12 PROGRAM COMMAND
Chapter 12, "PROGRAM COMMAND", consists of the following sections:
12.1 DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING/POCKET CALCULATOR TYPE DECIMAL

POINT PROGRAMMING .........................................................................................................1059
12.2 G CODE SYSTEM.....................................................................................................................1061
12.3 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION...............................................................................................1067
12.4 PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE / NUMBER OF REGISTERABLE PROGRAMS.........1069
12.5 INCH/METRIC CONVERSION ...............................................................................................1070
12.6 CUSTOM MACRO....................................................................................................................1075
12.7 CANNED CYCLE FOR DRILLING.........................................................................................1096
12.8 CANNED CYCLE (T Series) / MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNED CYCLE (T Series)......1111
12.9 IN-FEED CONTROL (FOR GRINDING MACHINE) (M Series) ...........................................1120
12.10 CANNED GRINDING CYCLE (FOR GRINDING MACHINE) .............................................1121
12.11 MIRROR IMAGE FOR DOUBLE TURRET (T Series) ...........................................................1126
12.12 INDEX TABLE INDEXING (M Series) ...................................................................................1128
12.13 SCALING (M Series).................................................................................................................1138
12.14 COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION (M Series) ..................................................................1145
12.15 MACRO COMPILER/MACRO EXECUTER...........................................................................1146
12.16 OPTIONAL ANGLE CHAMFERING AND CORNER ROUNDING (M Series) ...................1147
12.17 CHAMFERING AND CORNER ROUNDING (T Series) ........................................................1148
12.18 DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSIONS PROGRAMMING (T Series)........................................1150
12.19 PATTERN DATA INPUT .........................................................................................................1152
12.1 DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING/POCKET

CALCULATOR TYPE DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING
Overview
Numerical values can be entered with a decimal point. A decimal point can be used when entering a
distance, time, or speed. Decimal points can be specified with the following addresses:
X,Y,Z,U,V,W,A,B,C,I,J,K,Q,R,F .......M series (for a type common to all axes)

X,Y,Z,U,V,W,A,B,C,I,J,K,R,F ...........Lathe system
There are two types of decimal point notation: calculator-type notation and standard notation.
When calculator-type decimal point notation is used, a value without decimal point is considered to be
specified in millimeters, inches or degree. When standard decimal point notation is used, such a value is
considered to be specified in least input increments. Select either calculator-type or standard decimal
point notation by using the parameter DPI (No. 3401#0). Setting the parameter AXDx (No. 3455#0) to
1 enables the calculator-type decimal input to be set up for individual axes separately. Values can be
specified both with and without decimal point in a single program.
Pocket calculator type decimal Standard type decimal point

Program command
point programming programming
X1000 1000mm 1mm
Command value without decimal point Unit : mm Unit : Least input increment (0.001mm)
X1000.0 1000mm 1000mm
Command value with decimal point Unit : mm Unit : mm
- 1059 -
12.PROGRAM COMMAND B-64303EN-1/02
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3401 DPI

#0 DPI When a decimal point is omitted in an address that can include a decimal point
0: The least input increment is assumed. (Normal decimal point input)
1: The unit of mm, inches, degree, or second is assumed. (Pocket calculator type
decimal point input)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3455 AXDx

[Data type] Bit axis
#0 AXDx If a decimal point is omitted for an axis address with which a decimal point can be used,
the value is determined:
0: In accordance with the least input increment. (Normal decimal point input)
1: In millimeters, inches, or seconds. (calculator-type decimal point input)
NOTE
This parameter specifies the calculator-type decimal point input
function for each axis.
Alarm and message

PS0007 ILLEGAL USE OF DECIMAL POINT A decimal point (.) was specified at an address where no
decimal point may be specified, or two decimal points were
specified.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64304EN) Decimal point programming
- 1060 -
12.2 G CODE SYSTEM
12.2.1 G Code List in the Lathe System

T
Overview
There are three G code systems : A,B, and C. Select a G code system using parameter GSC (No. 3401#7)
and parameter GSB (No. 3401#6).
Table 12.2.1 (a) G code list

G code system
Group Function
A B C
G00 G00 G00 Positioning (Rapid traverse)
G01 G01 G01 Linear interpolation (Cutting feed)
01
G02 G02 G02 Circular interpolation CW or helical interpolation CW
G03 G03 G03 Circular interpolation CCW or helical interpolation CCW
G04 G04 G04 Dwell
G05.4 G05.4 G05.4 HRV3 on/off
G07.1 G07.1 G07.1
Cylindrical interpolation
(G107) (G107) (G107)
00
G08 G08 G08 Advanced preview control
G09 G09 G09 Exact stop
G10 G10 G10 Programmable data input
G11 G11 G11 Programmable data input mode cancel
G12.1 G12.1 G12.1
Polar coordinate interpolation mode
(G112) (G112) (G112)
21
G13.1 G13.1 G13.1
Polar coordinate interpolation cancel mode
(G113) (G113) (G113)
G17 G17 G17 XpYp plane selection
G18 G18 G18 16 ZpXp plane selection
G19 G19 G19 YpZp plane selection
G20 G20 G70 Input in inch
06
G21 G21 G71 Input in mm
G22 G22 G22 Stored stroke check function on
09
G23 G23 G23 Stored stroke check function off
G25 G25 G25 Spindle speed fluctuation detection off
08
G26 G26 G26 Spindle speed fluctuation detection on
G27 G27 G27 Reference position return check
G28 G28 G28 Return to reference position
00
G30 G30 G30 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference position return
G31 G31 G31 Skip function
G32 G33 G33 Threading
G34 G34 G34 Variable lead threading
G36 G36 G36 01 Automatic tool offset (X axis)
G37 G37 G37 Automatic tool offset (Z axis)
G39 G39 G39 Tool nose radius compensation: corner rounding interpolation
G40 G40 G40 Tool nose radius compensation : cancel
G41 G41 G41 07 Tool nose radius compensation : left
G42 G42 G42 Tool nose radius compensation : right
G50 G92 G92 Coordinate system setting or max spindle speed clamp
00
G50.3 G92.1 G92.1 Workpiece coordinate system preset
- 1061 -

G code system
Group Function
A B C
G50.2 G50.2 G50.2
Polygon turning cancel
(G250) (G250) (G250)
20
G51.2 G51.2 G51.2
Polygon turning
(G251) (G251) (G251)
G50.4 G50.4 G50.4 Cancel synchronous control
G50.5 G50.5 G50.5 Cancel composite control
G50.6 G50.6 G50.6 Cancel superimposed control
G51.4 G51.4 G51.4 Start synchronous control
00
G51.5 G51.5 G51.5 Start composite control
G51.6 G51.6 G51.6 Start superimposed control
G52 G52 G52 Local coordinate system setting
G53 G53 G53 Machine coordinate system setting
G54 G54 G54 Workpiece coordinate system 1 selection
14
G61 G61 G61 Exact stop mode
G63 G63 G63 15 Tapping mode
G64 G64 G64 Cutting mode
G65 G65 G65 00 Macro call
G66 G66 G66 Macro modal call
12
G67 G67 G67 Macro modal call cancel
G68 G68 G68 Mirror image on for double turret or balance cutting mode
04 Mirror image off for double turret or balance cutting mode
G69 G69 G69
cancel
G70 G70 G72 Finishing cycle
G71 G71 G73 Stock removal in turning
G72 G72 G74 Stock removal in facing
G73 G73 G75 00 Pattern repeating cycle
G74 G74 G76 End face peck drilling cycle
G75 G75 G77 Outer diameter/internal diameter drilling cycle
G76 G76 G78 Multiple-thread cutting cycle
G71 G71 G72 Traverse grinding cycle (for grinding machine)
G72 G72 G73 Traverse direct sizing/grinding cycle (for grinding machine)
01
G73 G73 G74 Oscillation grinding cycle (for grinding machine)
G74 G74 G75 Oscillation direct sizing/grinding cycle (for grinding machine)
G80 Canned cycle cancel for drilling
G80 G80
Electronic gear box : synchronization cancellation
Spot drilling (FS10/11-T format)
G81 G81 G81
Electronic gear box : synchronization start
G82 G82 G82 10 Counter boring (FS10/11-T format)
G83 G83 G83 Cycle for face drilling
G83.1 G83.1 G83.1 High-speed peck drilling cycle (FS10/11-T format)
G84 G84 G84 Cycle for face tapping
G84.2 G84.2 G84.2 Rigid tapping cycle (FS10/11-T format)
G85 G85 G85 Cycle for face boring
G87 G87 G87 Cycle for side drilling
10
G88 G88 G88 Cycle for side tapping
G89 G89 G89 Cycle for side boring
- 1062 -
G code system
Group Function
A B C
G90 G77 G20 Outer diameter/internal diameter cutting cycle
G92 G78 G21 01 Threading cycle
G94 G79 G24 End face turning cycle
G91.1 G91.1 G91.1 00 Maximum specified incremental amount check
G96 G96 G96 Constant surface speed control
02
G97 G97 G97 Constant surface speed control cancel
G96.1 G96.1 G96.1 Spindle indexing execution (waiting for completion)
G96.2 G96.2 G96.2 Spindle indexing execution (not waiting for completion)
00
G96.3 G96.3 G96.3 Spindle indexing completion check
G96.4 G96.4 G96.4 SV speed control mode ON
G98 G94 G94 Feed per minute
05
G99 G95 G95 Feed per revolution
- G90 G90 Absolute programming
03
- G91 G91 Incremental programming
- G98 G98 Canned cycle : return to initial level
11
- G99 G99 Canned cycle : return to R point level
12.2.2 G Code List in the Machining Center System

M
G code Group Function
G00 Positioning (rapid traverse)
G01 Linear interpolation (cutting feed)
01
G02 Circular interpolation CW or helical interpolation CW
G03 Circular interpolation CCW or helical interpolation CCW
G04 Dwell, Exact stop
G05.1 AI advanced preview control / AI contour control
G05.4 HRV3 on/off
G07.1 (G107) 00 Cylindrical interpolation
G09 Exact stop
G10 Programmable data input
G11 Programmable data input mode cancel
G15 Polar coordinates command cancel
17
G16 Polar coordinates command
G17 XpYp plane selection Xp: X axis or its parallel axis
G18 02 ZpXp plane selection Yp: Y axis or its parallel axis
G19 YpZp plane selection Zp: Z axis or its parallel axis
G20 Input in inch
06
G21 Input in mm
G22 Stored stroke check function on
04
G23 Stored stroke check function off
G27 Reference position return check
G28 Automatic return to reference position
G29 00 Movement from reference position
G30 2nd, 3rd and 4th reference position return
G31 Skip function
G33 01 Threading
G37 Automatic tool length measurement
00
G39 Cutter compensation : corner circular interpolation
- 1063 -

G40 Cutter compensation : cancel
G41 07 Cutter compensation : left
G42 Cutter compensation : right
G40.1 Normal direction control cancel mode
G41.1 19 Normal direction control on : left
G42.1 Normal direction control on : right
G43 Tool length compensation +
08
G44 Tool length compensation -
G45 Tool offset : increase
G46 Tool offset : decrease
00
G47 Tool offset : double increase
G48 Tool offset : double decrease
G49 08 Tool length compensation cancel
G50 Scaling cancel
11
G51 Scaling
G50.1 Programmable mirror image cancel
22
G51.1 Programmable mirror image
G52 Local coordinate system setting
00
G53 Machine coordinate system setting
G54 Workpiece coordinate system 1 selection
G54.1 Additional workpiece coordinate system selection
G56 14 Workpiece coordinate system 3 selection
G60 00 Single direction positioning
G61 Exact stop mode
G62 Automatic corner override
15
G63 Tapping mode
G64 Cutting mode
G65 00 Macro call
G66 Macro modal call
12
G67 Macro modal call cancel
G68 Coordinate system rotation mode on
16
G69 Coordinate system rotation mode off
G73 Peck drilling cycle
09
G74 Left-handed tapping cycle
G75 01 Plunge grinding cycle (for grinding machine)
G76 09 Fine boring cycle
G77 Plunge direct sizing/grinding cycle (for grinding machine)
G78 01 Continuous-feed surface grinding cycle (for grinding machine)
G79 Intermittent-feed surface grinding cycle (for grinding machine)
- 1064 -
G80 Canned cycle cancel
Electronic gear box : synchronization cancellation
Drilling cycle or spot boring cycle
G81
Electronic gear box : synchronization start
G82 Drilling cycle or counter boring cycle
G83 Peck drilling cycle
G84 Tapping cycle
09
G84.2 Rigid tapping cycle (FS10/11 format)
G84.3 Left-handed rigid tapping cycle (FS10/11 format)
G85 Boring cycle
G86 Boring cycle
G87 Back boring cycle
G88 Boring cycle
G89 Boring cycle
G90 Absolute programming
03
G91 Incremental programming
G91.1 Checking the maximum incremental amount specified
G92 00 Setting for workpiece coordinate system or clamp at maximum spindle speed
G92.1 Workpiece coordinate system preset
G93 Inverse time feed
G94 05 Feed per minute
G95 Feed per revolution
G96 Constant surface speed control
13
G97 Constant surface speed control cancel
G98 Canned cycle : return to initial level
10
G99 Canned cycle : return to R point level
G160 In-feed control cancel (for grinding machine)
20
G161 In-feed control (for grinding machine)
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
GSC GSB
3401

#6 GSB The G code system is set.

#7 GSC
GSC GSB G code
0 0 G code system A
0 1 G code system B
1 0 G code system C
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G23 CLR FPM G91 G01
3402
G23 CLR G70 G91 G19 G18 G01

- 1065 -
#0 G01 G01 Mode entered when the power is turned on or when the control is cleared
0: G00 mode (positioning)
1: G01 mode (linear interpolation)
#1 G18 Plane selected when power is turned on or when the control is cleared
0: G17 mode (plane XY)
1: G18 mode (plane ZX)
#2 G19 Plane selected when power is turned on or when the control is cleared
0: The setting of bit 1 (G18) of parameter No.3402 is followed.
1: G19 mode (plane YZ)
When this bit is set to 1, set bit 1 (G18) of parameter No.3402 to 0.
G19 G18 G17, G18, or G19 mode

0 0 G17 mode (X-Y plane)
0 1 G18 mode (Z-X plane)
1 0 G19 mode (Y-Z plane)
#3 G91 When the power is turned on or when the control is cleared

0: G90 mode (absolute command)
1: G91 mode (incremental command)
#4 FPM At power-on time or in the cleared state:

0: G99 or G95 mode (feed per revolution) is set.
1: G98 or G94 mode (feed per minute) is set.
#5 G70 The commands for inch input and metric input are:
0: G20 (inch input) and G21 (metric input).
1: G70 (inch input) and G71 (metric input).
#6 CLR Reset button on the MDI panel, external reset signal, reset and rewind signal, and
emergency stop signal
0: Cause reset state.
1: Cause clear state.
For the reset and clear states, refer to Appendix in the Operator’s Manual.
#7 G23 When the power is turned on

0: G22 mode (stored stroke check on)
1: G23 mode (stored stroke check off)
Alarm and message

PS0010 IMPROPER G-CODE An unusable G code is specified.
- 1066 -
Note
NOTE
1 When the power is turned on or the cleared state is set by a reset (bit 6 (CLR) of
parameter No. 3402 is set to 1), modal G codes are placed in the following
states:
(1) G codes marked with in Table 12.2 are enabled.
(2) When the system is cleared due to power-on or reset, whichever specified,
either G20 or G21, remains effective.
(3) Parameter G23 (No. 3402#7) is used to specify whether G22 or G23 is to be
selected upon power-on. The selection of G22 or G23 is not, however,
changed when the CNC is cleared upon a reset. When the system is
cleared due to reset, whichever specified, either G22 or G23, remains
effective.
2 G codes of group 00 except G10 and G11 are single-shot G codes.
3 Alarm PS0010 is displayed when a G code not listed in the G code list is
specified or a G code without a corresponding option is specified.
4 G codes of different groups can be specified in the same block.
If G codes of the same group are specified in the same block, the G code
specified last is valid.
5 If a G code of group 01 is specified in a canned cycle, the canned cycle is
canceled in the same way as when a G80 command is specified. G codes of
group 01 are not affected by G codes for specifying a canned cycle.
6 When G code system A is used for a canned cycle, only the initial level is
provided at the return point.
7 G codes are displayed for each group number.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64304EN) Preparatory function (G function)
Status when turning power on, when clear and when reset
12.3 PROGRAM CONFIGURATION

Overview
A program consists of the following components:
Table 12.3 (a) Program components

Components Descriptions
Program code start Symbol indicating the start of a program file
Leader section Used for the title of a program file, etc.
Program start Symbol indicating the start of a program
Program section Commands for machining
Comment section Comments or directions for the operator
Program code end Symbol indicating the end of a program file
- 1067 -
Leader section
Program code start % TITLE ; Program start

O0001 ;
Program (COMMENT) Comment section

section
M30 ;
% Program code end
Fig. 12.3 (a) Program configuration
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0100 CTV

[Data type] Bit
#1 CTV Character counting for TV check in the comment section of a program.

0: Performed
1: Not performed
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3201 NPE N99

#5 N99 With an M99 block, when bit 6 (NPE) of parameter No.3201 = 0, program registration is
assumed to be:
0: Completed
1: Not completed
#6 NPE With an M02, M30, or M99 block, program registration is assumed to be:
0: Completed
1: Not completed
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3404 SBP

#2 SBP In an external device subprogram call (M198), the address P format is based on:
0: File number specification
1: Program number specification
NOTE
In memory card operation, the program number specification
format is used, regardless of the setting of this parameter.
- 1068 -
6030 M code to execute external device subprogram calls

Set the M code to execute external device subprogram calls. When 0 is set, M198 is used.
M01, M02, M30, M98, and M99 cannot be used to execute external device subprogram
calls. When a negative number, 1, 2, 30, 98, or 99 is set for this parameter, M198 is used
to execute external device subprogram calls.
Alarm and message

SR0001 TH ERROR A TH error was detected during reading from an input device.
The read code that caused the TH error and how many
statements it is from the block can be verified in the
diagnostics screen.
SR0002 TV ERROR An error was detected during the single–block TV error.
The TV check can be suppressed by setting TVC parameter
No. 0000#0 to “0”.
PS5010 END OF RECORD The EOR (End of Record) code is specified in the middle of a
block. This alarm is also generated when the percentage at the
end of the NC program is read.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64304EN) Program configuration
12.4 PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE / NUMBER OF

REGISTERABLE PROGRAMS
The following table lists the combinations of program storage sizes and the total number of registrable
programs.
・Series 0i-TD
Model Series 0i-TD
Item Package 1 Package 2
320Kbyte － ○
Part program storage size 512Kbyte ○ －
1Mbyte (2-path control) ○ －
400 ○ ○
Number of registerable programs
800 (2-path control) ○ －
・Series 0i-MD
Model Series 0i-MD
Item Package 1 Package 2 Option
320Kbyte － ○ －
Part program storage size 512Kbyte ○ －－
2Mbyte －－ ○
Number of registerable programs 400 ○ ○ －
- 1069 -
・Series 0i Mate
Model
Series 0i Mate
Item
Part program storage size 512Kbyte ○
Number of registerable programs 400 ○
NOTE
Program O0001 1 The program storage size means the
O0001 ; First page
maximum size of a program if the program
N1 G01 ; is the one and only program registered.
(Area in use) 2 If more than one program is registered, the
total size of registerable programs reduces
N100 … ; Second page
for the following reason.
The Series 0i-D manage programs in page
(Area in use) units. The unit of program storage is
managed also in page units. When a
M30 ; Last page program is created, as many pages as
(Area in use) necessary to store the program are
(Unused area)
secured, and the program is stored on
these pages. Generally, the last program
storage page has an unused area (Fig. 1).
Unusable for any other This unused area cannot be used to store
program any other program. For the sake of
program management, it is regarded as an
Example of creating program O0001
area in use.
The Series FS0i-C uses a similar way of
management, but the unit of pages in it
differs from that in the FS0i-D. So, if more
than one program is registered in the
Series 0i-D, the total program size of
registerable programs in the Series 0i-D
differs from that in the FS0i-C.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64304EN) Program management
12.5 INCH/METRIC CONVERSION

Overview
Either inch or metric input can be selected by G code.
Conventionally, inch/metric switching must be performed at the reference position (machine coordinate
system origin). However, setting bit 2 (IRF) of parameter No. 14000 to 1 enables inch/metric switching
to be performed in the reference position (parameter No. 1240). However, it is necessary to enable (set
bit 0 (NWZ) of parameter No. 8136 to 0) the workpiece coordinate system.
- 1070 -
Setting bit 0 (NIM) of parameter No. 11222 enables inch/metric switching to be performed even in
positions other than the reference position. However, it is necessary to enable (set bit 0 (NWZ) and bit 1
(NWC) of parameter No. 8136 to 0 and 1, respectively) the workpiece coordinate system and workpiece
coordinate system presetting.
Signal
Inch input signal INCH<Fn002.0>
[Function] This signal indicates that inch input mode is active.
[Output cond.] "1"indicates that the inch input mode (G20) is in progress, and "0" indicates that metric
input mode (G21) is in progress.
This signal changes to the corresponding state when modes are switched using the setting
data display on the MDI panel.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn002 INCH
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0000 INI

#2 INI Unit of input

0: In metrics
1: In inches
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1001 INM

NOTE
#0 INM Least command increment on the linear axis

0: In mm (metric system machine)
1: In inches (inch system machine)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1006 ROSx ROTx

NOTE
- 1071 -
#0 ROTx Setting linear or rotation axis.

#1 ROSx
ROSx ROTx Meaning
0 0 Linear axis
(1) Inch/metric conversion is done.
(2) All coordinate values are linear axis type. (Is not rounded in 0 to 360°)
(3) Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type (Refer to parameter No.3624)
0 1 Rotation axis (A type)
(1) Inch/metric conversion is not done.
(2) Machine coordinate values are rounded in 0 to 360°. Absolute coordinate values
are rounded or not rounded by parameter No.1008#0(ROAx) and #2(RRLx).
(3) Stored pitch error compensation is the rotation type. (Refer to parameter No.3624)
(4) Automatic reference position return (G28, G30) is done in the reference position
return direction and the move amount does not exceed one rotation.
1 1 Rotation axis (B type)
(1) Inch/metric conversion, absolute coordinate values and relative coordinate values
are not done.
(2) Machine coordinate values, absolute coordinate values and relative coordinate
values are linear axis type. (Is not rounded in 0 to 360°).
(3) Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type (Refer to parameter No.3624)
(4) Cannot be used with the rotation axis roll over function and the index table indexing
function (M series)
Except for the Setting is invalid (unused)
above.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3104 MCN

#0 MCN Machine position

0: Regardless of whether input is made in mm or inches, the machine position is
displayed in mm for millimeter machines, or in inches for inch machines.
1: When input is made in mm, the machine position is displayed in mm, and when
input is made in inches, the machine position is displayed in inches accordingly.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3405 AUX

#0 AUX When the second auxiliary function is specified in the calculator-type decimal point input
format or with a decimal point, the multiplication factor for a value output (onto the code
signal) relative to a specified value is such that:
0: The same multiplication factor is used for both of metric input and inch input.
1: A multiplication factor used for inch input is 10 times greater than that used for
metric input.
When the second auxiliary function is specified in the calculator-type decimal point input
format or with a decimal point, the value output onto the code signal is a specified value
multiplied by a value indicated below.
Increment system Parameter AUX=0 Parameter AUX=1
IS-A for reference axis 100 times 100 times
Metric input
system IS-B for reference axis 1000 times 1000 times
IS-C for reference axis 10000 times 10000 times
IS-A for reference axis 100 times 1000 times
Inch input
IS-B for reference axis 1000 times 10000 times
system
IS-C for reference axis 10000 times 100000 times
- 1072 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8136 NWC NWZ
NOTE

[Data type] Bit
#0 NWZ Workpiece coordinate system is:

0: Used.
1: Not Used.
#1 NWC Workpiece coordinate system preset is:

0: Used.
1: Not Used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11222 CIM NIM

#0 NIM Automatic conversion of a coordinate system by an inch/metric conversion command
(G20 or G21) is:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
#1 CIM When an inch/metric conversion command (G20 or G21) is specified, if the workpiece
coordinate system is shifted by the shift amount as described below:
0: An alarm (PS1298) is issued.
1: Clearing is performed.
If bit 0 (NIM) of parameter No. 11222 is set to 1, or if bit 2 (IRF) of parameter No. 14000
is set to 1, this parameter clears the following:
• Manual intervention made when the manual absolute signal is off
• Issuance of a move command with the machine locked
• Movement by handle interrupt
• Operation with a mirror image
• Shifting of a workpiece coordinate system when a local coordinate system or
workpiece coordinate system is set up
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14000 IMAx IRFx

NOTE
- 1073 -
#2 IRFx An inch-metric switch command (G20, G21) at the reference position is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
When this function is enabled for an axis, if an attempt to switch between the inch and
metric unit is made although the tool is not at the reference position on that axis, an alarm
(PS5362) is issued, and switching between the inch and metric unit is canceled.
Be sure to move the tool to the reference position by, for example, specifying G28 before
switching between the inch and metric unit.
NOTE
1 This function enables the inch/metric switching commands (G20
and G21) at the reference position. It does not enable the
switching of the setting input unit (bit 2 (INI) of parameter No.
0000).
2 Swithching between inch and metric by setting the setting input unit
(bit 2 (INI) of parameter No. 0000) is enabled only when the
machine coordinate of the first reference position is 0 (parameter
No. 1240 is 0) and presence on the first reference position is
assumed.
For a system in which the machine coordinate of the first reference
position is not 0, set this parameter to 1 and specify G20/G21 in the
first reference position to switch between inch and metric.
#7 IMAx When switching between inch and millimeter was performed in a position other than the
reference position:
0: An alarm occurs.
1: No alarm occurs.
NOTE
Set this parameter to 1 for the rotation axis or other axes not
related to inch/millimeter switching.
Warning
WARNING
When switching inch input (G20) to metric input (G21) and vice versa, tool
compensation values are automatically converted and need not be re-set.
Note
NOTE
1 When the least input increment and the least command increment systems are
different, the maximum error is half of the least command increment. This error
is not accumulated.
2 The inch and metric input can also be switched using bit 2 (INI) of parameter No.
0000.
3 If a function selected using bit 2 (IRF) of parameter No. 14000 or bit 0 (NIM) of
parameter No. 11222 is not used, be sure to perform inch/metric switching at the
reference position (machine coordinate system origin).
- 1074 -
Alarm and message

PS1298 ILLEGAL INCH/METRIC An error occurred during inch/metric switching.
CONVERSION
PS5362 CONVERT INCH/MM AT REF-POS An inch/metric conversion was performed at a position other
than the reference position. Perform an inch/metric
conversion after returning to the reference position.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64304EN) Inch metric conversion (G20, G21)
12.6 CUSTOM MACRO
12.6.1 Custom Macro

Overview
A subprogram is useful for repeatedly executing the same operation. With the custom macro function,
however, variables, operation commands, conditional branches, and so forth can be used to create
general-purpose programs more simply for pocketing, user-specific canned cycles, and so forth.
From a machining program, a custom macro can be called with a simple instruction as in the case of a
subprogram.
Machining program Custom macro
O0001 ; O9010 ;
: #1=#18/2 ;
: G01 G42 X#1 Y#1 F300 ;
:
G65P9010 R50.0 L2 ; G02 X#1 Y-#1 R#1 ;
: :
: :
:
M30 ;
M99 ;
Thus, when a function is programmed as a custom macro body, the function can be made more universal.
This means that a program can be created using variables for values that can change or are not defined yet.
This feature also leads to application of group technology.
For example, classify similar workpieces into a group and create a general-purpose custom macro by
using variables for such a group. Thus, the need for programming for an individual workpiece in the
group can be eliminated by assigning desired values to the variables.
r β
α
As an example, the bolt hole circle shown above can be created simply. By creating and once registering
a custom macro for the bolt hole circle, the CNC can operate as if it had a bolt hole circle function.
- 1075 -
The programmer can use the bolt hole circle function by remembering the following command:
G65 Pp Rr Aα Bβ Kk ;
P : Macro number of bolt hole circle
r : Radius
α: Start angle
β: Angle between circles
k : Number of circles
Signal
Custom Macro Input Signals
UI000 to UI015<Gn054,Gn055>, UI016 to UI031<Gn056,Gn057>,
UI100 to UI131<Gn276 to Gn279>, UI200 to UI231<Gn280 to Gn283>
UI300 to UI331<Gn284 to Gn287>
[Function] No function is provided for the control unit. These signals can be read by a custom macro
as a type of system variable, and are used for interface signals between custom macros
and the PMC.
These signals correspond to system variables as indicated below.
- When the parameter MIF (No.6001#0) is set to 0 :
Signals Q'ty Variables Correspondence of values
UI000 1 #1000
UI001 1 #1001
UI002 1 #1002
UI003 1 #1003 "0" at 0 and "1" at 1
: : :
UI014 1 #1014
UI015 1 #1015
UI000 to UI015 16 #1032 Unsigned 16-bit binary code *1
∑ {#[1000 + i] × 2 }
15
*1
Variable value #1032 = i
i =0
These system variables cannot be used on the left side of an assignment statement.
UI000 1 #1000
UI001 1 #1001
UI002 1 #1002
UI003 1 #1003 "0" at 0 and "1" at 1
: : :
UI030 1 #1030
UI031 1 #1031
*1
UI000 to UI031 32 #1032 Signed 32-bit binary code
*1
*1
*1
∑ {2 × V }− 2
30
*1
Variable value #(1032+n) = i
i
31
× V31
i =0
Where Vi=0 when UIni is “0” and Vi=1 when UIni is “1”
n : 0 to 3
These system variables cannot be used on the left side of an assignment statement.
- 1076 -
Custom Macro Output Signals

UO000 to UO015<Fn054,Fn055>, UO100 to UO131<Fn056 to Fn059>
UO016 to UO031<Fn276,Fn277>, UO200 to UO231<Fn280 to Fn283>
UO300 to UO331<Fn284 to Fn287>
[Function] No function is provided for the control unit. These signals can be read or written by a
custom macro as a type of system variable, and are used for interface signals between
custom macros and the PMC.
These signals correspond to system variables as indicated below.

UO000 1 #1100
UO001 1 #1101
UO002 1 #1102
UO003 1 #1103 "0" at 0 and "1" at 1
: : :
UO014 1 #1114
UO015 1 #1115
*1
UO000 to UO015 16 #1132 Unsigned 16-bit binary code
*2
UO100 to UO131 32 #1133 Signed 32-bit binary code
∑ {#[1100 + i] × 2 }
15
*1 Variable value #1132 = i
i =0
∑ {2 × V }− 2
30
*2 Variable value #1133 = i
i
31
× V31
i =0
Where Vi=0 when UO1i is “0”and Vi=1 when UO1i is “1”

These system variables can be used on the left side of an assignment statement as well as
on the right side.
The value assigned to the system variable used on the left side last is used for the value of
the system variable to be assigned on the right side.

UO000 1 #1100
UO001 1 #1101
UO002 1 #1102
UO003 1 #1103 "0" at 0 and "1" at 1
: : :
UO030 1 #1130
UO031 1 #1131
*1
*1
*1
*1
∑ {2 × V }− 2
30
*1 Variable value #(1132+n) = i
i
31
× V31
i =0
Where Vi=0 when UOni is “0”and Vi=1 when UOni is “1”

n : 0 to 3
These system variables can be used on the left side of an assignment statement as well as
on the right side.
The value assigned to the system variable used on the left side last is used for the value of
the system variable to be assigned on the right side.
- 1077 -
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn054 UI007 UI006 UI005 UI004 UI003 UI002 UI001 UI000
- 1078 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn054 UO007 UO006 UO005 UO004 UO003 UO002 UO001 UO000
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
SBV SBM HGO MGO G67
6000
SBV SBM HGO V10 MGO G67

#0 G67 If the macro continuous-state call cancel command (G67) is specified when the macro
continuous-state call mode (G66) is not set:
0: Alarm PS0122 is issued.
1: The specification of G67 is ignored.
#1 MGO When a GOTO statement for specifying custom macro control is executed, a high-speed
branch to 20 sequence numbers executed from the start of the program is:
0: A high-speed branch is not caused to n sequence numbers from the start of the
executed program.
1: A high-speed branch is caused to n sequence numbers from the start of the program.
#3 V10 As system variable numbers for tool offset:

0 : The standard system variable numbers for the Series 0 are used.
1 : The same system variable numbers as those used for the Series 10/11 are used.
- 1079 -
The tables below indicate the system variables for tool offset numbers 1 to 400. The
values for tool offset numbers 1 to 200 can be read from or assigned to the system
variables in parentheses.
(1) Tool offset memory A
System variable number
V10 = 0 V10 = 1
#10001 to #10400 #10001 to #10400
Wear offset value
(#2001 to #2200) (#2001 to #2200)
(2) Tool offset memory C
System variable number
V10 = 0 V10 = 1
#11001 to #11400 #10001 to #10400
Wear offset value
Tool length (#2201 to #2400) (#2001 to #2200)
offset #10001 to #10400 #11001 to #11400
Geometry offset value
(#2001 to #2200) (#2201 to #2400)
Tool radius Wear offset value #13001 to #13400 #12001 to #12400
offset Geometry offset value #12001 to #12400 #13001 to #13400
#4 HGO When a GOTO statement in a custom macro control command is executed, a high-speed
branch to the 30 sequence numbers immediately before the executed statement is:
0: Not made.
1: Made.
#5 SBM Custom macro statement

0: Not stop the single block
1: Stops the single block
If you want to disable the single blocks in custom macro statements using system variable
#3003, set this parameter to 0. If this parameter is set to 1, the single blocks in custom
macro statements cannot be disabled using system variable #3003. To control single
blocks in custom macro statements using system variable #3003, use bit 7 (SBV) of
parameter No. 6000.
#7 SBV Custom macro statement

0: Not stop the single block
1: Enable/disable single block stop with system variable #3003
Parameter SBM (No.6000#5)
0 1
0 Disables single block stop. Enables single block stop. (With
Parameter SBV Enables single block stop. (With variable #3003, single block stop
(No.6000#7) 1 variable #3003, single block stop cannot be enabled/disabled. Single
can be enabled/disabled.) block stop is enabled at all times.)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6001 CCV TCS CRO PV5 PRT MIF

#0 MIF The custom macro interface signals are based on:

0: Standard specification.
(The signals UI000 to UI015, UO000 to UO015, and UO100 to UO131 are used.)
1: Extended specification.
(The signals UI000 to UI031, UI100 to UI131, UI200 to UI231, UI300 to UI331,
UO000 to UO031, UO100 to UO131, UO200 to UO231, and UO300 to UO331 are
used.)
- 1080 -
#1 PRT Reading zero when data is output using a DPRINT command
0: Outputs a space
1: Outputs no data
#3 PV5 Custom macro common variables:

0: #500 to #599 are output. (Note)
1: #100 to #199 and #500 to 599 are output. (Note)
NOTE
The settings of parameter No. 8135 are described below.
When the parameter PV5=0

Bit 6 (NCV) of parameter No.8135
Addition of custom macro common variables
1 (Disabled) 0 (Enabled)
#500 to #549 #500 to #999
When the parameter PV5=1

#100 to #149 and #500 to #549 #100 to #199 and #500 to #999
#4 CRO ISO code in BPRWT or DPRNT command

0: Outputs only “LF” after data is output
1: Outputs “LF” and “CR” after data is output
#5 TCS Custom macro (subprogram)

0: Not called using a T code
1: Called using a T code
#6 CCV Common variables #100 to #149(NOTE) cleared by power-off are:

0: Cleared to <null> by reset
1: Not cleared by reset
NOTE
The range of common variables cleared during power-off varies as
shown below depending on the bit 6 (NCV) of parameter No. 8135.

#100 to #149 #100 to #199
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
VHD NAT
6004
D10 NAT

- 1081 -
#0 NAT The results of the custom macro functions ATAN (with 2 arguments) and ASIN are
specified as follows:
0: The result of ATAN is 0 to 360.0.
The result of ASIN is 270.0 to 0 to 90.0.
1: The result of ATAN is -180.0 to 0 to 180.0.
The result of ASIN is -90.0 to 0 to 90.0.
#2 VHD With system variables #5121 to #5125:

0: The tool offset value (geometry offset value) in the block currently being executed is
read. (This parameter is valid only when tool geometry/tool wear compensation
memories are available (bit 6 (NGW) of parameter No. 8136 is 0)).
1: An interrupt travel distance based on manual handle interrupt is read.
#5 D10 When tool compensation memory C is used, for reading or writing tool offset values (for
up to offset number 200) for D code (tool radius), the same system variables, #2401
through #2800, as Series 10/11 are:
0: Not used.
1: Used.
When bit 3 (V10) of parameter No. 6000 is set to 1
D code
Geometry Wear
Compensation
Variable Variable
number Variable name Variable name
number number
1 #2401 [#_OFSDG[1]] #2601 [#_OFSDW[1]]
2 #2402 [#_OFSDG[2]] #2602 [#_OFSDW[2]]
3 #2403 [#_OFSDG[3]] #2603 [#_OFSDW[3]]
: : : : :
199 #2599 [#_OFSDG[199]] #2799 [#_OFSDW[199]]
200 #2600 [#_OFSDG[200]] #2800 [#_OFSDW[200]]
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6007 CVA

#4 CVA The format for macro call arguments is specified as follows:

0: Arguments are passed in NC format without modifications.
1: Arguments are converted to macro format then passed.
Example)
When G65 P_ X10 ; is specified, the value in local variable #24 in the calling
program is set as follows:
Command CVA=0 CVA=1
#24 0.01 0.01
ADP[#24] 10.0 0.01
NOTE
External operations are the same unless the ADP function is used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6008 IJK GMP ADD ISO KOP DSM MCA F0C

- 1082 -
#0 F0C The precision of operation is based on:

0: New specification.
1: FS0i-C compatible specification.
NOTE
For details, refer to the custom macro chapter in the Operator’s
Manual (B-64304EN).
#1 MCA A macro alarm specification based on system variable #3000 is selected as follows:
0: An alarm number obtained by adding 3000 to a value assigned to variable #3000 and
the corresponding message are displayed. (A value from 0 to 200 can be assigned
to variable #3000.)
1: A value assigned to variable #3000 and the corresponding message are displayed. (A
value from 0 to 4095 can be assigned to variable #3000.)
(Example)
Execution of #3000=1 (ALARM MESSAGE);
When bit 1 (MCA) of parameter No. 6008 is set to 0:
The alarm screen displays "MC3001 ALARM MESSAGE".
When bit 1 (MCA) of parameter No. 6008 is set to 1:
The alarm screen displays "MC0001 ALARM MESSAGE".
#2 DSM On the custom macro screen, the rewriting of a system variable that can be specified
(written) on the left side from the MDI panel is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
#3 KOP When the NC is reset in the state where the line is made open by POPEN:
0: Communication continues, and the line is left open.
1: Communication stops, and the line is closed.
#4 ISO
0: When the EIA code is used, the bit patters of codes specified instead of [, ], #, *, =, ?,
@, &, and _ are set in parameter No. 6010 to No. 6018.
1: When the ISO/ASCII code is used, the bit patters of codes specified instead of [, ], #,
*, =, ?, @, &, and _ are set in parameter No. 6010 to No. 6018.
#5 ADD When the number of digits in the integer part, a, in the format specification [a,b] of the
DPRNT statement is less than the number of digits in the integer part of an output
variable value:
0: The specified number of digits only are output, with the unspecified digits discarded.
1: An alarm for excessive digits is issued.
#6 GMP The calling of M, S, T, a second auxiliary function code, or a particular code during the
calling of a G code, and the calling of a G code during the calling of M, S, T, a second
auxiliary function code, or particular code are:
0: Not allowed. (They are executed as an ordinary G, M, S, T, second auxiliary
function code, and NC address.)
1: Allowed.
#7 IJK For addresses I, J, and K specified as arguments:

0: Argument specification I or II is automatically determined.
1: Argument specification I is always used.
- 1083 -
Example
When K_J_I_ is specified:
- When this parameter is set to 0:
Argument specification II is used and K=#6, J=#8, and I=#10
are specified.
- When this parameter is set to1:
Argument specification I is used and I=#4, J=#5, and K=#6 are
specified regardless of the specification order.
(Argument specification II cannot be used.)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6010 *7 *6 *5 *4 *3 *2 *1 *0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6011 =7 =6 =5 =4 =3 =2 =1 =0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6012 #7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6013 [7 [6 [5 [4 [3 [2 [1 [0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6014 ]7 ]6 ]5 ]4 ]3 ]2 ]1 ]0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6015 ?7 ?6 ?5 ?4 ?3 ?2 ?1 ?0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6016 @7 @6 @5 @4 @3 @2 @1 @0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6017 &7 &6 &5 &4 &3 &2 &1 &0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6018 _7 _6 _5 _4 _3 _2 _1 _0

*0 to *7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating * is set.

=0 to =7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating = is set.
#0 to #7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating # is set.
[0 to [7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating [ is set.
]0 to ]7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating ] is set.
?0 to ?7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating ? is set.
@0 to @7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating @ is set.
&0 to &7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating & is set.
_0 to _7 : The bit pattern of the EIA or ISO/ASCII code indicating _ is set.
0: A corresponding bit is 0.
1: A corresponding bit is 1.
6030 M code to execute external device subprogram calls

Set the M code to execute external device subprogram calls. When 0 is set, M198 is used.
M01, M02, M30, M98, and M99 cannot be used to execute external device subprogram
calls. When a negative number, 1, 2, 30, 98, or 99 is set for this parameter, M198 is used
to execute external device subprogram calls.
- 1084 -
6031 Start number of common variables to be protected among the common variables (#500 to #999)
6032 End number of common variables to be protected among the common variables (#500 to #999)

Among the common variables (#500 to #999), the range of common variables specified
by this parameter can be protected (by setting their attributes to read-only). If a write
attempt (on the left side) is made, an alarm is issued.
NOTE
Set 0 in both parameter No. 6031 and No. 6032 not to protect
common variables.
6036 Number of custom macro variables common to tool path (for #100 to #199 )

[Data type] Word
When the memory common to paths is used, this parameter sets the number of custom
macro common variables to be shared (custom macro variables common to paths).
Common variables #100 to #199 may be shared. Ensure that the maximum number of
usable macro common variables is not exceeded.
Example
When 20 is set in parameter No. 6036
#100 to #119: Shared by all paths
#120 to #199: Used by each path independently
NOTE
When 0 or a negative value is set, the memory common to paths is
not used.
Number of custom macro variables common to tool path (for #500 to #999)
6037

[Data type] Word
When the memory common to paths is used, this parameter sets the number of custom
macro common variables to be shared (custom macro variables common to paths).
Common variables #500 to #999 may be shared. Ensure that the maximum number of
usable macro common variables is not exceeded.
Example
When 50 is set in parameter No. 6037
#500 to #549: Shared by all paths
#550 to #999: Used by each path independently
- 1085 -
NOTE
When 0 or a negative value is set, the memory common to paths is
not used.
6038 Start G code used to call a custom macro

[Valid data range] -9999 to 9999
6039 Start program number of a custom macro called by G code

6040 Number of G codes used to call custom macros

Set this parameter to define multiple custom macro calls using G codes at a time. With G
codes as many as the value set in parameter No. 6040 starting with the G code set in
parameter No. 6038, the custom macros of program numbers as many as the value set in
parameter No. 6040 starting with the program number set in parameter No. 6039 can be
called. Set 0 in parameter No. 6040 to disable this mode of calling.
If a negative value is set in parameter No. 6038, the modal call mode is entered.
Example)
When parameter No. 6038 = 900, parameter No. 6039 = 1000, and parameter No.
6040 = 100 are set, a set of 100 custom macro calls (simple calls) is defined as
follows:
G900 → O1000
G901 → O1001
G902 → O1002
:
G999 → O1099
When the setting of parameter No. 6038 is changed to -900, the same set of custom
macro calls (modal calls) is defined.
NOTE
1 When the following conditions are satisfied, all calls using these
parameters are disabled:
1) When a value not within the specifiable range is set in each
parameter
2) ((Value of parameter No.6039) + (value of parameter No.6040) -
1) > 9999
2 The specification of a mixture of simple calls and modal calls is not
allowed.
3 If a range of G codes set by these parameters duplicate G codes
specified in parameter No.6050 to No.6059, the calls specified by
parameter No.6050 to 6059 are made preferentially.
- 1086 -
6041 Start G code with a decimal point used to call a custom macro

6044 Start M code used to call a subprogram

6045 Start program number of a subprogram called by M code

6046 Number of M codes used to call subprograms (number of subprograms called by M codes)

Set this parameter to define multiple subprogram calls using M codes at a time. With M
codes as many as the value set in parameter No. 6046 starting with the M code set in
parameter No. 6044, the subprograms of program numbers as many as the value set in
parameter No. 6046 starting with the program number set in 6045 can be called. Set 0 in
parameter No. 6046 to disable this mode of calling.
Example)
When parameter No. 6044 = 80000000, parameter No. 6045 = 3000, and parameter
No. 6046 = 100 are set, a set of 100 subprogram calls is defined as follows:
M80000000 → O3000
M80000001 → O3001
M80000002 → O3002
:
M80000099 → O3099
NOTE
parameter
2) ((Value of parameter No. 6045) + (value of parameter No. 6046)
- 1) > 9999
2 If a range of M codes set by these parameters duplicate M codes
specified in parameter No. 6071 to No. 6079, the calls specified by
parameter No. 6071 to 6079 are made preferentially.
6047 Start M code used to call a custom macro

- 1087 -
6048 Start program number of a custom macro called by M code

6049 Number of M codes used to call custom macros (number of custom macros called by M codes)

Set this parameter to define multiple custom macro calls using M codes at a time. With M
codes as many as the value set in parameter No. 6049 starting with the M code set in
parameter No. 6047, the custom macros of program numbers as many as the value set in
parameter No. 6049 starting with the program number set in parameter No. 6048 can be
called. Set 0 in parameter No. 6049 to disable this mode of calling.
Example)
When parameter No. 6047 = 90000000, parameter No. 6048 = 4000, and parameter
No. 6049 = 100 are set, a set of 100 custom macro calls (simple calls) is defined as
follows:
M90000000 → O4000
M90000001 → O4001
M90000002 → O4002
:
M90000099 → O4099
NOTE
parameter
2) ((Value of parameter No. 6048) + (value of parameter No. 6049)
- 1) > 9999
2 If a range of M codes set by these parameters duplicate M codes
specified in parameter No. 6080 through No. 6089, the calls
specified by parameter No. 6080 through 6089 are made
preferentially.
6050 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9010
to
6059 G code that calls the custom macro of program number 9019

[Valid data range] (-9999 to 9999 : excluding 0, 5, 65, 66 and 67)
Set the G codes used to call the custom macros of program numbers 9010 to 9019.
However, note that when a negative value is set in this parameter, it becomes a modal call.
For example, if this parameter is set to -11, the modal call mode is entered by G11.
- 1088 -
NOTE
A setting of 0 is invalid. A custom macro cannot be called by G00.
6060 G code with a decimal point used to call the custom macro of program number 9040
to
6069 G code with a decimal point used to call the custom macro of program number 9049

Set the G codes used to call the custom macros of program numbers 9040 to 9049.
However, note that when a negative value is set in this parameter, it becomes a modal call.
For example, if this parameter is set to -11, the modal call mode is entered by G1.1.
Whether the modal call is equivalent to G66 or G66.1 depends on bit 3 (MGE) of
parameter No. 6007. Set G codes in the format Gm.n. The value expressed by (m×10+n)
is set in the parameter. The values m and n must satisfy the following relationships: 0 ≤m
≤99, 0 ≤n ≤9.
NOTE
Parameter Nos. 6060 to 6069 are valid when bit 0 (DPG) of
6071 M code used to call the subprogram of program number 9001

to
6079 M code used to call the subprogram of program number 9009

[Valid data range] 3 to 99999999 (excluding 30, 98 and 99)
These parameters set the M codes that call the subprograms of program numbers 9001 to
9009.
NOTE
1 If the same M code is set in these parameters, the younger number
is called preferentially. For example, if 100 is set in parameter No.
6071 and 6072, and programs O9001 and O9002 both exist,
O9001 is called when M100 is specified.
2 A setting of 0 is invalid. A custom macro cannot be called by M00.
6080 M code used to call the custom macro of program number 9020
to
6089 M code used to call the custom macro of program number 9029

Set the M codes used to call the custom macros of program numbers 9020 to 9029. The
simple call mode is set.
- 1089 -
NOTE
1 If the same M code is set in these parameters, the younger number
is called preferentially. For example, if 200 is set in parameter No.
6081 and No. 6082, and programs O9021 and O9022 both exist,
O9021 is called when M200 is specified.
2 If the same M code is set in a parameter (No. 6071 to No. 6079)
used to call subprograms and in a parameter (No. 6080 to No.
6089) used to call custom macros, a custom macro is called
preferentially. For example, if 300 is set in parameter No. 6071 and
No. 6081, and programs O9001 and O9021 both exist, O9021 is
called when M300 is specified.
3 A setting of 0 is invalid. A custom macro cannot be called by M00.
6090 ASCII code that calls the subprogram of program number 9004
6091 ASCII code that calls the subprogram of program number 9005

[Valid data range] 65(A:41H) to 90(Z:5AH)
These parameters set the ASCII codes that call subprograms in decimal.
The settable addresses are indicated below.
Address Parameter setting value T series M series

A 65 O O
B 66 O O
D 68 X O
F 70 O O
H 72 O O
I 73 O O
J 74 O O
K 75 O O
L 76 O O
M 77 O O
P 80 O O
Q 81 O O
R 82 O O
S 83 O O
T 84 O O
V 86 X O
X 88 X O
Y 89 X O
Z 90 X O
NOTE
1 When address L is set, the number of repeats cannot be specified.
2 Set 0 when no subprogram is called.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8135 NCV NMC
NOTE
- 1090 -
[Data type] Bit
#5 NMC Custom macro is:

0: Used.
1: Not Used.
#6 NCV Addition of custom macro common variables is:

0: Used.
1: Not Used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8136 NGW
NOTE

[Data type] Bit
#6 NGW Tool offset memory C (M series) or tool geometry/wear compensation (T series) is:
0: Used.
1: Not Used.
Alarm and message

PS0077 TOO MANY SUB,MACRO NESTING The total number of subprogram and macro calls exceeds the
permissible range.
Another subprogram call was executed during an external
memory subprogram call.
PS0110 OVERFLOW :INTEGER An integer went out of range during arithmetic calculations.
PS0111 OVERFLOW :FLOATING A decimal point (floating point number format data) went out
of range during arithmetic calculations.
PS0112 ZERO DIVIDE An attempt was made to divide by zero in a custom macro.
PS0114 ILLEGAL EXPRESSION FORMAT The format used in an expression in a custom macro
statement is in error. The parameter tape format is in error.
PS0115 VARIABLE NO. OUT OF RANGE An illegal No. was specified in a local variable, common
variable or a system variable in a custom macro.
PS0116 WRITE PROTECTED VARIABLE An attempt was made in a custom macro to use on the left
side of an expression a variable that can only be used on the
right side of an expression.
PS0118 TOO MANY BRACKET NESTING Too many brackets “[ ]” were nested in a custom macro.
The nesting level including function brackets is 5.
PS0119 ARGUMENT VALUE OUT OF The value of an argument in a custom macro function is out of
RANGE range.
PS0122 TOO MANY MACRO NESTING Too many macro calls were nested in a custom macro.
PS0124 MISSING END STATEMENT The END instruction corresponding to the DO instruction was
missing in a custom macro.
PS0125 MACRO STATEMENT FORMAT The format used in a macro statement in a custom macro is in
ERROR error.
PS0126 ILLEGAL LOOP NUMBER DO and END Nos. in a custom macro are in error, or exceed
the permissible range (valid range: 1 to 3).
PS0127 DUPLICATE NC,MACRO An NC statement and macro statement were specified in the
STATEMENT same block.
- 1091 -

PS0129 USE 'G' AS ARGUMENT G is used as an argument in a custom macro call.
PS1091 DUPLICATE SUB-CALL WORD More than one subprogram call instruction was specified in
the same block.
PS1092 DUPLICATE MACRO-CALL WORD More than one macro call instruction was specified in the
same block.
PS1093 DUPLICATE NC-WORD & M99 An address other than O, N, P or L was specified in the same
block as M99 during the macro modal call state.
PS1095 TOO MANY TYPE-2 ARGUMENT More than ten sets of I, J and K arguments were specified in
the type–II arguments (A, B, C, I, J, K, I, J, K, ...) for custom
macros.
PS1096 ILLEGAL VARIABLE NAME An illegal variable name was specified. A code that cannot be
specified as a variable name was specified. The [#_OFSxx]
command does not match the type (A/C) of tool compensation
memory currently being used.
PS1097 TOO LONG VARIABLE NAME The specified variable name is too long.
PS1098 NO VARIABLE NAME The specified variable name cannot be used as it is not
registered.
PS1099 ILLLEGAL SUFFIX [ ] A suffix was not specified to a variable name that required a
suffix enclosed by [ ].
A suffix was specified to a variable name that did not require a
suffix enclosed by [ ].
The value enclosed by the specified [ ] was out of range.
PS1100 CANCEL WITHOUT MODAL CALL Call mode cancel (G67) was specified even though macro
continuous–state call mode (G66) was not in effect.
PS1101 ILLEGAL CNC STATEMENT IRT. An interrupt was made in a state where a custom macro
interrupt containing a move instruction could not be executed.
PS1115 READ PROTECTED VARIABLE An attempt was made in a custom macro to use on the right
side of an expression a variable that can only be used on the
left side of an expression.
PS1124 MISSING DO STATEMENT The DO instruction corresponding to the END instruction was
missing in a custom macro.
PS1128 SEQUENCE NUMBER OUT OF The jump destination sequence No. in a custom macro
RANGE statement GOTO instruction was out of range (valid range: 1
to 99999).
PS1131 MISSING OPEN BRACKET The number of left brackets ([) is less than the number of right
brackets ()) in a custom macro statement.
PS1132 MISSING CLOSE BRACKET The number of right brackets (]) is less than the number of left
brackets ([] in a custom macro statement.
PS1133 MISSING '=' An equal sign (=) is missing in the arithmetic calculation
instruction in a custom macro statement.
PS1134 MISSING ',' A delimiter (,) is missing in a custom macro statement.
PS1137 IF STATEMENT FORMAT ERROR The format used in the IF statement in a custom macro is in
error.
PS1138 WHILE STATEMENT FORMAT The format used in the WHILE statement in a custom macro is
ERROR in error.
PS1139 SETVN STATEMENT FORMAT The format used in the SETVN statement in a custom macro
ERROR is in error.
PS1141 ILLEGAL CHARACTER IN VAR. The SETVN statement in a custom macro contacts a
NAME character that cannot be used in a variable name.
PS1142 TOO LONG V-NAME (SETVN) The variable name used in a SETVN statement in a custom
macro exceeds 8 characters.
PS1143 BPRNT/DPRNT STATEMENT The format used in the BPRINT statement or DPRINT
FORMAT ERROR statement is in error.
- 1092 -
12.6.2 Interruption Type Custom Macro

Overview
When a program is being executed, another program can be called by inputting an interrupt signal (UINT)
from the machine. This function is referred to as an interruption type custom macro function.
Explanation
Program an interrupt command in the following format:
M96 Pxxxx; Enables custom macro interrupt

M97 ; Disables custom macro interrupt
Use of the interruption type custom macro function allows the user to call a program during execution of
an arbitrary block of another program. This allows programs to be operated to match situations which
vary from time to time.
(1) When a tool abnormality is detected, processing to handle the abnormality is started by an external
signal.
(2) A sequence of machining operations is interrupted by another machining operation without the
cancellation of the current operation.
(3) At regular intervals, information on current machining is read.
:
Listed above are examples like adaptive control applications of the interruption type custom macro
function.
M96 Pxxxx;
Interrupt signal
(UINT) O xxxx;
Interrupt signal
(UINT)*
M99 (Pyyyy);
Nyyyy;
M97 ; Interrupt signal

(UINT)*
Fig. 12.6.2 (a) Interruption type custom macro function
When M96Pxxxx is specified in a program, subsequent program operation can be interrupted by an

interrupt signal (UINT) input to execute the program specified by Pxxxx.
Any interrupt signal (UNIT, asterisked in Fig. 12.5.3) issued after M97 is ignored.
Do not enter an interrupt signal during execution of an interrupt macro.
Signal
Interrupt signal for custom macro UINT<Gn053.3>
[Function] This signal calls and executes a program in memory.
During execution, a program in automatic operation is suspended.
- 1093 -
To enable this signal to be accepted, a particular miscellaneous function must be specified

in a command program for automatic operation. In addition, automatic operation must
already be started to accept this signal. The particular miscellaneous function code is set
by parameter Nos. 6003, 6033 and 6034.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn053 UINT
Parameter
- Various Setting for Custom Macro
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6003 MUS MSB MPR TSE MIN MSK

NOTE
#1 MSK Absolute coordinates at that time during custom macro interrupt

0: Not set to the skip coordinates (system variables #5061 and later)
1: Set to the skip coordinates (system variables #5061 and later)
#2 MIN Custom macro interrupt

0: Performed by interrupting an in-execution block (Custom macro interrupt type I)
1: Performed after an in-execution block is completed (Custom macro interrupt type II)
#3 TSE Custom macro interrupt signal UINT

0: Edge trigger method (Rising edge)
1: Status trigger method
#4 MPR Custom macro interrupt valid/invalid M code

0: M96/M97
1: M code set using parameters (Nos. 6033 and 6034)
#5 MSB Interrupt program

0: Uses a dedicated local variable (Macro-type interrupt)
1: Uses the same local variable as in the main program (Subprogram- type interrupt)
#7 MUS Interrupt-type custom macro

0: Not used
1: Used
- Setting M code that makes interruption effective and ineffective

6033 M code that validates a custom macro interrupt
6034 M code that invalidates a custom macro interrupt

- 1094 -
This parameter sets an M code that enables or disables a custom macro interrupt.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 4 (MPR) of parameter No. 6003 is
1. When MPR is 0, a custom macro interrupt is enabled by M96
and disabled by M97, regardless of the setting of this parameter.
Note
NOTE
1 No interrupt-type custom macro can be used during multiple repetitive canned
cycle execution.
2 No interrupt-type custom macro can be used during return operation in dry run
after search operation when the program is restarted.
3 The alarm (PS1101) is issued in the following cases:
<1> Case where an interrupt is made in the programmable mirror image (G51.1)
mode and G51.1 is further specified in the interrupted program
<2> Case where an interrupt is made in the coordinate system rotation (G68)
mode and G68 is further specified in the interrupted program
<3> Case where an interrupt is made in the scaling (G51) mode and G51 is
further specified in the interrupted program
4 During program execution in cycle operation, interrupt type II is used, regardless
of the setting of bit 2 (MIN) of parameter No. 6003. Cycle operation has the
following functions:
<1> Automatic reference position return
<2> Cutter or tool nose radius compensation (when multiple blocks are
generated from one specified block as in a case where an acute turn is
made on the outside)
<3> Canned cycle
<4> Automatic tool length measurement (M series)
<5> Optional chamfering corner R (M series)
<6> Normal direction control (M series)
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64304EN) Interrupt-type custom macro
- 1095 -
12.7 CANNED CYCLE FOR DRILLING

Overview
Canned cycles for drilling make it easier for the programmer to create programs. With a canned cycle for
drilling, a frequently-used machining operation can be specified in a single block with a G code; without
canned cycles for drilling, normally more than one block is required. In addition, the use of canned cycles
for drilling can shorten the program to save memory.
Explanation
A canned cycle for drilling consists of a sequence of six operations.
Operation 1 Positioning a hole position
Operation 2 Rapid traverse up to point R level
Operation 3 Hole machining
Operation 4 Operation at the bottom of a hole
Operation 5 Retraction to point R level
Operation 6 Rapid traverse up to the initial point
Operation 1
Initial level
Operation 2 Operation 6
Point R level
Operation 5
Operation 3
Rapid traverse
Operation 4 Cutting feed
Fig. 12.7 (a) Canned cycle for drilling operation sequence
- Spindle control
In some canned cycles for drilling, a spindle command to rotate the spindle in reverse direction may be
output.
The following canned cycles for drilling require spindle control:

<M series> <T series>
Counter tapping cycle G74 Face tapping cycle G84
Fine boring cycle G76 Side tapping cycle G88
Tapping cycle G84
Boring cycle G86
Back boring cycle G87
Boring cycle G88
For spindle control, the following normal miscellaneous functions are used:
See the description of the miscellaneous functions.
M03 CW spindle rotation
M04 CCW spindle rotation
M05 Spindle stop
M19 Spindle orientation (M series)
- 1096 -
When the rotation direction of the spindle is to be switched from one direction to the other (for example,
when M04 is output during M03 operation), a parameter can specify whether to send M05 at the time
switching.
Timing charts are described in the following page:
G74 (Counter tapping cycle)
X,Y
Z Z
Z
Dwell
Dwell
(Note) (Note)
M05 M03 M05 M04 Next block
(Note) It is possible to not output M05 (G98 mode)
code by using parameter M5T MF MF MF MF
(No. 5105#3).
Next block
FIN FIN FIN FIN (G99 mode)
G76 (Fine boring cycle)
X,Y X or Y
Z Z
Z
Dwell
(Note) Return to initial

M05 M19 level in G98 M03 M03
Note) It is possible to not output M05 mode
code by using parameter M5B (No. MF MF MF MF
Next block
5101#7). (G98 mode)
FIN FIN FIN FIN Next block

(G99 mode)
G84 (Tapping cycle)
X,Y
Z Z
Z
Dwell
Dwell
(Note) (Note)
Note) It is possible to not output M05 (G98 mode)
code by using parameter M5T (No. MF MF MF MF
5105#3).
Next block
Fig. 12.7 (b) Canned cycle for M series (1/2)
- 1097 -
G86 (Boring cycle)
X,Y
Return to initial level in G98 mode

Z Z
M05 M03 M03

MF MF MF Next block
(G98 mode)
FIN FIN FIN Next block

(G99 mode)
G87 (Back boring cycle)
X or Y X or Y
X,Y X or Y X or Y
Z Z
Z
Dwell
(Note) (Note)
M05 M19 M03 M05 M19 M03
MF MF MF MF MF MF
FIN FIN FIN FIN FIN FIN

(Note) It is possible to not output M05 code using
parameter M5B (No. 5101#7).
Back boring cycle is not used in G99 mode but in
G98 mode.
G88 (Boring cycle)
X,Y
Manual feed Cycle start

Z Z
Z Z
Dwell
M05 M03
MF Return to initial level in G98 MF
mode or R point level in G99
mode.
FIN FIN
Fig. 12.7 (c) Canned cycle for M series (2/2)
- 1098 -
G84 (Face tapping cycle)

G88 (Side tapping cycle)
X,C
(Z,C)
Z Z(X)
(X) Z(X)
Z
Dwell (X)
Dwell
(Note 1) (Note 2) (Note 1) (Note 2)

(Note 1) When parameter M5T (No. (G98 mode)
5105#3)=0, M05 is not output. MF MF MF MF
(Note 2) Another M code can be used by
parameter No. 5112 and 5113. Next block
Fig. 12.7 (d) Canned cycle for T series
- M code used for C-axis clamp/unclamp (T series)

T
When an M code specified in parameter No.5110 for C-axis clamp/unclamp is programmed, the CNC
issues the M code for C-axis clamp after the tool is positioned and before the tool is fed in rapid traverse
to the point-R level. The CNC also issues the M code (M code C-axis clamp +1) for C-axis unclamp after
the tool retracts to the point-R level. The tool dwells for the time specified in parameter No. 5111.
- Tapping signal
During a tapping cycle, the tapping signal is output. The tapping signal is also output while the G code of
the tapping cycle is valid.
- Override
During tapping, cutting feedrate override is always set to 100%.
- Feed hold
When the feed hold key is pressed during tapping, the movement is not stopped immediately but the
movement is stopped when the tool is returned to level R.
- Dry run
The parameter TDR (No. 1401#5) specifies whether dry run is valid during tapping.
- Small-hole peck drilling cycle execution signal (M series)

M
In the small-hole peck drilling cycle mode, the small-hole peck drilling cycle execution signal is output
when positioning at point R on the drilling direction axis is started after positioning at a specified hole
position is performed with G83 specified. This signal is not output if another canned cycle is specified or
this mode is canceled by G80, a reset, or an emergency stop.
- 1099 -
- Overload torque detection signal (M series)

M
For the overload torque detection signal in the small-hole peck drilling cycle, a skip signal is used. The
skip signal is valid (a retract operation is performed) only when the tool on the drilling direction axis is
located between point R and point Z and the tool is moving forward or performing a cutting operation.
Signal
Tapping signal TAP<Fn001.5>
[Function] Reports that the system is in tapping mode.
[Output cond.] The signal is set to 1 when:
- The system is in tapping cycle mode.
(G74,G84 : for machining center system)
(G84,G88 : for lathe system
- The system is in tapping mode.
(G63 : for machining center system)
The signal is set to 0 when:
- The system is in neither tapping cycle mode nor tapping mode.
- A reset or emergency stop is specified.
Overload torque detection signal SKIP#1<X004.7>, SKIP#2<X013.7>

M
[Function] Refracts the tool on which an overload torque is imposed.
[Operation] When this signal is set to 1, the control unit performs the following operation:
- When an overload torque is imposed, the tool is retracted to point R then machining
is repeated after changing the spindle speed and cutting feedrate.
- This signal is valid (a retract operation is performed) only when the tool on the
drilling axis is located between point R and point Z and the tool is moving forward
or performing a cutting operation.
NOTE
This signal is used also as a skip signal.
Small-hole peck drilling cycle execution signal PECK2<Fn066.5>

M
[Function] Posts whether the small-hole peck drilling cycle is being executed.
[Output cond.] This signal is set to 1 for the following period:
- Period from the start time of positioning at point R on the drilling direction axis after
positioning at a hole position is performed with G83 specified in this cycle mode
until another canned cycle, which may be G80, or a G code of group 01 is specified
or until this mode is canceled by a reset or emergency stop.
- This signal is not set to 1 in a state other than the above.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#1
X004 SKIP
#2
X013 SKIP
- 1100 -
Fn001 TAP
Fn066 PECK2
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0001 FCV

#1 FCV Program format

0: Series 0 standard format
(This format is compliant with the Series 0i-C.)
1: Series 10/11 format
NOTE
1 Programs created in the Series 10/11 program format can be used
for operation on the following functions:
1 Subprogram call M98,M198
2 Thread cutting with equal leads G32 (T series)
3 Canned cycle G90, G92, G94 (T series)
4 Multiple repetitive canned cycle G71 to G76 (T series)
5 Drilling canned cycle
G83.1, G80 to G89 (T series)
G73, G74, G76, G80 to G89(M series)
2 When the program format used in the Series 10/11 is used for this
CNC, some limits may add. Refer to the Operator’s Manual.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1401 TDR

#5 TDR Dry run during threading or tapping (tapping cycle G74 or G84, rigid tapping)
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3708 TSO

#6 TSO During a threading or tapping cycle, the spindle override is:

0: Disabled (tied to 100%).
1: Enabled.
NOTE
During rigid tapping, the override is tied to 100%, irrespective of the
setting of this parameter.
- 1101 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
RTR EXC FXY
5101
M5B EXC FXY

#0 FXY The drilling axis in the drilling canned cycle is:

0: Always the Z-axis
1: The axis selected by the program
NOTE
1 In the case of the T series, this parameter is valid only for the
drilling canned cycle in the Series 10/11 format.
2 When this parameter is 1, the drilling axis determined by plane
selection (G17/G18/G19) in the drilling canned cycle in the T series
10/11 format. Therefore, the Y-axis is required to specify
G17/G19.
#1 EXC G81
0: Specifies a drilling canned cycle
1: Specifies an external operation command
#2 RTR G83 and G87

0: Specify a high-speed peck drilling cycle
1: Specify a peck drilling cycle
#7 M5B In drilling canned cycles G76 and G87:

0: Outputs M05 before an oriented spindle stops
1: Not output M05 before an oriented spindle stops
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
RDI RAB F0C
5102

#3 F0C When the Series 10/11 format is used (with bit 1 (FCV) of parameter No.0001 set to 1), a
canned drilling cycle is specified using :
1: Series 0 format. However, the number of repetitions is specified using address L.
#6 RAB When a canned drilling cycle using the Series 10/11 format is specified (with bit 1 (FCV)
of parameter No. 0001 set to 1 and bit 3 (F0C) of parameter No. 5102 set to 0), address R
specifies:
0: Increment command.
1: Absolute command with G code system A. With G code system B or C, G90 and
G91 are followed.
- 1102 -
#7 RDI When a canned drilling cycle using the Series 10/11 format is specified (with bit 1 (FCV)
of parameter No. 0001 set to 1 and bit 3 (F0C) of parameter No. 5102 set to 0), address R
is based on:
0: Radius specification.
1: Diameter/radius specification of the drilling axis.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
TCZ PNA DCY
5103
TCZ DCY SIJ

#0 SIJ When the Series 10/11 program format is used (with bit 1 (FCV) of parameter No.0001
set to 1), a tool shift value for the drilling canned cycle G76 or G87 is specified by:
0: Address Q. Set a tool retraction direction in parameter No. 5148.
1: Address I, J, or K.
#2 DCY When an axis (to be used as a drilling axis) perpendicular to the positioning plane is
specified in a drilling canned cycle:
0: The specified axis is used as a drilling axis.
1: The axis specified in the block where the G code for the drilling canned cycle is
specified is used as a drilling axis. The specified axis is used as a positioning axis.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 0 (FXY) of parameter No. 5101 is
set to 1.
#3 PNA In a drilling canned cycle using the Series 10/11 format (with bit 1 (FCV) of parameter
No. 0001 set to 1 and bit 3 (F0C) of parameter No. 5102 set to 0), when a plane where no
axis is present is specified in the drilling canned cycle mode:
1: No alarm is issued.
#6 TCZ In a tapping cycle (excluding rigid tapping), an accumulated zero check in the tapping
step (forward, backward) is:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
Execute a tapping cycle (excluding rigid tapping) with the servo feed forward (bit 1
(FEED) of parameter No. 2005). If an impact is detected, set this parameter to 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
K0D M5T SBC
5105
M5T SBC

#0 SBC In a drilling canned cycle, chamfer cycle, or corner rounding cycle:

- 1103 -
#3 M5T When the rotation direction of the spindle is changed from forward rotation to reverse
rotation or from reserve rotation to forward rotation in a tapping cycle (G84/G88 with the
T series, or G84/G74 with the M series):
0: M05 is output before output of M04 or M03.
1: M05 is not output before output of M04 or M03.
#4 K0D When K0 is specified in a drilling canned cycle (G80 to G89):

0: Drilling operation is not performed, but drilling data only is stored.
1: One drilling operation is performed.
M code for C-axis clamping in a drilling canned cycle

5110

This parameter sets an M code for C-axis clamping in a drilling canned cycle.
Dwell time when C-axis unclamping is specified in drilling canned cycle

5111

[Unit of data]
Increment system IS-A IS-B IS-C Unit
10 1 0.1 msec
(The increment system does not depend on whether inch input or metric input is used.)
This parameter sets the dwell time when C-axis unclamping is specified in a drilling
canned cycle.
Spindle forward-rotation M code in drilling canned cycle

5112

This parameter sets the spindle forward-rotation M code in a drilling canned cycle.
NOTE
M03 is output when "0" is set.
Spindle reverse-rotation M code in drilling canned cycle

5113

This parameter sets the spindle reverse-rotation M code in a drilling canned cycle.
NOTE
M04 is output when "0" is set.
- 1104 -
5114 Return value of high-speed peck drilling cycle

[Valid data range] 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to standard parameter setting table (A) )
This parameter sets the return value in high-speed peck drilling cycle ( M series : G73, T
series : G83).
G73 (M series)
G83 (T series, when the parameter RTR (No.5101#2) is set to 0)
q : Depth of cut
d : Return value
R point
q
d
q
d
Z point
5115 Clearance value in a peck drilling cycle

This parameter sets a clearance value in a peck drilling cycle.
G83 (M series)
G83 (T series, when the parameter RTR (No.5101#2) is set to 1)
q : Depth of cut
d : Clearance value
R point
q
d
q
d
Z point
5148
Tool retraction direction after orientation in a fine boring cycle or back boring cycle

[Data type] Byte axis
- 1105 -
This parameter sets an axis and direction for tool retraction after spindle orientation in a
fine boring cycle or back boring cycle. For each boring axis, an axis and direction for
tool retraction after orientation can be set. Set a signed axis number.
Example)
Suppose that:
When the boring axis is the X-axis, the tool retraction direction after orientation is -Y.
When the boring axis is the Y-axis, the tool retraction direction after orientation is +Z.
When the boring axis is the Z-axis, the tool retraction direction after orientation is -X.
Then, set the following (assuming that the first, second, and third axes are the X-axis,
Y-axis, and Z-axis, respectively):
Set -2 in the parameter for the first axis. (The tool retraction direction is -Y.)
Set 3 in the parameter for the second axis. (The tool retraction direction is -Y.)
Set -1 in the parameter for the third axis. (The tool retraction direction is -X.)
Set 0 for other axes.
5149 Override for retraction in a boring cycle (G85/G89)

[Unit of data] %
This parameter sets an override value for the feedrate of retraction in a boring cycle. The
cutting feedrate override signal and the second feedrate override signal are valid,
regardless of the setting of this parameter. The setting of this parameter is valid even
when the override cancel signal is set to 1.
When 0 is set in this parameter, the following operation is performed:
For the T series
Operation performed when 200 is set in this parameter (The retraction feedrate is two
times greater than the cutting feedrate.)
For the M series
Operation performed when 100 is set in this parameter (The retraction feedrate is the
cutting feedrate.)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
CYM
5160
TSG CYM NOL OLS

#1 OLS When an overload torque detection signal is received in a peck drilling cycle of a small
diameter, the feedrate and spindle speed are:
0: Not changed.
1: Changed.
#2 NOL When the depth of cut per action is satisfied although no overload torque detection signal
is received in a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter, the feedrate and spindle speed are:
0: Not changed.
1: Changed.
- 1106 -
#3 CYM When a subprogram call is specified in a block specifying other commands in the canned
cycle mode:
0: No alarm is issued. (When a command of address P is specified, the command is
handled as both a command specifying a dwell time and a command specifying a
subprogram number in a canned cycle.)
#4 TSG A dependence of the overload torque detection signal in a peck drilling cycle (M series)
on the parameter setting of the skip function:
0: Exists.
1: Does not exist.
NOTE
When this parameter is 1, even if the setting of the skip signal is
disabled, the X address can be used as the overload torque
detection signal. At this time, parameter No. 3012 and bit 1 (SK0)
of parameter No. 6200 is valid.
5163
M code that specifies the peck drilling cycle mode of a small diameter

This parameter sets an M code that specifies the peck drilling cycle mode of a small
diameter.
5164 Percentage of the spindle speed to be changed at the start of the next advancing after an overload
torque detection signal is received

[Unit of data] %
This parameter sets the percentage of the spindle speed to be changed at the start of the
next advancing after the tool is retracted because the overload torque detection signal is
received.
S2 = S1 × d1 ÷ 100
S1: Spindle speed to be changed
S2: Spindle speed changed
Set d1 as a percentage.
NOTE
When 0 is set, the spindle speed is not changed.
5165 Percentage of the spindle speed to be changed at the start of the next advancing when no overload

[Unit of data] %
- 1107 -
This parameter sets the percentage of the spindle speed to be changed at the start of the
next advancing after the tool is retracted without the overload torque detection signal
received.
S2 = S1 × d2 ÷ 100
S1: Spindle speed to be changed
S2: Spindle speed changed
Set d2 as a percentage.
NOTE
When 0 is set, the spindle speed is not changed.
5166 Percentage of the cutting feedrate to be changed at the start of the next cutting after an overload torque
detection signal is received

[Unit of data] %
This parameter sets the percentage of the cutting feedrate to be changed at the start of
cutting after the tool is retracted and advances because the overload torque detection
signal is received.
F2 = F1 × b1 ÷ 100
F1: Cutting feedrate to be changed
F2: Cutting feedrate changed
Set b1 as a percentage.
NOTE
When 0 is set, the cutting feedrate is not changed.
5167 Percentage of the cutting feedrate to be changed at the start of the next cutting when no ovarload

[Unit of data] %
This parameter sets the percentage of the cutting feedrate to be changed at the start of
cutting after the tool is retracted and advances without the overload torque detection
signal received.
F2 = F1 × b2 ÷ 100
F1: Cutting feedrate to be changed
F2: Cutting feedrate changed
NOTE
When 0 is set, the cutting feedrate is not changed.
5168
Lower limit of the percentage of the cutting feedrate in a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter

- 1108 -
[Unit of data] %
This parameter sets the lower limit of the percentage of the cutting feedrate changed
repeatedly to the specified cutting feedrate.
FL = F × b3 ÷ 100
F: Specified cutting feedrate
FL: Changed cutting feedrate
5170
Number of the macro variable to which to output the total number of retractions during cutting

This parameter sets the number of the custom macro common variable to which to output
the total number of times the tool is retracted during cutting. The total number cannot
be output to common variables #500 to #599.
5171 Number of the macro variable to which to output the total number of retractions because of the
reception of an overload torque detection signal

This parameter sets the number of the custom macro common variable to which to output
the total number of times the tool is retracted after the overload torque detection signal is
received during cutting. The total number cannot be output to common variables #500
to #599.
5172
Feedrate of retraction to point R when no address I is specified

[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min (machine unit)
[Valid data range] Refer to the standard parameter setting table (C)
(When the increment system is IS-B, 0.0 to +999000.0)
This parameter sets the feedrate of retraction to point R when no address I is specified.
5173
Feedrate of advancing to the position just before the bottom of a hole when no address I is specified

This parameter sets the feedrate of advancing to the position just before the bottom of a
previously machined hole when no address I is specified.
- 1109 -
5174
Clearance in a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter

This parameter sets the clearance in a peck drilling cycle of a small diameter.
Alarm and message

PS0044 G27-G30 NOT ALLOWED IN FIXED One of G27 to G30 is commanded in canned cycle mode for
CYC drilling. Modify the program.
PS0045 ADDRESS Q NOT FOUND In a high-speed peck drilling cycle or peck drilling cycle, the
(G73/G83) amount of each-time cutting is not specified. Modify the
program.
PS0329 THE FINISHING SHAPE IS NOT A In a shape program for the multiple repetitive canned
MONOTONOUS CHANGE(SECOND rough-cutting cycle (G71 or G72), the command of the second
AXES) plane axis was not a monotonous increase or decrease.
Modify the program.
Diagnosis display
520 Total number of retract operations during cutting after G83 is specified
Total number of retract operations based on reception of the overload torque detection signal during
521
cutting after G83 is specified
NOTE
The total number of retract operations output to No. 520 and No.
521 is cleared to zero by the G83 command after the small-hole
peck drilling cycle mode is set.
522 Coordinate on the drilling axis where a retract operation was started (least input increment)
Difference between the coordinate on the drilling axis where the previous retract operation was started
523 and the coordinate on the drilling axis where the current retract operation was started (least input
increment: previous value - current value)
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64304EN) Canned cycle for drilling
- 1110 -
12.8 CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES) / MULTIPLE REPETITIVE

CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES)
T
Overview
The option canned cycles makes CNC programming easy. For instance, the data of the finish work shape
describes the tool path for rough machining. And also, a canned cycles for the thread cutting is available.
The following example shows stock removals in turning type I.
If a finished shape of A to A' to B is given by a program as in the figure below, the specified area is
removed by Δd (depth of cut), with finishing allowance Δu/2 and Δw left.
C Δd : Depth of cut (radius designation)

B (R) Designate without sign. The cutting direction
A depends on the direction AA'. This
(F) (R) Δd designation is modal and is not changed
45° e until the other value is designated. Also this
value can be specified by the parameter (No.
(F) 5132), and the parameter is changed by the
program command.
e : Escaping amount
This designation is modal and is not
Finishing shape changed until the other value is designated.
Also this value can be specified by the
parameter (No. 5133), and the parameter is
changed by the program command.
(F) : Cutting feed Δu/2 ns : Sequence number of the first block for the
program of finishing shape.
(R) : Rapid traverse A' nf : Sequence number of the last block for the
Δw program of finishing shape.
G71 U(Δd) R(e); Δu : Distance and direction of finishing allowance
in X direction (diameter / radius
G71 P(ns) Q(nf) U(Δu) W(Δw) F(f) S(s) T(t);
N(ns). . . . designation).
........ Δw : Distance and direction of finishing allowance
F_ The move command of a finished shape in Z direction.
S_ of A to A' to B is specified in the blocks f,s,t : Any F , S, or T function contained in blocks
T_ from sequence number ns to nf. ns to nf in the cycle is ignored, and the F, S,
N(nf) . . . . ; or T function in this G71 block is effective.
Signal
Chamfering signal *CDZ<Gn053.7>
[Function] Executes chamfering in a threading cycle. Specify the chamfering distance in parameter
No. 5130.
[Operation] When the signal is set to 1, chamfering is not executed in the threading cycle.
When the signal is set to 0, chamfering is executed in the threading cycle.
Approx. Approx.
45° 45°
r r
Fig. 12.8 (e) Straight threading and taper threading
- 1111 -
Set the chamfering distance r to the parameter No. 5130. G76 can also be used to specify chamfering
distance r.
The chamfering angle is made smaller than 45° by the remaining pulses in the automatic acceleration/
deceleration circuit and servo system. In addition, the angle can be changed to other than 45° by setting
an angle for parameter No. 5131.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn053 *CDZ
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0001 FCV

#1 FCV Program format

0: Series 0 standard format
(This format is compliant with the Series 0i-C.)
NOTE
1 Programs created in the Series 10/11 program format can be used
for operation on the following functions:
1 Subprogram call M98,M198
2 Thread cutting with equal leads G32 (T series)
3 Canned cycle G90, G92, G94 (T series)
4 Multiple repetitive canned cycle G71 to G76 (T series)
5 Drilling canned cycle
G83.1, G80 to G89 (T series)
G73, G74, G76, G80 to G89(M series)
2 When the program format used in the Series 10/11 is used for this
CNC, some limits may add. Refer to the Operator’s Manual.
Cutting value (chamfering value) in thread cutting cycles G92 and G76
5130

[Unit of data] 0.1
This parameter sets a cutting value (chamfering value) in the thread cutting cycle (G76)
of a multiple repetitive canned cycle and in the thread cutting cycle (G92) of a canned
cycle.
Let L be a lead. Then, a cutting value range from 0.1L to 12.7L is allowed.
To specify a cutting value of 10.0L, for example, specify 100 in this parameter.
Cutting angle in thread cutting cycles G92 and G76

5131

- 1112 -
[Unit of data] Degree
This parameter sets a thread cutting angle in a thread cutting cycle (G92/G76).
When 0 is set, an angle of 45 degrees is specified.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
RTV ROC
1403

#4 ROC In the threading cycles G92 and G76, rapid traverse override for retraction after threading
is finished is:
0: Effective
1: Not effective (Override of 100%)
#7 RTV Rapid traverse override while the tool is retracting in threading

0: Rapid traverse override is effective.
1: Rapid traverse override is not effective.
Feedrate for retraction in threading cycle G92 or G76

1466

When threading cycle G92 or G76 is specified, retraction is performed after threading.
Set a feedrate for this retraction.
NOTE
When this parameter is set to 0 or bit 1 (CFR) of parameter No.
1611 is set to 1, the rapid traverse rate set in parameter No. 1420
is used.
1626 Acceleration/deceleration time constant in threading cycles for each axis

[Data type] Word axis
[Unit of data] msec
Set a time constant for acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in the threading cycles
G92 and G76 for each axis.
1627 FL rate for acceleration/deceleration in threading cycles for each axis

[Data type] Real axis
[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, degree/min (machine unit)
[Min. unit of data] Depend on the increment system of the applied axis
- 1113 -
Set an FL feedrate for acceleration/deceleration after interpolation in the threading cycles
G92 and G76 for each axis. Set 0 at all times except in a special case.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
CFR
1611

#0 CFR For retraction after threading in the threading cycles G92 and G76:
0: The type of acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for threading is used
together with the threading time constant (parameter No. 1626) and FL feedrate
(parameter No. 1627).
1: The type of acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for rapid traverse is used
together with the rapid traverse time constant.
NOTE
If this parameter is set to 1, a check is made before a retraction to
see that the specified feedrate has become 0 (the delay in
acceleration/deceleration has become 0). For retraction, the rapid
traverse rate (parameter No. 1420) is used, regardless of the
setting of parameter No. 1466. When this parameter is set to 0,
parameter No. 1466 is used as the feedrate for retraction. As
acceleration/deceleration used for retraction, only
acceleration/deceleration after interpolation is used. Rapid traverse
before look-ahead interpolation is disabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
QSR
5102

#2 QSR Before a multiple repetitive canned cycle (G70 to G73) is started, a check to see if the
program contains a block that has the sequence number specified in address Q is:
0: Not made.
1: Made.
When 1 is set in this parameter and the sequence number specified in address Q is not
found, the alarm (PS0063) is issued and the canned cycle is not executed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
FCK
5104

#2 FCK In a multiple repetitive canned cycle (G71/G72), the machining profile is:
0: Not checked.
1: Checked.
- 1114 -
The target figure specified by G71 or G72 is checked for the following before machining
operation:
• If the start point of the canned cycle is less than the maximum value of the
machining profile even when the plus sign is specified for a finishing allowance, the
alarm (PS0322) is issued.
• If the start point of the canned cycle is greater than the minimum value of the
machining profile even when the minus sign is specified for a finishing allowance,
the alarm (PS0322) is issued.
• If an unmonotonous command of type I is specified for the axis in the cutting
direction, the alarm (PS0064 or PS0329) is issued.
• If an unmonotonous command is specified for the axis in the roughing direction, the
alarm (PS0064 or PS0329) is issued.
• If the program does not include a block that has a sequence number specified by
address Q, the alarm (PS0063) is issued. This check is made, regardless of bit 2
(QSR) of parameter No. 5102.
• If a command (G41/G42) on the blank side in tool nose radius compensation is
inadequate, the alarm (PS0328) is issued.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
RF2 RF1
5105

#1 RF1 In a multiple repetitive canned cycle (G71/G72) of type I, roughing is:

0: Performed.
1: Not performed.
NOTE
When a roughing allowance (Δi/Δk) is specified using the Series
10/11 program format, roughing is performed, regardless of the
#2 RF2 In a multiple repetitive canned cycle (G71/G72) of type II, roughing is:
0: Performed.
1: Not performed.
NOTE
When a roughing allowance (Δi/Δk) is specified using the Series
10/11 program format, roughing is performed, regardless of the
Depth of cut in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71 and G72

5132

- 1115 -
[Valid data range] 0 or positive 9 digit of minimum unit of data (refer to the standard parameter setting table
(B) )
This parameter sets the depth of cut in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71 and G72.
This parameter is not used with the Series 10/11 program format.
NOTE
Specify a radius value at all times.
Escape in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71 and G72

5133

(B) )
This parameter sets the escape in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71 and G72.
NOTE
Clearance value in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71 and G72

5134

(B))
This parameter sets a clearance value up to the cutting feed start point in multiple
repetitive canned cycles (G71/G72).
NOTE
Retraction distance in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G73 (second axis on the plane)
5135

This parameter sets a retraction distance along the second axis on the plane in the
multiple repetitive canned cycle G73. This parameter is not used with the Series 10/11
program format.
- 1116 -
NOTE
Retraction distance in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G73 (first axis on the plane)
5136

This parameter sets a retraction distance along the first axis on the plane in the multiple
repetitive canned cycle G73 or G73.7. This parameter is not used with the Series 10/11
program format.
NOTE
Number of divisions in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G73

5137

[Unit of data] Cycle
This parameter sets the number of divisions in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G73.
Return in multiple repetitive canned cycles G74 and G75

5139

(B))
This parameter sets the return in multiple repetitive canned cycles G74 and G75.
NOTE
Minimum depth of cut in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G76

5140

- 1117 -
(B) )
This parameter sets a minimum depth of cut in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G76
so that the depth of cut does not become too small when the depth of cut is constant.
NOTE
Finishing allowance in the multiple repetitive canned cycle G76

5141

(B) )
This parameter sets the finishing allowance in multiple repetitive canned cycle G76.
NOTE
Repetition count of final finishing in multiple repetitive canned cycle G76

5142

[Unit of data] Cycle
This parameter sets the number of final finishing cycle repeats in the multiple repetitive
canned cycle G76.
When 0 is set, only one final finishing cycle is executed.
Tool nose angle in multiple repetitive canned cycle G76

5143

[Valid data range] 0, 29, 30, 55, 60, 80
This parameter sets the tool nose angle in multiple repetitive canned cycle G76.
Allowable value 1 in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71 and G72

5145

- 1118 -
(B) )
If a monotonous command of type I or II is not specified for the axis in the roughing
direction, the alarm (PS0064 or PS0329) is issued. When a program is created
automatically, a very small unmonotonous figure may be produced. Set an unsigned
allowable value for such an unmonotonous figure. By doing so, G71 and G72 cycles can
be executed even in a program including an unmonotonous figure.
Example)
Suppose that a G71 command where the direction of the cutting axis (X-axis) is
minus and the direction of the roughing axis (Z-axis) is minus is specified. In such a
case, when an unmonotonous command for moving 0.001 mm in the plus direction
along the Z-axis is specified in a target figure program, roughing can be performed
according to the programmed figure without an alarm by setting 0.001 mm in this
parameter.
NOTE
A check for a monotonous figure is made at all times during G71
and G72 cycles. A figure (programmed path) is checked. When tool
nose radius compensation is performed, a path after compensation
is checked. When bit 2 (FCK) of parameter No. 5104 is set to 1, a
check is made before G71or G72 cycle operation. In this case, not
a path after tool nose radius compensation but a programmed path
is checked.
Note that no alarm is issued when an allowable value is set.
Use a radius value to set this parameter at all times.
Allowable value 2 in multiple repetitive canned cycles G71 and G72

5146

[Valid data range] 0 to cut of depth
If a monotonous command of type I is not specified for the axis in the cutting direction,
the alarm (PS0064 or PS0329) is issued. When a program is created automatically, a very
small unmonotonous figure may be produced. Set an unsigned allowable value for such
an unmonotonous figure. By doing so, G71 and G72 cycles can be executed even in a
program including an unmonotonous figure.
The allowable value is clamped to the depth of cut specified by a multiple repetitive
canned cycle.
Example)
Suppose that a G71 command where the direction of the cutting axis (X-axis) is
minus and the direction of the roughing axis (Z-axis) is minus is specified. In such a
case, when an unmonotonous command for moving 0.001 mm in the minus direction
along the X-axis is specified in a target figure program for moving from the bottom
of cutting to the end point, roughing can be performed according to the programmed
figure without an alarm by setting 0.001 mm in this parameter.
- 1119 -
NOTE
A check for a monotonous figure is made at all times during G71
and G72 cycles. A figure (programmed path) is checked. When tool
nose radius compensation is performed, a path after compensation
is checked. When bit 2 (FCK) of parameter No. 5104 is set to 1, a
check is made before G71 or G72 cycle operation. In this case, not
a path after tool nose radius compensation but a programmed path
is checked.
Note that no alarm is issued when an allowable value is set.
Use a radius value to set this parameter at all times.
Alarm and message

PS0330 ILLEGAL AXIS COMMAND IS IN An axis other than the plane is specified n a canned
THE TURNING CANNED CYCLE cycle(G90, G92, or G94).
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64304EN) Cutting feed
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Constant lead threading
(For Lathe System) (B-64304EN-1) Multiple threading
12.9 IN-FEED CONTROL (FOR GRINDING MACHINE) (M

SERIES)
M
Overview
Each time an external signal is input at the table swing end point, a workpiece is cut by a constant depth
of cut along a programmed figure on the specified Y-Z plane. This makes it possible to perform grinding
and cutting in a timely manner and facilitating the grinding of a workpiece with a profile.
X=a C
• E
•
External
signal input (2)
(3)
A α
•
(1)B•(4) •
D
Y
X=0
X
Sensor placement
Z
For example, it is possible to machine a workpiece with a profile programmed with linear interpolation,
circular interpolation, and linear interpolation on the YZ plane, such as that shown in the figure above.
- 1120 -
A sensor is placed at a X = 0 position so that the external signal is input when the sensor detects the
grinding wheel. When the program is started at point A, the machine is first placed in the state in which it
waits for the input of the external signal. Then, when the sensor detects the grinding wheel, the external
signal is input, and the machine makes a cut by the constant amount α along the programmed profile on
the specified YZ plane and moves to point B (operation (1)). The machine is then placed in the state in
which it waits for the input of the external signal again, and performs a grinding operation along the
X-axis. It grinds from point B to point C (operation (2)) and grinds back from point C to point B
(operation (3)). When the machine returns to point B, the sensor detects the grinding wheel again, and the
external signal is input, so that the machine makes a cut by the amount of α and moves to point D
(operation (4)). At point D, the machine performs a grinding operation along the X-axis.
Afterwards, each time the external signal is input, the machine makes a cut by the amount of α along the
profile program, so that the workpiece is machined to a profile such as that shown in the figure above.
NOTE
In-feed control (for grinding machine) function is optional function.
Signal
In-feed control cut start signal INFD<Gn063.6>
[Function] Exercises in-feed control.
[Operation] When this signal is set from 0 to 1, the control unit operates as follows:
- A movement is made by a specified depth of cut along a program figure.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn063 INFD
Alarm and message

PS0230 R CODE NOT FOUND Cut depth R is not specified in the block including G161.
Alternatively, the value specified for R is negative.
Modify the program.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL In-feed control (for grinding machine)
(For Machining Center System)
(B-64304EN-2)
12.10 CANNED GRINDING CYCLE (FOR GRINDING MACHINE)

Overview
With the canned grinding cycle, repetitive machining operations that are specific to grinding and are
usually specified using several blocks can be specified using one block including a G function. So, a
program can be created simply. At the same time, the size of a program can be reduced, and the memory
can be used more efficiently. Four types of canned grinding cycles are available:
Mote
Canned grinding cycle function (for grinding machine) is optional function.
- 1121 -
T
• Traverse grinding cycle
• Traverse direct constant-size grinding cycle
• Oscillation grinding cycle
• Oscillation direct constant-size grinding cycle
M
• Plunge grinding cycle
• Direct constant-dimension plunge grinding cycle
• Continuous-feed surface grinding cycle
• Intermittent-feed surface grinding cycle
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5101 FXY

#0 FXY The drilling axis in the drilling canned cycle, or cutting axis in the grinding canned cycle
is:
0: In case of the Drilling canned cycle:
X-axis at all times.
In case of the Grinding canned cycle:
• For the Lathe system
Z-axis at all times.
• For the Machining Center system
G75,G77 command :Y-axis
G78,G79 command :Z-axis
1: Axis selected by the program
NOTE
1 In the case of the T series, this parameter is valid only for the
drilling canned cycle in the Series 10/11 format.
2 When this parameter is 1, the drilling axis determined by plane
selection (G17/G18/G19) in the drilling canned cycle in the T series
10/11 format. Therefore, the Y-axis is required to specify
G17/G19.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
GFX
5106

NOTE
- 1122 -
#0 GFX When the options of grinding canned cycle are both specified, G71/G72/G73/G74
commands are:
0: Multiple respective canned cycle.
1: Grinding canned cycle.
Grinding axis number in Traverse Grinding Cycle(G71)

5176
Grinding axis number in Plunge Grinding Cycle(G75)

[Valid data range] 0 to Number of controlled axes
For the Lathe system:
Set the Grinding axis number of Traverse Grinding Cycle(G71).
For the Machining Center system:
Set the Grinding axis number of Plunge Grinding Cycle(G75).
NOTE
The axis number except for the cutting axis can be specified. When
the axis number which is same to cutting axis is specified, PS0456
alarm is issued at the time of execution. The Grinding Cycle is
executed when this parameter value is 0, PS0456 alarm is also
issued.
Grinding axis number of Traverse direct constant-size Grinding cycle(G72)

5177
Grinding axis number of Direct Constant Dimension Plunge Grinding Cycle(G77)

Set the Grinding axis number of Traverse direct constant-size Grinding cycle(G72).
Set the Grinding axis number of Direct Constant Dimension Plunge Grinding Cycle
(G77).
NOTE
issued.
Grinding axis number of Oscillation Grinding Cycle(G73)

5178
Grinding axis number of Continuous feed surface grinding cycle(G78)

Set the Grinding axis number of Oscillation Grinding Cycle(G73).
Set the Grinding axis number of Continuous feed surface grinding cycle(G78).
- 1123 -
NOTE
issued.
Grinding axis number of Oscillation Direct Fixed Dimension Grinding Cycle(G74)

5179
Grinding axis number of Intermittent feed surface grinding cycle(G79)

Set the Grinding axis number of Oscillation Direct Fixed Dimension Grinding
Cycle(G74).
Set the Grinding axis number of Intermittent feed surface grinding cycle(G79).
NOTE
issued.
5180
Axis number of dressing axis in Plunge grinding cycle(G75)

Set the axis number of dressing axis in Plunge grinding cycle(G75).
NOTE
The axis number except for the cutting axis or grinding axis can be
specified. When the axis number which is same to cutting axis or
grinding axis is specified, PS0456 alarm is issued at the time of
execution. The Grinding Cycle is executed when this parameter
value is 0 and address "L" is specified in NC program, the PS0456
alarm is also issued.
5181
Axis number of dressing axis in Direct constant dimension plunge grinding cycle(G75)

Set the axis number of dressing axis in Direct constant dimension plunge grinding
cycle(G75).
- 1124 -
NOTE
5182
Axis number of dressing axis in Continuous feed surface grinding cycle(G78)

Set the axis number of dressing axis in Continuous feed surface grinding cycle(G78).
NOTE
5183
Axis number of dressing axis in Intermittent feed surface grinding cycle(G79)

Set the axis number of dressing axis in Intermittent feed surface grinding cycle(G79).
NOTE
Alarm and message

PS0370 G31P/G04Q ERROR 1) The specified address P value for G31 is out of range. The
address P range is 1 to 4 in a multistage skip function.
2) The specified address Q value for G04 is out of range. The
address Q range is 1 to 4 in a multistage skip function.
3) P1-4 for G31, or Q1-4 for G04 was commanded without a
multistage skip function option.
4) <T series > The specified value of address P of G72 or G74
falls outside the range. Address P ranges from 1 to 4 in the
multistage skip function. P1-4 was specified in G72 or G74
even though the multistage skip function option is not present.
- 1125 -

PS0455 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN In grinding canned cycles:
GRINDING 1) <M series> The signs of the I, J, and K commands do not
match.
2) <M series/T series > The amount of travel of the grinding axis
is not specified.
PS0456 ILLEGAL PARAMETER IN Parameters related to grinding canned cycles are incorrectly set.
GRINDING Probable causes are given below.
1) <M series/T series> The axis number of the grinding axis is
incorrectly set (parameters No. 5176 to No. 5179).
2) <M series> The axis number of the dressing axis is incorrectly
set (parameters No. 5180 to No. 5183).
3) <M series/T series> The axis numbers of the cut axis, grinding
axis, and dressing axis (only for the M series) overlap.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe System) Canned grinding cycle (for grinding machine)
(B-64304EN-1)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining Center System) Canned grinding cycle (for grinding machine)
(B-64304EN-2)
12.11 MIRROR IMAGE FOR DOUBLE TURRET (T SERIES)

T
Overview
In a machine having double turrets comprising two facing turrets placed on the same control axis, a
machining program for facing turrets can be created using G codes as if it existed on the same coordinate
system for symmetric cutting by creating a mirror image relative to the X-axis.
G68 : Start double turret mirror image

G69 : Mirror image cancel
NOTE
This function and the balance cut function (T series (2-path control)) cannot be
used at the same time. When the option of the balance cut function (T series
(2-path control)) is specified, if bit 0 (NVC) of parameter No. 8137 is set to 1, this
function can be used.
Explanation
A mirror image can be created using G codes relative to the X-axis of basic three axes set by parameter
No. 1022. When G68 is active, the coordinate system is shifted to the other turret, and the X-axis sign is
reversed from the programmed command. To use this function, set the distance between the two turrets
in a parameter (No. 1290).
- 1126 -
Example) Program for double turrets
Offset value of turret A
<3> Turret A
60
120
<1> Z
80φ 40φ
180
120φ
<2> 120
Offset value of turret B
Turret B
X40.0 Z180.0 T0101 ; Position turret A at <1>

G68 ; Shift the coordinate system by the distance A to B (120mm), and turn mirror
image on.
X80.0 Z120.0 T0202 ; Position turret B at,<2>
G69 ; Shift the coordinate system by the distance B to A, and cancel mirror image.
X120.0 Z60.0 T0101 ; Position turret A at <3>
* X axis is programmed diameter command.
Parameter
Distance between two opposite tool posts in mirror image
1290

(B) )
Set the distance between two opposite tool posts in mirror image.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
NVC
8137
NOTE
- 1127 -

[Data type] Bit
#0 NVC Balance cutting is:

0: Used.
1: Not Used.
NOTE
When balance cutting is used (this parameter is 0), the mirror
image of facing tool posts cannot be used. To use the mirror
image of facing tool posts, set this parameter to 1.
Note
NOTE
1 When the G68 command based on this function is enabled, the X-coordinate
value that can be read with the custom macro system variables #5041 and up or
#100101 and up (current specified position (in the workpiece coordinate system))
is a position with mirror image applied.
2 This function and the balance cut function (T series (2-path control)) cannot be
used at the same time. When the option of the balance cut function (T series
(2-path control)) is specified, if bit 0 (NVC) of parameter No. 8137 is set to 1, this
function can be used.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe System) Mirror image for double turret
(B-64304EN-1)
12.12 INDEX TABLE INDEXING (M SERIES)

M
Overview
By specifying indexing positions (angles) for the indexing axis (one rotation axis, A, B, or C), the index
table of the M series can be indexed.
Before and after indexing, the index table is automatically unclamped or clamped.
NOTE
To enable the index table indexing function, set bit 3 (IXC) of parameter No.
8132 to 1 and bit 0 (ITI) of parameter No. 5501 to 0. The index table indexing
function is enabled only when both IXC and ITI are enabled.
Explanation
- Basic Procedure
The control axis used for index table indexing is usually referred to as axis A, B, or C.
In the explanation below, the control axis used for index table indexing is axis B. If the axis name in the
actual machine is not B, the user should read axis B as referring to that axis name.
The positioning angle for the index table is commanded by the numeric following "B" in the program
command, which is an independent block. Both absolute and incremental commands are possible, but the
value after "B" is the integer times the numeric set by the parameter:
- 1128 -
(Example) G00G90B100000; Absolute command
(Positioning angle 10 degrees)
G00G91B20.0; Incremental command
(Move distance 20 degrees)
There are two variations of the procedure (type A and type B) to set the index table position; the
difference is in the ON/OFF timing of the position control servo. The sequence of events and the
difference between the variations are described below, followed by time charts showing them graphically.
(1) Assume Bbbbb is ordered by the command program.
(2) The CNC turns the B axis unclamp signal BUCLP to "1". (Type B -- When BUCLP is turned to " 1 ",
the position control servo for the B axis is turned ON.)
(3) On the PMC side, the clamp of the B axis is released; when completed, the B axis unclamp
completion signal *BEUCL turns to "0".
(4) The CNC then turns the B axis unclamp signal BUCLP to "0", to indicate it received the *BEUCL
signal.
(5) When the PMC is notified that BUCLP has been turned to "0", the PMC should turn *BEUCL to "1".
In type A, B-axis unclamp signal BUCLP is turned to "0", B-axis position control is made in
servo-on state, B-axis is rotated, and the B axis is stopped at the specified position. B axis always
moves at rapid traverse.
(6) When the B axis stops at the specified position, CNC turns B-axis clamp signal BCLP to 1. In type
A, signal BCLP is set to "1" and B-axis position control is made in servo-off state.
(7) When BCLP is turned to "1" on the PMC side, the B axis is clamped mechanically (with a clutch or
shot pin, for example). When the clamp is completed, the B axis clamp completion signal *BECLP
is turned to "0".
(8) When *BECLP is turned to "0", the CNC then turns BCLP to "0", informing it received the *BECLP
signal. (Type B -- When BCLP turns to "0", the B axis position control servo is turned off.)
(9) On the PMC side, when BCLP changes to "0", *BECLP is turned to "1".
This completes the sequence.
The time charts for these operations are shown in the figures below.
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
B command (independent)
B axis servo on for position control
B axis unclamp signal BUCLP
B axis unclamp completion signal

*BEUCL
B axis rotation
B axis clamp signal BCLP
B axis clamp completion signal *BECLP
Fig. 12.12 (a) Time chart for positioning index table (type A)
- 1129 -
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7) (8) (9)
B command (independent)
B axis servo on for position control
B axis unclamp completion signal *BEUCL
B axis rotation
Fig. 12.12 (b) Time chart for positioning index table (type B)
The figure below shows the timing chart for type-A manual reference position return of the B axis.
B axis manual feed selection signal +Jα
B axis position control servo ON
B axis unclamp completion signal *BEUCL
B axis rotation
B axis deceleration signal *DECα
B axis return completion signal ZPα
Fig. 12.12 (c) Manual reference position return of B axis time chart (type A)
- Type A and Type B

As described in the basic procedure, type A differs from type B in that the servo used for B-axis position
control is turned on or off at the different timing.
Type A is suitable for a system in which the B-axis is clamped with shot pins.
Type B is suitable for a system in which the B-axis is clamped with a clutch.
- Minimum indexing angle

The minimum index table indexing angle set in parameter No.5512 is used. An integral multiple of a set
value can be specified as an indexing angle. If a value other than an integral multiple is specified, an
alarm (PS1561) is issued.
- Indexing axis setting

Be sure to set a rotation axis as an index table indexing axis.
(Set bit 0 (ROTx) of parameter No. 1006 to 1.)
- 1130 -
- Absolute/incremental programming
Setting bit 4 (G90) of parameter No .5500, specifies absolute programming, and override the G90/G91
G-codes.
- Indexing direction
If a value other than 0 is set in the M code for specifying negative direction rotation (parameter No.5511),
movement in the negative direction is made only when a move command is specified together with the M
code. In this case, movement is performed in the negative direction, regardless of whether
absolute/incremental programming is used.
If 0 is set in the M code for specifying negative direction rotation (parameter No.5511), the rotation
direction in G90 mode is determined by bit 3 (INC) of parameter No.5500, as described below.
The rotation direction in G90 mode is
0: Not shortcut direction
1: Shortcut direction (The amount of movement is always less than 180 degrees.)
- Feedrate
The table is always rotated around the indexing axis in rapid traverse mode.
Dry run cannot be executed for the indexing axis.
- Reset
If a reset is performed in the clamp or unclamp completion wait state, the clamp or unclamp signal is
cleared, and the CNC exits from the completion wait state.
- Disabling the index table indexing function

The index table indexing function can be disabled temporarily. Setting bit 0 (ITI) of parameter No.
5501 disables the function without turning off and on the power. This enables the manual operation of
the index table indexing axis, such as a jog feed, incremental feed, and manual handle feed, even when
the index table indexing function is enabled.
- Index table indexing function and other functions

Item Explanation
Relative position display This value can be rounded by setting bit 1 (REL) of parameter No.5500.
Absolute position display This value can be rounded by setting bit 2 (ABS) of parameter No.5500.
Machine coordinate system selection No movement is allowed.
(G53)
Single direction positioning (G60) Not specifiable
Second auxiliary function Ensure that a second auxiliary function axis name does not duplicate an
indexing axis name.
Operation during index table indexing Unless otherwise processed by the machine, feed hold, interlock, and
axis movement emergency stop can be executed during index table indexing axis
movement.
Machine lock can be executed after indexing has been completed.
Servo-off signal Disable the servo-off signal for the index table indexing axis. That is, set
bit 0 (FUPx) of parameter No. 1819 to 1. Usually, the index table
indexing axis is in the servo-off state.
Incremental command for the index When incremental programming is used for index table indexing (when bit
table indexing axis 4 (G90) of parameter No.5500 is set to 0), the workpiece origin offset of
the index table axis must always be 0. That is, there must always be a
match between the workpiece coordinate system and machine coordinate
system of an index table indexing axis.
Operation for an index table indexing Operation in JOG/INC/HANDLE mode for an index table indexing axis is
axis disabled. However, manual reference position return is possible. If the
axis selection signal is set to 0 during manual reference position return,
the movement stops immediately, and the clamp command is not
executed.
- 1131 -
Limitation
- Simultaneous specification together with other controlled axes
If an index table indexing axis and other controlled axes are specified in the same block:
• When the command is to be executed with all axes:
Set bit 6 (SIM) of parameter No. 5500 to 1.
• When axes for which the command is executed are to be selected:
Set bit 6 (SIM) of parameter No. 5500 to 0. Next, set bit 0 (IXS) of parameter No. 5502 to 1 for
other controlled axes to be selected in the same block.
If an index table indexing axis and other controlled axes are specified in the same block in a case other
than the above, alarm PS1564 is issued.
Simultaneous specification together with other controlled axes (when G00, G28, or G30 (or G00 mode) is set)
SIM = 0 SIM = 1
Axis with IXS = 0 Alarm PS1564 The command is executed for all
Axis with IXS = 1 The command is executed. axes.
If an index table indexing axis and other controlled axes are specified in the same block when a command
other than G00, G28, and G30 (or G00 mode) is specified, alarm PS1564 is issued.
NOTE
If an index table indexing axis is specified together with a slave axis, alarm
PS1564 is not issued.
- Command specifying zero move amount

When the amount of movement is 0, a clamp/unclamp operation is not performed. In automatic
reference position return based on G28, clamp/unclamp is performed even if the amount of movement is
0.
- Acceleration/deceleration before interpolation

In a block specifying an index table axis, acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is disabled.
- Functions that cannot be used at the same time

An axis used with any of the following functions is uncontrollable as an index table indexing axis:
• Axis control by PMC
• Pole position detection function
Caution
CAUTION
1 While the index table is being positioned, input signals that reset the CNC, such
as *ESP (emergency stop), ERS (external reset), and RRW (reset & rewind), are
functional.
When reset is applied to the CNC, indexing stops. Further, if *SP (automatic
operation stop signal) turns to “0”, axis movement is stopped and the equipment
enters the automatic operation stop state.
If a stop at an any position is not suitable for the machine, appropriate
processing is required on the machine.
- 1132 -
CAUTION
2 If the axis selection signal is set to 0 during manual reference position return,
movement is stopped immediately, and the clamp command is not executed. If
this proves inconvenient, measures must be taken on the machine side so that,
after the axis selection signal is set to 1, it is not set to 0 until reference position
return is completed.
3 When an incremental command is used for indexing the index table, the
workpiece origin offset for the index table axis must always be 0. This means
that the workpiece coordinate system and machine coordinate system of the
index table axis must always match.
4 If a reset is made during indexing of the index table, a reference position return
must be made before the index table is indexed subsequently.
5 The secondary auxiliary function can be used, but its address must be different
from that of the indexing axis.
6 For a path on which the index table indexing function is not to be used, disable
the index table indexing function (set bit 0 (ITI) of parameter No. 5501 to 0).
Note
NOTE
For positioning on an index table indexing axis, the dry run signal DRN has no
effect.
Signal
B axis clamp signal BCLP<Fn061.1>
[Function] Instructs the PMC side to clamp the B axis mechanically with a clutch or shot pin.
[Output cond.] The output condition and procedure are the same as those described in the basic
procedure for positioning the index table.
B axis clamp completion signal *BECLP<Gn038.7>

[Function] Notifies the CNC of completion of the B axis clamp operation.
[Operation] The output condition and procedure are the same as those described in the basic
B axis unclamp signal BUCLP<Fn061.0>

[Function] Instructs the PMC side to release the B axis from the mechanical clamp.
[Output cond.] The output condition and procedure are the same as those described in the basic
B axis unclamp completion signal *BEUCL<Gn038.6>

[Function] Notifies the CNC of completion of the release of the B axis from the mechanical clamp.
[Operation] The output condition and procedure are the same as those described in the basic
- 1133 -
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn038 *BECLP *BEUCL
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn061 BCLP BUCLP
Parameter
- Setting linear or rotation axis
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1006 ROSx ROTx

NOTE
#0 ROTx Setting linear or rotation axis.

#1 ROSx
ROSx ROTx Meaning
0 0 Linear axis
(1) Inch/metric conversion is done.
(2) All coordinate values are linear axis type. (Is not rounded in 0 to 360°)
(3) Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type (Refer to parameter
No.3624)
0 1 Rotation axis (A type)
(1) Inch/metric conversion is not done.
(2) Machine coordinate values are rounded in 0 to 360°. Absolute coordinate
values are rounded or not rounded by parameter No.1008#0(ROAx) and
#2(RRLx).
(3) Stored pitch error compensation is the rotation type. (Refer to parameter
No.3624)
(4) Automatic reference position return (G28, G30) is done in the reference
position return direction and the move amount does not exceed one
rotation.
1 1 Rotation axis (B type)
(1) Inch/metric conversion, absolute coordinate values and relative coordinate
values are not done.
(2) Machine coordinate values, absolute coordinate values and relative
coordinate values are linear axis type. (Is not rounded in 0 to 360°).
(3) Stored pitch error compensation is linear axis type (Refer to parameter
No.3624)
(4) Cannot be used with the rotation axis roll over function and the index table
indexing function (M series)
Except for the Setting is invalid (unused)
above.
- Setting for positioning the index table

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5500
IDX SIM G90 INC ABS REL DDP

- 1134 -
#0 DDP As the method for inputting a decimal point in a command for the index table indexing
axis:
0: The conventional method is used.
1: The pocket calculator method is used.
#1 REL The position display of the index table indexing axis in the relative coordinate system is:
0: Not rounded by one rotation.
1: Rounded by one rotation.
#2 ABS The position display of the index table indexing axis in the absolute coordinate system is:
0: Not rounded by one rotation.
1: Rounded by one rotation.
#3 INC When the M code that specifies rotation in the negative direction (parameter No.5511) is
not set, rotation in the G90 mode is:
0: Not set to the shorter way around the circumference.
1: Set to the shorter way around the circumference.
(In this case, be sure to set bit 2 (ABS) of parameter No. 5500 to 1.)
#4 G90 A command for the index table indexing axis is:

0 : Assumed to be an absolute or incremental command depending on the G90/G91
mode.
1 : Always assumed to be an absolute command.
#6 SIM When the same block includes a command for the index table indexing axis and a
command for another controlled axis:
0: The setting of bit 0 (IXS) of parameter No.5502 is followed.
1: The commands are executed.
NOTE
Even when this parameter is set to 1, an alarm (PS1564) is issued
if the block is neither G00, G28, nor G30 (or the G00 mode).
#7 IDX Operation sequence of the index table indexing axis:

0: Type A
1: Type B
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5501
ISP ITI

#0 ITI The index table indexing function is:

0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.
#1 ISP Servo-off for an index axis at the completion of clamping is:

0: Processed by the CNC.
1: Not processed by the CNC. (The CNC follows the status of the servo-off signal
<Gn0126> input from the PMC.)
- 1135 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5502
IXS

#0 IXSx When a command is specified in a block that contains a command for the index table
indexing axis:
0 : An alarm (PS1564) is issued.
1 : The command is executed.
If bit 6 (SIM) of parameter No.5500 is set to 1, a simultaneous operation with all axes
except the index table indexing axis can be performed regardless of the setting of this
parameter.
To set an axis that allows simultaneous operation for each axis, set SIM to 0, and set this
parameter.
NOTE
Even when this parameter is set to 1, an alarm (PS1564) is issued
if the block is neither G00, G28, nor G30 (or the G00 mode).
- Setting of an index table indexing axis

5510
Controlled axis number of the index table indexing axis
NOTE

This parameter sets the number of a controlled axis to be used as the index table indexing
axis.
When the setting value is 0, it is assumed that the fourth axis is the index table indexing
axis if the number of control axes is four or more,
and is assumed that the final axis is the index table indexing axis if the number of control
axes is three or less.
- Negative direction rotation command M code

5511
M code that specifies rotation in the negative direction for index table indexing

0: The rotation direction for the index table indexing axis is determined according to
the setting of bit 3 (INC) of parameter No.5500 and a command.
1 to 99999999:
The rotation for the index table indexing axis is always performed in the positive
direction. It is performed in the negative direction only when a move command is
specified together with the M code set in this parameter.
- 1136 -
NOTE
Be sure to set bit 2 (ABS) of parameter No.5500 to 1.
- Setting of a minimum positioning angle for index table indexing

5512
Minimum positioning angle for the index table indexing axis

[Unit of data] deg
This parameter sets the minimum positioning angle (travel distance) for the index table
indexing axis. The travel distance specified in the positioning command must always be
an integer multiple of this setting. When 0 is set, the travel distance is not checked.
The minimum positioning angle is checked not only for the command, but also for the
coordinate system setting and workpiece origin offset.
Alarm and message

Number Message Contents
PS1508 DUPLICATE M-CODE (INDEX TABLE The same code as this M code is set in a function.
REVERSING) (Index table indexing)
PS1561 ILLEGAL INDEXING ANGLE The specified angle of rotation is not an integer multiple of
the minimum indexing angle.
PS1564 INDEX TABLE AXIS – OTHER AXIS The index table indexing axis and another axis have been
SAME TIME specified in the same block.
PS1567 INDEX TABLE AXIS DUPLICATE Index table indexing was specified during axis movement or
AXIS COMMAND on an axis for which the index table indexing sequence was
not completed.
Note
NOTE
If an index table indexing axis and other controlled axes are specified in the
block, G00 performs nonlinear positioning. So, if rapid traverse based on
acceleration/deceleration before interpolation is set, the setting is switched
automatically to acceleration/deceleration after interpolation.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL Index table indexing
(For Machining center system) (B-64304EN-2)
- 1137 -
12.13 SCALING (M SERIES)

M
Overview
A programmed figure can be magnified or reduced (scaling).
One scaling method multiples the same magnification rate and the other scaling method (axis-by-axis
scaling) multiples the different magnification rate for each axis.
The magnification rate can be specified in the program or by a parameter.
Y
P4
P3
P4’ P3’
P0
P1’ P2’
P1 P2
O X
P0 : Scaling center
P1 to P4 : Programmed figure
P1’ to P4’ : Scaled figure
Fig. 12.13 (a) Scaling
NOTE
To enable the scaling function, set bit 5 (SCL) of parameter No. 8132 to 1.
Format
Scaling up or down along all axes at the same rate of magnification
(When the parameter XSC (No.5400#6 is set to 0)
Format Meaning of command
G51 IP_P_ ; Scaling start
: Scaling is effective. IP_ : Absolute command for center coordinate value of scaling
: (Scaling mode) P_ : Scaling magnification
G50 ; Scaling cancel
Scaling along each axes at a different rate of magnification (mirror image) (When the parameter XSC
(No.5400#6 is set to 1)
Format Meaning of command
G51 IP_ I_J_K_ ; Scaling start
: Scaling is effective. IP_ : Absolute command for center coordinate value of scaling
: (Scaling mode) I_J_K_ : Scaling magnification for basic 3 axes (X, Y, and Z axes) respectively
G50 ; Scaling cancel
Explanation
- Axis for which scaling is to be enabled
For the axis for which scaling is to be enabled, set parameter SCL (No. 5401#0) to 1.
- 1138 -
- Minimum unit of scaling magnification

Least input increment of scaling magnification is: 0.001 or 0.00001.
It is 0.00001 (one hundred thousandth) if parameter SCR (No. 5400#7) is 0 and 0.001 if it is 1.
- Scaling center
Even in incremental command (G91) mode, the scaling center coordinates IP_ specified in the G51 block
are assumed those of an absolute position.
If the scaling center coordinates are omitted, the position assumed when G51 is specified is assumed the
scaling center.
CAUTION
With the move command subsequent to the G51 block, execute an absolute
(G90 mode) position command.
If no absolute position command is executed after the G51 block, the position
when G51 is specified is assumed the scaling center; once an absolute position
command is executed, the scaling center assumes the coordinates specified in
the G51 block, after that block.
- Scaling along each axis at the same rate of magnification

Set parameter XSC (No. 5400#6) to 0.
If the scaling magnification P is not specified, the magnification set in parameter (No. 5411) is used.
Decimal point input is not accepted as the magnification P. If decimal point input is made, alarm
(PS0007) will occur.
A negative value cannot be specified as the magnification P. If a negative value is specified, alarm
(PS0006) will occur.
The allowable magnification range is from 0.00001 to 9999.99999.
- Scaling of each axis, programmable mirror image (negative magnification)

Each axis can be scaled by different magnifications. Also when a negative magnification is specified, a
mirror image is applied. The axis subject to the mirror image is the one that contains the scaling center.
Set a parameter XSC (No. 5400#6) to 1 to validate each axis scaling (mirror image).
Using I, J, and K, specify the scaling magnifications for the basic 3 axes (X to Z axes). Use parameter
No. 1022 to specify which axes to use as the basic 3 axes. For those of the X to Z axes for which I, J,
and K are not specified and for axes other than the basic 3 axes, the magnification set with parameter (No.
5421) is used.
A value other than 0 must be set to parameter (No. 5421).
Decimal point programming can not be used to specify the rate of magnification (I, J, K).
Magnification can be set within the range ±0.00001 ±9999.99999.
CAUTION
Specifying the following commands at the same time causes them to be
executed in the order indicated below:
<1> Programmable mirror image (G51.1)
<2> Scaling (G51) (including a mirror image with a negative magnification)
<3> Mirror image due to the external switch of the CNC or the settings of the
CNC
In this case, the programmable mirror image is effective to the scaling center
and magnification as well.
To specify G51.1 and G51 at the same time, specify them in this order; to cancel
them, specify them in the reverse order.
- 1139 -
a/b : Scaling magnification of X axis

c/d : Scaling magnification of Y axis
0 : Scaling center
Y axis
Programmed figure
d
Scaled figure
c
0
X axis
a
b
Fig. 12.13 (b) Scaling of each axis
- Scaling of circular interpolation

Even if different magnifications are applied to each axis in circular interpolation, the tool will not trace an
ellipse.
G90 G00 X0.0 Y100.0 Z0.0;

G51 X0.0 Y0.0 Z0.0 I2000 J1000;
(A magnification of 2 is applied to the X-component and a magnification of 1 is applied to the
Y-component.)
G02 X100.0 Y0.0 I0 J–100.0 F500;

Above commands are equivalent to the following command:
G90 G00 X0.0 Y100.0 Z0.0;

G02 X200.0 Y0.0 I0 J–100.0 F500;
(Because the end point is not on an arc, spiral interpolation is assumed.)
Y
Scaled shape
X
(0,0) (100,0) (200,0)
Fig. 12.13 (c) Scaling for circular interpolation1
Even for an R-specified arc, scaling is applied to each of I, J, and K after the radius value (R) is converted
into a vector in the center direction of each axis.
If, therefore, the above G02 block contains the following R-specified arc, the operation will be same as
that in which I and J are specified.
G02 X100.0 Y0.0 R100.0 F500 ;
- 1140 -
- Scaling and coordinate system rotation

If both scaling and coordinate system rotation are specified at the same time, scaling is performed first,
followed by coordinate system rotation. In this case, scaling is effective to the rotation center as well.
To specify both of them, specify scaling first and then coordinate system rotation. To cancel them,
specify them in the reverse order.
Example
Main program
O1
G90 G00 X20.0 Y10.0 ;
M98 P1000 ;
G51 X20.0 Y10.0 I3000 J2000 ; (x 3 in the X direction and x 2 in the Y direction)
M98 P1000 ;
G17 G68 X35.0 Y20.0 R30.0 ;
M98 P1000 ;
G69 ;
G50 ;
M30 ;
Subprogram
O1000 ;
G01 X20.0 Y10.0 F500 ;
G01 X50.0 ;
G01 Y30.0 ;
G01 X20.0 ;
G01 Y10.0 ;
M99 ;
Rotation center
before scaling
Rotation center
after scaling
Original program
Shape after X
coordinate system
Scaling center rotation Scaled shape
Fig. 12.13 (d) Scaling and coordinate system rotation
- 1141 -
- Scaling and optional-angle chamfering/corner rounding

Chamfering
Scaling
x 2 in the X direction
x 1 in the Y direction
Corner rounding
Scaling
x 2 in the X direction
x 1 in the Y direction
If different magnifications are applied to the individual axes, corner rounding

results in a spiral, not an arc, because scaling is applied to the end point and
radius of the arc.
Fig. 12.13 (e) Scaling and optional-angle chamfering/corner rounding
Limitation
- Tool compensation
This scaling is not applicable to cutter compensation values, tool length offset values, and tool offset
values (Fig. 12.13 (f) ).
Programmed figure
Scaled figure
Cutter compensation values are not scaled.
Fig. 12.13 (f) Scaling during cutter compensation
- Invalid scaling
Scaling is not applicable to the Z-axis movement in case of the following canned cycle.
• Cut-in value Q and retraction value d of peck drilling cycle (G83, G73).
• Fine boring cycle (G76)
• Shift value Q of X and Y axes in back boring cycle (G87).
- 1142 -
CAUTION
1 If a parameter setting value is employed as a scaling magnification without
specifying P, the setting value at G51 command time is employed as the scaling
magnification, and a change of this value, if any, is not effective.
2 Before specifying the G code for reference position return (G27, G28, G29, G30)
or coordinate system setting (G52 to G59, G92), cancel the scaling mode.
Otherwise, alarm PS0412 is issued.
3 If scaling results are rounded by counting fractions of 5 and over as a unit and
disregarding the rest, the move amount may become zero. In this case, the
block is regarded as a no movement block, and therefore, it may affect the tool
movement by cutter compensation. See the description of cutter compensation.
4 Refrain from scaling on a rotation axis for which the rollover function is enabled.
Otherwise, the tool may rotate in a short-cut manner, possibly resulting in
unexpected movement.
NOTE
1 The position display represents the coordinate value after scaling.
2 When a mirror image was applied to one axis of the specified plane, the
following results:
(1) Circular command .................... Direction of rotation is reversed.
(2) Cutter compensation ................ Offset direction is reversed.
(3) Coordinate system rotation ...... Rotation angle is reversed.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5400
SCR XSC

#6 XSC The setting of a scaling magnification (axis-by-axis scaling) is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
#7 SCR Scaling (G51) magnification unit

0: 0.00001 times (1/100,000)
1: 0.001 times
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5401
SCLx

#0 SCLx Scaling on this axis

0: Invalidated
1: Validated
- 1143 -
5411
Scaling (G51) magnification

[Unit of data] 0.001 or 0.00001 times (Selected using bit 7 (SCR) of parameter No.5400)
This parameter sets a scaling magnification when axis-by-axis scaling is disabled (with
bit 6 (XSC) of parameter No. 5400 set to 0). If no scaling magnification (P) is specified in
the program, the setting of this parameter is used as a scaling magnification.
NOTE
When bit 7 (SCR) of parameter No. 5400 is set to 1, the valid data
range is 1 to 9999999.
5421
Scaling magnification for each axis

[Data type] 2-word axis
[Unit of data] 0.001 or 0.00001 times (Selected using bit 7 (SCR) of parameter No.5400)
[Valid data range] -999999999 to –1, 1 to 999999999
This parameter sets a scaling magnification for each axis when axis-by-axis scaling is
enabled (with bit 6 (XSC) of parameter No. 5400 set to 1). For the first axis to the third
axis (X-axis to Z-axis), the setting of this parameter is used as a scaling magnification if
scaling magnifications (I, J, K) are not specified in the program.
NOTE
When bit 7 (SCR) of parameter No. 5400 is set to 1, the valid data
ranges are -9999999 to -1 and 1 to 9999999.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8132
SCL
NOTE

[Data type] Bit
#5 SCL Scaling is:

0: Not Used.
1: Used.
Alarm and message

PS0006 ILLEGAL USE OF MINUS SIGN A minus sign (–) was specified at an NC instruction word or
system variable where no minus signal may be specified.
PS0007 ILLEGAL USE OF DECIMAL POINT A decimal point (.) was specified at an address where no
decimal point may be specified, or two decimal points were
specified.
- 1144 -

PS0142 ILLEGAL SCALE RATE The scaling rate is 0 times or 10000 times or more.
Modify the setting of the scaling rate. (G51P_ . . . or
G51I_J_K_ . . . or parameter (No. 5411 or 5421))
PS0412 ILLEGAL G CODE A G code (such as G27, G28, G29, or G30) for a reference
position return or a G code (such as G52 to G59 or G92) for
changing a coordinate system was specified during scaling.
Before specifying such a G code, cancel scaling.
PS5007 TOO LARGE DISTANCE Due to compensation, point of intersection calculation,
interpolation or similar reasons, a movement distance that
exceeds the maximum permissible distance was specified.
Check the programmed coordinates or compensation
amounts.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining Center) Scaling
(B-64304EN-2)
12.14 COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION

M
Overview
A programmed shape can be rotated. By using this function, it becomes possible, for example, to correct
the position of a mounted workpiece using a rotation command when the workpiece is placed with some
angle rotated from the machine coordinates. Further, when there is a pattern comprising some identical
shapes in the positions rotated from a shape, the time required for programming and the length of the
program can be reduced by preparing a subprogram of the shape and calling it after rotation.
Y
Angle of rotation
Center of
rotation
X
0
Caution
CAUTION
Before specifying a G code (such as G27, G28, G29, or G30) for a reference
position return or a G code (such as G52 to G59 or G92) for changing a
coordinate system, be sure to cancel the coordinate rotation mode. Otherwise,
alarm PS0412 occurs.
- 1145 -
Parameter
- Angle specification method of coordinate system rotation
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5400
RIN

#0 RIN The angle (R) of coordinate rotation (G68) is:

0: Always specified by an absolute command.
1: Specified by an absolute command or incremental command depending on the
G90/G91 mode.
- Angular displacement used when no angular displacement is specified for

coordinate system rotation
5410
Angular displacement used when no angular displacement is specified for coordinate system rotation

[Unit of data] 0.001°
This parameter sets the angular displacement for coordinate system
rotation. When the angular displacement is not specified with address R in the G68 block,
this parameter value is used as the angular displacement.
Alarm and message

PS0144 ILLEGAL PLANE SELECTED The coordinate rotation plane and arc or tool radius⋅tool nose radius
compensation plane must be the same. Modify the program.
PS0412 ILLEGAL G CODE A G code (such as G27, G28, G29, or G30) for a reference position
return or a G code (such as G52 to G59 or G92) for changing a
coordinate system was specified during scaling. Before specifying
such a G code, cancel scaling.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining Center) Coordinate system rotation
(B-64304EN-2)
12.15 MACRO COMPILER/MACRO EXECUTER

Overview
The macro executor function converts custom macros created by machine tool builders to executable
programs, registers them in the FLASH ROM module, and executes them to solve problems as described
below.
NC programs are divided into two types: Programs that are hardly modified after created (programs
created using custom macros) and programs that differ depending on the workpiece (machining
programs). Since different types of programs are processed in the same way, a custom macro may be
destroyed due to a battery failure or operator error.
- 1146 -
Features
• Since the program is stored in executable form program, the execution speed is high. Machine time
is then reduced, and precision is improved.
• Since the program is stored in FLASH ROM, there is no lost of data of battery failure or corruption.
Reliability is improved.
• Stored programs are not displayed on the program screen, so know-how of the machine tool builders
is kept protected.
• Since custom macros are stored in FLASH ROM, the program editing memory can be used
effectively.
• The user can call the macro without knowing the stored program. A custom macro can be created
and executed in the program edit memory.
• An original screen can be created by using the graphic display or by selecting screens by the soft key.
The machine tool builder can extend the control function by using such functions as machine
program creation and edit control, reader/punch interface control, and PMC data read/write
functions.
Note
NOTE
1 When the macro executor is active, the order-made macro cannot be specified.
2 To perform graphic display using the macro executor, enable graphic display (set
bit 3 (NGR) of parameter No. 8134 to 0).
Reference item
Macro Executor PROGRAMMING MANUAL (B-64303EN-2)
12.16 OPTIONAL ANGLE CHAMFERING AND CORNER

ROUNDING (M SERIES)
M
Overview
Chamfering and corner rounding blocks can be inserted automatically between the following:
• Between linear interpolation and linear interpolation blocks
• Between linear interpolation and circular interpolation blocks
• Between circular interpolation and linear interpolation blocks
• Between circular interpolation and circular interpolation blocks
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5105 SBC


- 1147 -
Alarm and message

PS0050 CHF/CNR NOT ALLOWED IN THRD Chamfering or corner R is commanded in the thread cutting
BLK block. Modify the program.
PS0051 MISSING MOVE AFTER CNR/CHF Improper movement or the move distance was specified in the
block next to the chamfering or corner R block. Modify the
program.
PS0055 MISSING MOVE VALUE IN In chamfering or corner R block, the move distance is less
CHF/CNR than chamfer or corner R amount. Modify the program.
12.17 CHAMFERING AND CORNER ROUNDING (T SERIES)

T
Overview
A chamfering or corner rounding block can automatically be inserted between linear interpolation (G01)
along a single axis and that along a single axis normal to that single axis.
Chamfering or corner rounding is inserted for a command to move the tool along two axes on the plane
determined by the plane selection (G17, G18, or G19) command.
NOTE
To enable the chamfering/corner rounding function, set bit 2 (CCR) of parameter
No. 8134 to 1.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
CCR
3405

#4 CCR Addresses used for chamfering

0: Address is “I”, “J”, or “K”.
In direct drawing dimension programming, addresses ",C", ",R", and ",A" (with
comma) are used in stead of "C", "R", and "A".
1: Address is “C”.
Addresses used for direct drawing dimension programming are "C", "R", and "A"
without comma.
NOTE
If this bit (CCR) is set to 0, the function for changing the
compensation direction by specifying I, J, or K in a G01 block in the
tool nose radius compensation mode cannot be used.
If this bit (CCR) is set to 1 when address C is used as an axis
name, the chamfer function cannot be used.
- 1148 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
CRD
3453

#0 CRD When chamfering/corner rounding is enabled (bit 2 (CCR) of parameter No. 8134 is 1):
0: Chamfering/corner rounding is enabled.
1: Direct drawing dimension programming is enabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5105 SBC


#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
CCR
8134
NOTE

[Data type] Bit
#2 CCR Chamfering / corner R is:

0: Not Used.
1: Used.
Alarm and message

PS0050 CHF/CNR NOT ALLOWED IN THRD Chamfering or corner R is commanded in the thread cutting
BLK block. Modify the program.
PS0051 MISSING MOVE AFTER CNR/CHF Improper movement or the move distance was specified in the
block next to the chamfering or corner R block. Modify the
program.
PS0052 CODE IS NOT G01 AFTER The block next to the chamfering or corner R block is not G01
CHF/CNR (or vertical line). Modify the program.
PS0053 TOO MANY ADDRESS COMMANDS In the chamfering and corner R commands, two or more of I,
J, K and R are specified.
PS0054 NO TAPER ALLOWED AFTER A block in which chamfering in the specified angle or the
CHF/CNR corner R was specified includes a taper command. Modify the
program.
PS0055 MISSING MOVE VALUE IN In chamfering or corner R block, the move distance is less
CHF/CNR than chamfer or corner R amount. Modify the program.
PS0069 LAST BLOCK OF SHAPE In a shape program in the multiple repetitive canned cycle
PROGRAM IS AN ILLEGAL (G70, G71, G72, or G73), a command for the chamfering or
COMMAND corner R in the last block is terminated in the middle.
- 1149 -

PS0306 MISMATCH AXIS WITH CNR/CHF The correspondence between the moving axis and the I, J, or
K command is incorrect in a block in which chamfering is
specified.
12.18 DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSIONS PROGRAMMING (T

SERIES)
T
Overview
Angles of straight lines, chamfering value, corner rounding values, and other dimensional values on
machining drawings can be programmed by directly inputting these values. In addition, the chamfering
and corner rounding can be inserted between straight lines having an optional angle.
This programming is only valid in memory operation mode.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DDP CCR
3405

#4 CCR Addresses used for chamfering

0: Address is “I”, “J”, or “K”.
In direct drawing dimension programming, addresses ",C", ",R", and ",A" (with
comma) are used in stead of "C", "R", and "A".
1: Address is “C”.
Addresses used for direct drawing dimension programming are "C", "R", and "A"
without comma.
NOTE
If this bit (CCR) is set to 0, the function for changing the
compensation direction by specifying I, J, or K in a G01 block in the
tool nose radius compensation mode cannot be used.
If this bit (CCR) is set to 1 when address C is used as an axis
name, the chamfer function cannot be used.
#5 DDP Angle commands by direct drawing dimension programming

0: Normal specification
1: A supplementary angle is given.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
CRD
3453

- 1150 -
#0 CRD If the functions of chamfering or corner R and direct drawing dimension programming
are both enabled (bit 2 (CCR) of parameter No. 8134 is 1),
0: Chamfering or corner R is enabled.
1: Direct drawing dimension programming is enabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
CCR
8134
NOTE

[Data type] Bit
#2 CCR Chamfering / corner R is:

0: Not Used.
1: Used.
Alarm and message

PS0056 NO END POINT & ANGLE IN In direct dimension drawing programming, both an end point
CHF/CNR and an angle were specified in the block next to the block in
which only an angle was specified (Aa). Modify the program.
PS0057 NO SOLUTION OF BLOCK END Block end point is not calculated correctly in direct dimension
drawing programming. Modify the program.
PS0058 END POINT NOT FOUND Block end point is not found in direct dimension drawing
programming. Modify the program.
PS0312 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN DIRECT Direct input of drawing dimensions was commanded in an
DRAWING DIMENSIONS invalid format.
PROGRAMMING An attempt was made to specify an invalid G code during
direct input of drawing dimensions.
Two or more blocks not to be moved exist in consecutive
commands that specify direct input of drawing dimensions.
Although non-use of commas (,) (parameter No. 3405#4 = 1)
was specified for direct input of drawing dimensions, a comma
was specified.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Lathe System) Direct drawing dimensions programming
(B-64304EN-1)
- 1151 -
12.19 PATTERN DATA INPUT

Overview
In the program of the fixed form processing with the custom macro, the operator select the processing
pattern on the menu screen and specified the size, number and so on to the variable on the custom macro
screen. As above mentioned, this function enables users to perform programming simply without
programming using an existing NC language.
With the aid of this function, a machine tool builder can prepare the program of a hole machining cycle
(such as a boring cycle or tapping cycle) using the custom macro function, and can store it into the
program memory.
This cycle is assigned pattern names, such as BOR1, TAP3, and DRL2.
An operator can select a pattern from the menu of pattern names displayed on the screen.
Data (pattern data) which is to be specified by the operator should be created in advance with variables in
a drilling cycle.
The operator can identify these variables using names such as DEPTH, RETURN RELIEF, FEED,
MATERIAL or other pattern data names. The operator assigns values (pattern data) to these names.
The operator selects the pattern on the menu screen, and the selected pattern number is assigned to the
system variable. The custom macro of the selected pattern can be started by starting a program then
referring to the system variable in the program.
Explanation
This function is consist of Pattern menu screen and Custom macro screen.
The process pattern is selected on the pattern screen.
Then the process pattern is selected, the custom macro screen is displayed.
On this custom macro screen, the variable with the name and comment is displayed according to the
selected process pattern.
The process data can be input by referring to the variable name with the numerical value on the drawing.
The following is the example for the pattern menu and the custom macro.
(1) Pattern menu screen
Fig. 12.19 (a) Pattern data menu screen (10.4-inch)
- 1152 -
(2) Custom macro screen
The name of variable and comment can be displayed on the usual custom macro screen.
The titles displayed on the pattern menu or the macro variable names displayed on the custom macro
screen can be defined arbitrarily.
Fig. 12.19 (b) Custom macro screen (10.4-inch)
Explanation of operation
The following steps 1-3 explain how to display the pattern menu screen.
1 Press function key .
2 Press continuous menu key .
3 Press soft key [PATTERN MENU]. (Press [MENU] for the 8.4-inch display unit.)
- Pattern menu screen

The following pattern menu is displayed.
Fig. 12.19 (c) Pattern data menu screen (10.4-inch)
- 1153 -
Select the pattern on this screen

The following two methods are effective.
• Selection by cursor
Move the cursor to the pattern name with the cursor move keys , and press the soft key
[SELECT] or key.
• Selection by setting of pattern number
Enter the number on the left of the pattern name, and press the soft key [SELECT] or key.
The selected pattern number is registered to system variable #5900. The custom macro of the selected
pattern can be started by starting a fixed program (external program No. search) with an external signal.
This program refers to the system variable #5900 in the program. This system variable #5900 is kept after
power-off.
- Custom macro variable screen

The following custom macro screen is displayed.
Fig. 12.19 (d) Custom macro screen when the pattern data is input (10.4-inch)
When the screen is changed to the custom macro screen, the macro variable number that is selected first is
specified with the parameters Nos.6101 to 6110. The macro variables that variable name is not defined
can be input, too.
NOTE
1 The variable name that is displayed cannot be used as the common variable
name of the NC program.
2 When the common variable name is defined by SETVN command, the variable
name defined by pattern data input function is given priority.
- 1154 -
Parameter
6101 Macro variable number selected first when pattern menu 1 is selected

[Valid data range] 0,100 to 199,500 to 999
Set the macro variable number to be selected first when a pattern menu is selected on the
custom macro screen.
If 0 is specified, 500 is assumed.
If a value beyond the above range is entered, 100 is assumed.
Definition of the screen

The definition of the screen is performed by NC program.
- Program configuration
This function is consist of one program for the definition of pattern menu screen and maximum ten
programs for the definition of custom macro screen.
The program number is as follows
Table 12.19 (a) Numbers of subprograms employed in the pattern data input function
Sub program No. Screen
O9500 Specifies character strings displayed on the pattern data menu.
O9501 Specifies a character string of the pattern data corresponding to pattern No.1
Table 12.19 (b) Macro commands used in the pattern data input function
G code H code Function
G65 H90 Specifies the menu title.
- 1155 -
G code H code Function

G65 H91 Specifies the pattern name.
G65 H92 Specifies the pattern data title.
G65 H93 Specifies the variable name.
G65 H94 Specifies the comment.
Table 12.19 (c) System variables employed in the pattern data input function
System variable Function
#5900 Pattern No. selected by user.
Definition of the pattern menu screen

Menu title and pattern name are defined as follows.
Menu title
Pattern name
Fig. 12.19 (e) Pattern menu screen
Definition of menu title

The character string displayed in the menu title of the pattern menu screen is defined.
The menu title is specified up to 12 characters in a half size letter and up to 6 characters in a full size
letter such as kanji character.
- Format
G65 H90 P_ Q_ R_ I_ J_ K_ ;
H90 : Specifies the menu title
P_ : The code of 1st and 2nd characters of title
Q_ : The code of 3rd and 4th characters of title
R_ : The code of 5th and 6th characters of title
I_ : The code of 7th and 8th characters of title
J_ : The code of 9th and 10th characters of title
K_ : The code of 11th and 12th characters of title
As for the way of setting the character-code, refer to the Subsection, "Setting the
Character-codes".
Definition of pattern name

The character string displayed in the pattern name which becomes a menu item is defined.
The pattern name is specified up to 10 characters in a half size letter and up to 5 characters in a full size
letter.
- 1156 -
- Format
G65 H91 P_ Q_ R_ I_ J_ K_ ;
H91 : Specifies the pattern name
P_ : Specifies the menu number of the pattern name
The menu number = 1 to 10
Q_ : The code of 1st and 2nd characters of pattern name
R_ : The code of 3rd and 4th characters of pattern name
I_ : The code of 5th and 6th characters of pattern name
J_ : The code of 7th and 8th characters of pattern name
K_ : The code of 9thd and 10th characters of pattern name
Character-codes".
Example
The following is example for pattern menu screen.
Fig. 12.19 (f) Pattern menu screen
O9500
N1 G65 H90 P072079 Q076069 R032080 I065084 J084069 K082078;... "HOLE PATTERN"
N2 G65 H91 P1 Q066079 R076084 I032072 J079076 K069032; ............ "BOLT HOLE"
N3 G65 H91 P2 Q071082 R073068; ........................................................ "GRID"
N4 G65 H91 P3 Q076073 R078069 I032065 J078071 K076069; ............ "LINE ANGLE"
N5 G65 H91 P4 Q084065 R080080 I073078 J071032; .......................... "TAPPING"
N6 G65 H91 P5 Q068082 R073076 I076073 J078071;............................ "DORILLING"
N7 G65 H91 P6 Q066079 R082073 I078071; .......................................... "BORING"
N8 G65 H91 P7 Q080079 R067075 I069084; .......................................... "POCKET"
N9 G65 H91 P8 Q080069 R067075; ........................................................ "PECK"
N10 G65 H91 P9 Q084069 R083084; ...................................................... "TEST"
N11 G65 H91 P10 Q066065 R067075; .................................................... "BACK"
N12 M99;
- 1157 -
Definition of the custom macro screen

The title, variable name and comment are defined as follows.
Macro variable name Title
Comment
Fig. 12.19 (g) Custom macro screen
Definition of title
The character string displayed in the title of the custom macro screen is defined.
The title is specified up to 12 characters in a half size letter and up to 6 characters in a full size letter.
- Format
G65 H92 P_ Q_ R_ I_ J_ K_ ;
H92 : Specifies the menu title
P_ : The code of 1st and 2nd characters of the menu title
Q_ : The code of 3rd and 4th characters of the menu title
R_ : The code of 5th and 6th characters of the menu title
I_ : The code of 7th and 8th characters of the menu title
J_ : The code of 9th and 10th characters of the menu title
K_ : The code of 11th and 12th characters of the menu title
Character-codes".
Definition of macro variable

The character string displayed in the macro variable name is defined.
The macro variable is specified up to 10 characters in a half size letter and up to 5 characters in a full size
letter.
The variable which can be used is as follows

#100 to 199 (100 variables)
#500 to 999 (500 variables), 600 variables in total
- 1158 -
- Format
G65 H93 P_ Q_ R_ I_ J_ K_ ;
H93 : Specifies the variable name
P_ : Specifies the variable number
Specifies 100 to 199 or 500 to 999
Q_ : The code of 1st and 2nd characters of the variable name
R_ : The code of 3rd and 4th characters of the variable name
I_ : The code of 5th and 6th characters of the variable name
J_ : The code of 7th and 8th characters of the variable name
K_ : The code of 9th and 10th characters of the variable name
Character-codes".
Definition of a comment
The character string of the comment displayed on the custom macro screen is defined.
The comment is specified by up to 12 characters in a half size letter and up to 6 characters in a full size
letter per one block.
Up to eight lines can be defined for the 8.4-inch display unit and up to 12 lines can be defined for the
10.4-inch unit with one block assumed to be one line.
Blocks are displayed in the order in which they appear in a program, beginning with the first comment
line.
- Format
G65 H94 P_ Q_ R_ I_ J_ K_ ;
H94 : Specifies the comment
P_ : The code of 1st and 2nd characters of comment
Q_ : The code of 3rd and 4th characters of comment
R_ : The code of 5th and 6th characters of comment
I_ : The code of 7th and 8th characters of comment
J_ : The code of 9th and 10th characters of comment
K_ : The code of 11th and 12th characters of comment
Character-codes".
Example
The following is example of the custom macro screen.
Fig. 12.19 (h) Custom macro screen
- 1159 -
O9501;
N1 G65 H92 P066079 Q076084 R032072 I079076 J069032;...................."BOLT HOLE"
N2 G65 H93 P500 Q084079 R079076; ......................................................"TOOL"
N3 G65 H93 P501 Q079082 R071032 I08832; .........................................."ORG X"
N4 G65 H93 P502 Q079082 R071032 I08932; .........................................."ORG Y"
N5 G65 H93 P503 Q082065 R068073 I085803; ........................................"RADIUS"
N6 G65 H93 P504 Q083046 R032065 I078071 J076032..........................."S. ANGL"
N7 G65 H93 P505 Q072079 R076079 I083032 J078079 K046032............"HOLES NO."
N8 G65 H94 P032042 Q066079 R076084 I032072 J079076 K069032;....." *BOLT HOLE"
N9 G65 H94 P067073 Q082067 R076069 I042032; .................................."CIRCLE*"
N10 G65 H94 P083069 Q084032 R080065 I084084 J069082 K078032;..."SET PATTERN"
N11 G65 H94 P068065 Q084065 R032084 I079032 J086065 K082046;..."DATA NO VAR."
N12 G65 H94 P078079 Q046053 R048048 I045053 J048053 K046032;..."NO500-505"
N13 M99;
Setting the character-codes

The character cannot be used to specify the NC program.
Therefore, the code corresponding to the character is specified.
One character is consist of three figures in a half size letter and six figures in a full size letter.
The character code is specified for each address of the G65 instruction by six digits.
Refer to the table for the character code for the character code.
Example)
When "ABCDEFGH" is specified, the description of the code is as follows.
Encoded character string : 065 066 067 068 069 070 071 072
P065066 Q067068 R069070 I071072;
AB CD EF GH
NOTE
1 Space (032) is added ahead of the character-code, when the character-code of
three digits or less is specified.
Example)
P065066 Q067; → " AB C "
032(space) is put at the end, when "ABC" is displayed.
P065066 Q067032; → " ABC "
2 It is assumed in that the space of two characters was defined in the address
when there is an address not defined.
Example)
P065066 I067068; → "AB CD"
Characters and codes to be used for the pattern data input function
Character Code Comment Character Code Comment
A 065 6 054
B 066 7 055
C 067 8 056
D 068 9 057
E 069 032 Space
F 070 ! 033 Exclamation mark
G 071 ” 034 Quotation mark
H 072 # 035 Hash sign
I 073 $ 036 Dollar sign
J 074 % 037 Percent
K 075 & 038 Ampersand
- 1160 -

L 076 ‘ 039 Apostrophe
M 077 * 042 Asterisk
N 078 + 043 Plus sign
O 079 , 044 Comma
P 080 - 045 Minus sign
Q 081 . 046 Period
R 082 / 047 Slash
S 083 : 058 Colon
T 084 ; 059 Semicolon
U 085 < 060 Left angle bracket
V 086 = 061 Equal sign
W 087 > 062 Right angle bracket
X 088 ? 063 Question mark
Y 089 @ 064 At mark
Z 090 [ 091 Left square bracket
0 048 ¥ 092 Yen sign
1 049 ] 093 Right square bracket
2 050 ^ 094
3 051 _ 095 Underscore
4 052
5 053
The characters and the codes of the katakana is as follows.

ア 177 ム 209
イ 178 メ 210
ウ 179 モ 211
エ 180 ヤ 212
オ 181 ユ 213
カ 182 ヨ 214
キ 183 ラ 215
ク 184 リ 216
ケ 185 ル 217
コ 186 レ 218
サ 187 ロ 219
シ 188 ワ 220
ス 189 ヲ 166
セ 190 ン 221
ソ 191 ァ 167
タ 192 ィ 168
チ 193 ゥ 169
ツ 194 ェ 170
テ 195 ォ 171
ト 196 ャ 172
ナ 197 ュ 173
ニ 198 ョ 174
ヌ 199 ッ 175
ネ 200 ″ 222 Diacritical mark
ノ 201 ° 223 Diacritical mark
ハ 202 。 161 Punctuation
ヒ 203 「 162 Left quotation mark
フ 204 」 163 Right quotation mark
ヘ 205 、 164 Comma
ホ 206 ・ 165 Point
- 1161 -

マ 207 000 Space
ミ 208
NOTE
Diacritical mark is one character.
The characters and the codes of the hiragana and the kanji are as follows. The following hiraganas and
kanjis use two characters of the alphanumeric character.
ぁあぃいううぇえぉお
002 000 002 002 002 004 002 006 002 008 002 010 002 012 002 014 002 016 002 018
かがきぎくぐけげこご
002 020 002 022 002 024 002 026 002 028 002 030 002 032 002 034 002 036 002 038
さざしじすずせぜそぞ
002 040 002 042 002 044 002 046 002 048 002 050 002 052 002 054 002 056 002 058
ただちぢっつづてでと
002 060 002 062 002 064 002 066 002 068 002 070 002 072 002 074 002 076 002 078
どなにぬねのはばぱひ
002 080 002 082 002 084 002 086 002 088 002 090 002 092 002 094 002 096 002 098
びぴふぶぷへべぺほぼ
002 100 002 102 002 104 002 106 002 108 002 110 002 112 002 114 002 116 002 118
ぽまみむめもゃやゅゆ
002 120 002 122 002 124 002 126 002 128 002 130 002 132 002 134 002 136 002 138
ょよらりるれろわわ素
002 140 002 142 002 144 002 146 002 148 002 150 002 152 002 154 002 156 002 158
材をん種類棒穴成形質
002 160 002 162 002 164 002 166 002 168 002 170 002 172 002 174 002 176 002 178
寸法外径長端面最小内
002 180 002 182 002 184 002 186 002 188 002 190 002 192 002 194 002 196 002 198
大加工切削倣正途中荒
002 200 002 202 002 204 002 206 002 208 002 210 002 212 002 214 002 216 002 218
具番号仕上込点方向速
002 220 002 222 002 224 002 226 002 228 002 230 002 232 002 234 002 236 002 238
度送量開始深主軸
002 240 002 242 002 244 002 246 002 248 002 250 002 252 002 254
回転数位置決直線時円
003 000 003 002 003 004 003 006 003 008 003 010 003 012 003 014 003 016 003 018
反現在指令値領域診断
003 020 003 022 003 024 003 026 003 028 003 030 003 032 003 034 003 036 003 038
操作手引機械残移動次
003 040 003 042 003 044 003 046 003 048 003 050 003 052 003 054 003 056 003 058
早電源投入間分秒自運
003 060 003 062 003 064 003 066 003 068 003 070 003 072 003 074 003 076 003 078
負荷実使用寿命新規除
003 080 003 082 003 084 003 086 003 088 003 090 003 092 003 094 003 096 003 098
隅取単補能独終了記角
003 100 003 102 003 104 003 106 003 108 003 110 003 112 003 114 003 116 003 118
溝刃幅広設定一覧表部
003 120 003 122 003 124 003 126 003 128 003 130 003 132 003 134 003 136 003 138
炭合金鋼超硬先付摩耗
003 140 003 142 003 144 003 146 003 148 003 150 003 152 003 154 003 156 003 158
- 1162 -
仮想副行挿消去山高準
003 160 003 162 003 164 003 166 003 168 003 170 003 172 003 174 003 176 003 178
備完後弧助択無視器原
003 180 003 182 003 184 003 186 003 188 003 190 003 192 003 194 003 196 003 198
登録再処理描画過容編
003 200 003 202 003 204 003 206 003 208 003 210 003 212 003 214 003 216 003 218
集未対相座標示名歯変
003 220 003 222 003 224 003 226 003 228 003 230 003 232 003 234 003 236 003 238
呼推馬力系選達閉
003 240 003 242 003 244 003 246 003 248 003 250 003 252 003 254
禁復帰書個桁稼由両半
004 000 004 002 004 004 004 006 004 008 004 010 004 012 004 014 004 016 004 018
逃底逆下空四触平代辺
004 020 004 022 004 024 004 026 004 028 004 030 004 032 004 034 004 036 004 038
格子周心本群停止巾微
004 040 004 042 004 044 004 046 004 048 004 050 004 052 004 054 004 056 004 058
状路範囲倍率注側特殊
004 060 004 062 004 064 004 066 004 068 004 070 004 072 004 074 004 076 004 078
距離連続増隔件初期条
004 080 004 082 004 084 004 086 004 088 004 090 004 092 004 094 004 096 004 098
経握圧扱陰隠右押横黄
004 100 004 102 004 104 004 106 004 108 004 110 004 112 004 114 004 116 004 118
億屋化何絵階概該巻換
004 120 004 122 004 124 004 126 004 128 004 130 004 132 004 134 004 136 004 138
気起軌技疑供共境強教
004 140 004 142 004 144 004 146 004 148 004 150 004 152 004 154 004 156 004 158
掘繰係傾型検権研肩見
004 160 004 162 004 164 004 166 004 168 004 170 004 172 004 174 004 176 004 178
験元弦減孔巧控更校構
004 180 004 182 004 184 004 186 004 188 004 190 004 192 004 194 004 196 004 198
根左差雑参散産算治耳
004 200 004 202 004 204 004 206 004 208 004 210 004 212 004 214 004 216 004 218
式失修十従勝商少尚昇
004 220 004 222 004 224 004 226 004 228 004 230 004 232 004 234 004 236 004 238
植色食伸信侵振浸
004 240 004 242 004 244 004 246 004 248 004 250 004 252 004 254
真暗以意異影鋭越価可
005 000 005 002 005 004 005 006 005 008 005 010 005 012 005 014 005 016 005 018
科果箇課各拡核学掛漢
005 020 005 022 005 024 005 026 005 028 005 030 005 032 005 034 005 036 005 038
簡観関含却客休急業曲
005 040 005 042 005 044 005 046 005 048 005 050 005 052 005 054 005 056 005 058
均筋継計軽言限互降採
005 060 005 062 005 064 005 066 005 068 005 070 005 072 005 074 005 076 005 078
済細姿思写射斜者車借
005 080 005 082 005 084 005 086 005 088 005 090 005 092 005 094 005 096 005 098
縦重出述術渉照省章証
005 100 005 102 005 104 005 106 005 108 005 110 005 112 005 114 005 116 005 118
象身進人図違印沿遠央
005 120 005 122 005 124 005 126 005 128 005 130 005 132 005 134 005 136 005 138
奥往応会解改割活願基
005 140 005 142 005 144 005 146 005 148 005 150 005 152 005 154 005 156 005 158
- 1163 -
奇寄岐既近区矩駆偶旧
005 160 005 162 005 164 005 166 005 168 005 170 005 172 005 174 005 176 005 178
求球究級欠結口語誤交
005 180 005 182 005 184 005 186 005 188 005 190 005 192 005 194 005 196 005 198
厚項刻告黒財策糸試資
005 200 005 202 005 204 005 206 005 208 005 210 005 212 005 214 005 216 005 218
事持似釈弱受収純順所
005 220 005 222 005 224 005 226 005 228 005 230 005 232 005 234 005 236 005 238
序剰場常飾水錐据
005 240 005 242 005 244 005 246 005 248 005 250 005 252 005 254
制整製前全然則属即他
006 000 006 002 006 004 006 006 006 008 006 010 006 012 006 014 006 016 006 018
多存谷探短徴鎮調頂鉄
006 020 006 022 006 024 006 026 006 028 006 030 006 032 006 034 006 036 006 038
添頭同導道熱年濃箱発
006 040 006 042 006 044 006 046 006 048 006 050 006 052 006 054 006 056 006 058
抜伴必百複物文聞併忘
006 060 006 062 006 064 006 066 006 068 006 070 006 072 006 074 006 076 006 078
末密有余与裏立略青席
006 080 006 082 006 084 006 086 006 088 006 090 006 092 006 094 006 096 006 098
石積赤接折粗創双捜太
006 100 006 102 006 104 006 106 006 108 006 110 006 112 006 114 006 116 006 118
打体待態替段知地致遅
006 120 006 122 006 124 006 126 006 128 006 130 006 132 006 134 006 136 006 138
追通伝得読凸凹突鈍敗
006 140 006 142 006 144 006 146 006 148 006 150 006 152 006 154 006 156 006 158
杯背配品不布並頁別片
006 160 006 162 006 164 006 166 006 168 006 170 006 172 006 174 006 176 006 178
返勉弁保明滅木目歪揺
006 180 006 182 006 184 006 186 006 188 006 190 006 192 006 194 006 196 006 198
様溶要抑良輪和話枠節
006 200 006 202 006 204 006 206 006 208 006 210 006 212 006 214 006 216 006 218
説絶千専浅旋総走退台
006 220 006 222 006 224 006 226 006 228 006 230 006 232 006 234 006 236 006 238
第題卓室着柱鋳丁
006 240 006 242 006 244 006 246 006 248 006 250 006 252 006 254
低訂肉日白薄比皮被非
007 000 007 002 007 004 007 006 007 008 007 010 007 012 007 014 007 016 007 018
美普伏歩包門問絡列万
007 020 007 022 007 024 007 026 007 028 007 030 007 032 007 034 007 036 007 038
利訳礼乱放枚約練油劣
007 040 007 042 007 044 007 046 007 048 007 050 007 052 007 054 007 056 007 058
例郭戻冷垂緑紫許測精
007 060 007 062 007 064 007 066 007 068 007 070 007 072 007 074 007 076 007 078
効 → ↑ ← ↓
007 080 007 082 007 084 007 086 007 088 007 090 007 092 007 094 007 096 007 098
板予〃家装管
007 100 007 102 007 104 007 106 007 108 007 110 007 112 007 114 007 116 007 118
粉等貫安 α β
007 120 007 122 007 124 007 126 007 128 007 130 007 132 007 134 007 136 007 138
程抗張任破損御足守般
007 140 007 142 007 144 007 146 007 148 007 150 007 152 007 154 007 156 007 158
- 1164 -
納義丸汎固毎当的詳鳥
007 160 007 162 007 164 007 166 007 168 007 170 007 172 007 174 007 176 007 178
適論額縁温給界混監締
007 180 007 182 007 184 007 186 007 188 007 190 007 192 007 194 007 196 007 198
護己称樹脂料落確認報
007 200 007 202 007 204 007 206 007 208 007 210 007 212 007 214 007 216 007 218
排性生績判搬砥 θ 島壁
007 220 007 222 007 224 007 226 007 228 007 230 007 232 007 234 007 236 007 238
] [ ■
007 240 007 242 007 244 007 246 007 248 007 250 007 252 007 254
- 1165 -
13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT B-64303EN-1/02
13 DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
Chapter 13, "DISPLAY/SET/EDIT", consists of the following sections:
13.1 DISPLAY/SET................................................................................................................................1166
13.2 EDIT................................................................................................................................................1217
13.3 MULTI PATH DISPLAY AND EDIT ...........................................................................................1222
13.4 MACHINE OPERATION MENU..................................................................................................1228
13.5 MACHINE OPERATION MENU MAKING TOOL.....................................................................1235
13.1 DISPLAY/SET
13.1.1 Run Hour and Parts Count Display

Overview
This function displays the integrated power-on time, the integrated cycle operation time, the integrated
cutting time and timer (started by an input signal from PMC) on the screen. The integrated cycle
operation time, the integrated cutting time and timer can be altered and preset, by the operator.
In addition to the above, this function displays the count of the total number of parts machined, the
number of parts required and the number of completed parts on the screen. Each time M02, M30 or a
parameter set M code is executed, the count of the total number of parts machined and the number of
parts completed is incremented by 1. If a program is prepared so as to execute M02, M30 or a parameter
set M code each time one part machining is completed, the number of parts machined can be counted
automatically.
If the count of the number of parts machined reaches the number of parts required, a signal is output to
the PMC side.
It is possible for the operator to change and preset the number of parts required and the number of parts
completed.
This is an option function. Items such as parts machined are displayed on the Setting (timer) screen even
when the option is not provided, but operation such as counting up is not performed.
- 1166 -
B-64303EN-1/02 13.DISPLAY/SET/EDIT
Signal
General-purpose integrating meter start signal TMRON<Gn053.0>
[Function] The CNC has an meter which is started by an input signal from the PMC. Additionally,
there are meters for counting the automatic operation time and counting cutting time. The
count for these meter can be displayed on the screen. The count can be preset by the
operator.
[Operation] When the signal is set to 1, the meter starts counting.
Target part count reached signal PRTSF<Fn062.7>

[Function] Reports to the PMC that the specified number of parts have been machined.
[Output cond.] The PRTSF signal is set to 1 when:
- The number of parts machined counts up and reaches the required number of parts
when M02, M30, or the M code set in parameter No. 6710 is executed.
When the required number of parts is zero, this signal is not set.
The PRTSF signal is set to 0 when:
- Machining of the specified number of parts has not yet been completed.
- The system is reset.
When PRT (bit 1 of No. 6700) = 1, however, the PRTSF signal is not set to 0 even if
the system is reset.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn053 TMRON
Fn062 PRTSF
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6700 PRT PCM

#0 PCM M code that counts the total number of machined parts and the number of machined parts
0: M02, or M30, or an M code specified by parameter No.6710
1: Only M code specified by parameter No.6710
#1 PRT Upon reset, the required parts count arrival signal (PRTSF) is:
0: Set to "0".
1: Not set to "0".
6710 M code that counts the number of machined parts

The total number of machined parts and the number of machined parts are counted (+1)
when the M code set is executed.
- 1167 -
NOTE
The setting of 0 is invalid (no count operation is performed with
M00.) Moreover, M98, M99, M198 (external device subprogram
calling), and M codes used for subprogram calling and macro
calling cannot be set as M codes for count-up operation. (Even
when such an M code is set, count-up operation is not performed,
ignoring the M code.)
6711 Number of machined parts

The number of machined parts is counted (+1) together with the total number of
machined parts when the M02, M30, or a M code specified by parameter No.6710 is
executed.
NOTE
The number of parts is not counted for M02, M03, when bit 0
(PCM) of parameter No. 6700 is set to 1.
6712 Total number of machined parts

This parameter sets the total number of machined parts.
The total number of machined parts is counted (+1) when M02, M30, or an M code
specified by parameter No.6710 is executed.
NOTE
The number of parts is not counted for M02, M03, when bit 0
(PCM) of parameter No. 6700 is set to 1.
6713 Number of required parts

This parameter sets the number of required machined parts.
Required parts finish signal PRTSF <F0062.7> is output to PMC when the number of
machined parts reaches the number of required parts. The number of parts is regarded as
infinity when the number of required parts is zero. The PRTSF signal is then not output.
6750 Integrated value of power-on period

[Unit of data] min
This parameter displays the integrated value of power-on period.
- 1168 -
6751 Operation time (integrated value of time during automatic operation) 1

[Unit of data] msec
6752 Operation time (integrated value of time during automatic operation) 2

[Unit of data] min
This parameter displays the integrated value of time during automatic operation (neither
stop nor hold time included).
The actual time accumulated during operation is the sum of this parameter No. 6751 and
parameter No. 6752.
6753 Integrated value of cutting time 1

[Unit of data] msec
6754 Integrated value of cutting time 2

[Unit of data] min
This parameter displays the integrated value of a cutting time that is performed in cutting
feed such as linear interpolation (G01) and circular interpolation (G02 or G03).
The actual time accumulated during cutting is the sum of this parameter No. 6753 and
parameter No. 6754.
6755 Integrated value of general-purpose integrating meter drive signal (TMRON) ON time 1

[Unit of data] msec
6756 Integrated value of general-purpose integrating meter drive signal (TMRON) ON time 2

[Unit of data] min
This parameter displays the integrated value of a time while input signal TMRON
<G0053.0> from PMC is on.
The actual integrated time is the sum of this parameter No. 6755 and parameter No. 6756.
- 1169 -
6757 Operation time (integrated value of one automatic operation time) 1

[Unit of data] msec
6758 Operation time (integrated value of one automatic operation time) 2

[Unit of data] min
This parameter displays the one automatic operation drive time (neither stop nor hold
state included). The actual time accumulated during operating is the sum of this parameter
No. 6757 and parameter No. 6758. The operation time is automatically preset to 0 during
the power-on sequence and the cycle start from the reset state.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8134 NCT
NOTE

[Data type] Bit
#7 NCT Run hour and parts count display is:

0: Used.
1: Not Used.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64304EN) Displaying and setting run time, parts count, and time
13.1.2 Software Operator's Panel

Overview
The MDI panel can replace the switches on the machine operator's panel. That is, the MDI panel can
select a mode or jog feed override, omitting the corresponding switches on the machine operator's panel.
The operation switches of the function of groups 1 to 7 below can be replaced with soft switches
(software operator's panel).
It is possible to select either the operation switches on the machine operator's panel or the soft switches of
the controller as the operation switches of groups 1 to 7, for each group by the parameters.
In addition, it is possible to add 8 to 16 general-purpose soft switches used freely by the machine tool
builder (software operator's panel general purpose switches). These 16 general-purpose soft switches
can be freely named by the machine tool builder.
Group1 : Mode selection
Group2 : Selection of jog feed axis, manual rapid traverse
Group3 : Selection of manual pulse generator feed axis, selection of manual pulse magnification
Group4 : Jog feedrate override, feedrate override, rapid traverse override
- 1170 -
Group5 : Optional block skip, single block, machine lock, dry run
Group6 : Protect key
Group7 : Feed hold
Group8 : General purpose
The states of all soft switches are input to the PMC by output signals. Based on these output signals, the
PMC should turn "1" or "0" input signals related to the soft switch functions.
When the soft switch provided for single block operation is turned on, for instance, the control unit does
not select the single block operation internally. The single block operation is selected just when the PMC
sets the input signal for single block operation to 1. Bit 3 (NOP) and bit 4 (NOW) of parameter No.
8136 can be used to specify whether to use the software operator's panel and the software operator's panel
general purpose switches, respectively.
Signal
Group Function Output signal Related input signal
1 Mode selection MD1O <Fn073.0> MD1
MD2O <Fn073.1> MD2
MD4O <Fn073.2> MD4
ZRNO <Fn073.4> ZRN
2 Jog feed axis select +J1O to +J4O +J1 to +J4
-J1O to -J4O -J1 to -J4
<Fn081>
Manual rapid traverse RTO <Fn077.6> RT
3 Manual pulse generator feed HS1AO<Fn077.0> HS1A
axis select HS1BO<Fn077.1> HS1B
HS1CO<Fn077.2> HS1C
HS1DO<Fn077.3> HS1D
Manual pulse generator MP1O<Fn076.0> MP1
magnification rate select MP2O<Fn076.1> MP2
4 Jog feed rate override *JV0O to *JV15O <Fn079, Fn080> *JV0 to *JV15
Feedrate override *FV0O to *FV7O <Fn078> *FV0 to *FV7
Rapid traverse override ROV1O <Fn076.4> ROV1
ROV2O <Fn076.5> ROV2
5 Optional block skip BDTO <Fn075.2> BDT
Single block SBKO <Fn075.3> SBK
Machine lock MLKO <Fn075.4> MLK
Dry run DRNO <Fn075.5> DRN
6 Protect key KEYO*1 <F075.6> KEY1 to KEY4
7 Feed hold SPO <Fn075.7> *SP
8 General purpose switch 1 to 8 OUT0 to OUT7 <Fn072>
General purpose switch 9 to 16 OUT8 to OUT15 <Fn074>
*1 : For a 2-path system, the memory protect signal KEYO is KEYO<F0075.6>. This signal is common
to all paths.
- 1171 -
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn072 OUT7 OUT6 OUT5 OUT4 OUT3 OUT2 OUT1 OUT0
Fn073 ZRNO MD4O MD2O MD1O
Fn074 OUT15 OUT14 OUT13 OUT12 OUT11 OUT10 OUT9 OUT8
*1
Fn075 SPO KEYO DRNO MLKO SBKO BDTO
Fn076 ROV2O ROV1O MP2O MP1O
Fn077 RTO HS1DO HS1CO HS1BO HS1AO
Fn078 *FV7O *FV6O *FV5O *FV4O *FV3O *FV2O *FV1O *FV0O
Fn079 *JV7O *JV6O *JV5O *JV4O *JV3O *JV2O *JV1O *JV0O
Fn080 *JV15O *JV14O *JV13O *JV12O *JV11O *JV10O *JV9O *JV8O
Fn081 -J4O +J4O -J3O +J3O -J2O +J2O -J1O +J1O
*1 : For a 2-path system, the memory protect signal KEYO is KEYO<F0075.6>. This signal is common
to all paths.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7200 OP7 OP6 OP5 OP4 OP3 OP2 OP1

NOTE
#0 OP1 Mode selection on software operator's panel

0: Not performed
1: Performed
#1 OP2 JOG feed axis select and manual rapid traverse select on software operator's panel
0: Not performed
1: Performed
#2 OP3 Manual pulse generator's axis select and manual pulse generator's magnification select on
software operator's panel
0: Not performed
1: Performed
#3 OP4 JOG feedrate override select, feedrate override select, and rapid traverse override select
on software operator's panel
0: Not performed
1: Performed
- 1172 -
#4 OP5 Optional block skip select, single block select, machine lock select, and dry run select on
software operator's panel
0: Not performed
1: Performed
#5 OP6 Protect key on software operator's panel

0: Not performed
1: Performed
#6 OP7 Feed hold on software operator's panel

0: Not performed
1: Performed
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
7201 GPS

#1 GPS The maximum number of switches of the general-purpose switch function on the software
operator's panel is:
0: 8.
1: 16.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3002 IOV

#4 IOV Override-related signal logic is:

0: Used without modification
(A signal of negative logic is used as a negative logic signal, and a signal of positive
logic is used as a positive logic signal.)
1: Inverted
(A signal of negative logic is used as a positive logic signal, and a signal of positive
logic is used as a negative logic signal.)
The signals indicated below are affected.
Signal of negative logic:
Feedrate override signals *FV0 to *FV7<G0012>
Second feedrate override signals*AFV0 to *AFV7<G0013>
Feedrate override signals (for PMC axis control)
*EFOV0g to *EFOV7g<G0151/G0163/G0175/G0187>
Software operator’s panel signals *FV0O to *FV7O<F0078>
Signals of positive logic:
Rapid traverse override signals ROV1,ROV2<G0014.0, 1>
Software operator’s panel signals ROV1O,ROV2O<F0076.4, 5>
Rapid traverse override signals (for PMC axis control)
EROV1g,EROV2g <G0150.0, 1, G0162.0, 1, G0174.0, 1, G0186.0, 1>
7210 Job-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel “↑”
7211 Job-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel “↓”
- 1173 -
7212 Job-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel “→”
7213 Job-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel “←”
7214 Job-movement axis and its direction on software operator's panel “ ”

On software operator's panel, set a feed axis corresponding to an arrow key on the MDI
panel when jog feed is performed.
Allow keys on the MDI panel
Setting value Feed axis and direction
0 Not moved
1 First axis, positive direction 7 8 9
2 First axis, negative direction
3 Second axis, positive direction
4 Second axis, negative direction
4 5 6
5 Third axis, positive direction
6 Third axis, negative direction
7 Fourth axis, positive direction
8 Fourth axis, negative direction 1 2 3
Example)
Under X, Y, and Z axis configuration, to set arrow keys to feed the axes in the
direction specified as follows, set the parameters to the values given below. [8↑] to
the positive direction of the Z axis, [2↓] to the negative direction of the Z axis, [6→]
to the positive direction of the X axis [4←] to the negative direction of the X axis,
[1 ] to the positive direction of the Y axis, [9 ] to the negative direction of the Y
axis
Parameter No.7210 = 5 (Z axis, positive direction)
Parameter No.7211 = 6 (Z axis, negative direction)
Parameter No.7212 = 1 (X axis, positive direction)
Parameter No.7213 = 2 (X axis, negative direction)
Parameter No.7214 = 3 (Y axis, positive direction)
Parameter No.7215 = 4 (Y axis, negative direction)
Parameter No.7216 = 0 (Not used)
Parameter No.7217 = 0 (Not used)
7220 Name of general-purpose switch 1 on software operator's panel (first character)

to to
7283 Name of general-purpose switch 8 on software operator's panel (eighth character)

to to
- 1174 -
to to

Each of these parameters sets the name of a general-purpose switch on the software
operator's panel with character codes indicated in the character-code correspondence table.
A switch name consists of up to eight characters.
Parameter Nos. 7220 to 7227 : Name of general-purpose switch 1

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8136 NOW NOP
NOTE

[Data type] Bit
#3 NOP Software operator's panel is:

0: Used.
1: Not Used.
#4 NOW Software operator's panel general purpose switch is:

0: Used.
1: Not Used.
- 1175 -
- Character code list

Character Code Character Code Character Code
A 65 Q 81 6 54
B 66 R 82 7 55
C 67 S 83 8 56
D 68 T 84 9 57
E 69 U 85 32
F 70 V 86 ! 33
G 71 W 87 “ 34
H 72 X 88 # 35
I 73 Y 89 $ 36
J 74 Z 90 % 37
K 75 0 48 & 38
L 76 1 49 ‘ 39
M 77 2 50 ( 40
N 78 3 51 ) 41
O 79 4 52 * 42
P 80 5 53 + 43
Note
NOTE
1 Only the modes shown below can be selected by soft switches. When the mode
for DNC operation is to be required, then, all control switches for mode selection
should be on the machine operator's panel or a general-purpose soft switch
should be used to select the mode for DNC operation.
Soft switches available for mode selection
- Manual data input
- Automatic operation
- Memory edit
- Manual handle feed / incremental feed
- Jog feed
- Manual reference position return
2 Only one soft switch is available for the protection key. But, four input signals are
available for protection key (KEY1, KEY2, KEY3 and KEY4).
Generally, four input signals are simultaneously turned to "1" or "0" according to
the state of the protection soft switch.
For a 2-path system, the signals are as follows. These signals are common to all
paths.
- KEYO<F0075.6>
- KEY1 to KEY4<G0046.3 to 6>
3 When the soft switch for feed hold is turned on, output signal SPO is turned to
"1", and the PMC turns feed hold signal *SP to "0".
In contrast to the above, when the soft switch for feed hold is turned off, output
signal SPO is turned "0" and the PMC turns signal *SP to "1". For soft switches
other than feed hold and general soft switches, when an output signal
corresponding to a soft switch is turned to "1", the corresponding input signal is
turned to "1".
- 1176 -
The following table lists the jog feedrate override values which can be selected by soft switches.
Override values (%) *JV0O to *JV15O
15 8 7 0
0 1111 1111 1111 1111
0.1 1111 1111 1111 0101
0.14 1111 1111 1111 0001
0.2 1111 1111 1110 1011
0.27 1111 1111 1110 0100
0.37 1111 1111 1101 1010
0.52 1111 1111 1100 1011
0.72 1111 1111 1011 0111
1.0 1111 1111 1001 1011
1.4 1111 1111 0111 0011
2.0 1111 1111 0011 0111
2.7 1111 1110 1111 0001
3.7 1111 1110 1000 1101
5.2 1111 1101 1111 0111
7.2 1111 1101 0010 1111
10.0 1111 1100 0001 0111
14.0 1111 1010 1000 0111
20.0 1111 1000 0010 1111
27.0 1111 0101 0111 0011
37.0 1111 0001 1000 1011
52.0 1110 1011 1010 1111
72.0 1110 0011 1101 1111
100.0 1101 1000 1110 1111
140.0 1100 1001 0100 1111
200.0 1011 0001 1101 1111
The following table lists the feedrate override values which can be selected by soft switches.
*FV0O to *FV7O
Override values (%)
7 0
0 1111 1111
10 1111 0101
20 1110 1011
30 1110 0001
40 1101 0111
50 1100 1101
60 1100 0011
70 1011 1001
80 1010 1111
90 1010 0101
100 1001 1011
110 1001 0001
120 1000 0111
130 0111 1101
140 0111 0011
150 0110 1001
160 0101 1111
170 0101 0101
180 0100 1011
190 0100 0001
200 0011 0111
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64304EN) Display and setting of the software operator’s panel
- 1177 -
13.1.3 8-Level Data Protection Function

Overview
Eight operation levels can be set for CNC and PMC operation and eight protection levels can be set for
various types of CNC and PMC data.
When various types of CNC and PMC data are changed or output externally, the system compares the
operation level with the protection level to determine whether change or external output is allowed.
NOTE
8-level data protection function is optional function.
Explanation
- Operation level
Eight operation levels can be set for CNC and PMC operation.
Operation levels 0 to 3 are selected by the memory protection key signal.
Operation levels 4 to 7 are selected by a password.
Operation level Setting method Sample classification

7 (High) Password -
6 Password MTB
5 Password Dealer, Integrator
4 Password End user
3 Memory protection key signal User level (Level 1)
0 (low) Memory protection key signal User level (Level 4)
NOTE
1 Once any of operation levels 4 to 7 is set, it is retained (even when the power is
turned off) until clear operation is performed by the corresponding password.
2 The initial values of the passwords for operation levels 4 to 6 are shown below.
- Operation level 4: "HC3V9ZEP"
- Operation level 5: "J72WB8YA"
- Operation level 6: "VLR6T92M"
3 Operation level 7 is reserved for the maintenance of the CNC and PMC.
CAUTION
When this function is provided, the conventional memory protection function is
disabled.
When this function is added, the programmer protection function of the PMC is
disabled. However, the sequence program password function can be used in
combination with this function.
- Data protection level

A data protection level can be set for each of the following types of data. There are two data protection
levels as shown below.
- Change protection level
Protection level used for changing data
- Output protection level
Protection level used for externally outputting data (punching out).
Protection levels 0 (low) to 7 (high) can be set.
- 1178 -
CNC data protection level setting items

Initial value of protection level
Data type
Change Output
Custom macro conversion data
0 0
(including variable data specific to the macro executor)
Periodical maintenance information data 0 0
Tool offset data
0 0
(for each type when classification is performed by figure and figure/wear)
Clock data 0 0
Workpiece origin shift data 0 0
Workpiece origin offset data 0 0
Ethernet setting data 0 0
Parameter data 0 0
Setting data 0 0
Pitch error compensation data 0 0
Power Mate CNC Manager function parameter data 0 0
Each part program 0 0
Part program editing 0 0
Presetting an absolute coordinate 0 0
PMC data protection level setting items

Initial value of protection level
Data type
Change Output
Configuration parameter 0 0
Setting (online) 0 0
Sequence parameter 0 0
PMC parameter 0 0
Timer 0 0
Counter 0 0
Keep relay 0 0
Keep relay (system) 0 0
Data table 0 0
Data table control 0 0
PMC memory 0 0
- Changing or externally outputting of data

When various types of CNC and PMC data is changed or output externally, the change protection level or
output protection level set for the target data is compared with its current operation level.
If the operation level is equal to or higher than the protection level set for the target data (operation level
≥ protection level), it is assumed that the target data can be changed or output externally and the data is
allowed to be changed or output externally.
The operation level must be changed according to the purpose as needed.

The protection level must be set according to the confidentiality and severity of data.
[Example of application]
<1> Set the change protection level as follows.
- Parameter (Change protection level 4)
- Tool offset data (Change protection level 0)
<2> The changeable data can be restricted by changing the operation level during CNC and PMC
operation.
- Operation level 4
Parameters and tool offset data can be changed.
- 1179 -
- Operation level 0
Tool offset data can be changed.
Parameters cannot be changed.
Data
Parameter Tool offset data
Operation level
4 Changeable Changeable
0 Not changeable Changeable
Notes
- Tool offset data
NOTE
1 Valid types of tool offset data vary depending on the tool offset memory used.
See the tables below when setting a data protection level.
2 When a type of data that is not permitted to be changed or externally output is
found during tool offset data input/output, the following operation takes place.
• Input : Data of other than the data type that is not permitted to be changed
is changed.
• Output : Data of other than the data type that is not permitted to be changed
is output.
M
Data type/tool offset memory Tool offset memory A Tool offset memory C
Tool offset data Applicable Not applicable
Tool offset data (geometry) Not applicable Not applicable
Tool offset data (wear) Not applicable Not applicable
Tool offset data (tool radius, geometry) Not applicable Applicable
Tool offset data (tool radius, wear) Not applicable Applicable
Tool offset data (tool length, geometry) Not applicable Applicable
Tool offset data (tool length, wear) Not applicable Applicable
T
Without tool geometry and wear With tool geometry and wear
Data type/tool offset memory
compensation compensation
Tool offset data (geometry) Not applicable Applicable
Tool offset data (wear) Not applicable Applicable
Tool radius compensation Tool radius compensation

Y-axis offset Y-axis offset
Data type/tool offset memory
(without tool geometry and wear (with tool geometry and wear
compensation) compensation)
Tool offset data (geometry) Not applicable Applicable
Tool offset data (wear) Not applicable Applicable
Data type/tool offset memory Virtual tool tip direction

Tool offset data Applicable
- 1180 -
- Part programs and part program editing

NOTE
1 When changing the protection level of a part program, use the program list
screen instead of the protection level setting screen. See the description of
"Operation/setting screen".
2 Part program editing involves editing of programs for the MDI mode.
- Absolute coordinate preset operation

NOTE
When absolute coordinates are preset, workpiece coordinate system presetting is
protected.
- Other notes
NOTE
1 For some data, the output function is not provided.
2 When a higher protection level than the current operation level is set for data,
that protection level cannot be changed.
3 The protection level of data cannot be changed to a protection level higher than
the current operation level.
4 Part program editing involves editing of programs for the MDI mode.
5 For details of the protection level of PMC data, refer to "PMC Programming
Manual (B-64393EN)".
6 In principle, the data change protection check is performed for changes made by
MDI. Changes made by machine operations and so on are not checked.
For example, a programmable parameter input by specifying G10L50 may be
changed regardless of the operation level and parameter change protection
level.
To protect data from illegal programmed commands, take appropriate measures;
for example, set an appropriate change protection level for program edit
operations not to create illegal programs.
Signal
Memory protection signals KEY1 to KEY4<G046.3 to 6>
[Function] These signals select the operation level for the 8-level data protection function.
The correspondence between signals and operation levels is shown below.
Operation level KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1

3 0 1 0 0
2 0 0 1 0
1 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 0 0
NOTE
When a combination other than the above is set, operation level 0
is assumed.
[Caution] When the 8-level data protection function is not used, these signals are used as memory
protection keys.
- 1181 -
Note that what these signals indicate changes depending on whether the 8-level data
protection function is used.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
NOTE
For a 2-path system, the signal address is common to all paths.
Operation/setting screen
Various settings or display about operation levels or protection levels can be performed on the following
screens.
• Password change screen
• Operation level setting screen
• Protection level setting screen
• Program list screen
- Password change screen

On the password change screen, the following display or operations can be performed.
1) Displaying the current operation level
2) Changing the passwords of operation levels 4 to 7
NOTE
1 A password consists of 3 to 8 characters including the following.
- Uppercase letter
- Numeric
2 When a password is entered, * is displayed instead of each of input characters.
3 The following shows whether passwords can be changed at the current
operation level.
- Password having a higher operation level than the current operation level
Cannot be changed.
- Password having the same operation level as the current operation level
Can be changed.
- Password having a lower operation level than the current operation level
Can be changed (reverting to the initial password can only be performed).
CAUTION
The set password is not displayed.
Be careful not to forget the password.
- Operation level setting screen

On the operation level setting screen, the following display or operations can be performed.
2) Entering the password and then selecting one of operation levels 4 to 7
3) Canceling the entered password and then selecting the operation level other than operation levels 4
to 7
NOTE
When a password is entered, * is displayed instead of each character.
- 1182 -
- Protection level setting screen

On the protection level setting screen, the following display or operations can be performed.
2) Displaying the change protection level and output protection level of each data
3) Changing the change protection level and output protection level of each data
NOTE
1 For data whose protection level is higher than the operation level, the protection
level cannot be changed.
2 The protection level cannot be changed to a protection level that is higher than
- Program list screen

On the program list screen, the following display and operations can be performed.
1) Displaying the change protection level and output protection level of each part program
2) Changing the change protection level and output protection level of each part program
NOTE
1 For data whose protection level is higher than the operation level, the protection
level cannot be changed.
2 The protection level cannot be changed to a protection level that is higher than
13.1.4 Touch Panel Control

Overview
A display unit with a touch panel enables you to operate soft keys by touching the screen.
Moreover, an application using a touch panel can be created with the C language executor.
NOTE
1 RS-232C serial port 2 (JD36B) is occupied.
2 Touch panel pressing information is read at intervals of 32 msec.
3 A positional precision of ±2.5 mm is provided.
Explanation
- C language executor
With the C language executor, touch panel functions can be used. For the specifications of the functions,
refer to "C Language Executor Programming Manual".
- Calibration
When replacing the touch panel or clearing all memory (SRAM) data, set data for calibrating the
positional relation between the touch panel and LCD according to the procedure below.
Calibration procedure
1 Enable the touch panel calibration screen.(Set bit 5 (DCL) of parameter No. 3113 to 1.)
3 Press the continuous menu key several times. The [TOUCH PANEL] soft key is displayed.
4 Press the [TOUCH PANEL] soft key then the [(OPRT)] soft key. The [TP CAL] soft key is
displayed.
- 1183 -
5 Pressing the [TP CAL] soft key displays the touch panel calibration screen for all screens.
6 Press the calibration points (9 points) with a dedicated pen. When a point is pressed correctly, the
"+" mark changes to the "Ο" mark. If a "+" mark is not pressed accurately, the message
"CALIBRATION POINT DOES NOT MATCH. PLEASE PUSH AGAIN." is displayed.
7 After entering the calibration points (9 points), press the <INPUT> key to complete calibration. To
cancel calibration or retry, press the <CAN> key. The screen display returns to the previous screen.
If the <INPUT> key is pressed before entering the calibration points (9 points), calibration operation
is cancelled.
8 When calibration is terminated normally, the message "CALIBRATION WAS ENDED." is
displayed.
9 Upon completion of calibration, disable the touch panel calibration screen to protect against
operation errors. (Set bit 5 (DCL) of parameter No. 3113 to 0.)
- 1184 -
NOTE
1 If the screen display is switched from the touch panel calibration screen to
another screen such as the alarm screen by the automatic screen switching
function, calibration is automatically cancelled.
2 Calibration operation can be performed in any mode.
3 After system startup, perform calibration operation swiftly before starting
operation.
- Operation when two points are pressed at the same time

When the touch panel is pressed at two or more points at the same time, the position of the gravity center
is obtained by considering how each of these points is pressed, and the touch panel is assumed to be
pressed at this gravity center position. At this time the coordinates that can be obtained can be set by
setting bit 1 (T2P) of parameter No. 3192.
1) Suppose that in Fig. 13.1 (a), as soon as point A is pressed, point B is pressed.
A
C
B
Fig. 13.1 (a) Pressed points on the touch panel
2) The coordinates that can be obtained change as shown in Fig. 13.1 (b).
On Cont'd Cont'd Cont'd Cont'd Off

... ...
A A A C C
Fig. 13.1 (b) Coordinates when parameter T2P = 0
3) If bit T2P is set to 1, A is assumed to be held pressed even after the pressed point changes from point
A to point C (Fig. 13.1 (c)).
On Cont'd Cont'd Cont'd Cont'd Off

... ...
A A A A A
Fig. 13.1 (c) Coordinates when parameter T2P = 1
- Operation when dragging is performed

When dragging (continuously pressing the touch panel while making a movement) is performed on the
touch panel, the system response varies depending on the setting of bit 1 (T2P) of parameter No. 3192.
When the drag function is used in C Language Executor applications, set T2P to 0.
1) Suppose that in Fig. 13.1 (d), point A is pressed first and then dragging is performed from point A to
B to C.
A
B C
Fig. 13.1 (d) Dragging on the touch panel

- 1185 -
2) The coordinates that can be obtained change as shown in Fig. 13.1 (e).
On Cont'd Cont'd
A B C
Fig. 13.1 (e) Coordinates when parameter T2P = 0
3) If bit T2P is set to 1, A is assumed to be kept pressed even after the pressed point moves from point
A to point C (Fig. 13.1 (f)).
On Cont'd Cont'd
A A A
Fig. 13.1 (f) Coordinates when parameter T2P = 1
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3113 DCL

[Data type] Bit
#5 DCL The touch panel calibration screen is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
Usually, set this parameter to 0. Touch panel calibration becomes necessary only when
the touch panel is replaced or all memory data is cleared. Set this parameter to 1 only
when performing touch panel calibration. Upon completion of touch panel calibration,
reset this parameter to 0.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3119 DDS

[Data type] Bit
#2 DDS The touch panel is:

0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.
Set this parameter to 1 when disabling the touch panel temporarily as in the case of
startup.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3192 TRA T2P

[Data type] Bit
#1 T2P When more than one point is pressed on the touch panel:
0: The position at the center of gravity is obtained.
1: The point pressed first is obtained.
- 1186 -
NOTE
1 Even when bit parameter T2P is set to 1, the position at the center
of gravity is assumed to be pressed if two or more points are
pressed within a scan period (32 ms) of the touch panel.
2 If a C executer application or the like has a touch panel drag (move
in pressed state) function, set parameter T2P to 0.
#2 TRA If a point on the touch panel is kept pressed for a time specified in parameter No. 3197 or
longer,
0: An alarm is not raised.
1: An alarm (SR5303) is raised.
NOTE
1 If an C executer application or the like has a touch panel repeat
(continue pressing) function, set parameter TRA to 0.
2 In open CNC, the parameter is valid just for the CNC screen
display function.
3197 Detection time of continuous pressing on touch panel

[Data type] Word
[Unit of data] sec
Set a period of continuous pressing on the touch panel which causes alarm to be raised.
When 0 is set, it is equivalent to 20.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 2 (TRA) of parameter No. 3192 is
set to 1.
Alarm and message

SR5303 TOUCH PANEL ERROR The touch panel is not connected correctly, or the touch
panel cannot be initialized when the power is turned on.
If bit 2 (TRA) of parameter No. 3192 is set to 1, this message
is issued also when the touch panel is being kept pressed.
Correct the cause then turn on the power again.
Caution
CAUTION
When all memory (SRAM) data is cleared, the soft keys on the touch panel are
not made usable yet. In this case, the MDI keys (such as the cursor keys and
page keys) need to be used for setting.
- 1187 -
13.1.5 External Touch Panel Interface

Outline
External Touch Panel (called "ETP" below) of SNP-X protocol can be connected with Series 0i-D.
ETP has functions that can read out/ write in from/to PMC such control signals as input signal(X), output
signal(Y), internal relay(R), keep relay(K), data table(D), extra relay(E), timer(T), counter(C), and the
function is almost the same as operating panel of machine.
The remarkable function of ETP is drawing function.

Assignment between drawing and address(signal) can be specified freely.
For example, the data in data table can be set with the switch on the screen which is designed to assign
the setting of data table.
ETP CNC
DATA
Push the switch Data in data

on the screen. table is set.
- 1188 -
Explanation
- Connection
RS-232C serial port 2(JD36B) on main CPU board is used in CNC.
Cable-A must be based on RS-232C standard, and are prepared by customer.
(1) Cable-A (connection diagram between JD36B on CNC and SIO on ETP.)
ETP CNC
Cable-A
SIO JD36B
ETP CNC
SIO(25pin) JD36B(20pin)
Shield
03 11
RD SD
02 01
SD RD
04 15
RS RS
05 05
CS CS
07 08
SG SG
03
DR
07
CD
13
ER
Cables must be shielded by cable clamp made of metal.
- Power On sequence
Please turn on the power supply on ETP side first.
- 1189 -
- Data of CNC, read / write from ETP

The following CNC data can be read and written on the ETP side:
Signal type 0i-D/0i Mate-D PMC
Input signal to the PMC from the machine X0 to X127
Note 1 X200 to X327
X400 to X527
X600 to X727
X1000 to X1127
Output signal from the PMC to the machine Y0 to Y127
Y200 to Y327
Y400 to Y527
Y600 to Y727
Y1000 to Y1127
Internal relay
- User area R0 to R7999
Keep relay
- User area K0 to K99
Data table D0 to D8190
Note 2
Extra relay E0 to E9999
Timer
- Variable timer T0 to T499
Timer
- Variable timer C0 to C399
Counter C5000 to C5199
NOTE
1 These addresses are for read only.
2 Although the actual PMC addresses range from 0000 to 9999, only addresses
up to 8190 can be used with ETP.
- Protocol
Only direct command on SNP-X protocol is available in CNC.
ETP also must use the same protocol and the same command only.
The process required for writing data more than 3 bytes is the same as
that lass than 2bytes.
Please refer the documents of SNP-X protocol for the detail of SNP-X protocol.
Limitation
1) ETP cannot be used together with the touch panel on the LCD of the CNC (FS0i-D).
2) ETP is Touch Panel made by DIGITAL Co. Ltd. ETPs which can be connected with CNC are as
follows.
- GP-450E
- GP-550T
- GP-550S
- GP-2000 SERIES
Parameters
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3119 TPA

- 1190 -
[Data type] Bit
#3 TPA When the option for the external touch panel interface is selected, the external touch
panel interface connection is:
0: Valid.
1: Invalid.
For an external touch panel (called ETP hereinafter), the RS-232C serial port 2 ((JD36B)
on the main board of the CNC is used.
When using ETP, set bit 3 (TPA) of parameter No. 3119 to 0.
By this setting, JD36B is used for ETP, regardless of the setting of I/O CHANNEL (I/O
device selection) of the existing parameters Nos. 0020 through 0023.
For other I/O devices, use JD36A and so forth.
By the setting above, the settings of the existing parameters Nos. 0100 and 0121 through
0123 become invalid for channel 2 (JD36B), and the following settings are applied at all
times:
- Baud rate : 19200 bps
- Stop bit : 1 bit
- Parity check : Even parity
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13101 TPB

[Data type] Bit
NOTE
#1 TPB Baud rate used with the external touch panel

0: 19200 bps is always used.
1: The baud rate with the baud rate number set in parameter No. 0123 for channel 2 is
used.
As mentioned in the description of bit 3 (TPA) of parameter No. 3119, when TPA is set
to 0, the baud rate is always set to 19200 bps.
To allow the baud rate to be changed, set bit 1 (TPB) of parameter No. 13101 to 1.
This allows the baud rate number set in parameter No. 0123 for channel 2 to be used.
NOTE
Baud rates that can be set may vary depending on the ETP used.
13.1.6 Parameter Check Sum Function

Overview
Standard check sum of CNC parameter can be calculated previously and be saved in CNC. In the other
hand, a parameter check sum is calculated at CNC power-on. This value is compared with the standard
check sum to check whether there is difference between two values.
If there are changed parameters, an alarm will occur at next power-on. So the CNC can be averted from
miss operation such as miss setting of parameter and forgetting to correct the parameters changed
temporarily.
- 1191 -
Explanation
When parameter CKS(No.13730#0) is changed from “0” to “1”, the standard check sum is calculated. In
the other hand at CNC power-on, a parameter check sum is calculated and it’s value is compared with
standard check sum. If two values are different, alarm (DS5340) occurs.
This alarm is canceled by the operation pressing and , but if parameters are not corrected to
original value, alarm (DS5340) will occur again at next check sum comparison at CNC power-on.
By parameter setting, some parameters can be excluded from check sum. Moreover, there are many
parameters that CNC system excludes from check sum.
NOTE
If parameter CSR(No.13730#7) is “1”, alarm(DS5340) can be canceled only by
key.
Parameter check sum information screen

The parameter check sum information screen shows the value of the standard check sum, the time and
date when the standard check sum was calculated, and the value of a check sum calculated at power-on.
Fig. 13.1.6 (g) Parameter check sum information screen
Parameter check sum setting screen

- Setting parameters to be excluded
Setting the number of parameter excluded from check sum on this screen.
A brief explanation about setting data is shown on the bottom of this frame.
- 1192 -
Fig. 13.1.6 (h) Parameter check sum setting (No.) screen
- Range of excluded parameters

The range of parameter numbers to be excluded from check sum can be specified.
A brief explanation about setting data is shown on the bottom of this frame.
Fig. 13.1.6 (i) Parameter check sum setting (range) screen
Operation procedure
The following explains how to display the parameter check sum information screen and how to make
settings on the parameter check sum setting screen.
- Displaying parameter check sum information

For the 10.4-inch display unit, follow the steps below.
2 Press continuous menu key several times until soft key [PARAM CHKSUM] appears.
- 1193 -
3 Press horizontal soft key [PARAM CHKSUM].

4 Press horizontal soft key [CHKSUM INFO]. The following screen is then displayed:
Fig. 13.1.6 (j) Parameter check sum information screen (10.4 inches)

2 Press vertical continuous menu key [+] several times until soft key [CHKSUM] is displayed.
3 Press soft key [CHKSUM].

4 Press soft key [CHKINF]. The following screen is displayed:
Fig. 13.1.6 (k) Parameter check sum information screen (8.4 inches)
- 1194 -
- Setting parameters to be excluded

2 Press continuous menu key [+] several times until soft key [PARAM CHKSUM] is displayed.
3 Press soft key [PARAM CHKSUM].

4 Press soft key [CHKSUM SETING]. The following screen is displayed:
Fig. 13.1.6 (l) Parameter check sum setting screen (10.4 inches)
5 By using page keys and , the parameter check sum setting screen changes as follows:
First page: PARAM CHECK SUM SET (NO.) 1/2
Second page: PARAM CHECK SUM SET(NO.) 2/2
Third page: PARAM CHECK SUM SET(RANGE) 1/2
- 1195 -
Fourth page: PARAM CHECK SUM SET(RANGE) 2/2
6 Move the cursor to a target item.

7 Enter the number of a parameter to be excluded from the check sum, and press the key or soft
key [INPUT].
8 When completing the setting of all parameters to be excluded, set bit 0 (CKS) of parameter No.
13730 to 1.

2 Press vertical continuous menu key [+] several times until soft key [CHKSUM] is displayed.
3 Press soft key [CHKSUM].
4 Press soft key [CHKSET]. The following screen is displayed:
Fig. 13.1.6 (m) Parameter check sum setting screen (8.4 inches)
5 The following steps are the same as those for the 10.4-inch display described above.
- 1196 -
NOTE
1 Items set on this screen correspond to parameter Nos. 13731 to 13770 as
shown below. These items can be set also on the parameter screen.
Exclusion Nos. 01 to 20 → Parameter Nos. 13731 to 13750
Exclusion ranges 01 to 10 → Parameter Nos. 13751 to 13770
2 When 0 is set as an exclusion number, it is ignored.
3 Numbers set as the start NO. and end NO. of each exclusion range are also
excluded.
4 In a combination of the start No. and end No., if the start No. is greater than the
end No. (start No. > end No.), the setting of check sum exclusion numbers
becomes invalid.
5 If the start No. equals the end No. (start No. = end No.), only the set number is
excluded.
Excluded parameters
A check sum is not the sum of all parameters but is calculated with particular parameters excluded. The
parameters to be excluded satisfy one of the following conditions:
<1> Parameters that can be input by setting input
<2> Parameters of which values may be changed by the system
<3> Parameters set on the parameter check sum setting screen
For the parameters shown in <2> above, see the following table.
Table 13.1.6 (a) Parameters excluded from the check sum

Parameter number Description
1320 to 1327 Coordinates at the boundary of stored stroke check 1
1330 to 1348 Chuck and tail stock barrier
3226 Keyword of the key lock for parameters related to dual check safety
4911 to 4914 Spindle speed fluctuation detection
5130 Amount of chamfering in thread cutting cycles G96 and G92
5132 to 5133 Depth of cut and escaping amount of multiple repetitive cycles G71 and G72
5134 Clearance value of multiple repetitive cycles G71 and G72
5135 Escaping amount along the X-axis in multiple repetitive cycle G73
5136 Escaping amount along the Z-axis in multiple repetitive cycle G73
5137 Divide number of multiple repetitive cycle G73
5139 Return amount in multiple repetitive cycles G74 and G75
5140 Minimum depth of cut in multiple repetitive cycle G76
5141 Finishing allowance in multiple repetitive cycle G76
5142 Number of repetitions of final finishing in multiple repetitive cycle G76
5143 Tool nose angle in multiple repetitive cycle G76
6581 to 6595 VGA character color number
6750 Integrated value of power-on period
7220 to 7283 Name of general-purpose switch on software operator’s panel
7310 Program restart
8210 Slant angle
8900 PWE
11309 Menu number selected on the pattern menu screen
14717 Axis number of the C-axis in simulation (for MGi only)
- 1197 -
When the machining condition selecting function is used, the parameters in the following table are also
excluded from the check sum:
Table 13.1.6 (b) Parameters excluded from the check sum
(when the machining condition selecting function is used)
Parameter number Description
1432 Maximum cutting feedrate for each axis in the advanced preview control/AI advanced
preview control/AI contour control mode
1769 Time constant for each axis for linear and bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration in
cutting feed
1772 Acceleration change time in bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
1783 Allowable speed differences in speed determination by corner speed differences
13634 Currently selected level in advanced preview control/AI advanced preview control/AI
contour control
Table 13.1.6 (c) Parameters for setting the parameter numbers of parameters to be excluded from the check
sum (when the machining condition selecting function is used)
Parameter No.
Parameter number set in parameter No.13628 (parameter number corresponding to item 1 when advanced
preview control/AI advanced preview control/AI contour control is used)
Parameter number set in parameter No.13629 (parameter number corresponding to item 2 when advanced
preview control/AI advanced preview control/AI contour control is used)
NOTE
1 When the machining condition selecting function is not used, these parameters
are included in the check sum.
2 The parameters of which numbers are set in parameter Nos. 13628 and 13629
are excluded, but parameter Nos. 13628 and 13629 are not excluded.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13730 CSR CKS
[Data type] Bit
#0 CKS When the power is turned on, the parameter check sum is:
0: Not checked.
1: Checked.
#7 CSR Alarm No. 5340 (parameter check sum error) is cleared with:
0: The and keys.
1: The key.
13731 NC parameter check sum exclusion number 01
- 1198 -
[Data type] 2-word

[Valid data range] 0 to maximum parameter number
Set the parameter numbers of parameters to be excluded from check sum calculation
performed by the parameter check sum function.
13751 Starting number of parameter check sum exclusion range 01
13752 Ending number of parameter check sum exclusion range 01
- 1199 -
[Data type] 2-word

[Valid data range] 0 to maximum parameter number
Specify a range of parameter numbers of which parameters are to be excluded from check
sum calculation performed by the parameter check sum function. The parameters within
the range from the starting number to the ending number are excluded from the check
sum.
NOTE
1 The parameter numbers set as the starting number and ending
number are also excluded.
2 In a combination of a starting number and an ending number, if the
starting number is greater than the ending number (starting number
> ending number), the setting of check sum exclusion numbers is
ignored.
3 If the starting number equals the ending number (starting number =
ending number), only that number is excluded.
Alarm and message

DS 5340 PARAMETER CHECK SUM ERROR Because parameters have been modified, the parameter
check sum and the standard check sum do not match.
Restore the original parameter state, or set a standard check
sum again.
- 1200 -
13.1.7 Touch Panel Check Signal

Overview
This function outputs a signal to notify the PMC that a virtual MDI key has been pressed. The machine
tool builder can use this function for applications in which, for example, a buzzer is sounded after a press
of a virtual MDI key is detected.
Explanation
When a virtual MDI key is pressed, the signal TPPRS<F006.0> is output. (Fig. 13.1.7 (a) and (b) show
the range of virtual MDI keys that cause signal output.)
In related functions, this function operates as follows:
• CNC screen display function

When the virtual MDI key function is used in the CNC screen display function, the signal is output.
• Macro executor
When the macro executor is used on the virtual MDI screen, the signal is output.
• C language executor
While the C language executor screen is being displayed, the signal is not output.
NOTE
1 This function is enabled when the virtual MDI function is used.
2 When a virtual MDI key is pressed for a short time or when a virtual MDI key is
pressed several times successively, the CNC does not sometimes accept the
key input even if the signal is output.
Range of virtual MDI keys that cause signal output
Fig. 13.1.7 (a) When the NC screen is displayed
- 1201 -
Fig. 13.1.7 (b) When the PMC high-precision screen is displayed
When a virtual MDI key within the range indicated by in Fig. 13.1.7 (a) and Fig. 13.1.7 (b)
is pressed, the signal is output.
Signal
- Touch panel check signal TPPRS<F006.0>
[Function] Notifies the PMC that a virtual MDI key has been pressed.
[Operation] The signal is set to 1 when:
- A virtual MDI key is pressed.
The signal is set to 0 when:
- A virtual MDI key is released.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F006 TPPRS
- Timing chart
The following shows a timing chart of a press of a virtual MDI key and the touch panel check signal.
Virtual MDI key pressed
Touch panel check signal
32 msec or more
• When a virtual MDI key is pressed, the signal is output for 32 msec or longer.
Read the signal with a ladder program of which cycle period is shorter than 32 msec.
• When a virtual MDI key is held pressed continuously, the signal is kept output.
• There may be a delay from a press of a virtual MDI key until the touch panel check signal is output.
A delay may be generated also when the virtual MDI key is released.
- 1202 -
• If the time from when a virtual MDI key is pressed until it is released is within 50 msec, the touch
panel check signal is not sometimes output.
13.1.8 CNC Screen Dual Display

Overview
The CNC screen display function can be used to display the CNC screen on both the PC connected via
the Ethernet and the CNC. If the CNC screen display function is started on the PC side when the screen
is displayed on the display unit of the CNC, the dual display mode is entered.
When the CNC screen display function is ended on the PC, the CNC screen is displayed only on the
display unit of the CNC.
In case the PC hangs up for a cause in the dual display mode, it is also possible to forcibly turn off the
CNC screen display function on the PC by using a DI signal to end the dual display mode.
Key input operation can be performed on one of the PC and CNC sides, which can be selected.
NOTE
When the dual display function is being used, the same screen is displayed on
the PC and the CNC. The PC performance may have influence on the display
speed on the CNC side and slow down the display on the CNC.
Explanation
- Operation
When bit 7 (NS2) of parameter No. 3206 is set to 1, the CNC screen dual display function is enabled.
Then, when the CNC screen display function on the PC side is started, the CNC screen is displayed on
both the PC and the CNC .
- Selection of key control

Either the keyboard of the PC or the MDI keys of the CNC become usable for key control.
The DI signal CNCKY<G0295.7> is used to select key control.
If CNCKY<G0295.7> is set to 1, the MDI keys of the CNC become usable; if the signal is set to 0, the
keyboard of the PC becomes usable.
The reset key, however, is always usable on both the PC and the CNC.
When the CNC is equipped with a touch panel, if bit 5 (S2K) of parameter No. 3206 is set to 1, it
becomes possible to select key control by pressing the upper left corner of the screen. In this case, the
signal cannot be used to select key control.
When the upper left part of the display screen on the CNC is pressed, the MDI keys become usable; when
the upper left part of the CNC screen display on the PC is clicked, the keyboard of the PC becomes
usable.
With a DO signal CNCKYO<F0295.7>, key control selection status can be checked to see which key
control, key control on the PC or key control on the CNC, is currently selected.
Selection of key control is disabled when the dual display function is not used.
- Data I/O
When bit 0 (PCM) of parameter No. 0300 is set to 1, the data input/output destination is determined by
the selection of key control. When the keyboard of the PC is selected, input and output operations on
the PC side are enabled; when the MDI keys of the CNC are selected, input and output operations on the
CNC side are enabled.
- 1203 -
NOTE
If key control selection is changed and so the data input/output destination is
changed when the All I/O screen is displayed, the file list displayed on the All I/O
screen is not updated automatically. In this case, press soft key [REFRESH] to
update the display.
- Forcible end by a DI signal

If the PC hangs up for a cause when the CNC screen dual display function is being performed, the CNC
can issue a DI signal to forcibly end the CNC screen display function on the PC.
When C2SEND<G0295.6> is set to 1, the CNC screen display function on the PC is forcibly ended.
The status of the forcible end processing is indicated by a DO signal C2SENO<F0295.6>.
Forcible end by the DI signal is invalid when the dual display function is not used.
Signal
Key control selection signal CNCKY <G295.7>
[Function] Selects which key control, key control on the PC or on the CNC, is to be enabled.
[Operation] If the signal is set to 0, key control on the PC is enabled.
If the signal is set to 1, key control from the MDI keys on the CNC is enabled.
Dual display forcible end request signal C2SEND <G295.6>

[Function] Requests forcible end of the CNC screen display function on the PC side.
[Operation] If the signal is set to 0, no end request is issued.
If the signal is set to 1, an end request is issued.
Key control selection status signal CNCKYO <F295.7>

[Function] Indicates which key control, key control on the PC or on the CNC, is currently selected.
[Operation] If this signal is set to 0, key control on the PC side is selected.
If this signal is set to 1, MDI input on the CNC is selected.
Dual display forcible end status signal C2SENO <F295.6>

[Function] Indicates the status of end processing performed in response to the end request issued
with the dual display forcible end request signal.
[Operation] If this signal is set to 0, the end processing is not yet completed.
If this signal is set to 1, the end processing is completed.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G295 CNCKY C2SEND
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F295 CNCKYO C2SENO
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0300 PCM

[Data type] Bit
- 1204 -
#0 PCM If the 0i-D/0i Mate-D is connected to a PC via Ethernet, when the CNC screen display
function is started:
0: The memory card interface in the CNC is used.
1: The memory card interface or the hard disk on the PC side is used.
When the CNC screen dual display function is being used, the data input/output
destination conforms to the selection of key control.
This parameter is valid only when the CNC screen display function is active.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3206 NS2 S2K

[Data type] Bit
#5 S2K In CNC screen dual display function,

0: Key control is selected by DI signal <G295.7>.
1: Key control is selected by pushing at left upper corner on the screen. (Touch panel
only)
#7 NS2 CNC screen dual display function is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
13.1.9 Speed Display Function of a Milling Tool with Servo Motor

Overview
Any servo motor axis can be selected to display its speed considering gear ratio.
Explanation
The screen display can be switched between the speed of the milling axis and the spindle speed by using
an input signal.
- Switching to the display of the speed of a milling tool with a servo motor
With the speed display change signal SDPC<Gn038.5>, the speed of a milling axis or the spindle speed
can be selected and indicated in the part marked by (*1)(*2) in the below figure.
- Displaying the speed of a milling tool with a servo motor

As the speed of a milling axis, the value obtained by multiplying the servo motor speed by the gear ratio
is indicated.
　Number of gear teeth on the servo motor axis side (parameter No.1898)
Gear ratio　　
= 　　
　Number of gear teeth on the milling axis side (parameter No.1899) 　
To select the target servo motor axis, set a controlled axis number as the number of a servo motor axis
used as the axis of a milling tool (parameter No. 1895).
NOTE
1 If parameter Nos. 1898 and 1899 are not set, the gear ratio is assumed to be
1:13.
2 If an axis that uses a linear motor is selected, the speed cannot be displayed.
3 Even when the speed of a milling axis is displayed, the actual speed of feed per
revolution follows the speed of the spindle.
- 1205 -
- Milling tool rotation speed display by a servo motor

Figs. 13.1.9 (a) to (d) indicate examples of positions in which the rotation speed is displayed.
The positions are indicated by (*1) and (*2) below.
The mark (*2) indicates that bit 2 (DPS) of parameter No. 3105 needs to be set.
←(*1)
(*2)→
Fig. 13.1.9 (a) Example of the current position screen (10.4-inch display unit)
(*1)→ (*2)→
Fig. 13.1.9 (b) Example of the program screen (10.4-inch display unit)
- 1206 -
← (*1)
(*2)→
Fig. 13.1.9 (c) Example of the program check screen (8.4-inch display unit)
← (*1)
(*2)→
Fig. 13.1.9 (d) Example of the graphic screen (tool path diagram) (8.4-inch display unit)
Signal
Speed display change signal SDPC<Gn038.5>
[Function] Selects the speed to be displayed: the speed of the milling axis or the spindle speed.
[Operation] If this signal is set to 1, the speed of the milling axis is displayed.
If this signal is set to 0, the spindle speed is displayed.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn038 SDPC
- 1207 -
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3105 DPS

#2 DPS The actual spindle speed is:

0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
1895 Servo motor axis number used for a milling tool

[Valid data range] 1 to number of controlled axes
This parameter sets the servo motor axis number used for displaying the speed of a
milling tool that incorporates a servo motor.
1898 Number of gear teeth on the servo motor axis side

This parameter sets the number of servo motor axis gear teeth used for displaying the
speed of a milling tool that incorporates a servo motor.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when a non-zero value is set in parameter
No. 1895.
1899 Number of gear teeth on the milling axis side

This parameter sets the number of milling axis gear teeth used for displaying the speed of
a milling tool that incorporates a servo motor.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when a non-zero value is set in parameter
No. 1895.
13.1.10 Screen Switching by Mode

Overview
One of the screens displayed using function key such as the program edit screen and the program
check screen can be selected according to the mode. When a mode switches to other mode, the screen
selected last in that mode is displayed.
There are five modes, and immediately after the power is turned on in each mode, a screen is selected as
follows:
- 1208 -
MEM : Program check screen (for MEM)
EDIT : Program edit screen (for EDIT)
MDI : Program edit screen (for MDI)
TJOG/THND : Program edit screen
Other modes : Program edit screen
Mode switching and screen examples
- Mode switching after power-on

When the MEM mode is selected and function key is pressed at power-on, the program check
screen is displayed.
When the mode is changed to the EDIT mode, the program edit screen is displayed.
- Mode switching after screen operation

When soft key [FOLDER] is pressed in the EDIT mode, the program list screen is displayed.
When the mode is changed to the MEM mode, the program check screen is displayed.
Then, when the mode is changed to the EDIT mode, the program list screen is displayed.
MEM mode
EDIT mode
- 1209 -
- Mode switching after screen operation

When soft key [FOLDER] is pressed in the EDIT mode, the program list screen is displayed.
When the mode is changed to the MEM mode, the program check screen is displayed.
Then, when the mode is changed to the EDIT mode, the program list screen is displayed.
EDIT mode
MEM mode
EDIT mode
- 1210 -
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11302 CPG

[Data type] Bit
#7 CPG PROG function screen selection is:

0: Not changed according to the CNC mode.
1: Changed according to the CNC mode.
13.1.11 Screen Switching at Path Switching

Overview
When switching from one path to another has been made, the same screen and soft keys as displayed for
the previous path can be displayed.
Since the same screen is displayed even after path switching, the user no longer has to change the screen
display.
It is also possible to change the screen display to the screen that was selected most recently for each path.
Explanation
Even after switching between paths is made, the currently selected screen is displayed, and only
information displayed on the screen is updated.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3208 PSC

[Data type] Bit
#5 PSC When the path is switched based on the path switch signal:
0: The screen display is switched to the last selected screen of the path.
1: The same screen as for the path before switching is displayed.
If this parameter is set to 0, the screen selected for each path is stored.
Therefore, when path switching to a path is made, the screen selected last for that path is
displayed.
- 1211 -
13.1.12 Screen erasure function and automatic screen erasure

function
Overview
Keeping the same characters displayed in the same positions on the screen for a long time will shorten the
life of the LCD.
To prevent this, the CNC screen can be erased. The screen erasure function allows the user to perform a
key operation to erase the screen. The automatic screen erasure function erases the screen automatically
when there has been no key operation for a parameter-set period of time.
Screen erasure function

When 0 is set in parameter No. 3123, the CNC screen can be erased by pressing the key and any
function key (such as or ) at the same time. The CNC screen can be displayed again by
pressing any function key.
Automatic screen erasure function

When there has been no key operation for a time (in minutes) set in parameter No. 3123, the CNC screen
is erased automatically. The CNC screen is displayed again by pressing a key.
- Screen erasure by the automatic screen erasure function

If the following conditions are all satisfied for the time (in minutes) set in parameter No. 3123, the CNC
screen is erased.
Conditions for automatically erasing the CNC screen
• Parameter No. 3123 ≠ 0
• None of the following key operations is performed.
MDI keys
Soft keys
External key input
• No alarm is issued.
- Redisplay of the screen by the automatic screen erasure function

If one of the following conditions is satisfied when the CNC screen is off, the CNC screen is displayed
again:
Conditions for redisplaying the CNC screen
• One of the following key operations is performed.
MDI keys
Soft keys
External key input
• An alarm is issued.
- Screen erasure by using the key + function key

When a non-zero value is set in parameter No. 3123, the screen is not erased with the key and a
function key.
- Set time
Only the time set in parameter No. 3123 for path 1 is valid.
- Alarm in another path

When an alarm is issued in any of the paths, the screen is not erased.
- 1212 -
Signal
Screen erasure disable signal *CRTOF<G0062.1>
[Function] This signal enables or disables the screen erasure function/automatic screen erasure
function.
[Operation] 0: Enables the screen erasure function/automatic screen erasure function.
1: Disables the screen erasure function/automatic screen erasure function.
NOTE
Be sure to set this signal "1" to display an external message in
screen erasure.
Automatic screen erasure status in-progress signal ERTVA<Fn006.2>

[Function] This signal indicates that the CNC screen is being erased by the automatic screen erasure
function.
[Output condition] This signal is set to 1 when:
- The CNC screen is erased by the automatic screen erasure function.
This signal is set to 0 when:
- One of the following key operations is performed:
MDI key
Soft key
External key input
- An alarm is issued.
- The operation mode is changed.
- The automatic screen erasure disable signal *CRTOF <G0062.1> is set to 1.
NOTE
This signal is not output when the screen is erased by pressing the
key and any function key.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0062 *CRTOF
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn006 ERTVA
Parameter
3123 Time required before a screen saver is activated

[Unit of data] min
Set a time in minutes until the automatic screen erasure function starts operating. When
0 is set, automatic screen erasure is disabled. In this parameter, only the value set for
path 1 is valid.
NOTE
1 Setting 0 disables automatic screen erasure.
- 1213 -
NOTE
2 This function cannot be used together with manual screen erasure.
If 1 or a larger value is set in this parameter, manual screen
erasure is disabled.
13.1.13 Screen Hard Copy Function

Overview
This function converts screen information displayed on the CNC into bit map format data and output it to
a memory card. Once output, bit map format data can be displayed and edited on a personal computer.
Explanation
When using this function, the following settings are necessary.
- Set bit 7 (HDC) of parameter No. 3301 to 1.
- Set parameter No.20 to 4.
For a 2-path system, set bit 7 (HDC) of parameter No. 3301 of path 1.
- Start/cancellation methods
The screen hard copy function is started by pressing and holding down key for five seconds or by
changing the hard copy execution request signal HCREQ<G067.7> from "0" to "1". The function can be
canceled by pressing key or by changing the hard copy cancellation request signal
HCABT<G067.6> to "1".
While the screen hard copy function is in progress, the hard copy execution status signal
HCEXE<F061.3> is "1", and upon completion, it is set to "0". When a screen hard copy cancellation
request is received, the hard copy cancellation request reception signal HCAB2<F061.2> is set to "1" and
remains in the "1" state until the hard copy function is started again or a reset is made.
- Acquisition and output of screen data

When started, the screen hard copy function starts acquiring screen data. As soon as it has acquired it, the
function outputs bit map format data to the memory card inserted into the LCD unit. While screen data is
being acquired, the screen remains stationary for a few seconds. Acquired screen data can be output from
the memory card screen. Also, while screen data is being output, "OUTPUT" blinks in the status display.
- Screen data file names

Bit map format screen data files created by this function are assigned the names below, starting with the
one created after the power is turned on.
"HDCPY000.BMP" (name of the first file output to the memory card after the power is turned on)
"HDCPY001.BMP" (name of the second file output to the memory card after the power is turned on)
:
:
"HDCPY999.BMP" (name of the 1000th file output to the memory card after the power is turned on)
If, after a file with "HDCPY999.BMP" is output, the screen hard copy function is executed, the file name
returns to "HDCPY000.BMP". If, however, a file with the same file name as the one to be output when
the screen hard copy function is executed exists on the memory card, alarm SR1973 is issued. If the
capacity of the memory card is exceeded, alarm SR1962 is issued.
In either case, screen data is not output, so that either the existing file needs to be deleted or the memory
card needs to be replaced with a new one.
Limitation
- Screens whose hard copies cannot be made
Hard copies of the BOOT screen, the IPL screen, and the system alarm screen cannot be made.
- 1214 -
- Foreground I/O devices

During DNC operation, for example, screen data cannot be output while a foreground I/O device is in use.
- Canceling the hard copy function

If the hard copy function is canceled before a hard copy is completed, an incomplete bit map file of data
that has been output is created.
Signal
Hard copy cancellation request signal HCABT<G067.6>
[Function] This signal requests the cancellation of the screen hard copy function.
[Operation] When the signal is set to "1", the control unit operates as follows:
- Cancels the screen hard copy function if it is being executed.
- Does nothing if the screen hard copy function is not being executed. Note that
changing HCREQ<G067.7> from "0" to "1" when HCABT<G067.6> is "1" does not
cause the screen hard copy function to be executed.
NOTE
If changing this signal from "0" to "1", set it to "0" on the PMC after
the signal is maintained in the "1" state for at least 64 msec.
Hard copy execution request signal HCREQ<G067.7>

[Function] This signal requests the execution of the screen hard copy function.
[Operation] When the signal is changed from "0" to "1", the control unit operates as follows:
- Starts creating a hard copy.
NOTE
If changing this signal from "0" to "1", set it to "0" on the PMC after
the signal is maintained in the "1" state for at least 64 msec. If
making another hard copy execution request, wait until the signal is
maintained in the "0" state for at least 64 msec.
Hard copy cancellation request reception signal HCAB2<F061.2>

[Function] This signal notifies that a screen hard copy cancellation request is made.
[Operation] This signal is set to "1" in the following case:
- HCABT<G067.6> is set to "1" or key is pressed, so that the CNC receives
this as a screen hard copy cancellation request.
This signal is set to "0" in the following cases:
- A reset is made.
- The screen hard copy is started again.
Hard copy execution status signal HCEXE<F061.3>

[Function] This signal notifies that the screen hard copy function is being executed.
[Operation] This signal is set to "1" in the following case:
- The screen hard copy function is started by changing HCREQ<G067.7> from "0" to
"1" or by pressing and holding down key for five seconds.
- 1215 -

- The screen hard copy function is completed.
- The screen hard copy function is canceled.
Timing charts for input/output signals are shown below Fig. 13.1.13 (a) shows a timing
chart of the screen hard copy function when it terminates normally, and Fig. 13.1.13 (b)
shows a timing chart of the screen hard copy function when it is canceled and restarted.
Least 64 msec
Hard copy execution request signal

(HCREQ)
Hard copy execution status signal

(HCEXE)
Fig. 13.1.13 (a) When the screen hard copy function terminates normally
Least 64msec Least 64msec
Hard copy execution request signal Least 64msec

(HCREQ)
Hard copy execution status signal

(HCEXE)
Least 64msec
Hard copy cancellation request signal

(HCABT)
Hard copy cancellation request

reception signal (HCAB2)
Fig. 13.1.13 (b) When the screen hard copy function is canceled and restarted
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G067 HCREQ HCABT
F061 HCEXE HCAB2
Parameter
0020 I/O CHANNEL : Input/output device selection, or interface number for a foreground input device

[Data type] Byte
Set the interface number for a foreground I/O device.
If enabling the screen hard copy function (by setting bit 7 (HDC) of parameter No. 3301
to 1), set this parameter to 4 (memory card).
- 1216 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3301 HDC H16

#0 H16 Bit map data of screen hard copies uses:

0: 256 colors.
1: 16 colors.
#7 HDC A screen hard copy function is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
NOTE
For a 2-path system, the settings of bit 7 (HDC) and bit 0 (H16) of
parameter No. 3301 of path 1 are used.
13.2 EDIT
13.2.1 Memory Protection Keys

Overview
Memory protection keys can be provided so as not to inadvertently store, change, or delete programs,
offset values, parameters, settings, and so forth.
For a 2-path system, protection keys are common to all paths.
Signal
Memory protection signals KEY1 to KEY4<G0046.3 to 6>
[Function] These signals allow MDI panel operations that change the memory contents. There are
the following four signals. The target memory contents depend on the setting of KEY (bit
7 of parameter No. 3290).
When the KEY is 0 :
KEY1 : Allows the input of tool offset values, workpiece origin offsets, and
workpiece coordinate system shift values.
KEY2 : Allows the setting of data input, macro variable input, and tool life
management data input.
KEY3 : Allows program input and editing.
KEY4 : Allows PMC data (counter data table).
When the KEY is 1 :
KEY1 : Allows program input, program editing, PMC data input.
KEY2 to KEY4 : Not used.
[Operation] If a memory protection signal is set to 0, the corresponding operation is disabled.
If a memory protection signal is 1, the corresponding operation is enabled.
- 1217 -
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
NOTE
For a 2-path system, signal addresses are common to all paths.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3290 KEY

#7 KEY For memory protection keys:

0: The KEY1, KEY2, KEY3, and KEY4 signals are used.
1: Only the KEY1 signal is used.
NOTE
1 The functions of the signals depend on whether KEY=0 or KEY=1.
When KEY = 0:
- KEY1: Enables a tool offset value, workpiece zero point offset
value, and workpiece shift value to be input.
- KEY2: Enables setting data, macro variables, and tool life
management value to be input.
- KEY3: Enables program registration and editing.
- KEY4: Enables PMC data (counter and data table) to be input.
When KEY = 1:
- KEY1: Enables program registration and editing, and enables
PMC parameter input.
- KEY2 to KEY4: Not used
2 When a 2-path system is used, the setting for path 1 is followed.
13.2.2 Memory Protection Signal For CNC Parameter

Overview
Writing to a parameter can be prohibited or allowed by a signal. To enable or disable this function, set
bit 0 (PKY) of parameter No. 3299. To prohibit or allow input to a parameter, set KEYP<G046.0>.
Writing to a parameter was set on the setting screen conventionally, but this function allows writing to a
parameter to be set by external switches.
Signal
Memory protection signal KEYP<G046.0>
[Function] Enables or disables operation on CNC parameters from the MDI panel.
[Operation] When this signal is 0, input to CNC parameters is prohibited.
When this signal is 1, input to CNC parameters is allowed.
This signal is valid only when bit 0 (PKY) of parameter No. 3299 is set to 1.
- 1218 -
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G046 KEYP
NOTE
For a 2-path system, the signal address is common to all paths.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3299 PKY

[Data type] Bit
#0 PKY "PARAMETER WRITE" is:

0: Set on the setting screen (bit 0 (PWE) of setting parameter No.8900).
1: Set by the memory protection signal KEYP<G046.0>.
NOTE
Before setting this parameter, confirm that memory protection
signal KEYP<G046.0> can be operated.
(Remark)
If this parameter is set even through memory protection signal KEYP<G046.0>
cannot be changed from 0, parameters cannot be changed.
Notes
• When bit 0 (PKY) of parameter No. 3299 is set to 1, “PARAMETER WRITE” on the setting
screen cannot be set.
• When bit 0 (PKY) of parameter No. 3299 has been set to 1 and bit 0 (PWE) of parameter No. 8900
has been set to 0 at power-on, setting the signal KEYP<G046.0> to 1 in the operation mode causes
alarm SW0100 and stops operation.
13.2.3 MDI Key Setting

Overview
Because the type of the MDI keys of the CNC is determined automatically, no additional setting is
required for the MDI keys. When the machine tool builder's own MDI keys are connected, valid key
input is made possible by parameter setting.
Parameter
3160 Setting of MDI unit type

[Data type] Byte
Set the type of an MDI unit when the type of an MDI unit is not automatically identified.
- 1219 -
Setting value Type

0 Depends on the system type and indicator type.
1 Standard MDI unit for the lathe system
2 Standard MDI unit for the machining center system
3 Small MDI unit for the lathe system
4 Small MDI unit for the machining center system
When 0 is set in this parameter, the type of a MDI unit is determined as follows:
Type of path control Type of indicator Type
Type of 12 horizontal soft Standard MDI unit for the lathe
keys system
Lathe system
Type of 7 horizontal soft Small MDI unit for the lathe
keys system
Type of 12 horizontal soft Standard MDI unit for the
keys machining center system
Machining center system
Type of 7 horizontal soft Small MDI unit for the machining
keys center system
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3204 PAR

#0 PAR When a small MDI unit is used, characters "[" and "]" are:
0: Used as "[" and "]".
1: Used as "(" and ")".
NOTE
When a 2-path system is used, the setting for path 1 is followed.
13.2.4 Compact-Type MDI Key Input Function

Use of this function allows the user to enter characters such as "@", "(", and ")" by using soft keys when
the compact-type MDI unit is used.
Operation procedure
1. Select the EDIT mode.
2. Press function key .

3. Press soft key [(OPRT)] then press continuous menu key several times to display soft key
[CHA-EXT].
4. Press soft key [CHA-EXT].
5. As shown in Fig. 13.2.4 (a), characters such as "@" and "(" appear as soft keys.
- 1220 -
Fig. 13.2.4 (a) Compact-type MDI key input
6. When a soft key indicating the character to be input is pressed, the character is input to the key-in
buffer.
Usable characters
The following characters can be entered using soft keys:
Table 13.2.4 (a) Characters that can be entered using soft keys
( ) ? * &
@ _ < > ¥
% $ ! ~ :
" ‘ AB/ab(*)
* This soft key causes the input mode of alphabetical characters to alternate between the uppercase
input mode and the lowercase input mode.
The character before the key-in buffer changes to "A" or "a" depending on the input mode.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13115 SI2 SI1

[Data type] Bit
#4 SI1 Soft key input of the characters shown below and switching between the uppercase and
lowercase input modes by a soft key are:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
<>¥%$!~:"'
- 1221 -
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
()?*&@_
13.3 TWO PATH DISPLAY AND EDIT
13.3.1 Two Path Display

Overview
In a multi path system, operations such as program creation and data input are performed with a
display/operation target path selected by switching. For path selection, the path select signals are used.
For a selected path, MDI key operation is performed.
By parameter setting, a selection can be made to display only one path on the screen at a time or display
both paths on the screen simultaneously. When both paths are displayed simultaneously, the order of
path display can be specified according to the machine configuration and layout.
Moreover, a selection can be made by a parameter to display the same screen at path switching or to store
the last displayed screen of each path and display the last displayed screen of a selected path.
Explanation
- Two path simultaneous display
Information about two paths can be displayed on one screen simultaneously.
Two path information can be displayed simultaneously on the following screens:
10.4-inch LCD
• Absolute position screen
• Relative position screen
• Overall position display
• Handle display screen
• Program screen
• Program check screen
• Alarm display screen
• Tool path drawing screen
8.4-inch LCD
• Program screen
• Program check screen
• Alarm display screen
• Tool path drawing screen
MDI key operation is performed for a screen selected with the path select signals.
- Setting two path simultaneous display

When bit 2 (DOP) of parameter No. 3193 is 0 in a 2-path system, information of two paths can be
displayed simultaneously on one screen.
At this time, MDI key operation is valid for the path selected by the path selection signal.
- 1222 -
Fig. 13.3.1 Two path simultaneous display (10.4-inch LCD, Program screen)
- Display order number

On the screen on which multiple paths are displayed simultaneously in 2-path control, parameter No.
13130 is used to set the order in which the paths are displayed.
System Setting Order

2-path 0 First path, second path
1 Second path, first path
- Path selection signal

The path selection signal selects the path to be operated or displayed with LCD/MDI. The first path is
selected when HEAD<G063.0> is 0 or the second path is selected when HEAD<G063.0> is 1.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DOP
3193

[Data type] Bit
#2 DOP In 2-path control, on the POSITION screen (absolute, relative, all, manual handle
interruption), PROGRAM CHECK screen, and ALARM screen, two paths' information
is:
0: Displayed at the same time.
1: Not displayed at the same time.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PSC
3208

[Data type] Bit
- 1223 -
#5 PSC When the path is switched based on the path switch signal:
0: The screen display is switched to the last selected screen of the path.
1: The same screen as for the path before switching is displayed.
The order of displaying path at the screen where 2 paths are displayed simultaneously
13130

[Data type] Byte
At the screen where 2 paths are displayed simultaneously, the order of displaying path is
set.
The relation between the setting and the display order is as follows.
System Setting Display order

0 1st path, 2nd path
2 paths
1 2nd path, 1st path
Signal
Path select signal HEAD<G063.0>
[Function] These signals select the target path for which MDI operation and display are to be
performed.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G063 HEAD
13.3.2 Simultaneous Two Path Program Editing

Overview
Simultaneous two path program editing allows the user to edit programs for more than one path on a
single screen according to the settings of the simultaneous two path display parameters (parameter
No.13130).
For details of parameter No. 13130, see Subsection 13.3.1, "Two Path Display".
This function becomes effective when the following conditions are full.
• Two paths system
• Bit 2 (DOP) of parameter No.3193 is set to 0
• Bit 0 (DHD) of parameter No.3106 is set to 1
Screen display
Fig. 13.3.2 (a) show sample screens on which simultaneous two path program editing is being performed.
The status line located at the top of each program displays the program number and <FG-EDIT>, which
indicates that foreground editing is in progress.
The status line of the currently edited program is highlighted.
- 1224 -
Program being
edited
Fig. 13.3.2 (a) Simultaneous two path program edit screen (10.4-inch display unit)
Explanation
- Mode
The programs of two paths are simultaneously displayed only when both paths are in the EDIT mode or
MEM mode.
- Changing the path to be edited

The path selected by the path selection signals is to be edited.
- Conditions under which simultaneous display and editing are enabled

2-path program simultaneous display/editing is enabled:
• When the program screen is selected as the entire screen
• When the mode in both paths is EDIT or MEM in foreground editing.
• When the virtual MDI key function is disabled.
- Simultaneous editing with a 8.4-inch display unit

When simultaneous editing is performed with a 8.4-inch display unit, displayed characters become
smaller.
The number of characters displayed per path in the edit area is as follows:
• When simultaneous display is not performed, characters are displayed in 38 columns by 10 lines.
• For simultaneous display for two paths, characters are displayed in 35 columns by 14 lines.
- 1225 -
Program
being edited
Fig. 13.3.2 (b) 2-path program simultaneous editing screen (8.4-inch display unit)
- Concurrent editing the programs of two paths being edited at the background
If background editing is started when the concurrent editing of the programs of two paths is set to be
enabled, background editing of the unselected path as well as the selected path is started and the programs
of the two paths being edited in the background are displayed concurrently. (However, background
editing of the unselected path is started with no program specified.) The editing mode specified at the
start of background editing is valid for all paths being edited concurrently, so the editing mode and
reference mode cannot be specified at the same time on the simultaneous editing screen. In addition, if
background editing is terminated, background editing of the unselected path as well as the selected path is
terminated.
Fig. 13.3.2 (c) Concurrent editing of the programs of two paths being edited in the background
- 1226 -
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DHD
3106

[Data type] Bit
#0 DHD On the program screen:

0: Only a selected path can be edited and displayed.
1: 2-path can be edited and displayed at the same time.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DOP
3193

[Data type] Bit
#2 DOP In 2-path control, on the POSITION screen (absolute, relative, all, manual handle
interruption), PROGRAM CHECK screen, and ALARM screen, two paths' information
is:
0: Displayed at the same time.
1: Not displayed at the same time.
The order of displaying path at the screen where 2 paths are displayed simultaneously
13130

[Data type] Byte
At the screen where 2 paths are displayed simultaneously, the order of displaying path is
set.
The relation between the setting and the display order is as follows.
System Setting Display order

0 1st path, 2nd path
2 paths
1 2nd path, 1st path
- 1227 -
13.4 MACHINE OPERATION MENU
13.4.1 Overview
The soft keys displayed on the standard CNC screen can be used as menu keys for machine operation.
The machine tool builder can customize the soft keys easily. A menu can have a hierarchy, and the
indication of each soft key can be specified.
Customization data is created as a machine operation menu definition file and is stored in the CNC.
13.4.2 Explanation
SOFT KEY CONTROL SWITCHING
For the 10.4-inch display unit
Screen/operation select menu The machine operation menu

display signal is used to select a
menu.
Machine operation menu
When the machine operation menu select signal EXSFT (input signal: G0295) is set to 1, the soft key
portion on the CNC screen is switched to a machine operation menu. While a machine operation menu is
displayed, the CNC screen cannot be operated using the soft keys.
When the machine operation menu select signal EXSFT (input signal: G0295) is set to 0, the display is
switched from the machine operation menu to the CNC soft key menu. CNC screen operation using the
soft keys is enabled.
- 1228 -
The machine operation menu

Screen/operation select menu
display signal is used to select a
menu.
When the machine operation menu select signal EXSFT (input signal: G0295) is set to 1, the soft key
portion on the CNC screen is switched to a machine operation menu. While a machine operation menu is
displayed, the CNC screen cannot be operated using the soft keys.
When the machine operation menu select signal EXSFT (input signal: G0295) is set to 0, the display is
switched from the machine operation menu to the CNC soft key menu. CNC screen operation using the
soft keys is enabled.
In any case of the 10.4-inch display unit and the 8.4-inch display unit, when setting the machine
operation menu screen select signal EXSFT<G0295.0> for 1, the main-menu (the layer which is the top
of the machine operation menu) is displayed.
After displaying the soft key menu of CNC from the condition to be displaying a sub menu (The layer
which is not the top of the machine operation menu), once again, when displaying a machine operation
menu, a main-menu is displayed.
- 1229 -
CUSTOMIZATION ITEMS
A machine operation menu definition file can be created using a special tool (Machine Operation Menu
Tool). See 13.5 "Machine Operation Menu Tool" for details of the Machine Operation Menu Tool.
The following items can be specified:
Menu configuration
Number of blocks : A number from 0 to 98 can be selected.
Number of main menus
10.4-inch display unit ： 1 line (The menu-number is fixed on 10.) / Soft key 10 items
8.4-inch display unit ： 1 line (The menu-number is fixed on 10.) / Soft key 5 items
Number of submenus that belong to each main menu
10.4-inch display unit ： 20 lines / Soft key 200 items
8.4-inch display unit ： 20 lines / Soft key 100 items
Each menu key
Menu number to be posted to the PMC side
Menu key message
(10.4-inch display unit ：6 half-size characters * 2 line
8.4-inch display unit ：7 half-size characters * 1 line
These are specified using ASCII code or SJIS code.)
R signal address for choosing whether to display or hide messages
R signal address for choosing whether to display the key state (OFF/ON)
Message and Background color
(Two colors can be specified: one for keys set to ON and the other for keys set to OFF.)
Machine operation menu definition data can be stored as multiple blocks, which can be selected using a
parameter.
By using multiple blocks, machine operation menus in different languages and configurations can be
prepared for choice using a parameter.
Definition file
Block 1
The definition data of
Main menu the machine operation
Sub menu
・
・・・
・
Block n
Main menu
Sub menu
- 1230 -
MACHINE OPERATION MENU SOFT KEY TRANSITION

Menu number Key number (Main menu)

10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Menu number Key number (Sub menu)

11 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
12 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
13 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

14 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
15 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
As shown above, a main menu and submenus are created.

Up to one main menu lines (for 10 soft keys) and up to 20 submenu lines (for 200 soft keys) can be
created.
For each main menu key, a submenu group consisting of multiple lines of soft keys is created.
In this example, menu numbers 11, 12, and 13 are assigned as a submenu to main menu key 1, and
menu numbers 14 and 15 are assigned as a submenu to main menu key 2.
By pressing a main menu key, a transition is made to the corresponding submenu. If there is no
corresponding submenu, the key can be used as an input key.
When a submenu consists of multiple lines, a transition is made between the submenu lines by using
the continuous menu key at the rightmost end of the soft keys.
From a submenu, a transition to the main menu is made by pressing the return menu key at the
leftmost end of the soft keys.
Menu number Key number (Main menu)

10 1 2 3 4 5

11 1 2 3 4 5
12 1 2 3 4 5
13 1 2 3 4 5

14 1 2 3 4 5
15 1 2 3 4 5
- 1231 -
As shown above, a main menu and submenus are created.

Up to one main menu lines (for 5 soft keys) and up to 20 submenu lines (for 100 soft keys) can be
created.
For each main menu key, a submenu group consisting of multiple lines of soft keys is created.
In this example, menu numbers 11, 12, and 13 are assigned as a submenu to main menu key 1, and
menu numbers 14 and 15 are assigned as a submenu to main menu key 2.
By pressing a main menu key, a transition is made to the corresponding submenu. If there is no
corresponding submenu, the key can be used as an input key.
When a submenu consists of multiple lines, a transition is made between the submenu lines by using
the continuous menu key at the rightmost end of the soft keys.
From a submenu, a transition to the main menu is made by pressing the return menu key at the
leftmost end of the soft keys.
MENU KEY SELECTION INTERFACE

MACHINE OPERATION MENU SELECT NUMBER NOTIFICATION SIGNAL
ESFM1 to ESFM8 <F0317.0 to 7>
The menu number (0 to 255) of the menu currently selected is posted as a binary code.
If no menu operation menu is displayed, 0 is output.
SOFT KEY NUMBER SELECT STATE NOTIFICATION SIGNAL

ESF01 to ESF10 <F0318.0 to F0319.1>
The ordinal number of a menu key pressed on the menu of each menu number is posted to the PMC.
The bit corresponding to a pressed key is turned on (as indicated below).
If a main menu key is pressed to display the submenu, all bits are turned off and no bit is turned on until
the key is released.
Key 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Output signal F318.0 F318.1 F318.2 F318.3 F318.4 F318.5 F318.6 F318.7 F319.0 F319.1
In case of the 8.4-inch display unit, the bit of key 1 to 5 becomes on.
KEY DISPLAY/HIDE SELECT SIGNAL (Input signal : 42byte)

The signal enables you to choose whether to display or hide the menu corresponding to a main menu key
or sub-key. Switching between displaying and hiding is performed by turning on/off the bit
corresponding to a key in the 42-byte area ranging from the start address of the PMC/R area set in the
machine operation menu data. The menu corresponding to a key whose bit is turned on is displayed.
KEY REVERSE/NON-REVERSE VIDEO SELECT SIGNAL (Input signal : 42byte)

The signal enables you to choose whether to display each menu key in reverse video.
Whether to display each menu key in reverse video can be set by turning on/off the corresponding bit in
the 42-byte area ranging from the start address of the PMC/R area set in the machine operation menu data.
A key whose bit is turned on is displayed in reverse video.
Set these signal based on SOFT KEY NUMBER SELECT STATE NOTIFICATION SIGNAL ESF01 to
ESF10<F0318.0-F0319.1>.
MACHINE OPERATION MENU DATA

Machine operation menu data is created on the personal computer by using a menu creation tool.
See 13.5 "Machine Operation Menu Tool" for the environment required for Machine Operation Menu
Tool.
- 1232 -
MACHINE OPERATION MENU DATA INPUT/OUTPUT

[Input method]
Create a machine operation menu definition file with the menu creation tool, then store the file on the
memory card.
Turn off the power.
Insert the memory card into the memory card slot, and then turn on the power while holding down the 1st
and 2nd soft key from the right at the same time.
[For the 10.4-inch display unit]
The SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU is displayed.

Select “2.USER DATA LOADING”.
Select a file. The selected file is then stored in the FROM. Next, select END to end the processing.
(Note that if the power is turned off during storing operation, the FROM can be destructed.)
Select END on the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU.
[Output method]
Turn off the power.
Insert the memory card into the memory card slot, and then turn on the power while holding down the 1st
and 2nd soft key from the right at the same time.
The SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU is displayed.
Select “6.SYSTEM DATA SAVE“.
Select the machine operation menu definition file (named “EXSFTKEY”). It is written to the memory
card. Next, select END to end the processing.
Select END on the SYSTEM MONITOR MAIN MENU.
13.4.3 Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3207 EXS

[Data type] Bit
#0 EXS The machine menu function is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
3227 Selection of a block number of machine operation menu data

[Data type] Byte
This parameter select a block number to use from the inside of the machine operation
menu definition file which was stored in the FROM in the machine operation menu
function. If "0", "the value except the data range" or either of "the block number not to be
defining" is set, the machine operation menu function is disabled.
- 1233 -
13.4.4 Signal
Machine operation menu screen select signal EXSFT<G0295.0>
[Function] This signal is used to switch the display to the machine operation menu screen.
[Operation] When setting this signal in "1", it displays the machine operation menu of the block
number which was set to parameter (No.3227) from the inside of the machine operation
menu definition file which was stored in FROM in the soft key part of the CNC screen.
While displaying a machine operation menu, the CNC screen can not be operated by the
soft key. When setting this signal "0", the soft key part of the CNC screen returns to the
soft key menu of CNC from the machine operation menu. The operation of the CNC
screen by the soft key becomes possible.
Machine operation menu select number notification signal ESFM1~ESFM8

<F0317.0~F0317.7>
[Function] This signal is used to post the selected machine operation menu number.
[Operation] When the input signal EXSFT<G0295.0> is set to 1, the selected machine operation
menu number is posted in binary.
When no machine operation menu is displayed, the value 0 is posted.
Soft key number select state notification signal ESF01~ESF10<F0318.0~F0319.1>

[Function] This signal posts the ordinal number of a pressed menu key on the menu of each menu
number.
[Operation] The bit to correspond to the key, which is pushed when a machine operation menu is
displayed, is turned on. (See following table)
When a main menu key is pushed and the sub menu is displayed, the all bits are turned
off once. Unless stopping the push of the pushed main-menu key, neither bits are turned
on.
When a machine operation menu isn't displayed, these signals are "0".
Key 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Output signal F318.0 F318.1 F318.2 F318.3 F318.4 F318.5 F318.6 F318.7 F319.0 F319.1
In case of the 8.4-inch display unit, the bit of key 1 to 5 becomes on.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn295 EXSFT
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn317 ESFM8 ESFM7 ESFM6 ESFM5 ESFM4 ESFM3 ESFM2 ESFM1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn318 ESF08 ESF07 ESF06 ESF05 ESF04 ESF03 ESF02 ESF01
Fn319 ESF10 ESF09
13.4.5 Limitation
The data of the machine operation menu is a common data among the path. Therefore, even if switching
the display path, the machine operation menu doesn't change.
This function is disabled on the PMC screen, macro executor screen, and C language executor screen.
- 1234 -
Two soft keys must not be pressed simultaneously. Even if two soft keys are pressed simultaneously,
only one of the two soft keys is recognized.
When allocating the key display/hide select signal and key reverse/non-reverse video select signal to the
R area, do not make settings that exceed the size of the R area.
13.5 MACHINE OPERATION MENU TOOL
13.5.1 Overview
By using this tool (Machine Operation Menu Tool/A08B-9010-J701#ZZ11), it defines the machine
operation menu and output the defined contents as MEM file. Load the MEM file to CNC and set up by
following the function specifications to use the machine operation menu.
Loading MEM file
Creating MEM file
13.5.2 Explanation
ENVIRONMENT REQUIRED
This tool is created using the macro of Microsoft ® Excel.
This tool is available on the following applications.
Microsoft ® Excel 2000

Microsoft ® Excel XP
Microsoft ® Excel 2003
Microsoft is registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States.
MACHINE OPERATION MENU

In this page describing a definition and structure of machine operation menu.
STRUCTURE OF MACHINE OPERATION MENU

As the Fig 13.5.2(a)), soft key menu is consisted by main menu and sub-menu group.
More than one sub-menu is belonging to sub-menu group.
Signal operation or sub-menu calls can be defined by main menu button.
Only signal operation can be defined by sub-menu.
Switch sub-menu in the same sub-menu group by pressing continuing button located far right of soft
keys.
Press the return button listed far left of soft keys to return to main menu.
- 1235 -
MainMenu SubMenuGroup01 SubMenuGroup02
Menu SubMenu12 SubMenu13 SubMenu14 SubMenu15

Button
Operation
Operation1 Operation4 Operation7
Menu continuing 10
continuing continuing
Button button button button
Operation
11
Operation
12
return button return button return button return button
Fig.13.5.2 (a) Menu structure of horizontal soft key
BLOCK
Block is a collection of one main menu and sub-menus called out from the main menu.
Maximum of 30 blocks are possible to save to one MEM file.
Different languages and machine operation menus of machine structure can be saved or managed on one
MEM file.
On CNC, only one block in these blocks is used.
This block number is specified by parameter No.3227.
BlockNumber
MEM File
Block 01 Operation Menu
MainMenu
SubMenu
SubMenu
Block 02
MainMenu
SubMenu
SubMenu
Block xx
：
Fig.13.5.2 (b) Image of block
- 1236 -
The definition contents of the machine operation menu

Depending on the CNC display unit size, the contents which can be defined differ like the following
table.
Table 13.5.2 (a) Table of corresponding machine operation menu
Display unit size 10.4-inch 8.4-inch
1 line 1 line
Number of main menus
(Soft key 10 items) (Soft key 5 items)
20 line * 20 line *
Number of submenus
(Soft key 200 items) (Soft key 100 items)
Number of soft key 10 5
Number of characters which can
6 half-size characters * 2 line 7 half-size characters * 1 line
be displayed on the soft key
The menu number of the main menu is fixed on 10.
RESTRICTIONS
• Only one combination of soft key type and machine display size is possible for one MEM file.
Blocks with different soft key type (vertical/horizontal) or display size cannot be included in one
MEM file.
• Maximum size of MEM file is 128KB.
• Maximum size of 1 block is 32 KB. Without exceeding the maximum size of the MEM file, register
a block.
OPERATION
Operation of this tool is explained below.
START UP METHOD
Because this tool is distributed as Excel file, start up Excel and open a file of this tool.
By opening this tool, the following screen is displayed.
Fig.13.5.2 (c) Start up screen of machine operation menu tool
- 1237 -
DEFINING METHOD OF MACHINE OPERATION MENU

With this tool, definition input is available by 2 methods as [Definition Input of Each Menu] and [List
Definition Input].
These methods of input are describing as followings.
Characteristic of definition input of each menu

Definition is possible to be input by menu number unit.
Definition is possible to be input by position corresponding to the menu type.
Characteristic of list definition input

All block data is possible to be input by one sheet.
Menus and blocks are possible to be copied all together.
DEFINITION INPUT OF EACH MENU

In case of Definition input of each menu, 3 sheets which are shown in the Fig.13.5.2 (d) are used for the
input. However, FS0i-D doesn't use the "Vertical Soft Key (10.4, 15 inch)" sheet.
In case of 10.4-inch display unit, select "Horizontal Soft key (10.4,15inch)" sheet.
In case of 8.4-inch display unit, select "Horizontal Soft key (8.2inch)" sheet.
Fig.13.5.2 (e) Definition input sheet of each menu
- 1238 -
Vertical SoftKey(10.4,15inch)
Horizontal SoftKey(8.2inch)
Horizontal SoftKey(10.4,15inch)
Fig.13.5.2 (f) Definition sheet of each menu
Followings explain the definition items to be input.
Block Number
Select the block number of the machine operation menu to set.
Block numbers should be consecutive.
Blocks subsequent to the undefined block will not be output to the MEM file.
Menu Number
Select the menu number of the machine operation menu.
Sub-menu Group
Set the sub-menu group to which the current sub-menu belongs.
If you want to set the sub-menus to the same menu group, it is necessary that the numbers of
definition are consecutive.
For example, if defined as the following list, 13 to 15 belong to the same menu group while 30
belongs to the different menu group.
Table 13.5.2 (b) Example of setting of sub-menu group

Menu Number 13 14 15 20 21 30
Sub-menu Group 01 01 01 02 02 01
Actual Menu Group A B C
- 1239 -
Menu Text
Input the characters to be displayed on the each menu soft key.
In case of "Horizontal Soft key (10.4,15inch)", 2 lines, with maximum 6 single byte characters
each, can be input.
In case of "Horizontal Soft key (8.2inch)", 1 line, with maximum 7 single byte characters each,
can be input.
To input to the second line, using ALT+ENTER as line feed. (Spec of Microsoft ® Excel )
Visible Signal
Input the signal address and bit position to specify the visible/invisible of the button (Message
display/be hidden). Only single byte alphanumeric character can be input.
Ex.) R1250.0
State Signal
Input the signal address and bit position to specify the ON/OFF state of the each button (soft
key). Only single byte alphanumeric character can be input.
Ex.) R1251.0
Char Color / Back Color

Input the text color and the background color of each menu button (soft key).
Input the number between 0 and 15. 0 means black.
Number 1 to 15 has the same meaning as the number on the CNC color screen.
For details of the number on the CNC color screen, refer to the following documents.
- Series 0i-D/0i Mate-D Operator’s Manual (B-64304EN) “Color Setting Screen”
- Series 0i-D/0i Mate-D Maintenance Manual (B-64305EN) “Color Setting Screen”
Jump Menu No.

Input to the menu button, which jump to sub menu in the main-menu. Input the menu number to
be jumped when the button is pressed.
If the each menu button of sub menu and the button, which is to be defined as, machine
operation (signal operation) button, leave it as blank.
This item is invalid at the sub menu. Therefore, at the sub menu of "Horizontal Soft key
(10.4,15inch)" sheet, and "Horizontal Soft key (8.4inch)" sheet, the background with this item is
gray. (It is possible to input to the item in the gray background but these aren't reflected in the
MEM file to create.)
- 1240 -
Fig.13.5.2 (g) Input the definition on the horizontal soft key sub-menu
LIST DEFINITION INPUT

Select the [Data] sheet to input the list definition.
Fig.13.5.2 (h) List definition sheet
Menus are listed horizontally and button definition items are listed vertically.
Data of definition input of each menu is reflected on this sheet.
Also, data edited on this sheet is used by the definition input of each menu.
Fig.13.5.2 (i) List definition input sheet
- 1241 -
Cursor can be jumped to the block selected by the [Group Jump] combo box.
CREATING MEM FILE

Click MEM File Save button to create the MEM file.
MEMFilename Input Box
Fig.13.5.2 (j) Menu definition sheet (Creating MEM file)
Input the file name of the MEM file to be created in the MEM file name input box.
If the input name includes folder path, MEM file is output to the specified folder.
If only file name is input, MEM file is output to the folder where this tool (Excel file) is located.
If the specified folder does not exist, it is created automatically.
If the file name is not specified, [EXSFTKEY.MEM] will be created at the folder where this tool is
located.
Please to be noted that the specified file, if already exists, will be overwritten.
File with long name, which can be used in Windows system, cannot be used by CNC. Before loading the
MEM file to CNC, please confirm that the file name is DOS format (file name no longer than 8 characters
and extension no longer than 3 characters).
- 1242 -
B-64303EN-1/02 14.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
14 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA
Chapter 14, "INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA", consists of the following sections:
14.1 READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE ..............................................................................................1243

14.2 EXTERNAL I/O DEVICE CONTROL ..........................................................................................1254
14.1 READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE

Overview
The data shown below can be input/output through reader/puncher interface.
1. Program
2. Offset data
3. Parameter
4. Pitch error compensation data
5. Custom macro common variables.
6. Workpiece coordinate system setting data
7. Operation history data (output only)
The above data can be output to a memory card via a memory card interface. In this case, when NC data
such as programs or parameters is written to a memory card, if the name of the NC data is already used, it
is possible to overwrite the existing file or cancel this operation.
To enable this function, set bit 1 (COW) of parameter No. 11308.
The channel for data I/O is determined by setting parameter No. 0020. In this case, foreground or
background data I/O is restricted to one channel. In addition, data I/O can be controlled separately by
setting bit 0 (IO4) of parameter No. 0110. Concretely, a channel can be assigned to each of foreground
input, foreground output, background input, and background output.
Explanation
The parameters described below must be set up to use an I/O unit interface (RS-232-C serial port) or
memory card interface for inputting and outputting data (such as programs and parameters) between
external input/output units and memory cards.
The channel to which an I/O unit is connected needs be specified by setting I/O CHANNEL (parameter
No. 0020). In addition, the specification number, baud rate, and number of stop bits of each I/O unit must
be set in the parameter corresponding to each channel in advance. For setting of channel 1, two types of
parameters for setting I/O units are provided.
Channel setting can be made for each of foreground I/O and background I/O by setting bit 0 (IO4) of
parameter No. 0110. At this time, channel setting is made with No.0020, No.0021, No.0022, and
No.0023.
The following shows correlation of interface parameters related to individual channels.
- 1243 -
14.INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA B-64303EN-1/02
I/O CHANNEL 0101 Stop bit and other data

0020
or foreground input
I/O CHANNEL = 0 Number specified for
Specify a channel for an data 0102
(Channel 1) the input/output device
input/output device.
I/O CHANNEL (0 to 9) 0103 Baud rate
=0 : Channel 1
=1 : Channel 1 Stop bit and other data
=2 : Channel 2 0111
: I/O CHANNEL = 1 Number specified for

0112
In addition, input/output of memory
card interface is enabled. 0113 Baud rate
0121 Stop bit and other data

When set by IO4
0122
0021 Foreground output
0123 Baud rate
0022
0023
Background input
:
Background output
I/O CHANNEL = 4
Channel settings are the same as (Memory card interface)
with parameter No. 0020.
I/O CHANNEL = 5
(Data Server)
Fig. 14.1 (a) Correlation of interface parameters related to individual channels
Diagnosis
- Foreground
030 CHARACTER NUMBER DATA
When the TH alarm occurred, the position in which it occurred is indicated by the number
of characters counted from the beginning of the block.
031 TH DATA
Readout code of the number of characters in which a TH alarm occurred
- Background
032 CHARACTER NUMBER DATA
When the TH alarm occurred, the position in which it occurred is indicated by the number
of characters counted from the beginning of the block.
033 TH DATA
Readout code of the number of characters in which a TH alarm occurred
Parameter
0021 Foreground output device setting
0022 Background input device setting
0023 Background output device setting
- 1244 -
[Data type] Byte
The CNC has the following interfaces for transferring data to and from an external
input/output device and the host computer:
• Input/output device interface (RS-232-C serial ports 1 and 2)
• Memory card interface
• Data server interface
• Embedded Ethernet interface
By setting bit 0 (IO4) of parameter No. 0110, data input/output can be controlled
separately. When IO4 is not set, data input/output is performed using the channel set in
parameter No. 0020. When IO4 is set, a channel can be assigned to each of foreground
input, foreground output, background input, and background output.
In these parameters, specify the interface connected to each input/output device to and
from which data is to be transferred. See the table below for these settings.
Correspondence between settings and input/output devices

Setting Description
0,1 RS-232-C serial port 1
2 RS-232-C serial port 2
4 Memory card interface
5 Data server interface
9 Embedded Ethernet interface
NOTE
1 Input device selection (parameter No. 0020) can also be set on the
setting screen.
2 It is necessary to set the specifications (baud rate, stop bit, etc.) of
input/output devices to be connected in the corresponding
parameters for each interface, in advance. Both I/O CHANNEL =
0 and I/O CHANNEL = 1 indicate an input/output device connected
to RS-232-C serial port 1, but the parameters for setting the baud
rate, stop bit, and other specifications are provided separately.
- Parameters Common to all Channels

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0000 ISO TVC

#0 TVC TV check
0: Not performed
1: Performed
#1 ISO Code used for data output

0: EIA code
1: ISO code
NOTE
1 The I/O setting of a memory card is made by bit 0 (ISO) of
parameter No. 0139.
- 1245 -
NOTE
2 The I/O setting of data server is made by bit 0 (ISO) of parameter
No. 0908.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0010 PEC PRM PZS

#0 PZS When a part program is punched out, the O number is:

0: Not zero-suppressed.
1: Zero-suppressed.
#1 PRM Whether the parameter whose setting is 0 is output or not:

0: It is selected with soft key [ALL] or [NON-0].
1: It is not selected with soft key [ALL] or [NON-0]. The parameter whose setting is 0
is not output.
#2 PEC When pitch error compensation data is output, data having a compensation value of 0 is:
0: Output
1: Not output.
Setting of communication with the ladder development tool (FANUC LADDER-III, ladder editing
0024
package)

[Data type] Word
This parameter is used to enable or disable the PMC online connection function.
By specifying this parameter, the PMC online connection function can be enabled or
disabled without displaying the PMC online setting screen.
Setting RS-232-C High-speed interface

0 The setting on the PMC online setting screen is not altered.
1 To be used (channel 1) Not to be used
2 To be used (channel 2) Not to be used
10 Not to be used To be used
11 To be used (channel 1) To be used
12 To be used (channel 2) To be used
255 Communication is terminated forcibly (as with the [FORCED STOP] soft key).
NOTE
1 The setting of this parameter becomes valid when the power is
turned on or this parameter is modified. After this parameter is set,
the power need not be turned off then back on.
2 A setting modification made on the PMC online setting screen is
not reflected in this parameter.
3 The communication settings of a baud rate and so forth for using
RS-232-C made on the PMC online setting screen are valid. When
no modification is ever made to the settings on the PMC online
setting screen, the baud rate is 9600, parity is not used, and the
number of stops bits is 2.
- 1246 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0100 ENS IOP NCR CRF CTV

[Data type] Bit
#1 CTV Character counting for TV check in the comment section of a program.

0: Performed
1: Not performed
#2 CRF Output of the end of block (EOB) in ISO code

0: Depends on the setting of bit 3 (NCR) of parameter No. 100.
1: CR, LF are output.
#3 NCR Output of the end of block (EOB) in ISO code

0: LF, CR, CR are output.
1: Only LF is output.
#6 IOP Stopping a program output or input operation by a reset is:

0: Enabled
1: Disabled
(Stopping a program input/output operation with the [STOP] soft key is enabled at all
times.)
#7 ENS Action taken when a NULL code is found during read of EIA code
0: An alarm is generated.
1: The NULL code is ignored.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0110 IO4

[Data type] Bit
NOTE
#0 IO4 Separate control of I/O channel numbers is:

0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
If the I/O channels are not separately controlled, set the input/output device in parameter
No. 20.
If the I/O channels are separately controlled, set the input device and output device in the
foreground and the input device and output device in the background in parameters No.
20 to No. 23 respectively.
Separate control of I/O channels makes it possible to perform background editing,
program input/output, and the like during the DNC operation.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
MDP
0138
- 1247 -
[Data type] Bit
#0 MDP To the extensions of input/output files, a path number is:

0: Not added.
1: Added.
NOTE
If a file name is specified by setting F, this parameter is ignored, and
a path number is not added to the extension.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0139 ISO

[Data type] Bit
#0 ISO When a memory card is selected as an I/O device, data input/output is performed using
0: ASCII codes
1: ISO codes
WARNING
1 Unless data is input using ASCII codes, set this parameter to 1 to
input or output data using ISO codes.
2 Data input/output with ASCII codes is dangerous because parity
information is not included and a data error during the data
input/output is not detected.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0300 PCM

[Data type] Bit
#0 PCM If the CNC screen display function is enabled, when a memory card interface is provided
on the NC side,
0: The memory card interface on the NC side is used.
1: The memory card interface on the PC side is used.
This parameter is valid when parameter No. 0020 is 4 (memory card interface). This
parameter is valid only when the CNC screen display function is activated.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0908 ISO

[Data type] Bit
#0 ISO When the data server is selected as the input/output device, data input/output is:
0: Carried out with ASCII codes.
1: Carried out with ISO codes.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11308 COW

- 1248 -
[Data type] Bit
#1 COW When the file of specified name already exists on memory card,
0: It is not overwritten
Alarm (SR1973 FILE ALREADY EXIST) is generated.
1: It is overwritten.
Because the confirmation message is displayed before overwriting even if COW is 1,
overwriting can be canceled.
NOTE
When the overwritten file is read only attribute, it is not possible to
overwrite even if bit 1 (COW) of parameter No.11308 = 1.
- Parameters of Channel 1 (I/O CHANNEL=0)

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0101 NFD ASI SB2

[Data type] Bit
#0 SB2 The number of stop bits

0: 1
1: 2
#3 ASI The codes used during data input/output is:

0: EIA or ISO codes (input: automatic detection, output: setting of bit 1 (ISO) of
parameter No. 0000)
1: ASCII codes during input and output
NOTE
To use ASCII codes for data input/output (by setting ASI to 1), set
bit 1 (ISO) of parameter No. 0000 to 1.
#7 NFD Feed before and after the data at data output

0: Output
1: Not output
When input/output devices other than the FANUC PPR are used, set NFD to 1.
0102 Number specified for the input/output device (when the I/O CHANNEL is set to 0)

[Data type] Byte
Set the specification number of the input/output device corresponding to I/O
CHANNEL=0.
The following table shows the correspondence between the specification numbers and the
input/output device specifications.
- 1249 -
Table Correspondence between the specification numbers and the input/output device
specifications
Specification number Input/output device specification
0 RS-232-C (Control codes DC1 to DC4 are used.)
1 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 1(FANUC CASSETTE B1/B2)
2 FANUC CASSETTE ADAPTOR 3(FANUC CASSETTE F1)
FANUC PROGRAM FILE Mate, FANUC FA Card Adapter,
3 FANUC FLOPPY CASSETTE ADAPTOR, FANUC Handy File
FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H
4 RS-232-C (Control codes DC1 to DC4 are not used.)
5 Portable tape reader
FANUC PPR
6
FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL G, FANUC SYSTEM P-MODEL H
0103 Baud rate (when I/O CHNNEL is set to 0)

[Data type] Byte
Set the baud rate of the input/output device corresponding to I/O CHANNEL=0.
See the following table when setting the baud rate.
Baud rate setting
Setting Baud rate (bps) Setting Baud rate (bps)
1 50 8 1200
3 110 9 2400
4 150 10 4800
6 300 11 9600
7 600 12 19200

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0111 NFD ASI SB2

[Data type] Bit

0: 1
1: 2

parameter No. 0000)
NOTE

0: Output
1: Not output
- 1250 -

[Data type] Byte
CHANNEL=1.

[Data type] Byte

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0121 NFD ASI SB2

[Data type] Bit

0: 1
1: 2

parameter No. 0000)
NOTE

0: Output
1: Not output

[Data type] Byte
CHANNEL=2.

[Data type] Byte
- 1251 -
- Parameters of DNC operation from the memory card

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0138 MNC SCH

[Data type] Bit
#5 SCH Schedule operation function is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
#7 MNC DNC operation from the memory card and external device subprogram call from the
memory card are:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0139 ISO

[Data type] Bit
#0 ISO When a memory card is selected as an I/O device, data input/output is performed using
0: ASCII codes
1: ISO codes
WARNING
1 Unless data is input using ASCII codes, set this parameter to 1 to
input or output data using ISO codes.
2 Data input/output with ASCII codes is dangerous because parity
information is not included and a data error during the data
input/output is not detected.
Alarm and message

SR0001 TH ERROR A TH error was detected during reading from an input device.
The read code that caused the TH error and how many
statements it is from the block can be verified in the diagnostics
screen.
SR0002 TV ERROR An error was detected during the single–block TV error.
The TV check can be suppressed by setting TVC parameter No.
0000#0 to “0”.
SR1805 ILLEGAL COMMAND An attempt was made to specify an illegal command during I/O
processing on an I/O device.
SR1806 DEVICE TYPE MISS MATCH An operation not possible on the I/O device that is currently
selected in the setting was specified.
This alarm is also generated when file rewind is instructed even
though the I/O device is not a FANUC Cassette.
SR1807 PARAMETER SETTING ERROR An I/O interface option that has not yet been added on was
specified.
The external I/O device and baud rate, stop bit and protocol
selection settings are erroneous.
SR1808 DEVICE DOUBLE OPENED An attempt was made to open a device that is being accessed.
- 1252 -

SR1973 FILE ALREADY EXIST A file having the same name already exists on the memory card.
- Channel 1
SR0085 OVERRUN ERROR During a read by reader/punch interface 1, an overrun, parity, or
framing error occurred. The number of bits for entered data was
not matched, or baud rate setting or I/O device specification
number was incorrect.
SR0086 DR OFF During I/O process by reader/punch interface 1, the data set
ready input signal of the I/O device (DR) was OFF. Possible
causes are an I/O device not turn on, a broken cable, and a
defective printed circuit board.
SR0087 BUFFER OVERFLOW During a read by reader/punch interface 1, although a read stop
command was issued, more than 10 characters were input. The
I/O device or printed circuit board was defective.
- Channel 2
SR1830 DR OFF(2) During I/O process by reader/punch interface 2, the data set
ready input signal of the I/O device (DR) was OFF. Possible
causes are an I/O device not turn on, a broken cable, and a
defective printed circuit board.
SR1832 OVERRUN ERROR(2) During a read by reader/punch interface 2, an overrun, parity, or
framing error occurred. The number of bits for entered data was
not matched, or baud rate setting or I/O device specification
number was incorrect.
SR1834 BUFFER OVERFLOW(2) During a read by reader/punch interface 2, although a read stop
command was issued, more than 10 characters were input. The
I/O device or printed circuit board was defective.
- DNC operation
PS0123 ILLEGAL MODE FOR A GOTO statement or WHILE–DO statement was found in the
GOTO/WHILE/DO main program in the MDI or DNC mode.
PS1081 EXT DEVICE SUB PROGRAM 1. M198 was executed during DNC operation. Modify the
CALL MODE ERROR program.
2. An interruption macro was specified and M99 was executed
during pocketing of multiple repetitive canned cycles.
- 1253 -
14.2 EXTERNAL I/O DEVICE CONTROL

Overview
The registration or punch of a program can be specified externally.
• Registration
External read start signal EXRD can be used to register a program in the part program memory from
an external input device with the background edit function.
• Punch
External punch start signal EXWT can be used to output all programs registered in part program
memory to an external output device with the background edit function.
Signal
External read start signal EXRD<Gn058.1>
[Function] Programs are registered in the part program memory through the reader/puncher interface.
[Operation] When this signal is set to 1, the CNC operates as follows:
- The background edit function reads programs from an external input device and
register them in the part program memory.
- Bit 1 (RAL) of parameter No. 3201 can be used to specify either a single program or
all programs in the file are registered at a time.
Bit 0 (RDL) of parameter No. 3201 can be used to delete all programs before being
registered. However, it is impossible to delete programs protected by bit 0 (NE8)
and bit 4 (NE9) of parameter No. 3202 or by their attributes.
- During registration, read/punch signal RPBSY is 1.
- When external read/punch stop signal EXSTP is set to 1 during registration, the
registration stops.
- If the reader/puncher interface is already used in the foreground processing (for
example, reading or punching of a program in the edit mode), external read start
signal EXRD waits until the foreground processing is completed.
- There are some other conditions to determine whether a program can be registered.
For example, a program with the same program number or file name as the program
to be registered is not allowed to be executed in the foreground.
NOTE
In the 2-path system, do not input these signals for two or more
paths at the same time.
External punch start signal EXWT<Gn058.3>

[Function] Programs stored in the part program memory are output to an external unit via the
reader/puncher interface.
- The background edit function outputs all programs stored in the part program
memory to an external output device.
- When programs are being output, read/punch busy signal RPBSY is set to 1.
- When external read/punch stop signal EXSTP is set to 1 during output, the output
stops.
- If the reader/puncher interface is already used in the foreground processing (for
example, reading or punching of a program in the edit mode), external punch start
signal EXWT waits until the foreground processing is completed.
- 1254 -
- There are some other conditions to determine whether all programs can be output.
For example, the program protected by bit 0 and bit 4 of parameter No. 3202 cannot
be output.
NOTE
In the 2-path system, do not input these signals for two or more
paths at the same time.
External read/punch stop signal EXSTP<Gn058.2>

[Function] Program registration or output via the reader/puncher interface is forcibly stopped.
- Program registration or output by the external read start signal or external punch
start signal is stopped immediately.
Read/punch busy signal RPBSY<Fn053.2>

[Function] This signal indicates that program registration or output triggered by the external read
start signal or external punch start signal is under way.
[Output cond.] This signal becomes 1, when:
- The external read start signal or external punch start signal triggers program
registration or output.
This signal becomes 0, when:
- Program registration or output triggered by the external read or punch start signal
ends.
This signal also becomes 1 when the program registration or output ends normally
or is forcibly ended by external read/ punch stop signal EXSTP.
Read/punch alarm signal RPALM<Fn053.3>

[Function] This signal indicates that an alarm condition has occurred during program registration or
output triggered by the external read start signal or external punch start signal.
[Output cond.] This signal becomes 1, when:
- An alarm occurs during program registration or output triggered by the external read
or punch start signal.
This signal becomes 0, when:
- A reset or external read/punch stop signal EXSTP is input.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn058 EXWT EXSTP EXRD
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn053 RPALM RPBSY
- 1255 -
Parameter
I/O CHANNEL 0101 Stop bit and other data
0020
or foreground input
Specify a channel for an data 0102
input/output device.
I/O CHANNEL (0 to 2) 0103 Baud rate
=0 : Channel 1
=1 : Channel 1 Stop bit and other data
=2 : Channel 2 0111

0112
When IO4(No.0110#0) is set
0113 Baud rate
0021 Foreground output
0121 Stop bit and other data
0022 Background input
0122
0023 Background output (Channel 2) the input/output device
0123 Baud rate

Channel settings are the same as
with parameter No. 0020.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3201 NPE N99 REP RAL RDL

#0 RDL When a program is registered by input/output device external control

0: The new program is registered following the programs already registered.
1: All registered programs are deleted, then the new program is registered. Note that
programs which are protected from being edited are not deleted.
NOTE
Registered programs are placed in the background default folder
set in the program list screen. Before manipulating this signal, set
the default folder in the background correctly.
#1 RAL When programs are registered by external I/O device control:

0: All programs are registered.
1: Only one program is registered.
NOTE
Registered programs are placed in the background default folder
set in the program list screen. Before manipulating this signal, set
the default folder in the background correctly.
#2 REP Action in response to an attempt to register a program whose number is the same as that
of an existing program
0: An alarm is generated.
1: The existing program is deleted, then the new program is registered. Note that if the
existing program is protected from being edited, it is not deleted, and an alarm is
generated.
- 1256 -
#5 N99 With an M99 block, when bit 6 (NPE) of parameter No.3201 = 0, program registration is
assumed to be:
0: Completed
1: Not completed
#6 NPE With an M02, M30, or M99 block, program registration is assumed to be:
0: Completed
1: Not completed
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3202 NE9 NE8

#0 NE8 Editing of subprograms with program numbers 8000 to 8999

0: Not inhibited
1: Inhibited
When this parameter is set to 1, the following editing operations are disabled:
(1) Program deletion (Even when deletion of all programs is specified, programs with
program numbers 8000 to 8999 are not deleted.)
(2) Program output (Even when outputting all programs is specified, programs with
program numbers 8000 to 8999 are not output.)
(3) Program number search
(4) Program editing of registered programs
(5) Program registration
(6) Program collation
(7) Displaying programs
NOTE
This parameter setting does not affect the following programs:
(1) Programs on the Data Server
(2) Programs for running and editing memory card programs on a
memory card
#4 NE9 Editing of subprograms with program numbers 9000 to 9999

0: Not inhibited
1: Inhibited
When this parameter is set to 1, the following editing operations are disabled:
(1) Program deletion (Even when deletion of all programs is specified, programs with
program numbers 9000 to 9999 are not deleted.)
(2) Program output (Even when outputting all programs is specified, programs with
program numbers 9000 to 9999 are not output.)
(3) Program number search
(4) Program editing of registered programs
(5) Program registration
(6) Program collation
(7) Displaying programs
- 1257 -
NOTE
This parameter setting does not affect the following programs:
(1) Programs on the Data Server
(2) Programs for running and editing memory card programs on a
memory card
Alarm and message

BG0070 NO PROGRAM SPACE IN MEMORY The memory area is insufficient.
Delete any unnecessary programs, then retry.
BG0072 TOO MANY PROGRAMS The number of programs to be stored exceeded 400. Delete
unnecessary programs and execute program registration
again.
BG0073 PROGRAM NUMBER ALREADY IN The commanded program number has already been used.
USE Change the program number or delete unnecessary
programs and execute program registration again.
BG0075 PROTECT An attempt was made to register a program whose number
was protected.
In program matching, the password for the encoded program
was not correct.
BG0087 BUFFER OVERFLOW The NC received more than 10 characters even though the
NC sent a stop code (DC3) to the I/O device connected to
reader/punch interface 1 during data reception.
BG0140 PROGRAM NUMBER ALREADY IN In the background, an attempt was made to select or delete
USE the program being selected in the foreground. Perform the
correct operation for the background edition.
BG0233 DEVICE BUSY When an attempt was made to use a unit such as that
connected via the RS-232-C interface, other users were
using it.
BG0434 WRITE PROTECT The registration of the program is prohibited.
BG0435 ILLEGAL FORMAT The format is illegal.
- Confirm the format of the program number or file name set
for the program.
BG1808 DEVICE DOUBLE OPENED An attempt was made to open a device that is being
accessed.
BG0085 OVERRUN ERROR The next character was received from the I/O device
connected to reader/punch interface 1 before it could read a
previously received character.
BG1832 OVERRUN ERROR(2) The next character was received from the I/O device
connected to reader/punch interface 2 before it could read a
previously received character.
BG0086 DR OFF During I/O process by reader/punch interface 1, the data set
ready input signal of the I/O device (DR) was OFF.
BG1830 DR OFF(2) During I/O process by reader/punch interface 2, the data set
ready input signal of the I/O device (DR) was OFF.
BG1834 BUFFER OVERFLOW(2) The NC received more than 10 characters of data even
though the NC sent a stop code (DC3) to the I/O device
connected to reader/punch interface 2 during data reception.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64304EN) Program management
Inputting/Outputting a Program
- 1258 -
B-64303EN-1/02 15.MEASUREMENT
15 MEASUREMENT
Chapter 15, "MEASUREMENT", consists of the following sections:
15.1 TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT..............................................................................................1259

15.2 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES) /
AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET (T SERIES) .................................................................................1260
15.3 SKIP FUNCTION...........................................................................................................................1267
15.4 COMPENSATION VALUE INPUT ..............................................................................................1292
15.1 TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES)

M
Overview
The value displayed as a relative position can be set in the offset memory as an offset value by a soft key.
Switch to the offset value display screen on the screen. Relative positions are also displayed on this
screen. Then select the reference tool and set it at the fixed point on the machine by manual operation.
Reset the displayed relative position to zero. Set the tool for measurement at the same fixed point on the
machine by manual operation. The relative position display at this point shows difference between the
reference tool and the tool measured and the relative position display value is then set as offset amounts.
Reference
tool
This difference
is set as offset
amount
Fixed point
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (For Machining Center) Tool length compensation
(B-64304EN-2)
- 1259 -
15.MEASUREMENT B-64303EN-1/02
15.2 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES)

/ AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET (T SERIES)
Overview
When a tool is moved to the measurement position by execution of a command given to the CNC, the
CNC automatically measures the difference between the current coordinate value and the coordinate
value of the command measurement position and uses it as the offset value for the tool. When the tool
has been already offset, it is moved to the measurement position with that offset value.
The difference between the coordinate value of a measuring position and a specified coordinate value is
added to current compensation.
A (start position)
Rapid traverse G37 for specifying measuring position
B (deceleration position)
Measurement
speed
C (measuring position)）
Tool stops when measuring position
reached signal goes on.
X
0
Compensation = (Current compensation) + [(Coordinate at tool stop) - (Coordinate at
specification of measuring position)]
NOTE
When using automatic tool length measurement (M series)/automatic tool offset
(T series), set bit 7 (IGA) of parameter No. 6240 to 0.
Signal
Measuring position reached signals
XAE1#1<X004.0>, XAE2#1<X004.1> (M series/T series),
XAE3#1<X004.2> (M series only)
XAE1#2<X013.0>, XAE2#2<X013.1> (T series (2-path control))
GAE1#P<Gn517.0>, GAE2#P<Gn517.1> (M series / T series),
GAE3#P<Gn517.2> (M series only)
[Function] If the measuring position specified by a program command differs from the measuring
position which a tool has reached in practice, that is, the position at the moment the
measuring position reached signal has just been turned "1", the difference in the
coordinate value is added to the current tool compensation value to update the
compensation value. The tool is first fed to the specified measuring position by rapid
traverse in a block where one of the following commands has been specified:
G37 (Mseries)
G36,G37 (Tseries)
The tool decelerates and temporarily stops at the distance γ before the measuring position.
- 1260 -
The tool then moves to the measuring position at the speed preset by a parameters
(No.6241 to No.6243). If the measuring position reached signal corresponding to the G
code is turned "1" after the tool has approached within distance ε of the measuring
position and before the tool overshoots the measuring position by distance ε, the control
unit updates the compensation value and terminates the move command for the block. If
the measuring position reached signal is not turned "1" even after the tool has overshot
the measuring position by distance ε, the control unit enters an alarm state and terminates
the move command for the block without updating the compensation value.
Presumed measuring position
FR FP
U V
X, Z
A B C D
S (xs, zs) T
ε ε
Start
point γ Measuring position
reached signal
|xa-xs|. |za-zs|
U (xa, za)
FR : Rapid traverse
FP : Parameters No.6241 to No.6243（feedrate）
γ : Parameters No.6251 to No.6253
ε : Parameters No.6254 to No.6256
Command Axis specification Signal input Valid parameters

code T series M series T series M series T series M series
6241,
Basic 1st XAE1
G36 6251,
axis (GAE1)
6254
XAE1 to
Basic1st 6242, 6241 to 6243,
Basic 3rd XAE2 XAE3
G37 to 3rd 6252, 6251 to 6253,
axis (GAE2) (GAE1 to
axes 6255 6254 to 6256
GAE3)
NOTE
In an M-series machine, if parameters No.6242 and No.6243 are
set to 0, the setting of parameter No.6241 becomes valid. If
parameters No.6252 and No.6253 are set to 0, the setting of
parameter No.6251 becomes valid. If parameters No.6255 and
No.6256 are set to 0, the setting of parameter No.6254 becomes
valid.
[Operation] When the signal is turned "1", the control unit works as follows:
• Reads the position of the tool along the axis currently specified and updates the
current compensation value based on the difference between the specified measuring
position and the read measuring position in the following case: When the measuring
position reached signal corresponding to the G code is turned on in a block where
G36 (T series) or G37 is specified after the tool is within distance ε of the measuring
position specified by a program and before the tool overshoots the measuring
position by distance ε. The control unit then stops the tool, and terminates the move
command for the block.
- 1261 -
• Enters an alarm (PS0080) state and terminates the move command for the block
without updating the compensation value in the following case: When the measuring
position reached signal corresponding to the command is turned "1" in a block
where G36 (T series), G37 is specified after the tool is within distance γ of the
measuring position but before the tool is within distance ε of the measuring position.
• The measuring position reached signal is not monitored on the rising edge, but the
state of the signal is simply monitored. So, if the measuring position reached signal
remains to be set to 1, and automatic tool length measurement (M series) (automatic
tool offset (T series) (G36, G37) is then specified, the CNC issues the PS0080 alarm
when a movement has been made to distance γ before the measurement position.
NOTE
1 The measuring position reached signal requires at least 10 msec.
2 A delay or variation in detecting a measuring position reached
signal is 0 to 2 ms just on the CNC side, excluding the PMC side.
Accordingly, the measurement error is the sum of 2 ms and a delay
or variation in transferring a measuring position reached signal on
the PMC side (including receiver delay or variation), multiplied by
the feedrate specified in parameter No.6241.
3 A delay or variation after the detection of a measuring position
reached signal until feed stop is 0 to 8 ms. When an overshoot is
calculated, an acceleration/deceleration delay, servo delay, PMC
delay must also be considered.
4 Measuring position reached signals XAE1 to XAE3 need not be
processed on the PMC side because the CNC reads the signals
directly from the machine.
5 If the tool length measurement function is not used, the PMC can
use the pins corresponding to the measuring position reached
signals for general-purpose input signals.
6 When the parameter XSG (bit 2 of parameter No.3008) is set to 1,
address X004 including measuring position reached signals can be
assigned to an X address specified in parameter No.3019.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#1 #1
XAE2 XAE1 (T series)
X004 #1 #1 #1
XAE3 XAE2 XAE1 (M series)
#2 #2
X013 XAE2 XAE1 (T series)
#P #P
GAE2 GAE1 (T series)
Gn517 #P #P #P
GAE3 GAE2 GAE1 (M series)
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3008 XSG

- 1262 -
NOTE
#2 XSG A signal assigned to an X address is:

0: Fixed at the address.
1: Able to be reassigned to an arbitrary X address.
NOTE
When this parameter is set to 1, set parameter No. 3013, No. 3014,
No. 3012, and No. 3019. If parameter No. 3013 and No. 3014 are
not set, the deceleration signal for reference position return is
assigned to bit 0 of X0000. If parameter No. 3012 and No. 3019 are
not set, the skip signal, the PMC axis control skip signal, the
measurement position arrival signal, the interlock signal for each
axis direction, and the tool compensation value write signal are
assigned to X0000.
Address to which the PMC axis control skip signal, measurement position arrival signals, and tool
3019
offset value write signals are assigned
NOTE

Set an X address to which the PMC axis control skip signal ESKIP, the measurement
position arrival signals (XAE1, XAE2, and XAE3 (M series) or XAE1 and XAE2 (T
series)), and tool offset value write signals (±MIT1, ±MIT2 (T series)) are to be assigned.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6201 SEB

#1 SEB When a skip signal or measurement position arrival signal goes on while the skip function,
or the automatic tool length measurement (M series) or automatic tool compensation (T
series) is used, the accumulated pulses and positional deviation due to
acceleration/deceleration are:
0: Ignored.
1: Considered and compensated.
The accumulated pulses and positional deviation due to actual acceleration/deceleration
when the skip signal or measurement position arrival signal goes on are considered to
obtain the position at which the signal is input.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6210 MDC

- 1263 -
#6 MDC The measurement result of automatic tool length is:

0: Added to the current offset.
1: Subtracted from the current offset.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6240 IGA AE0
NOTE

#0 AE0 Measurement position arrival is assumed when the automatic tool compensation signals
XAE1 and XAE2 <X004.0,1> (T series) or the automatic tool length measurement
signals XAE1, XAE2, and XAE3 <X004.0,1,2> (M series) are:
0: 1.
1: 0.
#7 IGA Automatic tool length measurement (M series) or automatic tool compensation (T series)
is:
0: Used.
1: Not used.
Feedrate during measurement of automatic tool compensation (T series) (for the XAE1 signal)
6241
Feedrate during measurement of automatic tool length measurement (M series) (for the XAE1 signal)
Feedrate during measurement of automatic tool compensation (T series) (for the XAE2 signal)
6242
6243

[Unit of data] mm/min, inch/min, deg/min (machine unit)
These parameters set the relevant feedrate during measurement of automatic tool
compensation (T series) or automatic tool length measurement (M series).
NOTE
When the setting of parameter No. 6242 or 6243 is 0, the setting of
parameter No. 6241 is used.
γ value on the X axis during automatic tool compensation (T series)

6251
γ value during automatic tool length measurement (M series) (for the XAE1 signal)
γ value on the Z axis during automatic tool compensation (T series)

6252
- 1264 -
6253

[Unit of data] mm, inch, deg (machine unit)
These parameters set the relevant γ value during automatic tool compensation (T series)
or automatic tool length measurement (M series).
NOTE
1 For the M series, when the setting of parameter No. 6252 or 6253
is 0, the setting of parameter No. 6251 is used.
2 Set a radius value regardless of whether diameter or radius
programming is specified.
ε value on the X axis during automatic tool compensation (T series)

6254
ε value during automatic tool length measurement (M series) (for the XAE1 signal)
ε value on the Z axis during automatic tool compensation (T series)

6255
6256

[Unit of data] mm, inch, deg (machine unit)
These parameters set the relevant ε value during automatic tool compensation (T series)
or automatic tool length measurement (M series).
NOTE
1 For the M series, when the setting of parameter No. 6255 or 6256
is 0, the setting of parameter No. 6254 is used.
2 Set a radius value regardless of whether diameter or radius
programming is specified.
Alarm and message

PS0080 G37 MEASURING POSITION When the tool length measurement function (G37) is
REACHED SIGNAL IS NOT performed, a measuring position reached signal goes 1 in front
PROPERLY INPUT (M series) of the area determined by the ε value specified in parameter
No.6254. Alternatively, the signal does not go 1.
G37 MEASURING POSITION When the automatic tool compensation function (G36, G37) is
REACHED SIGNAL IS NOT used, a measuring position reached signals (XAE1, XAE2)
PROPERLY INPUT (T series) does not go 1 within the range determined by the ε value
specified in parameters No.6254 and No.6255.
- 1265 -

PS0081 G37 OFFSET NO. UNASSIGNED (M The tool length measurement function (G37) is specified
series) without specifying an H code.
Correct the program.
G37 OFFSET NO. UNASSIGNED (T The automatic tool compensation function (G36, G37) is
series) specified without specifying an T code.
PS0082 G37 SPECIFIED WITH H CODE (M The tool length measurement function (G37) is specified
series) together with an H code in the same block.
G37 SPECIFIED WITH T CODE (T The automatic tool compensation function (G36, G37) is
series) specified together with an T code in the same block.
PS0083 G37 IMPROPER AXIS COMMAND An error has been found in axis specification of the tool length
(M series) measurement function (G37). Alternatively, a move
command is specified as an incremental command.
G37 IMPROPER AXIS COMMAND An error has been found in axis specification of the automatic
(T series) tool compensation function (G36, G37). Alternatively, a
command is specified as an incremental command.
NOTE
NOTE
1 If an H code and G37 are specified in the same block, an alarm will be raised.
Specify an H code before a block including G37.
2 A measurement speed (FP), γ, and ε are specified as parameters (FP: No.6241,
γ: No.6251, ε: No.6254) by the machine tool builder. As ε, specify a positive
value satisfying the condition of γ > ε.
3 The compensation value is updated by the following formula:
New compensation value =(Current compensation value)+[(Current position of
the tool along the specified axis when the measuring position reached signal is
"1") - (specified measuring position)]
The following compensation values are updated:
(1) In a M series, the compensation value corresponding to the tool
compensation number selected by an H code.
When offset memory A is used, the offset value is changed.
When offset memory C is used, the tool wear compensation value for the H
code is changed.
(2) In a T series, the compensation value corresponding to the tool
compensation number selected by a T code and to the specified axis (X, Z)
in G36, G37.
4 A delay or variation in detecting a measuring position reached signal is 0 to 2 ms
just on the CNC side, excluding the PMC side. Accordingly, the measurement
error is the sum of 2 ms and a delay or variation in transferring a measuring
position reached signal on the PMC side (including receiver delay or variation),
multiplied by the feedrate specified in parameter No.6241.
5 A delay or variation after the detection of a measuring position reached signal
until feed stop is 0 to 8 ms. When an overshoot is calculated, an
acceleration/deceleration delay, servo delay, PMC delay must also be
considered.
- 1266 -
NOTE
6 A measuring position reached signal is monitored just as a state not by the rising
edge. Accordingly, if a measuring position reached signal is held to 1 and if the
corresponding tool length measurement function (G37) is specified, the CNC will
raise alarm PS0080 when a movement is made to a position at a distance of γ, in
front of the measuring position.
7 When using this function, set the parameter EVO (bit 6 of parameter No.5001) to
zero. (If the tool compensation value of tool length compensation A or B is
changed in the offset mode (G43 or G44), the new value becomes effective from
a subsequent block including G43, G44, or an H code.)
Reference item
DESCRIPTIONS (B-64302EN) Automatic tool length measurement
Automatic tool offset
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Lathe system) Automatic tool offset (G36,G37)
(B-64304EN-1)
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Machining center system) Automatic tool length measurement (G37)
(B-64304EN-2)
15.3 SKIP FUNCTION
15.3.1 Skip Function

Overview
Linear interpolation can be commanded by specifying axial move following the G31 command, like G01.
If an external skip signal is input during the execution of this command, execution of the command is
interrupted and the next block is executed.
The skip function is used when the end of machining is not programmed but specified with a signal from
the machine, for example, in grinding. It is used also for measuring the dimensions of a workpiece.
The coordinates when the skip signal turned on are stored in the system variables (#5061 to #5065) for
custom macros, so they can be used by custom macros.
#5061 : First axis coordinate value
#5062 : Second axis coordinate value
:
#5065 : Fifth axis coordinate value
- Acc./Dec. after interpolation of the skip function

To enable the Acc./Dec. after cutting feed interpolation of the skip function, set bit 7 (SKF) of parameter
No. 6200 to 1. When SKF is 0, the Acc./Dec. after cutting feed interpolation of the skip function is
disabled.
If the Acc./Dec. type is set by bit 3 (ASL) of parameter No. 6210 and the time constant is set by bit 4
(ASB) of parameter No. 6210 when SKF is 1, it is possible to set a separate Acc./Dec. type and time
constant that are different from those of the normal Acc./Dec. after cutting feed interpolation. When
ASB is 0 and ASL is 0, the normal Acc./Dec. after cutting feed interpolation is assumed. In this case,
the Acc./Dec. type set by bit 0 (CTLx) of parameter No. 1610 and bit 1 (CTBx) of parameter No. 1610
and the time constant set by parameter No. 1622 are enabled.
- 1267 -
- Compensation of acceleration/deceleration and servo delay

The skip function records the current position inside the NC using the skip signal. However, the current
position inside the NC includes servo delay, so the recorded position deviates from the position in which
the skip signal was actually input by the servo delay. The deviation amount can be calculated from the
positional deviation owned on the servo side and the accumulated amount by feedrate
acceleration/deceleration performed inside the NC. If the deviation amount is considered, the servo
delay does not need to be included in measurement error.
If bit 1 (SEB) of parameter No. 6201 is set, compensation can be carried out by obtaining the deviation
amount the positional deviation and the accumulated amount by acceleration/deceleration when the skip
signal is turned on.
Tool movement direction
High-speed skip signal
Pnc
Q P
Actual tool stop Position at which the Coordinate

position skip signal was input origin
Pnc : Position at which the tool is actually stopped after the skip signal was input [mm/inch]
P : Distance to be measured [mm/inch]
Q : Servo delay [mm/inch]
As shown above, the following expression is calculated inside the NC by setting bit 1 (SEB) of parameter
No. 6201.
P = Pnc - Q
Signal
SKIP<X004.7> SKIPP<Gn006.6> (T series/M series)
SKIP#2<X013.7> (T series (2-path control))
Skip Signals SKIP<X004.7> SKIPP<Gn006.6>
[Function] This signal terminates skip cutting. That is, the position where a skip signal turns to "1" in
a block containing G31 is stored in a custom macro variable, and the move command of
the block is terminated at the same time.
[Operation] When a skip signal turns to "1", the control unit works as described below.
- When a block contains a skip cutting command G31, the control unit reads and
stores the current position of the specified axis at that time. The control unit stops
the axis, then cancels the remaining distance that the block was supposed to be
moved.
NOTE
1 The skip signal width requires at least 10 msec.
- 1268 -
NOTE
2 The delay or variation on the CNC side (excluding the PMC side) in
detecting the skip signal is 0 to 2 msec. Therefore, the
measurement error is the sum of 2 msec and the delay or variation
(including the delay or variation of the receiver) of the skip signal
on the PMC side, multiplied by the feedrate.
3 The delay or variation until feed stops after detection of the skip
signal is 0 to 8 msec. To calculate the overshoot, further consider
delay in acceleration/deceleration, delay in servo, delay on the
PMC side.
4 The CNC directly reads the skip signal SKIP<X004.7> from the
machine tool; the PMC is no longer requires to process the signal.
5 If the skip function G31 is not used, the PMC can use the signal
terminal SKIP<X004.7> corresponding to the skip signal as a general
purpose input signal.
6 When the skip signal is monitored, the state rather than the rising
edge is sampled. Therefore, when the level remains "1", the skip
condition is assumed to be met immediately after skip cutting is
specified next.
7 Address X004 including skip signal SKIP<X004.7> can be assigned
to the X addresses that were set for parameters No. 3012 and No.
3019 when XSG (bit 2 of parameter No. 3008) is 1.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X004 SKIP
#2
X013 SKIP
Gn006 SKIPP
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3008 XSG

NOTE

NOTE
When this parameter was set to 1, parameters No. 3012 and No.
3019 must be set. If parameters No. 3012 and No. 3019 are not
set, the skip to X0 signal, PMC axis control skip signal, and
measurement position arrival signal are assigned to X0000.
- 1269 -
3012 Skip signal assignment address
NOTE

Set an X address to which the skip signal (SKIPn) is to be assigned.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008 is
set to 1.
Depending on the option configuration of the I/O Link, the actually
usable X addresses are:
X0 to X127, X200 to X327
Address to which the PMC axis control skip signal and measurement position arrival signals are
3019
assigned
NOTE

Set an X address to which the PMC axis control skip signal ESKIP and the measurement
series)) are to be assigned.
Example 1. When No.3012 is set to 5 and No.3019 is set to 6

When XSG (bit 2 of parameter No. 3008) is 1, the PMC axis control skip signal, and
measurement position arrival signal are allocated to X0006 and the skip signal is
allocated to X0005.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X005 SKIP SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7 (T series)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
SKIP SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7 (M series)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X006 ESKIP XAE2 XAE1 (T series)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
ESKIP XAE3 XAE2 XAE1 (M series)
- 1270 -
Example 2. When No.3012 is set to 5 and No.3019 is set to 5

When XSG (bit 2 of parameter No. 3008) is 1, the PMC axis control skip signal,
measurement position arrival signal, and skip signal are allocated to X0005.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X005 ESKIP XAE2 XAE1
SKIP (T series)
SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
ESKIP XAE3 XAE2 XAE1
SKIP SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 (M series)
SKIP6 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7
NOTE
set to 1.
X0 to X127, X200 to X327
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5160
TSG

#4 TSG A dependence of the overload torque detection signal in a peck drilling cycle (M series)
on the parameter setting of the skip function:
0: Exists.
1: Does not exist.
NOTE
When this parameter is 1, even if the setting of the skip signal is
disabled, the X address can be used as the overload torque
detection signal. At this time, parameter No. 3012 and bit 1 (SK0)
of parameter No. 6200 is valid.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6200 SKF HSS SK0 GSK

#0 GSK As a skip signal, the skip signal SKIPP is:

0: Invalid.
1: Valid.
#1 SK0 This parameter specifies whether the skip signal is made valid under the state of the skip
signal SKIP and the multistage skip signals SKIP2 to SKIP8.
0: Skip signal is valid when these signals are 1.
#4 HSS
0: The skip function does not use high-speed skip signals while skip signals are input.
(The conventional skip signal is used.)
1: The step skip function uses high-speed skip signals while skip signals are input.
- 1271 -
#7 SKF Dry run, override, and automatic acceleration/deceleration for G31 skip command
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6201 SPE IGX SEB

0: Ignored.
#4 IGX When the high-speed skip function is used, SKIP, SKIPP, and SKIP2 to SKIP8 are:
0: Enabled as skip signals.
1: Disabled as skip signals.
#7 SPE For the skip function (G31), the skip signal SKIP is:
0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.
Enabling and disabling the skip signals

IGX GSK SPE Skip Multi-step skip
Skip signal
Parameter (No.6201 (No.6200 (No.6201 signal signal
SKIP
#4) #0) #7) SKIPP SKIP2-SKIP8
0 0 0 Disabled Enabled Enabled
0 1 0 Enabled Enabled Enabled
0 0 1 Disabled Disabled Enabled
0 1 1 Enabled Disabled Enabled
Setting
1 0 0 Disabled Disabled Disabled
IGX (bit 4 of parameter No. 6201) is valid for the skip function (when HSS (bit 4 of
parameter No. 6200) is 1) using the high-speed skip signal or the multiphase skip
function (when SLS (bit 5 of parameter No. 6200) is 1) using the high-speed skip signal.
To use multistage skip signals, the multistage skip function option is required.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6207 SFN SFP

- 1272 -
#1 SFP The feedrate used when the skip function (G31) is being executed is:
0: Feedrate of a programmed F code.
1: Feedrate set in parameter No. 6281.
NOTE
For the multi-stage skip function and high-speed skip, see the
description of bit 2 (SFN ) of parameter No. 6207.
#2 SFN The feedrate used when the skip function based on high-speed skip signals (with bit 4
(HSS) of parameter No. 6200 set to 1) or the multi-skip function is being executed is:
1: Feedrate set in a parameter from parameter No. 6282 to No. 6285.
NOTE
For not the multistage skip function, but the skip function using no
high-speed skip signals (when bit 4 (HSS) of parameter No. 6200 is
set to 0), see the description of bit 1 (SFP) of parameter No. 6207.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6210 ASB ASL

#3 ASL
#4 ASB
The ASB and ASL bits set the type and time constant of acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation in the skip function as follows:
ASB ASL Type of acceleration/ deceleration Parameter No. for time constant
0 1 Linear type
Parameter No. 6280
1 － Bell-shaped
(NOTE)
0 0 This function is disabled .
When bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration is specified, T1=T/2 and T2=T/2 are obtained

as with normal acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation, where T is the
time constant. Therefore, the acceleration/deceleration type includes no linear part.
NOTE
In this case, the acceleration/deceleration type is set in bits 0 and 1
of parameter No. 1610, and the time constant is set in parameter
No. 1622.
6280 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for the skip function for each axis

[Unit of data] msec
This parameter sets a time constant for acceleration/deceleration after interpolation for the
skip function for each axis.
This parameter is valid when bit 3 (ASB) of parameter No. 6210 or bit 4 (ASL) of
- 1273 -
6281 Feedrate for the skip function (G31)

This parameter sets a feedrate for the skip function (G31). This parameter is valid when
bit 1 (SFP) of parameter No. 6207 is set to 1.
NOTE
description of parameter No. 6282 to No. 6285.
Alarm and message

PS0035 CAN NOT COMMANDED G31 - G31 cannot be specified. This alarm is generated when a G
code (such as for cutter or tool-nose radius compensation)
of group 07 is not canceled.
command (G31P98 or P99). Specify the torque limit skip in
the PMC window or the like. Or, specify the torque limit
Note
NOTE
This function is enabled for axes not related to composite control.
15.3.2 High-speed Skip Signal

Overview
The skip function operates based on a high-speed skip signal (HDI0 to HDI3 : connected directly to the
CNC; not via the PMC) instead of an ordinary skip signal. In this case, up to eight signals can be input.
(Either can be enabled/disabled, using parameters HSS and IGX (bit 4 of parameter No. 6201 and bit 4 of
parameter No. 6200).) If a high-speed skip signal is used, up to four signals can be input.
Delay and error of skip signal input is 0 to 2 msec at the CNC side (not considering those at the PMC
side).
This high-speed skip signal input function keeps this value to 0.1 msec or less, thus allowing high
precision measurement.
Signal
High-Speed Skip Status Signals HDO0 to HDO3 <Fn122.0 to Fn122.3>
[Function] This signal informs the PMC of the input status of the high-speed skip signal. The
signal-to-bit correspondence is as follows:
High-speed skip signal ..... Bit name
HDI0......................... HDO0
HDI1......................... HDO1
HDI2......................... HDO2
HDI3......................... HDO3
- 1274 -
[Output cond.] Each bit is set to 1 when:

- The corresponding high-speed skip signal is logical 1.
Each bit is set to 0 when:
- The corresponding high-speed skip signal is logical 0.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn122 HDO3 HDO2 HDO1 HDO0
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6207 RHB SFN

NOTE
For not the multi-stage skip function but the skip function not using
high-speed skip signals, see the description of bit 1 (SFP) of
parameter No. 6207.
#5 RHB The high-Speed skip status signals HDO is:

0: Set to "1" when the contact of the high-speed skip signal is closed.
1: Set to "1" when the contact of the high-speed skip signal is open.
NOTE
The high-speed skip signal HDI does not change by setting RHB
(bit 5 of parameter No.6207). When the contact of the high-speed
skip signal is open, the signal HDI is set to "0" and the signal is not
assumed to be input regardless of the setting of parameter RHB.
To assume that the high-speed skip signal is input when the
contact of the signal is open, set SRE (bit 6 of parameter No.6200)
to 1.
6282 Feedrate for the skip function (G31, G31 P1)
6283 Feedrate for the skip function (G31 P2)

- 1275 -
Each of these parameters sets a feedrate for each skip function G code. These
parameters are valid when bit 2 (SFN) of parameter No. 6207 is set to 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6200 SRE HSS

#4 HSS
#6 SRE When a high-speed skip signal is used:

0: The signal is assumed to be input on the rising edge (contact open → close).
1: The signal is assumed to be input on the falling edge (contact close → open).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6201 SPE IGX TSE SEB

0: Ignored.
#2 TSE In a skip by the torque limit skip command (G31P98/P99):

0: A servo delay amount (positional deviation) is considered (system variables #5061
to #5065 store positions corrected in consideration of the servo system delay
amount).
1: A servo delay amount (positional deviation) is not considered (system variables
#5061 to #5065 store positions corrected without consideration of the servo system
delay amount).
- 1276 -
Position during skip operation
Current position of CNC
Machine position Error amount
Origin of the coordinate system Stop point
Position in consideration of delay
Position without consideration of delay
0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.
Whether the skip signals are enabled or disabled

IGX GSK SPE Skip Skip Multistage skip
Paramet
(No.6201 (No.6200 (No.6201 signal signal signals
er
#4) #0) #7) SKIPP SKIP SKIP2-SKIP8
Setting
Bit 4 (IGX) of parameter No. 6201 is valid for the skip function using high-speed skip
signals (when bit 4 (HSS) of parameter No. 6200 is set to 1) or for the multistage skip
function using high-speed skip signals (when bit 5 (SLS) of parameter No. 6200 is set to
1).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6202 1S4 1S3 1S2 1S1

1S1 to 1S4 Specify which high-speed skip signal is enabled when the G31 skip command is issued.
The following table shows the correspondence between the bits, input signals, and
commands.
The setting of the bits have the following meaning :
0: The high-speed skip signal corresponding to a bit is invalid.
1: The high-speed skip signal corresponding to a bit is enabled.
- 1277 -
Parameter High-speed skip signals

1S1 HDI0
1S2 HDI1
1S3 HDI2
1S4 HDI3
NOTE
Alarm and message

PS0373 ILLEGAL HIGH-SPEED SKIP In the skip commands (G31, G31P1 to G31P4) and dwell
SIGNAL SELECTED commands (G04, G04Q1 to G04Q4), the same high-speed
signal is selected in different paths.
Note
NOTE
Notes on using high speed skip

- Overview
Note that the contact state during a skip is different from that of Series 0i in the high speed skip signal of
Series 0i-D.
Series 0i-D :
The skip signal is assumed to be input when an open contact is closed.
Series 0i-C :
The skip signal is assumed to be input when an closed contact is opened.
- Detail
The difference in the specification of the high speed skip signal between Series 0i-D and Series 0i-C is as
follows.
• For Series 0i-D
The high-speed skip signal is assumed to be “1” when the input voltage is at a low level and
assumed to be “0” at a high level. That is, the skip signal is assumed to be “1” when a contact is
closed.
Therefore the skip signal is input when an open contact is closed.
• For Series 0i-C
The high-speed skip signal is assumed to be “0” when the input voltage is at a low level and
assumed to be “1” at a high level. That is, the skip signal is assumed to be “1” when a contact is
opened.
Therefore the skip signal is input when a closed contact is opened.
When the wiring designed for 0i-C is applied to 0i-D, the modification of wiring is not necessary by
setting the following parameter.
Depending on the detector to be used, the settings on the detector are used instead of parameter
settings to switch between contact A and contact B of for output signals. For details, see the
manual of the detector.
- 1278 -
- Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6200 SRE

#6 SRE When a high-speed skip signal or high-speed measurement position arrival signal is used:
0: The signal is assumed to be input on the rising edge (contact open → close).
1: The signal is assumed to be input on the falling edge (contact close → open).
- Signal
High-speed skip status signal HDO0 to HDO3 <Fn122.0 to Fn122.3>
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn122 HDO3 HDO2 HDO1 HDO0

[Function] This signal informs the PMC of the input status of the high-speed skip signal.
[Output cond.] 1: When the contact of the high-speed skip signal is closed. (The input voltage is at a
low level.)
0: When the contact of the high-speed skip signal is open. (The input voltage is at a
high level.)
15.3.3 Multi-step Skip

Overview
The multi-step skip function stores the coordinate values when skip signals (four signals) are input in the
block where G31P1 to G31P4 are specified, and skips the remaining movement. In the block where Q1 to
Q4 are specified after G04, dwell can be skipped when skip signals (four signals) are input.
A skip signal from equipment such as a fixed-dimension size measuring instrument can be used to skip
programs being executed.
In plunge grinding, for example, a series of operations from rough machining to spark-out can be
performed automatically by applying a skip signal each time rough machining, semi-fine machining, fine-
machining, or spark-out operation is completed.
NOTE
Multi-step skip function is optional function.
Signal
Skip signals SKIPP<Gn006.6> SKIP<X004.7> SKIP2<X004.2> SKIP3<X004.3>
SKIP4<X004.4> SKIP5<X004.5> SKIP6<X004.6> SKIP7<X004.0> SKIP8<X004.1>
[Function] These signals terminate skip cutting. That is, the position where a skip signal turns to "1"
in a command program block containing G31P1 (or G31), G31P2, or G31P3, G31P4 is
stored in a custom macro variable, and the move command of the block is terminated at
the same time. Furthermore, in a block containing G04, G04Q1, G04Q2, G04Q3 or
G04Q4, the dwell command of the block is terminated.
In either case, until all other commands (such as miscellaneous functions) of the block are
completed, machining never proceeds to the next block.
Parameters Nos. 6202 to 6205 can be used to select which skip signals are enabled.
Since a one-to-one relationship is not required, one skip signal can be enabled for
multiple commands or multiple skip signals can be enabled for one command.
- 1279 -
[Operation] When a skip signal turns to "1", the control unit functions as described below.
- When a block contains a G code from (G31, G31P1 to P4) for skip cutting, and the
skip signal is made applicable by parameter setting to the command, the control unit
reads and stores the current position of the specified axis at that time. The control
unit stops the axis, then cancels the remaining distance that the axis was supposed to
be moved in that block.
- When a block contains a G04, or G04Q1 to Q4 code for dwell, and the skip signal is
made applicable by parameter setting to the command, the control unit stops dwell
operation, and cancels any remaining dwell time.
NOTE
1 The skip signal width requires at least 10 msec.
2 The delay or variation on the CNC side (excluding the PMC side) in
detecting the skip signal is 0 to 2 msec. Therefore, the
measurement error is the sum of 2 msec and the delay or variation
(including the delay or variation of the receiver) of the skip signal
on the PMC side, multiplied by the feedrate.
3 The delay or variation until feed stops after detection of the skip
signal is 0 to 8 msec. To calculate the overshoot, further consider
delay in acceleration/deceleration, delay in servo, delay on the
PMC side.
4 The G codes for skip cutting (G31P1, G31P2, G31P3, and G31P4)
are the same except for their correspondence with skip signals.
G31 and G31P1 are equivalent.
5 The skip signal is not monitored for a rising edge, but for its state.
So, if a skip signal continues to be "1", a skip condition is assumed
to be satisfied immediately when the next skip cutting or dwell
operation is specified.
6 Address X004 can be allocated optionally to the X addresses set in
parameter No.3012 and parameter No.3019 when XSG (bit 2 of
parameter No.3008) is 1.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn006 SKIPP
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X004 ESKIP -MIT2 +MIT2 -MIT1 +MIT1 XAE2 XAE1
SKIP (T series)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#2 #2 #2
X013 #2 ESKIP XAE2 XAE1
SKIP (T series)
#2 #2 #2
- 1280 -
WARNING
1 SKIP2 to SKIP8 are at the same addresses as axis-direction-specific manual
feed interlock signals +MIT1, -MIT1, +MIT2, and -MIT2 (tool compensation
measurement value direct input B), skip signal ESKIP (PMC axis control), and
measurement position arrival signals XAE1 and XAE2 (automatic tool
compensation). Be careful when using both. (T series)
2 SKIP2 and SKIP6 to SKIP8 are at the same addresses as skip signal ESKIP
(axis control by PMC) and measurement position arrival signal XAE1, XAE2, and
XAE3 (tool length automatic measurement). Be careful when using both. (M
series)
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3008 XSG

NOTE

NOTE
When this parameter was set to 1, parameters No. 3012 and No.
3019 must be set. If parameters No. 3012 and No. 3019 are not
set, the skip to X0 signal, PMC axis control skip signal,
measurement position arrival signal, axis-direction-specific manual
feed interlock signal, and tool compensation write signal are
assigned to X0000.
NOTE

- 1281 -
NOTE
set to 1.
X0 to X127, X200 to X327
3019
assigned
NOTE

NOTE
set to 1.
X0 to X127, X200 to X327
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6200 SKF SLS SK0 GSK


0: Invalid.
1: Valid.
#5 SLS
0: The multi-step skip function does not use high-speed skip signals while skip signals
are input. (The conventional skip signal is used.)
1: The multi-step skip function uses high-speed skip signals while skip signals are
input.
- 1282 -
NOTE
Skip signals (SKIP, SKIP to SKIP4) are enabled regardless of this
parameter. These signals can be disabled by setting the parameter
IGX (No. 6201#4).
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6201 SPE IGX SEB

#1 SEB If the skip function is used, the positional deviation and the number of accumulated
pulses due to acceleration/deceleration at the time when the skip signal is turned on are:
0: Not considered.
1: Considered for compensation.
The position where the skip signal is input is found by considering the positional
deviation and the number of accumulated pulses due to actual acceleration/deceleration at
the time when the skip signal is turned on.
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

IGX GSK SPE Skip Skip Multi-step skip
Parameter (No.6201 (No.6200 (No.6201 signal signal signal
#4) #0) #7) SKIPP SKIP SKIP2-SKIP8
Setting
- 1283 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6202 1S8 1S7 1S6 1S5 1S4 1S3 1S2 1S1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6203 2S8 2S7 2S6 2S5 2S4 2S3 2S2 2S1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6204 3S8 3S7 3S6 3S5 3S4 3S3 3S2 3S1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6205 4S8 4S7 4S6 4S5 4S4 4S3 4S2 4S1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6206 DS8 DS7 DS6 DS5 DS4 DS3 DS2 DS1
[Input type]Parameter input

1S1to1S8, 2S1to2S8, 3S1to3S8, 4S1to4S8, DS1toDS8

Specify which skip signal is enabled when the skip command (G31, or G31P1 to G31P4)
and the dwell command (G04, G04Q1 to G04Q4) are issued with the multi-step skip
function.
The following table shows the correspondence between the bits, input signals, and
commands.
The setting of the bits have the following meaning :
0: The skip signal corresponding to a bit is invalid.
1: The skip signal corresponding to a bit is enabled.
Multi-step skip function
Command G31
Input G31P1 G31P2 G31P3 G31P4 G04
signal G04Q1 G04Q2 G04Q3 G04Q4
SKIP/HDI0 1S1 2S1 3S1 4S1 DS1
SKIP2/HDI1 1S2 2S2 3S2 4S2 DS2
SKIP5 1S5 2S5 3S5 4S5 DS5
NOTE
HDI0 to HDI3 are high-speed skip signals.
The same signal must not be specified in different paths at the
same time.
When bit 0 (GSK) of parameter No. 6200 is 1, the command to be skipped by the SKIPP
signal can be selected by setting the following parameters.
Commands skipped by SKIPP signal <G006#6>

Parameter Command skipped
When bit 0 (1S1) of parameter No. 6202 is set to 1 G31P1, G04Q1
When bit 6 (DS1) of parameter No. 6206 is set to 1 G04, G04Q1, G04Q2, G04Q3, G04Q4
- 1284 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6207 SFN

NOTE
parameter No. 6207.

Alarm and message

PS0035 CAN NOT COMMANDED G31 - G31 cannot be specified. This alarm is generated when a G
code (such as for cutter or tool-nose radius compensation)
of group 07 is not canceled.
command (G31P98 or P99). Specify the torque limit skip in
the PMC window or the like. Or, specify the torque limit
PS0370 G31P/G04Q ERROR The specified address P value for G31 is out of range. The
address P range is 1 to 4 in a multistage skip function.
The specified address Q value for G04 is out of range. The
address Q range is 1 to 4 in a multistage skip function.
Or, P1-4 for G31, or Q1-4 for G04 was commanded without a
multistage skip function option.
PS0373 ILLEGAL HIGH-SPEED SKIP In the skip commands (G31, G31P1 to G31P4) and dwell
SIGNAL SELECTED commands (G04, G04Q1 to G04Q4), the same high-speed
signal is selected in different paths.
- 1285 -
Note
NOTE
15.3.4 Torque Limit Skip Function

Overview
When the movement command following G31 P99 (or G31 P98) is executed with the servo motor torque
limit*1 overridden, cutting feed similar to linear interpolation (G01) can be performed. When the servo
motor torque reaches the torque limit (overridden servo motor torque limit) by pushing or the skip signal
(including the high-speed skip signal) is input during the movement, the remaining movement commands
are canceled and then the next block is executed. (The operation that executes the next block by canceling
the remaining movement command is called skip operation later.)
The servo motor torque limit can be overridden by:
(1) Executing the torque limit override command for the PMC window.
*1
: The servo motor torque limit is automatically set according to the settings of the motor model.
Signal
Torque limit reached signals TRQL1 to TRQL5 <Fn114.0 to Fn114.4>
[Function] Indicates that the torque limit has been reached.
[Output cond.] Set to "1" when:
- The torque limit has been reached.
Set to "0" when:
- The torque limit has not been reached.
Indicates the signal for each axis. The value at the end of a signal name indicates the
number of each control axis.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn114 TRQL5 TRQL4 TRQL3 TRQL2 TRQL1
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1803 TQA TQI

#0 TQI Within a torque limit, an in-position check is:

0: Made.
1: Not made.
#1 TQA Within a torque limit, an excessive stop-time/move-time error is:

0: Checked.
1: Not checked.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3008 XSG

- 1286 -
NOTE

NOTE
When this parameter is set to 1, set parameters No. 3012 and No.
3019. If parameter No. 3012 and No. 3019 are not set, the skip
signal, the PMC axis control skip signal, and the measurement
position arrival signal are assigned to X0000.
NOTE

NOTE
set to 1.
X0 to X127, X200 to X327
3019
assigned
NOTE

- 1287 -
NOTE
set to 1.
X0 to X127, X200 to X327
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6200 SKF HSS SK0 GSK


0: Invalid.
1: Valid.
#4 HSS
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6201 SPE IGX TSE

#2 TSE When the torque limit skip function (G31 P99/98) is used, the skip position held in a
system variable (#5061 to #5068) is:
0: Position that is offset considering the delay (positional deviation) incurred by the
servo system.
1: Position that does not reflect the delay incurred by the servo system.
- 1288 -
Position during skip operation
Current position of CNC
Machine position Error amount
Origin of the coordinate system Stop point
Position in consideration of delay
Position without consideration of delay
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.

IGX GSK SPE Skip Multi-step skip
Skip signal
Parameter (No.6201 (No.6200 (No.6201 signal signal
SKIP
#4) #0) #7) SKIPP SKIP2-SKIP8
Setting
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6207 SFN SFP

#1 SFP The feedrate used when the skip function (G31) is being executed is:
1: Feedrate set in parameter No. 6281.
NOTE
- 1289 -
NOTE
parameter No. 6207.
6281 Feedrate for the skip function (G31)

This parameter sets a feedrate for the skip function (G31). This parameter is valid when
bit 1 (SFP) of parameter No. 6207 is set to 1.
NOTE
description of parameter No. 6282 to No. 6285.

6221 Torque limit dead zone time for a torque limit skip command

[Unit of data] msec
The torque limit skip arrival signal is ignored for a set period of time.
If G31P98 is specified, skip operation is not performed for a set period of time after the
torque limit skip arrival signal is set to 1.
If G31P99 is specified, skip operation is not performed for a set period of time after the
torque limit skip arrival signal is set to 1.
- 1290 -
However, if a skip signal is input, skip operation is performed, regardless of the period of
time set in this parameter.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6286 TQO

#0 TQO The torque limit override function is:

0: Disabled. (Override of 100%)
1: Enabled.
NOTE
Before the torque limit skip function can be used, this parameter
must be set to 1.
6287 Positional deviation limit in torque limit skip

[Unit of data] Detection unit
This parameter sets a positional deviation limit for each axis imposed when torque limit
skip is specified. When the actual positional deviation exceeds the positional deviation
limit, the alarm (SV0004) is issued and an immediate stop takes place.
Alarm and message

PS0035 CAN NOT COMMANDED G31 - G31 cannot be specified. This alarm is generated when a G code
(such as for cutter or tool-nose radius compensation) of group 07
is not canceled.
- A torque limit skip was not specified in a torque limit skip command
(G31P98 or P99). Specify a torque limit override in the PMC
window.
PS0369 G31 FORMAT ERROR No axis is specified or tow or more axes are specified in the torque
limit switch instruction (G31P98/P99).
SV0004 EXCESS ERROR (G31) The amount of positional deviation during torque limit skip command
operation exceeded the limit value of the parameter No.6287.
Note
NOTE
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64304EN) Torque limit skip
- 1291 -
15.4 COMPENSATION VALUE INPUT

T
15.4.1 Input of tool offset value measured (T Series)

Overview
This is a function of setting an offset value by key-inputting a workpiece diameter manually cut and
measured from the MDI keyboard. First the workpiece is cut in the longitudinal or cross direction
manually. When the position record signal is turned “1” (prepare a button on the machine operator’s
panel) on completion of the cutting, the workpiece coordinate value of X axis(X axis of the basic three
axes) and Z axis(Z axis of the basic three axes) at that time is recorded in the CNC. Then, withdraw the
tool, stop the spindle, and measure the diameter if the cutting was on the longitudinal direction or measure
the distance from the standard face if the cutting was on the facing. (The reference face is made as Z = 0.)
When the measured value is entered on the offset value display screen, NC inputs the difference between
the input measured value and the coordinate value recorded in NC, as the offset value of the offset
number. If you release the tool without moving the tool in the axis along which an offset value is entered
but moves the tool along the other axis, an offset value can be set without using the position record signal.
The workpiece coordinate system can be shifted using the technique of directly inputting the measured
value for offset. This technique is used when the coordinate system planned in the program does not
match with the coordinate system actually set. The procedures are the same as those for direct input for
offset, except a difference of using the standard tool on the work shift screen.
Signal
Position record signal PRC <G040.6>
[Function] This signal is prepared for the function of input of offset value measured.
It is used to store in the control unit the data on the positions of the tool for tentative
cutting. After measuring a dimension of the workpiece, input the measured value by the
specified manual operation. The difference is then stored as the specified tool
compensation value.
[Operation] The control unit stores the current position along X and Z axes when the signal turns to
“1”.
CAUTION
To use this signal, set parameter PRC (No.5005#2) to 1.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn040 PRC
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
PRC
5005

- 1292 -
#2 PRC Direct input of tool offset value and workpiece coordinate-system shift value.
0: Not use a PRC signal
1: Uses a PRC signal
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64304EN) Setting and displaying data
15.4.2 Input of Tool Offset Value Measured B (T Series)

Overview
When the touch sensor is provided, the tool offset value can be
automatically settable in the tool offset memory, by moving the tool to
make contact with the touch sensor during manual operation. The
workpiece coordinate system shift amount can also be automatically set.
Explanation
- Touch sensor
Either of the following two cases may be selected depending on parameter setting.
1) If TS1 (bit 3 of parameter No. 5004) is 0
The touch sensor has two direction–specific contact faces for each axis, thus outputting four signals
(+MIT1, +MIT2, –MIT1, and –MIT2) when contact is detected.
2) If TS1 (bit 3 of parameter No. 5004) is 1
A touch sensor based on one contact input outputs one signal (+MIT1) when the one–contact input
detects contact. So, which of directions of each axis is involved is automatically determined, and
feeding in the corresponding axis direction is disabled.
X axis －contact face
(-MIT1)
Z axis＋contact face Z axis －contact face

(+MIT2) (-MIT2)
+X
X axis ＋contact face

+Z (+MIT1)
Touch Sensor
- Setting tool offset value

Determine a specific point on the machine tool as the measuring reference position. In advance, set the
distance from this point to the measuring position (contact face of the touch sensor) as a reference value,
using parameter No. 5015 to 5018. Select the tool whose offset value is to be measured, and bring it to
touch the sensor, receiving a contact detection signal (tool compensation value write signal). The
mechanical coordinate value is the distance from the tool nose position of the measuring tool at the
mechanical reference (home) position to the measuring position; set the difference between this value and
the reference value (parameter setting) into the tool offset value memory as the tool geometry offset value.
The corresponding tool wear offset value becomes 0.
(Tool offset value to be set) =
(Mechanical coordinate value when tool compensation value write signal has become “1”) –
(Reference value (parameter value) corresponding to the tool compensation value write signal)
The tool offset value to be set differs according to the method of determining the measuring reference
position.
- 1293 -
- If touch sensor contact detection is based on a one-contact input

If touch sensor contact detection is based on a one–contact input (the TS1 parameter (bit 3 of parameter
No. 5004) is 1), when a contact detected signal (tool compensation amount write signal +MIT1) is
received from the touch sensor, which of the two directions of each axis is involved is automatically
determined according to several pulses stored as a result of the axis movement that was made before the
signal reception. So the number of interpolation cycles related to the stored pulses must previously be set
in parameter No. 5021.Once which of the two directions of each axis is involved is automatically
determined, the corresponding axis direction is subjected to axis interlock to stop feeding, and the
obtained tool compensation amount is stored in tool compensation memory. If the directions of stored
pulses are not unified, or no pulse has been stored, for example, because the servo power has been shut
off (servo off) or no axis movement occurred, an alarm (PS5195) is issued. A PS alarm is issued also if
the tool moves along two axes (X–axis and Z–axis) simultaneously; move the tool along one axis at a
time. If a PS alarm is issued, no tool compensation amount will be set up, resulting in the four directions
(two axes) being subjected to interlock.
NOTE
1 Pulse storage for automatic decision is carried out in the manual mode while the
GOSQM <G039.7> (tool compensation amount write mode select) signal is 1.
Stored pulses are lost if:
a. The manual mode is exited,
b. The GOSQM <G039.7> (tool compensation amount write mode select) signal
becomes 0,
c. A contact detected signal is received from the touch sensor, resulting in a tool
compensation amount being set or an alarm (PS5195) being issued,
d. The servo power becomes off (resulting in the stored pulses for the related
axis being lost), or
e. Axis movement occurs (resulting in the stored pulses for the other axis being
lost).
2 Axis interlock that has occurred for the axis direction identified by
parameter–based automatic decision and two–axis, four–direction interlock that
has occurred because of a PS alarm being issued are canceled when the
manual mode is exited or the GOSQM <G039.7> (tool compensation mount
write mode select) signal becomes 0.
A reset does not cancel interlock.
- Determination of the axis movement direction in four-contact input

Set bit 3 (TS1) of parameter No. 5004 to 0 and bit 4 (TSD) of parameter No. 5009 to 1 to enable the
input signals from the touch sensor and the movement direction of an axis to be monitored during
measurement in the tool compensation write mode.
When the measurement is determined to be invalid, the moving axis is interlocked and an alarm
(PS5195) occurs.
• Conditions under which measurement is determined to be invalid

The movement direction of an axis and the tool compensation write signals (+MIT1, +MIT2, -MIT1,
-MIT2) are monitored in the tool compensation write mode (GOQSM<G039.7>=1). In the
following case, the operation is determined to be invalid, the axis is interlocked, and an alarm
(PS5195) occurs.
(1) A tool compensation write signal whose direction did not match the axis was input during
measurement.
(2) Any of the tool compensation write signals was input while the X- and Z-axes moved together.
- 1294 -
(3) Any of the tool compensation write signals was input without the axis being moved.
(4) The movement direction of the axis was not constant when the movement direction of the axis was
determined (*1).
(*1) When the axis moves in one direction of one axis by the compensation cycle count set in parameter
No. 5021, the axis is assumed to move in the direction.
X axis - contact face
( -MIT1 )
Z axis + contact Z axis - contact face

face ( -MIT2 )
( +MIT2 )
Valid operation
+x X axis + contact face
( +MIT1 )
+z
Invalid operation (1) Invalid operation (2)
Examples of operations determined to be invalid
• Interlock applied when measurement is invalid

When measurement is determined to be invalid, movement only in the direction opposite to the
previous movement direction is allowed. That is, the directions other than the direction opposite to
the previous movement direction are interlocked.
Examples of interlock
(1) When a tool compensation write signal other than Z-axis/contact surface (-MIT2) is input
during movement in the minus direction of the Z-axis, the minus direction of the Z-axis and the
plus and minus directions of the X-axis are interlocked.
(2) When any of tool compensation write signals is input during movement in the plus direction of
the X-axis and the minus direction of the Z-axis, the plus directions of the X-axis and the minus
direction of the Z-axis are interlocked.
(3) When any of tool compensation write signals is input without axis movement, the four
directions of the two axes are interlocked.
+X
-Z
+Z
Z axis - contact face

( -MIT2 )
: Movable
-X
+x
: Interlock
(Unmovable)
+z
Interlock direction in example (1)
- 1295 -
The release interlock applied because measurement is determined to be invalid, keep the tool away from
the touch sensor (+MIT1, +MIT2, -MIT1, -MIT2 = 0) and reset the CNC. If the tool is not kept away
from the touch sensor, resetting the CNC does not release interlock.
In conditions (3) and (4) in which measurement is determined to be invalid, no axis can be moved
because the four directions of the two axes are interlocked. In such a case, cancel the tool compensation
write mode and reset the CNC to release the interlock. To cancel the tool compensation write mode, set
the tool compensation write mode signal is to 0 or select the MDI mode, MEM mode, or EDIT mode.
A reset releases interlock and an alarm. Even if another tool compensation write signal (+MIT1, +MIT2,
-MIT1, or -MIT2) is input before the interlock or alarm is released, the signal is ignored.
Example 1
The difference between the reference tool nose tip position and the measuring tool nose tip position can
be set as the tool offset value. Define the reference tool nose tip position at the mechanical reference
position (machine zero position) as the measuring reference position, then set the distances Xp, Zp, Xm,
Zm, from the measuring reference position to the contact faces of the sensor in parameters.
(0,0) Measuring reference

OFSx position (reference tool
Xm nose position at the
mechanical reference
Xt
X axis –contact face (0,0) position)
Xp
Measuring tool nose

Z axis –contact face position at the
OFSz mechanical reference
Zt position
+X Zm
+Z Zp
Xp: Distance from the measuring reference position to X-axis (+) contact face (parameter No.5015)
Xm: Distance from the measuring reference position to X-axis (–) contact face (parameter No.5016)
Zp: Distance from the measuring reference position to Z-axis (+) contact face (parameter No.5017)
Zm: Distance from the measuring reference position to Z-axis (–) contact face (parameter No.5018)
Xt: X-axis direction moving distance of the measuring tool up to the contact face of sensor
(X-axis machine coordinate value)
Zt: Z-axis direction moving distance of the measuring tool up to the contact face of sensor
(Z-axis machine coordinate value)
(when Xt and Zt touch the X-axis (–) contact face and Z-axis (–) contact face in the above figure)
OFSx: Tool offset value to be set (X-axis): OFSx = Xt - Xm
OFSz: Tool offset value to be set (Z-axis): OFSz = Zt - Zm
When the reference tool nose tip position is set as the measuring reference position
Example 2
The measuring reference point may be an imaginary point (imaginary zero point), as shown in the figure
below. The difference between the imaginary zero point and the measuring tool nose tip position at the
mechanical reference point can be set as the tool offset value of the measuring tool, by setting the
distances from the imaginary zero point to the respective contact faces in parameters.
- 1296 -
Machine zero
Zt point
OFSZ
Xt (0,0)
+X Measuring tool nose

position at the mechanical
reference position
+Z
Zm Xm OFSx
Zp
Xp
Measuring reference position

(Imaginary zero point)
When the imaginary zero position is set as the measuring reference position
- Setting the workpiece coordinate system shift amount

The workpiece coordinate system shift amount for the Z-axis can be set as follows: Bring the tool to
touch the workpiece end face. Subtract the tool geometry offset value of the tool (the value shifted in the
coordinate system by the tool geometry offset) from the machine coordinate value (the distance from the
measuring tool nose tip position at the mechanical reference position (machine zero point) to the
workpiece end face).The result is set as the workpiece coordinate system shift value.
(Z axis workpiece coordinate system shift amount to be set(EXOFSz) )=
(Z axis tool geometry offset value of the corresponding tool (OFSz)) –
(Z axis machine coordinate value(Zt))
Using the above methods, the workpiece coordinate system is set with the workpiece end face (the contact
point of the sensor) specified as the programmed zero point of the workpiece coordinate system of the
Z-axis.
Machine
Zt zero point
+X
+Z OFSz
-EXOFSz (0,0) Measuring tool nose
position at the
Workpiece coordinate OFSx mechanical machine
System zero point position
(programmed zero point)
EXOFSz : Workpiece coordinate system shift amount to be set

OFSz : Tool geometry offset value
Zt : Mechanical coordinate value (Distance to the workpiece end face)
Setting of workpiece coordinate system shift amount
To deviate the programmed zero point of the workpiece coordinate system from the workpiece end face,
such as by adding a cutting allowance, use the incremental input of the workpiece coordinate system shift
amount in MDI operation. By setting the distance from the programmed zero point to the workpiece end
face with a sign, the numeric value input is added to the preset amount.
- 1297 -
+X
EXOFSz(NEW)
Cutting allowance
W EXOFSz(OLD)
Workpiece coordinate system

zero point
(programmed zero point)
+Z
Imaginary zero point
EXOFSz(OLD) : Workpiece coordinate system shift amount being set by the function of input
of tool offset value measured B
W : Cutting allowance (incremental input value)
EXOFSz(NEW) : Workpiece coordinate system shift amount after adding the cutting allowance
Setting of cutting allowance
- Basic procedure to set tool offset value

(1) Execute manual reference position return.
By executing manual reference position return, a machine coordinate system is established.
The tool offset value is computed on the machine coordinate system.
(2) Select manual handle mode or manual continuous feed mode and set the tool compensation value
write mode select signal GOQSM to “1”. The display is automatically changed to the tool offset
screen (geometry), and the “OFST” indicator starts blinking in the status indication area at the
bottom of the screen, which indicates that the tool compensation value writing mode is ready.
NOTE
After this, it is impossible to switch the S2TLS (spindle measurement selection)
signal until the GOQSM (offset write mode) signal becomes 0.
(3) Select a tool to be measured.

(4) When the cursor does not coincide with the tool offset number desired to be set, move the cursor to
the desired offset number using the page key and cursor key.
The cursor can also be coincided with the tool offset number desired to be set automatically by the
tool offset number input signals (when parameter QNI(No.5005#5)=1).
In this case, the position of the cursor cannot be changed on the tool compensation screen using page
keys or cursor keys.
(5) Near the tool to the sensor by manual operation.
(6) Place the tool edge to a contacting surface of the sensor by manual handle feed.
Bring the tool edge in contact with the sensor. This causes the tool compensation value writing
signals to input to be CNC.
The following tool compensation amount write signals are set up according to the setting of the TS1
parameter (bit 3 of No. 5004).
When the parameter is 0: +MIT1, –MIT1, +MIT2, –MIT2
When the parameter is 1: +MIT1 only
The tool compensation value writing signal is set to “1”, and the :
i) The axis is interlocked in this direction and its feed is stopped.
ii) The tool offset value extracted by the tool offset memory (tool geometry offset value) which
corresponds to the offset number shown by the cursor is set up.
(7) For both X-axis and Z-axis, their offset values are set by operations (5) and (6).
(8) Repeat operations (3) to (7) for all necessary tools.
(9) Set the tool compensation value writing mode signal GOQSM to “0”.
The writing mode is canceled and the blinking “OFST” indicator light goes off.
- 1298 -
- Basic procedure to set workpiece coordinate shift value

(1) Set the tool geometry offset values of each tool in advance.
(2) Execute manual reference position return.
By executing manual reference position return, the machine coordinate system is established.
The workpiece coordinate system shift amount is computed based on the machine coordinate system
of the tool.
(3) Set the workpiece coordinate system shift amount writing mode select signal WOQSM to “1”.
The display automatically switches to the workpiece shifting screen, the “WFST” indicator starts
blinking at the status indicator area in the bottom of the screen, which indicates that the workpiece
coordinate system shift amount writing mode is ready.
NOTE
After this, it is impossible to switch the S2TLS (spindle measurement selection)
signal until the WOQSM (offset write mode) signal becomes 0.
(4) Select a tool to be measured.

(5) Check tool offset numbers.
The tool offset number corresponding to the tool required for measurement, shall be set in the
parameter (No.5020) in advance.
The tool offset number can also be set automatically by setting the tool offset number input signal
(with parameter QNI(No.5005#5)=1).
(6) Manually approach the tool to an end face of the workpiece.
(7) Place the tool edge to the end face (sensor) of the workpiece using manual handle feed.
When the tool edge contacts the end face of the workpiece, input the workpiece coordinate system
shift amount signal WOSET.
The workpiece coordinate system shift amount on the Z–axis is automatically set.
(8) Release the tool.
(9) Set the workpiece coordinate system shift amount write mode select signal WOQSM to “0”.
The writing mode is canceled and the blinking “WSFT” indicator light goes off.
Limitation
This function cannot be used with the following functions.
• Composite control (T series (2-path control))
• Mirror image for double turret (T series)
Signal
Tool offset write mode select signal GOQSM<Gn039.7>
[Function] Select the mode for writing tool compensation
[Operation] When this signal is turned “1” in a manual operation mode, the mode for writing tool
compensation is selected. The control unit then automatically switches the screen on the
display to the tool geometry compensation screen and blinks the “OFST” status display at
the bottom of the screen to notify that the mode has been changed to the mode for writing
tool compensation.
Tool offset write signal

(Path 1) +MIT1#1, +MIT2#1<X004.2, 4> -MIT1#1, -MIT2#1<X004.3, 5>
(Path 2) +MIT1#2, +MIT2#2<X013.2, 4>-MIT1#2, -MIT2#2<X013.3, 5>
- 1299 -
[Function] Each of these signals inhibits the tool from being fed along the corresponding axis during
manual operation. When signal GOQSM for selecting the mode for writing tool
compensation is set to “1”, the manual feed is inhibited and also the tool geometry
compensation along the axis is automatically calculated and the result is set in tool
compensation memory.
[Operation] When these signals are turned “1” during tool offset write mode, the control unit operates
as follows:
- Inhibits tools from being fed along the corresponding axis during manual operation.
If bit 3 (TS1) of parameter No.5004 is set to 0
+MIT1 : Inhibits the tool from being manually fed in the positive direction along
the X-axis.
–MIT1 : Inhibits the tool from being manually fed in the negative direction along
the X-axis.
the Z-axis.
the Z-axis.
+MIT1 : Automatic decision causes the related two directions of each axis to be
subjected to interlock.
–MIT1 : Not used
+MIT2 : Not used
–MIT2 : Not used
- When signal GOQSM for selecting the mode for writing tool compensation is turned
“1”, the manual feed interlock signal also automatically calculates the tool geometry
compensation for the tool compensation number pointed to by the cursor and sets
the result in tool compensation memory.
NOTE
1 This signal is used as the manual feed interlock signal in each axis
direction.
2 This signal is valid only when the bit 0 (GSC) of parameter No.
5009 is 0.
3 In case of bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No.3008=1, the address
assigned by parameter No.3019 is used
Tool offset write signal

+MIT1 to +MIT2 <Gn132.0 to 1>, -MIT1 to -MIT2 <Gn134.0 to 1>
[Function] Each of these signals inhibits the tool from being fed along the corresponding axis during
manual operation. When signal GOQSM for selecting the mode for writing tool
compensation is set to “1”, the manual feed is inhibited and also the tool geometry
compensation along the axis is automatically calculated and the result is set in tool
compensation memory.
[Operation] When these signals are turned “1”, the control unit operates as follows:
- Inhibits tools from being fed along the corresponding axis during manual operation.
When bit 3 (TS1) of parameter No. 5004 is 0 and the X-axis is assumed to be the
first axis and the Z-axis to be the second axis
the X-axis.
the X-axis.
the Z-axis.
- 1300 -
the Z-axis.
+MIT1 : Automatic decision causes the related two directions of each axis to be
subjected to interlock.
–MIT1 : Not used
+MIT2 : Not used
–MIT2 : Not used
- When signal GOQSM for selecting the mode for writing tool compensation is turned
“1”, the manual feed interlock signal also automatically calculates the tool geometry
compensation for the tool compensation number pointed to by the cursor and sets
the result in tool compensation memory.
NOTE
This signal is valid only when the bit 0 (GSC) of parameter No.
5009 is 1.
Tool offset number select signals OFN0 to OFN5 <Gn039.0 to 5>

[Function] Select the tool offset number.
[Operation] When the mode for writing tool compensation is selected, the cursor is automatically
positioned on the tool geometry compensation number selected by these signals.
A tool offset number is specified by a 6–bit binary number. Numbers 0 to 63 correspond
to the compensation number 1 to 64.
NOTE
This signal is available only when parameter QNI (No.5005#5) =1.
Workpiece coordinate system shift value write mode select signal

WOQSM<Gn039.6>
[Function] Select the mode for writing the shift amount for the workpiece coordinate system.
[Operation] When this signal is turned to “1” in a manual operation mode, the mode for writing the
shift amount for the workpiece coordinate system is selected. The control unit then
automatically switches the screen displayed to the WORK SHIFT screen and blinks the
“OFST” status display at the bottom of the screen to notify that the mode has been
changed to the mode for writing the shift amount for the workpiece coordinate system.
However, this is not performed when the mode for writing tool compensation values is
selected.
Workpiece coordinate system shift value write signal WOSET<Gn040.7>

[Function] Automatically calculates and sets the shift amount for the workpiece coordinate system.
[Operation] When this signal turns to “1” in the mode for writing the shift amount for the workpiece
coordinate system, it triggers the automatic calculation and setting of the shift amount for
the workpiece coordinate system.
- 1301 -
Signal address
(Path 1)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#1 #1 #1 #1
X004 -MIT2 +MIT2 -MIT1 +MIT1
#1 #1 #1 #1
(Path 2)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#2 #2 #2 #2
X013 -MIT2 +MIT2 -MIT1 +MIT1
#2 #2 #2 #2
WARNING
Since the same addresses are used for both +MIT1, MIT1,+MIT2, –MIT2 and
skip signals SKIP2 to SKIP5 (multi–step skip), be careful when using these two
signal types.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn039 GOQSM WOQSM OFN5 OFN4 OFN3 OFN2 OFN1 OFN0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn040 WOSET
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn132 +MIT2 +MIT1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn134 -MIT2 -MIT1
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3003 DIT

#3 DIT Interlock for each axis direction

0: Enabled
1: Disabled
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3008 XSG

NOTE
#2 XSG A signal assigned to an X address is

0: Fixed at the address
1: Able to be reassigned to an arbitrary X address
- 1302 -
NOTE
If this parameter is set to 1, parameters No.3012 and No.3019 must
be set. if No.3012,No.3019 is set to 0,skip signal, skip signal for PMC
axis control, and measurement position arrival signal are assigned to
X0000.
3019
assigned
NOTE

Example 1. In case of No.3012=5, No.3019=6

If parameter XSG(No.3008#2) is set to 1, skip signal for PMC axis control , measurement
position arrival signal, tool offset write signal are assigned to X0006. skip signal is
assigned to X0005.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X005 SKIP SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7 (T series)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X006 ESKIP -MIT2 +MIT2 -MIT1 +MIT1 XAE2 XAE1 (T series)
Example 2. In case of No.3012=5, No.3019=5

If parameter XSG(No.3008#2) is set to 1, skip signal for PMC axis control , measurement
position arrival signal, tool offset write signal, skip signal is assigned to X0005.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X005 ESKIP -MIT2 +MIT2 -MIT1 +MIT1 XAE2 XAE1
SKIP (T series)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
NOTE
set to 1.
Depending on the option configuration of the I/O
Link, the actually usable X addresses are:
X0 to X127, X200 to X327
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5004 TS1

- 1303 -
#3 TS1 For touch sensor contact detection with the function for direct input of offset value
measured B:
0: Four-contact input is used.
1: One-contact input is used.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5005 QNI

#5 QNI With the tool length measurement function, a tool compensation number is selected by:
0: Operation through the MDI panel by the operator (selection based on cursor
operation).
1: Signal input from the PMG.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
5009 TSD GSC

NOTE
#0 GSC When the function for direct input of offset value measured B is used, an offset write
input signal is input from:
0: Machine side
1: PMC side
When the interlock function for each axis direction is enabled (when bit 3 (DIT) of
parameter No. 3003 is set to 0), switching can also be made between input from the
machine side and input from PMC side for the interlock function for each axis direction.
#4 TSD In the function for direct input of offset value measured B, the movement direction
determination specifications:
0: Do not apply.
1: Apply.
This parameter is valid when four-contact input is used (bit 3 (TS1) of parameter No.
5004 is set to 0).
5015 Distance to X-axis + contact surface of touch sensor 1 (X1P)
5016 Distance to X-axis - contact surface of touch sensor 1 (X1M)
5017 Distance to Z-axis + contact surface of touch sensor 1 (Z1P)
5018 Distance to Z-axis - contact surface of touch sensor 1 (Z1M)

[Unit of data] mm, inch (machine unit)
- 1304 -
This parameter is related to the function for direct input of offset value measured B.
Set the distance (signed) from a measurement reference position to each contact surface
of a sensor. For a diameter specification axis, set a diameter value.
When arbitrary angular axis control is performed, set the distance in the Cartesian
coordinate system.
○Measurement
reference
position
X1m X-axis - contact surface
↓
X1p
←Z-axis - contact surface

Z-axis
+ contact surface→
+X Z1m
↑
X-axis + contact surface
Z1p
+Z
5020 Tool offset number used with the function for direct input of offset value measured B

Set a tool offset number used with the function for direct input of offset value measured B
(when a workpiece coordinate system shift amount is set). (Set the tool offset number
corresponding to a tool under measurement beforehand.) This parameter is valid when
automatic tool offset number selection is not performed (when bit 5 (QNI) of parameter
No. 5005 is set to 0).
5021 Number of interpolation cycles of pulses stored until the tool is about to touch the touch sensor

[Unit of data] None
When a touch sensor of one-point input or the axis movement direction in four-contact
input is used with the function for direct input of offset value measured B, set the number
of interpolation cycles of pulses stored until the manually operated tool is about to touch
the touch sensor. When 0 is set, the specification of the maximum value 8 is assumed.
NOTE
This parameter is valid when bit 3 (TS1) of parameter No. 5004 or
bit4(TSD) of parameter No.5009 is set to 1.
- 1305 -
Alarm and message

PS5195 DIRECTION CAN NOT BE Measurement is invalid in the tool compensation measurement value direct
JUDGED input B function.
[For 1-contact input]
1. The recorded pulse direction is not constant.
- The machine is at a stop in the offset write mode.
- The servo power is off.
- Pulse directions are diverse.
2. The tool is moving along the two axes (X-axis and Z-axis).
[For the movement direction discrimination specification]
1. The recorded pulse direction is not constant.
- The machine is at a stop in the offset write mode.
- The servo power is off.
- Pulse directions are diverse.
2. The tool is moving along the two axes (X-axis and Z-axis).
3. The direction indicated by the tool compensation write signal does not
match the movement direction of the axis.
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64304EN) Setting and displaying data
15.4.3 Workpiece Origin Offset Measurement Value Direct Input

Overview
Enter the offset value by which the actual measurement value is assumed to be the specified value as the
workpiece origin offset value where the cursor is located by directly inputting the measured deviation,
considered during programming, between the workpiece coordinate system and the actual coordinate
system.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1015 WIC

#6 WIC Workpiece origin offset measurement value direct input is:

0: (M series) Performed without considering the external workpiece origin offset value.
(T series) Valid only in the currently selected workpiece coordinate system.
1: (M series) Performed considering the external workpiece origin offset value.
(T series) Valid in all coordinate systems.
NOTE
In the T series, if this parameter bit is set to 0, workpiece origin
offset measurement value direct input is enabled only in the
currently selected workpiece coordinate system or an external
workpiece coordinate system. If an attempt is made to perform
workpiece origin offset measurement value direct input in a
workpiece coordinate system other than these workpiece
coordinate systems, warning "WRITE PROTECTED" is displayed.
- 1306 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1207
WOL

#0 WOL The calculation method for workpiece origin offset measurement value direct input is as
follows:
0: In a machine that requires that the difference from the reference tool be set as the
tool length compensation amount, the workpiece origin offset is measured and set
with the reference tool mounted on the machine.
(The tool length of the reference tool is assumed to be 0.)
1: In a machine that requires that the tool length itself be set as the tool length
compensation amount, the workpiece origin offset is measured and set considering
the tool length when the tool length compensation for the mounted tool is enabled.
NOTE
The setting of this parameter is valid only when the system used is
the M series and bit 6 (DAL) of parameter No. 3104 is set to 1. If
this parameter is set to 1 in other than the above conditions, the
system operates as if this parameter bit were set to 0.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3104
DAL

#6 DAL Absolute position

NOTE
In T series, whether to exclude a tool offset when displaying the
absolute position is determined by the setting of bit 1 (DAP) of
parameter No. 3129.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
DAP
3129

#1 DAP For absolute position display:

- 1307 -
NOTE
In M series, whether to exclude the tool length offset when
displaying the absolute position is determined according to the
setting of bit 6 (DAL) of parameter No. 3104.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11278 WMC
NOTE

#0 WMC In the "direct input of workpiece origin offset value measured", the workpiece origin
offset value is
0: calculated based on the absolute coordinate value.
Workpiece origin offset value =
Absolute coordinate value before measurement - Measured value
+ Selected workpiece origin offset value
+ External workpiece origin offset value
1: calculated based on the machine coordinate value. (FS0i-C compatible specification)
Workpiece origin offset value = Machine coordinate value - Measured value
Reference item
OPERATOR’S MANUAL (B-64304EN) Workpiece Origin Offset Measurement Value Direct Input
- 1308 -
B-64303EN-1/02 16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION
16 PMC CONTROL FUNCTION

Chapter 16, "PMC CONTROL FUNCTION", consists of the following sections:
16.1 PMC AXIS CONTROL ..................................................................................................................1309

16.2 EXTERNAL DATA INPUT...........................................................................................................1377
16.3 EXTENDED EXTERNAL MACHINE ZERO POINT SHIFT......................................................1390
16.4 EXTERNAL WORKPIECE NUMBER SEARCH.........................................................................1393
16.5 EXTERNAL KEY INPUT..............................................................................................................1395
16.6 ONE TOUCH MACRO CALL.......................................................................................................1400
16.1 PMC AXIS CONTROL
16.1.1 PMC Axis Control

Overview
The PMC can directly control any given axis, independent of the CNC. An axis can be controlled by
signals alone without using an NC program. For example, by specifying an amount of travel, feedrate,
and so forth from the PMC, a movement can be made along an axis independently of other axes operated
under CNC control. This enables the control of turrets, pallets, index tables and other peripheral devices
using any given axes of the CNC.
Whether the CNC or PMC controls an axis is determined by the input signal provided for that particular
axis.
Table 16.1.1 (a) Commands that can be executed by PMC axis control
Rapid traverse
Cutting feed - feed per minute
Cutting feed - feed per revolution
Skip -- feed per minute
Dwell
Reference position return
Continuous feed
1st to 4th reference position return
External pulse synchronization - Position code
External pulse synchronization - 1st to 3rd manual handle
Feedrate control
Torque control
Auxiliary function, Auxiliary function 2, Auxiliary function 3
Selection of the machine coordinate system
Cutting feed - sec/block
Explanation
Under PMC axis control, various types of control are exercised using signals.
To specify operation with the commands (see Table 16.1.1 (a)) that can be executed by PMC axis control,
on the PMC side, four groups of input/output signals are provided for each path: group A, group B, group
C, and group D.
Each of these groups of input/output signals used with PMC axis control serves as the unit of PMC axis
control. Which axis is to be controlled by each group must be set in parameter No. 8010 beforehand.
One group may be able to be assigned to multiple axes so that the same operation can be performed on
the multiple axes. (Supplement 2)
- 1309 -
16.PMC CONTROL FUNCTION B-64303EN-1/02
By specifying multiple groups at the same time, multiple axes can be controlled independently.
(Supplement 3)
PMC CNC
DI / DO
α axis control
Group A command Group A
β axis control
Group B command Group B
γ axis control
Group C command Group C δ axis control
Group D command Group D ε axis control
(Supplement 1) The relationships between groups and axes are set in parameter No. 8010.
(Supplement 2) Multiple axes can be specified as with group C.
(Supplement 3) Group A and group B can be specified independently.
Fig.16.1.1 (a) Concept of PMC axis control
The addresses of the signals are shown in Table 16.1.1 (b) "Allocation of group-by-group signals" below.
Table 16.1.1 (b) Allocation of group-by-group signals

Group-by-group signal Input signal address Output signal address
Group A G142 to G149, G150.5, G150.0,1,6,7 F130 to F132, F142, F129.5.7
Group B G154 to G161, G162.5, G150.0,1,6,7 F133 to F135, F145, F129.5.7
Group C G166 to G173, G174.5, G150.0,1,6,7 F136 to F138, F148, F129.5.7
Group D G178 to G185, G186.5, G150.0,1,6,7 F139 to F141, F151, F129.5.7
The names of input/output signals related to PMC axis control include lowercase letter "g". An example
is "g" of axis control read signal EBUFg (described later). Signal EBUFg is not present, but signals
EBUFA, EBUFB, EBUFC, and EBUFD, in which "g" is replaced with A, B, C, and D, are present
actually. These signals belong to group A, group B, group C, and group D. That is, EBUFg is the
collective name of EBUFA, EBUFB, EBUFC, and EBUFD.
Basic procedure
(1) Set parameter No. 8010 for each axis to specify which group (A, B, C, or D) to select.
To synchronize multiple axes through axis movement in one group, set the same conditions for the
parameter settings (such as the rapid traverse rate, acceleration/deceleration time constant,
diameter/radius, straight line axis/rotation axis) related to the feedrate.
(2) To enable direct PMC axis control, set each control axis selection signal (EAX1 to EAX5), that
corresponds to an axis to be controlled, to 1.
(3) Determine the operation.
The axis control command signals (EC0g to EC6g) specify the type of operation. The axis control
feedrate signals (EIF0g to EIF15g) specify the feedrate. The axis control data signals (EID0g to
EID31g) specify the moving distance and other data.
These signals, together with block stop prohibition signal EMSBKg (described later), determine one
complete operation, which is tantamount to one block executed during CNC-controlled automatic
operation. These signals may be collectively called the axis control block data signals. (Refer to
Table 16.1.1 (c), “List of signals determining data, tantamount to one block for PMC axis control”.)
- 1310 -
Table 16.1.1 (c) List of signals determining data, tantamount to one block for PMC axis control
Generic name Signal name Symbol Data type
Block stop prohibition signal EMSBKg Bit
Axis control block data Axis control command signal EC0g to EC6g Byte
signals Axis control feedrate signal EIF0g to EIF15g Word
Axis control data signal EID0g to EID31g 2-word
(4) When the data governing a complete operation (one block) is determined, reverse the logical state of
the axis control command read signal EBUFg (i.e., from "0" to "1" or vice versa). Note that, for
this to occur, axis control command read completion signal EBSYg must be in the same logical state
as EBUFg.
(5) The CNC is capable of storing axis control functions from the PMC in its buffer so that multiple
operations can be performed in series, under the control of the PMC. This allows the CNC to
accept a new command block from the PMC during the execution of another block if the buffer has
free space.
The Fig. 16.1.1 (b), "Buffering under PMC axis control" illustrates an example in which command
[1] is being executed, commands [2] and [3] are stored in the buffers, and command [4] has been
issued (the axis control block data signal is set).
Setting of the axis

PMC Commands control block data signal CNC's buffers
Block 1 Command [1] [4] [3] Input buffer
Block 2 Command [2]
Block 3 Command [3] [2] Waiting buffer
Block 4 Command [4]
Block 5 Command [5] [1] Executing buffer
: :
Block n
Fig. 16.1.1 (b) Buffering under PMC axis control
When the execution of command [1] is completed:

Command [2] is transferred from the waiting buffer to the executing buffer;
Command [3] is transferred from the input buffer to the waiting buffer;
and
Command [4] is transferred to the input buffer as the command block (axis control block data
signal).
After the reception of command [4] by the input buffer, the PMC can issue command [5] to the CNC (the
axis control block data signal is set).
The timing chart for the command operation is shown below. (Table 16.1.1 (d), "Timing chart of
command operation")
- 1311 -
Command block [1] [2] [3] [4] [5]

(Input)
EBUFg
(Input)
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
Not specifiable
EBSYg
(Output)
Input buffer
[3] [4]
Waiting buffer [2] [3]
Executing buffer [1] [2]

Beginning End of Beginning
of execution execution of execution
Table 16.1.1 (d) Timing chart of command operation
(1), (2), (3), (4), (5) : A new block cannot be issued during these intervals (while EBUFg and EBSYg are
in different logical states). In interval (4), the buffer is in the "full" state.
The status of the CNC buffer can be determined by the exclusive OR of the axis control command read
signal EBUFg, input from the PMC, and axis control command read completion signal EBSYg, output
from the CNC. (Table 16.1.1 (e), "Buffering status in PMC axis control")
Table 16.1.1 (e) Buffering status in PMC axis control

Exclusive OR
EBUFg EBSYg CNC buffer status
(XOR)
0 0 The previous block has already been read into the CNC buffer. The
0
1 1 PMC can issue the next block.
0 1 The previous block has not yet been read completely. It is just being
read or waiting for the CNC buffer to become available. Do not issue
1
1 0 the next block, nor reverse the logical state of EBUFg. Reversing the
EBUFg state invalidates any block that has been already issued.
(5) Repeat steps (3) and (4) until all the blocks have been issued.
When the final block has been issued, set control axis selection signals EAX1 to EAX5 to "0".
Before setting these signals to "0", however, check that the blocks stored in the CNC's input, waiting,
and executing buffers have all been executed. Setting the signals to "0" while a block is being
executed, or while a block remains in any of these buffers, results in the issue of a P/S alarm. This
alarm PS0139 suspends the current block execution and invalidates the blocks stored in the input
and waiting buffers.
To ensure no block is being executed, or that there are no blocks remaining in the input or waiting
buffer, check that control axis selection status signal *EAXSL is set to "0".
For those axes that are always subject to PMC control, such as those controlling turrets, pallets, and
ATCs, ensure that the EAX1 to EAX5 signals are always set to "1". There is no need to set these
signals to "0" after issuing commands from the PMC to the CNC. When all command blocks have
been executed (there are no blocks remaining to be executed), the CNC automatically stops
execution.
- 1312 -
(6) When control axis selection signals EAX1 to EAX5 are set from "1" to "0", control is returned to the
CNC.
Command
Overview of commands
As described in step (3) in the basic procedure, one PMC axis control command block is represented by
the axis control block data signals.
PMC axis control enables the commands indicated in Table 16.1.1 (f), “Command list” to be specified.
In Table 16.1.1 (f), "Command list":

"Command" represents the axis control command signals (EC0g to EC6g).
"Data 1" represents the axis control feedrate signals (EIF0g to EIF15g).
"Data 2" represents the axis control data signals (EID0g to EID31g).
Table 16.1.1 (f) Command list

No. Command Operation Data 1 Data 2 Description
Rapid
Total moving The same operation as “G00” of the CNC
(1) 00h Rapid traverse traverse rate
distance is performed.
(NOTE)
Cutting feed - feed per Cutting Total moving The same operation as “G94 G01” of the
(2) 01h
minute feedrate distance CNC is performed.
Cutting feed - feed per Feedrate per Total moving The same operation as “G95 G01” of the
(3) 02h
revolution revolution distance CNC is performed.
Cutting Total moving The same operation as “G31 G01” of the

(4) 03h Skip - feed per minute
feedrate distance CNC is performed.
The same operation as “G04” of the CNC
(5) 04h Dwell --- Dwell time
is performed.
After a rapid traverse movement is made
in the reference position return direction
Reference position
(6) 05h --- --- set by bit 5 (ZMIx) of parameter No. 1006,
return
the same operation as manual reference
position return of the CNC is performed.
A continuous feed operation is performed
along a controlled axis in a certain
Continuous Feed direction
(7) 06h Continuous feed direction.
feedrate (EID31g only)
The same operation as continuous feed in
the JOG mode of the CNC is performed.
Rapid The same operation as reference position
First reference position
(8) 07h traverse rate --- return from an intermediate position done
return
(NOTE) with “G28” of the CNC is performed.
Second reference
position return
(NOTE) with “G30 P2” of the CNC is performed.
Third reference
position return
(NOTE) with ”G30 P3” of the CNC is performed.
Fourth reference
(11) 0Ah traverse rate --- return from an intermediate position done
position return
(NOTE) with G30 P4” the CNC is performed.
External pulse
Synchronous operation with the position
(12) 0Bh synchronization - Pulse weight ---
coder is performed.
position coder
- 1313 -
No. Command Operation Data 1 Data 2 Description

External pulse
Synchronous operation with the first
(13) 0Dh synchronization - first Pulse weight ---
manual handle is performed.
manual handle
External pulse
Synchronous operation with the second
(14) 0Eh synchronization - Pulse weight ---
second manual handle
External pulse
Synchronous operation with the third
(15) 0Fh synchronization - third Pulse weight ---
manual handle
Speed
specified by Continuous feed operation based on a
(16) 10h Speed command ---
speed speed command is performed.
command
Maximum Continuous feed operation based on
(17) 11h Torque control Torque data
feedrate torque control is performed.
Auxiliary The same operation as an auxiliary
(18) 12h Auxiliary function 1 ---
function code function of the CNC is performed.
Rapid
Machine coordinate Machine The same operation as “G53” of the CNC
(21) 20h traverse rate
system selection coordinate is performed.
(NOTE)
Cutting feed - Cutting feed Total moving Cutting feed is performed according to a
(22) 21h
sec/block specification time distance specified period of time.
NOTE
The rapid traverse rate is valid only when bit 0 (RPD) of parameter No. 8002 is
set to 1.
Details of commands
A detailed description of each command is provided below. The parenthesized number following each
command title represents the value of the axis control command signals EC0g to EC6g.
(1) Rapid traverse ( 00h )

This command performs the same operation as "G00" of the CNC.
Axis control block data

Signal abbreviation Signal address (group 1) Data
EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 Rapid traverse command (00h)
EIF0g to EIF15g G144,145 Rapid traverse rate
EID0g to EID31g G146 to 149 Total moving distance
Rapid traverse rate

With bit 0 (RPD) of parameter No. 8002, whether the same rapid traverse rate as set in the parameter (No.
1420) of the CNC is used or the feedrate of the PMC axis interface set by EIF0g to EIF15g is used
independently of the CNC can be chosen.
When bit 0 (RPD) of parameter No. 8002 is set to 1, set a rapid traverse rate with a binary code.
- 1314 -
[Unit of data]
Unit of data
Unit
IS-A to IS-C
Metric machine 1 mm/min
Linear axis
Inch machine 0.1 inch/min
Rotation axis 1 deg/min
NOTE
When bit 0 (CMI) of parameter No. 11850 is 0, the rapid traverse rate set by
EIF0g to EIF15g is always represented in millimeters.
Total moving distance

Set an incremental travel amount in the input system unit of the axis with a binary code.
[Unit of data] Least input increment of the applied axis (Refer to the standard parameter setting table
(A))
[Valid data range]

IS-A IS-B to IS-C
-99999999 to 99999999 (8-digit) -999999999 to 999999999 (9-digit)
For diameter specification based on bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006, whether to specify a radius value
or diameter value can be chosen using bit 1 (CDI) of parameter No. 8005.
When bit 0 (RPD) of parameter No. 8002 is set to 1 (to use the PMC axis interface for rapid traverse rate
selection), the rapid traverse rate unit is 1 mm/min if bit 2 (R10) of parameter No. 8005 is set to 0; the
rapid traverse rate unit is 10 mm/min if bit 2 (R10) of parameter No. 8005 is set to 1.
With bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001, select a dry run signal and manual rapid traverse selection
signal to be used. The table below indicates the relationships between the bit and signals.
Manual rapid traverse selection
Parameter OVE (No.8001#2) Dry run signal
signal
0 DRN<G046.7> RT<G019.7>
1 EDRN<G150.7> ERT<G150.6>
When the dry run signal DRN/EDRN is set to 1, the feedrate is as indicated below.
Manual rapid traverse When rapid traverse is specified
selection signal (RTorERT) RDE(No.8001#3)=0 RDE(No.8001#3)=1
0 Rapid traverse Dry run feedrate ×*JV (NOTE)
1 Rapid traverse Rapid traverse
NOTE
When bit 1 (JOV) of parameter No. 1402 is set to 1, the manual feedrate
override signal *JV is not applied, but the dry run feedrate is just applied.
Related parameters
Parameter DIAx (No.1006#3)
Parameter JOV (No.1402#1)
Parameter (No.1420)
Parameter OVE (No.8001#2)
Parameter RDE (No.8001#3)
- 1315 -
Parameter RPD (No.8002#0)

Parameter CDI (No.8005#1)
Parameter R10 (No.8005#2)
Related signals
Manual rapid traverse selection signal RT <G019.7>
Dry run signal DRN<G046.7>
Manual rapid traverse selection signal (for PMC axis control) ERT <G150.6>
Dry run signal (for PMC axis control) EDRN <G150.7>
(2) Cutting feed - feed per minute ( 01h )

This command performs the same operation as “G94 G01” of the CNC.

EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 Cutting feed - feed minute (01h)
EIF0g to EIF15g G144,145 Cutting feedrate
Cutting feed rate

Set a feedrate along the axis with a binary code.
A set feedrate can be increased by a factor of 10 with bit 3 (F10) of parameter No. 8002.
When bit 4 (EFD) of parameter No. 8006 is set to 1, the unit of feedrate data increases by a factor of 100.
Moreover, the feedrate unit can be changed using a combination of bit 4 (PF1) of parameter No. 8002 and
bit 5 (PF2) of parameter No. 8002.
[Unit of data] When the parameter F10 (No.8002#3) is set to 0.

Unit of data
Unit
IS-A IS-B IS-C
Metric input 10 1 0.1 mm/min
Linear axis
Inch input 0.1 0.01 0.001 inch/min
Rotation axis 10 1 0.1 deg/min
When the parameter F10 (No.8002#3) is set to 1.

Unit of data
Unit
IS-A IS-B IS-C
Metric input 100 10 1 mm/min
Linear axis
Inch input 1 0.1 0.01 inch/min
Rotation axis 100 10 1 deg/min
CAUTION
1 When 0 is specified, the buffering state remains unchanged and no axis
movement takes place. In such a case, perform a reset operation with the reset
signal ECLRg.
2 Clamping to the cutting feedrate (parameter No. 1430) is disabled.

The specifications of the rapid traverse command (EC0g to EC6g: 00h) are applicable.
- 1316 -
With bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001, select a dry run signal and manual rapid traverse selection
signal to be used. The table below indicates the relationships between the bit and signals.
Parameter OVE (No.8001#2) Dry run signal Manual rapid traverse selection signal
0 DRN<G046.7> RT<G019.7>
1 EDRN<G150.7> ERT<G150.6>
When the dry run signal DRN/EDRN is set to 1, the feedrate is as indicated below.
Unlike rapid traverse, the feedrate does not depend on the value of bit 3 (RDE) of parameter No. 8001.
Manual rapid traverse selection signal (RT / ERT) When cutting feed is specified
0 Dry run speed × *JV (Note)
1 Cutting feed
NOTE
When bit 1 (JOV) of parameter No. 1402 is set to 1, the manual feedrate
override signal *JV is not applied, but the dry run feedrate is just applied.
Related parameters
Parameter F10 (No.8002#3)
Parameter PF1 (No.8002#4)
Parameter PF2 (No.8002#5)
Parameter EFD (No.8006#4)
Related signals
Manual rapid traverse selection signal RT <G019.7>
Dry run signal DRN<G046.7>
Manual rapid traverse selection signal (for PMC axis control) ERT <G150.6>
Dry run signal (for PMC axis control) EDRN <G150.7>
(3) Cutting feed - feed per revolution ( 02h )

This command performs the same operation as "G95 G01" of the CNC.
Set the amount of feed along the axis per spindle revolution.
The feedrate per spindle revolution depends on whether the M series or T series is used.

EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 Cutting feed - feed per revolution command (02h)
EIF0g to EIF15g G144,145 Feedrate per revolution
Feedrate per revolution

<For the T series>
[Unit of data] The table indicates the unit of data depending on the setting of bits 6 (FR1) and bit 7
(FR2) of parameter No. 8002.
- 1317 -
Parameter Metric input Inch input Rotation axis

FR2 FR1 (mm/rev) (inch/rev) (deg/rev)
1 1
0.0001 0.000001 0.0001
0 0
0 1 0.001 0.00001 0.001
1 0 0.01 0.0001 0.01

(However, data within the ranges indicated below must be specified.)
Valid data range
Unit
IS-A to IS-C
Metric input 0.0001 to 500.0000 mm/rev
Linear axis
Inch input 0.000001 to 9.999999 inch/rev
Rotation axis 0.0001 to 500.0000 deg/rev
<For M series>
[Unit of data] The table indicates the unit of data depending on the setting of bits 6 (FR1) and bit 7
(FR2) of parameter No. 8002.
Parameter Metric input Inch input Rotation axis
FR2 FR1 (mm/rev) (inch/rev) (deg/rev)
1 1
0.01 0.0001 0.01
0 0
0 1 0.1 0.001 0.1
1 0 1 0.01 1

(However, data within the ranges indicated below must be specified.)
Valid data range
Unit
IS-A to IS-C
Metric input 0.01 to 500.00 mm/rev
Linear axis
Inch input 0.0001 to 9.9999 inch/rev
Rotation axis 0.01 to 500.00 deg/rev
CAUTION
1 A set feedrate can be increased by a factor of 10 or 100 by setting bit 6 (FR1)
and bit 7 (FR2) of parameter No. 8002.
2 The feedrate is clamped to a value not exceeding the setting of parameter No.
8022.
3 Override is enabled. Dry run depends on the value of bit 3 (DRR) of parameter
No. 8005.
4 In the case of using analog spindle, if the thread cutting is executed in NC
program while the PMC axis is moving by this command, the motion of PMC
axis once stops for detecting one-rotation-signal.

Dry run operation follows the specifications of cutting feed - feed per minute.
Related parameters
Parameter DRR(No.8005#3)
Parameter (No.8022)
Others follow the specifications of the cutting feed - feed per minute.
- 1318 -
Related signals
Same as for cutting feed - feed per minute
(4) Skip - feed per minute ( 03h )
Skip
This command performs the same operation as "G31 G01" of the CNC.
High-speed skip is disabled.
This skip signal is valid for an axis assigned to a path from path 1 to path 2.
For an axis assigned to path 1, ESKIP (X004.6) is valid.
For an axis assigned to path 2, ESKIP#2(X013.6) is valid.

EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 Skip command (03h)
EIF0g to EIF15g G144,145 Cutting feedrate
Cutting feedrate
The specifications of the cutting feed command (EC0g to EC6g: 01h) are applicable.
CAUTION
Feedrate override and dry run are disabled.

(5) Dwell ( 04h )

This command performs the same operation as "G04" of the CNC.

EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 Dwell command (04h)
EID0g to EID31g G146 to 149 Dwell time
Dwell time
Set a dwell time with a binary code.
Valid data range Unit
1 to 9999999 ms
When diameter specification is selected with bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006, whether to specify a
radius value or diameter value for dwell operation can be specified using bit 1 (CDI) of parameter No.
8005.
When the increment system is IS-C, the dwell time can be set to a least input increment of 0.1 msec with
bit 1 (DWE) of parameter No. 8002.
Related parameters
Parameter DWE (No.8002#1)
- 1319 -
(6) Reference position return ( 05h )

This command performs the same operation as manual reference position return of the CNC after rapid
traverse in the reference position return direction set by bit 5 (ZMIx) of parameter No. 1006.
Reference position setting without DOG

If bit 1 (DLZx) of parameter No. 1005 for the function for setting the reference position without dogs is
set for each axis, and reference position return operation is not performed even once after the power is
turned on, a reference position return operation (positioning at a grid closest to the current position) can
be performed without using the reference position return deceleration signal when a movement
(positioning at a location near the reference position) is made in the direction set for each axis with the
continuous feed command (EC0g to EC6g: 06h) and the reference position return command (EC0g to
EC6g: 05h) is specified.
At the time of positioning at a location near the reference position, the machine needs to be moved in the
reference position return direction at such a feedrate that the servo position deviation exceeds the value
set in parameter No. 1836.
The direction from a neighborhood point to a grid is set by bit 5 (ZMIx) of parameter No. 1006.
If the reference position return command (EC0g to EC6g: 05h) is issued after reference position
establishment, a high-speed reference position return operation is performed, regardless of the reference
position return direction set by bit 5 (ZMIx) of parameter No. 1006.
Specify this command after canceling tool radius compensation and tool length compensation.

EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 Reference position return command (05h)
Related parameters
Parameter DLZx (No.1005#1)
Parameter ZMIx (No.1006#5)
Parameter (No.1836)
(7) Continuous feed ( 06h )

This command performs a continuous feed operation along a controlled axis in a certain direction.
This command performs the same operation as continuous feed in the JOG mode of the CNC.
Continuous feed is performed until a reset. At this time, the remaining amount of travel is 0 at all times.
By setting the reset signal ECLRg to 1, the command can be ended. At this time, the servo motor is
decelerated to a stop, the axis moving signal EGENg is set to 0, and the control axis selection status signal
*EAXSL is also set to 0.
Before specifying the next command, check that the control axis selection status signal *EAXSL is set to
0.
Until the control axis selection status signal *EAXSL is set to 0, ensure that the reset signal ECLRg
continues to be set to 1.

EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 Continuous feed command (06h)
EIF0g to EIF15g G144,145 Continuous feedrate
EID31g G149.7 Feed direction (specified with EID31g only)
Continuous feedrate
A feedrate along an axis is set in the same way as for cutting feed - feed per minute (EC0g to EC6g: 01h).
A feedrate change can be made during continuous feed.
- 1320 -
If a feedrate (EIF0g to EIF15g) is set, and the logical state of the axis control command read signal
EBUFg is reversed, a new continuous feedrate is set.
This command is not buffered. So, the axis control command read completion signal EBSYg need not be
checked when this command is specified usually.
A set feedrate can be increased by a factor of 10 with bit 3 (F10) of parameter No. 8002. Moreover, a set
feedrate can be increased by a factor of up to 200 with bit 2 (JFM) of parameter No. 8004.
CAUTION
A maximum feedrate applicable when override is applied differs from a maximum
feedrate applicable when override is canceled. Maximum feedrate data in the
two cases is indicated below.
Maximum feedrate (when an override of 254% is applied)

IS-B IS-C
Metric input Inch input Metric input Inch input
(mm/min) (inch/min) (mm/min) (inch/min)
1 times 166458 1664.58 16645 166.45
10 times 1664589 16645.89 166458 1664.58
200 times (NOTE 1) 19660500 196605.00 1966050 19660.50
Maximum feedrate (when override is canceled)

IS-B IS-C
1 times 65535 655.35 6553 65.53
10 times 655350 6553.5 65535 655.35
200 times (NOTE 1) 13107000 131070 1310700 13107
NOTE
1 A feedrate increased by a factor of 200 is valid only when the continuous feed
command (EC0g to EC6g: 06h) is used.
2 The actual feedrate may not be displayed correctly, depending on the feedrate.
Feed direction
Specify the direction of continuous feed with the signal EID31g.
0: Positive direction
1: Negative direction
The signals EID0g to EID30g are undefined.
If the logical state of the axis control command read signal EBUFg is reversed during axis movement, the
feedrate (EIF0g to EIF15g) is changed to a newly set value.
Dry run operation follows the specifications of cutting feed - feed per minute.
Related parameters
Parameter F10 (No.8002#3)
Parameter JFM (No.8004#2)
Related signals
Same as for cutting feed - feed per minute
- 1321 -
(8) First reference position return ( 07h )

This command performs the same operation as reference position return from an intermediate position
done with "G28" of the CNC.

EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 First reference position return command (07h)
Rapid traverse rate

When the first reference position return command is specified, the manual rapid traverse rate set by
parameter No. 1424 is used if manual reference position return operation is not performed even once after
the power is turned on.
NOTE
If bit 1 (DLZ) of parameter No. 1005 is set to enable the function for setting the
reference position without dogs for each axis, and reference position return
operation is not performed even once after the power is turned on, the alarm
(PS0090) is issued when the first reference position return command (EC0g to
EC6g: 07h) is specified.
Dry run operation follows the specifications of rapid traverse.
Related parameters
Parameter (No.1240)
Parameter (No.1420)
Parameter (No.1424)
Related signals
Same as for rapid traverse
(9) Second reference position return ( 08h )

done with "G28 P2" of the CNC.

EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 Second reference position return command (08h)
Rapid traverse rate

Related parameters
Parameter (No.1241)
- 1322 -
Parameter (No.1420)
Related signals
(10) Third reference position return ( 09h )


EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 Third reference position return command (09h)
Rapid traverse rate

Related parameters
Parameter (No.1242)
Parameter (No.1420)
Related signals
(11) Fourth reference position return ( 0Ah )


EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 Fourth reference position return command (0Ah)
Rapid traverse rate

Related parameters
Parameter (No.1243)
Parameter (No.1420)
- 1323 -
Related signals
(12) External pulse synchronization – position coder ( 0Bh )

This command performs a synchronous operation with the position coder. Using position coder of the
serial spindle is also available.
When a negative external pulse value is specified, a movement is made in the opposite direction.
The remaining amount of travel is 0 at all times.
If a manual handle interrupt operation is performed for the same axis, an amount of travel based on
external pulses added to manual handle interrupt pulses results.
By setting the reset signal ECLRg to 1, the command can be ended. At this time, the servo motor is
decelerated to a stop, the axis moving signal EGENg is set to 0, and the control axis selection status signal
*EAXSL is also set to 0.
0.

EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 External pulse synchronization - position coder command
(0Bh)
EIF0g to EIF15g G144,145 Pulse weight
Spindle number of the serial spindle to be synchronized
EID0g to EID7g G146
(common to the system) (*1)
*1: This data is set only during synchronization with the position coder of the serial spindle.
The position coder to be synchronized depends on the parameter setting, as shown below.
ESY EOS
Command of G146 Valid position coder
(No.8007#3) (No.8019#0)
0 0/1 Not required Position coder (not a serial spindle)
1 0 Not required Position coder of the first spindle belonging to path 1 (*2)
1 1 Required Position coder of an arbitrary spindle (specified by G146)
*2: This can be specified for the servo axis belonging to path 1.
Pulse weight
Set an external pulse weight.
When setting a weight value, use the higher bits (EIF8g to EIF15g) to specify the integer part of an
external pulse weight, and use the lower bits (EIF0g to EIF7g) to specify the fractional part.
The valid range is ±1/256 to ±127.
With EIF0g to EIF7g for the fractional part, specify a weight in steps of 1/256.
Example)
For 0.5: EIF0g to EIF7g = 80h (=80h/100h=128 / 256 = 0.5)
For 0.2: EIF0g to EIF7g=33h (=33h/100h= 51 / 256 0.2)
By setting the manual pulse magnification select signal HNDMP<G088.3> to 1, the valid range can be
set the range form ±1/32 to ±1023.
When the manual pulse magnification select signal HNDMP is set to "1", use the higher bits (EIF5g to
EIF15g) to specify the integer part of an external pulse weight, and use the lower bits (EIF0g to EIF4g) to
specify the fractional part.
With EIF0g to EIF4g for the fractional part, specify a weight in steps of 1/32.
Example)
- 1324 -
For 0.5: EIF0g to EIF4g = 10h (=10h/20h=16 / 32 = 0.5)
For 0.2: EIF0g to EIF4g=06h (=06h/20h= 6 / 32 0.2)
When a negative weight value is set, a movement is made along the axis in the opposite direction.
If a new pulse weight is set and the logical state of the axis control command read signal EBUFg is
reversed during axis movement based on external pulse synchronization, a movement is made along the
axis according to the new pulse weight.
This command is not buffered. So, the axis control command read completion signal EBSYg need not be
checked when this command is specified usually.
Spindle number of a serial spindle to be synchronized (for synchronization with the position coder
of a serial spindle)
The serial spindle to be synchronized is set with a spindle number common to the system.
The valid range extends from 1 to the maximum number of control axes. If the spindle number
falls outside the range, external pulse synchronization is disabled.
Example)
When the spindle (serial spindle) of each path is assigned as shown below
Spindle number common to the system Path number + Spindle number in the path
First spindle (S1) First spindle in path 1 (S11)
Second spindle (S2) Second spindle in path 1 (S12)
Third spindle (S3) Third spindle in path 1 (S13)
Path 1 Path 2
Spindle S3
Spindle S1 Spindle S2
(S21)
(S11) (S12)
NOTE
1 The spindle number to be set does not depend on the path and is common to
the system.
2 If the set serial spindle is not present, external pulse synchronization is disabled.
3 Be sure to set EID8g to EID31g (G147 to G149 for group A) to 0.
Related parameters
Parameter DIAx(No.1006#3)
Parameter (No.1424)
Parameter CDI(No.8005#1)
Parameter ESY(No.8007#3)
Parameter EOS(No.8019#0)
CAUTION
1 The feedrate is clamped to the manual rapid traverse rate for each axis
2 In the case of using analog spindle, if the thread cutting is executed in NC
program while the PMC axis is moving by this command, the motion of PMC axis
once stops for detecting one-rotation-signal.
- 1325 -
NOTE
For diameter specification based on bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006, whether
to specify a radius value or diameter value can be chosen using bit 1 (CDI) of
parameter No. 8005. At this time, set the same value with bit 3 (DIAx) of
parameter No. 1006 for all axes that belong to the same group.
(13) External pulse synchronization - first manual handle ( 0Dh )

(14) External pulse synchronization - second manual handle ( 0Eh )
(15) External pulse synchronization - third manual handle ( 0Fh )
Each of these commands performs a synchronous operation with a manual handle.
When a negative external pulse value is specified, a movement is made in the opposite direction.
The remaining amount of travel is 0 at all times.
If a manual handle interrupt operation is performed for the same axis, an amount of travel based on
external pulses added to manual handle interrupt pulses results. A parameter-set magnification is invalid.
By setting the reset signal ECLRg to 1, each of these commands can be ended. At this time, the servo
motor is decelerated to a stop, the axis moving signal EGENg is set to 0, and the control axis selection
status signal *EAXSL is also set to 0.
0.

EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 External pulse synchronization - manual handle command
(0Dh for the first manual handle)
(0Eh for the second manual handle)
(0Fh for the third manual handle)
EIF0g to EIF15g G144,145 Pulse weight
Pulse weight
The specifications of the external pulse synchronization - position coder command (EC0g to EC6g: 0Bh)
are applicable.
Related parameters
Same as for external pulse synchronization - position coder
CAUTION
The feedrate is clamped to the manual rapid traverse rate for each axis
NOTE
For diameter specification based on bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006, whether
to specify a radius value or diameter value can be chosen using bit 1 (CDI) of
parameter No. 8005. At this time, set the same value with bit 3 (DIAx) of
parameter No. 1006 for all axes that belong to the same group.
- 1326 -
(16) Speed command ( 10h )

This command performs a continuous feed operation based on a speed command.
By using bit 0 (ROTx) of parameter No. 1006, set a rotation axis as a controlled axis for which this
command is executed.
The continuous feed command (EC0g to EC6g: 06h) exercises position control. However, the speed
command (EC0g to EC6g: 10h) can exercise speed control on the servo motor to dynamically change the
speed during continuous feed. So, this command is suited, for example, to an application where a servo
motor drives a rotary tool.
With parameter No. 8028, a time constant for linear acceleration/ deceleration can be set for each axis.
When bit 2 (VCP) of parameter No. 8007 is 0, the coordinates are updated during a feed by the speed
command. (The speed command of PMC axis control conforms to the FS10/11 specification.)
When bit 2 (VCP) of parameter No. 8007 is 1, the speed command of PMC axis control conforms to the
FS0i-C specification. In this case, the speed command is determined by bit 4 (EVP) of parameter No.
8005.
When the FS0i-C specification is selected (bit 2 (VCP) of parameter No. 8007 is 1) and speed control is
selected (bit 4 (EVP) of parameter No. 8005 is 0), the coordinates are not updated.
When the FS0i-C specification is selected (bit 2 (VCP) of parameter No. 8007 is 1) and position control is
selected (bit 4 (EVP) of parameter No. 8005 is 1), the coordinates are updated.
By setting the reset signal ECLRg to 1, this command can be ended.

At this time, the servo motor is decelerated to a stop, and the axis moving signal EGENg is set to 0.
Before specifying the next command, check that the axis moving signal EGENg is set to 0.
Until the axis moving signal EGENg is set to 0, ensure that the reset signal ECLRg continues to be set to
1.

EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 Speed command (10h)
EIF0g to EIF15g G144,145 Continuous feedrate
Continuous feedrate
Set the speed of the servo motor with a binary code.
Set a positive value when the servo motor rotates in the forward direction. Set a negative value (two's
complement) when the servo motor rotates in the reverse direction.
If a new servo motor speed is set as a feedrate, and the logical state of the axis control command read
signal EBUFg is reversed, the servo motor is accelerated or decelerated to the new speed.

-32768 to +32767 min-1
Related parameters
Parameter (No.8028)
- 1327 -
NOTE
1 The following feedrate error can occur:
Gear
Speed command
Amplifier Motor
(b) Axis
Detector
(a)
(a) With the speed command based on PMC axis control, a servo motor speed
is specified as a feedrate. So, in order to specify a feedrate for an axis when
a gear is used between the axis and servo motor, the desired feedrate for
the axis needs to be converted to a servo motor speed. A feedrate must be
specified using an integer, so that when it is converted to a servo motor
speed, a rounding error can occur.
(b) The minimum unit of feedrate is given by the expression below. An integer
must be specified. No finer value may be specified.
Fmin = P ÷ 1000 (mm/min)
A calculation is made according to IS-B.
Fmin: Minimum feedrate unit
P : Number of pulses per revolution of a detector for speed feedback
A speed is specified according to the expression below.
F = N × P ÷ 1000 (mm/min)
A calculation is made according to IS-B.
F : Speed command (integer)
N : Servo motor speed (min-1)
P : Number of pulses per revolution of a detector for speed feedback
2 In the speed command mode, a speed after acceleration/deceleration is
specified for the servo control section. At this time, a position control loop gain is
invalid.
3 Machine lock is disabled for the speed command.
Speed command and position control

The PMC axis can be moved at a constant speed by performing the speed specification of PMC axis
control through position loop control, that is, outputting the command pulses corresponding to a rotation
speed to servo position control instead of outputting rotation speed data to the amplifier.
Set the FS0i-C specification (set bit 2 (VCP) of parameter No. 8007 to 1) and specify either speed loop
control or position loop control is used for speed specification of PMC axis control using bit 4 (EVP) of
parameter No. 8005.
In speed specification, even for position control (bit 4 (EVP) of parameter No. 8005 is 1), only the speed
specification parameter (No. 8028) and the linear acceleration/deceleration expanded parameters for PMC
axis control speed command continuous feed (bit 0 (PTC) of parameter 12730 set to 1 and parameters No.
12731 to 12738) are used for acceleration/deceleration and normal acceleration/ deceleration is not
performed.
For position control (bit 4 (EVP) of parameter No. 8005 is 1), override is enabled.
Set parameter No. 8040 for each axis to the amount of travel per revolution of the motor in terms of the
minimum travel unit and convert speed commands to position commands using this value.
As shown in the following block diagram, rotation speed data is not output to the amplifier and the
command pulses corresponding to a rotation speed are output to servo position control.
- 1328 -
＋
Command CMR Position Servo Motor
pulse control amplifier
Detector
Block diagram
Related parameters
Parameter EVP(No.8005#4)
Parameter VCP(No.8007#2)
Parameter (No.8040)
Parameter PTC(No.12730)
Parameter (No.12731)
NOTE
1 The control axis to be controlled needs to be set as a rotation axis in bit 0
(ROTx) of parameter No. 1006.
2 When the FS0i-C specification (bit 2 (VCP) of parameter No. 8007 is 1) and
speed control (bit 4 (EVP) of parameter 8005 is 0) are specified, coordinates are
not updated.
After execution, the following signal is set to 0 and the position is lost.
- Reference position establishment signal
ZRFx<F120>
After execution, establish the reference position.
3 When the FS0i-C specification (bit 2 (VCP) of parameter No. 8007 is 1) and
position control (bit 4 (EVP) of parameter 8005 is 1) are specified, coordinates
are updated.
4 Only when the FS0i-C specification (bit 2 (VCP) of parameter No. 8007 is 1) and
position control (bit 4 (EVP) of parameter 8005 is 1) are specified, feedrate
override is enabled.
(17) Torque control ( 11h )

This command performs a continuous feed operation based on torque control.
With this command, position control on a PMC control axis can be switched to torque-based control. The
servo motor outputs torque exactly as specified by the NC.

EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 Torque control command (11h)
EIF0g to EIF15g G144,145 Maximum feedrate
EID0g to EID31g G146 to 149 Torque data
- 1329 -
Maximum feedrate
Specify a maximum feedrate during torque control by using the unit min-1.
When there is no torque generation target or the feedrate exceeds the specified value during torque
control, the alarm (SV0422) is issued.
When updating the maximum feedrate during torque control set in the torque control mode, set new data
on the signals and reverse the logical state of the axis control command completion signal EBUFg.

1 to +32767 min-1
NOTE
When a linear motor is used, the unit of data is cm/min.
Torque data
Specify torque data.
Specify a positive value when the torque direction is positive. Specify a negative value when the torque
direction is negative.
When updating the torque data set in the torque control mode, set new data on the signals and reverse the
logical state of the axis control command completion signal EBUFg.

-999999999 to +999999999 (9-digit) 0.00001 Nm
NOTE
When a linear motor is used, the unit of data is 0.001N.
(1) Switching from position control to torque control

a. Torque control axis setting
Using bit 7 (TRQMx) of parameter No. 2007, set whether an axis is to be placed under torque
control. Moreover, for an axis to be placed under torque control, set the torque constant
parameter (No. 2105). The standard value of the motor is automatically set in this parameter
when the power is turned on after setting bit 1 (DGPR) of parameter No. 2000 to 0.
b. Position management in the torque control mode
Whether to perform follow-up operation in the torque control mode can be chosen using bit 4
(TQF) of parameter No. 1803.
If follow-up operation is performed (with bit 4 (TQF) of parameter No. 1803 set to 1), position
control is exercised, regardless of whether the torque control mode is set.
If follow-up operation is not performed (with bit 4 (TQF) of parameter No. 1803 set to 0), the
operation depends on whether to update the error counter (bit 1 (TRE) of parameter No. 1805).
If the error counter is updated (with bit 1 (TRE) of parameter No. 1805 set to 0), the alarm
(SV0423) is issued when the value of the error counter exceeds the value set in parameter No.
1885. At the time of switching back to position control, follow-up operation is performed.
If the error counter is not updated (with bit 1 (TRE) of parameter No. 1805 set to 1), no errors
are accumulated, so that no servo alarm is issued. However, when the maximum allowable
speed is exceeded, the alarm (SV0422) is issued.
When this setting is selected, a reference position return operation is required to switch back to
position control.
Except when bit 4 (TQF) of parameter No. 1803 is set to 0, and bit 1 (TRE) of parameter No.
1805 is se to 1, the CNC always exercises position control even in the torque control mode. So,
no reference position return operation needs to be performed even at the time of switching from
torque control to position control.
- 1330 -
c. Movement direction and speed in the torque control mode
In the torque control mode, the output of torque specified by the axis control data signals
EID0g to EID31g is attempted. However, when there is no torque generation target or the
output has not reached the specified torque data yet, a movement is made in the same direction
as in the case of position control according to the +/- sign of torque data. When the move speed
exceeds the specified value, the alarm (SV0422) is issued.
d. Timing of switching to torque control
Switching to the torque control mode from another mode occurs when the position deviation is
decreased to within the in-position width.
e. In the torque control mode, the torque control mode signal TRQMx is set to 1. (For details of
this signal, see "Signal detail".)
(2) Switching from torque control to position control

(Torque control mode cancellation)
When any of the following conditions occurs, the torque control mode ends:
1) When the reset signal ECLRg is set to 1
2) When a servo alarm is issued
3) When an OT alarm is issued with an axis placed under torque control
4) At the time of emergency stop
5) When servo-off occurs due to the servo-off signal ESOFg
a. Timing of torque control cancellation
The cancellation of torque control based on PMC axis control depends on whether to perform
follow-up operation as determined by bit 4 (TQF) of parameter No. 1803.
If follow-up operation is performed (with bit 4 (TQF) of parameter No. 1803 set to 1), the
torque control mode signal TRQMx is set to 0 to return to position control immediately when a
cancellation condition occurs. The execution then stops when the position deviation is
decreased to within the in-position width.
If follow-up operation is not performed (with bit 4 (TQF) of parameter No. 1803 set to 1), the
torque control mode signal TRQMx is set to 0 when a cancellation condition occurs. If the error
counter is updated (with bit 1 (TRE) of parameter No. 1805 set to 0), the control mode is
switched back to position control when the position deviation is decreased to below the value
of the cancellation limit parameter (No. 1886) after the start of follow-up operation. The
execution then ends when the position deviation is decreased to within the in-position width. If
the error counter is not updated (bit 1 (TRE) of parameter No. 1805 is set to 1), a reference
position return operation must be once performed to return to position control.
b. Command after cancellation
After the torque control mode is canceled, the control mode is switched to normal position
control. In the torque control mode, position is controlled, so that machine coordinates are not
shifted. However, a shift occurs between the workpiece coordinates and machine coordinates,
so that the shift amount needs to be canceled, for example, by setting a workpiece coordinate
system.
The table below indicates the operations dependent on the settings of bit 4 (TQF) of parameter No. 1803
and bit 1 (TRE) of parameter No. 1805.
TQF TRE Position Reference position
Operation in TRQ mode
(No.1803#4) (No.1805#1) control return(*)
1 0/1 O Position control is exercised. Not required
0 0 O The alarm (SV0423) is issued when the Not required
error counter exceeds the value of
parameter No. 1885.
0 1 - No SV alarm is issued. When the Required
maximum allowable speed is exceeded,
however, the alarm (SV0422) is issued.
(*) Whether reference position return operation is required or not when the control mode has been
switched from torque control back to position control
- 1331 -
CAUTION
1 If a movement is made along a torque control axis in the torque control mode,
set bit 4 (TQF) of parameter No. 1803 for follow-up operation to 1.
2 If a movement has been made along a torque control axis when torque control is
canceled, a mechanical shock occurs at the time of return to position control. As
a greater speed is used, a larger shock occurs. So, decelerate to a maximum
allowable extent or stop before canceling torque control.
3 When specifying torque control after completion of manual reference position
return, set the feed direction selection signal to 0 or switch to a mode other than
the manual reference position return mode beforehand.
4 When the control axis selection signal EAXx is switched in the torque control
mode, the alarm (SV0139) is issued. Before switching the control axis selection
signal EAXx, cancel the torque control mode.
5 In the torque control mode, do not detach a controlled axis with the control axis
detach signal DTCHx or a setting parameter.
6 When servo-off occurs, the torque control mode is canceled. However, the
torque control state remains to be set. So, be sure to set the reset signal ECLRg
to 1.
7 Machine lock is disabled for the torque control command.
Related parameters
Parameter TQF (No.1803#4)
Parameter TRE (No.1805#1)
Parameter (No.1885)
Parameter (No.1886)
Related signals
Control axis detach signal DTCHx <G124>
(18) Auxiliary function 1 ( 12h )

Each of these commands performs the same operation as an auxiliary function (M code Function) of the
CNC.
Each auxiliary function of the PMC axis control cannot be commanded at the same time by two or more
groups.
For instance, it is not possible to command auxiliary function 1 from other groups while auxiliary
function 1 is performed with group A.
(It is possible to command auxiliary function 2 and 3 from other groups at that time.)
EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 Auxiliary function command
(12h for the auxiliary function 1 command)
EID0g to EID15g G146 to 147 Auxiliary function code
- 1332 -
Auxiliary function code
Specify an auxiliary function code to be sent to the PMC with a binary code.
With bit 6 (AUX) of parameter No. 8001, specify a 1-byte or 2-byte code on the signals EID0g to
EID15g.
Related parameters
Parameter AUX(No.8001#6)
Related signals
Auxiliary function completion signal EFINg <G142.0>
Auxiliary function strobe signal EMFg <F131.0> (for auxiliary function 1)
Auxiliary function strobe signal EMF2g <F131.2> (for auxiliary function 2)
Auxiliary function strobe signal EMF3g <F131.3> (for auxiliary function 3)
Auxiliary function code signals EM11g to EM48g <F132, F142>
(21) Machine coordinate system selection ( 20h )

This command performs the same operation as “G53” of the CNC.
This command performs rapid traverse in the absolute mode to a specified position in the machine
coordinate system. So, this command can be used to move the tool to a specified machine-specific
position such as a tool change position.
NOTE
1 When using this command with the T series, cancel tool offset and tool-nose
radius compensation beforehand.
2 When using this command with the M series, cancel tool radius compensation,
tool length compensation, and tool offset beforehand.
3 Before this command can be specified, a machine coordinate system must be
set. So, a manual reference position return operation or reference position return
operation based on G28 needs to be performed at least once after the power is
turned on. When an absolute-position detector is attached, machine position
data is stored, so that a reference position return operation is unnecessary after
the power is turned on.
4 This command can be specified regardless of the setting (bit 0 (NWZ) of
parameter No. 8136) of the workpiece coordinate system.
5 This command can be specified even if the workpiece coordinate system is not
set (bit 0 (NWZ) of parameter No. 8136 is 1).
When the machine coordinate system selection (20h) is commanded with the PMC axis control for the
rotary axis to which the roll-over function is valid (bit 0 (ROAx) of parameter No.1008 is set to 1), the
direction of the rotation for an absolute command is as follows.
Bit 4 (R20x) of parameter No.8013
0 1
Direction of the
0 Direction of the shortest path
Bit 1 (RABx) of shortest path
parameter No.1008 Direction of sign of the amount Direction of sign of the
1
of the movement to be made command value
NOTE
When "1" is set to R20x, the direction of the rotation is the same as
FS0i-C.
- 1333 -

EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 Machine coordinate system selection (20h)
EID0g to EID31g G146 to 149 Machine coordinate
Rapid traverse rate

Machine coordinate
For a linear axis, specify a machine coordinate in the input unit for the axis as an absolute value with a
binary code.
Example: For absolute "10000"
Input unit inch 1.0000 mm 10.000
Output unit mm 25.400 inch 0.3937
For a rotation axis, a move direction can be selected with a parameter.

Set bit 0 (ROAx) of parameter No. 1008 to 1 to enable the rollover function. Then, select the sign of a
specified value or the shortcut direction with bit 1 (RABx) of parameter No. 1008. Additionally, the
amount of travel per revolution needs to be set in parameter No. 1260.
Related parameters
Parameter ROTx (No.1006#0)
Parameter ROAx (No.1008#0)
Parameter RABx (No.1008#1)
Parameter (No.1260)
(22) Cutting feed-sec/block ( 21h )

This command performs cutting feed according to a specified period of time.

EC0g to EC6g G143.0 to 6 Cutting feed - sec/block command (21h)
EIF0g to EIF15g G144,145 Cutting feed time
Cutting feed time

Specify a period of time required for ending a block.
[Unit of data] 0.1sec

NOTE
Dry run and override are disabled, but the tool stops with an override of 0%.
Related parameters and related signals

Basically same as for cutting feed -feed per minute
- 1334 -
Notes on the commands

- Display of the remaining amount of travel
When the continuous feed command (EC0g to EC6g: 06h) and the external pulse synchronization
commands (EC0g to EC6g: 0Bh, 0Dh to 0Fh) are specified, the remaining amount of travel indicates 0 at
all times.
- Command buffering
The continuous feed command (EC0g to EC6g: 06h) and the external pulse synchronization commands
(EC0g to EC6g: 0Bh, 0Dh to 0Fh) are not buffered. So, the axis control command read completion signal
EBSYg need not be checked at usual command specification time.
When the continuous feed command (EC0g to EC6g: 06h) is specified, the feedrate is changed to a
specified value by specifying a value with EIFg and reversing EBUFg. (However, the direction remains
unchanged.)
- Acceleration/deceleration
The valid acceleration/deceleration type varies from one command to another.
See Table 16.1.1 (g), "Valid acceleration/deceleration types (for each command)".
Table 16.1.1 (g) Valid acceleration/deceleration types (for each command)

Acceleration/
Command Operation
deceleration type
00h Rapid traverse
05h Reference position return The settings of rapid traverse
07h 1st reference position return parameters of exponential type, linear
08h 2nd reference position return type after interpolation, and
09h 3rd reference position return bell-shaped type after interpolation
0Ah 4th reference position return used with the NC are valid.
20h Machine coordinate system selection
01h Cutting feed - feed per minute
The settings of cutting parameters of
02h Cutting feed - feed per revolution
exponential type, linear type after
03h Skip
interpolation, and bell-shaped type
06h Continuous feed
after interpolation used with the NC are
External pulse
valid.
0Bh -Position coder
However, when a value is set in
0Dh -1st manual handle
parameter No. 8030 and No. 8031,
0Eh -2nd manual handle
these settings are valid instead of
0Fh -3rd manual handle
parameter No. No. 1622 and No.1623.
21h Cutting feed - sec / block
Set linear-type parameters (No.8028
10h Speed command
and No.8032).
- Immediate commands
The commands listed below are not buffered. The commands are referred to as immediate commands.
(1) Continuous feed(EC0g to EC6g : 06h)

(2) External pulse synchronization - Position coder (EC0g to EC6g : 0Bh)
(3) External pulse synchronization - 1st manual handle (EC0g to EC6g : 0Dh)
(4) External pulse synchronization - 2nd manual handle (EC0g to EC6g : 0Eh)
(5) External pulse synchronization - 3rd manual handle (EC0g to EC6g : 0Fh)
(6) Speed command(EC0g to EC6g : 10h)
(7) Torque control (EC0g to EC6g : 11h)
When an immediate command is prepared and the axis control command read signal EBUFg is reversed
during execution of the same type of command, the command being executed is terminated, and the next
command is executed immediately.
- 1335 -
Suppose, for example, that when continuous feed is being executed at 100 mm/min, another continuous
feed command with only the feedrate changed to 300 mm/min is specified and the axis control command
read signal EBUFg is reversed. The feedrate changes to 300 mm/min.
To end an immediate command, input the reset signal ECLRg.

When specifying a command other than the immediate commands, set the reset signal ECLRg to 1 and
check that the command is terminated, then reverse EBUFg.
(If both of the block being executed and a block being prepared are immediate commands, but the types
of commands differ from each other, set the reset signal ECLRg to 1 once.)
Signal
Signal list (PMC axis control)
Number Symbol Signal name
(1) EAX1 to EAX5 Controlled axis selection signals
(2) EC0g to EC6g Axis control command signals
(3) EIF0g to EIF15g Axis control feedrate signals
(4) EID0g to EID31g Axis control data signals
(5) EBUFg Axis control command read signal
(6) EBSYg Axis control command read completion signal
(7) ECLRg Reset signal
(8) ESTPg Axis control temporary stop signal
(9) ESBKg Block stop signal
(10) EMSBKg Block stop disable signal
(11) EM11g to EM48g Auxiliary function code signals
(12) EMFg Auxiliary function strobe signal
(13) EMF2g Auxiliary function 2 strobe signal
(14) EMF3g Auxiliary function 3 strobe signal
(15) EFINg Auxiliary function completion signal
(16) ESOFg Servo-off signal
(17) EMBUFg Buffering disable signal
(18) *EAXSL Control axis selection status signal
(19) EINPg In-position signal
(20) ECKZg Following zero checking signal
(21) EIALg Alarm signal
(22) EGENg Axis moving signal
(23) EDENg Auxiliary function executing signal
(24) EOTNg Negative-direction overtravel signal
(25) EOTPg Positive-direction overtravel signal
(26) *EFOV0 to *EFOV7 Feedrate override signals
(27) EOVC Override cancellation signal
(28) EROV1, EROV2 Rapid traverse override signals
(29) EDRN Dry run signal
(30) ERT Manual rapid traverse selection signal
(31) EOV0 Override 0% signal
(32) ESKIP Skip signal
(33) EADEN1 to EADEN5 Distribution completion signals
(34) EABUFg Buffer full signal
(35) EACNT1 to EACNT5 Controlling signals
(36) ELCKZg Accumulated zero check signal
(37) TRQM1 to TRQM5 Torque control mode signal
(38) HNDMP Manual pulse magnification select signal
- 1336 -
Signal list (Related signals)

Number Symbol Signal name
(1) *+ED1 to *+ED5 External deceleration signal 1
*- ED1 to *- ED5
*- ED21 to *- ED25
*- ED31 to *- ED35
(4) *HROV 1% rapid traverse override select signal
(5) HROV0 to 6 1% rapid traverse override signals
(6) *FHROV 0.1% rapid traverse override select signal
(7) FHRO0 to 9 0.1% rapid traverse override signals
(8) ROV1, 2 Rapid traverse override signals
(9) ZP1 First reference position return completion signal
(10) ZP2 Second reference position return completion signal
(11) ZP3 Third reference position return completion signal
(12) ZP4 Fourth reference position return completion signal
(13) NDCAL1 to NDCAL5 A/B phase detector disconnection alarm ignore signal
Signal Detail
Each signal is detailed below.
"<>" in the title of each signal indicates a signal address.
Signal Detail (PMC axis control)
(1) Controlled axis selection signals EAX1 to EAX5 <G0136.0 to G136.4>

[Classification] Input signal, axis-by-axis signal
[Function] Exercises PMC axis control.
[Function] When the signal is set to "1", PMC axis control becomes valid.
When the signal is set to "0", PMC axis control becomes invalid. Changing the setting of
the control axis selection signal is possible only when control axis selection status signal
*EAXSL is set to "0". Changing the setting when *EAXSL is set to "1" results in the
issue of an alarm PS0139. Alarm signal EIALg is set to "1". When the parameter NCC
(No. 8001#5), is set to "0", a command issued from the CNC is executed while the
control axis selection signal is set to "1" and signal *EAXSL is set to "0". When the
parameter is set to "1", the same attempt results in the issue of an alarm PS0139.
If the control axis selection signal is set to "1" while the CNC is currently executing a
command, an alarm is generated.
While *EAXSL is set to "0", the status of alarm signal EIALg does not change to 1 when
the control axis selection signal is set to 1 and an alarm PS0139 is generated. In this case,
the axis can be controlled from the PMC, even when the CNC is in the alarm status.
NOTE
After setting control axis selection signals EAX1 to EAX5 to 1, it
takes at least 8 msec before the PMC can issue commands to the
CNC.
(2) Axis control command signals

EC0g to EC6g<G143.0 to 6, G155.0 to 6, G167.0 to 6, G179.0 to 6>
[Function] One of the axis control block data signals
[Operation] Specifies a type of command with 7 bits.
For the meaning of each command, see Table 16.1.1 (f), "Command list".
- 1337 -
(3) Axis control feedrate signals

EIF0g to EIF15g <G144 to 145, G156 to 157, G168 to 169, G180 to 181>
[Classification] Input signal, Group-by-group signal
[Operation] Two-byte command interface area
Each command has a different function. For details, see Table 16.1.1 (f), "Command list".
(4) Axis control data signals

EID0g to EID31g <G146 to 149, G158 to 161, G170 to 173, G182 to 185>
[Operation] Four-byte command interface area
Each command has a different function. For details, see Table 16.1.1 (f), "Command list".
(5) Axis control command read signal EBUFg <G142.7, G154.7, G166.7, G178.7>
[Function] Directs the CNC to read a block of command data for PMC axis control.
[Operation] For the operation and procedure applicable when the level of this signal is changed from
0 to 1 or from 1 to 0, see Table 16.1.1 (d), "Timing chart of command operation" and
Table 16.1.1 (e), "Buffering status in PMC axis control".
(6) Axis control command read completion signal EBSYg <F130.7, F133.7, F136.7,
F139.7>
[Function] Notifies the system that the CNC has read a block of command data for PMC axis control
and has stored the block in the input buffer.
[Operation] For the operation and procedure applicable when the level of this signal is changed from
0 to 1 or from 1 to 0, see Table 16.1.1 (d), "Timing chart of command operation" and
Table 16.1.1 (e), "Buffering status in PMC axis control".
(7) Reset signal ECLRg <G142.6, G154.6, G166.6, G178.6>

[Function] Resets a PMC axis control command.
[Operation] Resets the corresponding PMC-controlled axis.
When this signal is set to "1", the following is performed:
(1) When the tool is moving along the axis: decelerates and stops the tool.
(2) When the tool is dwelling: Stops the operation.
(3) When an auxiliary function is being executed: Stops the operation.
Simultaneously, all buffered commands are canceled. Any control command is ignored
while this signal is set to "1".
The continuous feed command (EC0g to EC6g: 06h) and external pulse synchronization
command (EC0g to EC6g: 0Bh, 0Dh to 0Fh) can be terminated by setting reset signal
ECLRg to "1". When these commands are terminated, the servo motor decelerates and
stops, the axis moving signal EGENg is set to "0", and the controlled axis selection status
signal *EAXSL is set to "0".
Confirm that the controlled axis selection status signal *EAXSL has been set to "0"
before issuing the next command. Do not set reset signal ECLRg to "0" until the
controlled axis selection status signal *EAXSL has been set to "0".
- 1338 -
The speed command (EC0g to EC6g: 10h) can also be terminated by setting the reset
signal ECLRg to "1". When this command is terminated, the servo motor decelerates and
stops, and the axis moving signal EGENg is set to "0". Confirm that the axis moving
signal EGENg has been set to "0" before issuing the next command. Do not attempt to
set the reset signal ECLRg to "0" until the axis moving signal EGENg has been set to "0".
(8) Axis control temporary stop signal ESTPg <G142.5, G154.5, G166.5, G178.5>
[Function] Temporarily stops a movement before the execution of a block is completed.
[Operation] When this signal is set to "1", the following is performed:
(1) When the tool is moving along the axis: Decelerates and stops the tool.
(2) When the tool is in dwell: Stops the operation.
(3) When an auxiliary function is being executed: Stops the operation when auxiliary
function completion signal EFINg is input.
The stopped operation can be restarted by setting this signal to "0".
(9) Block stop signal ESBKg <G142.3, G154.3, G166.3, G178.3>

(10)Block stop disable signal EMSBKg <G143.7,G155.7, G167.7, G179.7>
[Function] Enables a stop for each command block, or disables a stop for each block.
[Operation] When block stop signal ESBKg is set to "1" during the execution of a command issued
from the PMC, axis control is stopped after the block being executed is completed. When
this signal is set to "0", the buffered command is executed. Block stop signal ESBKg is
disabled when block stop disable signal EMSBKg is set to "1" for the block.
Table 16.1.1 (h), "Timing chart of block stop related signals" shows the timing chart of
command operation.
ESBKg More than 8 msec

(input)
Command block [1] [2] [3]

(input)
EBUFg
(input)
EBSYg
(output)
Input buffer [2]
Waiting buffer [1] [2]
Executing buffer [1]
Table 16.1.1 (h) Timing chart of block stop related signals
(11) Auxiliary function code signals

EM11g to EM48g <F132 to F142, F135 to F145, F138 to F148, F141 to F151>
- 1339 -
(12) Auxiliary function strobe signal EMFg <F131.0, F134.0, F137.0, F140.0>
(13) Auxiliary function 2 strobe signal EMF2g <F131.2, F134.2, F137.2, F140.2>
(14) Auxiliary function 3 strobe signal EMF3g <F131.3, F134.3, F137.3, F140.3>
(15) Auxiliary function completion signal EFINg <G142.0, G154.0, G166.0, G178.0>
[Function] Completes an auxiliary function
[Operation] When an auxiliary function command (EC0g to EC6g: 12h) is issued by the PMC, the
auxiliary function code is specified in a byte (using signals EID0g to EID7g) or two bytes
(using signals EID0g to EID15g), depending on the setting of bit 6 (AUX) of parameter
No. 8001.
The CNC sends the auxiliary function code specified in signals EID0g to EID7g and
EID8g to EID15g to auxiliary function code signals EM11g to EM28g and EM31g to
EM48g and awaits the auxiliary function completion signal EFINg. When the auxiliary
function completion signal EFINg is returned, the CNC starts executing the next block.
The timings for sending the auxiliary function code signals and auxiliary function strobe
signal, as well as for receiving the auxiliary function completion signal, are the same as
those for the auxiliary functions (M functions) under the control of the CNC. See
"Auxiliary function executing signal" for details.
(16) Servo-off signal ESOFg <G142.4, G154.4, G166.4, G178.4>

[Function] Changes the servo-off state.
[Operation] When this signal is set to "1", the servo motor for the corresponding PMC-controlled axis
is turned off (servo-off state). When this signal is set to "0", the servo motor is turned on.
When a torque control command (EC0g to EC6g: 11h) is specified, entering the servo-off
state cancels torque control mode, but the torque control state remains set. In such a case,
set reset signal ECLRg to "1".
(17) Buffering disable signal EMBUFg <G142.2, G154.2, G166.2, G178.2>

[Function] Changes the buffering disabled state.
[Operation] When this signal is set to "1", commands from the PMC are not read while the executing,
waiting, or input buffer contains a block. If this signal is set to "1" when any of these
buffers contain a block, that block is executed but subsequent commands are read only
when the buffers are all empty.
To discriminate the buffering disabled condition, the CNC outputs the axis control
command read completion signal (EBSYg) only when a command is read when all
buffers are empty.
Table 16.1.1 (i), "Timing chart of buffering related signals" shows the timing chart of
command operation.
- 1340 -
EMBUFg
(input)
Command block [1] [2]
(input)
EBUFg
(input)
Command
disabled
EBSYg
(output)
Input buffer
Waiting buffer
Executing buffer [1] [2]

Beginning of execution End Beginning of execution
Table 16.1.1 (i) Timing chart of buffering related signals
Buffering is disabled, regardless of the buffering disable signal EMBUFg, for the following commands:
(1) Skip-feed per minute (EC0g to EC6g : 03h)
(2) Reference position return (EC0g to EC6g : 05h)
(3) 1st reference position return (EC0g to EC6g : 07h)
(4) 2nd reference position return (EC0g to EC6g : 08h)
(5) 3rd reference position return (EC0g to EC6g : 09h)
(6) 4th reference position return (EC0g to EC6g : 0Ah)
(7) Machine coordinate system selection (EC0g to EC6g : 20h)
(18) Controlled axis selection status signal *EAXSL <F129.7>

[Function] Indicates whether PMC axis control is being exercised.
[Operation] When this signal is set to "0", controlled axis selection signals EAX1 to EAX5 can be
changed.
(1) When the tool is moving along a PMC-controlled axis
(2) When a block is being read into a buffer
(3) When the servo-off signal ESOFg is set to "1"
When this signal is set to "1", controlled axis selection signals EAX1 to EAX5 cannot be
changed. Any attempt to change these signals results in the output of an alarm PS0139.
If an attempt to change signals EAX1 to EAX5 is made when servo-off signal ESOFg is
"1", an alarm PS0139 occurs and cannot be released simply by setting reset signal ECLRg
to "1". In such a case, restore signals EAX1 to EAX5 or set servo-off signal ESOFg to
"0" before setting reset signal ECLRg to "1". When a command is issued for any of the
groups A to D with PMC axis control, signal *EAXSL is set to "1" to disable axis
selection. Thus, changing signals EAX1 to EAX5 results in the output of an alarm
PS0139. For groups for which commands are not issued, however, axis selection is
enabled if parameter DSL (No. 8004#5) is set accordingly.
(19) In-position signal EINPg <F130.0, F133.0, F136.0, F139.0>

- 1341 -
[Function] Indicates the in-position state.

[Operation] This signal is set to "1" when the corresponding PMC-controlled axis is in the in-position
state.
When the tool is decelerated, in-position check is performed to disable the next command
until the tool enters the in-position area. The in-position check, however, can be skipped
using bit 6 (NCI) of parameter No. 8004 to reduce the cycle time.
NOTE
When the axis is fed at a very low speed, the in -position signal
might turn to "1".
(20) Following zero checking signal ECKZg <F130.1, F133.1, F136.1, F139.1>
[Function] Indicates the following zero state.
[Operation] This signal is set to "1" when following zero check or in-position check is being
performed for the corresponding PMC-controlled axis.
The following zero state means that the acceleration/deceleration delay amount is zero.
(21) Alarm signal EIALg <F130.2, F133.2, F136.2, F139.2>

[Function] Indicates the alarm state related to PMC axis control.
[Operation] This signal is set to "1" when a servo alarm, overtravel alarm, or alarm PS0130 or PS0139
occurs for the corresponding PMC-controlled axis. This signal is set to "0" when the reset
signal ECLRg is set to "1" after the alarm is released, as described below.
Servo alarm
Eliminate the cause of the alarm, then reset the CNC.
Overtravel alarm
Move the tool into the area within the stored stroke limit, then reset the CNC.
The following commands can be used to move the tool into the area within the
stored stroke limit during an overtravel alarm:
(1) Rapid traverse (EC0g to EC6g : 00h)
(2) Cutting feed - feed per minute (EC0g to EC6g : 01h)
(3) Cutting feed - feed per rotation(EC0g to EC6g : 02h)
(4) Continuous feed (EC0g to EC6g : 06h)
(5) External pulse synchronization - first manual handle (EC0g to EC6g : 0Dh)
(6) External pulse synchronization - second manual handle (EC0g to EC6g : 0Eh)
(7) External pulse synchronization - third manual handle (EC0g to EC6g : 0Fh)
Alarm (PS0130, PS0139)
Reset the CNC.
See "Alarms and messages" for details.
Reset signal ECLRg cannot be used to reset the CNC in the above cases. Use the reset
button on the setting panel, external reset signal ERS, or emergency stop signal *ESP.
Even if an alarm occurs on an axis not related to the group, alarm signal EIALx does not
generally change from 0 to 1.
(22) Axis moving signal EGENg <F130.4, F133.4, F136.4, F139.4>

[Function] Indicates the state of movement on an axis.
[Operation] This signal is set to "1" when the tool is moving along the corresponding PMC-controlled
axis according to commands such as rapid traverse (EC0g to EC6g: 00h) and cutting feed
(EC0g to EC6g: 01h).
- 1342 -
When the dwell command (EC0g to EC6g: 04h) is specified, this signal remains to be set
to 0.
NOTE
This signal is set to "0" when distribution for the axis is completed
(the signal is set to "0" during deceleration).
(23) Auxiliary function executing signal EDENg <F130.3, F133.3, F136.3, F139.3>
[Function] Indicates the state of auxiliary function execution.
[Operation] When an auxiliary function (EC0g to EC6g: 12h) is specified by the PMC, this signal is
set to "1" during the period from when auxiliary function codes EID0g to EID15g are
sent to auxiliary function code signals EM11g to EM48g until the auxiliary function
completion signal EFINg is returned.
Table 16.1.1 (j), "Timing chart of auxiliary function related signals" shows the timing
chart of command operation.
TMF and TFIN in the table are set in parameter No. 3010 and No.3011.
Command block Auxiliary function command Next command

(input)
EM11g to EM48g
(output)
TMF
EMFg, EMF2g, EMF3g

(output)
TFIN
EFINg
(input)
EDENg
(output)
Table 16.1.1 (j) Timing chart of auxiliary function related signals
(24) Negative-direction overtravel signal EOTNg <F130.6, F133.6, F136.6, F139.6>

(25) Positive-direction overtravel signal EOTPg <F130.5, F133.5, F136.5, F139.5>
[Function] Indicates the overtravel state.
[Operation] These signals are set to "1" when an overtravel alarm is detected. When the stroke limit in
the negative direction is exceeded, signal EOTNg is set to "1". When the stroke limit in
the positive direction is exceeded, signal EOTPg is set to "1". Simultaneously, alarm
signal EIALg is set to "1".
These signals are set to "0" when the overtravel alarm is released and reset signal ECLRg
is set to "1". See "Alarm signal EIALg" for details of how to release an overtravel alarm.
- 1343 -
(26) Feedrate override signals *EFOV0g to *EFOV7g <G151 (, G163, G175, G187)>
[Function] Applies cutting override.
[Operation] Like the CNC's feedrate override signals *FV0 to *FV4, these signals can be used to
select the override for the cutting feedrate, in steps of 1% from 0 to 254%, independently
of the CNC using the parameter OVE (No. 8001#2).
These signals form an eight-bit binary code and correspond to the override value as
follows:
7
Override value = ∑ 2 ×Vi %
i =0
i
Vi = 0 when signal *EFOVi is 1

Vi = 1 when signal *EFOVi is 0
That is, each signal has the following significance:
*EFOV7 = 128%, *EFOV3 = 8% ,
*EFOV6 = 64%, *EFOV2 = 4% ,
*EFOV5 = 32%, *EFOV1 = 2% ,
*EFOV4 = 16%, *EFOV0 = 1%
When all signals are set to "0", the override is regarded as being 0%, as well as when all
signals are "1".
(27) Override cancellation signal EOVCg <G150.5 (G162.5, G174.5, G186.5)>

[Function] Disables override.
[Operation] When override is enabled, independently of the CNC, by setting the parameter OVE (No.
8001#2), setting this signal to "1" fixes the cutting feed override to 100%. This signal
does not affect the rapid traverse override.
Bit 5 (IFV) of parameter No. 8005 is used to determine whether these signals are
path-by-path signals or group-by-group signals.
When the IFV parameter is set to 0, these signals are path-by-path signals. When the IFV
parameter is set to 1, these signals are group-by-group signals.
(28) Rapid traverse override signals EROV1, EROV2 <Gn150.0,1>

[Function] Applies rapid traverse override.
[Operation] These signals can be used to select the override for the rapid traverse rate, independently
of the CNC, by setting of the parameter OVE (No. 8001#2).
Rapid traverse override signals Override value
EROV2 EROV1
0 0 100%
0 1 50%
1 0 25%
1 1 F0
F0 is the minimum feedrate specified with parameter No. 1421.
(29) Dry run signal EDRN <G150.7>

(30) Manual rapid traverse selection signal ERT <G150.6>
[Function] Applies dry run, or chooses whether to apply dry run.
- 1344 -
[Operation] These signals can be used to perform dry run or manual rapid traverse, independently of
the CNC, by setting the parameter OVE (No. 8001#2). When the dry run signal EDRN is
set to "1", the specified rapid traverse rate and cutting feedrate are ignored and the tool
moves at the dry run speed (set in parameter No. 1410) multiplied by the specified
override. Parameter RDE (No. 8001#3) can be used to specify whether to enable or
disable dry run for rapid traverse.
When the manual rapid traverse selection signal ERT is set to "1" during dry run, the tool
moves at the rapid traverse rate for rapid traverse and at the maximum jog feedrate for
cutting feed. When the signal is set to "0", the tool moves at the jog feedrate. When the
dry run signal EDRN is set to "0", the specified rapid traverse rate or cutting feedrate is
restored.
Manual rapid traverse select Command from PMC
signal At rapid traverse At Cutting feed
1 Rapid traverse rate Cutting feedrate
0 Dry run feed JV * Dry run feed rate JV
* Can also be set to the rapid traverse rate with the parameter RDE (No. 8001#3).
(31) Override 0% signal EOV0 <F129.5>

[Function] Indicates whether the override value is 0%.
[Operation] This signal is set to "1" when the feedrate override is 0%.
(32) Skip signal ESKIP<X004.6>, ESKIP#2<X013.6>

[Classification] Direct input signal
[Function] Applies skip.
[Operation] When this signal is set to "1" during execution of the skip cutting command, the block
being executed is immediately stopped and the next block is executed. This signal is
unique during PMC axis control. Parameter SKE (No. 8001#7) can be used to select
whether to use signal SKIP, which is the common skip signal for the PMC and CNC, or
PMC-specific skip signal ESKIP.
This skip signal is valid for those axes that are assigned to path 1 to path 2.
For those axes that are assigned to path 1, ESKIP (X004.6) is valid.
For those axes that are assigned to path 2, ESKIP#2 (X013.6) is valid.
(33) Distribution completion signals EADEN1 to EADEN5<F112.0 to 4>

[Function] Indicates the state of distribution based on PMC axis control.
[Operation] These signals are set to "0" when the tool is moving with a command from the PMC. The
signals are set to "1" when the tool is not moving, except when it is stopped by an axis
control temporary stop signal ESTPg during the execution of a move command.
(34) Buffer full signal EABUFg <F131.1, F134.1, F137.1, F140.1>

[Function] Indicates the PMC axis control command buffering state.
[Operation] When the group input buffer holds a command block, this signal is set to 1. When no
command is buffered, this signal is set to 0.
(35) Controlling signals EACNT1 to EACNT5<F182.0 to 4>

[Function] Indicates that PMC axis control is being exercised.
[Operation] When the control axis selection status signal *EAXSL is set to 1, the bit signal
corresponding to an axis being controlled is set to 1.
- 1345 -
A bit signal is set to 1 also when the servo-off signal ESOFg is set to 1.
(36) Accumulated zero check signal

ELCKZg <G142.1, G154.1, G166.1, G178.1>
[Function] Makes an accumulated zero check.
[Operation] Setting this signal to 1 causes an accumulated zero check between blocks to be made at a
subsequent cutting feed command. The accumulated zero state means that the
acceleration/deceleration delay amount is zero.
(1) Cutting feed - feed per minute (EC0g to EC6g: 01h)
(2) Cutting feed -feed per rotation (EC0g to EC6g: 02h)
(3) Cutting feed - sec/block (EC0g to EC6g : 21h)
This signal can be used, for example, with the chopping function.
(37) Torque control mode signal

TRQM1 to TRQM5 <F190>
[Function] Indicates an axis in the torque control mode.
(38) Manual pulse magnification select signal

HNDMP<G088.3>
[Function] In external pulse synchronization of PMC axis control, the valid range of an external
pulse set to the axis control feedrate signals EIF0g to EIF15g is changed.
[Operation] When this signal is set to 0, use the higher bits (EIF8g to EIF15g) to specify the integer
part of an external pulse weight, and use the lower bits (EIF0g to EIF7g) to specify the
fractional part. The valid range of an external pulse is ±1/256 to ±127.
When this signal is set to 1, use the higher bits (EIF5g to EIF15g) to specify the integer
part of an external pulse weight, and use the lower bits (EIF0g to EIF4g) to specify the
fractional part. The valid range of an external pulse is ±1/32 to ±1023.
Signal detail (Related signals)

The signals related to PMC axis control are detailed below.
The [Function] field and [Operation] field provide descriptions related to PMC axis
control. For the general functions of the signals, see the description of each signal.
(1) External deceleration signals 1 *+ED1 to *+ED5<G118.0 to 4>, *-ED1 to *-ED5<G120.0 to 4>
[Function] Decelerates the movement along a specified axis to a parameter-set feedrate.
[Operation] While a signal is set to 0 for an axis, the feedrate along the axis in the specified direction
can be forcibly decelerated to a certain feedrate (external deceleration feedrate) set by a
parameter (dependent on the type of command).
If the feedrate is lower than the external deceleration feedrate, however, the specified
feedrate continues to be used.
The feedrate for other axes with these signals not set to 0 is not affected.
For details, refer to the Subsection 7.1.9, “External Deceleration.”
A signal is available for each controlled axis and for each direction. Each signal name
includes the sign + or - for direction indication, and the number at the end of each signal
name indicates a controlled axis number. These signals are shared by the CNC.
- 1346 -
* x ED y z
z
1: Feed along the first axis is decelerated.
2: Feed along the second axis is decelerated.
:
5: Feed along the fifth axis is decelerated.
y
None: Follows external deceleration setting 1.
2: Follows external deceleration setting 2.
3: Follows external deceleration setting 3.
x
+ : Feed in the positive direction is decelerated.
- : Feed in the negative direction is decelerated.
When any of the following axis control command is specified while the parameter EDC
(No. 8005#0) is held at 1, the external deceleration function becomes effective:
(1) Rapid traverse (EC0g to EC6g : 00h)
(2) Cutting feed - feed per minute (EC0g to EC6g : 01h)
(3) Reference position return (EC0g to EC6g : 05h)
(4) Continuous feed (EC0g to EC6g : 06h)
(5) First reference position return (EC0g to EC6g : 07h)
(6) Second reference position return (EC0g to EC6g : 08h)
(7) Third reference position return (EC0g to EC6g : 09h)
(8) Fourth reference position return (EC0g to EC6g : 0Ah)
(9) Machine coordinate system selection (EC0g to EC6g : 20h)
(10) Cutting feed - sec/block (EC0g to EC6g : 21h)
For each command above, the external deceleration feedrate settings for axis-by-axis
rapid traverse (parameter No. 1427, No. 1441, and No. 1444) are valid.
To cutting feed - feed per minute (EC0g to EC6g: 01h) and cutting feed - sec/block
(EC0g to EC6g: 21h) as well, the settings for rapid traverse are applied instead of the
external deceleration feedrate settings for cutting feed (parameter No. 1426, No. 1440,
and No. 1443).
(4) 1% rapid traverse override select signal *HROV <G96.7>

(5) 1% rapid traverse override signal HROV0 to 6 <G96.0 to 6>

[Function] Enables override to be applied in steps of 1%. Shared by the CNC.
[Operation] If the 1% rapid traverse override select signal *HROV <G96.7> is set to 1 when bit 2
(OVE) of parameter No. 8001 is set to 0, rapid traverse override can be specified in steps
of 1% by using the 1% rapid traverse override signals HROV0 to HROV6 <G96.0 to 6>.
(6) 0.1% rapid traverse override select signal *FHROV <G353.7>

(7) 0.1% rapid traverse override signal FHRO0 to 9 <G352.0 to 7, G353.0 to 1>
[Function] An override can be applied in steps of 0.1%. This signal is used with the CNC as well.
- 1347 -
[Operation] If bit 2 (OVE) of parameter No. 8001 is set to 0, the 0.1% rapid traverse override signals
FHRO0 to FHRO9 <G352.0 to 7, G353.0 to 1> enable a rapid traverse override to be
specified in steps of 0.1% when the 1% rapid traverse override select signal *HROV
<G96.7> and the 0.1% rapid traverse override select signal *FHROV <G353.7> are set to
1.
(8) Rapid traverse override signal ROV1 <G14.0>, ROV2 <G14.1>

[Function] Overrides the rapid traverse rate. Shared by the CNC.
[Operation] This signal is a two-bit code signal, and sets an override value as indicated below.
Rapid traverse override signal Override value

ROV2 ROV1
0 0 100%
0 1 50%
1 0 25%
1 1 F0 (parameter (No.1421))
(9) First reference position return completion signals ZP1 to ZP5 <F94.0 - 4>
(10) Second reference position return completion signals ZP21 to ZP25 <F96.0 - 4>
(11) Third reference position return completion signals ZP31 to ZP35 <F98.0 - 4>
(12) Fourth reference position return completion signals ZP41 to ZP45 <F100.0 - 4>
[Function] Posts that the tool is at the reference position on a controlled axis. Shared by the CNC.
[Operation] The number at the end of a signal name indicates the number of a controlled axis.
Each of these signals is set to 1 when reference position return is completed, and the tool
enters the in-position area.
Each of these signals is set to 0 when a movement is made from the reference position, an
emergence stop occurs, or a servo alarm is issued.
(13) A/B phase detector disconnection alarm ignore signal

NDCAL1 to NDCAL5 <G202.0 to 4>>
[Function] Does not output the A/B phase detector hard disconnection alarm.
[Operation] While this signal is set to 1, the A/B phase detector hard disconnection alarm is not
output during speed specification based on PMC axis control. Table 16.1.1 (k), "Timing
chart of A/B phase detector disconnection alarm ignore signal" shows a timing chart.
A/B phase detector

disconnection alarm
ignore parameter
HNG (No.2017#4)
NDCALx
(input) Even if hard disconnection
alarm is issued, servo soft
does not notify NC.
Hard disconnection
Occurs at high speed Reset by ALR
Table 16.1.1 (k) Timing chart of A/B phase detector disconnection alarm ignore signal
- 1348 -
NOTE
1 Change the level of this signal from 1 to 0 before switching from a
speed command to a position command.
2 After switching from a speed command to a position command, be
sure to perform a manual reference position return operation before
making a movement on the axis.
3 This function cannot be used when an absolute-position detector is
attached.
4 To enable this signal, set bit 4 of parameter No. 2017 to 1.
Signal address
- Signals for PMC axis control
DI → CNC
The signals below are direct signals for PMC axis control.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X004 ESKIP
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#2
X013 ESKIP
PMC → CNC
The signals are listed below.

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G088 HNDMP
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G136 EAX5#1 EAX4#1 EAX3#1 EAX2#1 EAX1#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1136 EAX5#2 EAX4#2 EAX3#2 EAX2#2 EAX1#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G202 NDCAL5 NDCAL4 NDCAL3 NDCAL2 NDCAL1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G150 EDRN#1 ERT#1 EOVC#1 EROV2#1 EROV1#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G151 *EFOV7#1 *EFOV6#1 *EFOV5#1 *EFOV4#1 *EFOV3#1 *EFOV2#1 *EFOV1#1 *EFOV0#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1150 EDRN#2 ERT#2 EOVC#2 EROV2#2 EROV1#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1151 *EFOV7#2 *EFOV6#2 *EFOV5#2 *EFOV4#2 *EFOV3#2 *EFOV2#2 *EFOV1#2 *EFOV0#2
- 1349 -
The signals in groups A to D of the first path are shown below.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G142 EBUFA#1 ECLRA#1 ESTPA#1 ESOFA#1 ESBKA#1 EMBUFA#1 ELCKZA#1 EFINA#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G143 EMSBKA#1 EC6A#1 EC5A#1 EC4A#1 EC3A#1 EC2A#1 EC1A#1 EC0A#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G144 EIF7A#1 EIF6A#1 EIF5A#1 EIF4A#1 EIF3A#1 EIF2A#1 EIF1A#1 EIF0A#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G146 EID7A#1 EID6A#1 EID5A#1 EID4A#1 EID3A#1 EID2A#1 EID1A#1 EID7A#1
For group A
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G150 EOVCA#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G151 *EFOV7A#1 *EFOV6A#1 *EFOV5A#1 *EFOV4A#1 *EFOV3A#1 *EFOV2A#1 *EFOV1A#1 *EFOV0A#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G154 EBUFB#1 ECLRB#1 ESTPB#1 ESOFB#1 ESBKB#1 EMBUFB#1 ELCKZB#1 EFINB#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G155 EMSBKB#1 EC6B#1 EC5B#1 EC4B#1 EC3B#1 EC2B#1 EC1B#1 EC0B#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G156 EIF7B#1 EIF6B#1 EIF5B#1 EIF4B#1 EIF3B#1 EIF2B#1 EIF1B#1 EIF0B#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G158 EID7B#1 EID6B#1 EID5B#1 EID4B#1 EID3B#1 EID2B#1 EID1B#1 EID7B#1
For group B
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G162 EOVCB#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G163 *EFOV7B#1 *EFOV6B#1 *EFOV5B#1 *EFOV4B#1 *EFOV3B#1 *EFOV2B#1 *EFOV1B#1 *EFOV0B#1
- 1350 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G166 EBUFC#1 ECLRC#1 ESTPC#1 ESOFC#1 ESBKC#1 EMBUFC#1 ELCKZC#1 EFINC#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G167 EMSBKC#1 EC6C#1 EC5C#1 EC4C#1 EC3C#1 EC2C#1 EC1C#1 EC0C#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G168 EIF7C#1 EIF6C#1 EIF5C#1 EIF4C#1 EIF3C#1 EIF2C#1 EIF1C#1 EIF0C#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G170 EID7C#1 EID6C#1 EID5C#1 EID4C#1 EID3C#1 EID2C#1 EID1C#1 EID7C#1
For group C
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G174 EOVCC#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G175 *EFOV7C#1 *EFOV6C#1 *EFOV5C#1 *EFOV4C#1 *EFOV3C#1 *EFOV2C#1 *EFOV1C#1 *EFOV0C#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G178 EBUFD#1 ECLRD#1 ESTPD#1 ESOFD#1 ESBKD#1 EMBUFD#1 ELCKZD#1 EFIND#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G179 EMSBKD#1 EC6D#1 EC5D#1 EC4D#1 EC3D#1 EC2D#1 EC1D#1 EC0D#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G180 EIF7D#1 EIF6D#1 EIF5D#1 EIF4D#1 EIF3D#1 EIF2D#1 EIF1D#1 EIF0D#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G182 EID7D#1 EID6D#1 EID5D#1 EID4D#1 EID3D#1 EID2D#1 EID1D#1 EID7D#1
For group D
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G186 EOVCD#1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G187 *EFOV7D#1 *EFOV6D#1 *EFOV5D#1 *EFOV4D#1 *EFOV3D#1 *EFOV2D#1 *EFOV1D#1 *EFOV0D#1
- 1351 -
The signals in groups A to D of the second path (T series (2-path control)) are shown below.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1142 EBUFA#2 ECLRA#2 ESTPA#2 ESOFA#2 ESBKA#2 EMBUFA#2 ELCKZA#2 EFINA#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1143 EMSBKA#2 EC6A#2 EC5A#2 EC4A#2 EC3A#2 EC2A#2 EC1A#2 EC0A#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
For group A
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1150 EOVCA#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1151 *EFOV7A#2 *EFOV6A#2 *EFOV5A#2 *EFOV4A#2 *EFOV3A#2 *EFOV2A#2 *EFOV1A#2 *EFOV0A#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1154 EBUFB#2 ECLRB#2 ESTPB#2 ESOFB#2 ESBKB#2 EMBUFB#2 ELCKZB#2 EFINB#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1155 EMSBKB#2 EC6B#2 EC5B#2 EC4B#2 EC3B#2 EC2B#2 EC1B#2 EC0B#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
For group B
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1162 EOVCB#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1163 *EFOV7B#2 *EFOV6B#2 *EFOV5B#2 *EFOV4B#2 *EFOV3B#2 *EFOV2B#2 *EFOV1B#2 *EFOV0B#2
- 1352 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1166 EBUFC#2 ECLRC#2 ESTPC#2 ESOFC#2 ESBKC#2 EMBUFC#2 ELCKZC#2 EFINC#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1167 EMSBKC#2 EC6C#2 EC5C#2 EC4C#2 EC3C#2 EC2C#2 EC1C#2 EC0C#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
For group C
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1174 EOVCC#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1175 *EFOV7C#2 *EFOV6C#2 *EFOV5C#2 *EFOV4C#2 *EFOV3C#2 *EFOV2C#2 *EFOV1C#2 *EFOV0C#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1178 EBUFD#2 ECLRD#2 ESTPD#2 ESOFD#2 ESBKD#2 EMBUFD#2 ELCKZD#2 EFIND#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1179 EMSBKD#2 EC6D#2 EC5D#2 EC4D#2 EC3D#2 EC2D#2 EC1D#2 EC0D#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
For group D
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1186 EOVCD#2
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G1187 *EFOV7D#2 *EFOV6D#2 *EFOV5D#2 *EFOV4D#2 *EFOV3D#2 *EFOV2D#2 *EFOV1D#2 *EFOV0D#2
- 1353 -
Related signals
DI → CNC
The signals below are direct signals related to PMC axis control.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
X004 SKIP
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#3
X011 SKIP
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#2
X013 SKIP
PMC→CNC
The signals below are Input signals related to PMC axis control.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G014 ROV2 ROV1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G096 *HROV HROV6 HROV5 HROV4 HROV3 HROV2 HROV1 HROV0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G101 *+ED25 *+ED24 *+ED23 *+ED22 *+ED21
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G103 *-ED25 *-ED24 *-ED23 *-ED22 *-ED21
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G106 MI5 MI4 MI3 MI2 MI1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G107 *+ED35 *+ED34 *+ED33 *+ED32 *+ED31
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G109 *-ED35 *-ED34 *-ED33 *-ED32 *-ED31
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G118 *+ED5 *+ED4 *+ED3 *+ED2 *+ED1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G120 *-ED5 *-ED4 *-ED3 *-ED2 *-ED1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G352 FHROV FHRO6 FHRO5 FHRO4 FHRO3 FHRO2 FHRO1 FHRO0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G353 *FHROV FHRO9 FHRO8
CNC→PMC
The signals below are output signals related to PMC axis control.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
F094 ZP8 ZP7 ZP6 ZP5 ZP4 ZP3 ZP2 ZP1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
- 1354 -
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0000 INI

#2 INI Unit of input

0: In metrics
1: In inches
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
0012 MIRx

#0 MIRx Mirror image for each axis

0: Mirror image is off. (Normal)
1: Mirror image is on. (Mirror)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1001 INM

NOTE
#0 INM Least command increment on the linear axis

0: In mm (metric system machine)
1: In inches (inch system machine)
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1005 DLZx

#1 DLZx Function for setting the reference position without dogs

0: Disabled
1: Enabled
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1006 ZMIx DIAx

NOTE
- 1355 -
#3 DIAx The move command for each axis is based on:

0: Radius specification
1: Diameter specification
NOTE
For the FS0i-C, one of the following changes is required besides
setting bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006 so that the axis based
on diameter specification achieves the specified amount of
movement.
• Halve the command multiplication (the detection unit is not
changed).
• Halve the detection unit and double the flexible feed gear
(DMR).
For the FS0i-D, only if bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006 is set,
the CNC halves the specified pulse. Accordingly, the above
changes are not required (when the detection unit is not changed).
To halve the detection unit, double both CMR and DMR.
#5 ZMIx The direction of manual reference position return is:

0: + direction
1: - direction
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1008 RABx ROAx

NOTE
#0 ROAx The roll-over function of a rotation axis is

0: Invalid
1: Valid
NOTE
ROAx specifies the function only for a rotation axis (for which ROTx,
#0 of parameter No.1006, is set to 1)
#1 RABx In the absolute commands, the axis rotates in the direction

0: In which the distance to the target is shorter.
1: Specified by the sign of command value.
NOTE
RABx is valid only when ROAx is 1.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1201 ZPR

- 1356 -
#0 ZPR Automatic setting of a coordinate system when the manual reference position return is
performed
0: Not set automatically
1: Set automatically
NOTE
ZPR is valid when the workpiece coordinate system is not used
(when bit 0 (NWZ) of parameter No. 8136 is 1). When the
workpiece coordinate system is used, the workpiece coordinate
system is established based on the workpiece origin offset
(parameters No. 1220 to 1226) during a manual reference position
return, regardless of the setting of this parameter.
1241 Coordinate value of the second reference position in the machine coordinate system
1242 Coordinate value of the third reference position in the machine coordinate system
1243 Coordinate value of the fourth reference position in the machine coordinate system

[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (machine unit)
Set the coordinate values of the second to fourth reference positions in the machine
coordinate system.
Coordinate system of the reference position used when automatic coordinate system setting is
1250
performed

[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (input unit)
Set the coordinate system of the reference position on each axis to be used for setting a
coordinate system automatically.
1260 The shift amount per one rotation of a rotation axis
NOTE

- 1357 -
(B) )
Set the shift amount per one rotation of a rotation axis.
For the rotation axis used for cylindrical interpolation, set the standard value.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1402 JOV

#1 JOV Jog override is:

0: Enabled
1: Disabled (tied to 100%)
1421 F0 rate of rapid traverse override for each axis

Set the F0 rate of the rapid traverse override for each axis.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1803 TQF

#4 TQF When torque control is performed by the PMC axis control, follow-up operation is:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1805 TRE

#1 TRE When bit 4 of parameter No. 1803 is set to 0 (not to perform follow-up operation with a
torque control command in PMC axis control), the servo error counter is:
0: Updated.
When the error count exceeds the maximum allowable cumulative travel value
(parameter No. 1885), the alarm (SV0423) is issued.
1: Not updated.
No errors are accumulated, so that the alarm (SV0423) is not issued. When the
maximum allowable feedrate is exceeded, however, the alarm (SV0422) is issued.
To return to position control when this parameter bit is set to 1, a reference position
return operation needs to be performed.
- 1358 -
1826 In-position width for each axis

The in-position width is set for each axis.
When the deviation of the machine position from the specified position (the absolute
value of the positioning deviation) is smaller than the in-position width, the machine is
assumed to have reached the specified position. (The machine is in the in-position state.)
1827 In-position width in cutting feed for each axis

Set an in-position width for each axis in cutting feed. This parameter is used when bit 4
(CCI) of parameter No.1801=1.
1836 Servo error amount where reference position return is possible

This parameter sets a servo error used to enable reference position return.
In general, set this parameter to 0. (When 0 is set, 128 is assumed as the default.)
If, during reference position return, such a feedrate as exceeding a set value is not reached
even once before the limit switch for deceleration is released (the deceleration signal
(*DEC) is set to 1 again), the alarm (PS0090) "REFERENCE POSITION RETURN
FAILURE" is issued.
If, during reference position return, such a feedrate as exceeding a set servo error amount
is not reached even once before the limit switch for deceleration is released (the
deceleration signal is set to 1 again), the alarm (PS0090) "REFERENCE POSITION
RETURN FAILURE" is issued.
1885 Maximum allowable value for total travel during torque control

Set a maximum allowable cumulative travel value (error counter value) during torque
control. If the cumulative travel value exceeds the set value, the servo alarm (SV0423)
is issued.
NOTE
This parameter is enabled when the parameter TQF (bit 4 of
No.1803) is 0 (follow-up is not performed during torque control).
1886 Positional deviation when torque control is canceled

- 1359 -

Set a positional deviation value when torque control is canceled to return to positional
deviation. After the positional deviation has fallen to the parameter-set value, switching
to position control is performed.
NOTE
This parameter is enabled when the parameter TQF (bit 4 of
No.1803) is 0 (follow-up is not performed during torque control).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2000 DGP
NOTE

#1 DGP Upon power-up, the digital servo parameter specific to a motor is:
0: Set.
1: Not set.
When this parameter is set to 0 after the motor type is set, the digital servo parameter is
automatically set to the standard value appropriate for the motor type and this parameter
is set to 1 at the same time.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2007 TRQ

#7 TRQ Torque control is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
2017 HTN

#4 HTN In the speed command mode, the hardware broken wire alarm for the separate detector is:
0: Detected.
1: Ignored.
2105 Torque constant

[Unit of data] 0.00001Nm/ (torque command)
- 1360 -
This parameter is set for each torque characteristic.
NOTE
When a linear motor is used, the data unit is 0.001 N/(1 torque
command).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3002 IOV

#4 IOV Override-related signal logic is:

0: Used without modification
(A signal of negative logic is used as a negative logic signal, and a signal of positive
logic is used as a positive logic signal.)
1: Inverted
(A signal of negative logic is used as a positive logic signal, and a signal of positive
logic is used as a negative logic signal.)
The signals indicated below are affected.
Signal of negative logic:
Feedrate override signals *FV0 to *FV7<G0012>
Second feedrate override signals*AFV0 to *AFV7<G0013>
Feedrate override signals (for PMC axis control)
*EFOV0g to *EFOV7g<G0151/G0163/G0175/G0187>
Software operator’s panel signals *FV0O to *FV7O<F0078>
Signals of positive logic:
Rapid traverse override signals ROV1,ROV2<G0014.0,1>
Software operator’s panel signals ROV1O,ROV2O<F0076.4,5>
Rapid traverse override signals (for PMC axis control)
EROV1g,EROV2g<G0150.0, 1, G0162.0, 1, G0174.0, 1, G0186.0, 1>
3010 Time lag in strobe signals MF, SF, TF, and BF

[Unit of data] msec
The time required to send strobe signals MF, SF, TF, and BF after the M, S, T, and B
codes are sent, respectively.
M, S, T, B code
MF, SF, TF, BF,

signal
Delay time
NOTE
The time is counted in units of 8 ms. If the set value is not a
multiple of four, it is raised to the next multiple of eight.
Example
When 30 is set, 32 ms is assumed.
- 1361 -
3011 Acceptable width of M, S, T, and B function completion signal (FIN)

[Unit of data] msec
Set the minimum signal width of the valid M, S, T, and B function completion signal
(FIN).
M, S, T, B code
MF, SF, TF, BF signal
FIN sigal
Ignored because shorter Valid because longer

than min. signal width than min. signal width
NOTE
The time is counted in units of 8 ms. If the set value is not a
multiple of four, it is raised to the next multiple of eight.
Example
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3104 PPD

#3 PPD Relative position display when a coordinate system is set

0: Not preset
1: Preset
NOTE
If any of the following is executed when PPD is set to 1, the relative
position display is preset to the same value as the absolute position
display:
(1) Manual reference position return
(2) Coordinate system setting based on G92 (G50 for G code
system A on the T series)
(3) Workpiece coordinate system presetting based on G92.1
(G50.3 for G code system A on the T series)
(4) When a T code for the T series is specified.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3105 PCF
- 1362 -
#1 PCF Addition of the movement of the PMC-controlled axes to the actual speed display
0: Added
1: Not added
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3115 NDFx

#3 NDFx In calculation for actual cutting feedrate display, the feedrate of a selected axis is:
0: Considered.
1: Not considered.
NOTE
When using the electronic gear box function (EGB) (M series), set
1 for the EGB dummy axis to suppress position display.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8001 SKE AUX NCC RDE OVE MLE

#0 MLE Whether all axis machine lock signal MLK is valid for PMC-controlled axes
0: Valid
1: Invalid
The axis-by-axis machine lock signal MLKx depends on the setting of bit 1 of parameter
No. 8006.
#2 OVE Signals related to dry run and override used in PMC axis control
0: Same signals as those used for the CNC
1: Signals specific to the PMC
The signals used depend on the settings of these parameter bits as indicated below.
No.8001#2=0
No.8001#2=1
Signals (same signals as those
(signals specific to the PMC)
used for the CNC)
Feedrate override signals *FV0to*FV7 G012 *EFOV0to*EFOV7 G151
Override cancellation signal OVC G006.4 EOVC G150.5
Rapid traverse override signals ROV1,2 G014.0,1 EROV1,2 G150.0,1
Dry run signal DRN G046.7 EDRN G150.7
Rapid traverse selection signal RT G019.7 ERT G150.6
(The signal addresses at PMC selection time are for the first group.)
#3 RDE Whether dry run is valid for rapid traverse in PMC axis control
0: Invalid
1: Valid
#5 NCC When the program specifies a move command for a PMC-controlled axis (with the
controlled axis selection signal *EAX set to 1) not placed under PMC axis control:
0: CNC command is valid.
1: The alarm (PS0130) is issued.
- 1363 -
#6 AUX In PMC axis control, the auxiliary function command (12H) output size is:
0: 1 byte (0 to 255)
1: 2 bytes (0 to 65535)
#7 SKE Skip signal during axis control by the PMC

0: Uses the same signal SKIP <X004.7 or X013.7> as CNC.
1: Uses dedicated axis control signal ESKIP <X004.6 or X013.6> used by the PMC.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8002 FR2 FR1 PF2 PF1 F10 DWE RPD

#0 RPD Rapid traverse rate for PMC-controlled axes

0: Feedrate specified with parameter No.1420
1: Feedrate specified with the feedrate data in an axis control command by PMC
#1 DWE Minimum time which can be specified in a dwell command in PMC axis control when the
increment system is IS-C
0: 1ms
1: 0.1ms
#3 F10 Least increment for the feedrate for cutting feed (per minute) in PMC axis control
The following settings are applied when bit 4 (PF1) of parameter No. 8002 is set to 0 and
bit 5 (PF2) of parameter No. 8002 is set to 0.
F10 IS-A IS-B IS-C

Millimeter input 0 10 1 0.1
(mm/min) 1 100 10 1
Inch input 0 0.1 0.01 0.001
(inch/min) 1 1 0.1 0.01
#4 PF1
#5 PF2 Set the feedrate unit of cutting feedrate (feed per minute) for an axis controlled by the
PMC.
Bit 5 (PF2) of parameter No. 8002 Bit 4 (PF1) of parameter No. 8002 Feedrate unit
0 0 1/1
0 1 1 / 10
1 0 1 / 100
1 1 1 / 1000
#6 FR1
#7 FR2 Set the feedrate unit for cutting feedrate (feed per rotation) for an axis controlled by the
PMC.
Bit 7 (FR2) of parameter Bit 6 (FR1) of parameter Millimeter input Inch input
No. 8002 No. 8002 (mm/rev) (inch/rev)
0 0
0.0001 0.000001
1 1
0 1 0.001 0.00001
1 0 0.01 0.0001
- 1364 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8003 FEX

NOTE
When this parameter bit is set, the power must be turned off before
#3 FEX The maximum feedrate that can be achieved by the machine during cutting feed or
continuous feed in PMC axis control is:
0: Not extended.
1: Extended.
Restrictions
• Parameters for setting the time constants for linear acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation and bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration after interpolation
When as the acceleration/deceleration type, linear acceleration/ deceleration after
interpolation or bell-shaped acceleration/ deceleration after interpolation is used for
each of rapid traverse, cutting feed, and manual feed, the maximum allowable time
constant is a half of the maximum value that can be set conventionally.
The time constant parameters used are as follows:
Parameter No. Meaning
1620 Time constant (T) used for linear acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse for
each axis, or time constant (T1) used for bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration
in rapid traverse for each axis
1621 Time constant (T2) used for bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration in rapid
traverse for each axis
1622 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed for each axis
1624 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration in jog feed for each axis
1626 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration in threading cycles for each axis
1769 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration after cutting feed interpolation in
the mode of acceleration/deceleration before interpolation
5271 to 5274 Time constant for acceleration/deceleration in rigid tapping extraction (first to
fourth gears)
5365 to 5368 Time constant for bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration in rigid tapping (first to
fourth gears)
• VCMD waveform display function

As the feedrate increases, more data is acquired for VCMD waveform display,
which can prevent waveforms from being displayed correctly.
CAUTION
1 When this function is enabled, the feedrate is extended to the
maximum value that can be specified for cutting feed or continuous
feed in PMC axis control if CMR is 1. If CMR is greater than 1, the
feedrate is limited to a value smaller than the maximum value that
can be specified.
2 Note that the maximum motor speed may be exceeded depending
on the feedrate specified.
- 1365 -
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8004 NCI DSL JFM

#2 JFM This parameter sets the units used to specify feedrate data when continuous feed is
specified in axis control by the PMC.
Increment Bit 2 (JFM) of Millimeter input Inch input Rotation axis

-1
system No. 8004 (mm/min) (inch/min) (min )
0 1 0.01 0.00023
IS-B
1 200 2.00 0.046
0 0.1 0.001 0.000023
IS-C
1 20 0.200 0.0046
#5 DSL If the selection of an axis is changed when PMC axis selection is disabled:
0: An alarm PS0139 is issued.
1: The change is valid, and no alarm is issued for an unspecified group.
#6 NCI In axis control by the PMC, a position check at the time of deceleration is:
0: Performed.
1: Not performed.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8005 EVP DRR R10 CDI EDC

#0 EDC In axis control by the PMC, an external deceleration function is:

0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
#1 CDI In axis control by the PMC, when diameter programming is specified for a
PMC-controlled axis:
0: The amount of travel and feedrate are each specified with a radius.
1: The amount of travel is specified with a diameter while the feedrate is specified with
a radius.
This parameter is valid when bit 3 (DIA) of parameter No.1006 is set to 1 (A move
command for each axis is based on diameter specification.)
#2 R10 When the parameter RPD (bit 0 of parameter No.8002) is set to 1, the unit for specifying
a rapid traverse rate for the PMC axis is:
0: 1 mm/min.
1: 10mm/min.
#3 DRR For cutting feed per rotation in PMC axis control, the dry run function is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
#4 EVP Speed command in PMC axis control is executed by:

0: Velocity control.
1: Position control.
- 1366 -
This bit is available when speed command in PMC axis control is FS0i-C type (parameter
VCP (No.8007#2) is 1).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8006 EAL EZR EFD MLS

#1 MLS When bit 0(MLE) of parameter No. 8001 is set to 1 (to disable the all axis machine lock
signal) in PMC axis control, axis-by-axis machine lock is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
#4 EFD When cutting feed (feed per minute) is used in PMC axis control, the specification unit of
feedrate data is:
0: Unchanged (1 times).
1: 100 times greater.
NOTE
When this parameter is set to 1, bit 3(F10) of parameter No. 8002
is invalid.
#6 EZR In PMC axis control, bit 0 (ZRNx) of parameter No. 1005 is:
0: Invalid.
With a PMC controlled axis, the alarm (PS0224) is not issued.
1: Valid.
A reference position return state check is made on a PMC controlled axis as with an
NC axis according to the setting of bit 0 (ZRNx) of parameter No. 1005.
#7 EAL In PMC axis control, resetting the CNC:

0: Does not release an alarm on the PMC controlled axis
1: Releases an alarm on the PMC controlled axis
If an alarm on the PMC controlled axis is released, the PCM controlled axis alarm
signal (EIALg) is set to 0.
NOTE
The CNC enters the reset state when:
<1> The emergency stop signal (*ESP) is set to 0.
<2> The external reset signal (ERS) is set to 1.
<3> The reset & rewind signal (RRW) is set to 1.
<4> The [RESET] MDI key is pressed.
In the case of <1>, all PMC-controlled axes are reset
conventionally and the PMC-controlled axis alarm is released.
This parameter can be used to reset the PMC-controlled axes on
which the PMC-controlled axis alarm is issued and release the
PMC-controlled axis alarm in the cases of <2> to <4>.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8007 ESY VCP

- 1367 -
#2 VCP Speed command in PMC axis control is:

0: FS10/11 type.
1: FS0i-C type.
#3 ESY In PMC axis control, external pulse synchronization (serial spindle synchronization) is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8008 EMRx

#0 EMRx When a PMC axis control command is issued in mirror image state, the mirror image is:
0: Not considered.
1: Considered.
This parameter is valid in the mirror image mode set with the mirror image signals MI1 to
MI5 <G106.0 to 4> set to 1 or bit 0 (MIRx) of parameter No. 12 set to 1.
If a movement is made along the same axis by doubly specifying a command with the
CNC and PMC axis control when this parameter is set to 0, and the mirror image mode is
set, a coordinate shift can occur afterwards. So, do not attempt to make such a movement.
8010 Selection of the DI/DO group for each axis controlled by the PMC

[Data type] Byte axis
[Valid data range] T series: 1 to 4 (for 1-path), 1 to 8 (for 2-path)
M series: 1 to 4
Specify the DI/DO group to be used to specify a command for each PMC-controlled axis.
P8010 Description
1 DI/DO group A (G142 to G153) is used. (for 1-path DI/DO)
2 DI/DO group B (G154 to G165) is used. (for 1-path DI/DO)
3 DI/DO group C (G166 to G177) is used. (for 1-path DI/DO)
4 DI/DO group D (G178 to G189) is used. (for 1-path DI/DO)
5 DI/DO group A (G1142 to G1153) is used. (for 2-path DI/DO)
6 DI/DO group B (G1154 to G1165) is used. (for 2-path DI/DO)
7 DI/DO group C (G1166 to G1177) is used. (for 2-path DI/DO)
8 DI/DO group D (G1178 to G1189) is used. (for 2-path DI/DO)
NOTE
1 When a value other than the above is set, the axis is not controlled
by the PMC.
2 For the axes to be controlled in the 2-path, use the 2-path DI/DO (5
to 8).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8013 ROP

- 1368 -
#3 ROP When rotation axis rollover is enabled for an axis controlled in PMC axis control, the
direction in which a movement (rotation) is performed to reach an end point by a
reference position return command 07H to 0AH (equivalent to G28, G30P2/P3/P4) is:
0: Determined by the sign of the specified value.
1: The direction in the shortest path.
NOTE
ROPx is valid only when bit 0 (ROAx) of parameter No. 1008 is set
to 1 and bit 1 (RABx) of parameter No. 1008 is set to 0.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8019 EOS

[Data type] Bit
#0 EOS In external pulse synchronization (serial spindle synchronization) in PMC axis control,
the serial spindle to be synchronized is:
0: The first spindle of path 1.
1: Any spindle.
NOTE
If EOS is set to 0, only the servo axis of path 1 can be specified.
8020 FL feedrate for reference position return along each axis in PMC axis control

For each axis, this parameter sets a feedrate (FL feedrate) after deceleration for reference
position return in PMC axis control.
NOTE
If 0 is specified, the value of parameter No. 1425 is used.
8022 Upper limit rate of feed per revolution during PMC axis control

This parameter sets the upper limit rate of feed per revolution during PMC axis control.
8028 Time for acceleration/deceleration calculation when a feedrate is specified under PMC axis control

[Unit of data] msec
- 1369 -

When a feedrate is specified under PMC axis control, acceleration/deceleration can be set
for parameter No. 8032 or this parameter. When 0 is set in parameter No. 8032, the
specification of 1000 min-1 is assumed. When 0 is set in this parameter, the
acceleration/deceleration function for feedrate specification is disabled.
Time constant for exponential acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed or continuous feed under PMC
8030
axis control

[Unit of data] msec
For each axis, this parameter sets a time constant for exponential
acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed or continuous feed under PMC axis control.
NOTE
When 0 is set in this parameter, the value set in parameter No.
1622 is used.
The value set in parameter No. 1622 is used also for linear
acceleration/deceleration after cutting interpolation.
FL feedrate for exponential acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed or continuous feed under PMC
8031
axis control

For each axis, this parameters sets a lower feedrate limit (FL feedrate) for exponential
acceleration/deceleration in cutting feed or continuous feed under PMC axis control.
NOTE
When 0 is set in this parameter, the value set in parameter No.
1623 is used.
However, be sure to set 0 in this parameter and parameter
No.1623 for all axes at all times except for special purposes. If a
value other than 0 is specified, incorrect feed is carried out.
8032 Feedrate for acceleration/deceleration calculation when a feedrate is specified under PMC axis control

[Unit of data] min-1
When a feedrate is specified under PMC axis control, acceleration/deceleration can be set
for this parameter or parameter No. 8028. When 0 is set in this parameter, the
specification of 1000 min-1 is assumed. When 0 is set in parameter No. 8028, the
acceleration/deceleration function for feedrate specification is disabled.
- 1370 -
Amount of a shift per one rotation of a servo motor of least input increment
8040
when speed command in PMC axis control is executed by position control

[Unit of data] mm, inch, degree (machine unit)
Set the amount of a shift per one rotation of a servo motor of least input increment
when speed command in PMC axis control is executed by position control.
This parameter is available when speed command in PMC axis control is FS0i-C type
(parameter VCP (No.8007#2) is 1) and is executed by position control (parameter EVP
(No.8005#4) is 1).
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11850 CMI

#0 CMI When bit 0 (RPD) of parameter No. 8002 is set to 1 and the rapid traverse rate is specified
by axis control block data signal in PMC axis control, the rapid traverse rate is
represented:
0: In millimeters.
1: In the unit set by bit 0 (INM) of parameter No. 1001.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
12730 PTC

#0 PTC Linear acceleration/deceleration time constant of continuous feed operation based on a

speed command in PMC axis control is:
0: Normal.
1: Extended.
This bit is available when speed command in PMC axis control is FS0i-C type (parameter
VCP (No.8007#2) is 1).
2nd time constant of linear acceleration/deceleration of continuous feed operation based on a speed
12731
command in PMC axis control

[Unit of data] msec/1000min-1
When this parameter is set 0, 2nd time constant data is not available, and then
acceleration / deceleration of speed command is not available in from 1st feedrate to 2nd
feedrate.
(parameter VCP (No.8007#2) is 1) and linear acceleration/deceleration time constant of
continuous feed operation based on a speed command in PMC axis control is extended
(parameter PTC (No.12730#0) is 1).
- 1371 -
3rd time constant of linear acceleration/deceleration of continuous feed operation based on a speed
12732

When this parameter is set 0, 3rd time constant data is not available, and then acceleration
/ deceleration of speed command is not available in from 2nd feedrate to 3rd feedrate.
4th time constant of linear acceleration/deceleration of continuous feed operation based on a speed
12733

When this parameter is set 0, 4th time constant data is not available, and then acceleration
/ deceleration of speed command is not available in from 3rd feedrate to 4th feedrate.
5th time constant of linear acceleration/deceleration of continuous feed operation based on a speed
12734

When this parameter is set 0, 5th time constant data is not available, and then acceleration
/ deceleration of speed command is not available in from 4th feedrate to 5th feedrate.
1st feedrate for changing time constant of continuous feed operation based on a speed command in
12735
PMC axis control

Set feedrate parameters as following.
No.12735 < No.12736 < No.12737 < No.12738.
- 1372 -
2nd feedrate for changing time constant of continuous feed operation based on a speed command in
12736
PMC axis control

No.12735 < No.12736 < No.12737 < No.12738.
3rd feedrate for changing time constant of continuous feed operation based on a speed command in
12737
PMC axis control

No.12735 < No.12736 < No.12737 < No.12738.
4th feedrate for changing time constant of continuous feed operation based on a speed command in
12738
PMC axis control

No.12735 < No.12736 < No.12737 < No.12738.
- 1373 -
Alarm and message

Servo and overtravel alarms for PMC axis control are detected in the same way as for CNC controlled
axes.
When an alarm is issued, the alarm signal EIALg is set to 1 for notification to the PMC in addition to
normal alarm processing.
(When an overtravel alarm is issued, the negative-direction overtravel signal EOTNg or the
positive-direction overtravel signal EOTPg is also set to 1.)
The alarm signal EIALg is reset using the reset signal ECLRg.
CAUTION
If an alarm is issued by a PMC axis control command or in connection with PMC
axis control, be sure to set the reset signal ECLRg to 1 in addition to a reset
operation on the NC.
- Alarms related to contention with the NC

Alarm (PS0130)
In general, if the CNC and PMC attempt to simultaneously control an axis not subject to superimposition,
the alarm (PS0130) is issued.
This alarm is issued in the following cases:
• When cutting feed with an override of 0% is performed along the axis, or the tool is temporarily
stopped along the axis (with the axis control temporary stop signal ESTP set to 1), this alarm is
issued. (During feed hold or single block stop, a PMC axis control command is valid, not resulting in
an alarm.)
• When a command is issued from the CNC for an axis controlled by the PMC
• When a move command is issued from the PMC for an axis on the polar coordinate interpolation
plane in the polar coordinate interpolation mode (G12.1 command)
Alarm (PS5131)
If a command related to polar coordinate interpolation is specified during PMC axis control, the alarm
(PS5131) is issued.
- Alarms due to setting modifications made during PMC axis control

Alarm (PS0139)
If parameter No. 8010 is modified during PMC axis control, or the level of the control axis selection
signal EAXx for an axis under PMC axis control is changed, the alarm (PS0139) is issued.
- Other alarms
Alarm (PS0224)
If a PMC axis control command is specified without performing a reference position return operation
even once after the power is turned off when bit 0 (ZRNx) of parameter No. 1005 is set to 0, the alarm
(PS0224) is issued.
Alarm (PS5065)
If a PMC axis control command is executed by assigning axes with different increment systems to the
same group, the alarm (PS5065) is issued.

PS0130 NC AND PMC AXIS ARE The NC command and the PMC axis control command were
CONFLICTED conflicted. Modify the program or ladder.
PS0139 CANNOT CHANGE PMC CONTROL The PMC axis was selected for the axis for which the PMC
AXIS axis is being controlled.
- 1374 -

PS0224 ZERO RETURN NOT FINISHED 1) A reference position return has not been performed before
the start of automatic operation.
(Only when bit 0 (ZRNx) of parameter No. 1005 is 0)
Perform a reference position return.
T
2) The spindle positioning axis is commanded when the mode
is not spindle positioning.
Perform the spindle orientation.
PS5065 DIFFERRENT AXIS UNIT(PMC Axes having different increment systems have been specified
AXIS) in the same DI/DO group for PMC axis control. Modify the
setting of parameter No. 8010.
PS5130 NC AND PMC AXIS CONFLICT The NC command and the PMC axis control command were
conflicted. Modify the program or the ladder.
PS5131 NC COMMAND IS NOT The PMC axis control and a polar coordinate interpolation were
COMPATIBLE specified simultaneously.
PS0220 ILLEGAL COMMAND IN In the synchronous operation, movement is commanded by the
SYNCHR-MODE NC program or PMC axis control interface for the synchronous
axis. Modify the program or check the PMC ladder.
SV0417 ILL DGTL SERVO PARAMETER A digital serve parameter setting is incorrect.
SV0422 EXCESS VELOCITY IN TORQUE In torque control, the commanded permissible velocity was
exceeded.
SV0423 EXCESS ERROR IN TORQUE In torque control, the total permissible move value specified as
a parameter was exceeded.
Caution
CAUTION
1 The mode selection, CNC reset, and other CNC statuses have no effect.
2 CNC-controlled feed hold *SP, single block stop SBK, reset signal ERS, and
interlock of all axes or each axis are invalid for PMC axis control, but similar
control is enabled by operating the PMC signals (ESTP, ESBK, and ECLR).
3 Emergency stop is enabled.
4 If cutting feed blocks are specified in succession, deceleration is not performed
between blocks (acceleration/deceleration is applied, however, when the
specification of a feedrate changes), and cutting proceeds to the next block
without waiting for the tool to enter the in-position area. At the end of a block
other than for cutting feed, the tool is temporarily decelerated. The next block is
then executed after waiting for the tool to enter the in-position area. When bit 6
(NCI) of parameter No. 8004 is set to 1, cutting can proceed to the next block
without making an in-position check for each block.
5 Under PMC axis control, manual absolute mode is always set. If the PMC starts
control of an axis after manual intervention (manual continuous feed, manual
handle feed, etc.) is performed during automatic operation while manual
absolute mode is not set (*ABSM is set to 1), manual absolute mode is set.
6 Under PMC axis control, all commands are handled as axis commands. Even for
the auxiliary functions, the position check is effective.
7 When the CNC executes the command to set the workpiece coordinate system
setting (G54 to G59) during an axial movement by PMC axis control command, a
valid coordinate system cannot be set.
8 If the alarm (PS0139) is issued due to a modification to parameter No. 8010, the
alarm is issued with all paths. After resetting the alarm, input the reset signal
ECLR for all groups before a start.
- 1375 -
CAUTION
9 When PMC controls an axis and then NC controls this one by the absolute or
incremental command in a series of NC program(s), this PMC command needs
to control in the non-buffering M code block. You can proceed to next NC block
only after you confirm the end of the PMC axis command. Until then, it needs to
wait in the non-buffering M code block.
Following sample program shows that Y axis moves by the NC command (N40)
with the move of the axis after it moves by the PMC command.
PMC axis command needs to control during the non-buffering M code block
(N20).
O0001
N10 G94 G90 G01 X20. Y30. F3000 ;
N20 M55 ; → Y axis moves by PMC axis command.
N30 X70. ;
N40 Y50. ;
N50 M02 ;
Please control under the following setting.

- ‘M55’ is non-buffering M code. Please set parameter No.3411 to ‘55’.
- During M55 block, start PMC axis command.
- Until this PMC command finishes, NC program needs to wait in M55 block.
When the NC program is the incremental command, to perform the feed hold or
single block stop of automatic operation after PMC axis operation and then
restart automatic operation, reflect the amount of movement by PMC axis control
to the program coordinate system.
10 Both feed-forward and advanced preview feed-forward function are unavailable
for PMC axis.
Note
NOTE
1 The actual speed excluding the effect of movement along a PMC-controlled axis
can be displayed if the ZDF bit (bit 3 of parameter No. 3115) is set to "1".
2 If an absolute pulse coder is used, a specified reference position is retained in
memory, even after the power is turned off.
3 For an index table indexing axis, no PMC axis control command can be
specified.
4 The individual output of the auxiliary function is provided by adding a signal for
individual output. The timing diagram of controlling and specifying the auxiliary
function is not changed. The normal specifications of the auxiliary functions for
PMC axis control function are applied.
- 1376 -
16.2 EXTERNAL DATA INPUT

Overview
In the external data input function, the CNC can be operated by the external data which use the signal of
PMC.
This function is an optional function.
There are following functions in the external data input.

- External tool offset
- External program number search
- External work coordinate system shift
- External machine zero point shift
- External alarm message
- External operator message
- Substitution of the number of machined parts and number of required parts
Explanation
- The basic external data input procedure
The following signals are used to send data from the PMC to the CNC.
Signal name Input signal Output signal

Address signal for external data input EA0 to EA6
Data signal for external data input ED0 to ED31
Read signal for external data input ESTB
Read completion signal for external data input EREND
Search completion signal for external data input ESEND
The basic external data input procedure is described below:
(1) The PMC sets the address signals, EA0 to EA6 that indicate the data type and data signals ED0 to
ED31.
(2) The PMC sets the read signal ESTB to “1”.
(3) When the ESTB signal is set to “1”, the control unit reads the address.
(4) After reading the address, the control unit sets the read completion signal EREND to “1”.
(5) When the EREND signal is set to “1”, the PMC sets the ESTB signal, to 0.
(6) When the ESTB signal is set to “0”, the control unit sets the EREND signal to 0. This completes the
data input procedure. New data can now be entered.
The timing diagram is shown below:
- 1377 -
EA0-EA6
ED0-ED15
ESTB
EREND
Only for external program number search

ESEND End of
search
Fig. 16.2(a) Timing diagram of External data input
E E E E E E E E
S A A A A A A A
No. Item ED31 to ED16 ED15 to ED0
T 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
B
1 External program 1 0 0 0 X X X X Program number (BCD 4 digits
-
number search with unsign)
2 External tool offset 1 0 0 1 X X X X Offset value (BCD 8 digits with sign) *Note 1
3 External workpiece 1 0 1 0 axis code Shift value (BCD 8 digits with sign) *Note 1
coordinate system shift
4 External machine zero 1 0 1 1 axis code Machine zero point shift
point shift - value(binary)
±0 to 9999 *Note 2
5 Alarm set 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Alarm No. (binary)
-
0 to 999 (0 to 4095)
Alarm clear 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 Alarm No. (binary)
-
0 to 999 (0 to 4095)
Operator message 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 Message No. (binary)
-
set 0 to 999 (0 to 4095)
Operator message 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 Message No. (binary)
-
clear 0 to 999 (0 to 4095)
Message 1 1 0 0 0 X 1 1 - Character (Character code)
6 Substitute No. of parts 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 No. of parts required
-
required (BDC4 digits with unsign)
Substitute No. of parts 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 No. of parts machined
-
machined (BDC4 digits with unsign)
BCD (Binary Coded Decimal)

Method of representing one digit of a decimal number using a 4-digit binary number
NOTE
1 When bit 3 (EED) of parameter No. 6301 is set to 0, BCD 4 digits are used.
By setting bit 3 (EED) of parameter No. 6301 to 1, an offset value/shift value of
±0 to 79999999 can be specified using ED0 to ED31.
- 1378 -
NOTE
2 By setting bit 7 (EEX) of parameter No. 6300 to 1, a shift value of ±0 to
999999999 can be specified using ED0 to ED31.
NOTE
For axis code, refer to the following table.
Axis code
Axis
EA3 EA2 EA1 EA0
1st axis 0 0 0 0
2nd axis 0 0 0 1
3rd axis 0 0 1 0
4th axis 0 0 1 1
5th axis 0 1 0 0
6th axis 0 1 0 1
7th axis 0 1 1 0
8th axis 0 1 1 1
- External Program Number Search

A program number (1 to 9999) is specified from an extended source and is selected in the CNC memory.
For machines that can load several kinds of workpieces, this function can automatically select the
program to be executed corresponding to a specific workpiece.
Data for the external program number search is accepted regardless of CNC mode, but the search
execution can be made only in the reset state in MEM mode.
The ESEND signal switches from “0” to “1” on completion of external program number search. This
signal does not turn to “0” unless the cycle start or reset signal is input, or another search is made. Use
ESEND to initiate a cycle start signal after the search.
Because a search operation is deferred until a reset occurs in the MEM mode, an external program
number search attempted during a CNC operation (OP = 1) results in the program being started
immediately after the end of an automatic operation in a sequence in which the automatic operation is
started by checking only the ESEND signal (search completion signal for external data input).
For this reason, using the ESC parameter (bit 3 of parameter No. 6300) enables an external program
number search to be canceled at a CNC reset. Concretely, if a reset signal is input between the time the
ESTB signal (read signal for external data input) is input and the time a search would be executed, setting
the ESC parameter (bit 3 of parameter No. 6300) to 1 keeps the search from being executed. At the same
time, the controller uses the ESCAN (search cancel signal for external data input) signal to inform the
PMC that the search has been canceled.
The ESEND signal (search completion signal for external data input) will not become 1, because the
search is canceled.
The controller checks the state of the RST (NC reset) signal for a reset input between the rising edge of
the ESTB signal (read signal for external data input) and the start of the search. Concretely, the controller
cancels the external program number search if the RST (NC reset) signal becomes 1 even momentarily in
this period. The ESCAN signal (search cancel signal for external data input) becomes high at the
beginning of the search.
However, it becomes low when the next search is executed (for example, when a cycle start or reset signal
is input), similarly to the ESEND signal (search completion signal for external data input).
- 1379 -
Read signal for external data input

(ESTB)
Read completion signal for external
data input (EREND) If RST becomes 1 even momentarily in this period
Reset signal
(RST)
Search completion signal for external data ESEND does not become high.
input (ESEND)
Search cancel signal for external data input ESCAN becomes high at the beginning of a
(ESCAN) search
ESTB positive-going edge Beginning of search

Fig. 16.2(b) Timing diagram of External data input
NOTE
1 The external program number search is available when parameter
ESR(No.6300#4) is set to “1”.
2 In reset state the automatic operation lamp is off. If the start button is pushed in
the cycle operation stop or hold state, search execution starts from the actual
position indicated by the pointer.
3 When there is no program stored in memory corresponding to the set program
number, the alarm DS1128 occurs.
4 When the program number search is set to 0, the alarm DS0059 occurs.
5 Data for the external program number search is accepted regardless of the
mode, but the search execution can be made only in the reset state. Therefore,
in case that the PMC sequence, which the cycle start is executed by checking
search completion signal for external data input only, is used, if the external
program number search is commanded twice, the program is executed twice.
( When CNC accepts a command of the program number search, the command
is not cancelled even if CNC becomes reset state by external reset signal and so
on.) (See Fig. 16.2(c))
If the program execution after reset becomes a problem, please make the PMC
sequence not to execute the cycle start after reset.
- 1380 -
Read signal for external data 2nd command

input (ESTB)
Read completion signal for Search command is kept.

external data input (EREND)
Search completion signal for

external data input (ESEND)
2nd program
search
Cycle start signal
(ST)
Cycle start lamp signal

(STL)
Automatic operation signal

(OP)
2nd program execution
External reset signal NC reset
(ERS)
Reset signal
(RST)
Fig. 16.2(c) External program search and program execution after NC reset
- External Tool offset

These signals provide for changing the tool compensation value via the PMC. When the offset number is
specified by a part program, data input from the PMC is added to the offset value. The offset value can
also be used as input data itself by specifying the input signal.
When the machine tool is equipped with automatic tools or workpiece measuring functions, the offset
value can be corrected using this function, by inputting the error from the correct value into the CNC via
PMC.
If the tool compensation value is externally input when offset number 0 is specified in a part program (an
offset cancel) in the lathe turning machine, the workpiece coordinate system shifts by the entered
quantity.
The external tool offset range is +/ - 79999999. (* Note 3)
However, the unit and set range depend on the settings of the set unit and set range of the tool offset
amount.
NOTE
1 When data is out of range, the alarm DS1128 occurs.
2 Writing to a function not enabled by the parameter setting issues the alarm
DS1121.
3 If Parameter EED (No.6301#3) is set to “1”, the Data area can be specified by
32bit data specification.
A value in the range from ±0 to ±79999999 can be specified in this case.
- 1381 -
Data specification for external tool offset (For milling machine)

Address Data *1
E E E E E E E E E E E
A A A A A A A D D ... D D
6 5 4 3 2 1 0 31 30 1 0
0 0 1 a/i g/w 0 r/l Sign

Offset value
0: + Specified by BCD 8-digit code

1: - (0 to +/- 79999999) *1
0 Incremental specification
(Input value is added to present compensation
value)
a/i
1 Absolute specification
(Input value is replaced with present compensation
value)
0 Specification of tool wear offset value
g/w
1 Specification of tool geometry offset value
0 Specification of tool length compensation value
r/l
1 Specification of cutter compensation value
Notice 1: If the parameter EED (No.6301#3) is set to “0”, the offset value is specified by using signals
ED0 to ED14, the sign is decided by the signal ED15.
The range of data is available to specify the data from 0 to +/- 7999.
- 1382 -
Data specification for external tool offset (For the lathe turning machine)
Address Data *1
E E E E E E E E E E E
A A A A A A A D D ... D D
6 5 4 3 2 1 0 31 30 1 0
0 0 1 a/i g/w X/Z/R Sign Offset value
0: + Specified by BCD 8-digit code

1: - (0 to +/- 79999999) *1
Incremental specification
0
(Input value is added to present
compensation value)
a/i Absolute specification
1
(Input value is replaced with present
compensation value)
0 Specification of tool wear offset value
g/w Specification of tool geometry offset value
1
EA1=0, Specification of X axis offset
EA0=0
EA1=0, Specification of Z axis offset
X/Z/R
EA0=1
EA1=1, Specification of tool nose radius
EA0=0 compensation value
Notice 1: If the parameter EED (No.6301#3) is set to “0”, the offset value is specified by using signals
ED0 to ED14, the sign is decided by the signal ED15.
The range of data is available to specify the data from 0 to +/- 7999.
- 1383 -
- External workpiece coordinate system shift

In the external workpiece coordinate system shift, the shift value can be externally modified by the signal
of PMC.
Each axis has this shift value (parameter No. 1220), and this shift value is added to all the workpiece
coordinate systems in common.
The shift value is not lost by cutting off the power supply.
The shift value can not only be added to the current work coordinate system shift but also be substituted
for the current value.
The value range is 0 to + / - 79999999.
The unit and setting range are the same as the Tool offset.
NOTE
If Parameter EED (No.6301#3) is set to “1”, the data area can be specified by
Under the setting, the external tool compensation range is up to +/ - 79999999.
- External machine zero point shift

The machine coordinate system can be externally shifted by inputting a shift value.
When the shift value is input, compensation is immediately applied to the corresponding axis and the axis
moves. The position accuracy can be improved by combining this function with sensors.
The specification to shift the axis is the same as the external workpiece coordinate system shift.
The compensation value is specified in signals ED0 to ED15 using a binary code ranging from 0 to ±9999.
This compensation value must be specified in absolute value. The value which the machine actually
moves at input is the difference from the previously stored value.
After the Reference point is established, this function becomes effective. The shift amount is memorized
though the machine is not moved when the shift amount is input before the Reference point is established.
When the Reference point is established afterwards, the machine is moved for the memorized shift
amount.
NOTE
If Parameter EEX (No.6300#7) is set to “1”, the Data area can be specified by
Under the setting, the external machine zero point shift range is up to +/ -
999999999.
CAUTION
When a large value of compensation is applied at one time, an alarm such as
"excessive error on stop" may occur. In this case, input the compensation in
several smaller increments.
- External message
(a) External alarm message
By sending alarm number from PMC, the CNC is brought to an alarm status; an alarm message is sent to
the CNC, and the message is displayed on the screen of the CNC.
Reset of alarm status is also done with external data.
Up to 4 alarm numbers (16 alarm numbers when bit 1 (M16) of parameter No. 11931 is set to 1) and
messages can be sent at a same time. Up to 32 characters can be sent in an alarm message.
In case of using a 2-path system, the alarm will be set separately for each path.
Also the alarm is set separately for one.
It is available to select the range of alarm number and the display form by setting the parameter EXA
(No.6301#0).
- 1384 -
EXA (No.6301#0) = 0
- Alarm number 0 to 999 can be sent. To distinguish these alarms from other alarms, the CNC
displays them by adding 1000 to an alarm number.
EXA (No.6301#0) = 1
- Alarm number 0 to 4095 can be sent. The CNC displays them with prefix characters “EX” to an
alarm number for display.
(b) External operator message

Message to the operator is given by the signal of PMC, and the message is displayed.
The operator messages can be cleared by external data.
Up to 4 message numbers (bit 1 (M16) of parameter No. 11931) can be sent at a same time. Up to 256
characters can be sent in an operator message.
In case of using a multi-path system, the operator message is common resource for plural path of machine
group. It is set each machine group. It is available to display the operator message by using the primary
path signal of machine group.
It is available to select the range of message number and the display form by setting the parameter EXM
(No.6301#1).
EXM (No.6301#1) = 0
The message numbers 0 to 999 can be sent.
The message numbers 0 to 99 are displayed along with the message.
To distinguish these alarms from other alarms, the CNC displays them by adding 2000 to an alarm
number.
When a message from 100 to 999 is displayed, the message number is not displayed; only its text is
displayed.
EXM (No.6301#1) = 1
The message numbers 0 to 4095 can be sent.
The message numbers 0 to 99 are displayed along with the message.
The CNC displays them with prefix characters "EX" to an alarm for display.
When a message number from 100 to 4095 is displayed, the message number is not displayed; only its
text is displayed.
Data specification method in external message

Item EA6 EA5 EA4 EA3 EA2 EA1 EA0 ED15 to ED0(binary)
Alarm set 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 Alarm No.
Alarm clear 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 Alarm No.
Operator message list 1 0 0 0 1 0 0 Message No.
Operator message clear 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 Message No.
Message 1 0 0 0 X 1 1 Character(Note)
NOTE
Two characters are sent at a time
(See ISO code given in the table below.)
ED15 to ED8 . . . . . . . Character code in 1st character
ED7 to ED0 . . . . . . . . Character code in 2nd character
When sending only one character, fill the second slot with a code smaller than 20
and it will be ignored.
- 1385 -
- Substitution of the number of required parts and number of machined parts

Substitution is possible for the number of parts required and the number of parts machined.
Data specification for No. of parts required and No. of parts
machined.
Address Data
E E E E E E E E E
A A A A A A A D ........... D
6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 0
1 1 0 0 0 0 0/1 MSB LSB
Value of parts no.
(1) (2) (3)

(1) Set to 110000
(2) 0: No. of parts required
1: No. of parts machined
(3) BCD 4-digit code (0000 to 9999)
Signals
Address signals for external data input EA0 to EA6 <Gn002.6 – Gn002.0>
[Function] These signals indicate the type of the entered data.
Data signals for external data input ED0 to ED31 <Gn211, Gn210,Gn000, Gn001>
- 1386 -
[Function] These signals indicate the entered data.
The use of the 32 code signals (16 code signals) varies with the data type.
Read signal for external data input ESTB <Gn002.7>

[Function] The signal reports that the address and data are set in external data input.
When the signal is set to “1”, the control unit reads the address and data for external data
input.
Read completion signal for external data input EREND <Fn060.0>

[Function] This signal reports that the control unit has finished reading the entered data.
Search completion signal for external data input ESEND <Fn060.1>

[Function] This signal report that program number search, specified by external data input, has been
completed.
[Output cond.] This signal is set to “1” when:
- The program number search specified by external data input is completed.
The signal is set to “0” when:
- An automatic operation is started.
- A reset occurs.
Search cancel signal for external data input ESCAN<Fn060.2>

[Function] This signal notifies PMC of the cancellation of a program number search.
[Output cond.] When a reset is input between the time read signal for external data input ESTB is input
and the time a search is executed in the external program number search function, if bit 3
(ESC) of parameter No. 6300 is 1, the search is not executed. At this time, the control
unit sets search cancel signal for external data input ESCAN to 1 instead of setting search
completion signal for external data input ESEND to 1.
NOTE
This signal is enabled when bit 3 (ESC) of parameter No. 6300 is 1.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn000 ED7 ED6 ED5 ED4 ED3 ED2 ED1 ED0
Gn002 ESTB EA6 EA5 EA4 EA3 EA2 EA1 EA0
Fn060 ESCAN ESEND EREND
- 1387 -
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6300 EEX ESR ESC

# 3 ESC When a reset is input between input of the external data input read signal ESTB and
execution of a search, the external program number search function:
0 : Performs a search.
1 : Does not perform a search.
# 4 ESR External program number search

0 : Disabled
1 : Enabled
# 7 EEX PMC EXIN function

0 : Conventional specifications
1 : Extended specifications
If you want to handle unavailable data with the PMC/EXIN command according to the
conventional specifications, such as an shift value is up to +/- 10000 in the external
machine zero point shift, set this bit to 1.
To use this function for 2-path control, the setting for the first path (main) is used. The
EXIN specifications cannot be changed for each path.
For details of EXIN and how to change ladder software, refer to the PMC specifications
and other manuals.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
6301 NNO EXM EXA

[Data type] Bit machine group
#0 EXA This bit selects an external alarm message specification.

0 : A message number from 0 to 999 can be sent. The CNC adds 1000 to an alarm number
for distinction from general alarms.
1 : A message number from 0 to 4095 can be sent. The CNC prefixes the character string
"EX" to an alarm number for display.
#1 EXM This bit selects an external operator message specification.

0 : A message number from 0 to 999 can be sent. The message of a message number from
0 to 99 is displayed together with its number. The CNC adds 2000 to a number for
distinction. A message number from 100 to 999 is not displayed on the screen, but
only the corresponding message is displayed on the screen.
1 : A message number from 0 to 4095 can be sent. The message of a message number
from 0 to 99 is displayed together with its number. The CNC prefixes the character
string "EX" to a message number for display. A message number from 100 to 4095
is not displayed on the screen, but only the corresponding message is displayed on
the screen.
- 1388 -
#2 MNO When operator messages are set by external data input, a new line operation between one
message set with a number and another message set with a different number is:
0 : Performed.
1 : Not performed.
6310 Setting for number addition to external operator messages

[Data type] Word machine group
[Unit of data]
NOTE
This parameter sets the number of messages to which message numbers are to be prefixed
in external operator message display.
When 0 is set, the same operation as when 100 is set is performed.
Example)
When 500 is set in this parameter, the messages of message numbers 0 to 499 are
displayed together with their numbers on the screen. A message number of 500 and
up is not displayed on the screen, but only the corresponding message is displayed
on the screen.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
11931 M16

[Data type] Bit
NOTE
#1 M16 The maximum number of external alarm messages or external operator messages that can
be displayed in connection with external data input or external messages is:
0: 4
1: 16
Alarm and message

DS0059 SPECIFIED NUMBER NOT The No. specified for a program No. or sequence No. search
FOUND could not be found.
There was an I/O request issued for a pot No. or offset (tool data),
but either no tool numbers have been input since power ON or
there is no data for the entered tool No.
DS0131 TOO MANY MESSAGE An attempt was made to display an external operator message or
external alarm message, but five or more displays were required
simultaneously.
DS0132 MESSAGE NUMBER NOT An attempt to cancel an external operator message or external
FOUND alarm message failed because the specified message number
was not found.
- 1389 -

DS0133 TOO LARGE NUMBER A value other than 0 to 4095 was specified as the external
operator message or the external alarm message number.
DS1120 UNASSIGNED ADDRESS The upper 4 bits (EIA4 to EIA7) of an external data I/O
(HIGH) interface address signal are set to an undefined address
(high bits).
DS1121 UNASSIGNED ADDRESS The lower 4 bits (EIA0 to EIA3) of an external data I/O interface
(LOW) address signal are set to an undefined address (low bits).
DS1128 DI.EIDLL OUT OF RANGE The numerical value input by external data input signals ED0
to ED31 has exceeded the permissible range.
DS1130 SEARCH REQUEST NOT No requests can be accepted for a program No. or a sequence
ACCEPTED No. search as the system is not in the memory mode or the reset
state.
DS1131 EXT-DATA ERROR (OTHER) [External Data I/O]
An attempt was made to input tool data for tool offset by a tool
No. during loading by the G10 code.
16.3 EXTENDED EXTERNAL MACHINE ZERO POINT SHIFT

Overview
The conventional external machine zero point shift value function cannot make shifts on multiple axes
simultaneously.
With this extended function, external machine zero point shifts can be performed on all controlled axes.
An external machine zero point shift value is to be set in a parameter-set R area. A shift value must be
specified using a binary code, and the absolute value of a number from -32767 to 32767 must be specified.
Explanation
- Setting
This function is enabled by setting bit 0 (EMS) of parameter No. 1203 to 1. Enter a desired external
machine zero point shift value at the location starting at the address (R area of the PMC) set in parameter
No. 1280.
If 100 is set in parameter No. 1280, enter shift values at the location starting at R100 of the PMC. Set an
even number in parameter No. 1280.
Example) When 100 is set in parameter No. 1280
R0100 External machine zero point shift value for the 1st axis (Low)
R0101 External machine zero point shift value for the 1st axis (High)
R0102 External machine zero point shift value for the 2nd axis (Low)
R0103 External machine zero point shift value for the 2nd axis (High)
: :
R(0100+2(n-1)) External machine zero point shift value for the n-th axis (Low)
R(0100+2(n-1)+1) External machine zero point shift value for the n-th axis (High)
- Shift value
Specify a shift value by using a two-byte binary code for each axis.
A value from -32767 to 32767 can be specified.
A shift value is assumed to be specified as an absolute value.
The unit is the detection unit.
- 1390 -
Example)
Suppose that the incremental system is IS-B, the machine is a millimeter machine (bit 0 of parameter
No. 1001 = 0),
the detection unit is 0.0002 mm (CMR (parameter No. 1820) = 10),
and parameter No. 1280 is set to 100.
When the following values are written to the R area :
R102 = 11001100 (CCh)
R103 = 11101101 (EDh)
the machine position on the second axis is shifted, and the shift value at that time is:
EDCCh [pulse] * 0.0002 [mm/pulse] = -0.932 mm
- Relationship with the error compensation functions

This function is superposed on error compensation functions such as the pitch error compensation
function and straightness compensation function.
- Coordinate system
If the machine is moved by this function, the coordinates are not updated.
- 2-path control
In 2-path control, the locations of the R area are used in ascending order of axis numbers in the paths as
shown in the example below.
Example)
When, in parameter No. 1280, 100 is set for path 1 and 200 is set for path 2
Axis number Path (No.981) Shift value of path 1
1 1 R100—101
2 2 R101—102
3 2 R103—104
4 1 Shift value of path 2
5 2 R200—201
6 1 R201—202
R203—204
Signal
Extended external machine zero point shift signal EMZ0 to EMZ15 <Rn to
Rn+2*controlled axis count-1>
[Function] Sets an external machine zero point shift value.
[Operation] When an external machine zero point shift value is set with this signal, the machine
position is shifted by the specified value.
A set value is regarded as an absolute value.
As a signal address, specify an arbitrary R address with parameter No. 1280.
- 1391 -
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Rｎ EMZ7 EMZ0 EMZ0 EMZ0 EMZ0 EMZ0 EMZ0 EMZ0
Rｎ+1 EMZ15 EMZ14 EMZ13 EMZ12 EMZ11 EMZ10 EMZ9 EMZ8

:
Rn+2*con-
trolled axis EMZ15 EMZ14 EMZ13 EMZ12 EMZ11 EMZ10 EMZ9 EMZ8
count-1
n represents the value set in parameter No. 1280.
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
1203 EMS

#0 EMS The extended external machine zero point shift function is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
NOTE
1 To use the extended external machine zero point shift function, the
external machine zero point shift function or the external data input
function is required.
2 When the extended external machine zero point shift function is
enabled, the conventional external machine zero point shift function
is disabled.
1280 Start address of signals used with the extended external machine zero point shift function

[Valid data range] Even number from 0 to 32767
Set the start address for signals used with the extended external machine zero point shift
function. If a nonexistent address is specified, this function is disabled.
If 100 is specified, for example, addresses starting at R100 are used with this function.
The end R address used depends on the number of controlled axes. For 5-axis control,
R100 to R109 are used.
NOTE
1 If a nonexistent R address or an address in the system area is set,
this function is disabled.
2 Set an even number in this parameter.
- 1392 -
Warning and Note

WARNING
1 When writing an external machine zero point shift value to the R area, write a
shift value for one axis as a word. If data for one axis is written in two
operations, one byte in one operation, an incorrect shift operation can result.
2 When writing data with the PMC or FOCAS2 function, provide an interval of
about 8 ms after one write operation before starting the next write operation. If
this write timing is not observed, an incorrect shift operation can result.
3 Set an even number in parameter No. 1280.
16.4 EXTERNAL WORKPIECE NUMBER SEARCH

Overview
A machining program stored in the part program memory can be started by an external signal.
When automatic operation is started in the memory operation mode during the reset state, the program is
searched for from a specified workpiece number and then executed from the beginning.
For a machine with a function for automatically loading several types of workpieces, this function can be
used to automatically select and execute the program according to the workpiece.
Signal
External workpiece number search signals PN1,PN2,PN4,PN8,PN16 <G0009.0 to
G0009.4>
[Function] These signals specify a workpiece number to be executed in the memory operation mode.
These are 5-bit code signals and correspond to the workpiece numbers as shown below
(binary codes).
Workpiece number search signals
Workpiece number
PN16 PN8 PN4 PN2 PN1
0 0 0 0 0 00
0 0 0 0 1 01
0 0 0 1 0 02
Omission
1 1 1 1 0 30
1 1 1 1 1 31
Of these numbers, workpiece number 00 has special meaning "making no search".

Therefore, a number from 01 to 31 can be specified as a workpiece number.
NOTE
The signals are also used to specify a file number for finding the
beginning of the file in inputting an external program.
[Operation] Searches the program number corresponding to the workpiece number specified by these
signals when:
Automatic operation is started (the automatic operation start signal (ST) changes from 1
to 0) in the memory operation mode if automatic operation is in the reset state (the
automatic operation signal (OP) is 0).
When the workpiece number is 00, however, no search is carried out.
The searched program is used in:
• Automatic operation in the memory operation mode
• Foreground edit in the memory edit mode
- 1393 -
Extended external workpiece number search signals EPN0 to EPN13 <G0024.0 to

G0025.5>
[Function] These signals specify a workpiece number to be executed in the memory operation mode.
The correspondence with the workpiece numbers is shown below (binary codes).
Workpiece number search signals

E E E E E E E E E E E E E E
Workpiece
P P P P P P P P P P P P P P
number
N N N N N N N N N N N N N N
13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0001
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0002
Omission
1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 9998
1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 9999
Of these numbers, workpiece number 0000 has special meaning "making no search".
Therefore, a number from 0001 to 9999 can be specified as a workpiece number.
These signals are used in place of the external workpiece number search signals (PN1 to
PN16) when the signal is selected by bit 1 (EPN) of parameter No. 3006.
[Operation] Operation of these signals is same as operation of external workpiece number search
signals.
External workpiece number search start signal EPNS <G0025.7>

[Function] This signal executes only the search function of the workpiece number search and does
not perform automatic operation. When this signal changes from 1 to 0, the search
function is executed.
When bit 2 (EPS) of parameter No. 3006 is set to 1, this signal is enabled and the search
function by ST is disabled.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G0009 PN16 PN8 PN4 PN2 PN1
G0024 EPN7 EPN6 EPN5 EPN4 EPN3 EPN2 EPN1 EPN0
G0025 EPNS EPN13 EPN12 EPN11 EPN10 EPN9 EPN8
Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
3006 EPS EPN

[Data type] Bit
- 1394 -
#1 EPN The signals for specifying a workpiece number in an external workpiece number search
are:
0: The external workpiece number search signals (PN1 to PN16). (A number from 1
to 31 can be specified.)
1: The extended external workpiece number search signals (EPN0 to EPN13). (A
number from 1 to 9999 can be specified.)
#2 EPS As the signal for starting external workpiece number search:

0: The automatic operation start signal ST is used. When automatic operation (memory
operation) is started, a search is made.
1: The external workpiece number search start signal EPNS is used. ST does not start a
search.
Alarm and message

DS0059 SPECIFIED NUMBER NOT FOUND The program corresponding to the specified workpiece No.
could not be found.
16.5 EXTERNAL KEY INPUT

Overview
MDI key codes can be sent from the PMC to CNC by means of interface signals. This allows the CNC to
be controlled in the same way as when the operator performs MDI key operation.
Signal
- Signal list
Control is realized by exchanging the following interface signals between the PMC and CNC:
Signal name Abbreviation
External key input mode selection signal (input) ENBKY
Key code signals (input) EKC0 to EKC7
Key code read signal (input) EKSET
Key code read completion signal (output) EKENB
Key input disable signal (output) INHKY
Program screen display mode signal (output) PRGDPL
Program screen display mode signal (output) PRGDPL
- 1395 -
- Signal detail
The processing flow in the PMC is shown below.
(START)
Set ENBKY = 1 1) Set the external key input control mode.
no 2) Check whether a key code can be set.

< EKSET = EKENB >
yes
no
< INHKY = 0 >
yes
Set key code 3) When a key code can be set:

(1) Set the key code to be input.
(2) Invert the EKSET signal to instruct the CNC to read
Invert EKSET the key code.
no 4) Repeat the operation for the key data to be input

< Has key input ended? >
yes
no 5) After reporting the last data, check that the CNC has read
< EKSET = EKENB >
yes the key data.
no
< INHKY = 0 >
yes
6) Release external key input control mode.
Set ENBKY = 0
(END)
NOTE
Read processing is controlled by exclusive-ORing (XOR) the key code read
signal (EKSET) with the read completion signal (EKENB). When the EKSET and
EKENB signals differ in their logic, the CNC reads the input key code. Once
reading has been completed, the CNC inverts the EKENB signal to match its
logic with that of the EKSET signal.
In the PMC, on the other hand, a new key code cannot be set while the EKSET
and EKENB signals differ in their logic.
External key input mode selection signal ENBKY<Gn066.1>

[Function] While this signal is turned on "1", external key input control is enabled. In external key
input control mode, any MDI key operations are ignored.
NOTE
1 When ENBKY is set to 1 to enable external key input control, key
code input based on the C language executor is also ignored.
2 Key codes input with the external key input function can be read by
the macro executor and C language executor.
- 1396 -
NOTE
3 Even when external key input control is enabled, pressing the

key on the MDI keyboard
for 5 seconds can produce a hard copy of the screen.
Pressing the key while a hard copy of the screen is being

produced can cancel the production of a hard copy of the screen.
Even if the key code of the key is input with the external key
input function, the production of a hard copy of the screen cannot
be stopped.
For details, see "Screen hard copy function".
Key code read signal EKSET<G066.7>

[Function] This signal instructs the CNC to read the input key code.
If the logical state of this signal is opposite to the logical sate of the key code read
completion signal EKENB, a key code read is specified.
Key code signals EKC0 to EKC7<G098>

[Function] These signals set an input key code.
Key input disable signal INHKY<F053.0>

[Function] While this signal is "1", no key code is accepted in external key input control mode.
[Output cond.] This signal is set to 1 during program editing or program input/output.
Program screen display mode signal PRGDPL<F053.1>

[Function] This signal posts whether the CNC is displaying the program screen.
[Output cond.] This signal is set to 1 when the program screen is displayed.
Key code read completion signal EKENB<F053.7>

[Function] This signal reports that the CNC has read a key code.
[Output cond.] When the CNC completes key code read operation, the logical state of this signal is set to
the same state as for the key code read signal EKSET.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
G066 EKSET ENBKY
G098 EKC7 EKC6 EKC5 EKC4 EKC3 EKC2 EKC1 EKC0
F053 EKENB PRGDPL INHKY
- 1397 -
MDI key code

Codes in the table are given in hexadecimal. For example,
A corresponds to 41H in hexadecimal.
corresponds to 90H in hexadecimal.
- MDI Key Code Table (00H to 7FH)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 Space 0 @ P
1 1 A Q
2 2 B R
3 # 3 C S
4 4 D T
5 5 E U
6 & 6 F V
7 7 G W
8 ( 8 H X
9 ) 9 I Y
A ; * J Z
(EOB)
B + K [
C , L
D - = M ]
(Minus)
E . N
F / ? O _
(Underline)
- 1398 -
- MDI Key Code Table (80H to FFH)

8 9 A B C D E F
0 RESET [F0]
(Note2)
1 [F1]
(Note2)
2 [F2]
(Note2)
3 [F3]
(Note2)
4 INSERT [F4]
(Note2)
5 DELETE [F5]
(Note2)
6 CAN ALTER [F6]

(Note2)
7 [F7]
(Note2)
8 Cursor INPUT POS [F8]

→ (Note2)
9 Cursor PROG [F9]

← (Note2)
A Cursor HELP OFFSET

↓ SETTING
B Cursor SYSTEM
↑
C MESSAGE
D GRAPH
(CUSTOM)
(Note1)
E PAGE CUSTOM [FR]
↓ (Note1) (Note2)
F PAGE FAPT [FL]

↑ (Note2)
NOTE
1 For the small keyboard, 0EDH is assigned to .
For the standard keyboard, 0EDH is assigned to . 0EEH is assigned to
.
- 1399 -
NOTE
2 Handling of the soft keys
[F0] to [F9], [FR], and [FL] in the key code table are the key codes for the soft
keys. They are associated with the MDI keys as shown below.
Key configuration for 7-soft key type LCD, or etc. : 5 keys + 2 keys ([F0] to [F4]
and [FR], [FL])
[FL] [F4] [F3] [F2] [F1] [F0] [FR]
Key configuration for 12-soft key type LCD, or etc.: 10 keys + 2 keys ([F0] to [F9]
and [FR], [FL])
[FL] [F9] [F8] [F7] ...... [F1] [F0] [FR]
16.6 ONE TOUCH MACRO CALL

Overview
This function enables the following three operations in pushing the switch installed in the machine only
by the change in a minimum LADDER program.
(1) Changes to MEM mode.
(2) Execution of macro program registered in memory.
(3) Return to the mode before macro program is executed.
And the program which had been selected before macro program is executed is automatically
selected.
This function is enabled only in the reset status (not during a reset). That is, this function cannot be used
during automatic operation (including stopping and suspending of automatic operation), a reset, or an
emergency stop.
Explanation
- Sequence between PMC and CNC
The signal must be processed between PMC and CNC according to the following procedures.
Start
(1) The macro call start signal (MCSTx) is input from PMC to CNC based on the signal from the macro
call switch installed in the machine.
Mode change
(2) CNC outputs the mode notification signal and the mode change request signal (MCRQ) when the
macro call start signal (MCSTx) is detected. At this time, MEM mode is notified as the mode
notification signal. The macro call executing signal (MCEXE) and Call program confirmation
signal(MCEXx) are output at the same time.
(3) PMC must change the mode based on the signal output in the step of above (2).
- 1400 -
(4) Please set “1” in the mode change completion signal (MCFIN) by PMC when the mode change is
completed. If this mode is difference from that specified from the CNC in (2) or the reset mode, an
alarm (PS5306) occurs.
Execution of macro program

(5) When MCFIN signal is set to “1”, CNC executes the macro program.
End of macro program

(6) Please instruct M02 or M30 at the end of the macro program.
Moreover, please input external reset signal (ERS) or reset&rewind signal (RRW) with M02 or M30
on the PMC side. Upon completion of the reset, the program selected before execution of the macro
is automatically selected. The mode change request signal(MCRQ) and mode notification signals are
output at the same time. At this time, the mode when macro call start signal (MCSTx) is input is
notified as the mode notification signal.
Return of mode
(7) Please change the mode on the PMC side based on the signal output in the step of above (6).
(8) Please set “1” in Mode change completion signal (MCFIN) on the PMC side when the mode change
is completed. On the CNC side, the Mode change request signal (MCRQ), the Macro call executing
signal (MCEXE) and the Call program confirmation signal(MCEXx) are set to “0” concurrently with
asserting of the Mode change completion signal (MCFIN). The PS5306 alarm is not checked at this
time.
The following Figure shows the above-mentioned sequence.
Least 32ms
MCSTx
(PMC→CNC)
MCRQ
(CNC→PMC)
Mode notification MEM before macro execution

signal(CNC→PMC)
Mode Change
process(PMC)
MCFIN
(PMC→CNC)
Mode indefinite MEM before macro
MCEXE
(CNC→PMC)
MCEXx
(CNC→PMC)
Program Execution
(CNC)
M30 or M02
(CNC→PMC)
ERS or RRW
(PMC→CNC)
- 1401 -
- Interruption of sequence
Interruption by reset or emergency stop

When the started macro is interrupted by a reset or emergency stop before being completed, the abnormal
end signal (MCSP) becomes 1 and stops the execution of the program. Then, when the reset is completed
or the emergency stop is cleared, if the MEM mode is entered, the mode change request signal (MCRQ)
and the mode notification signal are output for mode recovery and the selection program is recovered. (In
a non-MEM mode, the system waits until the MEM mode is entered.) On the PMC side, be sure to set the
mode change completion signal (MCFIN) to 1 to complete the sequence, regardless of whether mode
recovery is made.
Feed hold or single block

The abnormal end signal (MCSP) is not output when stopping in feed hold or single block. Under such a
condition, when the cycle start signal (ST) is turned on and off, the continuity of the macro program is
executed.
Under such a condition, even if macro call start signal (MCSTx) is turned on and off, it is not effective.
Under such a condition, when reset or emergency stop are input, the operation which is described in
“Interruption by reset or emergency stop” is executed.
Stop by alarm
When the execution of macro program is stopped by alarm, the abnormal end signal (MCSP) is output.
Under such a condition, when reset or the emergency stop are input, the operation which is described in
“Interruption by reset or emergency stop” is executed.
Following Figure shows the timing chart of each signal when the sequence is interrupted by alarm.
- 1402 -
Least 32ms
MCSTx
(PMC→CNC)
MCRQ
(CNC→PMC)
MEM before macro execution

Mode notification
signal(CNC→PMC)
Mode Change
process(PMC)
MCFIN
(PMC→CNC)
Mode indefinite MEM before macro execution
MCEXE
(CNC→PMC)
MCEXx
(CNC→PMC)
Program Execution
(CNC)
AL(Alarm)
(CNC→PMC)
MCSP
(CNC→PMC)
Reset
Note
NOTE
1 Even if the macro call is being executed, mode selection signal (MD1,MD2,MD4)
is effective. Therefore, please change the LADDER program to disable the mode
change when the macro call executing signal (MCEXE) is “1” when the
inconvenience is caused if the mode change is done.
2 The macro call start signal (MCSTx) is effective only the reset state. The macro
call cannot be started during automatic operation (automatic operation stop
state, automatic operation suspend state, and automatic operation start state), a
reset, or an emergency stop. If an attempt is made to start macro program
during automatic operation, a reset, or an emergency stop, an alarm (PS5306)
occurs.
3 The called macro program must end with M02 or M30. And please input external
reset signal (ERS) or reset&rewind signal (RRW) from the PMC side when these
M codes are executed. If above two condition is not implemented, neither the
return of the mode nor the return of the selection program are done after the
program ends.
4 When the specified program is not registered in the memory, the alarm DS0059
is generated. The operation in this case becomes the shown in “Stop by alarm”.
- 1403 -
Signal
Macro call start signal MCSTx <Gn512.0 to Gn513.7>
[Function] This signal starts the macro call sequence.
When the standing fall of this signal is detected, CNC starts the corresponding macro
program. O number of the program started by the MCST1 signal is specified by
parameter No.6096.
[Operation] The sequence is shown in “Sequence between PMC and CNC”.
Mode change completion signal MCFIN <Gn514.0>

[Function] This signal notifies the completion of the mode change to CNC.
[Operation] CNC begins the execution of the program or complete the sequence.
Macro call executing signal MCEXE <Fn512.0>

[Function] This signal notifies the macro call function is being executed.
[Output cond.] This signal is set to "1" in the following case:
- When CNC detects the standing fall of Macro call start signal (MCSTx).
This signal is set to "0" in the following case:
- When the sequence is completed with the mode change completion signal MCFIN
set to 1 after macro execution is terminated or is interrupted by a reset, emergency
stop, or alarm.
Mode change request signal MCRQ <Fn512.1>

[Function] This signal requests the change of the mode.
- When M30 or M02 is executed in the macro program, and external reset signal
(ERS) or reset&rewind signal (RRW) is input.
- When the sequence is interrupted by reset or emergency stop.
- When Mode change completion signal (MCFIN) becomes "1".
Mode notification signal MD1R,MD2R,MD4R,DNCIR,ZRNR

<Fn513.0, Fn513.1, Fn513.2, Fn513.5, Fn513.7>
[Function] This signal notifies the mode which should be changed.
[Output cond.] This signal is output in the following case:
- When M30 or M02 is executed in the macro program, and external reset signal
(ERS) or reset&rewind signal (RRW) is input.
- When the sequence is interrupted by reset or emergency stop.
Abnormal end signal MCSP <Fn512.2>

[Function] This signal notifies the sequence of the macro call is terminated abnormally.
- When the sequence is interrupted by reset or emergency stop or alarm.
- When the mode change completion signal (MCFIN) becomes "1", and the sequence
is completed.
- 1404 -
Call program confirmation signal MCEXx <Fn514.0 toFn515.7>

[Function] This signal notifies the program number called by the macro call.
The signal which corresponds to macro call start signal (MCSTx) is output.
- While executing the sequence.
- When the sequence is completed.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Gn512 MCST8 MCST7 MCST6 MCST5 MCST4 MCST3 MCST2 MCST1
Gn513 MCST16 MCST15 MCST14 MCST13 MCST12 MCST11 MCST10 MCST9
Gn514 MCFIN
Fn512 MCSP MCRQ MCEXE
Fn513 ZRNR DNCIR MD4R MD2R MD1R
Fn514 MCEX8 MCEX7 MCEX6 MCEX5 MCEX4 MCEX3 MCEX2 MCEX1
Fn515 MCEX16 MCEX15 MCEX14 MCEX13 MCEX12 MCEX11 MCEX10 MCEX9
Parameter
6095 Number of programs used by the one-touch macro call function

This parameter registers the number of programs used by the one-touch macro call
function.
For example, when this parameter is set to 3, macro call start signals MCST1, MCST2,
and MCST3 are enabled.
When this parameter is set to 0, the one-touch macro call function is disabled.
6096 Number of the first program in the program group used by the one-touch macro call function

This parameter registers the number of the first program in the program group used by the
one-touch macro call function.
For example, when this parameter is set to 9000, macro call start signals MCSTx and the
programs started by the signals are given below.
MCST1 signal: Starts O9000. (when parameter No.6095 is 1 or more)
:::
- 1405 -
Alarm and message

DS0021 START ERROR(ONE TOUCH An One Touch Macro can not be start for the following
MACRO) reasons:
(1) Feed hold signal *SP is "0"
(2) During alarm status.
(3) Program restart signal SRN is "1".
etc.
DS0059 SPECIFIED NUMBER NOT FOUND The program of the specified O number is not registered in the
memory.
PS5306 MODE CHANGE ERROR The mode is not changed correctly at start of sequence.
An one touch macro was started during a state other than the
reset state, a reset, or an emergency stop.
- 1406 -
B-64303EN-1/02 17.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION
17 EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

This chapter describes the specifications of the embedded Ethernet function.
Chapter 17, "EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION", consists of the following sections:
17.1 EMBEDDED ETHERNET PORT AND PCMCIA ETHERNET CARD ......................................1407

17.2 SETTING UP THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION .......................................................1408
17.3 SWITCHING BETWEEN THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET DEVICES .......................................1421
17.4 RESTART OF THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET ...........................................................................1421
17.5 MAINTENANCE SCREEN FOR EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION.................................1422
17.6 LOG SCREEN OF THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION................................................1426
17.1 EMBEDDED ETHERNET PORT AND PCMCIA ETHERNET

CARD
The embedded Ethernet function can be used by selecting one of two types of devices: the embedded
Ethernet port and PCMCIA Ethernet card.
A selection can also be made to stop the embedded Ethernet function.
The PCMCIA Ethernet card is to be inserted into the memory card slot for temporary communication.
CAUTION
1 When using the embedded Ethernet function for the first time, set an IP address
and other items carefully as instructed by the network administrator, then
perform a sufficient communication test.
Note that an incorrect IP address or other setting may cause a communication
failure on the entire network or system error in the CNC.
2 A unit such as a PC situated in the same network can increase the
communication processing load on the CNC even if the unit is not
communicating with the CNC.
Avoid connecting the CNC to a factory-wide network. Use a router or the like to
separate the network including the CNC from the other networks.
NOTE
1 Use the PCMCIA Ethernet card designated by FANUC. General Ethernet cards
available on the market cannot be used.
2 The PCMCIA Ethernet card is used for FANUC LADDER-III or a servo guide.
3 Use the PCMCIA Ethernet card just for temporary communication as described
above. Avoid using the card for continuous communication.
4 The PCMCIA Ethernet card is inserted into a memory card slot, with a part of the
card left uninserted. When using the PCMCIA Ethernet card, take great care
not to damage the card by hitting the protruding part of the card.
When the card becomes unnecessary, remove the card immediately, in order to
prevent any damage to the card.
- 1407 -
17.EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION B-64303EN-1/02
Related NC parameters
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14880 ETH

[Data type] Bit
#0 ETH The embedded Ethernet function (a embedded port or PCMCIA Ethernet card) is:
0: Used.
1: Not used.
NOTE
This parameter is valid with series 656F and edition 06 or later.
17.2 SETTING UP THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION

This section describes the setting of parameters for the embedded Ethernet function.
17.2.1 Setting of the FOCAS2/Ethernet Function

This subsection describes the settings required to operate the FOCAS2/Ethernet function.
Notes on using the FOCAS2/Ethernet function for the first time
NOTE
1 When running user's original application software created by using the
FOCAS2/Ethernet function, use the embedded Ethernet port.
2 The FOCAS2/Ethernet function allows up to five FOCAS2/Ethernet clients to be
connected to one CNC.
3 Concurrent access by multiple applications or personal computers may overload
the CNC, reducing the communication speed.
17.2.1.1 Operation on the FOCAS2/Ethernet setting screen

On the Ethernet parameter setting screen, set the parameters for operating the FOCAS2/Ethernet function.
Procedure
1 Press the function key .
2 Soft keys [EMBED] and [PCMCIA] appear.
(When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)
3 To display the Ethernet Setting screen for the embedded Ethernet port or the PCMCIA Ethernet card,
press soft key [EMBED] or [PCMCIA], respectively.
4 Press soft keys [COMMON] and [FOCAS2] and then enter parameters for the items that appear.
- 1408 -
NOTE
1 The parameters for the embedded Ethernet port and the parameters for the
PCMCIA Ethernet card are independent of each other.
2 The settings of the FOCAS2/Ethernet function for the PCMCIA Ethernet card are
made when a connection to the Servo Guide and FANUC LADDER-III is
established.
COMMON screen (BASIC)

Press soft key [COMMON]. The COMMON screen (BASIC) is displayed.
Setting items
Item Description
IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the embedded Ethernet.
(Example of specification format: "192.168.0.100")
SUBNET MASK Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the network.
ROUTER IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the router.
Specify this item when the network contains a router.
Display items
Item Description
MAC ADDRESS Embedded Ethernet MAC address
AVAILABLE DEVICE Enabled device of the embedded Ethernet.
Either the embedded Ethernet port or the PCMCIA Ethernet card is displayed.
- 1409 -
FOCAS2 screen
Press soft key [FOCAS2]. The FOCAS2 screen is displayed.
FOCAS2 screen
Setting items
Item Description
PORT NUMBER (TCP) Specify a port number to be used with the FOCAS2/Ethernet function. The valid
input range is 5001 to 65535.
PORT NUMBER (UDP) Set this item to 0 when it is used as the FOCAS2/Ethernet function.
TIME INTERVAL Set this item to 0 when it is used as the FOCAS2/Ethernet function.
NOTE
1 When a connection to the FANUC i CELL is established, set the UDP port
number and time interval above as described in the FANUC i CELL Operator's
Manual (B-75074EN).
2 The unit of the time interval is 10 ms. The allowable range is between 10 and
65535. A time interval less than 100ms cannot be set.
3 Decreasing the time interval setting increases the communication load and can
affect the network performance.
Example) If the interval is set to 100 (100 x 10 ms = 1 second), broadcast data
is sent every 1 second.
Initial setting of the PCMCIA Ethernet card

The PCMCIA Ethernet card is factory-set to the following default values, for ease of connection with a
servo guide or FANUC LADDER-III.
IP ADDRESS : 192.168.1.1
SUBNET MASK : 255.255.255.0
ROUTER IP ADDRESS : None
PORT NUMBER (TCP) : 8193
PORT NUMBER (UDP) : 0
TIME INTERVAL :0
If a specified IP address is changed to a blank (space), the specified setting is reset to the default value.
The embedded Ethernet port does not have a default value.
- 1410 -
17.2.1.2 Example of setting the FOCAS2/Ethernet function

The following shows a setting example required for the FOCAS2/Ethernet function to operate.
In this example, one personal computer is connected to two CNCs through FOCAS2/Ethernet.
HUB
10BASE-T or
100BASE-TX
CNC 1 CNC 2 PC 1
CNC 1 CNC 2
IP address 192.168.0.100 192.168.0.101
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
Router IP address None None The Ethernet parameter screen is used for
TCP port number 8193 8193 setting.
UDP port number 0 0
Time interval 0 0
PC 1
"Microsoft TCP/IP property" of the personal
IP address 192.168.0.200
computer (Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7) is
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 used for setting.
Default gateway None
CNC 1 NC IP address 192.168.0.100
The arguments of the data window library
NC TCP port number 8193 function cnc_allclibhndl3 are used for
CNC 2 NC IP address 192.168.0.101 setting.
NC TCP port number 8193
17.2.2 Setting of the FTP File Transfer Function

This section describes the settings required for the FTP file transfer function to operate using the
embedded Ethernet function.
Notes on using the FTP file transfer function for the first time
NOTE
1 When using the FTP file transfer function, use the embedded Ethernet port.
2 The number of FTP communications to which one CNC can be connected using
the FTP file transfer function is one.
- 1411 -
17.2.2.1 Operation on the FTP file transfer setting screen

On the Ethernet setting screen, set the parameters for operating the FTP file transfer function.
Procedure
2 Soft keys [EMBED] appear.
3 By pressing the [EMBED] soft key, the Ethernet Setting screen for the embedded Ethernet port is
displayed.
4 Press soft keys [COMMON] and [FTP TRANS] and then enter parameters for the items that appear.
NOTE
The parameters for the embedded Ethernet port and the parameters for the
PCMCIA Ethernet card are independent of each other.
If the [PCMCIA] soft key is pressed, the PCMCIA Ethernet card can be set up.
However, the card setup is carried out for maintenance and is not necessary
usually.

Press soft key [COMMON]. The COMMON screen (BASIC) is displayed.
Setting items
Item Description
IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the embedded Ethernet.
SUBNET MASK Specify a mask address for the IP addresses of the network.
ROUTER IP ADDRESS Specify the IP address of the router.
Specify this item when the network contains a router.
- 1412 -
Display items
Item Description
MAC ADDRESS Embedded Ethernet MAC address
AVAILABLE DEVICE Enabled device of the embedded Ethernet.
Either the embedded Ethernet port or the PCMCIA Ethernet card is displayed.
FTP transfer screen (CONNECT1, CONNECT2, CONNECT3)

1 Press soft key [FTP TRANS]. The FTP transfer screen is displayed.
2 Page keys can be used to make settings for the three host computers for connection
destinations 1 to 3.
FTP transfer screen (1st page)
FTP transfer screen (2nd page)
- 1413 -
Item Description
HOST NAME Specify the IP address of the host computer.
PORT NUMBER Specify a port number to be used with the FTP file transfer function. An FTP session
is used, so that "21" is to be specified usually.
USERNAME Specify a user name to be used for logging in to the host computer with FTP.
(Up to 31 characters can be specified.)
PASSWORD Specify a password for the user name specified above. (Up to 31 characters can be
specified.)
Be sure to set a password.
LOGIN FOLDER Specify a work folder to be used when logging in to the host computer. (Up to 127
characters can be specified.)
If nothing is specified, the home folder specified in the host computer becomes the
log-in folder.
Operation
Select a destination.
1 Pressing the [(OPRT)] soft key causes soft key [HOST SELECT] to be displayed. Pressing this
soft key causes soft keys [CONECT 1], [CONECT 2], and [CONECT 3] to be displayed.
2 Depending on the host computer to be connected, press soft key [CONECT 1], [CONECT 2], or
[CONECT 3]. Destination 1, 2, or 3 is highlighted in the screen title field. The computer
corresponding to the highlighted destination is selected as the target computer to be connected.
When destination 1 is selected
17.2.2.2 Related NC parameters

The NC parameters related to the FTP file transfer function are described below.

[Data type] Byte
[Valid data range] 9 : Select the embedded Ethernet as the input/output device.
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
13115 KBC SI2 SI1

[Data type] Bit
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
<>¥%$!~:"'
- 1414 -
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
()?*&@_
For embedded Ethernet port

#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14880 PCH

[Data type] Bit
#1 PCH When communication based on the FTP file transfer function starts, an FTP server
presence check based on PING is:
0: Made
1: Not made
NOTE
Generally, set this parameter to 0 so that an FTP server presence
check based on PING is performed.
Otherwise, if the server is not present in the network, it takes
several tens of seconds to detect an error.
Some PCs are set not to response to the PING command mainly
for security purposes. To communicate with such a PC, set this
parameter to 1.
14890 Selects the host computer 1 OS.

[Data type] Word
0: Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7.
1: UNIX, VMS.
2: Linux.
NOTE
Some FTP server software products do not depend on the OS. So,
even when the above parameters are set, it is sometimes
impossible to display a list of files properly.
- 1415 -
17.2.2.3 Example of setting the FTP file transfer function

The following shows a setting example required for the FTP file transfer function to operate.
In this example, one personal computer is connected to two CNCs through the FTP file transfer function.
• On Personal Computer 1, the FTP server function operates.
• On CNC 1 and CNC 2, the FTP client operates as the FTP file transfer function.
HUB
10BASE-T or
100BASE-TX
CNC 1 CNC 2 PC 1
CNC 1 CNC 2
IP address 192.168.0.100 192.168.0.101
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0 255.255.255.0
Router IP address None None
Connection Port number 21 21 The Ethernet parameter screen is used for
host 1 IP address 192.168.0.200 192.168.0.200 setting.
User name user user
Password user user
Login DIR None None The parameter screen is used for setting.
NC parameter No. 20 9 9
PC 1 "Microsoft TCP/IP property" of the personal computer

IP address 192.168.0.200 (Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7) is used for setting.
Subnet mask 255.255.255.0
Default gateway None "User acount of the personal computer (Windows 2000
User name user /XP/Vista/7) is used for setting.
Password user
Login DIR Default "Internet service manager" of the personal computer
(Windows 2000/XP/Vista/7) is used for setting.
17.2.3 Setting Up the DNS/DHCP Function

The DHCP/DNS function is set up by using the COMMON screen (DETAIL) and NC parameters.
17.2.3.1 Setting up DNS

This subsection describes the procedure for setting up a DNS.
Procedure
1 Enable the DNS function, with reference to "Related NC Parameters," which will be seen later.
2 Set up the DNS server of the host computer.
- 1416 -
3 Connect the host computer on which the DNS server is working (hereafter referred to as a DNS
server), reboot the CNC, then press function key .
4 Press soft keys [EMBED] and [COMMON] in that order. The COMMON screen (DETAIL)
appears.
5 Enter the IP address of the DNS server in the corresponding DNS IP address field.
COMMON screen (DETAIL)
After pressing soft key [COMMON], press either page key to call a desired COMMON
screen (DETAIL). Specify a DNS IP address.
COMMON screen (DETAIL)
Display items
Item Description
DNS IP ADDRESS 1, 2 Up to two DNS IP addresses can be specified.
The CNC searches for the DNS server using DNS IP addresses 1 and 2 in that
order.
17.2.3.2 Setting up DHCP

This subsection describes the procedure for setting up a DHCP.
Procedure
1 Enable the DHCP function, with reference to "Related NC Parameters," which will be seen later.
2 Set up the DHCP server of the host computer.
3 Connect the host computer on which the DHCP server is working (hereafter referred to as a DHCP
server), reboot the CNC, then press function key .
4 Press soft keys [EMBED] and [COMMON] in that order. The COMMON screen appears.
5 If the DHCP function of the CNC has been enabled and if the DHCP server is connected
successfully, the DHCP server automatically specifies the following items.
- IP ADDRESS
- SUBNET MASK
- ROUTER IP ADDRESS
- 1417 -
- DNS IP ADDRESS
- DOMAIN
If the DHCP server cannot be connected, "DHCP ERROR" is displayed in each field.
6 If the DNS function has also been enabled and if the DHCP server and the DNS server work
together (if the DNS server supports dynamic DNS), enter a host name.
COMMON screen (BASIC and DETAIL)
After pressing soft key [COMMON], press either page key to call desired Ethernet common
setting screens (BASIC and DETAIL).
If the DHCP server is connected successfully and if the setting data can be obtained, the screens are
displayed as shown below.
When the DHCP server is connected successfully (1st page)
When the DHCP server is connected successfully (2nd page)
If the host name is not specified, the CNC automatically assigns a host name in the
"NC-<MAC-address>" format.
- 1418 -
Example of automatically assigned host name
If the DHCP server cannot be connected, the screens are displayed as shown below.
When the DHCP server cannot be connected (1st page)
When the DHCP server cannot be connected (2nd page)
Check items
Item Description
IP ADDRESS If the DHCP server is connected successfully, the items obtained from
SUBNET MASK the DHCP server are displayed.
ROUTER IP ADDRESS If the DHCP server cannot be connected, "DHCP ERROR" is displayed.
DNS IP ADDRESS 1,2
DOMAIN
- 1419 -
Setting items
Item Description
HOST NAME Enter the host name of the CNC.
If a DHCP server and a DNS server work together, the DHCP server notifies the
DNS server of this host name.
If the host name is left blank, a host name is automatically assigned in the
"NC-<MAC-address>" format.
Example of automatically assigned host name:
NC-00E0E4000001
Display items
Item Description
MAC ADDRESS MAC address of embedded Ethernet
17.2.3.3 Related NC parameters

For embedded Ethernet port
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
14880 DHC DNS D1E

[Data type] Bit
#3 D1E When the DHCP function is used:

0: The default parameters for the FOCAS2/Ethernet function are specified.
PORT NUMBER (TCP) 8193
PORT NUMBER (UDP) 0
TIME INTERVAL 0
1: The default parameters for FANUC i CELL are specified.
PORT NUMBER (TCP) 8193
PORT NUMBER (UDP) 8192
TIME INTERVAL 50
#5 DNS The DHCP function is:

0: Used.
1: Not used.
#6 DHC The DHCP function is:

0: Used.
1: Not used.
A change in these parameters becomes effective after the power is turned off and on or
after the embedded Ethernet function is restarted.
- 1420 -
17.3 SWITCHING BETWEEN THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET

DEVICES
There are two types of embedded Ethernet devices: the embedded Ethernet port and PCMCIA Ethernet
card.
Screen operation is required to switch between these two types of devices.
Procedure
3 Press soft key [EMBED] or [PCMCIA], press soft key [COMMON], and then press [(OPRT)] to
display soft key [EMB/PCM].
4 Pressing soft key [EMB/PCM] switches between enabled devices.
NOTE
Information on a switched device is stored in nonvolatile memory.
On the next power-on, the device last selected can be used as is.
17.4 RESTART OF THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET

Communication using the embedded Ethernet can be restarted.
Procedure
3 Press soft key [EMBED] or [PCMCIA], press soft key [COMMON], and then press [(OPRT)] to
display soft key [EMB/PCM].
4 Pressing soft key [RSTART] resets embedded Ethernet communication and then restarts it.
NOTE
1 Pressing soft key [RSTART] forcibly interrupts communication even when it is in
progress.
2 This function makes a restart by software. An actual restart may be impossible
under some conditions.
- 1421 -
17.5 MAINTENANCE SCREEN FOR EMBEDDED ETHERNET

FUNCTION
With the embedded Ethernet function, a dedicated maintenance screen is available.
The maintenance screen enables operations to be checked when the embedded Ethernet function operates
abnormally.
Displaying and operating the PING screen

Procedure
3 By pressing the [EMBED] soft key, the Ethernet Setting screen for the embedded Ethernet is
displayed.
By pressing the [PCMCIA] soft key, the Ethernet Setting screen for the PCMCIA Ethernet card can
be set.
4 Press soft key [PING] and then press [(OPRT)].
5 To send the PING command to connection destination 1 for FTP file transfer, press soft key
[P.FTP1]. Similarly, to send the PING command to connection destination 2 or 3, press [P.FTP2] or
[P.FTP3], respectively.
PING connection status screen
- 1422 -
6 To send the PING command to the desired destination, enter the address of the destination on the
PING setting screen. (Page keys are used for switching.)
PING connection status screen
7 After entering the address and the repeat count, press the soft key [PING]. The specified number of
PING commands are sent to the specified destination.
8 To cancel the PING command currently being sent, press soft key [P.CAN].
Displaying Communication status screen

Procedure
3 By pressing the [EMBED] soft key, the Ethernet Setting screen for the embedded Ethernet is
displayed.
By pressing the [PCMCIA] soft key, the Ethernet Setting screen for the PCMCIA Ethernet card can
be set.
4 To display the communication status of the embedded Ethernet, press soft key [COM STS].
Page keys can be used to switch between the sending state and the receiving state.
- 1423 -
Communication status screen (1st page)
Communication status screen (2nd page)
TASK STATE screen

Procedure
3 To display the Ethernet Setting screen for the embedded Ethernet port or the PCMCIA Ethernet card,
press soft key [EMBED] or [PCMCIA], respectively.
4 Pressing soft key [TASK STATUS] causes the task status of the embedded Ethernet function to be
displayed.
- 1424 -
TAST STATE screen
The following symbols are used.

Symbol and meaning
FOCAS2 #0 C: Waiting for a connection from the host
W: Data processing in progress (1)
D: Data processing in progress (2)
N: FOCAS2 out of service
FOCAS2 #1,#2 W: Data processing in progress (1)
X: Not yet executed
UDP W: Data processing in progress (1)
X: Not yet executed
PMC W: Data processing in progress (1)
X: Not yet executed
FTP C: Execution wait
W: Data processing in progress (1)
X: Not yet executed
- 1425 -
17.6 LOG SCREEN OF THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET

FUNCTION
This screen displays the log of the embedded Ethernet function.
NOTE
If alarm SR2032, “EMBEDDED ETHERNET/DATA SERVER ERROR” is issued
during data transfer using the embedded Ethernet function, check the error
details on the log screen of the embedded Ethernet function.
Displaying the log screen

Procedure
2 To display the log screen for the embedded Ethernet port or PCMCIA Ethernet card, press soft key
[EMBED LOG] or [PCM LOG], respectively. (When there is no soft keys, press the continue key.)
LOG screen
The newest error log appears at the top of the screen. The date and time when an error occurred are
displayed at the right end of the line. The format of date and time data is “MMM.DD hh:mm:ss” where
MMM represents a month, dd represents a day, hh represents hours, mm represents minutes, and ss
represents seconds.
The date and time of the upper item shown above is January 28, 12:28:17.
To clear the log, press soft keys [(OPRT)] and [CLEAR] in that order.
The log for each function can be displayed by using soft keys on the embedded Ethernet log screen.
(1) Soft key [ALL]
Displays all log related to the embedded Ethernet.
(2) Soft key [COMMON]
Displays the log related to the parameter settings of the embedded Ethernet function and the basic
communication function.
- 1426 -
(3) Soft key [FOCAS2]
Displays the log related to the FOCAS2/Ethernet function.
(4) Soft key [FTP TRANS]
Displays the log related to FTP file transfer.
Error and message

Error No. Log message Description and necessary action
E-0118 Error occurred while wait for FOCAS2 A communication error has occurred because of any of
E-0119 pdu the following:
→ The network quality has been lowered to such a level
that data cannot be received from a PC at the other
end. The communication channel has been logically
shut down.
→ Software running on a PC at the other end has
logically shut down the communication channel.
→ The Ethernet cable has been disconnected.
E-011A All communication paths are busy All the FOCAS2/Ethernet communication channels are
busy.
E-0200 (Received message from FTP server) A message sent by the FTP server is displayed as it is.
A message containing characters other than ASCII
characters may not be displayed correctly.
E-0202 Connection failed with FTP server Software of the FTP server may not be running. Run the
FTP server software.
Alternatively, the FTP server may not respond to the
PING command to increase the security level (such as a
firewall setting). Set bit 1(PCH) of NC parameter
No.14880 to “1” and connect the server again.
E-0207 The router is not found The specified IP address of the router may be wrong.
Alternatively, the router may be turned off. Check
whether the IP address of the router has been correctly
specified and whether the router is turned on.
E-0208 The FTP server is not found The specified IP address of the FTP server may be
wrong. Alternatively, the FTP server may be turned off.
Check whether the IP address of the FTP server has
been correctly specified and whether the FTP server is
turned on.
Alternatively, the FTP server may not respond to the
PING command to increase the security level (such as a
firewall setting). Set bit 1(PCH) of NC parameter
No.14880 to “1” and connect the server again.
E-020B Cannot login into FTP server Check whether a correct user name and password are
specified when logging into the FTP server.
E-020C The parameters of FTP server are Check whether a correct user name and password are
wrong specified when logging into the FTP server.
E-020D Changing a work folder of host failed Check the work folder logging into the FTP server.
E-041A Frame transmission failed (TCP) A communication error has occurred because of any of
the following:
→ The network quality has been lowered to such a level
that data cannot be received from a PC at the other
end. The communication channel has been logically
shut down.
→ Software running on a PC at the other end has
logically shut down the communication channel.
→ The Ethernet cable has been disconnected.
→ Data cannot be posted to the communication
destination due to a firewall setting.
- 1427 -
Error No. Log message Description and necessary action

E-0901 Cannot read MAC address The MAC address is not written in the hardware.
Alternatively, the hardware has been damaged.
E-0A06 Network is too busy An excessive amount of data is flowing over the network.
One possible solution is to divide the network.
E-0B00 The own IP address is wrong Specify a correct IP address in the designated format.
E-0B01 The own IP address is not set Specify an IP address.
E-0B02 Subnet mask is wrong Specify a correct subnet mask in the designated format.
E-0B03 Subnet mask is not set Specify a subnet mask.
E-0B04 Router IP address is wrong There may be class disagreement between the IP
address of the local node and the IP address of the
router.
E-0B05 IP address of DNS server is wrong There may be class disagreement between the IP
address of the local node and the IP address of the DNS
server.
E-0B06 The own host name is wrong Check whether a correct host name is specified.
E-0B07 The own domain name is wrong Check whether a correct domain name is specified.
E-0B08 TCP port number is wrong A value beyond the permissible setting range may be
specified.
E-0B09 UDP port number is wrong A value beyond the permissible setting range may be
specified.
E-0B0B IP address of remote FTP server is Specify a correct IP address in the designated format.
wrong
E-0B0B IP address of remote FTP server is Specify a correct IP address in the designated format.
wrong
E-0B0C Port No of a remote FTP server is A value beyond the permissible setting range may be
wrong specified.
E-0B0D User name of remote FTP server is The specified user name may contain a prohibited
wrong character.
E-0B0E Password of remote FTP server is The specified password may contain a prohibited
wrong character.
E-0B0F Login folder of remote FTP srv is wrong The specified log-in folder name may contain a prohibited
character.
E-0B18 Cannot set because DHCP is available To allow a set-up, disable the DHCP client function.
E-0B19 Embedded Ethernet hardware isn't The software or hardware of embedded Ethernet function
E-0B1A found cannot be recognized. Check whether the software has
been incorporated. Check whether the hardware is
sound.
E-XXXX (No message) An internal error has occurred.
Make a notification of the error number.
- 1428 -
B-64303EN-1/02 18.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
18 DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION
Chapter 18, "DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION", consists of the following sections:
18.1 SERVO WARNING INTERFACE ................................................................................................1429

18.2 SPINDLE WARNING INTERFACE .............................................................................................1431
18.3 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS................................................................................................................1433
18.4 MACHINE ALARM DIAGNOSIS ................................................................................................1448
18.1 SERVO WARNING INTERFACE

Overview
The servo system can report the warning status before one of the following target alarms occurs.
When the warning status is entered, a report to the PMC is issued.
For example, this signal can be used by the machine for retracting tools from the time a warning occurs
by the time a servo alarm occurs.
Signal
Servo warning detail signals SVWRN1 to 4 <Fn093.4 to 7>
[Function] Reports the warning signal corresponding to the state of the servo amplifier.
[Output cond.] The following table shows the warning statuses of the servo amplifier and their
corresponding warning signals.
Warning status signals (F93) Time from when a

SVWRN4 SVWRN3 SVWRN2 SVWRN1 warning state signal is
Corresponding alarm messages
(Fn093.7) (Fn093.6) (Fn093.5) (Fn093.4) issued to until an alarm
occurs
SV0444: INV. COOLING FAN 1 0 0 0 Until overheat occurs
FAILURE (inconstant)
SV0601: INV. RADIATOR FAN 1 0 0 1 Until overheat occurs
SV0443 : CNV. COOLING FAN 1 1 0 0 One minute
FAILURE
SV0606: CNV. RADIATOR FAN 1 1 0 1 Until overheat occurs
SV0431: CNV. OVERLOAD 1 1 1 0 One minute
SV0607: CNV. SINGLE PHASE 1 1 1 1 PSMR: Five seconds,
FAILURE PSM: One minute
A timing chart for handling a warning is shown below.
- 1429 -
18.DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION B-64303EN-1/02
Occurrence of a warning
Servo amplifier
SVWRN1-4
(Warning)
PMC Perform deceleration stop or block stop

during this time period with the PMC to
stop the machine without damage. The
time period varies with the warning type.
Activation
Occurrence and stop of the alarm corresponding to a warning
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn093 SVWRN4 SVWRN3 SVWRN2 SVWRN1
Warning status alarms for servo amplifiers

If a servo amplifier is placed in the warning status, a DS alarm is output in addition to the servo warning
detail signals.
If one of the following alarms is issued, automatic operation enters the feed hold state and movements
along all controlled axes including PMC axes are decelerated to a stop. Issuing a warning status alarm
does not cause to the servo motor to be deactivated.
Alarm No. Alarm No.

when the servo when the servo
Operation performed when the warning status
amplifier is in amplifier is in Alarm message
occurs
the warning the alarm
status status
DS0608 SV0444 n-axis : INV. COOLING Immediately after the fan stops, DS0608 is
FAN FAILURE displayed and movements along axes enter the
feed hold stop state. The servo motor is kept
active for 1 minute. After that, the servo motor is
deactivated and SV0444 is displayed.
DS0609 SV0601 n-axis : INV. RADIATOR Immediately after the fan stops, DS0609 is
feed hold stop state. When bit 2 (SWP) of
parameter No. 1807 is set to 1 after that, the alarm
display can be canceled by a reset and operation
can be restarted.
DS0610 SV0443 n-axis : CNV. COOLING Immediately after the fan stops, DS0610 is
feed hold stop state. The servo motor is kept
active for 1 minute. After that, the servo motor is
deactivated and SV0443 is displayed.
DS0611 SV0606 n-axis : CNV. Immediately after the fan stops, DS0611 is
RADIATOR FAN displayed and movements along axes enter the
FAILURE feed hold stop state. When bit 2 (SWP) of
parameter No. 1807 is set to 1 after that, the alarm
display can be canceled by a reset and operation
can be restarted.
DS0612 SV0431 n-axis : CNV.
OVERLOAD
DS0613 SV0607 n-axis : CNV. SINGLE
PHASE FAILURE
- 1430 -
After an alarm in the warning status listed above is issued, when the αi servo amplifier is actually placed
in the alarm status, the servo motor is deactivated and the number of an alarm in the alarm status is
additionally displayed.
18.2 SPINDLE WARNING INTERFACE

Overview
The warning state can be reported before an alarm is issued. When the warning state is entered, a report to
the PMC is sent.
For example, this signal can be used for retracting tools or reducing cutting load from the time a warning
occurs by the time an overheat alarm occurs. In addition, diagnostic information also contains warning
numbers.
Signal
Spindle warning detailed signals SPWRN1 to SPWRN9 <Fn264.0 to 7, Fn265.0>
[Classification] Output
[Function] Reports the warning number corresponding to the state of the αi spindle amplifier.
[Output cond.] When the αi spindle is in the warning state, a warning number consisting of SPWRN1 to
SPWRN9 is output as nine-bit binary data.
If warnings occurred on multiple αi spindle amplifiers, the warning number of the ai
spindle having the smallest axis number is output.
The warning numbers and their descriptions are shown below.
Warning
Contents Details
number
01 Motor overheat When the motor temperature increases beyond the overheat warning
detection level (set by a parameter), a warning signal is output. At this
time, spindle operation is continued. So, perform necessary processing
with the PMC.
An alarm is issued when the motor temperature has reached the
overheat alarm detection level.
04 Open-phase detected in the If an open-phase is detected in the main power supply, the warning
converter main power supply signal is output. Since the spindle continues to operate at this time,
use the PMC to perform processing as needed.
About one minute (for the αiPS) or about five seconds (for the αiPSR)
after the warning signal is output, an alarm occurs.
06 Temperature sensor error Coolant entered the spindle motor, probably reducing insulating
resistance. Remove coolant. Take measures to prevent coolant
from entering the motor. If insulating resistance is in advanced
stages, the motor needs to be replaced.
56 Internal fan stopped If the internal fan stops, the warning signal is output. Since the spindle
continues to operate at this time, use the PMC to perform processing
as needed.
About one minute after the warning signal is output, an alarm occurs.
58 Converter main circuit If the main circuit of the Power Supply (PS) is overloaded, the warning
overloaded signal is output. Since the spindle continues to operate at this time,
use the PMC to perform processing as needed.
59 Converter cooling fan stopped If the Power Supply (PS) cooling fan stops, the warning signal is
output. Since the spindle continues to operate at this time, use the
PMC to perform processing as needed.
88 Radiator cooling fan stopped If the radiator cooling fan stops, the warning signal is output. Since the
spindle continues to operate at this time, use the PMC to perform
processing as needed.
If the main circuit overheats, an alarm occurs.
- 1431 -
Warning
Contents Details
number
113 Converter radiator cooling fan If the Power Supply (PS) radiator cooling fan stops, the warning signal
stopped is output. Since the spindle continues to operate at this time, use the
PMC to perform processing as needed.
If the Power Supply (PS) main circuit overheats, an alarm occurs.
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn264 SPWRN8 SPWRN7 SPWRN6 SPWRN4 SPWRN4 SPWRN3 SPWRN2 SPWRN1
Fn265 SPWRN9
Diagnosis display
The status of a warning is displayed on the following diagnostic screen.
712 Warning status of spindle
[Data type] Word spindle

The number of a warning caused on each spindle is indicated.
If there is no warning, 0 is indicated.
- 1432 -
18.3 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS
18.3.1 Outline
Investigating the cause of Servo/Spindle/CNC alarms becomes easier by diagnosis according to the
guidance message.
And when the thermal simulation or disturbance level of servo axis exceeds the trouble forecast level, a
trouble forecast signal can be output.
Step of diagnosis
Procedure
1 Answer the question of the guidance message in the trouble diagnosis guidance screen by pushing
soft keys [ YES ]/[ NO ].
Fig.18.3.1 (a) Trouble diagnosis guidance screen (10.4-inch)
- 1433 -
2 See the servo/spindle monitor information in the trouble diagnosis monitor screen and waveform of
servo/spindle in the trouble diagnosis graphic screen according to the guidance message if necessary.
Fig.18.3.1 (b) Trouble diagnosis monitor screen (10.4-inch)
図18.3.1 (c) Trouble diagnosis graphic screen (10.4-inch)
- 1434 -
3 Finally, the guidance message in the trouble diagnosis guidance screen shows the probable cause of
an alarm and the method to remove the problem.
Fig.18.3.1 (d) Trouble diagnosis guidance screen (10.4-inch)
18.3.2 Trouble diagnosis guidance screen

Outline
The trouble diagnosis guidance screen displays the guidance message to investigate the cause of an alarm.
Explanation
Display
・Display procedure
2 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [GUIDE] appears.
3 Press soft key [GUIDE].
4 Press the soft key [(OPRT)].
- 1435 -
Trouble Code
Contents of trouble
Probable cause
Guidance message
Status display
Fig.18.3.2 (a) Trouble diagnosis guidance screen (10.4-inch)
・Contents of Display
Trouble Code : "NC"-"Alarm type + alarm number" is displayed as code for identifying alarm.
Contents of Trouble : Alarm Message.
Probable Cause : Probable Cause of alarm.
Guidance message : Question to find the cause or answer to remove trouble is displayed.
Status display
[RESUMING] :
When press soft key [RESUME] , the guidance message which was displayed before CNC
power turned off is displayed again. Then [RESUMING] appears.
[LATCHED]/[SAMPLING] :
[LATCHED] shows that servo/spindle monitor information is memorized. When alarm no. in
the guidance screen and alarm no. when servo/spindle monitor data was memorized is different,
the diagnosis may not done correctly. And then [LATCHED] blinks.
[SAMPLING] shows that servo/spindle monitor information is not memorized yet.
Servo/spindle monitor information can be referred in Trouble Diagnosis Monitor Screen.
Operation
・Change of Guidance
Soft key [YES]/[NO] :
Check contents of guidance message, and, answer by pressing soft key [YES] or [NO]. Then the
next guidance message is displayed.
In some cases, CNC automatically checks and judges contents of guidance. In this case the next
guidance message is automatically displayed.
Automatic diagnosis is not done in case that CNC power turns off once after servo /spindle monitor
information is memorized.
Soft key [BACK] :

Guidance message returns back 1 step.
It is possible to trace back the guidance message when soft key [YES]/[NO] is pressed by mistake.
Soft key [RESUME] :

Guidance message which was displayed before CNC power turned off is displayed again.
The diagnosis can be continued from the guidance displayed again.
It is not possible to go back to the step before the point where soft key [BACK] is pressed.
- 1436 -
Status display “RESUMING” is displayed during the guidance that starts by pressing soft key
[RESUME].
- Change of alarm
When several alarms occur at same time, pressing page key / can select the guidance
message.
18.3.3 Trouble diagnosis monitor screen

Outline
Trouble diagnosis monitor screen memorizes and displays servo/spindle monitor information for
investigating servo/spindle alarm.
Three kinds of data, "Data when the alarm occurs", "Data just before the alarm occurs" or "Current data"
can be selected and displayed.
Explanation
Display
- Display procedure
2 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [MONIT] appears.
3 Press soft key [MONIT].
The following screen is sample of displaying data of X axis (servo) when the alarm occurred.
Fig.18.3.3 (a) Trouble diagnosis monitor screen (10.4-inch)
・Data displayed in monitor Screen

Displayed data in monitor screen is showed below.
- 1437 -
Table 18.3.3 (a) Data of servo motor

Data (Unit) Data type Display range Required parameter Page number
Accumulated command pulse (pulse) 2 Word ±99999999 1
Accumulated feedback pulse (pulse) 2 Word ±99999999 1
Position error (pulse) 2 Word ±99999999 1
Reference counter (pulse) 2 Word ±99999999 1
Actual speed (1/min) 1 Word -32768 ~ +32767 1
Command current (%) 1 Word ±400 1
Thermal simulation data (%) 1 Word 0 ~ +100 1
Torque (%) 1 Word ±400 1
Disturbance level (%) 1 Word 0 ~ +200 1
Optional data (Note 2) 1 Word -32768 ~ +32767 1
Optional data 2 (Note 2) 1 Word -32768 ~ +32767 2
R-phase current (%) 1 Word ±400 2
Effective current (%) 1 Word ±400 2
Pulse coder AMR data 1 Word 0 ~ 255 2
Internal neglect counter 1 Word 0 ~ +32767 2
External neglect counter 1 Word 0 ~ +32767 2
Internal correction counter 1 Word 0 ~ +32767 2
External correction counter 1 Word 0 ~ +32767 2
V-ready off information 1 Word -32768 ~ +32767 2
NOTE
1 Display range is the range that can be displayed on screen and not capacity of system.
2 Optional data 1, Optional data 2
Optional data 1 and Optional data 2 are used for maintenance by FANUC serviceman.
Table 18.3.3 (b) Data of spindle motor

Data (Unit) Data type Display range Required parameter Page number
Operation mode Character ***** 1
Gear select command Character ***** 1
Command pulse (pulse) 2 Word ±99999999 1
Command speed (1/min) (Note 2) 1 Word -32768 ~ +32767 No.4020(Main) / 1
No.4196(Sub)
Spindle speed (1/min) 2 Word ±99999999 1
Motor speed (1/min) (Note 2) 1 Word -32768 ~ +32767 No.4020(Main) / 1
No.4196(Sub)
Load meter (%) 1 Word 0 ~ +300 1
Position error (pulse) 2 Word ±99999999 1
Synchronization error (pulse) 2 Word ±99999999 1
Input signals Character ***** 2
Output signals Character ***** 2
NOTE
1 Display range is the range that can be displayed on screen and not capacity of system.
2 Command speed (1/min), Motor speed (1/min)
Set the following parameters to display Command speed and Motor speed.
- No.4020 (Maximum motor speed for Main spindle)
- No.4196 (Maximum motor speed for Sub spindle)
(When Spindle switch function is used.)
- 1438 -
Table 18.3.3 (c) Data of others
Data Data form Page number
The latest latch date Year (Two last digits) / Month (Two digits) / Day (Two digits)
The latest latch time Hour (Two digits) / Minute (Two digits) / Second (Two digits)
3
Executed file name at latched Character
Executed N number at latched N + number of five digits
Operation
- Display of servo monitor data
Fig.18.3.3 (b) Trouble diagnosis monitor screen (Servo monitor data) (10.4-inch)
Servo monitor information is switched by pressing soft key [NEW]/[OLD]/[CURRNT].

Soft key [NEW] and [OLD] is displayed alternately.
Soft key [NEW] : Data when the alarm occurs

Soft key [OLD] : Data just before the alarm occurs
Soft key [CURRNT] : Current data
Soft key [MON_SP] : Spindle monitor information is displayed.
- 1439 -
- Display of spindle monitor information
Fig.18.3.3 (c) Trouble diagnosis monitor screen (Spindle monitor data) (10.4-inch)
Spindle monitor information is switched by pressing soft key [ NEW ]/[ OLD ]/[CURRNT].
Soft key [ NEW ] and [ OLD ] is displayed alternately.
Soft key [NEW] : Data when the alarm occurs

Soft key [OLD] : Data just before the alarm occurs
Soft key [CURRNT] : Current data
Soft key [MON_SV] : Servo monitor information is displayed.
- Change of displayed page

Displayed page is switched by pressing cursor key / .
- Change of displayed axis

Displayed axis is switched by pressing cursor key / .
- Clear of memorized data

Soft key [CLEAR] appears by pressing soft key [(OPER)]. By pressing soft keys [CLEAR] and [EXEC],
"Data when the alarm occurs" and "Data just before the alarm occurs" are cleared. And status display
"LATCHED" is altered to "SAMPLING".
When servo/spindle alarm occurs in "SAMPLING" status, "Data when the alarm occurs" and "Data just
before the alarm occurs" are memorized, and status display "SAMPLING" is altered to "LATCHED".
When clear operation is done in either servo monitor screen or spindle monitor screen, both of servo and
spindle information are cleared. And display data of trouble diagnosis graphic screen is also cleared.
- 1440 -
18.3.4 Trouble diagnosis parameter screen

Outline
Data type, data unit and trouble forecast level in the trouble diagnosis graphic screen are set in trouble
diagnosis parameter screen.
Explanation
Display
- Display procedure
2 Press the continuous menu key until soft key [W.GRPH] appears.
3 Press soft key [W.GRPH].
4 Press soft key [W.PRM].
Fig.18.3.4 (a) Trouble diagnosis parameter screen (10.4-inch)
- Contents of display
CHANNEL :
Channel for waveform display. Maximum 4 channels can be used. Set data from the first channel
sequentially.
AXIS :
Axis for waveform display. Manual setting is available. In some cases Axis data is set automatically
for diagnosis in trouble diagnosis guidance screen.
DATA KIND :
Data kind for wave form display. Manual setting is available. In some cases data kind is set
automatically for diagnosis in trouble diagnosis guidance screen.
DATA UNIT :
Unit of display data. This data is set automatically according to data kind. Manual setting is invalid.
- 1441 -
FORECAST LV :
This data decides boundary value to output trouble forecast signal. Manual setting is available.
Guidance of setting each item :

The guidance to the above setting each item is displayed.
Operation
- Data Setting
1 Move cursor by Cursor key.
2 Input number by MDI key and press input key to set data.
The content of the following each items can be input by the above operation.
AXIS :
In case of servo axis, input control axis number.
(Example) Set "1" for first servo axis.
In case of spindle axis, input "10 + spindle number".
(Example) Set "11" for first spindle axis.
DATA KIND :
Input data number value according to the following table.
Table 18.3.4 (a) Data of Servo motor

Data number Data kind
1 Accumulated command pulse (pulse)
2 Accumulated feedback pulse (pulse)
3 Position error (pulse)
4 Reference counter (pulse)
5 Actual speed (1/min)
6 Command current (%)
7 Thermal simulation data (%)
8 Torque (%)
9 Disturbance level (%)
10 Optional data
11 R-phase current (%)
12 Effective current (%)
13 Pulse coder AMR data
14 Optional data 2
Table 18.3.4 (b) Data of Spindle motor

Data number Data kind
15 Actual speed (1/min)
16 Load meter (%)
17 Position error (pulse)
18 Actual speed (1/min) (80msec)
19 Load meter (%) (80msec)
- 1442 -
NOTE
Each data kind is classified as follows as the combination to which the
waveforms can be displayed at the same time.
- Data number :1 - 17
- Data number :18 - 19
Therefore, when the data number is input to the data kind, if the values other
than the same combination as the data kind of another channel are set, the
warning "DATA SETTING ERROR" is displayed.
18.3.5 Trouble diagnosis graphic screen

Outline
Servo/spindle data is automatically memorized for several seconds before alarm occurs and display and
waveform of data can be displayed in trouble diagnosis graphic screen.
Maximum 4 kinds of data are displayed at the same time.
Explanation
Display
- Display procedure
Press soft key [G-ADJ.].
(2)
(1)
Fig.18.3.5 (a) Trouble diagnosis graphic screen (10.4-inch)
(1) Red vertical line shows the position (time) of alarm.
(2) Date and time of alarm
- 1443 -
Operation
- Change of position and magnification
When Soft key [G-ADJ.] is pressed, the following soft keys appear.
［<］［W.PRM ］［G-ADJ.］［TRB_LV］［］［(OPRT)］［］
［<］［H-DOBL］［H-HALF］［←TIME］［TIME→］［］［＋］
［<］［ CH-1 ］［ CH-2 ］［ CH-3 ］［ CH-4 ］［］［＋］
［<］［WAV.EX］［WAV.RE］［WAV.↑］［WAV.↓］［］［］
Soft key [H-DOBL] : The time base length is expanded.

Soft key [H-HALF] : The time base length is reduced.
Soft key [TIME←] : The time base is moved to the left side.
Soft key [TIME→] : The time base is moved to the right side.
Soft key [CH-1] : The operation to the waveform of channel 1 is selected.
Soft key [WAV.EX] : The vertical length is expanded to the selected waveform.
Soft key [WAV.RE] : The vertical length is reduced to the selected waveform.
Soft key [WAV.↑] : The selected waveform is moved for above.
Soft key [WAV.↓] : The selected waveform is moved below.
The time base length is a common scale for the channel 1,2,3 and 4.
The position and magnification of the vertical length can be set for each channel.
18.3.6 Trouble forecast level setting screen (only for servo axis)
Trouble forecast level is set in this screen.
Two trouble forecast levels, thermal simulation and disturbance level, can be set.
Explanation
Display
- Display procedure
4 Press soft key [TRB LV].
- 1444 -
(1)
(2)
(3)
Fig.18.3.6 (a) Trouble forecast level setting screen (10.4-inch)
(1) Current value of thermal simulation or disturbance level is displayed with sign.
(2) Current value of thermal simulation or disturbance level is displayed by bar graphic.
Light Blue part : Current value of thermal simulation or disturbance level.
Red part : Trouble forecast level.
(3) Trouble forecast level.
The negative value is converted into the absolute value and a positive value is displayed.
Operation
- Setting trouble forecast level
1 Select thermal simulation or disturbance level by page keys / .
2 Select axis by cursor keys / .
3 Input numerical value by MDI key and press key.
Trouble forecast level is input into parameter No.8860 and 8861.
- Change of trouble forecast level

When Soft key [TRB LV] is pressed, the following soft keys appear.
［<］［W.PRM ］［G-ADJ.］［TRB LV］［］［(OPRT)］［］
［<］［－10％］［＋10％］［－1％］［＋1％］［INPUT ］［］
Soft key [ -10% ] : Subtract 10% from trouble forecast level.

Soft key [ +10% ] : Add 10% to trouble forecast level.
Soft key [ -1% ] : Subtract 1% from trouble forecast level.
Soft key [ +1% ] : Add 1% to trouble forecast level.
Soft key [INPUT] : Input trouble forecast level by MDI key.
- 1445 -
- Trouble forecast signal

When thermal simulation or disturbance level of servo axis exceeds trouble forecast level, trouble forecast
signal TDSML1 - 8 (Fn298)/ TDFTR1 - 8 (Fn299) is output.
Parameters TRSx (bit 0 of parameter No.8855) / TRFx (bit 1 of parameter No.8855) are set to 1 to
perform the trouble forecast.
18.3.7 Parameter
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8850 MDG

[Data type] Bit
#0 MDG Trouble diagnosis function is:

0: Available.
1: Not available.
NOTE
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
8855 TRFx TRSx

#0 TRSx Trouble forecast of thermal simulation of servo axis is:

0: Not available.
1: Available. (Please set the trouble forecast level to parameter No.8860.)
#1 TRFx Trouble forecast of disturbance level of servo axis is:

0: Not available.
1: Available. (Please set the trouble forecast level to parameter No.8861.)
8860 Trouble forecast level for thermal simulation

[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 0 ~ 100
Trouble forecast level for thermal simulation is set.
8861 Trouble forecast level for disturbance level

[Unit of data] %
[Valid data range] 0 ~ 100
Trouble forecast level for disturbance level is set.
- 1446 -
18.3.8 Signal
Trouble forecast signal TDSML1 - TDSML8 <Fn298>
[Function] The thermal simulation data is notified to exceed the trouble forecast level.
[Output condition] When the thermal simulation data of servo is bigger than the trouble forecast level, this
signal is "1".
Trouble forecast signal TDFTR1 - TDFTR8 <Fn299>

[Function] The disturbance level is notified to exceed the trouble forecast level.
[Output condition] When the disturbance level of servo is bigger than the trouble forecast level, this signal is
"1".
Signal address
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn298 TDSML8 TDSML7 TDSML6 TDSML5 TDSML4 TDSML3 TDSML2 TDSML1
#7 #6 #5 #4 #3 #2 #1 #0
Fn299 TDFTR8 TDFTR7 TDFTR6 TDFTR5 TDFTR4 TDFTR3 TDFTR2 TDFTR1
18.3.9 Restrictions
・The use of the I/O Link β amplifier
The alarm occurred by the motor with the I/O Link β amplifier cannot be diagnosed.
- 1447 -
18.4 MACHINE ALARM DIAGNOSIS
18.4.1 Outline
The machine alarms (external alarm messages, external operator messages and macro alarms) can be
diagnosed on the trouble diagnosis guidance screen in addition to CNC alarms.
Fig.18.4.1 (a) Example of Trouble diagnosis guidance screen (10.4-inch)
To add the diagnostic information on the screen, make the diagnostic message data to be displayed and
convert it the memory card format file that can be read by CNC by using the PC tool "Guidance table for
machine alarm diagnosis".
After the file is loaded into CNC, the additional diagnostic information can be displayed on the screen.
18.4.2 Kind of additional alarm and operator message

The alarm and the operator message on the machine side that can be added to the trouble diagnosis
message are as follows.
1. External alarm
2. Macro alarm
3. External operator message
18.4.3 Available diagnosis number

In the alarm and the operator message on the machine side, the alarm number and message number that
can be diagnosed in the trouble diagnosis guidance screen are as follows.
1. External alarm
Table 18.4.3 (a) Available diagnosis alarm number (External alarm)
Parameter EXA(No.6301#0)
=0 =1
Alarm number 1000 to 1999 0 to 4095
- 1448 -
2. Macro alarm
Table 18.4.3 (b) Available diagnosis alarm number (Macro alarm)
Parameter MCA(No.6008#1)
=0 =1
Alarm number 3000 to 3200 0 to 4095
3. External operator message

Table 18.4.3 (c) Available diagnosis message number (External operator message)
Parameter EXM(No.6301#1)
=0 =1
Message number 2000 to 2999 0 to 4095
NOTE
1 Available diagnosis message number in the external operator message is a number
corresponding to the number set to parameter No.6310 within the numbers in the above
table.
2 The above available diagnosis number is a range of the number displayed on the CNC
screen, and it is different from the number actually set by the each function. Please refer
to the following manuals for the number actually set by the each function.
• External alarm / External operator message
Series 0i-D/0i Mate-D PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL (B-64393EN)
”4.11 INSTRUCTIONS RELATED TO CNC FUNCTIONS”
• Macro alarm
Series 0i-D/0i Mate-D OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to Lathe System
/Machining Center System) (B-64304EN) "II-14 CUSTOM MACRO"
18.4.4 Environment for making trouble diagnosis message

The following operating environment and the PC tool "Guidance table for machine alarm diagnosis" are
necessary to make the trouble diagnosis message displayed on the trouble diagnosis guidance screen.
Prepare the personal computer as follows, and install this tool according to the next chapter.
- Operating environment
Operating system Microsoft® Windows® XP Professional, Windows Vista® Business or
Windows ® 7 Professional
Memory Windows® XP：More than 512M bytes
Windows Vista® or Windows® 7：More than 1G bytes
Free space in hard disk More than 128M bytes
Necessary equipment PC card adapter
Necessary application Microsoft® Excel® 2007
(*) Microsoft, Windows, Windows Vista and Excel are the registered trademarks of Microsoft
corporation in USA.
NOTE
"Guidance table for machine alarm diagnosis" is not included in the option of the
machine alarm diagnosis function.
Purchase "Guidance table for machine alarm diagnosis" CD
(A08B-9010-J523#ZZ11) additionally.
- 1449 -
18.4.5 Guidance table for machine alarm diagnosis

This tool is used to make the trouble diagnosis message displayed on the trouble diagnosis guidance
screen.
Install this tool in the personal computer according to the following procedures, and make the trouble
diagnosis message.
18.4.5.1 Install
The installation procedure of this tool is as follows:
1 Run setup.exe in the install CD (A08B-9010-J523#ZZ11).

2 In the following setup dialog box, set an appropriate installation folder and press the <Next> button.
Fig.18.4.5.1 (a)
NOTE
By pressing the <Brows> button, the installation folder can be changed.
3 By pressing the <Next> button in the dialog box for the confirmation of install, the installation will
be started.
4 After the installation is finished normally, a message box to show the finish of the installation
appears and "FANUC Guidance Table" is added in the Windows start menu.
18.4.5.2 Uninstall
The uninstall procedure of this tool is as follows:
1 Open the Windows control panel.

2 In the control panel, open the [Add or Remove Programs] and select "FANUC Guidance Table for
Machine Alarm Diagnosis" from the currently installed programs.
NOTE
Open the [Programs and Features] in Windows Vista.
- 1450 -
3 By pressing the <Remove (or Uninstall)> button, a message box for the confirmation of uninstall
appears. By pressing the <Yes> button, this tool will be uninstalled.
18.4.5.3 Making a file to input trouble diagnosis messages

Making a Excel file in which trouble diagnosis messages are input is as follows:
Fig.18.4.5.3 (a)
1 Select [Program]→[FANUC Guidance Table]→[New File] in the Windows start menu, then the
"New File" dialog box will be displayed.
Fig.18.4.5.3 (b)
2 In the following dialog box, input a destination folder and file name of the Excel file to be made.
NOTE
1 The extension of the file name must be "xls" (Excel book format). Any other extension is
ignored and it is changed to "xls".
2 When making a new file is failed, the message box "A trouble diagnosis message file
cannot be made." is displayed with one of the following messages about the cause of that
failure.
• The specified file name is not correct.
• The specified file has already existed.
• (Destination folder) is not found.
• Files in (destination folder) cannot be written.
• The disk space in (destination folder) is not enough to make a new file.
3 Click the [OK] button, a Excel file will be made as the specified name in the specified folder.
The trouble diagnosis messages can be input by opening the new Excel file.
- 1451 -
18.4.5.4 Structure of the file to input trouble diagnosis messages

Three are 2 sheets in the Excel file to input the trouble diagnosis messages.
• [Overall] sheet ・・・The sheet for overall operations and settings

• [Guidance] sheet ・・・The sheet for inputting message strings
Fig.18.4.5.4 (a)
- Structure of [Overall] sheet

In the [Overall] sheet, you can make the trouble diagnosis messages by using the following operation
buttons from (1) to (3).
And, you can switch the display language in sheets and change the settings for multi-languages.
(1) (4)
(2) (5)
(3) (6)
Fig.18.4.5.4 (b)
- Overview for each items

Item Name Description Reference
(1) Input Guidance Data Displays the [Guidance] sheet to input the trouble diagnosis Subsection 18.4.6.1
messages.
(2) Check Input Data Checks all input data on the [Guidance] sheet as to checking Subsection 18.4.6.2
for the range of number, the invalid letter and so on.
(3) Make Memory Card Makes a CNC readable memory card format file from input Subsection 18.4.6.3
File data in the [Guidance] sheet.
(4) Display Language Switches the display language for sheets by selecting a －
language and pressing the [Apply] button. Either Japanese or
English can be selected.
(5) Result of Check Displays the result of check for all input data. Subsection 18.4.6.2
(6) Multi-Languages Changes the settings to input messages for multi-languages. Subsection 18.4.7
- 1452 -
- Structure of [Guidance] sheet

In the guidance sheet, you can input numbers and messages for each alarm or operator message.
(3 (4 (5) (3 (4
)
(1) (2)
Fig.18.4.5.4 (c)
・Overview for each items
Item Name Description Reference

(1) Guidance Table 1 The table to input numbers and titles for alarm or operator Subsection 18.4.6.1
message.
(2) Guidance Table 2 The table to input questions and instructions to an operator Subsection 18.4.6.1
for alarm or operator message.
(3) Jump to Page Switches the display between the guidance table 1 and 2. －
(4) Check Input Data Checks input data for each guidance table. Subsection 18.4.6.2
(5) Set Line Number Adds or deletes lines by a number specified in the combo －
box at the bottom of the guidance table 1 or 2.
Note that all line number in the guidance table is from the
minimum 30 to the maximum 2000.
18.4.6 Making trouble diagnosis messages

Make the trouble diagnosis messages by using the following operation buttons in order from (1) to (3) on
the [Overall] sheet.
The brief of making procedure is as follows:
(1)
(2)
(3)
Fig.18.4.6 (a)
(1) Input Guidance Data

Displays the [Guidance] sheet to input trouble diagnosis messages.
- 1453 -
(2) Check Input Data

Checks all input data on the [Guidance] sheet
(3) Make Memory Card File
Makes a memory card format file from input data in the [Guidance] sheet.
The details for each operation are as follows:
18.4.6.1 Inputting guidance data

By clicking the [Input Guidance Data] button on the [Overall] sheet, the [Guidance] sheet will be
displayed.
Input data on the guidance table 1 and 2 according to the descriptions of the next section.
The data that is input on each guidance table is displayed on the trouble diagnosis guidance screen as the
following figure.
Input items on the guidance table 1
Classified code
Title
Probable cause
Input item on the guidance table 2
Guidance message
Fig.18.4.6.1 (a)
Table 18.4.6.1 (a) Display item of trouble diagnosis guidance screen

Display Item Description
Classified code Classified code and number for the current alarm or operator message
Title Title for the current alarm or operator message
Probable cause Cause of the current alarm or operator message
Guidance message Confirmation to determine cause of an alarm, or an instruction about an operator message
NOTE
The character that can be displayed on the CNC screen can be used for each display
item. As for details, refer the following manuals.
Series 0i-D/0i Mate-D OPERATOR’S MANUAL (Common to Lathe System / Machining
Center System) (B-64304EN)
“APPENDIX G. CHARACTER-TO-CODES CORRESPONDENCE TABLE “
・About input data in the guidance table 1
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) (6) (7)
- 1454 -
Table 18.4.6.1 (b) Description of items in the guidance table 1
Item Description Content of item Num. of letters
(1) Kind Input a kind for an external alarm, a macro alarm or an operator 2 English capital
message. letters
Specify one of the following strings.
EX : External alarm
MC : Macro alarm
OP : External operator message
NOTE
If a kind other than above is input, checking input data is
failed.
(2) Number Input a number for an external alarm, a macro alarm or an operator Within 4
message. numbers
(3) Classified Input 2 types of code, "Code 1" and "Code 2".
Code "Code 1 – Code 2" is displayed at the first line on the trouble diagnosis
guidance screen.
Code 1 Input a classified code for an alarm or an operator Within 2 letters
message. (1 in multi-bytes
letters)
Code 2 Input a number for an alarm or an operator messages. Within 16 letters
(8 in multi-bytes
letters)
NOTE
1 It is not necessary to make each classified code to be the
same as (1)kind and (2)number.
2 A character string "NC" is reserved as the code 1 of CNC
alarm. Do not use "NC" as the code 1.
(4) Title Input a string displayed at the second line on the trouble diagnosis Within 32 letters
guidance screen. (16 in
multi-bytes
letters)
(5) Probable Input a string displayed at the "Probable cause" part on the trouble Within 32 letters
Cause diagnosis guidance screen. (16 in
multi-bytes
letters) per line
(maximum 3
lines)
(6) Message ID Input an ID of a message displayed on the "Guidance Message" part of Within 8 letters
the trouble diagnosis guidance screen at first when an alarm occurs. (English capital
Ex. The first guidance message for the external alarm message and numerical
alarm No.1000 ：EX1000A letters)
NOTE
As for the message ID, see the description of the next
description " About input data in the guidance table 2".
(7) Additional Do not input in the item.
information
(Reserved)
・About input data in the guidance table 2
(1) (2) (3) (4)
- 1455 -
Table 18.4.6.1 (c) Description of items in the guidance table 2

Item Description Content of item Num. of letters
(1) Message ID It is a string to identify to one of the guidance messages in (2). Within 8 letters
Ex.1. The first message for the external alarm No.1000 : (English capital
EX1000A and numerical
Ex.2. The second message for the external alarm No.1000 : letters)
EX1000B
NOTE
The character string that starts by "M"+"Number" is not used
as message ID. Because this shows the destination of the
jump of the machine side to guidance table 2 from the
guidance table for the CNC alarm. Therefore, do not use the
character string that starts by "M"+"Number".
(2) Guidance It is a message displayed on the "Guidance Message" part of the Within 128
Message trouble diagnosis guidance screen. Input a question, an instruction letters (64 in
and so on to an operator. multi-bytes
NOTE letters)
When the guidance message is shown on the trouble
diagnosis screen, a new line code is inserted to the message
per 32 letters (16 in multi-bytes letters) automatically.
If you want to insert a new line code at a free position, input
"¥n" that is not included as the number of letters.
Moreover, the line number of the message is within 4
including the above automatic new line.
(3) Next Message Input a message ID that is jumped to when pressing the soft key Within 8 letters
ID [Yes] or [No] for each question of guidance message. (English capital
Input "-1" when there is no message ID to be jumped. and numerical
letters)
(4) Notes Free notes can be written.
18.4.6.2 Checking input data

By clinking the [Check Input Data] button on the [Overall] sheet, all input data on the guidance sheet will
be checked as to the range of number, the number of letters, the invalid letter and the line number of
strings.
After the check is completed, the string of the [Result of Check] on the [Overall] sheet is changed from
"Unchecked" to "OK".
NOTE
After "OK" is displayed, it might return to "Unchecked" by editing on the
[Guidance] sheet again.
If the check is failed, the string of the [Result of Check] is changed to "NG" and a name of sheet and
guidance table where an error occurs is shown in a cell under the [Result of Check].
The guidance table where an error occurs is displayed by clicking the name of the guidance table.
- 1456 -
Fig.18.4.6.2 (a)
In the guidance table, the color of an error cell is changed to green and an error message is attached to the
error cell as a commnet of the cell like the above figure. The list of the error messages is as follows:
• Input a number.
• The value is out of range (n to m).
• Input a string within n characters (m in multi-bytes characters).
• The line number is over limit n.
• The message referenced by the ID is not found.
• The kind(s) cannot be specified.
* m and n are numbers, s is a string
NOTE
1 The input data can be checked for an individual guidance table by clicking the [CHECK] button
displayed at the top of the guidance table.
In this case, the result of the check is displayed under the [CHECK] button like the following
figure.
2 In case that errors occurs on two or more guidance tables, the [Result of Check] on the [Overall]
sheet shows the name of the guidance table where the first error occurs. As for the result of check
for each guidance table, see the display under the [CHECK] button.
Moreover, the color of the cell changes into light blue when the character string that shows the destination
of the jump of the machine side to guidance table 2 from the guidance table for the CNC alarm is input to
message ID.
Example )
18.4.6.3 Making a memory card format file

By clicking the [Make Memory Card File] button on the [Overall] sheet, the following dialog box will be
displayed.
- 1457 -
Fig.18.4.6.3 (a)
Make a CNC readable memory card format file as follows:
1 Input a folder name where you want to make a file in the [Destination folder].
2 Input a file name that you want to make in the [File name].
" GUI_USR.MEM " is input by default.
When you input a file name without its extension, the extension "MEM" is added to the file name
automatically.
3 Click the [OK] button.
After making the file is completed, the message box "Making the memory card format file is completed."
will be displayed.
NOTE
1 The available file name is a short file name with alphabetic and numerical letters (8.3
MS-DOS format).
Other name format cannot be read by CNC.
2 If a file having the same name as the specified one has already existed in the
destination folder, the file always will be overwritten.
3 When making the memory card format file is failed, the message box "The memory card
format file cannot be made." is displayed with one of the following messages about the
cause of that failure.
• The input data have not been checked on (sheet name) – guidance table (1
or 2)
• There are error(s) of the input data on (sheet name) – guidance table (1 or 2)
• The specified file name is not correct.
• (Destination folder) is not found.
• The disk space in (destination folder) is not enough to make a new file.
By loading the file to CNC with the CNC BOOT function, the trouble diagnosis message can be
displayed on the trouble diagnosis guidance screen when the relevant external alarm, macro alarm or
operator message happens.
NOTE
As for the CNC BOOT function, see the following manuals.
Series 0i-D/0i Mate-D MAINTENANCE MANUAL (B-64305EN)
”APPENDIX C. BOOT SYSTEM”
18.4.6.4 Jump from CNC guidance table to MTB’s guidance table

As a result of the diagnosis of the CNC alarm, the diagnosis of the machine side might be needed.
There is special message ID that jumps from the guidance table of the CNC alarm to the guidance table
on the machine side for the diagnosis of such a case.
- 1458 -
It is possible to jump to the diagnosis of MTB's guidance table after the diagnosis of the CNC alarm if the
guidance table is made by using Message ID shown by "M"+"Number" in the following tables.
Tabel 18.4.6.4 (a) Reserved message ID

No. Message ID Title Probable cause
1 M205 RIGID MODE DI SIGNAL OFF The rigid mode DI signal (G061.0) is not set to 1 when
the rigid tapping is executed.
2 M409 DETECT ABNORMAL TORQUE A mechanical collision or twist occurred, resulting in a
load torque higher than a normal operation value.
3 M410 EXCESS ERROR (STOP) A mechanical collision or twist occurred, disabling an
axis from reaching a target position.
4 M411 EXCESS ERROR ( MOVING ) A mechanical collision or twist occurred, disabling an
axis from moving.
5 M420 SYNC TORQUE EXCESS Two axes to be moved synchronously lost mechanical
synchronism with each other, resulting in a large torque
difference.
6 M421 EXCESS ERROR (SEMI-FULL) With a closed-loop machine, a shift occurred between
the motion of the motor and the motion of the separate
detector by a cause such as a mechanical twist.
7 M436 SOFT THERMAL (OVC) A mechanical collision or twist occurred, resulting in a
large load and the flow of an excessive current.
NOTE
Message ID shown by "M"+"Number" other than existing in the above table is not
available.
18.4.7 Making messages for multi-languages

To change the language of messages displayed in the trouble diagnosis guidance screen complying with
the display language of CNC, it is necessary to input messages for each language and make the memory
card format file.
The messages for each display language are input on dedicated sheets for multi-languages.
NOTE
The messages in the [Guidance] sheet are assumed as English.
If you need messages other than English, make messages as follows:
18.4.7.1 Making sheets for multi-languages

Making sheets for multi-languages is as follows:
- 1459 -
Fig.18.4.7.1 (a)
1 Click the [Multi-Languages] button on the [Overall] sheet. The following dialog box will be
displayed.
2 Turn on a check box for a language that you want to make in the [Make sheet] list. Two or more
check boxes can be turned on.
After turning on the check box in the [Make sheet] list, the check box for the corresponding
language can be operated in the [Output file] list.
3 In the [Output file] list, turn on a check box for a language that you want to output to your CNC
readable memory card format file at the same time. Up to 5 check boxes other than English can be
turned on. 6 or more check boxes cannot be turned on.
4 Click the [OK] button.
The sheets that are selected in the item 2 will be made like the following figure.
Sheets for multi-languages
NOTE
1 The language, which was supported by “Guidance table for machine alarm
diagnosis”, are 21 ones shown in the previous dialog box.
Also, the language, which isn’t supported by CNC, can’t be displayed on CNC.
2 The number of languages that can be output to the file of the memory card
format at the same time is six languages (English + five national languages).
3 Once a sheet for multi-languages is made, the language of the [Guidance] sheet
assumed as English. And, in the previous dialog box, the check box for English
in the [Make sheet] and [Output file] list is turned on by default and they cannot
be operated.
4 If you input other than English messages in the [Guidance] sheet before making
the sheet for multi-languages, move the messages in the [Guidance] sheet to a
sheet for an appropriate language by cut and paste operation of Excel.
5 To remove the sheet for multi-languages, turn off the check box for the language
that you want to remove in the [Make sheet] list in the previous dialog box.
- 1460 -
18.4.7.2 Inputting data in the sheet for multi-languages

The way to input data on the sheet for multi-languages is the same as one on the [Guidance] sheet that has
already explained in the section "18.4.6 Making trouble diagnosis messages". However, data can be input
for the 3 items only – Title, Probable cause and Guidance message.
As for data other than the 3 times, data in the [Guidance] sheet is copied to here and displayed.
Fig.18.4.7.2 (a) Sheet for multi-languages : Guidance table 1
Fig.18.4.7.2 (b) Sheet for multi-languages : Guidance table 2
After inputting data in the sheet for multi-languages, check the input data and make the memory card
format file according to the procedure described in "18.4.6 Making trouble diagnosis messages".
NOTE
The display language of the trouble diagnosis guidance screen is switched
automatically according to the CNC display language.
However, when there is no message for the CNC display language in the
memory card file, the input messages in the [Guidance] sheet are displayed.
18.4.8 Notice
・Excel’s file of trouble diagnosis message
When you use "Guidance table for machine alarm diagnosis", change the setting of the macro function to
"Enable" in the Trust Center of Excel 2007. If the setting is "Disable", the trouble diagnosis message
cannot be made.
To enable the macro function by setting a path in the "Trusted Locations" of the Trust Center, set the
folder where the file to input trouble diagnosis messages should be located and also the install folder of
the "Guidance table for machine alarm diagnosis".
18.4.9 Translating data used with the former series

(Series 0i /0i Mate-B/C, Series 16i /18i /21i-B)
The Excel file and the memory card file used with the former series (Series 0i /0i Mate-B/C, Series 16i
/18i /21i-B) cannot be used with the current target series (Series 0i /0i Mate-D) of this function.
Translate the Excel file used with the former series and make the memory card format file again
according to the following description.
NOTE
As for the way to make the trouble diagnosis message for Series 0i /0i Mate-B/C, Series 16i /18i
/21i-B, see the manual "Trouble Diagnosis Specifications" (A-78500) and "Machine Alarm
Diagnosis Specifications" (A-78622)
- 1461 -
1 Select [Program]→[FANUC Guidance Table]→[Translate Former Series Data] in the Windows start
menu.
Fig.18.4.7.2 (a)
2 In the displayed dialog box, input a Excel file name used with the former series in the [Source file
name] and input a translated file name in the [Destination file name].
Fig.18.4.7.2 (b)
3 Click the [OK] button, then the translated Excel file that is specified in the [Destination file name]
will be made.
4 With the translated Excel file, check input data and make the memory card format file according to
the section "18.4.6 Making trouble diagnosis messages".
NOTE
1 Input a full path in the [Source file name] and [Destination file name]. The path
name cannot be omitted. The extension of the file name must be "xls" (Excel
book format). Any other extension is ignored and it is changed to "xls".
2 The "Kind" in the guidance table 1 is input automatically complying with the
"Number" during the translation.
• No. 1000 to 1999 → EX (External alarm)
• No. 2000 to 2999 → OP (External operator message)
• No. 3000 to 3200 → MC (Macro alarm)
3 When translating data is failed, the message box "The data cannot be
translated." is displayed with one of the following messages about the cause of
that failure.
• (Source file name) is not found.
• (Destination folder name) is not found.
• The disk space in (destination folder) is not enough to make a new file
• (Destination file name) has already existed.
4 If you use separated Excel files for Japanese and English with the former series,
translate both files and make a sheet to input Japanese messages in the English
file. Then, move the data form the Japanese file to the sheet to input Japanese in
the English file by cut and paste operation of Excel so as to combine two files to
one.
- 1462 -
APPENDIX
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
B-64303EN-1/02 APPENDIX CNC AND PMC
A INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC

Appendix A, “INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC”, consists of the following sections:
A.1 LIST OF ADDRESSES ..................................................................................................................1465

A.2 LIST OF SIGNALS ........................................................................................................................1502
A.2.1 List of Signals (In Order of Functions) ............................................................................1502
A.2.2 List of Signals (In Order of Symbols)..............................................................................1523
A.2.3 List of Signals (In Order of Addresses)............................................................................1541
A.1 LIST OF ADDRESSES

Interface addresses among CNC and PMC are as follows:
[Example of controlling one path]
G0000~ X000~
CNC PMC Machine tool

F0000~ Y000~
[Example of controlling two paths]
CNC G0000~ X000~
Path 1 F0000~ Y000~

PMC Machine tool
G1000~
Path 2 F1000~
- Expression of signals
Address Symbol (#0 to #7 indicates bit position)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn000 OP SA STL SPL RWD
In an item where both T series and M series are described, some signals are covered with shade ( )
in the signal address figure as shown below. This means either lathe system or machining center system
does not have this signal. Upper part is for lathe system and lower part is for machining center system.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
*CDZ T series
Gn053 ROVLP UINT TMRON
M series
- 1465 -
A. INTERFACE BETWEEN
CNC AND PMC APPENDIX B-64303EN-1/02
[Example 1]
The figure above indicates *CDZ is provided only for the T series while the other signals for both
the T series and M series.
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
T series
Gn040
OFN9 OFN8 OFN7 OFN6 M series
[Example 2]
Signals OFN6 to OFN9 are for M series only.
NOTE
1 In X addresses in the table, the emergency stop signal is *ESP<X008.4>.
2 For 2-path control, one of the following superscripts is attached to the top right of
a symbol depending on the signal type.
- Path type (on CNC side) : #P
- Controlled axis type (on CNC side) : #SV
- Spindle type (on CNC side) : #SP
In G and F addresses in the table, #P, #SV, or #SP attached to a signal
indicates the signal is provided for each path on CNC side, each control axis on
CNC side, or each spindle on CNC side, respectively.
- PMC axis control group type: #PX
#PX attached to a signal indicates the signal is provided for each PMC axis
control group.
3 For the signals, a single data number is assigned to 8 bits. Each bit has a
different meaning.
4 The letter "n" in each address representation indicates the address position used
in each path on the CNC side, as shown below.
1st path : n=0 (No. 0 to 999)
2nd path : n=1 (No. 1000 to 1999)
- 1466 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
MT → CNC
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
X000
X001
X002
X003
X004 ESKIP -MIT2#1 +MIT2#1 -MIT1#1 +MIT1#1 XAE2 XAE1

T series SKIP #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1 #1
SKIP6 SKIP5 SKIP4 SKIP3 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7 #1
X004 ESKIP XAE3 XAE2 XAE1

#1 #1
M series SKIP #1 SKIP5 SKIP4 #1 SKIP3 #1 #1 #1
SKIP6 SKIP2 SKIP8 SKIP7 #1
X005
X006
X007 *DEC5
#2
*DEC4
#2
*DEC3
#2
*DEC2
#2
*DEC1
#2
X008 *ESP
X009 *DEC5
#1
*DEC4
#1
*DEC3
#1
*DEC2
#1
*DEC1
#1
X010
X011
T series
X011
M series
X012
X013 ESKIP#2 -MIT2#2 +MIT2#2 -MIT1#2 +MIT1#2

#2
T series SKIP
SKIP6 #2 SKIP5 #2 SKIP4 #2 SKIP3 #2 SKIP2 #2 SKIP8 #2 SKIP7 #2
X013 ESKIP#2
#2
M series SKIP SKIP5 #2 SKIP4 #2 SKIP3 #2
SKIP6 #2 SKIP2 #2 SKIP8 #2 SKIP7 #2
- 1467 -
PMC → CNC
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn000 ED7 ED6 ED5 ED4 ED3 ED2 ED1 ED0#P
Gn001 ED15#P ED14#P ED13#P ED12#P ED11#P ED10#P ED9#P ED8#P
Gn002 ESTB#P EA6#P EA5#P EA4#P EA3#P EA2#P EA1#P EA0#P
Gn003
Gn004 MFIN3#P MFIN2#P FIN#P
Gn005 BFIN#P AFL#P TFIN#P SFIN#P MFIN#P
Gn006 SKIPP#P OVC#P *ABSM

#P
SRN#P
Gn007 RLSOT
#P
EXLM#P *FLWU
#P
RLSOT3#P ST#P STLK#P #P
RVS
Gn008 ERS#P RRW#P *SP#P *ESP#P *BSL#P *CSL#P *IT#P
Gn009 PN16#P PN8#P PN4#P PN2#P PN1#P
Gn010 *JV7#P *JV6#P *JV5#P *JV4#P *JV3#P *JV2#P *JV1#P *JV0#P
Gn011 *JV15#P *JV14#P *JV13#P *JV12#P *JV11#P *JV10#P *JV9#P *JV8#P
Gn012 *FV7#P *FV6#P *FV5#P *FV4#P *FV3#P *FV2#P *FV1#P *FV0#P
Gn013
Gn014 ROV2#P ROV1#P
Gn015
Gn016
F1D#P
Gn017
Gn018 HS2D#P HS2C#P HS2B#P HS2A#P HS1D#P HS1C#P HS1B#P HS1A#P
Gn019 RT#P MP2#P MP1#P HS3D#P HS3C#P HS3B#P HS3A#P
Gn020
- 1468 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn021
Gn022
#P
Gn023 HNDLF
Gn024 EPN7#P EPN6#P EPN5#P EPN4#P EPN3#P EPN2#P EPN1#P EPN0#P
Gn025 EPNS#P EPN13

#P
EPN12
#P
EPN11
#P
EPN10
#P
EPN9#P EPN8#P
Gn026 PC4SLC#P PC3SLC#P
Gn027 CON#P *SSTP3#SP *SSTP2#SP *SSTP1#SP SWS2

#P
SWS1
#P
Gn028 PC2SLC#P SPSTPA#SP *SCPFA#SP *SUCPFA#SP GR2#SP GR1#SP
Gn029 *SSTP#P SOR#P SAR#P GR22#SP GR21#SP
Gn030 SOV7#P SOV6#P SOV5#P SOV4#P SOV3#P SOV2#P SOV1#P SOV0#P
Gn031 PKESS2#P PKESS1#P
Gn032 R08I#SP R07I#SP R06I#SP R05I#SP R04I#SP R03I#SP R02I#SP R01I#SP
Gn033 SIND#SP SSIN#SP SGN#SP R12I#SP R11I#SP R10I#SP R09I#SP
Gn034 R08I2#SP R07I2#SP R06I2#SP R05I2#SP R04I2#SP R03I2#SP R02I2#SP R01I2#SP
Gn035 SIND2
#SP
SSIN2
#SP
SGN2
#SP
R12I2#SP R11I2#SP R10I2#SP R09I2#SP
Gn036
Gn037
Gn038 *BECLP#P *BEUCP#P

SDPC
#P
SPPHS
#P
SPSYC
#P
SBRT#P *PLSST
#P
Gn039 GOQSM #P WOQSM #P OFN5#P OFN4#P OFN3#P OFN2#P OFN1#P OFN0#P
Gn040 WOSET#P PRC#P S2TLS#P OFN9P OFN8P OFN7P OFN6P
Gn041 HS2ID#P HS2IC#P HS2IB#P HS2IA#P HS1ID#P HS1IC#P HS1IB#P HS1IA#P
Gn042 DMMC#P HS3ID#P HS3IC#P HS3IB#P HS3IA#P
- 1469 -
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#P #P #P #P
Gn043 ZRN DNCI MD4 MD2 MD1#P
Gn044 MLK#P BDT1#P
Gn045 BDT9#P BDT8#P BDT7#P BDT6#P BDT5#P BDT4#P BDT3#P BDT2#P
Gn046 DRN#P KEY4 KEY3 KEY2 KEY1 SBK#P KEYP
Gn047 TL128
#P
TL64#P TL32#P TL16#P TL08#P TL04#P TL02#P TL01#P
Gn048 TLRSTI
#P
LFCIV
#P
TL256
#P
Gn049 *TLV7#P *TLV6#P *TLV5#P *TLV4#P *TLV3#P *TLV2#P *TLV1#P *TLV0#P
Gn050 *TLV9#P *TLV8#P
Gn051
Gn052
*CDZ#P #P #P #P
Gn053 SMZ#P ROVLP UINT TMRON
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Gn056
Gn057
Gn058 EXWT
#P
EXSTP
#P
EXRD#P
Gn059 NSYNCA#P
#P
Gn060 *TSB
RGTSP2#SP RGTSP1#SP
Gn061 RGTAP
#P
Gn062 #P
RTNT
#P #P #P
Gn063 NMWT NOZAGC#P
SLSPB SLSPA NOWT HEAD
#P
INFD
#P #P
SLPCB SLPCA
Gn064 ESRSYC#P
- 1470 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn065
Gn066 EKSET RTRCT

#P
ENBKY IGNVRY#P
MTLC#P
Gn067 HCREQ HCABT MCHK#P MMOD#P
MTL07#P MTL06#P MTL05#P MTL04#P MTL03#P MTL02#P MTL01#P MTL00#P

Gn068
MTL15#P MTL14#P MTL13#P MTL12#P MTL11#P MTL10#P MTL09#P MTL08#P

Gn069
Gn070 MRDYA#SP ORCMA#SP SFRA#SP SRVA

#SP
CTH1A#SP CTH2A#SP TLMHA#SP TLMLA#SP
#SP
Gn071 RCHA RSLA#SP INTGA
#SP
SOCNA#SP MCFNA#SP SPSLA#SP *ESPA
#SP
ARSTA#SP
Gn072 RCHHGA#SP MFNHGA#SP INCMDA#SP OVRA#SP DEFMDA#SP NRROA#SP ROTAA#SP INDXA

#SP
Gn073 MPOFA#SP SLVA#SP MORCMA#SP
Gn074 MRDYB#SP ORCMB#SP SFRB#SP SRVB

#SP
CTH1B#SP CTH2B#SP TLMHB#SP TLMLB#SP
Gn075 RCHB
#SP
RSLB#SP INTGB
#SP
SOCNB#SP MCFNB#SP SPSLB#SP *ESPB
#SP
ARSTB#SP
Gn076 RCHHGB#SP MFNHGB#SP INCMDB#SP OVRB#SP DEFMDB#SP NRROB#SP ROTAB#SP INDXB

#SP
Gn077 MPOFB#SP SLVB#SP MORCMB#SP
Gn078 SH07A#SP SH06A#SP SH05A#SP SH04A#SP SH03A#SP SH02A#SP SH01A#SP SH00A#SP
Gn079 SH11A#SP SH10A#SP SH09A#SP SH08A#SP
Gn080 SH07B#SP SH06B#SP SH05B#SP SH04B#SP SH03B#SP SH02B#SP SH01B#SP SH00B#SP
Gn081 SH11B#SP SH10B#SP SH09B#SP SH08B#SP
Gn082 EUI07#P EUI06#P EUI05#P EUI04#P EUI03#P EUI02#P EUI01#P EUI00#P
Gn083 EUI15#P EUI14#P EUI13#P EUI12#P EUI11#P EUI10#P EUI09#P EUI08#P
Gn084
Gn085
Gn086
- 1471 -
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#P #P #P
Gn087 MP32 MP31 MP22 MP21#P
Gn088
Gn089
#P #P #P
G2RVY G2RVZ G2RVX
Gn090
Gn091
Gn092
Gn093
Gn094
Gn095
Gn096 HROV#P *HROV6#P *HROV5#P *HROV4#P *HROV3#P *HROV2#P *HROV1#P *HROV0#P
Gn097
Gn098 EKC7 EKC6 EKC5 EKC4 EKC3 EKC2 EKC1 EKC0
Gn099
Gn100 +J5#SV +J4#SV +J3#SV +J2#SV +J1#SV
Gn101 *+ED25#SV *+ED24#SV *+ED23#SV *+ED22#SV *+ED21#SV
Gn102 -J5#SV -J4#SV -J3#SV -J2#SV -J1#SV
Gn103 *-ED25#SV *-ED24#SV *-ED23#SV *-ED22#SV *-ED21#SV
Gn104 +EXL5
#SV
+EXL4
#SV
+EXL3
#SV
+EXL2
#SV
+EXL1
#SV
Gn105 -EXL5
#SV
-EXL4
#SV
-EXL3
#SV
-EXL2
#SV
-EXL1
#SV
Gn106 MI5#SV MI4#SV MI3#SV MI2#SV MI1#SV
Gn107 *+ED35#SV *+ED34#SV *+ED33#SV *+ED32#SV *+ED31#SV
Gn108 MLK5#SV MLK4#SV MLK3#SV MLK2#SV MLK1#SV
- 1472 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn109 *-ED35 #SV
*-ED34 #SV
*-ED33 #SV
*-ED32 #SV
*-ED31#SV
Gn110 +LM5#SV +LM4#SV +LM3#SV +LM2#SV +LM1#SV
Gn111
Gn112 -LM5#SV -LM4#SV -LM3#SV -LM2#SV -LM1#SV
Gn113
Gn114 *+L5#SV *+L4#SV *+L3#SV *+L2#SV *+L1#SV
Gn115
Gn116 *-L5#SV *-L4#SV *-L3#SV *-L2#SV *-L1#SV
Gn117
Gn118 *+ED5
#SV
*+ED4
#SV
*+ED3
#SV
*+ED2
#SV
*+ED1
#SV
Gn119
Gn120 *-ED5#SV *-ED4#SV *-ED3#SV *-ED2#SV *-ED1#SV
Gn121
PK5#SV PK4#SV PK3#SV PK2#SV PK1#SV

Gn122 PKESS2 #P
PKESS1 #P
Gn123
Gn124 DTCH5#SV DTCH4#SV DTCH3#SV DTCH2#SV DTCH1#SV
Gn125 IUDD5#SV IUDD4#SV IUDD3#SV IUDD2#SV IUDD1#SV
Gn126 SVF5#SV SVF4#SV SVF3#SV SVF2#SV SVF1#SV
Gn127
Gn128 MIX5#SV MIX4#SV MIX3#SV MIX2#SV MIX1#SV
Gn129
Gn130 *IT5#SV *IT4#SV *IT3#SV *IT2#SV *IT1#SV
- 1473 -
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn131
Gn132 +MIT2#P +MIT1#P

+MIT5#P +MIT4#P +MIT3#P
Gn133
Gn134 -MIT2#P -MIT1#P

-MIT5#P -MIT4#P -MIT3#P
Gn135
Gn136 EAX5#SV EAX4#SV EAX3#SV EAX2#SV EAX1#SV
Gn137
Gn138 SYNC5#SV SYNC4#SV SYNC3#SV SYNC2#SV SYNC1#SV
Gn139
Gn140 SYNCJ5#SV SYNCJ4#SV SYNCJ3#SV SYNCJ2#SV SYNCJ1#SV
Gn141
Gn142 EBUFA#PX ECLRA#PX ESTPA#PX ESOFA#PX ESBKA#PX EMBUFA#PX ELCKZA#PX EFINA

#PX
Gn143 EMSBKA#PX EC6A#PX EC5A#PX EC4A#PX EC3A#PX EC2A#PX EC1A#PX EC0A#PX
Gn144 EIF7A
#PX
EIF6A
#PX
EIF5A
#PX
EIF4A
#PX
EIF3A
#PX
EIF2A
#PX
EIF1A
#PX
EIF0A
#PX
Gn145 EIF15A#PX EIF14A#PX EIF13A#PX EIF12A#PX EIF11A#PX EIF10A#PX EIF9A

#PX
EIF8A
#PX
Gn146 EID7A
#PX
EID6A
#PX
EID5A
#PX
EID4A
#PX
EID3A
#PX
EID2A
#PX
EID1A
#PX
EID0A
#PX
Gn147 EID15A#PX EID14A#PX EID13A#PX EID12A#PX EID11A#PX EID10A#PX EID9A

#PX
EID8A
#PX
Gn148 EID23A#PX EID22A#PX EID21A#PX EID20A#PX EID19A#PX EID18A#PX EID17A#PX EID16A#PX
Gn149 EID31A#PX EID30A#PX EID29A#PX EID28A#PX EID27A#PX EID26A#PX EID25A#PX EID24A#PX
Gn150 EDRN#P ERT#P EOVC#P EROV2

#P
EROV1
#P
Gn151 *EFOV7#P *EFOV6#P *EFOV5#P *EFOV4#P *EFOV3#P *EFOV2#P *EFOV1#P *EFOV0#P
Gn152
- 1474 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn153
Gn154 EBUFB#PX ECLRB#PX ESTPB#PX ESOFB#PX ESBKB#PX EMBUFB#PX ELCKZB#PX EFINB

#PX
Gn155 EMSBKB#PX EC6B#PX EC5B#PX EC4B#PX EC3B#PX EC2B#PX EC1B#PX EC0B#PX
Gn156 EIF7B
#PX
EIF6B
#PX
EIF5B
#PX
EIF4B
#PX
EIF3B
#PX
EIF2B
#PX
EIF1B
#PX
EIF0B
#PX
Gn157 EIF15B#PX EIF14B#PX EIF13B#PX EIF12B#PX EIF11B#PX EIF10B#PX EIF9B

#PX
EIF8B
#PX
Gn158 EID7B
#PX
EID6B
#PX
EID5B
#PX
EID4B
#PX
EID3B
#PX
EID2B
#PX
EID1B
#PX
EID0B
#PX
Gn159 EID15B#PX EID14B#PX EID13B#PX EID12B#PX EID11B#PX EID10B#PX EID9B

#PX
EID8B
#PX
Gn160 EID23B#PX EID22B#PX EID21B#PX EID20B#PX EID19B#PX EID18B#PX EID17B#PX EID16B#PX
Gn161 EID31B#PX EID30B#PX EID29B#PX EID28B#PX EID27B#PX EID26B#PX EID25B#PX EID24B#PX
Gn162 EOVCB#PX
Gn163 *EFOV7B#PX *EFOV6B#PX *EFOV5B#PX *EFOV4B#PX *EFOV3B#PX *EFOV2B#PX *EFOV1B#PX *EFOV0B#PX
Gn164
Gn165
Gn166 EBUFC#PX ECLRC#PX ESTPC#PX ESOFC#PX ESBKC#PX EMBUFC#PX ELCKZC#PX EFINC

#PX
Gn167 EMSBKC#PX EC6C#PX EC5C#PX EC4C#PX EC3C#PX EC2C#PX EC1C#PX EC0C#PX
Gn168 EIF7C
#PX
EIF6C
#PX
EIF5C
#PX
EIF4C
#PX
EIF3C
#PX
EIF2C
#PX
EIF1C
#PX
EIF0C
#PX
Gn169 EIF15C#PX EIF14C#PX EIF13C#PX EIF12C#PX EIF11C#PX EIF10C#PX EIF9C

#PX
EIF8C
#PX
Gn170 EID7C
#PX
EID6C
#PX
EID5C
#PX
EID4C
#PX
EID3C
#PX
EID2C
#PX
EID1C
#PX
EID0C
#PX
Gn171 EID15C#PX EID14C#PX EID13C#PX EID12C#PX EID11C#PX EID10C#PX EID9C

#PX
EID8C
#PX
Gn172 EID23C#PX EID22C#PX EID21C#PX EID20C#PX EID19C#PX EID18C#PX EID17C#PX EID16C#PX
Gn173 EID31C#PX EID30C#PX EID29C#PX EID28C#PX EID27C#PX EID26C#PX EID25C#PX EID24C#PX
Gn174 EOVCC#PX
- 1475 -
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn175 *EFOV7C #PX
*EFOV6C #PX
*EFOV5C #PX
*EFOV4C #PX
*EFOV3C #PX
*EFOV2C #PX
*EFOV1C #PX
*EFOV0C#PX
Gn176
Gn177
Gn178 EBUFD#PX ECLRD#PX ESTPD#PX ESOFD#PX ESBKD#PX EMBUFD#PX ELCKZD#PX EFIND

#PX
Gn179 EMSBKD#PX EC6D#PX EC5D#PX EC4D#PX EC3D#PX EC2D#PX EC1D#PX EC0D#PX
Gn180 EIF7D
#PX
EIF6D
#PX
EIF5D
#PX
EIF4D
#PX
EIF3D
#PX
EIF2D
#PX
EIF1D
#PX
EIF0D
#PX
Gn181 EIF15D#PX EIF14D#PX EIF13D#PX EIF12D#PX EIF11D#PX EIF10D#PX EIF9D

#PX
EIF8D
#PX
Gn182 EID7D
#PX
EID6D
#PX
EID5D
#PX
EID4D
#PX
EID3D
#PX
EID2D
#PX
EID1D
#PX
EID0D
#PX
Gn183 EID15D#PX EID14D#PX EID13D#PX EID12D#PX EID11D#PX EID10D#PX EID9D

#PX
EID8D
#PX
Gn184 EID23D#PX EID22D#PX EID21D#PX EID20D#PX EID19D#PX EID18D#PX EID17D#PX EID16D#PX
Gn185 EID31D#PX EID30D#PX EID29D#PX EID28D#PX EID27D#PX EID26D#PX EID25D#PX EID24D#PX
Gn186 EOVCD#PX
Gn187 *EFOV7D#PX *EFOV6D#PX *EFOV5D#PX *EFOV4D#PX *EFOV3D#PX *EFOV2D#PX *EFOV1D#PX *EFOV0D#PX
Gn188
Gn189
Gn190 OVLS5#SV OVLS4#SV OVLS3#SV OVLS2#SV OVLS1#SV
Gn191
Gn192 IGVRY5#SV IGVRY4#SV IGVRY3#SV IGVRY2#SV IGVRY1#SV
Gn193
Gn194
Gn195
Gn196 *DEC5
#SV
*DEC4
#SV
*DEC3
#SV
*DEC2
#SV
*DEC1
#SV
- 1476 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn197
Gn198 NPOS5#SV NPOS4#SV NPOS3#SV NPOS2#SV NPOS1#SV
Gn199 IOLBH2 IOLBH1
Gn200
Gn201
Gn202 NDCAL8#SV NDCAL7#SV NDCAL6#SV NDCAL5#SV NDCAL4#SV NDCAL3#SV NDCAL2#SV NDCAL1#SV
Gn203
#SP
Gn204 MRDYC#SP ORCMC#SP SFRC SRVC#SP CTH1C#SP CTH2C#SP TLMHC#SP TLMLC#SP
Gn205 RCHC
#SP
RSLC#SP INTGC
#SP
SOCNC#SP MCFNC#SP SPSLC#SP *ESPC#SP ARSTC#SP
Gn206 RCHHGC#SP MFNHGC#SP INCMDC#SP OVRC

#SP
DEFMDC#SP NRROC#SP ROTAC#SP INDXC
#SP
Gn207 MPOFC#SP SLVC#SP MORCMC#SP
Gn208
Gn209
Gn212
Gn213
Gn214
Gn215
Gn216
Gn217
Gn220
Gn251
- 1477 -
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn263
Gn264 ESSYC2
#SP
ESSYC1#SP
Gn265 PKESE2#SP PKESE1#SP
Gn266
Gn267
Gn268
Gn269
Gn270
Gn271
Gn272
Gn273
Gn274 CSFI1#SP
Gn275
Gn276
Gn277
Gn278
Gn279
Gn280
Gn281
Gn282
Gn283
Gn284
- 1478 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn285
Gn286
Gn287
Gn288 SPSYC2#SP SPSYC1#SP
Gn289 SPPHS2#SP SPPHS1#SP
Gn290
Gn291
Gn292
Gn293
Gn294
Gn295 CNCKY C2SEND EXSFT
Gn296
Gn297
Gn298
Gn299
Gn300
Gn301
Gn302
Gn303
Gn304
Gn305
Gn306
- 1479 -
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn307
Gn308
Gn309
Gn310
Gn311
Gn312
Gn313
Gn314
Gn315
Gn316
Gn317
Gn318
Gn319
Gn320
Gn321
Gn322
Gn323
Gn324
Gn325
Gn326
Gn327
Gn328
- 1480 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn329
Gn330
Gn331
Gn332
Gn333
Gn334
Gn335
Gn336
Gn337
Gn338
Gn339
Gn340
Gn341
Gn342
Gn343
Gn344
Gn345
Gn346
Gn347 HDN#P
Gn348
Gn349
Gn350
- 1481 -
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn351
Gn352 *FHRO7#P *FHRO6#P *FHRO5#P *FHRO4#P *FHRO3#P *FHRO2#P *FHRO1#P *FHRO0#P
Gn353 FHROV#P *FHRO9#P *FHRO8#P
Gn354
Gn355
Gn356
Gn357
Gn358 WPRST5#SV WPRST4#SV WPRST3#SV WPRST2#SV WPRST1#SV
~
Gn375
Gn376 SOV27 SOV26 SOV25 SOV24 SOV23 SOV22 SOV21 SOV20
Gn377
Gn378
Gn379
Gn380
Gn381
Gn382
Gn383
Gn384
Gn385
Gn386
Gn387
Gn388
- 1482 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn389
Gn390
Gn391
Gn392
Gn393
Gn394
Gn395
Gn396
Gn397
Gn398
Gn399
Gn400 *SUCPFB#SP
Gn401 *SCPFB#SP
Gn402 SPSTPB#SP
Gn403
Gn404
Gn405
Gn406
Gn407
Gn408 STCHK#P
Gn409
Gn410
- 1483 -
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn411
Gn412
~
Gn512 MCST8
#P
MCST7
#P
MCST6
#P
MCST5
#P
MCST4
#P
MCST3
#P
MCST2
#P
MCST1
#P
Gn513 MCST16#P MCST15#P MCST14#P MCST13#P MCST12#P MCST11#P MCST10#P MCST9

#P
Gn514 MCFIN#P
Gn515
Gn516
Gn517 GAE2#P GAE1#P

GAE3#P
Gn518
Gn519
Gn520
Gn521 SRVON5 SRVON4 SRVON3 SRVON2 SRVON1
Gn522
Gn523 SVRVS5 SVRVS4 SVRVS3 SVRVS2 SVRVS1
Gn524
MT8N07#P MT8N06#P MT8N05#P MT8N04#P MT8N03#P MT8N02#P MT8N01#P MT8N00#P

Gn525

Gn526

Gn527

Gn528
~
Gn531 MRVM
#P
FWSTP
#P
Gn532
- 1484 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Gn533
Gn534
Gn535
Gn536 SPSP#P
~
Gn544
Gn545
Gn546
Gn547
Gn548
~
Gn767
- 1485 -
CNC → PMC
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
#P #P #P #P
Fn000 OP SA STL SPL RWD#P
Fn001 MA#P TAP#P ENB#SP DEN#P BAL#P RST#P AL#P
Fn002 MDRN#P CUT#P SRNMV#P THRD#P CSS#P RPDO#P INCH#P
Fn003 MEDT#P MMEM# MRMT#P MMDI#P MJ#P MH#P MINC#P

P
Fn004 MREF#P MAFL#P MSBK#P MABSM#P MMLK#P MBDT1

#P
Fn005 MBDT9
#P
MBDT8
#P
MBDT7
#P
MBDT6
#P
MBDT5
#P
MBDT4
#P
MBDT3
#P
MBDT2
#P
Fn006 ERTVA#P MDIRST#P TPPRS
Fn007 BF#P TF#P SF#P MF#P
Fn008 MF3#P MF2#P
Fn009 DM00#P DM01#P DM02#P DM30#P
Fn010 M07#P M06#P M05#P M04#P M03#P M02#P M01#P M00#P
#P #P #P #P #P #P #P #P
Fn016 M307 M306 M305 M304 M303 M302 M301 M300
Fn018
Fn019
Fn020
- 1486 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn021
Fn022 S07#P S06#P S05#P S04#P S03#P S02#P S01#P S00#P
Fn026 T07#P T06#P T05#P T04#P T03#P T02#P T01#P T00#P
Fn030 B07#P B06#P B05#P B04#P B03#P B02#P B01#P B00#P
Fn034 SRSRDY#P SRSP1R#SP SRSP2R#SP

GR3O#P GR2O#P GR1O#P
Fn035 SPAL#P
Fn036 R08O#SP R07O#SP R06O#SP R05O#SP R04O#SP R03O#SP R02O#SP R01O#SP
Fn037 R12O#SP R11O#SP R10O#SP R09O#SP
Fn038 ENB2#SP SUCLPA#SP SCLPA#SP
Fn039 MSPOSA#SP
Fn040 AR07#SP AR06#SP AR05#SP AR04#SP AR03#SP AR02#SP AR01#SP AR00#SP
Fn041 AR15#SP AR14#SP AR13#SP AR12#SP AR11#SP AR10#SP AR09#SP AR08#SP
Fn042
- 1487 -
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn043 SYCAL2#SP SYCAL1#SP
#P #P #P
Fn044 SYCAL
#P FSPPH FSPSY FSCSL
Fn045 ORARA#SP TLMA#SP LDT2A

#SP
LDT1A
#SP
SARA
#SP
SDTA#SP SSTA#SP ALMA#SP
Fn046 MORA2A#SP MORA1A#SP PORA2A#SP SLVSA#SP RCFNA#SP RCHPA#SP CFINA

#SP
CHPA
#SP
Fn047 INCSTA#SP PC1DEA#SP
Fn048 CSPENA#SP
Fn049 ORARB#SP TLMB#SP LDT2B

#SP
LDT1B
#SP
SARB
#SP
SDTB#SP SSTB#SP ALMB
#SP
Fn050 MORA2B#SP MORA1B#SP PORA2B#SP SLVSB#SP RCFNB#SP RCHPB#SP CFINB

#SP
CHPB
#SP
Fn051 INCSTB#SP PC1DEB#SP
Fn052
Fn053 EKENB RPALM

#P
RPBSY
#P
PRGDPL INHKY
Fn054 UO007
#P
UO006
#P
UO005
#P
UO004
#P
UO003
#P
UO002
#P
UO001
#P
UO000
#P
Fn055 UO015
#P
UO014
#P
UO013
#P
UO012
#P
UO011
#P
UO010
#P
UO009
#P
UO008
#P
Fn056 UO107
#P
UO106
#P
UO105
#P
UO104
#P
UO103
#P
UO102
#P
UO101
#P
UO100
#P
Fn057 UO115
#P
UO114
#P
UO113
#P
UO112
#P
UO111
#P
UO110
#P
UO109
#P
UO108
#P
Fn058 UO123
#P
UO122
#P
UO121
#P
UO120
#P
UO119
#P
UO118
#P
UO117
#P
UO116
#P
Fn059 UO131
#P
UO130
#P
UO129
#P
UO128
#P
UO127
#P
UO126
#P
UO125
#P
UO124
#P
Fn060 ESCAN
#P
ESEND
#P
EREND
#P
#P #P
MTLA MTLANG
Fn061 HCEXE HCAB2
BCLP
#P
BUCLP
#P
Fn062 PRTSF
#P
AICC#P
#P #P #P
WATO COSP2 COSP1
Fn063 PSYN#P PSAR#P PSE2#P PSE1#P
#P #P #P
TIALM TICHK COSP
Fn064 TLCHI#P TLNW#P
- 1488 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
SYNMOD# #P #P
Fn065 P RTRCTF #P
RSMAX
#P
RGSPM RGSPP
Fn066
RTPT#P
#P
PECK2
Fn067
Fn068
Fn069
Fn070 PSW08
#P
PSW07
#P
PSW06
#P
PSW05
#P
PSW04
#P
PSW03
#P
PSW02
#P
PSW01
#P
Fn071 PSW16
#P
PSW15
#P
PSW14
#P
PSW13
#P
PSW12
#P
PSW11
#P
PSW10
#P
PSW09
#P
Fn072 OUT7#P OUT6#P OUT5#P OUT4#P OUT3#P OUT2#P OUT1#P OUT0#P
Fn073 ZRNO#P MD4O#P MD2O#P MD1O#P
Fn074 OUT15
#P
OUT14
#P
OUT13
#P
OUT12
#P
OUT11
#P
OUT10
#P
OUT9#P OUT8#P
Fn075 SPO#P KEYO DRNO#P MLKO#P SBKO#P BDTO#P
Fn076 ROV2O
#P
ROV1O
#P
RTAP#P MP2O#P MP1O#P
Fn077 RTO#P HS1DO

#P
HS1CO
#P
HS1BO
#P
HS1AO
#P
Fn078 *FV7O#P *FV6O#P *FV5O#P *FV4O#P *FV3O#P *FV2O#P *FV1O#P *FV0O#P
Fn079 *JV7O#P *JV6O#P *JV5O#P *JV4O#P *JV3O#P *JV2O#P *JV1O#P *JV0O#P
Fn080 *JV15O
#P
*JV14O
#P
*JV13O
#P
*JV12O
#P
*JV11O
#P
*JV10O
#P
*JV9O#P *JV8O#P
Fn081 -J4O#P +J4O#P -J3O#P +J3O#P -J2O#P +J2O#P -J1O#P +J1O#P
Fn082 RVSL#P
Fn083
Fn084 EUO07
#P
EUO06
#P
EUO05
#P
EUO04
#P
EUO03
#P
EUO02
#P
EUO01
#P
EUO00
#P
Fn085 EUO15
#P
EUO14
#P
EUO13
#P
EUO12
#P
EUO11
#P
EUO10
#P
EUO09
#P
EUO08
#P
Fn086
- 1489 -
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn087
Fn088
Fn089
Fn090 ABTSP2＃SP ABTSP1＃SP ABTQSV#P
Fn091 MMMOD
#P
MRVSP
#P
MNCHG
#P
MRVMD
#P
Fn092
Fn093 SVWRN4#P SVWRN3#P SVWRN2#P SVWRN1#P LFCIF#P
Fn094 ZP5#SV ZP4#SV ZP3#SV ZP2#SV ZP1#SV
Fn095
Fn097
Fn099
Fn101
Fn102 MV5#SV MV4#SV MV3#SV MV2#SV MV1#SV
Fn103
Fn104 INP5#SV INP4#SV INP3#SV INP2#SV INP1#SV
Fn105
Fn106 MVD5
#SV
MVD4
#SV
MVD3
#SV
MVD2
#SV
MVD1
#SV
Fn107
Fn108 MMI5#SV MMI4#SV MMI3#SV MMI2#SV MMI1#SV
- 1490 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn109
Fn110 MDTCH5#SV MDTCH4#SV MDTCH3#SV MDTCH2#SV MDTCH1#SV
Fn111
Fn112 EADEN5#SV EADEN4#SV EADEN3#SV EADEN2#SV EADEN1#SV
Fn113
Fn114 TRQL5
#SV
TRQL4
#SV
TRQL3
#SV
TRQL2
#SV
TRQL1
#SV
Fn115
Fn116
Fn117
Fn118 SYN50
#SV
SYN40
#SV
SYN30
#SV
SYN20
#SV
SYN10
#SV
Fn119
Fn120 ZRF5#SV ZRF4#SV ZRF3#SV ZRF2#SV ZRF1#SV
Fn121
Fn122 HDO3#P HDO2#P HDO1#P HDO0#P
Fn123
Fn124 +OT5#SV +OT4#SV +OT3#SV +OT2#SV +OT1#SV
Fn125
Fn126 -OT5#SV -OT4#SV -OT3#SV -OT2#SV -OT1#SV
Fn127
Fn128
Fn129 *EAXSL#P EOV0#P
Fn130 EBSYA#PX EOTNA#PX EOTPA#PX EGENA#PX EDENA#PX EIALA

#PX
ECKZA#PX EINPA
#PX
- 1491 -
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn131 EMF3A#PX
EMF2A #PX
EABUFA #PX
EMFA
#PX
Fn132 EM28A#PX EM24A#PX EM22A#PX EM21A#PX EM18A#PX EM14A#PX EM12A#PX EM11A#PX
Fn133 EBSYB#PX EOTNB#PX EOTPB#PX EGENB#PX EDENB#PX EIALB

#PX
ECKZB#PX EINPB
#PX
Fn134 EMF3B#PX EMF2B#PX EABUFB#PX EMFB

#PX
Fn135 EM28B#PX EM24B#PX EM22B#PX EM21B#PX EM18B#PX EM14B#PX EM12B#PX EM11B#PX
Fn136 EBSYC#PX EOTNC#PX EOTPC#PX EGENC#PX EDENC#PX EIALC

#PX
ECKZC#PX EINPC
#PX
Fn137 EMF3C#PX EMF2C#PX EABUFC#PX EMFC

#PX
Fn138 EM28C#PX EM24C#PX EM22C#PX EM21C#PX EM18C#PX EM14C#PX EM12C#PX EM11C#PX
Fn139 EBSYD#PX EOTND#PX EOTPD#PX EGEND#PX EDEND#PX EIALD

#PX
ECKZD#PX EINPD
#PX
Fn140 EMF3D#PX EMF2D#PX EABUFD#PX EMFD

#PX
Fn141 EM28D#PX EM24D#PX EM22D#PX EM21D#PX EM18D#PX EM14D#PX EM12D#PX EM11D#PX
Fn142 EM48A#PX EM44A#PX EM42A#PX EM41A#PX EM38A#PX EM34A#PX EM32A#PX EM31A#PX
Fn143
Fn144
Fn145 EM48B#PX EM44B#PX EM42B#PX EM41B#PX EM38B#PX EM34B#PX EM32B#PX EM31B#PX
Fn146
Fn147
Fn148 EM48C#PX EM44C#PX EM42C#PX EM41C#PX EM38C#PX EM34C#PX EM32C#PX EM31C#PX
Fn149
Fn150
Fn151 EM48D#PX EM44D#PX EM42D#PX EM41D#PX EM38D#PX EM34D#PX EM32D#PX EM31D#PX
Fn152
- 1492 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn153
Fn154 TLAL
Fn155
Fn156
Fn157
Fn158
Fn159
Fn160 MSP07
#P
MSP06
#P
MSP05
#P
MSP04
#P
MSP03
#P
MSP02
#P
MSP01
#P
MSP00
#P
Fn161 MSP15
#P
MSP14
#P
MSP13
#P
MSP12
#P
MSP11
#P
MSP10
#P
MSP09
#P
MSP08
#P
Fn162
Fn163
Fn164
Fn165
Fn166
Fn167
Fn168 ORARC#SP TLMC#SP LDT2C#SP LDT1C#SP SARC

#SP
SDTC
#SP
SSTC#SP ALMC
#SP
Fn169 MORA2C#SP MORA1C#SP PORA2C#SP SLVSC#SP RCFNC#SP RCHPC#SP CFINC

#SP
CHPC
#SP
Fn170 INCSTC#SP PC1DEC#SP
Fn171
Fn172 PBATL
#P
PBATZ
#P
Fn173
Fn174
- 1493 -
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn175
Fn176
Fn177
Fn178
Fn179
Fn180 CLRCH5#SV CLRCH4#SV CLRCH3#SV CLRCH2#SV CLRCH1#SV
Fn181
Fn182 EACNT5#SV EACNT4#SV EACNT3#SV EACNT2#SV EACNT1#SV
Fn183
Fn184 ABDT5#SV ABDT4#SV ABDT3#SV ABDT2#SV ABDT1#SV
Fn185
Fn186
Fn187
Fn188 AMRST5#SV AMRST4#SV AMRST3#SV AMRST2#SV AMRST1#SV
Fn189
Fn190 TRQM5#SV TRQM4#SV TRQM3#SV TRQM2#SV TRQM1#SV
Fn191
Fn192
Fn193
Fn194
Fn195
Fn196
- 1494 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn197
Fn198
Fn199
Fn200 R08O2#SP R07O2#SP R06O2#SP R05O2#SP R04O2#SP R03O2#SP R02O2#SP R01O2#SP
Fn201 R12O2#SP R11O2#SP R10O2#SP R09O2#SP
Fn202 AR072
#SP
AR062
#SP
AR052
#SP
AR042
#SP
AR032
#SP
AR022
#SP
AR012
#SP
AR002
#SP
Fn203 AR152
#SP
AR142
#SP
AR132
#SP
AR122
#SP
AR112
#SP
AR102
#SP
AR092
#SP
AR082
#SP
Fn206
Fn207
Fn208
Fn209
Fn210 SYNMT5#P SYNMT4#P SYNMT3#P SYNMT2#P SYNMT1#P
Fn211 SYNOF5#P SYNOF4#P SYNOF3#P SYNOF2#P SYNOF1#P
Fn212
Fn213
Fn214
Fn215
Fn216
Fn217
Fn218
- 1495 -
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn263
Fn264 SPWRN8
#P
SPWRN7
#P
SPWRN6
#P
SPWRN5
#P
SPWRN4
#P
SPWRN3
#P
SPWRN2
#P
SPWRN1
#P
Fn265 SPWRN9
#P
Fn266
Fn267
Fn268
Fn269
Fn272
Fn273
Fn274 CSFO1#SP
Fn275
Fn276
Fn277
Fn278
Fn279
Fn280
Fn281
Fn282
Fn283
Fn284
- 1496 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn285
Fn286
Fn287
Fn288 FSPSY2#SP FSPSY1#SP
Fn289 FSPPH2#SP FSPPH1#SP
Fn290
Fn291
Fn292
Fn293
Fn294
Fn295 CNCKYO C2SENO
Fn296
Fn297
Fn298 TDSML8 TDSML7 TDSML6 TDSML5 TDSML4 TDSML3 TDSML2 TDSML1
Fn299 TDFTR8 TDFTR7 TDFTR6 TDFTR5 TDFTR4 TDFTR3 TDFTR2 TDFTR1
Fn300
Fn301
Fn302
Fn303
Fn304
Fn305
Fn306
- 1497 -
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn307
Fn308
Fn309
Fn310
Fn311
Fn312
Fn313
Fn314
Fn315
Fn316
Fn317 ESFM8 ESFM7 ESFM6 ESFM5 ESFM4 ESFM3 ESFM2 ESFM1
Fn318 ESF08 ESF07 ESF06 ESF05 ESF04 ESF03 ESF02 ESF01
Fn319 ESF10 ESF09
Fn320
Fn321
Fn322
Fn323
Fn324
Fn325
Fn326
Fn327
Fn328
- 1498 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn329
Fn330
Fn331
Fn332
Fn333
Fn334
Fn335
Fn336
Fn337
Fn338
Fn339
Fn340
Fn341 SYCM5#SV SYCM4#SV SYCM3#SV SYCM2#SV SYCM1#SV
Fn342 SYCS5#SV SYCS4#SV SYCS3#SV SYCS2#SV SYCS1#SV
Fn343 MIXO5#SV MIXO4#SV MIXO3#SV MIXO2#SV MIXO1#SV
Fn344 OVMO5#SV OVMO4#SV OVMO3#SV OVMO2#SV OVMO1#SV
Fn345 OVSO5#SV OVSO4#SV OVSO3#SV OVSO2#SV OVSO1#SV
Fn346 SMPK5#SV SMPK4#SV SMPK3#SV SMPK2#SV SMPK1#SV
Fn347
Fn348
Fn349
Fn350
- 1499 -
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn356
Fn358 WPSF5#SV WPSF4#SV WPSF3#SV WPSF2#SV WPSF1#SV
Fn395
Fn396
Fn397
Fn398
Fn399
Fn400 SUCLPB#SP
Fn401 SCLPB#SP
Fn402 MSPOSB#SP
Fn403 SYNER
#P
Fn404
Fn405
Fn406
Fn407
Fn408
Fn409
Fn410
Fn411
Fn412
Fn413
Fn414
- 1500 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
Address Bit number

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
Fn415
Fn416
Fn417
Fn418
~
Fn511
Fn512 MCSP#P MCRQ#P MCEXE

#P
Fn513 ZRNR#P DNCIR

#P
MD4R#P MD2R#P MD1R#P
Fn514 MCEX8
#P
MCEX7
#P
MCEX6
#P
MCEX5
#P
MCEX4
#P
MCEX3
#P
MCEX2
#P
MCEX1
#P
Fn515 MCEX16#P MCEX15#P MCEX14#P MCEX13#P MCEX12#P MCEX11#P MCEX10#P MCEX9

#P
Fn516
Fn517
Fn518
Fn519
Fn520 ATBK
Fn521 SVREV5 SVREV4 SVREV3 SVREV2 SVREV1
Fn522 SPP5 SPP4 SPP3 SPP2 SPP1
~
Fn531
#SV #SV #SV #SV #SV

Fn532 SYNO5 SYNO4 SYNO3 SYNO2 SYNO1
Fn533
~
Fn767
- 1501 -
A.2 LIST OF SIGNALS
A.2.1 List of Signals (In Order of Functions)

○ : Available
● : Available only with 2-path control
－ : Unavailable
Reference
Function Signal name Symbol Address T M
item
I/O Link β Manual
Manual handle
handle interface
generators selection IOLBH1, IOLBH2 G199.0, G199.1 ○ ○ 3.4
(Peripheral equipment
signal
control interface)
External read start signal EXRD G058.1 ○ ○
External read/punch stop
EXSTP G058.2 ○ ○
signal
External I/O device
External punch start 14.2
control EXWT G058.3 ○ ○
signal
Read/punch busy signal RPBSY F053.2 ○ ○
Read/punch alarm signal RPALM F053.3 ○ ○
Small-hole peck drilling
Canned cycle for PECK2 F066.5 － ○
cycle in progress signal 12.7
drilling
Tapping signal TAP F001.5 ○ ○
Alarm signal AL F001.0 ○ ○
Alarm signal 2.4
Battery alarm signal BAL F001.2 ○ ○
Unexpected disturbance
torque detection ignore IUDD1~IUDD5 G125.0~G125.4 ○ ○ 2.9
signal
Unexpected disturbance
ABDT1~ABDT5 F184.0~F184.4 ○ ○
torque detection signal
Servo axis unexpected
Unexpected
disturbance torque ABTQSV F090.0 ○ ○
disturbance torque
detection signal
detection
1st spindle unexpected
disturbance torque ABTSP1 F090.1 ○ ○
detection signal
2nd spindle unexpected
disturbance torque ABTSP2 F090.2 ○ ○
detection signal
2nd M function code
M200~M215 F014,F015 ○ ○
signals
3rd M function code
M300~M315 F016,F017 ○ ○
Multiple M commands signals
9.3
in a single block 2nd M function strobe
MF2 F008.4 ○ ○
signal
3rd M function strobe
MF3 F008.5 ○ ○
signal
- 1502 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
Reference
item
Start lock signal STLK G007.1 ○ ○
Interlock signal for all
*IT G008.0 ○ ○
axes
Interlock signal for each
*IT1~*IT5 G130.0~G130.4 ○ ○
axis
Interlock 2.5
Interlock signal for each +MIT1~+MIT5 G132.0~G132.4
－ ○
axis direction -MIT1~-MIT5 G134.0~G134.4
Cutting block start
*CSL G008.1 ○ ○
interlock signal
Block start interlock signal *BSL G008.3 ○ ○
Inch/metric conversion Inch input signal INCH F002.0 ○ ○ 12.5
B axis clamp signal BCLP F061.1 － ○
B axis clamp completion
*BECLP G038.7 － ○
Index table indexing signal
13.12
function B axis unclamp signal BUCLP F061.0 － ○
B axis unclamp
*BEUCP G038.6 － ○
completion signal
In-feed control (for In-feed control cut start
INFD G063.6 － ○ 12.9
grinding machine) signal
In-position signals INP1~INP5 F104.0~F104.4 ○ ○
In-position check 7.2.5
In-position check signal SMZ G053.6 ○ ○
AI contour control mode
AI control I/II AICC F062.0 ○ ○ 7.1.11
signal
One-digit F code feed
One-digit F code feed F1D G016.7 － ○ 7.1.5
signal
*+L1~*+L5 G114.0~G114.4 ○ ○
Overtravel Overtravel signals 2.3.1
*-L1~*-L5 G116.0~G116.4 ○ ○
Override cancel Override cancel signal OVC G006.4 ○ ○ 7.1.7.4
Direct operation by Direct operation select
DMMC G042.7 ○ ○ 5.13
Open CNC signal
Signals for selecting the
manual feed axis for axis SYNCJ1~SYNCJ5 G140.0~G140.4 ○ ○
synchronous control
Machine coordinate
SYNMT1~SYNMT
match state output F210.0~F210.4 ○ ○
5
signals
Axis synchronous control
SYNO1~SYNO5 F532.0~F532.4 ○ ○
status signals
Synchronization
SYNOF1~SYNOF
compensation enable F211.0~F211.4 ○ ○
Axis synchronous 5
state output signals 1.6
control
Signal for indicating a
positional deviation error
SYNER F403.0 ○ ○
alarm for axis
synchronous control
Synchronous control axis
SYNC1~SYNC5 G138.0~G138.4 ○ ○
selection signals
Signal for disabling torque
difference alarm detection
NSYNCA G059.7 ○ ○
for axis synchronous
control
Feedrate override Feedrate override signals *FV0~*FV7 G012 ○ ○ 7.1.7.2
- 1503 -
Reference
item
Optional block skip BDT1 G044.0 ○ ○
Optional block
signals BDT2~BDT9 G045 ○ ○
skip/addition of 5.5
Optional block skip check MBDT1 F004.0 ○ ○
optional block skip
signals MBDT2~MBDT9 F005 ○ ○
External key input mode
ENBKY G066.1 ○ ○
selection signal
Key code signals EKC0~EKC7 G098 ○ ○
Key code read signal EKSET G066.7 ○ ○
External key input 16.5
Key code read completion
EKENB F053.7 ○ ○
signal
Key input disable signal INHKY F053.0 ○ ○
Key input disable signal PRGDPL F053.1 ○ ○
External deceleration *+ED1~*+ED5 G118.0~G118.4 ○ ○
signals 1 *-ED1~*-ED5 G120.0~G120.4 ○ ○
External deceleration 7.1.9
signals 2 *-ED21~*-ED25 G103.0~G103.4 ○ ○
signals 3 *-ED31~*-ED35 G109.0~G109.4 ○ ○
Address signals for
EA6~EA0 G002.6~G002.0 ○ ○
external data input
Data signals for external G211,G210,
ED31~ED0 ○ ○
data input G001,G000
Read signal for external
ESTB G002.7 ○ ○
data input
External data input 16.2
Read completion signal
EREND F060.0 ○ ○
for external data input
Search completion signal
ESEND F060.1 ○ ○
for external data input
Search cancel signal for
ESCAN F060.2 ○ ○
external data input
External workpiece PN1,PN2,PN4,PN
G009.0~G009.4 ○ ○
number search signals 8,PN16
Extended external
External workpiece workpiece number search EPN0~EPN13 G024.0~G025.5 ○ ○
16.4
number search signals
External workpiece
number search start EPNS G025.7 ○ ○
signal
Each axis workpiece
WPRST1 to
coordinate system preset G358.0~G358.4 ○ ○
Each axis workpiece WPRST5
signals
coordinate system 1.5.2.6
Each axis workpiece
preset signals
coordinate system preset WPSF1 to WPSF5 F358.0~F358.4 ○ ○
completion signals
Extended external Extended external Specifying by
machine zero point machine zero point shift EMZ0~EMZ15 parameter ○ ○ 16.3
shift signal No.1280.
UI000~UI031 G054~G057 ○ ○
Input signals for custom UI100~UI131 G276~G279 ○ ○
Custom macro 12.6
macro UI200~UI231 G280~G283 ○ ○
UI300~UI331 G284~G287 ○ ○
- 1504 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
Reference
item
F054,F055,
UO000~UO031 ○ ○
F276,F277
Output signals for custom
Custom macro UO100~UO131 F056~F059 ○ ○ 12.6
macro
UO200~UO231 F280~F283 ○ ○
UO300~UO331 F284~F287 ○ ○
Target part count reached
PRTSF F062.7 ○ ○
signal
Run hour and part
General-purpose 13.1.1
count display
integrating meter start TMRON G053.0 ○ ○
signal
Automatic screen erasing
Screen erasure ERTVA F006.2 ○ ○ 13.1.12
signal
Hard copy cancellation
HCABT G067.6 ○ ○
request signal
Hard copy execution
HCREQ G067.7 ○ ○
Screen hard copy request signal
13.1.14
function Hard copy cancellation
HCAB2 F061.2 ○ ○
request reception signal
Hard copy execution
HCEXE F061.3 ○ ○
status signal
Path interference check in
TICHK F064.6 ● －
progress signal
Interference check 8.3
Path interference alarm
TIALM F064.7 ● －
signal
EXSFT G295.0 ○ ○
screen select signal
Machine operation
select number notification ESFM1~ESFM8 F317.0~G317.7 ○ ○ 13.4
menu
signal
Soft key number select
ESF01~ESF10 F318.0~G319.1 ○ ○
state notification signal
Signal for disabling
Angular axis control angular axis control for NOZAGC G063.5 ○ ○ 1.8
the perpendicular axis
Path spindle command
SLSPA,SLSPB G063.2,G063.3 ● －
selection signals
Path spindle feedback
SLPCA,SLPCB G064.2,G064.3 ● －
selection signals
Path spindle control 8.8
COSP F064.5 ● －
confirmation signal
Path spindle command COSP1 F063.3 ● －
confirmation signal COSP2 F063.4 ● －
Path select signal (Tool 8.11,
Path select HEAD G063.0 ● －
post select signal) 13.3
Trouble forecast signal
(For the thermal TDSML1~TDSML8 F298.0~F298.7 ○ ○
simulation data)
Trouble diagnosis 18.3
(For the disturbance TDFTR1~TDFLR8 F299.0~F299.7 ○ ○
level)
Direct input of tool
Position record signal PRC G040.6 ○ － 15.4.1
offset value measured
- 1505 -
Reference
item
Tool offset number OFN0~OFN5, G039.0~G039.5,
○ －
selection signals OFN6~OFN9 G040.0~G040.3
Tool offset write mode
GOQSM G039.7 ○ －
select signal
Workpiece coordinate
Direct input of tool system shift value write WOQSM G039.6 ○ －
offset value measured mode select signal 15.4.2
B +MIT1,-MIT1 X004.2,X004.3
+MIT2,-MIT2 X004.4,X004.5
Tool offset write signals ○ －
+MIT1~+MIT2 G132.0~G132.1
-MIT1~-MIT2 G134.0~G134.1
Spindle measurement
S2TLS G040.5 ○ －
select signal
Direct input of tool Workpiece coordinate
offset value measured system shift value write WOSET G040.7 ○ － 15.4.2
B signal
Tool change signal TLCH F064.0 ○ ○
Tool change reset signal TLRST G048.7 ○ ○
Individual tool change
TLCHI F064.2 ○ ○
signal
Individual tool change
TLRSTI G048.6 ○ ○
reset signal
Tool skip signal TLSKP G048.5 ○ ○
New tool select signal TLNW F064.1 ○ ○
Tool group number
TL01 to TL256 G047.0~G048.0 ○ ○
selection signals
Tool life management 11.4
Tool life count override
*TLV0 to *TLV9 G049.0~G050.1 ○ ○
signals
Tool life arrival notice
TLCHB F064.3 ○ ○
signal
Tool life counting disable
LFCIV G048.2 ○ ○
signal
Tool life counting disable
LFCIF F093.2 ○ ○
signal
Remaining tool count
TLAL F154.0 － ○
notification signal
Auxiliary function
MFIN G005.0 ○ ○
completion signal
Spindle function
SFIN G005.2 ○ ○
completion signal
Tool function completion
TFIN G005.3 ○ ○
High-speed M/S/T/B signal
9.4
interface 2nd auxiliary function
BFIN G005.7 ○ ○
completion signal
2nd M function
MFIN2 G004.4 ○ ○
completion signal
3rd M function completion
MFIN3 G004.5 ○ ○
signal
High-speed skip High-speed skip status
HDO0~HDO3 F122.0~F122.3 ○ ○ 15.3.2
signal signals
Wrong operation
Start check signal STCHK G408.0 ○ ○ 2.12
prevention
Servo off / mechanical
Servo off signals SVF1~SVF5 G126.0~G126.4 ○ ○ 1.2.9
handle feed
- 1506 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
Reference
item
SVWRN1 F093.4 ○ ○
Servo warning detail SVWRN2 F093.5 ○ ○
Servo axis control 18.1
signals SVWRN3 F093.6 ○ ○
SVWRN4 F093.7 ○ ○
SV speed control mode SRVON1~
G521.0~G521.5 ○ ○
signals SRVON6
Spindle control with
SV reverse signals SVRVS1~SVRVS6 G523.0~G523.5 ○ ○ 10.19
servo motor
SV speed control mode
SVREV1~SVREV6 F521.0~F521.5 ○ ○
in-progress signals
Spindle control with Spindle indexing signal
SPP1~SPP6 F522.0~F522.5 ○ ○ 10.19
servo motor for each axis
Speed display function
Speed display change
of a milling tool with SDPC G38.5 ○ ○ 13.1.10
signal
servo motor
Cycle start signal ST G007.2 ○ ○
Feed hold signal *SP G008.5 ○ ○
Automatic operation
Cycle start / feed hold OP F000.7 ○ ○ 5.1
signal
Cycle start lamp signal STL F000.5 ○ ○
Feed hold lamp signal SPL F000.4 ○ ○
Cs contour control
CON G027.7 ○ ○
change signal
Cs contour control 10.11
Cs contour control
FSCSL F044.1 ○ ○
change completion signal
Cs axis coordinate
establishment request CSFI1 G274.4 ○ ○
signals
Cs contour control
Cs axis coordinate
axis coordinate 10.11.3
establishment alarm CSFO1 F274.4 ○ ○
establishment
signals
Cs axis origin established
CSPENA F048.4 ○ ○
state signals
Key control selection
CNCKY G295.7 ○ ○
signal
Dual display forcible end
C2SEND G295.6 ○ ○
CNC screen dual request signal
13.1.9
display Key control selection
CNCNYO F295.7 ○ ○
status signal
C2SENO F295.6 ○ ○
status signal
Outputting the Axis moving signals MV1~MV5 F102.0~F102.4 ○ ○
movement state of an Axis moving direction 1.2.6
MVD1~MVD5 F106.0~F106.4 ○ ○
axis signals
Axis non-display Axis non-display signals NPOS1~NPOS5 G198.0~G198.4 ○ ○
Actual spindle speed Actual spindle speed AR00~AR15 F040,F041 ○ ○
10.9
output signals AR002~AR152 F202,F203 ○ ○
Automatic data Automatic data backup
ATBK F520.0 ○ ○
backup executing signal
Constant surface Constant surface speed
CSS F002.2 ○ ○ 10.8
speed control signal
- 1507 -
Reference
item
Spindle stop completion SPSTPA G028.6 ○ ○
signal SPSTPB G402.1 ○ ○
SUCLPA F038.1 ○ ○
Spindle positioning Spindle unclamp signal 10.10
SUCLPB F400.1 ○ ○
Spindle unclamp *SUCPFA G028.4 ○ ○
completion signal *SUCPFB G400.1 ○ ○
Spindle clamp completion *SCPFA G028.5 ○ ○
signal *SCPFB G401.1 ○ ○
SCLPA F038.0 ○ ○
Spindle positioning Spindle clamp signal 10.10
SCLPB F401.1 ○ ○
Spindle positioning mode MSPOSA F039.0 ○ ○
signals MSPOSB F402.1 ○ ○
Spindle orientation SH00A~SH11A G078.0~G079.3 ○ ○
Spindle orientation external stop position 10.15
SH00B~SH11B G080.0~G081.3 ○ ○
command signals
Simple spindle
synchronous control ESRSYC G064.6 ○ ○
signal
Simple spindle ESSYC1 G264.0 ○ ○
synchronous control
ESSYC2 G264.1 ○ ○
signal (for each spindle)
G122.6
1st spindle parking signal PKESS1 ○ ○
(G031.6)
Simple spindle G122.7
2nd spindle parking signal PKESS2 ○ ○ 10.17
synchronous control (G031.7)
Simple spindle PKESE1 G265.0 ○ ○
synchronous parking
PKESE2 G265.1 ○ ○
Phase error monitor
SYCAL F044.4 ○ ○
signal
Phase error monitor SYCAL1 F043.0 ○ ○
signal
SYCAL2 F043.1 ○ ○
(for each spindle)
Polygon spindle stop
*PLSST G038.0 ○ ○
signal
Polygon spindle speed
PSAR F063.2 ○ ○
arrival signal
Paths polygon turning 6.9.2
Polygon master axis not
PSE1 F063.0 ○ ○
arrival signal
Polygon synchronization
PSE2 F063.1 ○ ○
axis not arrival signal
Torque limit command TLMLA G070.0 ○ ○
LOW signals (serial TLMLB G074.0 ○ ○
spindle) TLMLC G204.0 ○ －
Torque limit command TLMHA G070.1 ○ ○
HIGH signals (serial TLMHB G074.1 ○ ○
spindle) TLMHC G204.1 ○ －
Spindle serial output 10.3
CTH1A,CTH2A G070.3,G070.2 ○ ○
Clutch/gear signals (serial
CTH1B,CTH2B G074.3,G074.2 ○ ○
spindle)
CTH1C,CTH2C G204.3,G204.2 ○ －
SRVA G070.4 ○ ○
CCW command signals
SRVB G074.4 ○ ○
(serial spindle)
SRVC G204.4 ○ －
- 1508 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
Reference
item
SFRA G070.5 ○ ○
CW command signals
SFRB G074.5 ○ ○ 10.3
(serial spindle)
SFRC G204.5 ○ －
ORCMA G070.6 ○ ○
Orientation command 10.3
ORCMB G074.6 ○ ○
signals (serial spindle) 10.14
ORCMC G204.6 ○ －
MRDYA G070.7 ○ ○
Machine ready signals
MRDYB G074.7 ○ ○
(serial spindle)
MRDYC G204.7 ○ －
ARSTA G071.0 ○ ○
Alarm reset signals (serial
ARSTB G075.0 ○ ○
spindle)
ARSTC G205.0 ○ －
*ESPA G071.1 ○ ○
Emergency stop signals
*ESPB G075.1 ○ ○
(serial spindle)
*ESPC G205.1 ○ －
SPSLA G071.2 ○ ○
Spindle selection signals
SPSLB G075.2 ○ ○
(serial spindle)
SPSLC G205.2 ○ －
Power line switch MCFNA G071.3 ○ ○
completion signals (serial MCFNB G075.3 ○ ○
spindle) MCFNC G205.3 ○ －
SOCNA G071.4 ○ ○
Soft start/stop cancel
SOCNB G075.4 ○ ○
signals (serial spindle)
SOCNC G205.4 ○ －
INTGA G071.5 ○ ○
Speed integral signals
INTGB G075.5 ○ ○
Spindle serial output (serial spindle)
INTGC G205.5 ○ －
RSLA G071.6 ○ ○
Output switch request
RSLB G075.6 ○ ○
RSLC G205.6 ○ － 10.3
RCHA G071.7 ○ ○
Power line status check
RCHB G075.7 ○ ○
RCHC G205.7 ○ －
Orientation stop position INDXA G072.0 ○ ○
change command signals INDXB G076.0 ○ ○
(serial spindle) INDXC G206.0 ○ －
Rotational direction ROTAA G072.1 ○ ○
command signals for ROTAB G076.1 ○ ○
orientation stop position
ROTAC G206.1 ○ －
change (serial spindle)
Shortcut command NRROA G072.2 ○ ○
signals for orientation
NRROB G076.2 ○ ○
stop position change
(serial spindle) NRROC G206.2 ○ －
Differential speed mode DEFMDA G072.3 ○ ○
command signals (serial DEFMDB G076.3 ○ ○
spindle) DEFMDC G206.3 ○ －
OVRA G072.4 ○ ○
Analog override signals
OVRB G076.4 ○ ○
(serial spindle)
OVRC G206.4 ○ －
Incremental command INCMDA G072.5 ○ ○
externally set orientation INCMDB G076.5 ○ ○
signals (serial spindle) INCMDC G206.5 ○ －
- 1509 -
Reference
item
Spindle switch MAIN MFNHGA G072.6 ○ ○
MCC contact status MFNHGB G076.6 ○ ○
signals (serial spindle) MFNHGC G206.6 ○ －
Spindle switch HIGH RCHHGA G072.7 ○ ○
MCC contact status RCHHGB G076.7 ○ ○
signals (serial spindle) RCHHGC G206.7 ○ －
Magnetic sensor MORCMA G073.0 ○ ○
orientation command MORCMB G077.0 ○ ○
signals (serial spindle) MORCMC G207.0 ○ －
Subordinate operation SLVA G073.1 ○ ○
mode command signals SLVB G077.1 ○ ○
(serial spindle) SLVC G207.1 ○ －
Motor power cutoff MPOFA G073.2 ○ ○
command signals (serial MPOFB G077.2 ○ ○
spindle) MPOFC G207.2 ○ －
ALMA F045.0 ○ ○
Alarm signals (serial
ALMB F049.0 ○ ○
spindle)
ALMC F168.0 ○ －
SSTA F045.1 ○ ○
Speed zero signals (serial
SSTB F049.1 ○ ○
spindle)
SSTC F168.1 ○ －
SDTA F045.2 ○ ○
Speed detection signals
SDTB F049.2 ○ ○
(serial spindle)
SDTC F168.2 ○ －
SARA F045.3 ○ ○
Spindle speed arrival
SARB F049.3 ○ ○
signal (serial spindle)
SARC F168.3 ○ －
Spindle serial output 10.3
LDT1A F045.4 ○ ○
Load detection signals 1
LDT1B F049.4 ○ ○
(serial spindle)
LDT1C F168.4 ○ －
LDT2A F045.5 ○ ○
Load detection signals 2
LDT2B F049.5 ○ ○
(serial spindle)
LDT2C F168.5 ○ －
TLMA F045.6 ○ ○
Torque limit signals
TLMB F049.6 ○ ○
(serial spindle)
TLMC F168.6 ○ －
ORARA F045.7 ○ ○
Orientation completion
ORARB F049.7 ○ ○
ORARC F168.7 ○ －
CHPA F046.0 ○ ○
Power line switch signals
CHPB F050.0 ○ ○
(serial spindle)
CHPC F169.0 ○ －
CFINA F046.1 ○ ○
Spindle switch completion
CFINB F050.1 ○ ○
CFINC F169.1 ○ －
RCHPA F046.2 ○ ○
Output switch signals
RCHPB F050.2 ○ ○
(serial spindle)
RCHPC F169.2 ○ －
RCFNA F046.3 ○ ○
Output switch completion
RCFNB F050.3 ○ ○
RCFNC F169.3 ○ －
Subordinate operation SLVSA F046.4 ○ ○
status signals (serial SLVSB F050.4 ○ ○
spindle) SLVSC F169.4 ○ －
- 1510 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
Reference
item
Position coder orientation PORA2A F046.5 ○ ○
proximity signal (serial PORA2B F050.5 ○ ○
spindle) PORA2C F169.5 ○ －
Magnetic sensor MORA1A F046.6 ○ ○
orientation completion MORA1B F050.6 ○ ○
signals (serial spindle) MORA1C F169.6 ○ －
Magnetic sensor MORA2A F046.7 ○ ○
orientation proximity MORA2B F050.7 ○ ○
signals (serial spindle) MORA2C F169.7 ○ －
Position coder PC1DEA F047.0 ○ ○
one-rotation signal PC1DEB F051.0 ○ ○
Spindle serial output detection status signals 10.3
PC1DEC F170.0 ○ －
(serial spindle)
Incremental orientation INCSTA F047.1 ○ ○
mode signals (serial INCSTB F051.1 ○ ○
spindle) INCSTC F170.1 ○ －
All-spindle operation
SRSRDY F034.7 ○ ○
ready signal
1st serial spindle ready
SRSP1R F034.6 ○ ○
signals
2nd serial spindle ready
SRSP2R F034.5 ○ ○
signals
Spindle warning detail SPWRN1~
F264.0~F265.0 ○ ○
signals 1 to 9 SPWRN9
Spindle stop signal *SSTP G029.6 ○ ○
Spindle orientation signal SOR G029.5 ○ ○
Spindle speed override
SOV0~SOV7 G030 ○ ○
signals
Spindle speed arrival
SAR G029.4 ○ ○
signal
Spindle speed control 10.6
Spindle enable signal ENB F001.4 ○ ○
Gear selection signals GR1O,GR2O,
F034.0~F034.2 － ○
(output) GR3O
Gear selection signals GR1 G028.1 ○ ○
(input) GR2 G028.2 ○ ○
S 12-bit code signals R01O~R12O F036.0~F037.3 ○ ○
Spindle speed Spindle fluctuation
SPAL F035.0 ○ ○ 10.18
fluctuation detection detection alarm signal
Spindle synchronous
SPSYC G038.2 ○ ○
control signal
Spindle synchronous SPSYC1 G288.0 ○ ○
control signal
SPSYC2 G288.1 ○ ○
(for each spindle)
Spindle phase
synchronous control SPPHS G038.3 ○ ○
Spindle synchronous
signal 10.14
control
Spindle phase SPPHS1 G289.0 ○ ○
synchronous control
signal SPPHS2 G289.1 ○ ○
(for each spindle)
Spindle phase
synchronous control FSPSY F044.2 ○ ○
signal
- 1511 -
Reference
item
Spindle phase FSPSY1 F288.0 ○ ○
synchronous control
FSPSY2 F288.1 ○ ○
Spindle synchronous
speed control completion FSPPH F044.3 ○ ○
signal
Spindle synchronous FSPPH1 F289.0 ○ ○
speed control completion
FSPPH2 F289.1 ○ ○
Spindle synchronous
Phase error monitor 10.14
control SYCAL F044.4 ○ ○
signal
Phase error monitor SYCAL1 F043.0 ○ ○
signal
SYCAL2 F043.1 ○ ○
(for each spindle)
Spindle synchronous
speed ratio control clamp RSMAX F065.2 ○ ○
signal
Spindle synchronous
SBRT G038.1 ○ ○
speed ratio control signal
Manual tool
compensation tool MTLN00~MTLN15 G068,G069 ○ －
number signal (4 digits)
Manual tool
compensation tool MT8N00~MT8N31 G525~G528 ○ －
Manual tool
Manual tool
compensation command MTLC G067.0 ○ － 11.1.4
compensation
number
Manual tool
compensation completion MTLA F061.5 ○ －
signal
Manual tool
compensation MTLANG F061.4 ○ －
uncompleted signal
HS1A~HS1D G018.0~G018.3 ○ ○
Manual handle feed axis
HS2A~HS2D G018.4~G018.7 ○ ○ 3.2
selection signals
HS3A~HS3D G019.0~G019.3 － ○
Manual handle feed
amount selection signals MP1,MP2 G019.4,G019.5 ○ ○ 3.2, 3.5
(incremental feed signals)
Manual handle feed
Manual handle feed MP21, MP22 G087.0,G087.1
○ ○ 3.2
amount selection signals MP31, MP32 G087.3,G087.4
Maximum manual handle
HNDLF G023.3 ○ ○ 3.2
feedrate switch signal
Manual handle feed
HDN G347.1 ○ ○ 3.2
direction inversion signal
Checking mode signal MMOD G067.2 ○ ○
Handle available signal in
MCHK G067.3 ○ ○
checking mode
Forward movement
Manual handle retrace FWSTP G531.0 ○ ○ 3.5
prohibition signal
Reverse movement
MRVM G531.1 ○ ○
prohibition signal
Reverse movement signal MRVMD F091.0 ○ ○
- 1512 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
Reference
item
Direction change
MNCHG F091.1 ○ ○
prohibition signal
Reverse movement
Manual handle retrace MRVSP F091.2 ○ ○ 3.5
prohibition signal
Check mode confirmation
MMMOD F091.3 ○ ○
signal
HS1IA~HS1ID G041.0~G041.3 ○ ○
Manual handle Manual handle interrupt
HS2IA~HS2ID G041.4~G041.7 ○ ○ 3.3
interrupt axis selection signals
HS3IA~HS3ID G042.0~G042.3 ○ ○
Manual reference position
ZRN G043.7 ○ ○
return selection signal
return selection check MREF F004.5 ○ ○
signal
Manual reference
Reference position return G196.0~G196.4 ○ ○ 4.1
position return *DEC1~*DEC5
deceleration signals X009.0~X009.4 ○ ○
Reference position return
ZP1~ZP5 F094.0~F094.4 ○ ○
end signals
Reference position
ZRF1~ZRF5 F120.0~F120.4 ○ ○
establishment signals
Feed axis and direction +J1~+J5 G100.0~G100.4 ○ ○
selection signals -J1~-J5 G102.0~G102.4 ○ ○
Jog feed/incremental Manual feedrate override
*JV0~*JV15 G010,G011 ○ ○ 3.1
feed signals
Manual rapid traverse
RT G019.7 ○ ○
selection signal
CNC ready signal MA F001.7 ○ ○
CNC ready signal 2.2
Servo ready signal SA F000.6 ○ ○
Rapid traversing signal RPDO F002.1 ○ ○ 2.7,7.1.1
Status output signal
Cutting feed signal CUT F002.6 ○ ○ 2.7
Single block signal SBK G046.1 ○ ○
Single block 5.3.3
Single block check signal MSBK F004.3 ○ ○
SKIPP G006.6 ○ ○
Skip function Skip signal 15.3
SKIP X004.7 ○ ○
Stored stroke limit 1 +EXL1~+EXL5 G104.0~G104.4 ○ ○
switching signals in axis
direction -EXL1~-EXL5 G105.0~G105.4 ○ ○
Stored stroke limit 1

Stored stroke check EXLM G007.6 ○ ○ 2.3.2
change signal
Stroke limit 1 release
RLSOT G007.7 ○ ○
signal
+OT1~+OT5 F124.0~F124.4 ○ ○
Overtravel alarm signals
-OT1~-OT5 F126.0~F126.4 ○ ○
Stored stroke check 2, Stroke limit 3 release
RLSOT3 G007.4 ○ ○ 2.3.3
3 signal
Stroke limit external Stroke limit external +LM1~+LM5 G110.0~G110.4 ○ ○
2.3.5
setting setting signals -LM1~-LM5 G112.0~G112.4 ○ ○
Controlled axis detach
DTCH1~DTCH5 G124.0~G124.4 ○ ○
signals
Controlled axis detach 1.2.5
Controlled axis detach
MDTCH1~ DTCH5 F110.0~F110.4 ○ ○
status signals
- 1513 -
Reference
item
Absolute position detector
battery voltage zero alarm PBATZ F172.6 ○ ○
Absolute position signal
1.4.3
detection Absolute position detector
battery voltage low alarm PBATL F172.7 ○ ○
signal
Software operator’s panel
MD1O F073.0 ○ ○
signal (MD1)
MD2O F073.1 ○ ○
signal (MD2)
MD4O F073.2 ○ ○
signal (MD4)
ZRNO F073.4 ○ ○
signal (ZRN)
Software operator’s panel F081.0,F081.2,
+J1O~+J4O ○ ○
signal (+J1~+J4) F081.4,F081.6
-J1O~-J4O ○ ○
signal (-J1~-J4) F081.5,F081.7
RTO F077.6 ○ ○
signal (RT)
HS1AO F077.0 ○ ○
signal (HS1A)
HS1BO F077.1 ○ ○
signal (HS1B)
HS1CO F077.2 ○ ○
signal (HS1C)
HS1DO F077.3 ○ ○
signal (HS1D)
MP1O F076.0 ○ ○
signal (MP1)
Software operator's
Software operator’s panel 13.1.2
panel MP2O F076.1 ○ ○
signal (MP2)
*JV0O~*JV15O F079,F080 ○ ○
signal (*JV0~*JV15)
*FV0O~*FV7O F078 ○ ○
signal (*FV0~*FV7)
ROV1O F076.4 ○ ○
signal (ROV1)
ROV2O F076.5 ○ ○
signal (ROV2)
BDTO F075.2 ○ ○
signal (BDT)
SBKO F075.3 ○ ○
signal (SBK)
MLKO F075.4 ○ ○
signal (MLK)
DRNO F075.5 ○ ○
signal (DRN)
KEYO F075.6 ○ ○
signal (KEY1~KEY4)
SPO F075.7 ○ ○
signal (*SP)
general-purpose switch OUT0~OUT15 F072,F074 ○ ○
signals
- 1514 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
Reference
item
2nd reference position
ZP21~ZP25 F096.0~F096.4 ○ ○
2nd reference position return completion signals
return/3rd, 4th 3rd reference position
ZP31~ZP35 F098.0~F098.4 ○ ○ 4.4
reference position return completion signals
return 4th reference position
ZP41~ZP45 F100.0~F100.4 ○ ○
return completion signals
SKIPP G006.6 ○ ○
Multi-step skip SKIP X004.7 ○ ○
Skip signal 15.3.3
function SKIP2~SKIP6, X004.2~X004.6
○ ○
SKIP7,SKIP8 X004.0,X004.1
Touch panel check
Touch panel check signal TPPRS F006.0 ○ ○ 13.1.6
signal
Canned cycle /
multiple repetitive Chamfering signal *CDZ G053.7 ○ － 12.8
canned cycle
Chuck / tail stock Tail stock barrier
*TSB G060.7 ○ － 2.3.6
barrier selection signal
Superimposed control
OVLS1~OVLS5 G190.0~G190.4 ○ ○
axis selection signals
Superimposed control Superimposed control 8.6
master axis confirmation OVMO1~OVMO5 F344.0~F344.4 ○ ○
signals
Superimposed control
slave axis confirmation OVSO1~OVSO5 F345.0~F345.4 ○ ○
signals
Superimposed control 8.6
Synchronous/composite/s
uperimposed control SYN1O~SYN5O F118.0~F118.4 ○ ○
under way signals
Torque limit reach signals
Reference position
for reference position CLRCH1~CLRCH
setting with F180.0~F180.4 ○ ○ 4.5
setting with mechanical 5
mechanical stopper
stopper
DNC operation select
DNCI G043.5 ○ ○ 5.11
signal
DNC operation
DNC operation selection
MRMT F003.4 ○ ○ 5.11, 5.13
confirm signal
Retract signal RTRCT G066.4 ○ ○
1.9, 6.13
Electronic gear box Retract completion signal RTRCTF F065.4 ○ ○
EGB mode signal SYNMOD F065.6 ○ ○ 1.9
Composite control axis
MIX1~MIX5 G128.0~G128.4 ○ ○
change selection signals
Composite axis
MIXO1~MIXO5 F343.0~F343.4 ○ ○
confirmation signals
SYNC1~SYNC5 G138.0~G138.4 ○ ○
selection signals
Synchronous master axis
SYCM1~SYCM5 F341.0~F341.4 ○ ○
Synchronous and confirmation signals
8.5
composite control Synchronous slave axis
SYCS1~SYCS5 F342.0~F342.4 ○ ○
Synchronous/composite/s
uperimposed control SYN1O~SYN5O F118.0~F118.4 ○ ○
under way signals
Parking signals PK1~PK5 G122.0~G122.4 ○ ○
Parking axis confirmation
SMPK1~SMPK5 F346.0~F346.4 ○ ○
signals
- 1515 -
Reference
item
Dry run signal DRN G046.7 ○ ○
Dry run 5.3.2
Dry run check signal MDRN F002.7 ○ ○
Torque limit reached
Torque limit skip TRQL1~TRQL5 F114.0~F114.4 ○ ○ 15.3.4
signals
Threading Threading signal THRD F002.3 ○ ○ 6.5
Rapid traverse override
ROV1,ROV2 G014.0,G014.1 ○ ○ 7.1.7.1
signals
1% step rapid traverse
HROV G096.7 ○ ○
override selection signals 7.1.7.1
Rapid traverse 1% rapid traverse 7.1.9
*HROV0~*HROV6 G096.0~G096.6 ○ ○
override override signals
0.1% step rapid traverse
FHROV G353.7 ○ ○
override selection signals
7.1.7.1
0.1% rapid traverse G352.0~G352.7
*FHRO0~*FHRO9 ○ ○
override signals G353.0~G353.1
Rapid traverse block Rapid traverse block
ROVLP G053.5 ○ ○ 7.2.1.2
overlap overlap disable signal
- 1516 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
Reference
item
Control axis selection
signals (PMC axis EAX1~EAX5 G136.0~G136.4 ○ ○
control)
EC0A~EC6A G143.0~G143.6 ○ ○
Axis control command
EC0B~EC6B G155.0~G155.6 ○ ○
signals (for group 1 to 4)
EC0C~EC6C G167.0~G167.6 ○ ○
(PMC axis control)
EC0D~EC6D G179.0~G179.6 ○ ○
EIF0A~EIF15A G144~G145 ○ ○
Axis control feedrate
EIF0B~EIF15B G156~G157 ○ ○
EIF0C~EIF15C G168~G169 ○ ○
(PMC axis control)
EIF0D~EIF15D G180~G181 ○ ○
EBUFA G142.7 ○ ○
Axis control command
EBUFB G154.7 ○ ○
read signals (for group 1
EBUFC G166.7 ○ ○
to 4) (PMC axis control)
EBUFD G178.7 ○ ○
EID0A~EID31A G146~G149 ○ ○
Axis control data signals
EID0B~EID31B G158~G161 ○ ○
(for group 1 to 4) (PMC
EID0C~EID31C G170~G173 ○ ○
axis control)
EID0D~EID31D G182~G185 ○ ○
Axis control command EBSYA F130.7 ○ ○
read completion signals EBSYB F133.7 ○ ○
(for group 1 to 4) (PMC EBSYC F136.7 ○ ○
axis control) EBSYD F139.7 ○ ○
ECLRA G142.6 ○ ○
PMC axis Reset signals (for group 1 ECLRB G154.6 ○ ○
control/PMC axis to 4) (PMC axis control) ECLRC G166.6 ○ ○ 16.1
speed control function ECLRD G178.6 ○ ○
ESTPA G142.5 ○ ○
Axis control temporary
ESTPB G154.5 ○ ○
stop signals (for group 1
ESTPC G166.5 ○ ○
ESTPD G178.5 ○ ○
ESBKA G142.3 ○ ○
Block stop signals (for
ESBKB G154.3 ○ ○
group 1 to 4) (PMC axis
ESBKC G166.3 ○ ○
control)
ESBKD G178.3 ○ ○
EMSBKA G143.7 ○ ○
Block stop disable signals
EMSBKB G155.7 ○ ○
EMSBKC G167.7 ○ ○
axis control)
EMSBKD G179.7 ○ ○
EM11A~EM48A F132,F142 ○ ○
EM11B~EM48B F135,F145 ○ ○
EM11C~EM48C F138,F148 ○ ○
(PMC axis control)
EM11D~EM48D F141,F151 ○ ○
EMFA F131.0 ○ ○
Auxiliary function strobe
EMFB F134.0 ○ ○
EMFC F137.0 ○ ○
(PMC axis control)
EMFD F140.0 ○ ○
EMF2A F131.2 ○ ○
Auxiliary function 2nd
EMF2B F134.2 ○ ○
strobe signals (for group
EMF2C F137.2 ○ ○
1 to 4) (PMC axis control)
EMF2D F140.2 ○ ○
- 1517 -
Reference
item
EMF3A F131.3 ○ ○
Auxiliary function 3rd
EMF3B F134.3 ○ ○
strobe signals (for group
○ ○
1 to 4) (PMC axis control) EMF3C F137.3
EMF3D F140.3 ○ ○
Auxiliary function EFINA G142.0 ○ ○
completion signal (for EFINB G154.0 ○ ○
group 1 to 4) (PMC axis EFINC G166.0 ○ ○
control) EFIND G178.0 ○ ○
ESOFA G142.4 ○ ○
Servo off signals (for
ESOFB G154.4 ○ ○
ESOFC G166.4 ○ ○
control)
ESOFD G178.4 ○ ○
EMBUFA G142.2 ○ ○
Buffering disable signals
EMBUFB G154.2 ○ ○
EMBUFC G166.2 ○ ○
axis control)
EMBUFD G178.2 ○ ○
Controlled axis selection
status signals(PMC axis *EAXSL F129.7 ○ ○
control)
EINPA F130.0 ○ ○
In-position signals (for
EINPB F133.0 ○ ○
EINPC F136.0 ○ ○
control)
EINPD F139.0 ○ ○
ECKZA F130.1 ○ ○
Following zero checking
PMC axis ECKZB F133.1 ○ ○
control/PMC axis ECKZC F136.1 ○ ○ 16.1
(PMC axis control)
speed control function ECKZD F139.1 ○ ○
EIALA F130.2 ○ ○
Alarm signal (for group 1 EIALB F133.2 ○ ○
to 4) (PMC axis control) EIALC F136.2 ○ ○
EIALD F139.2 ○ ○
EGENA F130.4 ○ ○
Axis moving signals (for
EGENB F133.4 ○ ○
EGENC F136.4 ○ ○
control)
EGEND F139.4 ○ ○
Auxiliary function EDENA F130.3 ○ ○
executing signals (for EDENB F133.3 ○ ○
group 1 to 4) (PMC axis EDENC F136.3 ○ ○
control) EDEND F139.3 ○ ○
Negative-direction EOTNA F130.6 ○ ○
overtravel signals (for EOTNB F133.6 ○ ○
group 1 to 4) (PMC axis EOTNC F136.6 ○ ○
control) EOTND F139.6 ○ ○
Positive-direction EOTPA F130.5 ○ ○
overtravel signals (for EOTPB F133.5 ○ ○
group 1 to 4) (PMC axis EOTPC F136.5 ○ ○
control) EOTPD F139.5 ○ ○
*EFOV0~*EFOV7G151 ○ ○
Feedrate override signals
G163
*EFOV0B~*EFOV7B ○ ○
G175
*EFOV0C~*EFOV7C ○ ○
axis control)
*EFOV0D~*EFOV7D G187 ○ ○
- 1518 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
Reference
item
EOVC G150.5 ○ ○
Override cancel signal EOVCB G162.5 ○ ○
EOVCC G174.5 ○ ○
axis control)
EOVCD G186.5 ○ ○
Rapid traverse override
signals (PMC axis EROV1,EROV2 G150.0,G150.1 ○ ○
control)
Dry run signal (PMC axis
EDRN G150.7 ○ ○
control)
Manual rapid traverse
selection signal (PMC ERT G150.6 ○ ○
axis control)
Override 0% signal (PMC
EOV0 F129.5 ○ ○
axis control)
Skip signal (PMC axis
ESKIP X004.6 ○ ○
control)
PMC axis
Distribution completion
control/PMC axis EADEN1~EADEN 16.1
signals (PMC axis F112.0~F112.4 ○ ○
speed control function 5
control)
EABUFA F131.1 ○ ○
Buffer full signals (for
EABUFB F134.1 ○ ○
EABUFC F137.1 ○ ○
control)
EABUFD F140.1 ○ ○
Controlling signals (PMC
EACNT1~EACNT5 F182.0~F182.4 ○ ○
axis control)
ELCKZA G142.1 ○ ○
Accumulated zero check
ELCKZB G154.1 ○ ○
signal (for group 1 to 4)
ELCKZC G166.1 ○ ○
(PMC axis control)
ELCKZD G178.1 ○ ○
Torque control mode
TRQM1~TRQM8 F190 ○ ○
signal (PMC axis control)
A/B phase detector
disconnection alarm
NDCAL1~NDCAL8 G202 ○ ○
ignore signal (PMC axis
control)
Spindle motor speed SIND G033.7 ○ ○
command selection
SIND2 G035.7 ○ ○
signals
Spindle motor speed R01I~R12I G032.0~G033.3 ○ ○
Spindle output control
command signals R01I2~R12I2 G034.0~G035.3 ○ ○ 10.7
by the PMC
Spindle motor command SSIN G033.6 ○ ○
polarity selection signals SSIN2 G035.6 ○ ○
Spindle motor command SGN G033.5 ○ ○
polarity command signals SGN2 G035.5 ○ ○
G008.4 ○ ○
Emergency stop Emergency stop signals *ESP 2.1
X008.4 ○ ○
All-axis VRDY off alarm
IGNVRY G066.0 ○ ○
VRDY off alarm ignore ignore signal
2.8
signal Each-axis VRDY off
IGVRY1~IGVRY5 G192.0~G192.4 ○ ○
alarm ignore signal
Follow-up Follow-up signal *FLWU G007.5 ○ ○ 1.2.8
Program restart signal SRN G006.0 ○ ○
Program restart Program restart under 5.7
SRNMV F002.4 ○ ○
way signal
- 1519 -
Reference
item
Position switch Position switch signals PSW01~PSW16 F070,F071 ○ ○ 1.2.10
M00~M31 F010~F013 ○ ○
signals
MF F007.0 ○ ○
signals
DM00 F009.7 ○ ○
DM01 F009.6 ○ ○
Decode M signals
DM02 F009.5 ○ ○
DM30 F009.4 ○ ○
Spindle function code
S00~S31 F022~F025 ○ ○
signals
Auxiliary function/2nd Spindle function strobe
SF F007.2 ○ ○ 9.1
auxiliary function signal
Tool function code signals T00~T31 F026~F029 ○ ○
Tool function strobe
TF F007.3 ○ ○
signal
2nd auxiliary function
B00~B31 F030~F033 ○ ○
code signals
BF F007.7 ○ ○
strobe signal
End signal FIN G004.3 ○ ○
Distribution completion
DEN F001.3 ○ ○
signals
Auxiliary function lock
AFL G005.6 ○ ○
signal
Auxiliary function lock 9.2
Auxiliary function lock
MAFL F004.4 ○ ○
check signal
Polygon synchronization
Polygon turning PSYN F063.7 ○ ○ 6.9
under way signal
Input signals for P-code
EUI00~EUI15 G082,G083 ○ ○
macro
Macro executor 12.15
Output signals for P-code
EUO00~EUO15 F084,F085 ○ ○
macro
All-axis machine lock
MLK G044.1 ○ ○
signal
Each-axis machine lock
Machine lock MLK1~MLK5 G108.0~G108.4 ○ ○ 5.3.1
signal
All-axis machine lock
MMLK F004.1 ○ ○
check signal
No-wait signal NOWT G063.1 ● －
Waiting M code No-wait signal NMWT G063.7 ● － 8.2
Waiting signal WATO F063.6 ● －
(For the disturbance TDFTR1~TDFLR8 F299.0~F299.7 ○ ○
level)
Trouble diagnosis 18.3
(For the thermal TDSML1~TDSML8 F298.0~F298.7 ○ ○
simulation data)
Manual absolute signal *ABSM G006.2 ○ ○
Manual absolute
Manual absolute check 5.4
on/off MABSM F004.2 ○ ○
signal
- 1520 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
Reference
item
SWS1 G027.0 ○ ○
Spindle selection signals
SWS2 G027.1 ○ ○
Individual spindle stop *SSTP1 G027.3 ○ ○
signals *SSTP2 G027.4 ○ ○
Gear selection signals
GR21,GR22 G029.0,G029.1 ○ ○
(input)
2nd position coder
PC2SLC G028.7 ○ ○
selection signal
3rd position coder
PC3SLC G026.0 ○ ○
selection signal
4th position coder
Multi-spindle control PC4SLC G026.1 ○ ○ 10.12
selection signal
2nd spindle speed
SOV20 to SOV27 G376 ○ ○
override signals
Spindle command path
SPSP G536.7 ○ ○
specification signal
Spindle enable signal ENB2 F038.2 ○ ○
R01O2~R12O2 F200.0~F201.3 ○ ○
S 12-bit code signals R01O3~R12O3 F204.0~F205.3 ○ ○
R01O4~R12O4 F270.0~F271.3 ○ ○
Multi-spindle address P
MSP00~MSP15 F160,F161 ○ ○
signals
Mirror image signals MI1~MI5 G106.0~G106.4 ○ ○
Mirror image Mirror image check 1.2.7
MMI1~MMI5 F108.0~F108.4 ○ ○
signals
Memory protection Memory protection KEY1~KEY4 G046.3~G046.6 ○ ○ 13.2.1
key signals KEYP G046.0 ○ ○ 13.2.2
Mode selection signals MD1,MD2,MD4 G043.0~G0432 ○ ○
Manual data input
MMDI F003.3 ○ ○
selection check signal
Automatic operation
MMEM F003.5 ○ ○
Memory edit selection
MEDT F003.6 ○ ○
Mode selection check signal 2.6
Manual handle feed
MH F003.1 ○ ○
Incremental feed
MINC F003.0 ○ ○
Jog feed selection check
MJ F003.2 ○ ○
signal
Reverse execution signal RVS G007.0 － ○
Retrace Reverse execution 5.8
RVSL F082.2 － ○
in-progress signal
Rigid tapping signal RGTAP G061.0 ○ ○
Spindle rotation direction RGSPP F065.0 ○ ○
signals RGSPM F065.1 ○ ○
Rigid tapping Rigid tapping-in-progress 10.13
RTAP F076.3 ○ ○
signal
Rigid tapping spindle RGTSP1~RGTSP
G061.4~G061.5 ○ －
selection signals 2
Rigid tapping retraction
RTNT G062.6 － ○
Retraction for Rigid start signal
5.10
tapping Rigid tapping retraction
RTPT F066.1 － ○
completion signal
- 1521 -
Reference
item
External reset signal ERS G008.7 ○ ○
MDI reset confirmation
MDIRST F006.1 ○ ○
signal
Reset and rewind 5.2
Reset & rewind signal RRW G008.6 ○ ○
Resetting signal RST F001.1 ○ ○
Rewinding signal RWD F000.0 ○ ○
Interrupt type custom Interrupt signal for custom
UINT G053.3 ○ ○ 12.6.2
macro macro
Macro call start signal MCST1~MCST16 G512,G513 ○ ○
Mode change completion
MCFIN G514.0 ○ ○
signal
Macro call executing
MCEXE F512.0 ○ ○
signal
Mode change request
MCRQ F512.1 ○ ○
signal
One touch macro call MD1R F513.0 ○ ○ 16.6
MD2R F513.1 ○ ○
Mode notification signal MD4R F513.2 ○ ○
DNCIR F513.5 ○ ○
ZRNR F513.7 ○ ○
Abnormal end signal MCSP F512.2 ○ ○
Call program confirmation
MCEX1~MCEX16 F514,F515 ○ ○
signal
- 1522 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
A.2.2 List of Signals (In Order of Symbols)

○ : Available
－ : Unavailable
Reference
Group Symbol Signal name Address T M
item
*ABSM Manual absolute signal G006.2 ○ ○ 5.4
*+ED1~*+ED5 External deceleration signals 1 G118.0~G118.4 ○ ○ 7.1.9
*+L1~*+L5 Overtravel signals G114.0~G114.4 ○ ○ 2.3.1
*-ED1~*-ED5 External deceleration signals 1 G120.0~G120.4 ○ ○ 7.1.9
*-L1~*-L5 Overtravel signals G116.0~G116.4 ○ ○ 2.3.1
*BSL Block start interlock signal G008.3 ○ ○ 2.5
*BECLP B axis clamp completion signal G038.7 － ○ 13.12
B axis unclamp completion
*BEUCP G038.6 － ○ 13.12
signal
*CDZ Chamfering signal G053.7 ○ － 12.8
Cutting block start interlock
*CSL G008.1 ○ ○ 2.5
signal
Reference position return X009.0~X009.4 ○ ○
*DEC1~*DEC5 4.1
deceleration signals G196.0~G196.4 ○ ○
Controlled axis selection status
*EAXSL F129.7 ○ ○ 16.1
signals (PMC axis control)
X008.4 ○ ○
*ESP Emergency stop signals 2.1
G008.4 ○ ○
*ESPA G071.1 ○ ○
Emergency stop signals (serial
*ESPB G075.1 ○ ○ 10.3
* spindle)
*ESPC G205.1 ○ －
0.1% rapid traverse override G352.0~G352.7
*FHRO0~*FHRV9 ○ ○ 7.1.7.1
signals G353.0~G353.1
*FLWU Follow-up signal G007.5 ○ ○ 1.2.8
*FV0~*FV7 Feedrate override signals G012 ○ ○ 7.1.7.2
*EFOV0~*EFOV7 G151 ○ ○
Feedrate override signals (for
*EFOV0B~*EFOV7B G163 ○ ○
group 1 to 4) (PMC axis 16.1
*EFOV0C~*EFOV7C G175 ○ ○
control)
*EFOV0D~*EFOV7D G187 ○ ○
*FV0O~*FV7O F078 ○ ○ 13.1.2
signal (*FV0~*FV7)
1% rapid traverse override
*HROV0~*HROV6 G096.0~G096.6 ○ ○ 7.1.7.1, 7.1.9
signals
*IT Interlock signal for all axes G008.0 ○ ○ 2.5
*IT1~*It5 Interlock signal for each axis G130.0~G130.4 ○ ○ 2.5
Manual feedrate override
*JV0~*JV15 G010,G011 ○ ○ 3.1
signals
*JV0O~*JV15O F079,F080 ○ ○ 13.1.2
signal (*JV0~*JV15)
*PLSST Polygon spindle stop signal G038.0 ○ ○ 6.9.2
*SCPFA Spindle clamp completion G028.5 ○ ○
10.10
*SCPFB signal G401.1 ○ ○
*SP Feed hold signal G008.5 ○ ○ 5.1
*SSTP Spindle stop signal G029.6 ○ ○ 10.6
- 1523 -
Reference
item
*SSTP1 G027.3 ○ ○
Individual spindle stop signals 10.12
*SSTP2 G027.4 ○ ○
*SUCPFA Spindle unclamp completion G028.4 ○ ○
10.10
* *SUCPFB signal G400.1 ○ ○
*TLV0~*TLV9 Tool life count override signals G049.0~G050.1 ○ ○ 11.4
Tail stock barrier selection
*TSB G060.7 ○ － 2.3.6
signal
Stored stroke limit 1 switching
+EXL1~+EXL5 G104.0~G104.4 ○ ○ 2.3.2
signals in axis direction
Feed axis and direction
+J1~+J5 G100.0~G100.4 ○ ○ 3.1
selection signals
+J1O~+J4O ○ ○ 13.1.2
signal (+J1~+J4) F081.4,F081.6
+ Stroke limit external setting
+LM1~+LM5 G110.0~G110.4 ○ ○ 2.3.5
signals
X004.2,X004.4
+MIT1,+MIT2 Tool offset write signals ○ － 15.4.2
G132.0,G132.1
Interlock signal for each axis
+MIT1~+MIT5 G132.0~G132.4 － ○ 2.5
direction
+OT1~+OT5 Overtravel alarm signals F124.0~F124.4 ○ ○ 2.3.2
Stored stroke limit 1 switching
-EXL1~-EXL5 G105.0~G105.4 ○ ○ 2.3.2
signals in axis direction
-J1~-J5 G102.0~G102.4 ○ ○ 3.1
selection signals
-J1O~-J4O ○ ○ 13.1.2
signal (-J1~-J4) F081.5,F081.7
-Jg,-Ja G086.1,G086.3 ○ ○ 3.4
selection signals
-
Stroke limit external setting
-LM1~-LM5 G112.0~G112.4 ○ ○ 2.3.5
signals
X004.3,X004.5
-MIT1,-MIT2 Tool offset write signals ○ － 15.4.2
G134.0,G134.1
Interlock signal for each axis
-MIT1~-MIT5 G134.0~G134.4 － ○ 2.5
direction
-OT1~-OT5 Overtravel alarm signals F126.0~F126.4 ○ ○ 2.3.2
Unexpected disturbance torque

ABDT1~ABDT5 F184.0~F184.4 ○ ○ 2.9
detection signal
Servo axis unexpected
ABTQSV disturbance torque detection F090.0 ○ ○ 2.9
signal
1st spindle unexpected
ABTSP1 disturbance torque detection F090.1 ○ ○ 2.9
signal
A 2nd spindle unexpected
ABTSP2 disturbance torque detection F090.2 ○ ○ 2.9
signal
AFL Auxiliary function lock signal G005.6 ○ ○ 9.2
AICC AI contour control mode signal F062.0 ○ ○ 7.1.11
AL Alarm signal F001.0 ○ ○ 2.4
ALMA F045.0 ○ ○
ALMB Alarm signals (serial spindle) F049.0 ○ ○ 10.3
ALMC F168.0 ○ －
- 1524 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
Reference
item
AR00~AR15 F040,F041 ○ ○
Actual spindle speed signals 10.9
AR002~AR152 F202,F203 ○ ○
ARSTA G071.0 ○ ○
Alarm reset signals (serial
A ARSTB G075.0 ○ ○ 10.3
spindle)
ARSTC G205.0 ○ －
Automatic data backup
ATBK F520.0 ○ ○
executing signal
2nd auxiliary function code
B00~B31 F030~F033 ○ ○ 9.1
signals
BAL Battery alarm signal F001.2 ○ ○ 2.4
BCLP B axis clamp signal F061.1 － ○ 13.12
BDT1 G044.0 ○ ○
Optional block skip signals 5.5
BDT2~BDT9 G045 ○ ○
B Software operator’s panel
BDTO F075.2 ○ ○ 13.1.2
signal (BDT)
2nd auxiliary function strobe
BF F007.7 ○ ○ 9.1
signal
BFIN G005.7 ○ ○ 9.4
completion signal
BUCLP B axis unclamp signal F061.0 － ○ 13.12
C2SEND G295.6 ○ ○ 13.1.9
request signal
Dual display forcible end status
C2SENO F295.6 ○ ○ 13.1.9
signal
CFINA F046.1 ○ ○
Spindle switch completion
CFINB F050.1 ○ ○
CFINC F169.1 ○ －
10.3
CHPA F046.0 ○ ○
Power line switch signals
CHPB F050.0 ○ ○
(serial spindle)
CHPC F169.0 ○ －
Torque limit reach signals for
CLRCH1~CLRCH
reference position setting with F180.0~F180.4 ○ ○ 4.5
5
mechanical stopper
CNCKY Key control selection signal G295.7 ○ ○ 13.1.9
Key control selection status
CNCKYO F295.7 ○ ○ 13.1.9
signal
C Cs contour control change
CON G027.7 ○ ○ 10.11
signal
COSP F064.5 ● － 8.8
confirmation signal
COSP1 Path spindle command F063.3 ● －
8.8
COSP2 confirmation signal F063.4 ● －
Cs axis coordinate
CSFI1 G274.4 ○ ○
establishment request signals
Cs axis coordinate
CSFO1 F274.4 ○ ○ 10.11.3
establishment alarm signals
Cs axis origin established state
CSPENA F048.4 ○ ○
signals
CSS Constant surface speed signal F002.2 ○ ○ 10.8
CTH1A, CTH2A G070.3, G070.2 ○ ○
Clutch/gear signals (serial
CTH1B, CTH2B G074.3, G074.2 ○ ○ 10.3
spindle)
CTH1C, CTH2C G204.3, G204.2 ○ －
CUT Cutting feed signal F002.6 ○ ○ 2.7
- 1525 -
Reference
item
DEFMDA Differential speed mode G072.3 ○ ○
DEFMDB command signals (serial G076.3 ○ ○ 10.3
DEFMDC spindle) G206.3 ○ －
DEN Distribution completion signals F001.3 ○ ○ 9.1
DM00 F009.7 ○ ○
DM01 F009.6 ○ ○
Decode M signals 9.1
DM02 F009.5 ○ ○
D DM30 F009.4 ○ ○
DMMC Direct operation select signal G042.7 ○ ○ 5.13
DNCI DNC operation select signal G043.5 ○ ○ 5.11
DNCIR Mode notification signal F513.5 ○ ○ 16.6
DRN Dry run signal G046.7 ○ ○ 5.3.2
DRNO F075.5 ○ ○ 13.1.2
signal (DRN)
DTCH1~DTCH5 Controlled axis detach signals G124.0~G124.4 ○ ○ 1.2.5
Address signals for external
EA6 to EA0 G002.6~G002.0 ○ ○ 16.2
data input
EABUFA F131.1 ○ ○
EABUFB Buffer full signals (for group 1 F134.1 ○ ○
16.1
EABUFC to 4) (PMC axis control) F137.1 ○ ○
EABUFD F140.1 ○ ○
EACNT1~EACNT Controlling signals(PMC axis
F182.0~F182.4 ○ ○ 16.1
5 control)
EADEN1~EADEN Distribution completion
F112.0~F112.4 ○ ○ 16.1
5 signals(PMC axis control)
Control axis selection
EAX1~EAX5 G136.0~G136.4 ○ ○ 16.1
signals(PMC axis control)
EBSYA F130.7 ○ ○
Axis control command read
EBSYB F133.7 ○ ○
completion signals (for group 1 16.1
EBSYC F136.7 ○ ○
EBSYD F139.7 ○ ○
EBUFA G142.7 ○ ○
Axis control command read
EBUFB G154.7 ○ ○
signals (for group 1 to 4) (PMC 16.1
EBUFC G166.7 ○ ○
E axis control)
EBUFD G178.7 ○ ○
EC0A~EC6A G143.0~G143.6 ○ ○
Axis control command signals
EC0B~EC6B G155.0~G155.6 ○ ○
(for group 1 to 4) (PMC axis 16.1
EC0C~EC6C G167.0~G167.6 ○ ○
control)
EC0D~EC6D G179.0~G179.6 ○ ○
ECKZA F130.1 ○ ○
Following zero checking
ECKZB F133.1 ○ ○
ECKZC F136.1 ○ ○
axis control)
ECKZD F139.1 ○ ○
ECLRA G142.6 ○ ○
ECLRB Reset signals (for group 1 to 4) G154.6 ○ ○ 16.1
ECLRC (PMC axis control) G166.6 ○ ○
ECLRD G178.6 ○ ○
Data signals for external data G211,G210,
ED31 to ED0 ○ ○ 16.2
input G001,G000
EDENA F130.3 ○ ○
Auxiliary function executing
EDENB F133.3 ○ ○
EDENC F136.3 ○ ○
axis control)
EDEND F139.3 ○ ○
- 1526 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
Reference
item
Dry run signal(PMC axis
EDRN G150.7 ○ ○ 16.1
control)
EFINA G142.0 ○ ○
Auxiliary function completion 16.1
EFINB G154.0 ○ ○
signal (for group 1 to 4) (PMC
EFINC G166.0 ○ ○
axis control) 16.1
EFIND G178.0 ○ ○
EGENA F130.4 ○ ○
EGENB Axis moving signals (for group F133.4 ○ ○
16.1
EGENC 1 to 4) (PMC axis control) F136.4 ○ ○
EGEND F139.4 ○ ○
EIALA F130.2 ○ ○
EIALB Alarm signal (for group 1 to 4) F133.2 ○ ○
16.1
EIALC (PMC axis control) F136.2 ○ ○
EIALD F139.2 ○ ○
EID0A~EID31A G146~G149 ○ ○
Axis control data signals (for
EID0B~EID31B G158~G161 ○ ○
EID0C~EID31C G170~G173 ○ ○
control)
EID0D~EID31D G182~G185 ○ ○
EIF0A~EIF15A G144,G145 ○ ○
Axis control feedrate signals
EIF0B~EIF15B G156,G157 ○ ○
EIF0C~EIF15C G168,G169 ○ ○
control)
EIF0D~EIF15D G180,G181 ○ ○
EINPA F130.0 ○ ○
EINPB In-position signals (for group 1 F133.0 ○ ○
16.1
EINPC to 4) (PMC axis control) F136.0 ○ ○
EINPD F139.0 ○ ○
EKC0~EKC7 Key code signals G098 ○ ○ 16.5
E
Key code read completion
EKENB F053.7 ○ ○ 16.5
signal
EKSET Key code read signal G066.7 ○ ○ 16.5
ELCKZA G142.1 ○ ○
Accumulated zero check signal
ELCKZB G154.1 ○ ○
ELCKZC G166.1 ○ ○
control)
ELCKZD G178.1 ○ ○
EM11A~EM48A F132,F142 ○ ○
Auxiliary function code signals
EM11B~EM48B F135,F145 ○ ○
EM11C~EM48C F138,F148 ○ ○
control)
EM11D~EM48D F141,F151 ○ ○
EMBUFA G142.2 ○ ○
Buffering disable signals (for
EMBUFB G154.2 ○ ○
EMBUFC G166.2 ○ ○
control)
EMBUFD G178.2 ○ ○
EMFA F131.0 ○ ○
EMFB F134.0 ○ ○
EMFC F137.0 ○ ○
axis control)
EMFD F140.0 ○ ○
EMF2A F131.2 ○ ○
Auxiliary function 2nd strobe
EMF2B F134.2 ○ ○
EMF2C F137.2 ○ ○
axis control)
EMF2D F140.2 ○ ○
EMF3A F131.3 ○ ○
Auxiliary function 3rd strobe
EMF3B F134.3 ○ ○
EMF3C F137.3 ○ ○
axis control)
EMF3D F140.3 ○ ○
- 1527 -
Reference
item
EMSBKA G143.7 ○ ○
Block stop disable signals (for
EMSBKB G155.7 ○ ○
EMSBKC G167.7 ○ ○
control)
EMSBKD G179.7 ○ ○
Specifying by
Extended external machine
EMZ0 to EMZ15 parameter ○ ○ 16.3
zero point shift signal
No.1280.
ENB F001.4 ○ ○ 10.6
Spindle enable signal
ENB2 F038.2 ○ ○ 10.12
External key input mode
ENBKY G066.1 ○ ○ 16.5
selection signal
EOTNA F130.6 ○ ○
Negative-direction overtravel
EOTNB F133.6 ○ ○
EOTNC F136.6 ○ ○
axis control)
EOTND F139.6 ○ ○
EOTPA F130.5 ○ ○
Positive-direction overtravel
EOTPB F133.5 ○ ○
EOTPC F136.5 ○ ○
axis control)
EOTPD F139.5 ○ ○
Override 0% signal (PMC axis
EOV0 F129.5 ○ ○ 16.1
control)
EOVC G150.5 ○ ○
Override cancel signal (for
EOVCB G162.5 ○ ○
EOVCC G174.5 ○ ○
control)
EOVCD G186.5 ○ ○
E Extended external workpiece
EPN0~EPN13 G024.0~G025.5 ○ ○ 16.4
number search signals
External workpiece number
EPNS G025.7 ○ ○ 16.4
search start signal
Read completion signal for
EREND F060.0 ○ ○ 16.2
external data input
Rapid traverse override signals
EROV1,EROV2 G150.0,G150.1 ○ ○ 16.1
(PMC axis control)
ERS External reset signal G008.7 ○ ○ 5.2
ERT G150.6 ○ ○ 16.1
signal (PMC axis control)
Automatic screen erasing
ERTVA F006.2 ○ ○ 13.1.13
signal
ESBKA G142.3 ○ ○
ESBKB Block stop signals (for group 1 G154.3 ○ ○
16.1
ESBKC to 4) (PMC axis control) G166.3 ○ ○
ESBKD G178.3 ○ ○
Search cancel signal for
ESCAN F060.2 ○ ○ 16.2
external data input
Search completion signal for
ESEND F060.1 ○ ○ 16.2
external data input
Soft key number select state
ESF01~ESF10 F318.0~F319.1 ○ ○ 13.4
notification signal
Machine operation menu select
ESFM1~ESFM8 F317.0~F317.7 ○ ○ 13.4
number notification signal
ESKIP Skip signal(PMC axis control) X004.6 ○ ○ 16.1
- 1528 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
Reference
item
ESOFA G142.4 ○ ○
ESOFB Servo off signals (for group 1 G154.4 ○ ○
16.1
ESOFC to 4) (PMC axis control) G166.4 ○ ○
ESOFD G178.4 ○ ○
Simple spindle synchronous
ESRSYC G064.6 ○ ○ 10.17
control signal
ESSYC1 Simple spindle synchronous G264.0 ○ ○
10.17
ESSYC2 control signal (for each spindle) G264.1 ○ ○
Read signal for external data
ESTB G002.7 ○ ○ 16.2
input
ESTPA G142.5 ○ ○
Axis control temporary stop
ESTPB G154.5 ○ ○
E ESTPC G166.5 ○ ○
axis control)
ESTPD G178.5 ○ ○
EUI00~EUI15 Input signals for P-code macro G082,G083 ○ ○ 12.15
Output signals for P-code
EUO00~EUO15 F084,F085 ○ ○ 12.15
macro
Stored stroke limit 1 change
EXLM G007.6 ○ ○ 2.3.2
signal
EXRD External read start signal G058.1 ○ ○ 14.2
EXSFT G295.0 ○ ○ 13.4
screen select signal
External read/punch stop
EXSTP G058.2 ○ ○ 14.2
signal
EXWT External punch start signal G058.3 ○ ○ 14.2
F1D One-digit F code feed signal G016.7 － ○ 7.1.5
0.1% step rapid traverse
FHROV G353.7 ○ ○ 7.1.7.1
override selection signals
FIN End signal G004.3 ○ ○ 9.1
Cs contour control change
FSCSL F044.1 ○ ○ 10.11
completion signal
Spindle synchronous speed
FSPPH F044.3 ○ ○ 10.14
control completion signal
F FSPPH1 Spindle synchronous speed F289.0 ○ ○
control completion signal (for 10.14
FSPPH2 F289.1 ○ ○
each spindle)
Spindle phase synchronous
FSPSY F044.2 ○ ○ 10.14
control signal
FSPSY1 Spindle phase synchronous F288.0 ○ ○
10.14
FSPSY2 control signal (for each spindle) F288.1 ○ ○
Forward movement prohibition
FWSTP G531.0 ○ ○ 3.5
signal
Tool offset write mode select
GOQSM G039.7 ○ ○ 15.4.2
signal
GR1,GR2 Gear selection signals (input) G028.1,G028.2 ○ ○ 10.6
G
GR1O,GR2O,GR3
Gear selection signals (output) F034.0~F034.2 － ○ 10.6
O
GR21,GR22 Gear selection signals (input) G029.0,G029.1 ○ ○ 10.12
- 1529 -
Reference
item
HCAB2 F061.2 ○ ○ 13.1.14
reception signal
HCABT G067.6 ○ ○ 13.1.14
signal
Hard copy execution status
HCEXE F061.3 ○ ○ 13.1.14
signal
Hard copy execution request
HCREQ G067.7 ○ ○ 13.1.14
signal
HDO0~HDO3 High-speed skip status signals F122.0~F122.3 ○ ○ 15.3.2
Path select signal(Tool post
HEAD G063.0 ● － 8.11, 13.3
select signal)
Maximum manual handle
HNDLF G023.3 ○ ○ 3.2
feedrate switch signal
Manual handle feed direction
HDN G347.1 ○ ○ 3.2
inversion signal
1% step rapid traverse override 7.1.7.1
HROV G096.7 ○ ○
selection signals 7.1.9
HS1A~HS1D G018.0~G018.3 ○ ○ 3.2
H selection signals
HS1AO F077.0 ○ ○ 13.1.2
signal (HS1A)
HS1BO F077.1 ○ ○ 13.1.2
signal (HS1B)
HS1CO F077.2 ○ ○ 13.1.2
signal (HS1C)
HS1DO F077.3 ○ ○ 13.1.2
signal (HS1D)
Manual handle interrupt axis
HS1IA~HS1ID G041.0~G041.3 ○ ○ 3.3
selection signals
HS2A~HS2D G018.4~G018.7 ○ ○ 3.2
selection signals
HS2IA~HS2ID G041.4~G041.7 ○ ○ 3.3
selection signals
HS3A~HS3D G019.0~G019.3 ○ ○ 3.2
selection signals
HS3IA~HS3ID G042.0~G042.3 ○ ○ 3.3
selection signals
All-axis VRDY off alarm ignore
IGNVRY G066.0 ○ ○ 2.8
signal
Each-axis VRDY off alarm
IGVRY1~IGVRY5 G192.0~G192.4 ○ ○ 2.8
ignore signal
INCH Inch input signal F002.0 ○ ○ 12.5
INCMDA Incremental command G072.5 ○ ○
INCMDB externally set orientation G076.5 ○ ○
INCMDC signals (serial spindle) G206.5 ○ －
I INCSTA F047.1 ○ ○
Incremental orientation mode
INCSTB F051.1 ○ ○ 10.3
INCSTC F170.1 ○ －
INDXA Orientation stop position G072.0 ○ ○
INDXB change command signals G076.0 ○ ○
INDXC (serial spindle) G206.0 ○ －
INFD In-feed control cut start signal G063.6 － ○ 12.9
INHKY Key input disable signal F053.0 ○ ○ 16.5
INP1~INP5 In-position signals F104.0~F104.4 ○ ○ 7.2.5
- 1530 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
Reference
item
INTGA G071.5 ○ ○
Speed integral signals (serial
INTGB G075.5 ○ ○ 10.3
spindle)
INTGC G205.5 ○ －
I Manual handle generators
IOLBH1, IOLBH2 G199.0, G199.1 ○ ○ 3.4
selection signal
IUDD1~IUDD5 G125.0~G125.4 ○ ○ 2.9
detection ignore signal
KEY1~KEY4 Memory protection signals G046.3~G046.6 ○ ○ 13.2.1
K KEYO F075.6 ○ ○ 13.1.2
signal (KEY1~KEY4)
KEYP Memory protection signals G046.0 ○ ○ 13.2.2
LDT1A F045.4 ○ ○
Load detection signals 1 (serial
LDT1B F049.4 ○ ○
spindle)
LDT1C F168.4 ○ －
10.3
LDT2A F045.5 ○ ○
L Load detection signals 2
LDT2B F049.5 ○ ○
(serial spindle)
LDT2C F168.5 ○ －
LFCIF Tool life counting disable signal F093.2 ○ ○ 11.4
LFCIV Tool life counting disable signal G048.2 ○ ○ 11.4
M00~M31 Auxiliary function code signals F010~F013 ○ ○ 9.1
M200~M215 2nd M function code signals F014~F015 ○ ○ 9.3
M300~M315 3rd M function code signals F016~F017 ○ ○ 9.3
MA CNC ready signal F001.7 ○ ○ 2.2
MABSM Manual absolute check signal F004.2 ○ ○ 5.4
Auxiliary function lock check
MAFL F004.4 ○ ○ 9.2
signal
MBDT1 Optional block skip check F004.0 ○ ○
5.5
MBDT2~MBDT9 signals F005 ○ ○
Call program confirmation
MCEX1~MCEX16 F514,F515 ○ ○ 16.6
signal
MCEXE Macro call executing signal F512.0 ○ ○ 16.6
Mode change completion
MCFIN G514.0 ○ ○ 16.6
signal
MCFNA G071.3 ○ ○
Power line switch completion
MCFNB G075.3 ○ ○ 10.3
M MCFNC G205.3 ○ －
Handle available signal in
MCHK G067.3 ○ ○ 3.5
checking mode
MCRQ Mode change request signal F512.1 ○ ○ 16.6
MCSP Abnormal end signal F512.2 ○ ○ 16.6
MCST1~MCST16 Macro call start signal G512,G513 ○ ○ 16.6
MD1,MD2,MD4 Mode selection signals G043.0~G043.2 ○ ○ 2.6
MD1O F073.0 ○ ○ 13.1.2
signal (MD1)
MD1R Mode notification signal F513.0 ○ ○ 16.6
MD2O F073.1 ○ ○ 13.1.2
signal (MD2)
MD4O F073.2 ○ ○ 13.1.2
signal (MD4)
MDIRST MDI reset confirmation signal F006.1 ○ ○ 5.2
- 1531 -
Reference
item
MDRN Dry run check signal F002.7 ○ ○ 5.3.2
MDTCH1~ Controlled axis detach status
F110.0~F110.4 ○ ○ 1.2.5
MDTCH5 signals
Memory edit selection check
MEDT F003.6 ○ ○ 2.6
signal
MF F007.0 ○ ○ 9.1
signals
MF2 2nd M function strobe signal F008.4 ○ ○ 9.3
MF3 3rd M function strobe signal F008.5 ○ ○ 9.3
Auxiliary function completion
MFIN G005.0 ○ ○ 9.4
signal
2nd M function completion
MFIN2 G004.4 ○ ○ 9.4
signal
3rd M function completion
MFIN3 G004.5 ○ ○ 9.4
signal
MFNHGA Spindle switch MAIN MCC G072.6 ○ ○
MFNHGB contact status signals (serial G076.6 ○ ○ 10.3
MFNHGC spindle) G206.6 ○ －
Manual handle feed selection
MH F003.1 ○ ○ 2.6
check signal
MI1~MI5 Mirror image signals G106.0~G106.4 ○ ○ 1.2.7
Incremental feed selection
MINC F003.0 ○ ○ 2.6
check signal
MIT Tool offset write signals X004.2~X004.5 ○ － 15.4.2
Composite control axis change
M MIX1~MIX5 G128.0~G128.4 ○ ○ 8.5
selection signals
Composite axis confirmation
MIXO1~MIXO5 F343.0~F343.4 ○ ○ 8.5
signals
MJ Jog feed selection check signal F003.2 ○ ○ 2.6
MLK All-axis machine lock signal G044.1 ○ ○ 5.3.1
MLK1~MLK5 Each-axis machine lock signal G108.0~G108.4 ○ ○ 5.3.1
MLKO F075.4 ○ ○ 13.1.2
signal (MLK)
Manual data input selection
MMDI F003.3 ○ ○ 2.6
check signal
Automatic operation selection
MMEM F003.5 ○ ○ 2.6
check signal
MMI1~MMI5 Mirror image check signals F108.0~F108.4 ○ ○ 1.2.7
All-axis machine lock check
MMLK F004.1 ○ ○ 5.3.1
signal
Check mode confirmation
MMMOD F091.3 ○ ○ 3.5
signal
MMOD Checking mode signal G067.2 ○ ○ 3.5
Direction change prohibition
MNCHG F091.1 ○ ○ 3.5
signal
MORA1A Magnetic sensor orientation F046.6 ○ ○
MORA1B completion signals (serial F050.6 ○ ○
MORA1C spindle) F169.6 ○ －
10.3
MORA2A Magnetic sensor orientation F046.7 ○ ○
MORA2B proximity signals (serial F050.7 ○ ○
MORA2C spindle) F169.7 ○ －
- 1532 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
Reference
item
MORCMA Magnetic sensor orientation G073.0 ○ ○
MORCMB command signals (serial G077.0 ○ ○ 10.3
MORCMC spindle) G207.0 ○ －
Manual handle feed amount
MP1,MP2 selection signals (incremental G019.4,G019.5 ○ ○ 3.2, 3.5
feed signals)
MP21,MP22 Manual handle feed amount G087.0,G087.1
○ ○ 3.2
MP31,MP32 selection signals G087.3,G087.4
MP1O F076.0 ○ ○ 13.1.2
signal (MP1)
MP2O F076.1 ○ ○ 13.1.2
signal (MP2)
MPOFA G073.2 ○ ○
Motor power cutoff command
MPOFB G077.2 ○ ○
MPOFC G207.2 ○ －
10.3
MRDYA G070.7 ○ ○
Machine ready signals (serial
MRDYB G074.7 ○ ○
spindle)
MRDYC G204.7 ○ －
MREF F004.5 ○ ○ 4.1
return selection check signal
DNC operation selection
MRMT F003.4 ○ ○ 5.11, 5.13
M confirm signal
Reverse movement prohibition
MRVM G531.1 ○ ○ 3.5
signal
MRVMD Reverse movement signal F091.0 ○ ○ 3.5
Reverse movement prohibition
MRVSP F091.2 ○ ○ 3.5
signal
MSBK Single block check signal F004.3 ○ ○ 5.3.3
MSP00~MSP15 Multi-spindle address P signals F160,F161 ○ ○ 10.12
MSPOSA Spindle positioning mode F039.0 ○ ○
10.10
MSPOSB signals F402.1 ○ ○
Manual tool compensation tool
MT8N00~MT8N31 G525~G528 ○ － 11.1.4
Manual tool compensation
MTLA F061.5 ○ － 11.1.4
completion signal
MTLANG F061.4 ○ － 11.1.4
uncompleted signal
MTLC G067.0 ○ － 11.1.4
command number
Manual tool compensation tool
MTLN00~MTLN15 G068,G069 ○ － 11.1.4
MV1~MV5 Axis moving signals F102.0~F102.4 ○ ○ 1.2.6
MVD1~MVD5 Axis moving direction signals F106.0~F106.4 ○ ○ 1.2.6
A/B phase detector
NDCAL1~NDCAL
disconnection alarm ignore G202 ○ ○ 16.1
8
signal(PMC axis control)
NMWT No-wait signal G063.7 ● － 8.2
N NOWT No-wait signal G063.1 ● － 8.2
Signal for disabling angular
NOZAGC axis control for the G063.5 ○ ○ 1.8
perpendicular axis
NPOS1~NPOS5 Axis non-display signals G198.0~G198.4 ○ ○
- 1533 -
Reference
item
NRROA Shortcut command signals for G072.2 ○ ○
NRROB orientation stop position G076.2 ○ ○ 10.3
NRROC change (serial spindle) G206.2 ○ －
N
Signal for disabling torque
NSYNCA difference alarm detection for G059.7 ○ ○ 1.6
axis synchronous control
OFN0~OFN5, Tool offset number selection G039.0~G039.5,
○ ○ 15.4.2
OFN6~OFN9 signals G040.0~G040.3
OP Automatic operation signal F000.7 ○ ○ 5.1
ORARA F045.7 ○ ○
Orientation completion signals
ORARB F049.7 ○ ○ 10.3
(serial spindle)
ORARC F168.7 ○ －
ORCMA G070.6 ○ ○
Orientation command signals 10.3
ORCMB G074.6 ○ ○
(serial spindle) 10.14
ORCMC G204.6 ○ －
OUT0~OUT15 F072,F074 ○ ○ 13.1.2
O general-purpose switch signals
OVC Override cancel signal G006.4 ○ ○ 7.1.7.4
Superimposed control axis
OVLS1~OVLS5 G190.0~G190.4 ○ ○ 8.6
selection signals
Superimposed control master
OVMO1~OVMO5 F344.0~F344.4 ○ ○ 8.6
axis confirmation signals
OVRA G072.4 ○ ○
Analog override signals (serial
OVRB G076.4 ○ ○ 10.3
spindle)
OVRC G206.4 ○ －
Superimposed control slave
OVSO1~OVSO5 F345.0~F345.4 ○ ○ 8.6
axis confirmation signals
PBATL battery voltage low alarm F172.7 ○ ○ 1.4.3
signal
PBATZ battery voltage zero alarm F172.6 ○ ○ 1.4.3
signal
PC1DEA Position coder one-rotation F047.0 ○ ○
PC1DEB signal detection status signals F051.0 ○ ○ 10.3
PC1DEC (serial spindle) F170.0 ○ －
2nd position coder selection
PC2SLC G028.7 ○ ○ 10.12
signal
3rd position coder selection
PC3SLC G026.0 ○ ○ 10.12
signal
P 4th position coder selection
PC4SLC G026.1 ○ ○ 10.12
signal
Small-hole peck drilling cycle in
PECK2 F066.5 － ○ 12.7
progress signal
PK1~PK5 Parking signals G122.0~G122.4 ○ ○ 8.5
G122.6
PKESS1 1st spindle parking signal ○ ○ 10.17
(G031.6)
G122.7
PKESS2 2nd spindle parking signal ○ ○ 10.17
(G031.7)
PKESE1 Simple spindle synchronous G265.0 ○ ○
parking signal (for each 10.17
PKESE2 G265.1 ○ ○
spindle)
PN1,PN2,PN4, External workpiece number
G009.0~G009.4 ○ ○ 16.4
PN16 search signals
- 1534 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
Reference
item
PORA2A F046.5 ○ ○
Position coder orientation
PORA2B F050.5 ○ ○ 10.3
proximity signal (serial spindle)
PORA2C F169.5 ○ －
PRC Position record signal G040.6 ○ － 15.4.1
PRGDPL Key input disable signal F053.1 ○ ○ 16.5
Target part count reached
PRTSF F062.7 ○ ○ 13.1.1
signal
P Polygon spindle speed arrival
PSAR F063.2 ○ ○ 6.9.2
signal
Polygon master axis not arrival
PSE1 F063.0 ○ ○ 6.9.2
signal
Polygon synchronization axis
PSE2 F063.1 ○ ○ 6.9.2
not arrival signal
PSW01~PSW16 Position switch signals F070,F071 ○ ○ 1.2.10
Polygon synchronization under
PSYN F063.7 ○ ○ 6.9
way signal
R01I~R12I Spindle motor speed command G032.0~G033.3 ○ ○
10.7
R01I2~R12I2 signals G034.0~G035.3 ○ ○
R01O~R12O F036.0~F037.3 ○ ○ 10.6
R01O2~R12O2 F200.0~F201.3 ○ ○
S 12-bit code signals
R01O3~R12O3 F204.0~F205.3 ○ ○ 10.12
R01O4~R12O4 F270.0~F271.3 ○ ○
RCFNA F046.3 ○ ○
Output switch completion
RCFNB F050.3 ○ ○
RCFNC F169.3 ○ －
RCHA G071.7 ○ ○
Power line status check signals
RCHB G075.7 ○ ○
(serial spindle)
RCHC G205.7 ○ －
10.3
RCHHGA Spindle switch HIGH MCC G072.7 ○ ○
RCHHGB contact status signals (serial G076.7 ○ ○
RCHHGC spindle) G206.7 ○ －
RCHPA F046.2 ○ ○
Output switch signals (serial
RCHPB F050.2 ○ ○
spindle)
RCHPC F169.2 ○ －
RGSPM Spindle rotation direction F065.1 ○ ○
R 10.13
RGSPP signals F065.0 ○ ○
RGTAP Rigid tapping signal G061.0 ○ ○ 10.13
RGTSP1~RGTSP Rigid tapping spindle selection
G061.4~G061.5 ○ － 10.13
2 signals
RLSOT Stroke limit 1 release signal G007.7 ○ ○ 2.3.2
RLSOT3 Stroke limit 3 release signal G007.4 ○ ○ 2.3.3
ROTAA Rotational direction command G072.1 ○ ○
ROTAB signals for orientation stop G076.1 ○ ○ 10.3
ROTAC position change (serial spindle) G206.1 ○ －
ROV1,ROV2 Rapid traverse override signals G014.0,G014.1 ○ ○ 7.1.7.1
ROV1O F076.4 ○ ○ 13.1.2
signal (ROV1)
ROV2O F076.5 ○ ○ 13.1.2
signal (ROV2)
Rapid traverse block overlap
ROVLP G053.5 ○ ○ 7.2.1.2
disable signal
RPALM Read/punch alarm signal F053.3 ○ ○ 14.2
RPBSY Read/punch busy signal F053.2 ○ ○ 14.2
RPDO Rapid traversing signal F002.1 ○ ○ 2.7,7.1.1
- 1535 -
Reference
item
RRW Reset & rewind signal G008.6 ○ ○ 5.2
RSLA G071.6 ○ ○
Output switch request signals
RSLB G075.6 ○ ○ 10.3
(serial spindle)
RSLC G205.6 ○ －
RSMAX F065.2 ○ ○ 10.14
ratio control clamp signal
RST Resetting signal F001.1 ○ ○ 5.2
RT G019.7 ○ ○ 3.1
signal
Rigid tapping-in-progress
RTAP F076.3 ○ ○ 10.13
signal
R Rigid tapping retraction start
RTNT G062.6 － ○ 5.10
signal
RTO F077.6 ○ ○ 13.1.2
signal (RT)
Rigid tapping retraction
RTPT F066.1 － ○ 5.10
completion signal
RTRCT Retract signal G066.4 ○ ○ 1.9, 6.13
RTRCTF Retract completion signal F065.4 ○ ○ 1.9, 6.13
RVS Reverse execution signal G007.0 － ○
Reverse execution in-progress 5.8
RVSL F082.2 － ○
signal
RWD Rewinding signal F000.0 ○ ○ 5.2
S00~S31 Spindle function code signals F022~F025 ○ ○ 9.1
Spindle measurement select
S2TLS G040.5 ○ － 15.4.2
signal
SA Servo ready signal F000.6 ○ ○ 2.2
SAR Spindle speed arrival signal G029.4 ○ ○ 10.6
SARA F045.3 ○ ○
Spindle speed arrival signal
SARB F049.3 ○ ○ 10.3
(serial spindle)
SARC F168.3 ○ －
SBK Single block signal G046.1 ○ ○ 5.3.3
SBKO F075.3 ○ ○ 13.1.2
signal (SBK)
SBRT G038.1 ○ ○ 10.14
ratio control signal
SCLPA F038.0 ○ ○
Spindle clamp signal 10.10
SCLPB F401.1 ○ ○
S SDTA F045.2 ○ ○
Speed detection signals (serial
SDTB F049.2 ○ ○ 10.3
spindle)
SDTC F168.2 ○ －
SF Spindle function strobe signal F007.2 ○ ○ 9.1
Spindle function completion
SFIN G005.2 ○ ○ 9.4
signal
SFRA G070.5 ○ ○
CW command signals (serial
SFRB G074.5 ○ ○ 10.3
spindle)
SFRC G204.5 ○ －
SGN Spindle motor command G033.5 ○ ○
10.7
SGN2 polarity command signals G035.5 ○ ○
SH00A~SH11A Spindle orientation external G078.0~G079.3 ○ ○
10.15
SH00B~SH11B stop position command signals G080.0~G081.3 ○ ○
SIND Spindle motor speed command G033.7 ○ ○
10.7
SIND2 selection signals G035.7 ○ ○
SKIP Skip signal X004.7 ○ ○ 15.3
- 1536 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
Reference
item
SKIP2~SKIP6, X004.2~X004.6,
Skip signal ○ ○ 15.3.3
SKIP7,SKIP8 X004.0,X004.1
SKIPP Skip signal G006.6 ○ ○ 15.3
SLPCA Path spindle feedback G064.2 ● －
8.8
SLPCB selection signals G064.3 ● －
SLSPA Path spindle command G063.2 ● －
8.8
SLSPB selection signals G063.3 ● －
SLVA Subordinate operation mode G073.1 ○ ○
SLVB command signals (serial G077.1 ○ ○
SLVC spindle) G207.1 ○ －
10.3
SLVSA F046.4 ○ ○
Subordinate operation status
SLVSB F050.4 ○ ○
SLVSC F169.4 ○ －
Parking axis confirmation
SMPK1~SMPK5 F346.0~F346.4 ○ ○ 8.5
signals
SMZ In-position check signal G053.6 ○ ○ 7.2.5
SOCNA G071.4 ○ ○
Soft start/stop cancel signals
SOCNB G075.4 ○ ○ 10.3
(serial spindle)
SOCNC G205.4 ○ －
SOR Spindle orientation signal G029.5 ○ ○ 10.6
SOV0~SOV7 Spindle speed override signals G030 ○ ○ 10.6
2nd spindle speed override
SOV20~SOV27 G376 ○ ○ 10.12
signals
Spindle fluctuation detection
SPAL F035.0 ○ ○ 10.18
alarm signal
SPL Feed hold lamp signal F000.4 ○ ○ 5.1
S
SPO F075.7 ○ ○ 13.1.2
signal (*SP)
Spindle indexing signal for
SPP1 to SPP5 F522.0~F522.4 ○ ○ 10.19
each axis
Spindle phase synchronous
SPPHS G038.3 ○ ○ 10.14
control signal
SPPHS1 Spindle phase synchronous G289.0 ○ ○
10.14
SPPHS2 control signal (for each spindle) G289.1 ○ ○
SPSLA G071.2 ○ ○
Spindle selection signals (serial
SPSLB G075.2 ○ ○ 10.3
spindle)
SPSLC G205.2 ○ －
Spindle command path
SPSP G536.7 ○ ○ 10.12
specification signal
SPSTPA G028.6 ○ ○
Spindle stop completion signal 10.10
SPSTPB G402.1 ○ ○
Spindle synchronous control
SPSYC G038.2 ○ ○ 10.14
signal
SPSYC1 Spindle synchronous control G288.0 ○ ○
10.14
SPSYC2 signal (for each spindle) G288.1 ○ ○
SPWRN1~ Spindle warning detail signals
F264.0~F265.0 ○ ○ 10.3
SPWRN9 1 to 9
SRN Program restart signal G006.0 ○ ○ 5.7
Program restart under way
SRNMV F002.4 ○ ○ 5.7
signal
SRSP1R 1st serial spindle ready signals F034.6 ○ ○ 10.3
SRSP2R 2nd serial spindle ready signals F034.5 ○ ○ 10.3
- 1537 -
Reference
item
All-spindle operation ready
SRSRDY F034.7 ○ ○ 10.3
signal
SRVA G070.4 ○ ○
CCW command signals (serial
SRVB G074.4 ○ ○ 10.3
spindle)
SRVC G204.4 ○ －
SRVON1~
SV speed control mode signals G521.0~G521.4 ○ ○ 10.19
SRVON5
SSIN Spindle motor command G033.6 ○ ○
10.7
SSIN2 polarity selection signals G035.6 ○ ○
SSTA F045.1 ○ ○
Speed zero signals (serial
SSTB F049.1 ○ ○ 10.3
spindle)
SSTC F168.1 ○ －
ST Cycle start signal G007.2 ○ ○ 5.1
STCHK Start check signal G408.0 ○ ○ 2.12
STL Cycle start lamp signal F000.5 ○ ○ 5.1
STLK Start lock signal G007.1 ○ ○ 2.5
SUCLPA F038.1 ○ ○
Spindle unclamp signal 10.10
SUCLPB F400.1 ○ ○
SVF1~SVF5 Servo off signals G126.0~G126.4 ○ ○ 1.2.9
SVREV1~SVREV SV speed control mode
F521.0~F521.4 ○ ○ 10.19
5 in-progress signals
SVRVS1~SVRVS
SV reverse signals G523.0~G523.4 ○ ○ 10.19
5
SVWRN1 F093.4 ○ ○
SVWRN2 F093.5 ○ ○
Servo warning detail signals 18.1
SVWRN3 F093.6 ○ ○
S SVWRN4 F093.7 ○ ○
SWS1 G027.0 ○ ○
Spindle selection signals 10.12
SWS2 G027.1 ○ ○
SYCAL Phase error monitor signal F044.4 ○ ○ 10.14,10.17
SYCAL1 Phase error monitor signal (for F043.0 ○ ○ 10.14
SYCAL2 each spindle) F043.1 ○ ○ 10.17
Synchronous master axis
SYCM1~SYCM5 F341.0~F341.4 ○ ○ 8.5
Synchronous slave axis
SYCS1~SYCS5 F342.0~F342.4 ○ ○ 8.5
Synchronous/composite/superi
SYN1O~SYN5O mposed control under way F118.0~F118.4 ○ ○ 8.5,8.6
signals
SYNC1~SYNC5 G138.0~G138.4 ○ ○ 1.6,8.5
selection signals
Signals for selecting the
SYNCJ1~SYNCJ5 manual feed axis for axis G140.0~G140.4 ○ ○ 1.6
synchronous control
Signal for indicating a
SYNER positional deviation error alarm F403.0 ○ ○ 1.6
for axis synchronous control
SYNMOD EGB mode signal F065.6 ○ ○ 1.9
SYNMT1~SYNMT Machine coordinate match
F210.0~F210.4 ○ ○ 1.6
5 state output signals
Axis synchronous control
SYNO1~SYNO5 F532.0~F532.4 ○ ○ 1.6
status signals
SYNOF1~SYNOF Synchronization compensation
F211.0~F211.4 ○ ○ 1.6
5 enable state output signals
- 1538 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
Reference
item
T00~T31 Tool function code signals F026~F029 ○ ○ 9.1
TAP Tapping signal F001.5 ○ ○ 12.7
Trouble forecast signal (For the
TDFTR1~TDFTR8 F299.0~F299.7 ○ ○ 18.3
disturbance level)
TDSML1~TDSML Trouble forecast signal (For the
F298.0~F298.7 ○ ○ 18.3
8 thermal simulation data)
TF Tool function strobe signal F007.3 ○ ○ 9.1
TFIN Tool function completion signal G005.3 ○ ○ 9.4
THRD Threading signal F002.3 ○ ○ 6.5
TIALM Path interference alarm signal F064.7 ● － 8.3
Path interference check in
TICHK F064.6 ● － 8.3
progress signal
Tool group number selection
TL01~TL256 G047.0~G048.0 ○ ○ 11.4
signals
Remaining tool count
TLAL F154.0 － ○ 11.4
notification signal
TLCH Tool change signal F064.0 ○ ○ 11.4
TLCHB Tool life arrival notice signal F064.3 ○ ○ 11.4
TLCHI Individual tool change signal F064.2 ○ ○ 11.4
T TLMA F045.6 ○ ○
Torque limit signals (serial
TLMB F049.6 ○ ○
spindle)
TLMC F168.6 ○ －
TLMHA G070.1 ○ ○
Torque limit command HIGH
TLMHB G074.1 ○ ○ 10.3
TLMHC G204.1 ○ －
TLMLA G070.0 ○ ○
Torque limit command LOW
TLMLB G074.0 ○ ○
TLMLC G204.0 ○ －
TLNW New tool select signal F064.1 ○ ○ 11.4
TLRST Tool change reset signal G048.7 ○ ○ 11.4
Individual tool change reset
TLRSTI G048.6 ○ ○ 11.4
signal
TLSKP Tool skip signal G048.5 ○ ○ 11.4
General-purpose integrating
TMRON G053.0 ○ ○ 13.1.1
meter start signal
TPPRS Touch panel check signal F006.0 ○ ○ 13.1.6
TRQL1~TRQL5 Torque limit reached signals F114.0~F114.4 ○ ○ 15.3.4
Torque control mode
TRQM1~TRQM8 F190 ○ ○ 16.1
UI000~UI015 Input signals for custom macro G054~G055 ○ ○ 12.6
Interrupt signal for custom
UINT G053.3 ○ ○ 12.6.2
macro
U
F054,F055,
UO000~UO031 Output signals for custom ○ ○
F276,F277 12.6
macro
UO100~UO131 F056~F059 ○ ○
WATO Waiting signal F063.6 ● － 8.2
WOQSM shift value write mode select G039.6 ○ ○ 15.4.2
W signal
WOSET G040.7 ○ － 15.4.2
shift value write signal
- 1539 -
Reference
item
Each axis workpiece
WPRST1 to
coordinate system preset G358.0~G358.4 ○ ○ 1.5.2.6
WPRST5
signals
W
Each axis workpiece
WPSF1 to WPSF5 coordinate system preset F358.0~F358.4 ○ ○ 1.5.2.6
completion signals
Reference position return end
ZP1~ZP5 F094.0~F094.4 ○ ○ 4.1
signals
2nd reference position return
ZP21~ZP25 F096.0~F096.4 ○ ○ 4.4
completion signals
3rd reference position return
ZP31~ZP35 F098.0~F098.4 ○ ○ 4.4
completion signals
4th reference position return
ZP41~ZP45 F100.0~F100.4 ○ ○ 4.4
Z completion signals
Reference position
ZRF1~ZRF5 F120.0~F120.4 ○ ○ 4.1
establishment signals
ZRN G043.7 ○ ○ 4.1
return selection signal
ZRNO F073.4 ○ ○ 13.1.2
signal (ZRN)
ZRNR Mode notification signal F513.7 ○ ○ 16.6
- 1540 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
A.2.3 List of Signals (In Order of Addresses)

○ : Available
－ : Unavailable
Reference
Address Signal name Symbol T M
item
X004.2~X004.6, SKIP2~SKIP6,
Skip signal ○ ○ 15.3.3
X004.0,X004.1 SKIP7,SKIP8
+MIT1,-MIT1
X004.2~X004.6 Tool offset write signals ○ － 15.4.2
+MIT2,-MIT2
X004.6 Skip signal(PMC axis control) ESKIP ○ ○ 16.1
X004.7 Skip signal SKIP ○ ○ 15.3
X008.4 Emergency stop signals *ESP ○ ○ 2.1
Reference position return deceleration
X009.0~X009.4 *DEC1~*DEC5 ○ ○ 4.1
signals
G000~G001 Data signals for external data input ED15~ED0 ○ ○ 16.2
G002.6~G002.0 Address signals for external data input EA6~EA0 ○ ○ 16.2
G002.7 Read signal for external data input ESTB ○ ○ 16.2
G004.3 End signal FIN ○ ○ 9.1
G004.4 2nd M function completion signal MFIN2 ○ ○ 9.4
G004.5 3rd M function completion signal MFIN3 ○ ○ 9.4
G005.0 Auxiliary function completion signal MFIN ○ ○ 9.4
G005.2 Spindle function completion signal SFIN ○ ○ 9.4
G005.3 Tool function completion signal TFIN ○ ○ 9.4
G005.6 Auxiliary function lock signal AFL ○ ○ 9.2
G005.7 2nd auxiliary function completion signal BFIN ○ ○ 9.4
G006.0 Program restart signal SRN ○ ○ 5.7
G006.2 Manual absolute signal *ABSM ○ ○ 5.4
G006.4 Override cancel signal OVC ○ ○ 7.1.7.4
G006.6 Skip signal SKIPP ○ ○ 15.3
G007.0 Reverse execution signal RVS － ○ 5.8
G007.1 Start lock signal STLK ○ ○ 2.5
G007.2 Cycle start signal ST ○ ○ 5.1
G007.4 Stroke limit 3 release signal RLSOT3 ○ ○ 2.3.3
G007.5 Follow-up signal *FLWU ○ ○ 1.2.8
G007.6 Stored stroke limit 1 change signal EXLM ○ ○ 2.3.2
G007.7 Stroke limit 1 release signal RLSOT ○ ○ 2.3.2
G008.0 Interlock signal for all axes *IT ○ ○ 2.5
G008.1 Cutting block start interlock signal *CSL ○ ○ 2.5
G008.3 Block start interlock signal *BSL ○ ○ 2.5
G008.4 Emergency stop signals *ESP ○ ○ 2.1
G008.5 Feed hold signal *SP ○ ○ 5.1
G008.6 Reset & rewind signal RRW ○ ○ 5.2
G008.7 External reset signal ERS ○ ○ 5.2
External workpiece number search PN1,PN2,PN4,PN8,
G009.0~G009.4 ○ ○ 16.4
signals PN16
G010,G011 Manual feedrate override signals *JV0~*JV15 ○ ○ 3.1
G012 Feedrate override signals *FV0~*FV7 ○ ○ 7.1.7.2
G014.0,G014.1 Rapid traverse override signals ROV1,ROV2 ○ ○ 7.1.7.1
G016.7 One-digit F code feed signal F1D － ○ 7.1.5
G018.0~G018.3 HS1A~HS1D ○ ○
Manual handle feed axis selection
G018.4~G018.7 HS2A~HS2D ○ ○ 3.2
signals
G019.0~G019.3 HS3A~HS3D － ○
- 1541 -
Reference
item
Manual handle feed amount selection
G019.4,G019.5 MP1,MP2 ○ ○ 3.2, 3.5
signals (incremental feed signals)
G019.7 Manual rapid traverse selection signal RT ○ ○ 3.1
Maximum manual handle feedrate
G023.3 HNDLF ○ ○ 3.2
switch signal
Extended external workpiece number
G024.0~G025.5 EPN0~EPN13 ○ ○ 16.4
search signals
External workpiece number search start
G025.7 EPNS ○ ○ 16.4
signal
G026.0 PC3SLC ○ ○
Position coder selection signals 10.12
G026.1 PC4SLC ○ ○
G027.0 SWS1 ○ ○
G027.1 Spindle selection signals SWS2 ○ ○ 10.12
G027.2 SWS3 ○ ○
G027.3 *SSTP1 ○ ○
G027.4 Individual spindle stop signals *SSTP2 ○ ○ 10.12
G027.5 *SSTP3 ○ ○
G027.7 Cs contour control change signal CON ○ ○ 10.11
G028.1,G028.2 Gear selection signals (input) GR1,GR2 ○ ○ 10.6
G028.4 Spindle unclamp completion signal *SUCPFA ○ ○ 10.10
G028.5 Spindle clamp completion signal *SCPFA ○ ○ 10.10
G028.6 Spindle stop completion signal SPSTPA ○ ○ 10.10
G028.7 2nd position coder selection signal PC2SLC ○ ○ 10.12
G029.0 GR21 ○ ○
Gear selection signals (input) 10.12
G029.1 GR22 ○ ○
G029.4 Spindle speed arrival signal SAR ○ ○ 10.6
G029.5 Spindle orientation signal SOR ○ ○ 10.6
G029.6 Spindle stop signal *SSTP ○ ○ 10.6
G030 Spindle speed override signals SOV0~SOV7 ○ ○ 10.6
G031.6 1st spindle parking signal PKESS1 ○ ○ 10.17
G031.7 2nd spindle parking signal PKESS2 ○ ○ 10.17
G032.0~G033.3 Spindle motor speed command signals R01I~R12I ○ ○ 10.7
Spindle motor command polarity
G033.5 SGN ○ ○ 10.7
command signals
G033.6 SSIN ○ ○ 10.7
selection signals
Spindle motor speed command selection
G033.7 SIND ○ ○ 10.7
signals
G034.0~G035.3 Spindle motor speed command signals R01I2~R12I2 ○ ○ 10.7
G035.5 SGN2 ○ ○ 10.7
command signals
G035.6 SSIN2 ○ ○ 10.7
selection signals
G035.7 SIND2 ○ ○ 10.7
signals
G036.0~G037.3 Spindle motor speed command signals R01I3~R12I3 ○ ○ 10.7
G037.5 SGN3 ○ ○ 10.7
command signals
G037.6 SSIN3 ○ ○ 10.7
selection signals
G037.7 SIND3 ○ ○ 10.7
signals
G038.0 Polygon spindle stop signal *PLSST ○ ○ 6.9.2
- 1542 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
Reference
item
Spindle synchronous speed ratio control
G038.1 SBRT ○ ○ 10.14
signal
G038.2 Spindle synchronous control signal SPSYC ○ ○ 10.14
Spindle phase synchronous control
G038.3 SPPHS ○ ○ 10.14
signal
G038.6 B axis unclamp completion signal *BEUCP － ○ 13.12
G038.7 B axis clamp completion signal *BECLP － ○ 13.12
G039.0~G039.5 OFN0~OFN5 ○ ○
Tool offset number selection signals 15.4.2
G040.0~G040.3 OFN6~OFN9 ○ ○
Workpiece coordinate system shift value
G039.6 WOQSM ○ ○ 15.4.2
write mode select signal
G039.7 Tool offset write mode select signal GOQSM ○ ○ 15.4.2
G040.5 Spindle measurement select signal S2TLS ○ － 15.4.2
G040.6 Position record signal PRC ○ － 15.4.1
Workpiece coordinate system shift value
G040.7 WOSET ○ － 15.4.2
write signal
G041.0~G041.3 HS1IA~HS1ID ○ ○
Manual handle interrupt axis selection
G041.4~G041.7 HS2IA~HS2ID ○ ○ 3.3
signals
G042.0~G042.3 HS3IA~HS3ID ○ ○
G042.7 Direct operation select signal DMMC ○ ○ 5.13
G043.0~G043.2 Mode selection signals MD1,MD2,MD4 ○ ○ 2.6
G043.5 DNC operation select signal DNCI ○ ○ 5.11
Manual reference position return
G043.7 ZRN ○ ○ 4.1
selection signal
G044.0 BDT1 ○ ○
Optional block skip signals 5.5
G045 BDT2~BDT9 ○ ○
G044.1 All-axis machine lock signal MLK ○ ○ 5.3.1
G046.0 Memory protection signals KEYP ○ ○ 13.2.2
G046.1 Single block signal SBK ○ ○ 5.3.3
G046.3~G046.6 Memory protection signals KEY1~KEY4 ○ ○ 13.2.1
G046.7 Dry run signal DRN ○ ○ 5.3.2
G047.0~G048.0 Tool group number selection signals TL01~TL256 ○ ○ 11.4
G048.2 Tool life counting disable signal LFCIV ○ ○ 11.4
G048.5 Tool skip signal TLSKP ○ ○ 11.4
G048.6 Individual tool change reset signal TLRSTI ○ ○ 11.4
G048.7 Tool change reset signal TLRST ○ ○ 11.4
G049.0~G050.1 Tool life count override signals *TLV0~*TLV9 ○ ○ 11.4
General-purpose integrating meter start
G053.0 TMRON ○ ○ 13.1.1
signal
G053.3 Interrupt signal for custom macro UINT ○ ○ 12.6.2
Rapid traverse block overlap disable
G053.5 ROVLP ○ ○ 7.2.1.2
signal
G053.6 In-position check signal SMZ ○ ○ 7.2.5
G053.7 Chamfering signal *CDZ ○ － 12.8
G054~G055 Input signals for custom macro UI000~UI015 ○ ○ 12.6
G058.1 External read start signal EXRD ○ ○ 14.2
G058.2 External read/punch stop signal EXSTP ○ ○ 14.2
G058.3 External punch start signal EXWT ○ ○ 14.2
Signal for disabling torque difference
G059.7 alarm detection for axis synchronous NSYNCA ○ ○ 1.6
control
G060.7 Tail stock barrier selection signal *TSB ○ － 2.3.6
G061.0 Rigid tapping signal RGTAP ○ ○ 10.13
- 1543 -
Reference
item
G061.4~G061.5 Rigid tapping spindle selection signals RGTSP1~RGTSP2 ○ － 10.13
G062.6 Rigid tapping retraction start signal RTNT － ○ 5.10
Path select signal(Tool post select
G063.0 HEAD ● － 8.11, 13.3
signal)
G063.1 No-wait signal NOWT ● － 8.2
G063.2,G063.3 Path spindle command selection signals SLSPA,SLSPB ● － 8.8
Signal for disabling angular axis control
G063.5 NOZAGC ○ ○ 1.8
for the perpendicular axis
G063.6 In-feed control cut start signal INFD － ○ 12.9
G063.7 No-wait signal NMWT ● － 8.2
G064.2,G064.3 Path spindle feedback selection signals SLPCA,SLPCB ● － 8.8
Simple spindle synchronous control
G064.6 ESRSYC ○ ○ 10.17
signal
G066.0 All-axis VRDY off alarm ignore signal IGNVRY ○ ○ 2.8
G066.1 External key input mode selection signal ENBKY ○ ○ 16.5
G066.4 Retract signal RTRCT ○ ○ 1.9, 6.13
G066.7 Key code read signal EKSET ○ ○ 16.5
Manual tool compensation command
G067.0 MTLC ○ － 11.1.4
number
G067.2 Checking mode signal MMOD ○ ○ 3.5
Handle available signal in checking
G067.3 MCHK ○ ○ 3.5
mode
G067.6 Hard copy cancellation request signal HCABT ○ ○
G067.7 Hard copy execution request signal HCREQ ○ ○
Manual tool compensation tool number
G68,G69 MTLN00~MTLN15 ○ － 11.1.4
signal (4 digits)
Torque limit command LOW signals
G070.0 TLMLA ○ ○ 10.3
(serial spindle)
Torque limit command HIGH signals
G070.1 TLMHA ○ ○ 10.3
(serial spindle)
G070.3,G070.2 Clutch/gear signals(serial spindle) CTH1A,CTH2A ○ ○ 10.3
G070.4 CCW command signals(serial spindle) SRVA ○ ○ 10.3
G070.5 CW command signals(serial spindle) SFRA ○ ○ 10.3
Orientation command signals (serial 10.3
G070.6 ORCMA ○ ○
spindle) 10.14
G070.7 Machine ready signals(serial spindle) MRDYA ○ ○ 10.3
G071.0 Alarm reset signals (serial spindle) ARSTA ○ ○ 10.3
G071.1 Emergency stop signals(serial spindle) *ESPA ○ ○ 10.3
G071.2 Spindle selection signals(serial spindle) SPSLA ○ ○ 10.3
Power line switch completion signals
G071.3 MCFNA ○ ○ 10.3
(serial spindle)
Soft start/stop cancel signals(serial
G071.4 SOCNA ○ ○ 10.3
spindle)
G071.5 Speed integral signals (serial spindle) INTGA ○ ○ 10.3
Output switch request signals (serial
G071.6 RSLA ○ ○ 10.3
spindle)
Power line status check signals (serial
G071.7 RCHA ○ ○ 10.3
spindle)
Orientation stop position change
G072.0 INDXA ○ ○ 10.3
command signals (serial spindle)
- 1544 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
Reference
item
Rotational direction command signals for
G072.1 orientation stop position change(serial ROTAA ○ ○ 10.3
spindle)
Shortcut command signals for
G072.2 orientation stop position change(serial NRROA ○ ○ 10.3
spindle)
Differential speed mode command
G072.3 DEFMDA ○ ○ 10.3
G072.4 Analog override signals (serial spindle) OVRA ○ ○ 10.3
Incremental command externally set
G072.5 INCMDA ○ ○ 10.3
orientation signals(serial spindle)
Spindle switch MAIN MCC contact
G072.6 MFNHGA ○ ○ 10.3
status signals(serial spindle)
Spindle switch HIGH MCC contact
G072.7 RCHHGA ○ ○ 10.3
status signals (serial spindle)
Magnetic sensor orientation command
G073.0 MORCMA ○ ○ 10.3
signals(serial spindle)
Subordinate operation mode command
G073.1 SLVA ○ ○ 10.3
Motor power cutoff command signals
G073.2 MPOFA ○ ○ 10.3
(serial spindle)
G074.0 TLMLB ○ ○ 10.3
(serial spindle)
G074.1 TLMHB ○ ○ 10.3
(serial spindle)
G074.3,G074.2 Clutch/gear signals(serial spindle) CTH1B,CTH2B ○ ○ 10.3
G074.4 CCW command signals(serial spindle) SRVB ○ ○ 10.3
G074.5 CW command signals(serial spindle) SFRB ○ ○ 10.3
G074.6 ORCMB ○ ○
spindle) 10.14
G074.7 Machine ready signals(serial spindle) MRDYB ○ ○ 10.3
G075.0 Alarm reset signals (serial spindle) ARSTB ○ ○ 10.3
G075.1 Emergency stop signals(serial spindle) *ESPB ○ ○ 10.3
G075.2 Spindle selection signals(serial spindle) SPSLB ○ ○ 10.3
G075.3 MCFNB ○ ○ 10.3
(serial spindle)
Soft start/stop cancel signals(serial
G075.4 SOCNB ○ ○ 10.3
spindle)
G075.5 Speed integral signals (serial spindle) INTGB ○ ○ 10.3
G075.6 RSLB ○ ○ 10.3
spindle)
G075.7 RCHB ○ ○ 10.3
spindle)
G076.0 INDXB ○ ○ 10.3
G076.1 orientation stop position change(serial ROTAB ○ ○ 10.3
spindle)
G076.2 orientation stop position change(serial NRROB ○ ○ 10.3
spindle)
G076.3 DEFMDB ○ ○ 10.3
G076.4 Analog override signals (serial spindle) OVRB ○ ○ 10.3
- 1545 -
Reference
item
G076.5 INCMDB ○ ○ 10.3
orientation signals(serial spindle)
G076.6 MFNHGB ○ ○ 10.3
G076.7 RCHHGB ○ ○ 10.3
G077.0 MORCMB ○ ○ 10.3
G077.1 SLVB ○ ○ 10.3
G077.2 MPOFB ○ ○ 10.3
(serial spindle)
G078.0~G079.3 Spindle orientation external stop position SH00A~SH11A ○ ○ 10.15
G080.0~G081.3 command signals SH00B~SH11B ○ ○ 10.15
G082,G083 Input signals for P-code macro EUI00~EUI15 ○ ○
G087.0,G087.1 Manual handle feed amount selection MP21,MP22 ○ ○
3.2
G087.3,G087.4 signals MP31,MP32 － ○
G096.0~G096.6 1% rapid traverse override signals *HROV0~*HROV6 ○ ○ 7.1.7.1, 7.1.9
1% step rapid traverse override
G096.7 HROV ○ ○ 7.1.7.1, 7.1.9
selection signals
G098 Key code signals EKC0~EKC7 ○ ○ 16.5
G100.0~G100.4 Feed axis and direction selection signals +J1~+J5 ○ ○ 3.1
G101.0~G101.4 External deceleration signals 2 *+ED21~*+ED25 ○ ○ 7.1.9
G102.0~G102.4 Feed axis and direction selection signals -J1~-J5 ○ ○ 3.1
G103.0~G103.4 External deceleration signals 2 *-ED21~*-ED25 ○ ○ 7.1.9
G104.0~G104.4 Stored stroke limit 1 switching signals in +EXL1~+EXL5 ○ ○ 2.3.2
G105.0~G105.4 axis direction -EXL1~-EXL5 ○ ○ 2.3.2
G106.0~G106.4 Mirror image signals MI1~MI5 ○ ○ 1.2.7
G107.0~G107.4 External deceleration signals 3 *+ED31~*+ED35 ○ ○ 7.1.9
G108.0~G108.4 Each-axis machine lock signal MLK1~MLK5 ○ ○ 5.3.1
G109.0~G109.4 External deceleration signals 3 *-ED31~*-ED35 ○ ○ 7.1.9
G110.0~G110.4 +LM1~+LM5 ○ ○
Stroke limit external setting signals 2.3.5
G112.0~G112.4 -LM1~-LM5 ○ ○
G114.0~G114.4 *+L1~*+L5 ○ ○
Overtravel signals 2.3.1
G116.0~G116.4 *-L1~*-L5 ○ ○
G118.0~G118.4 *+ED1~*+ED5 ○ ○
External deceleration signals 1 7.1.9
G120.0~G120.4 *-ED1~*-ED5 ○ ○
G122.0~G122.4 Parking signals PK1~PK5 ○ ○ 8.5
G122.6(G031.6) 1st spindle parking signal PKESS1 ○ ○ 10.17
G122.7(G031.7) 2nd spindle parking signal PKESS2 ○ ○ 10.17
G124.0~G124.4 Controlled axis detach signals DTCH1~DTCH5 ○ ○ 1.2.5
G125.0~G125.4 IUDD1~IUDD5 ○ ○ 2.9
detection ignore signal
G126.0~G126.4 Servo off signals SVF1~SVF5 ○ ○ 1.2.9
Composite control axis change selection
G128.0~G128.4 MIX1~MIX5 ○ ○ 8.5
signals
G130.0~G130.4 Interlock signal for each axis *IT1~*IT5 ○ ○ 2.5
G132.0~G132.4 +MIT1~+MIT5
Interlock signal for each axis direction － ○ 2.5
G134.0~G134.4 -MIT1~-MIT5
G132.0,G132.1 Tool offset write signals +MIT1,+MIT2 ○ － 15.4.2
G134.0,G134.1 Tool offset write signals -MIT1,-MIT2 ○ － 15.4.2
Control axis selection signals(PMC axis
G136.0~G136.4 EAX1~EAX5 ○ ○ 16.1
control)
- 1546 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
Reference
item
Synchronous control axis selection
G138.0~G138.4 SYNC1~SYNC5 ○ ○ 1.6,8.5
signals
Signals for selecting the manual feed
G140.0~G140.4 SYNCJ1~SYNCJ5 ○ ○ 1.6
axis for axis synchronous control
Auxiliary function completion signal (for
G142.0 EFINA ○ ○ 16.1
group 1) (PMC axis control)
Accumulated zero check signal (for
G142.1 ELCKZA ○ ○ 16.1
Buffering disable signals (for group 1)
G142.2 EMBUFA ○ ○ 16.1
(PMC axis control)
Block stop signals (for group 1) (PMC
G142.3 ESBKA ○ ○ 16.1
axis control)
Servo off signals (for group 1) (PMC axis
G142.4 ESOFA ○ ○ 16.1
control)
Axis control temporary stop signals (for
G142.5 ESTPA ○ ○ 16.1
Reset signals (for group 1) (PMC axis
G142.6 ECLRA ○ ○ 16.1
control)
Axis control command read signal (for
G142.7 EBUFA ○ ○ 16.1
Axis control command signals (for group
G143.0~G143.6 EC0A~EC6A ○ ○ 16.1
1) (PMC axis control)
Block stop disable signals (for group 1)
G143.7 EMSBKA ○ ○ 16.1
(PMC axis control)
Axis control feedrate signals (for group
G144,G145 EIF0A~EIF15A ○ ○ 16.1
Axis control data signals (for group 1)
G146~G149 EID0A~EID31A ○ ○ 16.1
(PMC axis control)
Rapid traverse override signals(PMC
G150.0,G150.1 EROV1,EROV2 ○ ○ 16.1
axis control)
Override cancel signal (for group 1)
G150.5 EOVC ○ ○ 16.1
(PMC axis control)
G150.6 ERT ○ ○ 16.1
G150.7 Dry run signal(PMC axis control) EDRN ○ ○ 16.1
Feedrate override signals (for group 1)
G151 *EFOV0~*EFOV7 ○ ○ 16.1
(PMC axis control)
G154.0 EFINB ○ ○ 16.1
G154.1 ELCKZB ○ ○ 16.1
G154.2 EMBUFB ○ ○ 16.1
(PMC axis control)
G154.3 ESBKB ○ ○ 16.1
axis control)
G154.4 ESOFB ○ ○ 16.1
control)
G154.5 ESTPB ○ ○ 16.1
G154.6 ECLRB ○ ○ 16.1
control)
Axis control command read signals (for
G154.7 EBUFB ○ ○ 16.1
G155.0~G155.6 EC0B~EC6B ○ ○ 16.1
- 1547 -
Reference
item
G155.7 EMSBKB ○ ○ 16.1
(PMC axis control)
G156,G157 EIF0B~EIF15B ○ ○ 16.1
G158~G161 EID0B~EID31B ○ ○ 16.1
(PMC axis control)
G162.5 EOVCB ○ ○ 16.1
(PMC axis control)
G163 *EFOV0B~*EFOV7B ○ ○ 16.1
(PMC axis control)
G166.0 EFINC ○ ○ 16.1
G166.1 ELCKZC ○ ○ 16.1
G166.2 EMBUFC ○ ○ 16.1
(PMC axis control)
G166.3 ESBKC ○ ○ 16.1
axis control)
G166.4 ESOFC ○ ○ 16.1
control)
G166.5 ESTPC ○ ○ 16.1
G166.6 ECLRC ○ ○ 16.1
control)
G166.7 EBUFC ○ ○ 16.1
G167.0~G167.6 EC0C~EC6C ○ ○ 16.1
G167.7 EMSBKC ○ ○ 16.1
(PMC axis control)
G168,G169 EIF0C~EIF15C ○ ○ 16.1
G170~G173 EID0C~EID31C ○ ○ 16.1
(PMC axis control)
G174.5 EOVCC ○ ○ 16.1
(PMC axis control)
G175 *EFOV0C~*EFOV7C ○ ○ 16.1
(PMC axis control)
G178.0 EFIND ○ ○ 16.1
axis control)
G178.1 ELCKZD ○ ○ 16.1
G178.2 EMBUFD ○ ○ 16.1
(PMC axis control)
G178.3 ESBKD ○ ○ 16.1
axis control)
G178.4 ESOFD ○ ○ 16.1
control)
G178.5 ESTPD ○ ○ 16.1
G178.6 ECLRD ○ ○ 16.1
control)
G178.7 EBUFD ○ ○ 16.1
- 1548 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
Reference
item
G179.0~G179.6 EC0D~EC6D ○ ○ 16.1
G179.7 EMSBKD ○ ○ 16.1
(PMC axis control)
G180,G181 EIF0D~EIF15D ○ ○ 16.1
G182~G185 EID0D~EID31D ○ ○ 16.1
(PMC axis control)
G186.5 EOVCD ○ ○ 16.1
(PMC axis control)
G187 *EFOV0D~*EFOV7D ○ ○ 16.1
(PMC axis control)
Superimposed control axis selection
G190.0~G190.4 OVLS1~OVLS5 ○ ○ 8.6
signals
G192.0~G192.4 Each-axis VRDY off alarm ignore signal IGVRY1~IGVRY5 ○ ○ 2.8
Reference position return deceleration
G196.0~G196.4 *DEC1~*DEC5 ○ ○ 4.1
signals
Manual handle generators selection
G199.0,G199.1 IOLBH1, IOLBH2 ○ － 3.4
signal
A/B phase detector disconnection alarm
G202 NDCAL1~NDCAL8 ○ － 16.1
ignore signal (PMC axis control)
G204.0 TLMLC ○ － 10.3
(serial spindle)
G204.1 TLMHC ○ － 10.3
(serial spindle)
G204.3,G204.2 Clutch/gear signals (serial spindle) CTH1C,CTH2C ○ － 10.3
G204.4 CCW command signals (serial spindle) SRVC ○ － 10.3
G204.5 CW command signals (serial spindle) SFRC ○ － 10.3
G204.6 ORCMC ○ －
spindle) 10.14
G204.7 Machine ready signals (serial spindle) MRDYC ○ － 10.3
G205.0 Alarm reset signals (serial spindle) ARSTC ○ － 10.3
G205.1 Emergency stop signals (serial spindle) *ESPC ○ － 10.3
G205.2 Spindle selection signals (serial spindle) SPSLC ○ － 10.3
G205.3 MCFNC ○ － 10.3
(serial spindle)
Soft start/stop cancel signals (serial
G205.4 SOCNC ○ － 10.3
spindle)
G205.5 Speed integral signals (serial spindle) INTGC ○ － 10.3
G205.6 RSLC ○ － 10.3
spindle)
G205.7 RCHC ○ － 10.3
spindle)
G206.0 INDXC ○ － 10.3
G206.1 orientation stop position change (serial ROTAC ○ － 10.3
spindle)
G206.2 orientation stop position change (serial NRROC ○ － 10.3
spindle)
G206.3 DEFMDC ○ － 10.3
G206.4 Analog override signals (serial spindle) OVRC ○ － 10.3
- 1549 -
Reference
item
G206.5 INCMDC ○ － 10.3
orientation signals (serial spindle)
G206.6 MFNHGC ○ － 10.3
G206.7 RCHHGC ○ － 10.3
G207.0 MORCMC ○ － 10.3
G207.1 SLVC ○ － 10.3
G207.2 MPOFC ○ － 10.3
(serial spindle)
G210~G211 Data signals for external data input ED31~ED16 ○ ○ 16.2
Simple spindle synchronous control
G264.0~G264.1 ESSYC1~ESSYC2 ○ ○ 10.17
Simple spindle synchronous parking
G265.0~G265.1 PKESE1~PKESE2 ○ ○ 10.17
Cs axis coordinate establishment
G274.4 CSFI1 ○ ○ 10.11.3
request signals (for each spindle)
Spindle synchronous control signal (for
G288.0~G288.1 SPSYC1~SPSYC2 ○ ○ 10.14
each spindle)
G289.0~G289.1 SPPHS1~SPPHS2 ○ ○ 10.14
Machine operation menu screen select
G295.0 EXSFT ○ ○ 13.4
signal
G295.6 Dual display forcible end request signal C2SEND ○ ○ 13.1.9
G295.7 Key control selection signal CNCKY ○ ○ 13.1.9
G352.0~G353.1 0.1% rapid traverse override signals *FHRO0~*FHRO9 ○ ○ 7.1.7.1
0.1% step rapid traverse override
G353.7 FHROV ○ ○ 7.1.7.1
selection signals
Each axis workpiece coordinate system
G358.0~G358.4 WPRST1~WPRST5 ○ ○ 1.5.2.6
preset signals
G376 2nd spindle speed override signals SOV20~SOV27 ○ ○ 10.12
G400.1 Spindle unclamp completion signal *SUCPFB ○ ○ 10.10
G401.1 Spindle clamp completion signal *SCPFB ○ ○ 10.10
G402.1 Spindle stop completion signal SPSTPB ○ ○ 10.10
G408.0 Start check signal STCHK ○ ○ 2.12
G512,G513 Macro call start signal MCST1~MCST16 ○ ○ 16.6
G514.0 Mode change completion signal MCFIN ○ ○ 16.6
G521.0~G521.4 SV speed control mode signals SRVON1~SRVON5 ○ ○ 10.19
G523.0~G523.4 SV reverse signals SVRVS1~SVRVS5 ○ ○ 10.19
Manual tool compensation tool number
G525~G528 MT8N00~MT8N31 ○ － 11.1.4
signal (8 digits)
G531.0 Forward movement prohibition signal FWSTP ○ ○ 3.5
G531.1 Reverse movement prohibition signal MRVM ○ ○ 3.5
Spindle command path specification
G536.7 SPSP ○ ○ 10.12
signal
F000.0 Rewinding signal RWD ○ ○ 5.2
F000.4 Feed hold lamp signal SPL ○ ○ 5.1
F000.5 Cycle start lamp signal STL ○ ○ 5.1
F000.6 Servo ready signal SA ○ ○ 2.2
F000.7 Automatic operation signal OP ○ ○ 5.1
F001.0 Alarm signal AL ○ ○ 2.4
F001.1 Resetting signal RST ○ ○ 5.2
- 1550 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
Reference
item
F001.2 Battery alarm signal BAL ○ ○ 2.4
F001.3 Distribution completion signals DEN ○ ○ 9.1
F001.4 Spindle enable signal ENB ○ ○ 10.6
F001.5 Tapping signal TAP ○ ○ 12.7
F001.7 CNC ready signal MA ○ ○ 2.2
F002.0 Inch input signal INCH ○ ○ 12.5
F002.1 Rapid traversing signal RPDO ○ ○ 2.7,7.1.1
F002.2 Constant surface speed signal CSS ○ ○ 10.8
F002.3 Threading signal THRD ○ ○ 6.5
F002.4 Program restart under way signal SRNMV ○ ○ 5.7
F002.6 Cutting feed signal CUT ○ ○ 2.7
F002.7 Dry run check signal MDRN ○ ○ 5.3.2
F003.0 Incremental feed selection check signal MINC ○ ○ 2.6
Manual handle feed selection check
F003.1 MH ○ ○ 2.6
signal
F003.2 Jog feed selection check signal MJ ○ ○ 2.6
F003.3 Manual data input selection check signal MMDI ○ ○ 2.6
F003.4 DNC operation selection confirm signal MRMT ○ ○ 5.11
Automatic operation selection check
F003.5 MMEM ○ ○ 2.6
signal
F003.6 Memory edit selection check signal MEDT ○ ○ 2.6
F004.0 MBDT1 ○ ○
Optional block skip check signals 5.5
F005 MBDT2~MBDT9 ○ ○
F004.1 All-axis machine lock check signal MMLK ○ ○ 5.3.1
F004.2 Manual absolute check signal MABSM ○ ○ 5.4
F004.3 Single block check signal MSBK ○ ○ 5.3.3
F004.4 Auxiliary function lock check signal MAFL ○ ○ 9.2
Manual reference position return
F004.5 MREF ○ ○ 4.1
F006.0 Touch panel check signal TPPRS ○ ○ 13.1.6
F006.1 MDI reset confirmation signal MDIRST ○ ○ 5.2
F006.2 Automatic screen erasing signal ERTVA ○ ○
F007.0 Auxiliary function strobe signals MF ○ ○ 9.1
F007.2 Spindle function strobe signal SF ○ ○ 9.1
F007.3 Tool function strobe signal TF ○ ○ 9.1
F007.7 2nd auxiliary function strobe signal BF ○ ○ 9.1
F008.4 2nd M function strobe signal MF2 ○ ○ 9.3
F008.5 3rd M function strobe signal MF3 ○ ○ 9.3
F009.4 DM30 ○ ○
F009.5 DM02 ○ ○
Decode M signals 9.1
F009.6 DM01 ○ ○
F009.7 DM00 ○ ○
F010~F013 Auxiliary function code signals M00~M31 ○ ○ 9.1
F014~F015 2nd M function code signals M200~M215 ○ ○ 9.3
F016~F017 3rd M function code signals M300~M315 ○ ○ 9.3
F022~F025 Spindle function code signals S00~S31 ○ ○ 9.1
F026~F029 Tool function code signals T00~T31 ○ ○ 9.1
F030~F033 2nd auxiliary function code signals B00~B31 ○ ○ 9.1
F034.0~F034.2 Gear selection signals (output) GR1O,GR2O,GR3O － ○ 10.6
F034.3 4th serial spindle ready signals SRSP4R ○ ○ 10.3
F034.4 3rd serial spindle ready signals SRSP3R ○ ○ 10.3
F034.5 2nd serial spindle ready signals SRSP2R ○ ○ 10.3
F034.6 1st serial spindle ready signals SRSP1R ○ ○ 10.3
F034.7 All-spindle operation ready signal SRSRDY ○ ○ 10.3
- 1551 -
Reference
item
Spindle fluctuation detection alarm
F035.0 SPAL ○ ○ 10.18
signal
F036.0~F037.3 S12-bit code signals R01O~R12O ○ ○ 10.6
F038.0 Spindle clamp signal SCLPA ○ ○ 10.10
F038.1 Spindle unclamp signal SUCLPA ○ ○ 10.10
F038.2 Spindle enable signal ENB2 ○ ○ 10.12
F039.0 Spindle positioning mode signals MSPOSA ○ ○ 10.10
F040,F041 Actual spindle speed signals AR00~AR15 ○ ○ 10.9
Phase error monitor signal (for each
F043.0~F043.3 SYCAL1~SYCAL4 ○ ○ 10.14,10.17
spindle)
Cs contour control change completion
F044.1 FSCSL ○ ○ 10.11
signal
F044.2 FSPSY ○ ○ 10.14
signal
Spindle synchronous speed control
F044.3 FSPPH ○ ○ 10.14
completion signal
F044.4 Phase error monitor signal SYCAL ○ ○ 10.14,10.17
F045.0 Alarm signals(serial spindle) ALMA ○ ○ 10.3
F045.1 Speed zero signals(serial spindle) SSTA ○ ○ 10.3
F045.2 Speed detection signals(serial spindle) SDTA ○ ○ 10.3
Spindle speed arrival signal(serial
F045.3 SARA ○ ○ 10.3
spindle)
F045.4 Load detection signals 1(serial spindle) LDT1A ○ ○ 10.3
F045.5 Load detection signals 2(serial spindle) LDT2A ○ ○ 10.3
F045.6 Torque limit signals(serial spindle) TLMA ○ ○ 10.3
Orientation completion signals(serial
F045.7 ORARA ○ ○ 10.3
spindle)
F046.0 Power line switch signals(serial spindle) CHPA ○ ○ 10.3
Spindle switch completion signals (serial
F046.1 CFINA ○ ○ 10.3
spindle)
F046.2 Output switch signals(serial spindle) RCHPA ○ ○ 10.3
Output switch completion signals (serial
F046.3 RCFNA ○ ○ 10.3
spindle)
F046.4 SLVSA ○ ○ 10.3
Position coder orientation proximity
F046.5 PORA2A ○ ○ 10.3
signal(serial spindle)
Magnetic sensor orientation completion
F046.6 MORA1A ○ ○ 10.3
Magnetic sensor orientation proximity
F046.7 MORA2A ○ ○ 10.3
Position coder one-rotation signal
F047.0 PC1DEA ○ ○ 10.3
detection status signals(serial spindle)
Incremental orientation mode signals
F047.1 INCSTA ○ ○ 10.3
(serial spindle)
F048.4 Cs axis origin established state signals CSPENA ○ ○ 10.11.3
F049.0 Alarm signals(serial spindle) ALMB ○ ○ 10.3
F049.1 Speed zero signals(serial spindle) SSTB ○ ○ 10.3
F049.2 Speed detection signals(serial spindle) SDTB ○ ○ 10.3
F049.3 SARB ○ ○ 10.3
spindle)
F049.4 Load detection signals 1(serial spindle) LDT1B ○ ○ 10.3
F049.5 Load detection signals 2(serial spindle) LDT2B ○ ○ 10.3
F049.6 Torque limit signals(serial spindle) TLMB ○ ○ 10.3
- 1552 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
Reference
item
F049.7 ORARB ○ ○ 10.3
spindle)
F050.0 Power line switch signals(serial spindle) CHPB ○ ○ 10.3
F050.1 CFINB ○ ○ 10.3
spindle)
F050.2 Output switch signals(serial spindle) RCHPB ○ ○ 10.3
F050.3 RCFNB ○ ○ 10.3
spindle)
F050.4 SLVSB ○ ○ 10.3
F050.5 PORA2B ○ ○ 10.3
F050.6 MORA1B ○ ○ 10.3
F050.7 MORA2B ○ ○ 10.3
F051.0 PC1DEB ○ ○ 10.3
F051.1 INCSTB ○ ○ 10.3
(serial spindle)
F053.0 Key input disable signal INHKY ○ ○ 16.5
F053.1 Key input disable signal PRGDPL ○ ○ 16.5
F053.2 Read/punch busy signal PRBSY ○ ○ 14.2
F053.3 Read/punch alarm signal PRALM ○ ○ 14.2
F053.7 Key code read completion signal EKENB ○ ○ 16.5
F054,F055 UO000~UO015 ○ ○
Output signals for custom macro 12.6
F056~F059 UO100~UO131 ○ ○
Read completion signal for external data
F060.0 EREND ○ ○ 16.2
input
Search completion signal for external
F060.1 ESEND ○ ○ 16.2
data input
Search cancel signal for external data
F060.2 ESCAN ○ ○ 16.2
input
F061.0 B axis unclamp signal BUCLP － ○ 13.12
F061.1 B axis clamp signal BCLP － ○ 13.12
Manual tool compensation uncompleted
F061.4 MTLANG ○ － 11.1.4
signal
Manual tool compensation completion
F061.5 MTLA ○ － 11.1.4
signal
F062.0 AI contour control mode signal AICC ○ ○ 7.1.11
F062.7 Target part count reached signal PRTSF ○ ○ 13.1.1
F063.0 Polygon master axis not arrival signal PSE1 ○ ○ 6.9.2
Polygon synchronization axis not arrival
F063.1 PSE2 ○ ○ 6.9.2
signal
F063.2 Polygon spindle speed arrival signal PSAR ○ ○ 6.9.2
F063.3 Path spindle command confirmation COSP1 ● －
8.8
F063.4 signal COSP2 ● －
F063.6 Waiting signal WATO ● － 8.2
Polygon synchronization under way
F063.7 PSYN ○ ○ 6.9
signal
F064.0 Tool change signal TLCH ○ ○ 11.4
F064.1 New tool select signal TLNW ○ ○ 11.4
F064.2 Individual tool change signal TLCHI ○ ○ 11.4
F064.3 Tool life arrival notice signal TLCHB ○ ○ 11.4
- 1553 -
Reference
item
Path spindle command confirmation
F064.5 COSP ● － 8.8
signal
Path interference check in progress
F064.6 TICHK ● － 8.3
signal
F064.7 Path interference alarm signal TIALM ● － 8.3
F065.0 RGSPP ○ ○
Spindle rotation direction signals 10.13
F065.1 RGSPM ○ ○
Spindle synchronous speed ratio control
F065.2 RSMAX ○ ○ 10.14
clamp signal
F065.4 Retract completion signal RTRCTF ○ ○ 1.9, 6.13
F065.6 EGB mode signal SYNMOD ○ ○ 1.9
Rigid tapping retraction completion
F066.1 RTPT － ○ 5.10
signal
F066.3 Mcahining start point signal RTNMVS ○ ○
Small-hole peck drilling cycle in progress
F066.5 PECK2 － ○ 12.7
signal
F070,F071 Position switch signals PSW01~PSW16 ○ ○ 1.2.10
F072 OUT0~OUT7 ○ ○ 13.1.2
general-purpose switch signals
F073.0 Software operator’s panel signal (MD1) MD1O ○ ○ 13.1.2
F073.4 Software operator’s panel signal (ZRN) ZRNO ○ ○ 13.1.2
F074 OUT8~OUT15 ○ ○ 13.1.2
general-purpose switch signals
F075.2 Software operator’s panel signal (BDT) BDTO ○ ○ 13.1.2
F075.3 Software operator’s panel signal (SBK) SBKO ○ ○ 13.1.2
F075.4 Software operator’s panel signal (MLK) MLKO ○ ○ 13.1.2
F075.5 Software operator’s panel signal (DRN) DRNO ○ ○ 13.1.2
Software operator’s panel signal
F075.6 KEYO ○ ○ 13.1.2
(KEY1~KEY4)
F075.7 Software operator’s panel signal (*SP) SPO ○ ○ 13.1.2
F076.0 Software operator’s panel signal (MP1) MP1O ○ ○ 13.1.2
F076.1 Software operator’s panel signal (MP2) MP2O ○ ○ 13.1.2
F076.3 Rigid tapping-in-progress signal RTAP ○ ○ 10.13
F076.4 Software operator’s panel signal (ROV1) ROV1O ○ ○ 13.1.2
F076.5 Software operator’s panel signal (ROV2) ROV2O ○ ○ 13.1.2
F077.0 Software operator’s panel signal (HS1A) HS1AO ○ ○ 13.1.2
F077.1 Software operator’s panel signal (HS1B) HS1BO ○ ○ 13.1.2
F077.2 Software operator’s panel signal (HS1C) HS1CO ○ ○ 13.1.2
F077.3 Software operator’s panel signal (HS1D) HS1DO ○ ○ 13.1.2
F077.6 Software operator’s panel signal (RT) RTO ○ ○ 13.1.2
F078 *FV0O~*FV7O ○ ○ 13.1.2
(*FV0~*FV7)
F079,F080 *JV0O~*JV15O ○ ○ 13.1.2
(*JV0~*JV15)
F081.0,F081.2, Software operator’s panel signal
+J1O~+J4O ○ ○ 13.1.2
F081.4,F081.6 (+J1~+J4)
F081.1,F081.3, Software operator’s panel signal
-J1O~-J4O ○ ○ 13.1.2
F081.5,F081.7 (-J1~-J4)
F082.2 Reverse execution in-progress signal RVSL － ○ 5.8
F084,F085 Output signals for P-code macro EUO00~EUO15 ○ ○
Servo axis unexpected disturbance
F090.0 ABTQSV ○ ○ 2.9
- 1554 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
Reference
item
1st spindle unexpected disturbance
F090.1 ABTSP1 ○ ○ 2.9
2nd spindle unexpected disturbance
F090.2 ABTSP2 ○ ○ 2.9
F091.0 Reverse movement signal MRVMD ○ ○ 3.5
F091.1 Direction change prohibition signal MNCHG ○ ○ 3.5
F091.2 Reverse movement prohibition signal MRVSP ○ ○ 3.5
F091.3 Check mode confirmation signal MMMOD ○ ○ 3.5
F093.2 Tool life counting disable signal LFCIF ○ ○ 11.4
F093.4 SVWRN1 ○ ○
F093.5 SVWRN2 ○ ○
Servo warning detail signals 18.1
F093.6 SVWRN3 ○ ○
F093.7 SVWRN4 ○ ○
F094.0~F094.4 Reference position return end signals ZP1~ZP5 ○ ○ 4.1
2nd reference position return completion
F096.0~F096.4 ZP21~ZP25 ○ ○ 4.4
signals
3rd reference position return completion
F098.0~F098.4 ZP31~ZP35 ○ ○ 4.4
signals
4th reference position return completion
F100.0~F100.4 ZP41~ZP45 ○ ○ 4.4
signals
F102.0~F102.4 Axis moving signals MV1~MV5 ○ ○ 1.2.6
F104.0~F104.4 In-position signals INP1~INP5 ○ ○ 7.2.5
F106.0~F106.4 Axis moving direction signals MVD1~MVD5 ○ ○ 1.2.6
F108.0~F108.4 Mirror image check signals MMI1~MMI5 ○ ○ 1.2.7
F110.0~F110.4 Controlled axis detach status signals MDTCH1~MDTCH5 ○ ○ 1.2.5
Distribution completion signals(PMC
F112.0~F112.4 EADEN1~EADEN5 ○ ○ 16.1
axis control)
F114.0~F114.4 Torque limit reached signals TRQL1~TRQL5 ○ ○ 15.3.3
Synchronous/composite/superimposed
F118.0~F118.4 SYN1O~SYN5O ○ ○ 8.5,8.6
control under way signals
Reference position establishment
F120.0~F120.4 ZRF1~ZRF5 ○ ○ 4.1
signals
F122.0~F122.3 High-speed skip status signals HDO0~HDO3 ○ ○ 15.3.2
F124.0~F124.4 +OT1~+OT5 ○ ○ 2.3.2
Overtravel alarm signals
F126.0~F126.4 -OT1~-OT5 ○ ○ 2.3.2
F129.5 Override 0% signal(PMC axis control) EOV0 ○ ○ 16.1
Controlled axis selection status
F129.7 *EAXSL ○ ○ 16.1
F130.0 In-position signals(PMC axis control) EINPA ○ ○ 16.1
Following zero checking signals(PMC
F130.1 ECKZA ○ ○ 16.1
axis control)
F130.2 Alarm signal(PMC axis control) EIALA ○ ○ 16.1
Auxiliary function executing signals(PMC
F130.3 EDENA ○ ○ 16.1
axis control)
F130.4 Axis moving signals(PMC axis control) EGENA ○ ○ 16.1
F130.5 EOTPA ○ ○ 16.1
F130.6 EOTNA ○ ○ 16.1
Axis control command read completion
F130.7 EBSYA ○ ○ 16.1
Auxiliary function strobe signals(PMC
F131.0 EMFA ○ ○ 16.1
axis control)
F131.1 Buffer full signals(PMC axis control) EABUFA ○ ○ 16.1
- 1555 -
Reference
item
Auxiliary function 2nd strobe signals
F131.2 EMF2A ○ ○ 16.1
(PMC axis control)
Auxiliary function 3rd strobe signals
F131.3 EMF3A ○ ○ 16.1
(PMC axis control)
Auxiliary function code signals(PMC axis
F132,F142 EM11A~EM48A ○ ○ 16.1
control)
F133.0 In-position signals(PMC axis control) EINPB ○ ○ 16.1
F133.1 ECKZB ○ ○ 16.1
axis control)
F133.2 Alarm signal(PMC axis control) EIALB ○ ○ 16.1
F133.3 EDENB ○ ○ 16.1
axis control)
F133.4 Axis moving signals(PMC axis control) EGENB ○ ○ 16.1
F133.5 EOTPB ○ ○ 16.1
F133.6 EOTNB ○ ○ 16.1
F133.7 EBSYB ○ ○ 16.1
F134.0 EMFB ○ ○ 16.1
axis control)
F134.1 Buffer full signals(PMC axis control) EABUFB ○ ○ 16.1
F134.2 EMF2B ○ ○ 16.1
(PMC axis control)
F134.3 EMF3B ○ ○ 16.1
(PMC axis control)
F135,F145 EM11B~EM48B ○ ○ 16.1
control)
F136.0 In-position signals(PMC axis control) EINPC ○ ○ 16.1
F136.1 ECKZC ○ ○ 16.1
axis control)
F136.2 Alarm signal(PMC axis control) EIALC ○ ○ 16.1
F136.3 EDENC ○ ○ 16.1
axis control)
F136.4 Axis moving signals(PMC axis control) EGENC ○ ○ 16.1
F136.5 EOTPC ○ ○ 16.1
F136.6 EOTNC ○ ○ 16.1
F136.7 EBSYC ○ ○ 16.1
F137.0 EMFC ○ ○ 16.1
axis control)
F137.1 Buffer full signals(PMC axis control) EABUFC ○ ○ 16.1
F137.2 EMF2C ○ ○ 16.1
(PMC axis control)
F137.3 EMF3C ○ ○ 16.1
(PMC axis control)
F138,F148 EM11C~EM48C ○ ○ 16.1
control)
F139.0 In-position signals(PMC axis control) EINPD ○ ○ 16.1
F139.1 ECKZD ○ ○ 16.1
axis control)
F139.2 Alarm signal(PMC axis control) EIALD ○ ○ 16.1
- 1556 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
Reference
item
F139.3 EDEND ○ ○ 16.1
axis control)
F139.4 Axis moving signals(PMC axis control) EGEND ○ ○ 16.1
F139.5 EOTPD ○ ○ 16.1
F139.6 EOTND ○ ○ 16.1
F139.7 EBSYD ○ ○ 16.1
F140.0 EMFD ○ ○ 16.1
axis control)
F140.1 Buffer full signals(PMC axis control) EABUFD ○ ○ 16.1
F140.2 EMF2D ○ ○ 16.1
(PMC axis control)
F140.3 EMF3D ○ ○ 16.1
(PMC axis control)
F141,F151 EM11D~EM48D ○ ○ 16.1
control)
F154.0 Remaining tool count notification signal TLAL － ○ 11.4
F160,F161 Multi-spindle address P signals MSP00~MSP15 ○ ○ 10.12
F168.0 Alarm signals(serial spindle) ALMC ○ － 10.3
F168.1 Speed zero signals(serial spindle) SSTC ○ － 10.3
F168.2 Speed detection signals(serial spindle) SDTC ○ － 10.3
F168.3 SARC ○ － 10.3
spindle)
F168.4 Load detection signals 1(serial spindle) LDT1C ○ － 10.3
F168.5 Load detection signals 2(serial spindle) LDT2C ○ － 10.3
F168.6 Torque limit signals(serial spindle) TLMC ○ － 10.3
F168.7 ORARC ○ － 10.3
spindle)
F169.0 Power line switch signals(serial spindle) CHPC ○ － 10.3
F169.1 CFINC ○ － 10.3
spindle)
F169.2 Output switch signals(serial spindle) RCHPC ○ － 10.3
F169.3 RCFNC ○ － 10.3
spindle)
F169.4 SLVSC ○ － 10.3
F169.5 PORA2C ○ － 10.3
F169.6 MORA1C ○ － 10.3
F169.7 MORA2C ○ － 10.3
F170.0 PC1DEC ○ － 10.3
F170.1 INCSTC ○ － 10.3
(serial spindle)
Absolute position detector battery
F172.6 PBATZ ○ ○ 1.4.3
voltage zero alarm signal
Absolute position detector battery
F172.7 PBATL ○ ○ 1.4.3
voltage low alarm signal
Torque limit reach signals for reference
F180.0~F180.4 CLRCH1~CLRCH5 ○ ○ 4.5
position setting with mechanical stopper
- 1557 -
Reference
item
F182.0~F182.4 Controlling signals(PMC axis control) EACNT1~EACNT5 ○ ○ 16.1
F184.0~F184.4 ABDT1~ABDT5 ○ ○ 2.9
detection signal
Torque control mode signal(PMC axis
F190 TRQM1~TRQM8 ○ ○ 16.1
control)
F200.0~F201.3 S 12-bit code signals R01O2~R12O2 ○ ○ 10.12
F202,F203 Actual spindle speed signals AR002~AR152 ○ ○ 10.9
Machine coordinate match state output
F210.0~F210.4 SYNMT1~SYNMT5 ○ ○ 1.6
signals
Synchronization compensation enable
F211.0~F211.4 SYNOF1~SYNOF5 ○ ○ 1.6
state output signals
F264.0~F265.0 Spindle warning detail signals 1 to 9 SPWRN1~SPWRN9 ○ ○ 10.3
Cs axis coordinate establishment alarm
F274.4 CSFO1 ○ ○ 10.11.3
signals (for each spindle)
F288.0~F288.1 FSPSY1~FSPSY2 ○ ○ 10.14
Spindle synchronous speed control
F289.0~F289.1 FSPPH1~FSPPH2 ○ ○ 10.14
completion signal (for each spindle)
F295.6 Dual display forcible end status signal C2SENO ○ ○ 13.1.9
F295.7 Key control selection status signal CNCKYO ○ ○ 13.1.9
Trouble forecast signal (For the thermal
F298.0~F298.7 TDSML1~TDSML8 ○ ○ 18.3
simulation data)
Trouble forecast signal (For the
F299.0~F299.7 TDFTR1~TDFTR8 ○ ○ 18.3
disturbance level)
Machine operation menu select number
F317.0~F317.7 ESPM1~ESPM8 ○ ○ 13.4
notification signal
Soft key number select state notification
F318.0~F319.1 ESF01~ESF10 ○ ○ 13.4
signal
Synchronous master axis confirmation
F341.0~F341.4 SYCM1~SYCM5 ○ ○ 8.5
signals
Synchronous slave axis confirmation
F342.0~F342.4 SYCS1~SYCS5 ○ ○ 8.5
signals
F343.0~F343.4 Composite axis confirmation signals MIXO1~MIXO5 ○ ○ 8.5
Superimposed control master axis
F344.0~F344.4 OVMO1~OVMO5 ○ ○ 8.6
Superimposed control slave axis
F345.0~F345.4 OVSO1~OVSO5 ○ ○ 8.6
F346.0~F346.4 Parking axis confirmation signals SMPK1~SMPK5 ○ ○ 8.5
Each axis workpiece coordinate system
F358.0~F358.4 WPSF1~WPSF5 ○ ○ 1.5.2.6
preset completion signals
F400.1 Spindle unclamp signal SUCLPB ○ ○ 10.10
F401.1 Spindle clamp signal SCLPB ○ ○ 10.10
F402.1 Spindle positioning mode signals MSPOSB ○ ○ 10.10
Signal for indicating a positional
F403.0 deviation error alarm for axis SYNER ○ ○ 1.6
synchronous control
F512.0 Macro call executing signal MCEXE ○ ○ 16.6
F512.1 Mode change request signal MCRQ ○ ○ 16.6
F512.2 Abnormal end signal MCSP ○ ○ 16.6
- 1558 -
A.INTERFACE BETWEEN
Reference
item
F513.0 MD1R ○ ○
F513.1 MD2R ○ ○
F513.2 Mode notification signal MD4R ○ ○ 16.6
F513.5 DNCIR ○ ○
F513.7 ZRNR ○ ○
F514,F515 Call program confirmation signal MCEX1~MCEX16 ○ ○ 16.6
F520.0 Automatic data backup executing signal ATBK ○ ○
F521.0~F521.4 SV speed control mode signals SVREV1~SVREV5 ○ ○ 10.19
F522.0~F522.4 Spindle indexing signal for each axis SPP1~SPP5 ○ ○ 10.19
F531.3 MDI selection confirmation signal MMDISL ○ ○ 13.1.6
F532.0~F532.4 Axis synchronous control status signals SYNO1 to SYNO5 ○ ○ 1.6
- 1559 -
B.DIFFERENCES FROM Series 0i-C APPENDIX B-64303EN-1/02
B DIFFERENCES FROM Series 0i-C

Appendix B, "Differences from Series 0i-C", consists of the following sections:
B.1 SETTING UNIT..............................................................................................................................1561

B.2 STORED PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION ..............................................................................1562
B.3 WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM......................................................................................1563
B.4 LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEM................................................................................................1564
B.5 AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL.............................................................................................1565
B.6 ARBITRARY ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL ...............................................................................1571
B.7 STORED STROKE CHECK ..........................................................................................................1572
B.8 CHUCK/TAIL STOCK BARRIER (T SERIES)............................................................................1574
B.9 MACHINING CONDITION SELECTION FUNCTION...............................................................1574
B.10 MANUAL HANDLE FEED...........................................................................................................1576
B.11 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN ...........................................................................1577
B.12 RESET AND REWIND ..................................................................................................................1580
B.13 SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING (M SERIES) ....................................................................1581
B.14 MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON AND OFF.........................................................................................1581
B.15 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION....................................................................................................1583
B.16 THREADING CYCLE RETRACT (CANNED CUTTING CYCLE/MULTIPLE REPETITIVE
CANNED CUTTING CYCLE) (T SERIES)..................................................................................1583
B.17 HELICAL INTERPOLATION .......................................................................................................1584
B.18 POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION (T SERIES)............................................................1585
B.19 ADVANCED PREVIEW CONTROL (T SERIES)/AI ADVANCED PREVIEW CONTROL
(M SERIES)/AI CONTOUR CONTROL (M SERIES) .................................................................1587
B.20 WAITING M CODES (T SERIES (2-PATH CONTROL)) ...........................................................1590
B.21 PATH INTERFERENCE CHECK (T SERIES (2-PATH CONTROL))........................................1591
B.22 SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL AND COMPOSITE CONTROL (T SERIES (2-PATH
CONTROL)) ...................................................................................................................................1592
B.23 SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL (T SERIES (2-PATH CONTROL)) .............................................1596
B.24 AUXILIARY FUNCTION/2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION ........................................................1598
B.25 SERIAL/ANALOG SPINDLE CONTROL....................................................................................1599
B.26 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL................................................................................1600
B.27 SPINDLE POSITIONING (T SERIES)..........................................................................................1601
B.28 Cs CONTOUR CONTROL ............................................................................................................1602
B.29 MULTI-SPINDLE CONTROL.......................................................................................................1603
B.30 TOOL FUNCTIONS.......................................................................................................................1604
B.31 TOOL COMPENSATION MEMORY ...........................................................................................1606
B.32 Y AXIS OFFSET (T SERIES)........................................................................................................1607
B.33 CUTTER COMPENSATION/TOOL NOSE RADIUS COMPENSATION..................................1608
B.34 CUSTOM MACRO ........................................................................................................................1614
B.35 INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO................................................................................1616
B.36 CANNED CYCLE FOR DRILLING .............................................................................................1617
B.37 CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES)/MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES) .....1619
B.38 CANNED GRINDING CYCLE .....................................................................................................1620
B.39 MULTIPLE RESPECTIVE CANNED CYCLE FOR TURNING (T SERIES).............................1621
B.40 OPTIONAL ANGLE CHAMFERING AND CORNER ROUNDING (M SERIES).....................1625
B.41 CHAMFERING AND CORNER ROUNDING (T SERIES) .........................................................1626
B.42 DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSIONS PROGRAMMING (T SERIES).........................................1627
B.43 RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT DISPLAY ............................................................................1627
B.44 SCREEN ERASURE FUNCTION AND AUTOMATIC SCREEN ERASURE FUNCTION ......1628
B.45 MEMORY PROTECTION SIGNAL FOR CNC PARAMETER ..................................................1629
- 1560 -
B-64303EN-1/02 APPENDIX B.DIFFERENCES FROM Series 0i-C
B.46 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES)/AUTOMATIC TOOL
OFFSET (T SERIES)......................................................................................................................1630
B.47 SKIP FUNCTION...........................................................................................................................1633
B.48 INPUT OF TOOL OFFSET VALUE MEASURED B (T SERIES) ..............................................1635
B.49 PMC AXIS CONTROL ..................................................................................................................1636
B.50 EXTERNAL DATA INPUT...........................................................................................................1642
B.51 SEQUENCE NUMBER SEARCH .................................................................................................1645
B.52 IN-POSITION CHECK ..................................................................................................................1645
B.53 DATA SERVER FUNCTION ........................................................................................................1646
B.54 POWER MATE CNC MANAGER ................................................................................................1647
B.55 PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER INPUT (G10).......................................................................1647
B.56 EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAM CALL (M198)...............................................................................1648
B.1 SETTING UNIT
B.1.1 Differences in Specifications

Function Explanation
Diameter/radius - Make a selection using bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006.
specification in the
move command for Bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006
each axis The move command for each axis specifies:
0: Radius.
1: Diameter.
With Series 0i-C, in order for an axis whose diameter is specified to travel the specified
distance, it is necessary not only to set 1 in bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006 but also to
make either of the following two changes:
- Reduce the command multiplier (CMR) to half. (The detection unit does not need to
be changed.)
- Reduce the detection unit to half, and double the flexible feed gear (DMR).
With Series 0i-D, by contrast, just setting 1 in bit 3 (DIAx) of parameter No. 1006 causes
the CNC to reduce the command pulses to half, eliminating the need to make the
changes described above (when the detection unit is not changed).
Note that, when the detection unit is reduced to half, both the CMR and DMR need to be
doubled.
B.1.2 Differences in Signals

None.
B.1.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display

None.
- 1561 -
B.2 STORED PITCH ERROR COMPENSATION

Function Explanation
Value of parameter Reference position
No. 3621 for the 0.0
setting of a rotary axis
(type A) 45.0 315.0
(61) (68)
(60)
(62) (67)
(+)
90.0 270.0
(63) (66)
(64) (65)
135.0 225.0
Compensation values are output at
180.0 the positions indicated by ○.
- Amount of movement per rotation: 360°

- Interval between pitch error compensation positions: 45°
- Number of the compensation position of the reference position: 60
In the above case, the values of the parameters are as follows.
Parameter Series 0i-C Series 0i-D
No. 3620: Number of the compensation position of
60 60
the reference position
No. 3621: Smallest compensation position number 60 61
No. 3622: Largest compensation position number 68 68
No. 3623: Compensation magnification 1 1
No. 3624: Interval between compensation positions 45000 45000
No. 3625: Amount of movement per rotation 360000 360000
The value of parameter No. 3621 is as follows.
Series 0i-C
= Number of the compensation position of the reference position (parameter No. 3620)
Series 0i-D
= Number of the compensation position of the reference position (parameter No. 3620) +
1

None.

None.
- 1562 -
B.3 WORKPIECE COORDINATE SYSTEM

Function Series 0i-C Series 0i-D
Change in absolute - Make a selection using bit 5 (AWK) of - Bit 5 (AWK) of parameter No. 1201 is
position display when parameter No. 1201. not available.
the workpiece zero The tool always behaves as when
point offset value is Bit 5 (AWK) of parameter No. 1201 AWK is set to 1.
changed When the workpiece zero point offset value
is changed:
0: Changes the absolute position display
when the program executes the block
that is buffered next.
1: Changes the absolute position display
immediately.
In either case, the changed value does not
take effect until the block that is buffered
next.

Item Series 0i-C Series 0i-D
Each axis workpiece Not available. Available.
coordinate system
preset signals
WPRST1 to WPRST5
<Gn358.0 to
Gn358.4>
Each axis workpiece Not available. Available.
coordinate system
preset completion
signals
WPSF1 to WPSF5
<Fn358.0 to Fn358.4>

None.
- 1563 -
B.4 LOCAL COORDINATE SYSTEM

Clearing of the local - The processing is - The processing is determined by the settings of bit
coordinate system determined by the settings 7 (WZR) of parameter No. 1201, bit 3 (RLC) of
after servo alarm of bit 5 (SNC) and bit 3 parameter No. 1202, bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No.
cancellation (RLC) of parameter No. 3402, and bit 6 (C14) of parameter No. 3407.
1202. Bit 5 (SNC) of parameter No. 1202 is not available.
Bit 3 (RLC) of parameter No. Bit 7 (WZR) of parameter No. 1201

1202 If the CNC is reset by the reset key on the MDI panel,
Upon reset, the local external reset signal, reset and rewind signal, or
coordinate system is: emergency stop signal when bit 6 (CLR) of parameter
0: Not canceled. No. 3402 is set to 0, the G code of group number 14
1: Canceled. (workpiece coordinate system) is:
0: Placed in the reset state.
Bit 5 (SNC) of parameter No. 1: Not placed in the reset state.
1202 NOTE
After servo alarm cancellation, When bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402 is set to 1, the
the local coordinate system is: processing depends on the setting of bit 6 (C14) of
0: Cleared. parameter No. 3407.
1: Not cleared.
NOTE Bit 3 (RLC) of parameter No. 1202
When the RLC bit of the Upon reset, the local coordinate system is:
parameter is set to 1, the local 0: Not canceled.
coordinate system is cleared, 1: Canceled.
even if the SNC bit of the NOTE
parameter is set to 1. - When bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402 is set to 0
and bit 7 (WZR) of parameter No. 1201 is set to 1,
the local coordinate system is canceled, regardless
of the setting of this parameter.
- When bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402 is set to 1
and bit 6 (C14) of parameter No. 3407 is set to 0,
the local coordinate system is canceled, regardless
of the setting of this parameter.
Bit 6 (CLR) of parameter No. 3402

The reset key on the MDI panel, external reset signal,
reset and rewind signal, or emergency stop signal
places the local coordinate system in:
0: Reset state.
1: Clear state.
Bit 6 (C14) of parameter No. 3407

If the CNC is reset by the reset key on the MDI panel,
external reset signal, reset and rewind signal, or
emergency stop signal when bit 6 (CLR) of parameter
No. 3402 is set to 1, the G code of group number 14
(workpiece coordinate system) is:
0: Placed in the clear state.
1: Not placed in the clear state.
- 1564 -
M
Operation with the - Make a selection using bit 4 (G52) of - Bit 4 (G52) of parameter No. 1202 is
local coordinate parameter No. 1202. not available.
system setting (G52) The tool always behaves as when G52
Bit 4 (G52) of parameter No. 1202 is set to 1.
1) If there are two or more blocks that are
not moved before G52 is specified
during cutter compensation, or if G52 is
specified after the cutter compensation
mode is turned off, with the offset
vector maintained, the local coordinate
system setting is performed:
0: Without considering the cutter
compensation vector.
1: Considering the cutter
compensation vector.
2) When G52 is specified, the local
coordinate system setting is performed
for:
0: All axes.
1: Only those axes whose command
addresses are found in the
G52-specified block.

None.

None.
B.5 AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL

Function name - Quick synchronous control - Axis synchronous control
- 1565 -

Setting to perform - Not available. - Depends on bit 5 (SCA) of parameter
synchronous No. 8304 for the slave axis. When 0
operation all the time is set, the processing is the same as
Series 0i-C.
Bit 5 (SCA) of parameter No. 8304

In axis synchronous control:
0: Synchronous operation is performed
when the axis synchronous control
selection signal SYNCx or axis
synchronous control manual feed
selection signal SYNCJx for the slave
axis is set to "1".
1: Synchronous operation is performed all
the time.
Synchronous operation is performed
regardless of the setting of the SYNCx
or SYNCJx signal.
Setting to move - Not available. - Available.
multiple slave axes in This is possible by setting the same
synchronism with the master axis number in parameter No.
master axis 8311 for the multiple slave axes.
Setting of the same - The same name cannot be set for the - The same name can be set for the
name for the master master and slave axes. master and slave axes. In that case,
and slave axes however, automatic operation cannot
be performed in normal operation; only
manual operation is allowed.
Setting of axes for M - The master axis number set in
which to perform quick - The master axis number set in parameter No. 8311 may or may not
synchronous control parameter No. 8311 must be smaller be smaller than the slave axis number.
(axis synchronous than the slave axis number. - The setting method of parameter No.
control) T 8311 for the M series of Series 0i-C is
- The setting method of parameter No. always used.
8311 is different from that used for the
M series.
Synchronization error M - The servo positional difference
check based on - The servo positional difference between the master and slave axes is
positional difference between the master and slave axes is monitored, and alarm DS0001 is
monitored, and alarm PS0213 is issued issued if the difference exceeds the
if the difference exceeds the limit value limit value set in parameter No. 8323
set in parameter No. 8313 when the for the slave axis. At the same time,
number of synchronized axis pairs is the signal for indicating a positional
one or the limit value set in parameter difference error alarm for axis
No. 8323 for the master axis when the synchronous control SYNER<F403.0>
number of synchronized axis pairs is is output.
two. Parameter No. 8313 is not available.
Regardless of the number of pairs, set
- The data range of parameter No. 8323 the limit value in parameter No. 8323.
is as follows:
[Data range] - The data range of parameter No. 8323
0 to 32767 is as follows:
T [Data range]
- Not available. 0 to 999999999
- 1566 -

Synchronization error M - The machine coordinates of the master
check based on - The machine coordinates of the master and slave axes are compared and, if
machine coordinates and slave axes are compared and, if the difference is greater than the value
the difference is greater than the value set in parameter No. 8314 for the slave
set in parameter No. 8314 for the axis, alarm SV0005 is issued and the
master axis, alarm SV0407 is issued motor is stopped immediately.
and the motor is stopped immediately.
- The data range of parameter No. 8314
- The data range of parameter No. 8314 is as follows:
is as follows: [Data range]
[Data range] 0 or positive 9 digits of the minimum
0 to 32767 unit of data. (For IS-B, 0.0 to
T +999999.999)
- Not available.
Setting of M - Synchronization establishment is
synchronization - Synchronization establishment is enabled by setting 1 in bit 7 (SOF) of
establishment enabled by setting 1 in bit 7 (SOF) of parameter No. 8303 for the slave axis.
parameter No. 8301 when the number (Bit 7 (SOF) of parameter No. 8301 is
of synchronized axis pairs is one or by not available. Regardless of the
setting 1 in bit 7 (SOF) of parameter number of pairs, set 1 in bit 7 (SOF) of
No. 8303 for the master axis when the parameter No. 8303.)
number of synchronized axis pairs is
two.
T
- Synchronization establishment is not
available.
Timing of M - Synchronization establishment is
synchronization - Synchronization establishment is performed when:
establishment performed when: 1. Power is turned on when the absolute
1. Power is turned on when the absolute position detector is used.
position detector is used. 2. Manual reference position return
2. Emergency stop is canceled. operation is performed.
T 3. The state of servo position control is
- Synchronization establishment is not changed from off to on.
available. (This occurs when emergency stop, servo
alarm, servo off, etc. is canceled. Note,
however, that synchronization
establishment is not performed at the time
of axis removal cancellation.)
- 1567 -

Maximum M - Set the value in parameter No. 8325
compensation for - Set the value in parameter No. 8315 for the slave axis.
synchronization when the number of synchronized axis If the compensation amount exceeds
pairs is one or in parameter No. 8325 the values set in this parameter, alarm
for the master axis when the number of SV0001 occurs.
synchronized axis pairs is two. (Parameter No. 8315 is not available.
If the compensation amount exceeds Regardless of the number of pairs, set
the values set in the relevant the value in parameter No. 8325.)
parameter, alarm SV0410 occurs.
- The data unit and data range of
- The data unit and data range of parameter No. 8325 are as follows:
parameter Nos. 8315 and 8325 are as [Data unit]
follows: Machine unit
[Data unit] [Data range]
Detection unit 0 or positive 9 digits of the minimum
[Data range] unit of data. (For IS-B, 0.0 to
0 to 32767 +999999.999)
T
- Synchronization establishment is not
available.
Automatic setting for M - Set 1 in bit 0 (ATE) of parameter No.
grid position matching - Enable automatic setting for grid 8303 for the slave axis to enable
position matching by setting 1 in bit 0 automatic setting for grid position
(ATE) of parameter No. 8302 when the matching.
number of synchronized axis pairs is (Bit 0 (ATE) of parameter No. 8302 is
one or in bit 0 (ATE) of parameter No. not available. Regardless of the
8303 when the number of synchronized number of pairs, set the value in bit 0
axis pairs is two. (ATE) of parameter No. 8303.)
- Start automatic setting for grid position - Set 1 in bit 1 (ATS) of parameter No.
matching by setting 1 in bit 1 (ATS) of 8303 for the slave axis to start
parameter No. 8302 when the number automatic setting for grid position
of synchronized axis pairs is one or in matching.
bit 1 (ATS) of parameter No. 8303 (Bit 1 (ATS) of parameter No. 8302 is
when the number of synchronized axis not available. Regardless of the
pairs is two. number of pairs, set the value in bit 1
T (ATS) of parameter No. 8303.)
- Automatic setting for grid position
matching is not available.
Difference between M - Set the value in parameter No. 8326
the master axis - Set the value in parameter No. 8316 for the slave axis.
reference counter and when the number of synchronized axis (Parameter No. 8316 is not available.
slave axis reference pairs is one or in parameter No. 8326 Regardless of the number of pairs, set
counter obtained for the master axis. the value in parameter No. 8326.)
through automatic T
setting for grid - Automatic setting for grid position
positioning matching is not available.
Time from the servo M - Set the value in parameter No. 8327
preparation - Set the value in parameter No. 8317 for the slave axis.
completion signal SA when the number of synchronized axis (Parameter No. 8317 is not available.
<F000.6> being set to pairs is one or in parameter No. 8327 Regardless of the number of pairs, set
1 until torque for the master axis when the number of the value in parameter No. 8327.)
difference alarm synchronized axis pairs is two.
detection is started T
- Torque difference alarm detection is
not available.
- 1568 -

Setting to use the M - Bit 3 (SSE) of parameter No. 8302 is
external machine - When 1 is set in bit 3 (SSE) of not available.
coordinate system parameter No. 8302, setting an By setting 1 in bit 7 (SYE) of parameter
shift function for the external machine coordinate system No. 8304 for the slave axis, the slave
slave axis shift for the master axis causes the axis is shifted as well when an external
slave axis to shift as well. machine coordinate system shift is set
This parameter is used for all the pairs. for the corresponding master axis.
T This parameter is used individually for
- Not available. each slave axis.
Setting to prevent M - Bit 7 (SMF) of parameter No. 3105 is
slave axis movement - Setting 1 in bit 7 (SMF) of parameter not available.
from being added to No. 3105 prevents slave axis Setting 0 in bit 2 (SAF) of parameter
the actual feedrate movement from being added to the No. 8303 prevents slave axis
display actual feedrate display. movement from being added to the
This parameter is used for all the pairs. actual feedrate display. (Note that the
T meaning of the value is the opposite
- Not available. Slave axis movement from bit 7 (SMF) of parameter No.
is always added to the actual feedrate 3105.)
display. This parameter is used individually for
each slave axis.
Change of the - Specify an M code that is not to be - Specify an M code that changes the
synchronization state buffered. synchronization state (parameter No.
during a program Using this M code, change the input 8337 or 8338).
command signal - SYNCx<G138> or By changing the input signal -
SYNCJx<G140> - from the PMC side. SYNCx<G138> or SYNCJx<G140> -
from the PMC side using this M code,
it is possible to change the
synchronization state during a program
command.
Parameter No. 8337

Specify an M code that changes
synchronous operation to normal operation.
Parameter No. 8338

Specify an M code that changes normal
operation to synchronous operation.
Automatic slave axis M - Bit 4 (TRP) of parameter No. 12762 is
parameter setting - This function is enabled by setting 1 in not available.
bit 4 (SYP) of parameter No. 8303 for This function is enabled by setting 1 in
the master axis. bit 4 (SYP) of parameter No. 8303 for
T the master and slave axes.
- This function is enabled by setting 1 in
bit 4 (TRP) of parameter No. 12762 for
the master axis.
T
Number of pairs for - One pair (two pairs for the M series) - Two pairs (also two pairs for the M
synchronous series)
operation
Synchronous - Synchronous operation is not available - Setting axis synchronous control
operation during in jog, handle, or manual incremental manual feed selection signal SYNCJx
manual operation feed. to 1 enables synchronous operation
even in jog, handle, or manual
incremental feed.
- 1569 -
M
Mirror image for the - A mirror image cannot be applied to a - By setting parameter No. 8312 for the
slave axis slave axis during quick synchronous slave axis, a mirror image can be
control. It can be applied only to the T applied to a slave axis during quick
series. synchronous control.
Setting to cancel the - Depends on bit 5 (SYE) of parameter - Not available.
check of positional No. 8301. Therefore, bit 5 (SYE) of parameter
difference between No. 8301 is not available.
the master and slave Bit 5 (SYE) of parameter No. 8301 Since the positional difference is
axes during During synchronization establishment, the always checked, parameter No. 8318
synchronization positional difference limit is: is not available, either.
establishment 0: Checked.
1: Not checked. Parameter No. 8318
Set the time from the synchronization
establishment function outputting a
compensation pulse to the slave axis until
the check of the positional difference limit
between the master and slave axes starts.

Torque difference - Not available. - Available (NSYNCA<Gn059.7>).
alarm detection Setting this signal to 1 disables torque
disable signal difference alarm detection.
Axis synchronous - Not available. - Available (SYNO1 <Fn532.0 to
control signal Fn532.4> to SYNO5 <Fn532.0 to
Fn532.4>).
This signal is output to the slave axis
subject to axis synchronous control.

Positional difference - This item is displayed in diagnosis No. - This item is displayed in diagnosis No.
between the master 540 for the master axis when the 3500 for the slave axis.
and slave axes number of synchronized axis pairs is (Regardless of the number of pairs, the
one or in diagnosis No. 541 for the item is displayed in diagnosis No.
master axis when the number of 3500.)
synchronized axis pairs is two.
- 1570 -
B.6 ARBITRARY ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL

Angular and
perpendicular axes Series 0i-C Series 0i-D
when an invalid value Angular Perpendicular
is set in parameter Angular axis Perpendicular axis
axis axis
No. 8211 or 8212 Y-axis of the basic Z-axis of the basic
M Y axis Z axis (3rd three axes (axis with three axes (axis with
series (2nd axis) axis) 2 set in parameter 3 set in parameter
No. 1022) No. 1022)
X-axis of the basic Z-axis of the basic
T X axis (1st Z axis (2nd three axes (axis with three axes (axis with
series axis) axis) 1 set in parameter 3 set in parameter
No. 1022) No. 1022)
Reference position - Select the signal using bit 3 (AZP) of - Bit 3 (AZP) of parameter No. 8200 is
return completion parameter No. 8200. not available.
signal ZP for the When the bit is set to 0, ZP is not set to ZP is always set to "0". (The signal is
perpendicular axis "0". (The signal is not cleared.) cleared.)
moved with the When the bit is set to 1, ZP is set to
angular axis "0". (The signal is cleared.)
<Fn094, Fn096,
Fn098, Fn100>
When an angular axis - Select the perpendicular axis operation - Bit 6 (A53) of parameter No. 8201 is
is specified using bit 6 (A53) of parameter No. not available.
individually in machine 8201. Only the angular axis is always moved.
coordinate system When the bit is set to 0, the
selection (G53) during perpendicular axis is also moved.
arbitrary angular axis When the bit is set to 1, only the
control angular axis is moved.
G30 command during - Select the operation using bit 0 (A30) - Bit 0 (A30) of parameter No. 8202 is
arbitrary angular axis of parameter No. 8202. not available.
control When the bit is set to 0, the operation The operation is always for the angular
is for the perpendicular coordinate coordinate system.
system.
When the bit is set to 1, the operation
is for the angular coordinate system.

Reference position See the "Differences in Specifications" section.
return completion
signal ZP
<Fn094, Fn096,
Fn098, Fn100>

None.
- 1571 -
B.7 STORED STROKE CHECK

Stored stroke check - This function is always enabled for all - It is possible to select whether to
immediately following axes. enable or disable the function on an
powering on axis-by-axis basis using bit 0 (DOT) of
parameter No. 1311.
Bit 0 (DOT) of parameter No. 1311

The stored stroke limit check immediately
following powering on is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
NOTE
This function stores machine coordinates
using software and therefore imposes a
burden on the system. Disable the
function for those axes that do not require
it. Movements made while the power is
off are not reflected on the machine
coordinate system immediately after
powering on.
- Machine coordinates are set upon - Machine coordinates are set upon
powering on. powering on.
Absolute and relative coordinates are not Absolute and relative coordinates are
set. set based on these machine
(They are set when the absolute position coordinates.
detector is provided.)
Y and J address T - Available for both the T series and M
specification using Not available. series.
G22 M
Not available.
Overtravel alarm - Stored stoke check 2 does not support - Stored stoke check 2 also supports bit
bit 7 (BFA) of parameter No. 1300. 7 (BFA) of parameter No. 1300.
Therefore, if an interference alarm Setting 1 in BFA allows the tool to stop
occurs, the tool stops after entering the before entering the prohibited area,
prohibited area. thus eliminating the need to make the
This makes it necessary to make the prohibited area slightly larger than
prohibited area slightly larger than actually necessary.
actually necessary.
Bit 7 (BFA) of parameter No. 1300
If a stored stoke check 1, 2, or 3 alarm
occurs, if an interference alarm occurs with
the inter-path interference check function
(T series), or if an alarm occurs with
chuck/tail stock barrier (T series), the tool
stops:
0: After entering the prohibited area.
1: Before entering the prohibited area.
- 1572 -

Operation - When the operation is resumed, the - When the operation is resumed, the
continuation after tool moves the remaining travel tool moves toward the end point of the
automatic alarm distance of the block that caused the block that caused the soft OT, causing
cancellation when a soft OT. Therefore, the program can another soft OT and making it
soft OT1 alarm is be continued if the tool is moved impossible to continue the program.
issued during the through manual intervention beyond For details, refer to "STORED
execution of an the remaining travel distance. STROKE CHECK 1" in
absolute command in "CONNECTION MANUAL
automatic operation (FUNCTION)" (B-64303EN).
M
Block that judges the - A selection can be made using bit 5 - Bit 5 (ODA) of parameter No. 7055 is
distance to the stored (ODA) of parameter No. 7055. not available.
stroke limit in AI The distance is always judged with respect
advanced preview Bit 5 (ODA) of parameter No. 7055 to the axes specified in the current block.
control or AI contour The distance to the stored stroke limit in AI
control mode advanced preview control or AI contour
control mode is judged with respect to:
0: Axes specified in the current and next
blocks.
1: Axes specified in the current block.

Stroke check 1 T Available for both the T series and M
release signal Not available. series.
RLSOT<Gn007.7> M
Available.
Overtravel alarm T Available for both the T series and M
signal Not available. series.
+OT1 to +OT5 M
<Fn124.0 to Fn124.4> Available.
-OT1 to -OT5
<Fn126.0 to Fn126.4>

None.
- 1573 -
B.8 CHUCK/TAIL STOCK BARRIER (T SERIES)

T

Overtravel alarm - Bit 7 (BFA) of parameter No. 1300 is - Bit 7 (BFA) of parameter No. 1300 is
not supported. supported.
actually necessary.
If a stored stoke check 1, 2, or 3 occurs, if
an interference alarm occurs with the
inter-path interference check function (T
series), or if an alarm occurs with chuck/tail
stock barrier (T series), the tool stops:

None.

None.
B.9 MACHINING CONDITION SELECTION FUNCTION

Differences common to advanced preview control, AI advanced preview
control, and AI contour control
Parameters set by - The following parameters are set - The following parameters are set
"acceleration/deceleration according to the precision level: according to the precision level:
before interpolation" [Parameter No. 1770] [Parameter No. 1660]
(machining parameter Maximum cutting feedrate in linear Maximum permissible cutting
adjustment screen) acceleration/deceleration before feedrate in acceleration/deceleration
interpolation before interpolation on each axis
[Parameter No. 1771] (Series 0i-D does not have
Time before the maximum cutting parameter Nos. 1770 and 1771.)
feedrate in linear
acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation (parameter No. 1770) is
reached
- 1574 -

Parameter 1 set by - The following parameters are set - The following parameters are set
"permissible acceleration" according to the precision level: according to the precision level:
(machining parameter [Parameter No. 1730] [Parameter No. 1735]
adjustment screen) Upper limit of the feedrate by arc Permissible acceleration in speed
radius-based feedrate clamp control with acceleration in circular
[Parameter No. 1731] interpolation
Arc radius corresponding to the upper (Series 0i-D does not have
limit of the feedrate by arc parameter Nos. 1730 and 1731.
radius-based feedrate clamp Also, "arc radius-based feedrate
(parameter No. 1730) clamp" has been renamed "speed
control with acceleration in circular
interpolation".)
M
Differences regarding AI advanced preview control and AI contour control
Parameter 2 set by - The following parameters are set - The following parameters are set
"permissible according to the precision level: according to the precision level:
acceleration" [Parameter No. 1432] [Parameter No. 1737]
(machining parameter Maximum cutting feedrate Permissible acceleration for speed
adjustment screen) [Parameter No. 1785] control with the acceleration on each
Time before the maximum cutting axis
feedrate (parameter No. 1432) is (Series 0i-D does not have parameter
reached No. 1785. Also, "acceleration-based
(Set this to determine the permissible feedrate clamp" has been renamed
acceleration for acceleration-based "speed control with the acceleration on
feedrate clamp.) each axis".)

None.

None.
- 1575 -
B.10 MANUAL HANDLE FEED

Handle pulses If manual handle feed exceeding the rapid traverse rate is specified, whether to ignore or
exceeding the rapid accumulate handle pulses exceeding the rapid traverse feedrate can be set as follows.
traverse rate - Depends on bit 4 (HPF) of parameter - Bit 4 (HPF) of parameter No. 7100 is
No. 7100. The amount of pulses to be not available. Whether to ignore or
accumulated is set in parameter No. accumulate excess handle pulses is
7117. determined by the amount to be
accumulated that is set in parameter
No. 7117.
[When parameter No. 7117 = 0]
Ignored.
[When parameter No. 7117 > 0]
Accumulated in the CNC without being
ignored.
Permissible amount of - The value range of parameter No. 7117 - The value range of parameter No.
pulses for manual is 0 to 99999999 (8 digits). 7117 is 0 to 999999999 (9 digits).
handle feed
Value range of the - For parameter Nos. 7113, 7131, 7133, - For parameter No. 7113, 7114, 7131,
magnification and 12350, magnification ranges from 7132, 7133, 7134, 12350, and 12351,
parameter for manual 1 to 127. magnification ranges from 1 to 2000.
handle feed For parameter Nos. 7114, 7132, 7134,
and 12351, magnification ranges from
1 to 1000.
Parameter No. 7113 Parameter No. 7114
Magnification when manual handle feed Magnification when manual handle feed
amount selection signals MP1 = 0 and MP2 amount selection signals MP1 = 1 and MP2
=1 =1
[When bit 5 (MPX) of parameter No. 7100 = 0]
Magnification common to all the generators in the path
[When bit 5 (MPX) of parameter No. 7100 = 1]
Magnification used by the first generator in the path
amount selection signals MP21 = 0 and amount selection signals MP21 = 1 and
MP22 = 1 MP22 = 1
When bit 5 (MPX) of parameter No. 7100 is set to 1, the magnification used by the second
generator in the path applies.
amount selection signals MP31 = 0 and amount selection signals MP31 = 1 and
MP32 = 1 MP32 = 1
When bit 5 (MPX) of parameter No. 7100 is set to 1, the magnification used by the third
generator in the path applies.
Magnification when per-axis manual handle Magnification when per-axis manual handle
feed amount selection signals MP1 = 0 and feed amount selection signals MP1 = 1 and
MP2 = 1 MP2 = 1
- 1576 -
T
Number of manual - Set the value in parameter No. 7110. - Parameter No. 7110 is not available.
pulse generators used Up to two generators or three
generators (an optional function for
0i-TD) can be used without setting the
parameter.
M
Number of manual - Set the value in parameter No. 7110. - Parameter No. 7110 is not available.
pulse generators used Up to two generators can be used
without setting the parameter.

None.

None.
B.11 MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN

Conditions for Manual reference position return is performed when automatic operation is halted (feed
performing manual hold) and when any of the following conditions is met:
reference position <Conditions>
return during feed (1) Travel distance is remaining.
hold (2) An auxiliary function (M, S, T, or B function) is being executed.
(3) A dwell, canned cycle, or other cycle is in progress.
- Depends on bit 2 (OZR) of parameter - Bit 2 (OZR) of parameter No. 1800 is
No. 1800. not available.
[When OZR = 0] Alarm PS0091 occurs, and manual
Alarm PS0091 occurs, and manual reference position return is not
reference position return is not performed.
performed.
[When OZR = 1]
Manual reference position return is
performed without issuing an alarm.
When inch/metric - The reference position is lost. - The reference position is not lost.
switch is done (The reference position is not (The reference position remains
established.) established.)
Reference position - Set 1 in bit 1 (DLZ) of parameter No. - Bit 1 (DLZ) of parameter No. 1002 is
setting without dogs 1002. not available.
for all axes Reference position setting without
dogs (bit 1 (DLZx) of parameter No.
1005) is set for all axes.
- 1577 -

Function that performs - Not available. - Depends on bit 4 (GRD) of parameter
reference position No. 1007.
setting without dogs
two or more times Bit 4 (GRD) of parameter No. 1007
when the reference For the axis on which absolute values are
position is not detected, when correspondence between
established in the machine position and the position by
absolute position the absolute position detector is not
detection completed, the reference position setting
without dogs is:
0: Not performed two or more times.
1: Performed two or more times.
Behavior when T - [Rotation axis type = A and bit 0
manual reference - [When bit 0 (RTLx) of parameter No. (RTLx) of parameter No. 1007 = 0]
position return is 1007 = 0] Movement is made at the reference
started on a rotation Movement is made at the rapid position return feedrate FL even if the
axis with the traverse feedrate until the grid is grid is not established.
deceleration dog established. Releasing the deceleration dog before
pressed before a If the deceleration dog is released the grid is established causes alarm
reference position is before the grid is established, one PS0090.
established revolution is made at the rapid traverse [Rotation axis type = A and bit 0
feedrate, thus establishing the grid. (RTLx) of parameter No. 1007 = 1]
Pressing the deceleration dog again Movement is made at the rapid
establishes the reference position. traverse feedrate until the grid is
[When bit 0 (RTLx) of parameter No. established.
1007 = 1] If the deceleration dog is released
Movement is made at the reference before the grid is established, one
position return feedrate FL even if the revolution is made at the rapid traverse
grid is not established. feedrate, thus establishing the grid.
Releasing the deceleration dog before Pressing the deceleration dog again
the grid is established causes alarm establishes the reference position.
PS0090. [Rotation axis type = B]
M Does not depend on bit 0 (RTLx) of
- Does not depend on bit 0 (RTLx) of parameter No. 1007.
parameter No. 1007. Movement is made at the reference
Movement is made at the reference position return feedrate FL even if the
position return feedrate FL even if the grid is not established.
grid is not established. Releasing the deceleration dog before
Releasing the deceleration dog before the grid is established causes alarm
the grid is established causes alarm PS0090.
PS0090.
Reference position - Available only for the M series in Series - Available for all series in Series 0i-D.
shift function 0i-C and earlier.
Reference position - The function is enabled for all axes by - Bit 2 (SFD) of parameter No. 1002 is
shift function setting setting 1 in bit 2 (SFD) of parameter not available.
No. 1002. Set bit 4 (SFDx) of parameter No.
1008 for each axis.
Setting of whether to - Not available. - Depends on bit 1 (HZP) of parameter
preset the coordinate The coordinate system is not preset. No. 1206.
system upon
high-speed manual Bit 1 (HZP) of parameter No.1206
reference position Upon high-speed manual reference
return position return, the coordinate system is:
0: Preset.
1: Not preset (FS0i-C compatible
specification).
- 1578 -
M
G28/G30 command in - Not available. - The command can be executed only
the coordinate system Cancel the mode before executing the when all of the conditions described
rotation, scaling, or command. below are met.
programmable mirror Otherwise, alarm PS0412 occurs.
image mode
<Conditions>
[Conditions required before specifying the
command]
(1) An absolute command is specified for
the target axis of coordinate system
rotation, scaling, or programmable
mirror image.
(2) Tool length compensation has not
been performed for the target axis of
coordinate system rotation, scaling, or
programmable mirror image when it is
moved by reference position return.
(3) Tool length compensation has been
canceled.
[Conditions required when specifying the
command]
(4) In an incremental command, the travel
distance of the middle point is 0.
[Conditions required after specifying the
command]
(5) The first move command specified for
the target axis of coordinate system
rotation, scaling, or programmable
mirror image is an absolute command.

None.

None.
- 1579 -
B.12 RESET AND REWIND

Modal data when - If reset occurs during the execution of a block, the states of the modal G codes and
reset during the modal addresses (N, F, S, T, M, etc.) specified in that block are handled as follows.
execution of a block Maintained. Not maintained. The states return to
those of the modal data specified in the
preceding blocks.
(The modal data is updated after the
specified block is fully executed.)
Example) If reset occurs before

positioning is completed in the N2 block in
the program shown below, the T code and
offset return to the data of the preceding
tool (T0101) data.
N1 G00 X120. Z0. T0101 ;

;
N2 G00 X180. Z20. T0202 ;
;
Information in a block - The information in the block may or - The information in the block is not held
that is pre-read when may not be held depending on whether regardless whether MDI mode is in
a reset is made during MDI mode is in progress. progress.
an automatic In MDI mode
operation (contents of The information in the block is
the buffer) held.
In modes other than MDI mode
The information in the block is not
held.

None.

None.
- 1580 -
B.13 SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING (M SERIES)

M

Behavior when linear If positioning of linear interpolation type is used (1 is set in bit 1 (LRP) of parameter No.
interpolation type 1401), and if the state of mirror image when a single direction positioning block is looked
positioning is used ahead differs from the state of mirror image when the execution of the block is started, the
with mirror image following alarms are issued, respectively.
- Alarm PS5254 - Alarm DS0025

None.

None.
B.14 MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON AND OFF

Absolute coordinates - If tool compensation is automatically changed when the manual absolute signal
during automatic tool *ABSM(Gn006.2) is set to 1, absolute coordinates are handled as follows.
compensation change Absolute coordinates are not changed. Absolute coordinates are changed
according to the amount of tool
compensation resulting from the coordinate
shift.
Operation at - When the block intervened manually - In case of incremental command and
manual absolute on ends, the tool is at the position which bit 1 (ABS) of parameter No. 7001 is
shifts by manual intervention. (Fig.1) set to 0, when the block intervened
(Even incremental command and manually ends, the tool is at the
absolute command, the result is the position which shifts by manual
same) intervention. (Fig.1)
- In case of absolute command or bit 1
(ABS) of parameter No. 7001 is set to
1, when the block intervened manually
ends, the tool is at the programmed
position. (Fig.2)
- 1581 -
After restarting operation, the tool moves the block of

the remainder in parallel to programmed path.
The tool returns to the end

restart point of next block by
operating the next block.
manual intervention
feed hold manual intervention amount
block intervened manually next block
programmed path Fig. 1
After restarting operation, the tool moves to the

end point of the block intervened manually.
restart
manual intervention The tool moves
the programmed path.
feed hold
block intervened manually next block
programmed path
Fig. 2

None.

None.
- 1582 -
B.15 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION

Interpolation method If the difference between the radius values of the start point and end point of an arc is
when the arc end greater than the value set in parameter No. 3410, alarm PS0020 is issued. If the
point is not on the arc difference is smaller (the end point is not on the arc), circular interpolation is performed as
follows.
- Circular interpolation is performed - Helical interpolation is performed as
using the radius value of the start point shown in the figure below.
and, when an axis reaches the end End point
point, it is moved linearly. γe

γ(t) ( γ e − γ s) θ(t )
γ (t) = γ s +
Start θ θ
Parameter No. 3410
θ(t)
point
γs 中心
In a circular interpolation command, set the Radius
limit allowed for the difference between the Start point

γs
radius values of the start point and end γe End point
point.
Center θ
θ
In other words, the radius of the arc moves

linearly according to the center angle θ(t).
Specifying an arc where the arc radius of
the start point differs from that of the end
point enables helical interpolation. When
performing helical interpolation, set a large
value in parameter No. 3410 that specifies
the limit for the arc radius difference.

None.

None.
B.16 THREADING CYCLE RETRACT (CANNED CUTTING

CYCLE/MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNED CUTTING
CYCLE) (T SERIES)
T

Return position after - The tool returns to the start point of the - The tool returns to the start point of the
chamfering in multiple current cycle. For example, if it is the threading cycle. This means that the
repetitive threading nth cycle, the tool returns to the tool returns to the position where it was
cycle (G76) position where the nth cut has been before cutting, no matter how many
made. cycles it has undergone.
- 1583 -

Retraction after - The specifications are as follows. - Depends on bit 0 (CFR) of parameter
chamfering No. 1611. When 0 is set, the
[Acceleration/deceleration type] processing is the same as Series 0i-C.
Acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation for threading is used. Bit 0 (CFR) of parameter No. 1611
[Time constant] In threading cycle G92 or G76, retraction
The time constant for threading after threading uses:
(parameter No. 1626) is used. 0: Type of acceleration/deceleration after
[Feedrate] interpolation for threading, together
The feedrate set in parameter No. 1466 with the threading time constant
is used. (parameter No.1626) and the feedrate
set in parameter No.1466.
1: Type of acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation for rapid traverse,
together with the rapid traverse time
constant and the rapid traverse rate.

None.

None.
B.17 HELICAL INTERPOLATION

Specification of the - Specify the feedrate along a circular - Make a selection using bit 5 (HTG) of
feedrate arc. Therefore, the feedrate of the parameter No. 1403.
linear axis is as follows: 0: Same as left.
1: Specify a feedrate along the tool path
Length of linear axis including the linear axis. Therefore, the
F × tangential velocity of the arc is expressed
Length of circular arc as follows:
Length of arc
F×
(Length of arc)2＋(Length of linear axis)2
The velocity along the linear axis is expressed

as follows:
Length of linear axis

F×
(Length of arc)2＋(Length of linear axis)2
For details, refer to "HELICAL

INTERPOLATION" in "CONNECTION
MANUAL (FUNCTION)" (B-64303EN).
- 1584 -

Helical cutting - Make a selection using bit 0 (HFC) - Bit 0 (HFC) of parameter No. 1404 is not
feedrate clamp of parameter No. 1404. available.
0: The feedrate of the arc and The feedrate of the arc and linear axes is
linear axes is clamped by clamped by parameter No. 1430.
parameter No. 1422 or
No.1430.
1: The combined feedrate along
the tool path including the
linear axis is clamped by
parameter No. 1422.

None.

None.
B.18 POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION (T SERIES)

T

Coordinate system - Not available. - Enable or disable the function using bit
shift during polar 2 (PLS) of parameter No. 5450.
coordinate
interpolation (polar Bit 2 (PLS) of parameter No. 5450
coordinate The polar coordinate interpolation shift
interpolation shift function is:
function) 0: Not used.
1: Used.
This enables machining using the
workpiece coordinate system with a desired
point which is not the center of the rotation
axis set as the origin of the coordinate
system in polar coordinate interpolation.
For details, refer to "POLAR

COORDINATE INTERPOLATION" in
"OPERATOR’S MANUAL (LATHE
SYSTEM)" (B-64304EN-1).
- 1585 -

Hypothetical axis - If the first axis of the plane is in a hypothetical axis direction relative to the center of
direction the rotation axis, i.e. the center of the rotation axis is not on the X axis, the
compensation during hypothetical axis direction compensation function in polar coordinate interpolation
polar coordinate mode performs polar coordinate interpolation while taking the error into consideration.
interpolation Set the error value in parameter No. 5464.
Hypothetical axis (C axis)
Rotation axis
(X,C)
X axis
Hypothetical axis direction error (P)
Center of the rotation axis
(X,C) X-C plane point (The center of the rotation axis is the origin of
the X-C plane.)
X X axis coordinate value in the X-C plane
C Hypothetical axis coordinate value in the X-C plane
P Hypothetical axis direction error
(Set the value in parameter No. 5464.)
- This function is not available. - This function is available.
Maximum cutting - Set the value in parameter No. 5462. - Parameter No. 5462 is not available.
feedrate and feedrate When the value is 0, the feedrate is Set the value in parameter No. 1430.
clamp during polar clamped by parameter No. 1422.
coordinate
interpolation
Automatic override - Enable or disable the function using bit - Bit 1 (AFC) of parameter No. 5450 is
and automatic 1 (AFC) of parameter No. 5450. not available.
feedrate clamp during Automatic override and automatic
polar coordinate Bit 1 (AFC) of parameter No. 5450 feedrate clamp are always performed.
interpolation In the polar coordinate interpolation mode,
automatic override and automatic feedrate
clamp are:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.

None.

None.
- 1586 -
B.19 ADVANCED PREVIEW CONTROL (T SERIES)/AI

ADVANCED PREVIEW CONTROL (M SERIES)/AI
CONTOUR CONTROL (M SERIES)

Differences common to advanced preview control, AI advanced preview
control, and AI contour control
Function name Some function names have been changed as follows.
- Automatic corner deceleration - Speed control based on the feedrate
difference on each axis
- Arc radius-based feedrate clamp - Speed control with acceleration in
circular interpolation
Setting to enable - Setting 1 in bit 6 (RBL) of parameter - Bit 6 (RBL) of parameter No. 1603 is
bell-shaped No. 1603 enables bell-shaped not available.
acceleration/deceleration acceleration/deceleration in rapid Bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration
in rapid traverse traverse. in rapid traverse is enabled by setting
the time constant of bell-shaped
acceleration/deceleration after
interpolation in rapid traverse in
parameter No. 1621 or the
acceleration change time of
bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration
before interpolation in rapid traverse
in parameter No. 1672.
Selection of - The combination of bit 1 (AIR) of - Bit 1 (AIR) of parameter No. 7054 is
acceleration/deceleration parameter No. 7054 and bit 1 (LRP) not available.
before interpolation in of parameter No. 1401 determines The combination of bit 5 (FRP) of
rapid traverse or acceleration/deceleration before parameter No. 19501 and bit 1 (LRP)
acceleration/deceleration interpolation or of parameter No. 1401 determines
after interpolation in acceleration/deceleration after acceleration/deceleration before
rapid traverse interpolation. interpolation or
interpolation. For details, refer to
"PARAMETER MANUAL"
(B-64310EN).
Setting of acceleration - Set acceleration by specifying the - Parameter Nos. 1770 and 1771 are
for look-ahead linear maximum cutting feedrate for linear not available.
acceleration/deceleration acceleration/deceleration before In parameter No. 1660, set the
before interpolation interpolation in parameter No. 1770 maximum permissible cutting
and the time to elapse before feedrate for acceleration/deceleration
reaching the maximum cutting before interpolation for each axis.
feedrate for linear
interpolation in parameter No. 1771.
- 1587 -

Time constant setting of - Set the value in parameter No. 1768. - Parameter No. 1768 is not available.
linear/bell-shaped Set the time constant for each axis in
acceleration/deceleration parameter No. 1769.
after interpolation in
cutting feed common to
all axes
Time constant setting of - Set the value in parameter No. 1762. - Parameter No. 1762 is not available.
exponential (To set the value for linear or Set the value in parameter No. 1769.
acceleration/deceleration bell-shaped acceleration/deceleration, (Use parameter No. 1769 for any
after interpolation in use parameter No. 1769.) acceleration/deceleration type -
cutting feed for each axis linear, bell-shaped, or exponential.)
Automatic corner - Setting 0 in bit 4 (CSD) of parameter - Automatic corner deceleration based
deceleration based on No. 1602 enables the function. on angle difference is not available.
angle difference Set the lower limit speed in parameter Therefore, bit 4 (CSD) of parameter
No. 1777 and the critical angle No. 1602 and parameter Nos. 1777
between the two blocks in parameter and 1779 are not available.
No. 1779.
Permissible speed - Set the value in parameter No. 1780. - Parameter No. 1780 is not available.
difference common to all Set the permissible speed difference
axes for automatic for each axis in parameter No. 1783.
corner deceleration
based on angle
difference (speed control
based on the feedrate
difference on each axis)
Setting of arc - Set the upper limit of the feedrate and - Parameter Nos. 1730 and 1731 are
radius-based feedrate the corresponding arc radius value in not available.
clamp (speed control parameter Nos. 1730 and 1731, Set the permissible acceleration for
with acceleration in respectively. each axis in parameter No. 1735.
circular interpolation)
Setting of the maximum - Set the value in parameter No. 1431. - Parameter No. 1431 is not available.
cutting feedrate common Set the maximum cutting feedrate for
to all axes each axis in parameter No. 1432.
Rapid traverse block - Disabled in the advanced preview - Enabled only when
overlap control (T series), AI advanced acceleration/deceleration after
preview control (M series), or AI interpolation is used in the advanced
contour control (M series) mode. preview control (T series), AI
advanced preview control (M series),
or AI contour control (M series) mode.
M
Differences regarding AI advanced preview control and AI contour control
Function name Some function names have been changed as follows.
- Acceleration-based feedrate clamp - Speed control with the acceleration on
each axis
Setting of - Set the permissible acceleration by - Parameter No. 1785 is not available.
acceleration-based specifying the time to elapse before Set the permissible acceleration for
feedrate clamp (speed reaching the maximum cutting feedrate each axis in parameter No. 1737.
control with the in parameter No. 1785.
acceleration on each The maximum cutting feedrate set in
axis) parameter No. 1432 is used.
- 1588 -
Differences regarding AI contour control

Time constant of - Set parameter Nos. 1773 and 1774. - Parameter Nos. 1773 and 1774 are
acceleration/deceleration If these parameters are not set, not available.
in rapid traverse in the AI parameter Nos. 1620 and 1621 are In the case of
contour control mode used. acceleration/deceleration before
interpolation in rapid traverse, set
parameter Nos. 1660 and 1672.
In the case of
interpolation in rapid traverse, set
parameter Nos. 1620 and 1621.
Setting to enable - Setting 1 in bit 7 (BEL) of parameter - Bit 7 (BEL) of parameter No. 1603 is
look-ahead bell-shaped No. 1603 enables bell-shaped not available.
acceleration/deceleration acceleration/deceleration before Setting the acceleration change time
before interpolation interpolation. of bell-shaped
interpolation in parameter No. 1772
enables bell-shaped
interpolation.

None.

None.
- 1589 -
B.20 WAITING M CODES (T SERIES (2-PATH CONTROL))

T

None.

Item Series 0i-TTC Series 0i-D
No-wait signal The signals are common to all paths. - By using bit 0 (MWT) of parameter No.
8103, it is possible to select the path
No-wait signal individual signal interface or path
NOWT<G063.1> common signal interface.
Waiting signal
WATO<F063.6> Bit 0 (MWT) of parameter No. 8103
As the waiting M code interface:
0: The path individual signal interface is
used.
In this case, the signals are set as
follows.
No-wait signal
NMWT<Gn063.7>
Waiting signal
WATO<F063.6>
1: The path common signal interface is

Waiting signal used.
In this case, the signals are set as
follows.
No-wait signal
NMWT<Gn063.1>
Waiting signal
WATO<F063.6>
When 1 is set in bit 0 (MWT) of parameter

No. 8103, the same specifications as
Series 0i-TTC apply. For details, refer to
Chapter 8, "WAITING M CODES", in
"CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)"
(B-64303EN-1).

None.
- 1590 -
B.21 PATH INTERFERENCE CHECK (T SERIES (2-PATH

CONTROL))
T

Interference alarm - Bit 7 (BFA) of parameter No. 1300 is - Bit 7 (BFA) of parameter No. 1300 is
not supported. supported.
actually necessary.
If a stored stoke check 1, 2, or 3 alarm
occurs, if an interference alarm occurs with
the inter-path interference check function
(T series), or if an alarm occurs with
chuck/tail stock barrier (T series), the tool
stops:

None.

None.
- 1591 -
B.22 SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL AND COMPOSITE CONTROL

(T SERIES (2-PATH CONTROL))
T

Function Series 0i-TTC Series 0i-D
Axis synchronous - Adding synchronous or composite - Adding synchronous or composite
control control disables quick synchronous control does not disable quick
(Series 0i-C: Quick control. synchronous control.
synchronous control) - The master and slave axes used for
axis synchronous control cannot be
used for synchronous control.
- Composite control is available for the
master axis used for axis synchronous
control, while it is not available for the
slave axis.
Feed forward function - Make a selection using bit 1 (SVF) of - Bit 1 (SVF) of parameter No. 8165 is
and cutting/rapid parameter No. 8165. not available.
traverse change The tool always behaves as when SVF
function for Bit 1 (SVF) of parameter No. 8165 is set to 1.
synchronous and In synchronous or composite control, the (The feed forward function and
composite axes of feed forward function and cutting/rapid cutting/rapid traverse change function
another path traverse change function for synchronous are enabled for synchronous and
and composite axes of another path are: composite axes of another path.)
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
Move command when - Not prohibited. - Make a selection using bit 7 (NUMx) of
neither synchronous parameter No. 8163.
nor composite control
is in effect Bit 7 (NUMx) of parameter No. 8163
When neither synchronous nor composite
control is in effect, specifying the move
command for an axis that is set with this
parameter is:
0: Not prohibited.
1: Prohibited. (Alarm PS0353 is issued.)
- 1592 -

Behavior when an - Both paths are placed in the feed hold - Make a selection using bit 0 (MPA) of
alarm is issued in state. parameter No. 8168.
relation to Bit 0 (MPA) of parameter No. 8168
synchronous or If an alarm is issued in relation to
composite control synchronous, composite, or superposition
control:
0: Both paths are placed in the feed hold
state.
1: Only the path including axes related to
synchronous, composite, or
superposition control is placed in the
feed hold state.
For example, when synchronous
control is exerted in one path, only the
path that caused the alarm is placed in
the feed hold state. The handling of
the other path depends on the setting
of bit 1 (IAL) of parameter No. 8100.
Behavior when - The synchronous or composite control - Make a selection using bit 5 (NCS) of
overtravel occurs for mode is canceled. parameter No. 8160.
an axis under Bit 5 (NCSx) of parameter No. 8160
synchronous or If overtravel occurs for an axis under
composite control synchronous, composite, or superposition
control, the synchronous, composite, or
superposition control mode is:
0: Canceled.
1: Not canceled.
Switch between - The signals can be switched at any - Use an M code command. Specify a
synchronous control time. waiting M code (M code without
axis selection signal buffering) before and after the M code.
and composite control When synchronous or composite
axis selection signal control is exerted in one path, specify
during automatic an M or other code without buffering
operation before and after the M code that starts
or cancels the control so as to prohibit
the look-ahead operation.
Synchronous control
G28 when the master - When the reference position of the - When the reference position of the
axis is parking slave axis is not established, the slave axis is not established, alarm
machine coordinates are moved to the PS0354 occurs.
coordinates set in parameter No. 1240,
completing the reference position
return.
Update of the - Make a selection using bit 4 (SPN) of - Bit 4 (SPN) of parameter No. 8164 is
workpiece coordinates parameter No. 8164. not available.
and relative Bit 4 (SPN) of parameter No. 8164 The tool always behaves as when
coordinates of the The workpiece coordinates and relative SPNx is set to 0 (coordinates are
slave axis under coordinates of the slave axis under updated).
synchronous control synchronous control are:
0: Updated.
1: Not updated.
- 1593 -

Out-of-synchronization - Out-of-synchronization detection is not - Out-of-synchronization detection is
detection when performed. performed.
synchronous control is
exerted in one path (1
is set in bit 1 (SER) of
parameter No. 8162)
Manual handle - Always reflected on the slave axis. - Select whether to reflect the amount
interruption amount or or mode on the slave axis, using bit 5
mirror image mode for (SMIx) of parameter No. 8163.
the master axis Bit 5 (SMIx) of parameter No. 8163
During synchronous control, the manual
handle interruption amount or mirror
image mode for the master axis is:
0: Reflected on the slave axis.
1: Not reflected on the slave axis.
Automatic setting of a - A workpiece coordinate system is not - Make a selection using bit 6 (SPVx) of
workpiece coordinate automatically set for the slave axis. parameter No. 8167.
system for the slave Bit 6 (SPVx) of parameter No. 8167
axis at the end of At the end of synchronous control, a
synchronous control workpiece coordinate system for the slave
axis is:
0: Not automatically set.
1: Automatically set.
The workpiece coordinate system to
be set is determined by the machine
coordinate values and the workpiece
coordinate values of the reference
points of the individual axes defined
by parameter No. 1250.
Composite control
G28 during composite - When the reference position of the - When the reference position of the
control composite axis of the other path is not composite axis of the other path is not
established, the machine coordinates established, alarm PS0359 occurs.
are moved to the coordinates set in
parameter No. 1240, completing the
reference position return.
Composite control for - Select whether to use the composite - Bit 1 (CZMx) of parameter No. 8161 is
the Cs contour axis function of the Cs contour axis not available.
reference position reference position return command, by The tool always behaves as when
return command when using bit 1 (CZMx) of parameter No. CZMx is set to 1 (composite control is
composite control is 8161. used).
exerted for Cs contour Bit 1 (CZMx) of parameter No. 8161
axes When composite control is exerted for Cs
contour axes, the composite control function
for the Cs contour axis reference position
return command is:
0: Not used.
1: Used.
- 1594 -

Manual handle - Disabled. - Enable or disable the interruption
interruption for using bit 6 (MMIx) of parameter No.
composite axes 8163.
Bit 6 (MMIx) of parameter No. 8163
During composite control, manual handle
interruption for composite axes is:
0: Enabled.
1: Disabled.
Current position - Make a selection using bit 0 (MDXx) of - Bit 0 (MDXx) of parameter No. 8163 is
display during parameter No. 8163. not available.
composite control Bit 0 (MDXx) of parameter No. 8163. The coordinate values of the local path
(absolute/relative During composite control, the current are always displayed.
coordinates) position display (absolute/relative
coordinates) shows:
0: Coordinate values of the local path.
1: Coordinate values of the mate path.
G53 during composite - Make a selection using bit 2 (CPMx) of - Bit 2 (CPMx) of parameter No. 8165 is
control parameter No. 8165. not available.
Bit 2 (CPMx) of parameter No. 8165. The tool always behaves as when
During composite control, machine CPMx is set to 1.
coordinate system selection (G53) is: (G53 is enabled.)
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
(The travel distance is calculated so
that the machine moves according to
the machine coordinate system
selection signal of the mate path.)
Constant - Make a selection using bit 0 (NLSx) of - Bit 0 (NLSx) of parameter No. 8167 is
acceleration/decelerati parameter No. 8167. not available.
on of acceleration Bit 0 (NLSx) of parameter No. 8167 The tool always behaves as when
time for Constant acceleration/deceleration of NLSx is set to 1.
acceleration/decelerati acceleration time for (Constant acceleration/deceleration of
on in rapid traverse for acceleration/deceleration in rapid traverse acceleration time is enabled.)
an axis subject to for an axis subject to composite control (bit
composite control (bit 4 (RPT) of parameter No. 1603) is:
4 (RPT) of parameter 0: Enabled.
No. 1603) 1: Disabled.
Machine coordinates - The coordinate values of the local path - Make a selection using bit 0 (MDMx)
during composite are displayed. of parameter No. 8169.
control Bit 0 (MDMx) of parameter No. 8169
The machine coordinates displayed during
composite control are:
0: Coordinate values of the local path.
1: Machine coordinate values of the mate
path.
Reading of machine - The coordinate values of the local path - Make a selection using bit 1 (MVMx)
coordinates (#5021 are read. of parameter No. 8169.
and later) during Bit 1 (MVMx) of parameter No. 8169
composite control The machine coordinates (#5021 and
later) that are read during composite
control are:
0: Machine coordinate values of the local
path.
1: Machine coordinate values of the mate
path.
- 1595 -

Rapid traverse - The rapid traverse feedrate of the - Make a selection using bit 2 (MRFx) of
feedrate during specified axis is used. parameter No. 8169.
composite control Bit 2 (MRFx) of parameter No. 8169
The rapid traverse feedrate used during
composite control is:
0: Rapid traverse feedrate of the
specified axis.
1: Rapid traverse feedrate of the moving
axis.

Synchronous or P/S alarm No. 225 is issued. No alarm is issued.
composite control DI signal-based control is also possible.
initiated by the DI
signal for an axis
under synchronous or
composite control
based on a program
command

Synchronization error - Displayed in parameter No. 8182. - Displayed in diagnosis No. 3502.
value display for each
axis
B.23 SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL (T SERIES (2-PATH

CONTROL))
T

Axis synchronous - Adding superimposed control disables - Adding superimposed control does not
control quick synchronous control. disable quick synchronous control.
(Series 0i: Quick - The same axis can be used as the
synchronous control) master axis for axis synchronous
control and the master axis for
superimposed control.
- 1596 -

Feed hold when an - Both paths are placed in the feed hold - Make a selection using bit 0 (MPA) of
alarm occurs with state. parameter No. 8168.
respect to Bit 0 (MPA) of parameter No. 8168
superimposed control The axis movement in-progress signal
<Fn102> or axis movement direction signal
<Fn106> for the slave axis during
superimposed control:
0: Places both paths in the feed hold
state.
1: Places only the path including axes
related to superposition control in the
feed hold state. (For example, when
superposition control is exerted in one
path, only the path that caused the
alarm is placed in the feed hold state.)
Reference position - Not available. - Not available.
return of the slave Alarm PS0363 occurs.
axis during
superimposed control
Multiple slave axes - Superimposed control cannot be - Superimposed control can be exerted
exerted when there are multiple slave when there are multiple slave axes and
axes and one master axis. one master axis.
Axis movement - State output is performed according to - Make a selection using bit 4 (AXS) of
in-progress signal and the result of adding superimposed parameter No. 8160.
axis movement move pulses. Bit 4 (AXS) of parameter No. 8160
direction signal for the The axis movement in-progress signal
slave axis during <Fn102> or axis movement direction signal
superimposed control <Fn106> for the slave axis during
superimposed control:
0: Performs state output according to the
result of adding superimposed move
pulses.
1: Performs state output according to the
result of moving the individual axes,
regardless of superimposed move
pulses.
Axis overtravel during - The superimposed control mode is - Make a selection using bit 5 (NCS) of
superimposed control canceled. parameter No. 8160.
Bit 5 (NCS) of parameter No. 8160
If overtravel occurs for an axis under
synchronous, composite, or superposition
control, the synchronous, composite, or
superposition control mode is:
0: Canceled.
1: Not canceled.
Switch between - The signals can be switched at any - Use an M code command. Specify a
superimposed control time. Note that both the master and waiting M code (M code without
axis selection signals slave axes must be stopped. buffering) before and after the M code.
during automatic When superimposed control is exerted
operation in one path, specify an M or other code
without buffering before and after the
M code that starts or cancels the
control so as to prohibit the look-ahead
operation.
- 1597 -

Superimposed P/S alarm No. 225 is issued. No alarm is issued.
control initiated by the DI signal-based control is also possible.
DI signal for an axis
under superimposed
control based on a
program command

None.
B.24 AUXILIARY FUNCTION/2ND AUXILIARY FUNCTION

None.

2nd auxiliary function - The signal address for T series is - The following signal address is used
completion signal different from that for M series. for both T series and M series:
BFIN T BFIN<Gn005.7>
BFIN<Gn005.4>
M
BFIN<Gn005.7>
2nd auxiliary function - The signal address for T series is - The following signal address is used
strobe signal BF different from that for M series. for both T series and M series:
T BF<Fn007.7>
BF<Fn007.4>
M
BF<Fn007.7>

None.
- 1598 -
B.25 SERIAL/ANALOG SPINDLE CONTROL

Spindle number of the - When one serial spindle and one analog spindle are simultaneously controlled in one
analog spindle path (serial/analog spindle control), the spindle number of the analog spindle is as
follows.
Third spindle Second spindle
For details about the parameters and other
settings, refer to "SERIAL/ANALOG
SPINDLE CNOTROL" in "CONNECTION
MANUAL (FUNCTION)" (B-64303EN-1).

None.

None.
- 1599 -
B.26 CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL

Constant surface - This is an optional function for the T - This is a basic function for both M
speed control with no series. series and T series.
position coder It is not available with the M series. It can be used by enabling constant
surface speed control (setting 1 in bit 0
(SSC) of parameter No. 8133) and
setting 1 in bit 2 (PCL) of parameter
No. 1405.
- Using bit 0 (PSSCL) of parameter No. - Bit 0 (PSSCL) of parameter No. 1407
1407, select whether to enable or is not available.
disable the axis feedrate clamp in feed The axis feedrate is always clamped.
per revolution when the spindle speed Using the position coder selection
is clamped by the maximum spindle signal, select the spindle to be used for
speed set in parameter No. 3772. feed per revolution. (To use the
position coder selection signal requires
Bit 0 (PSSCL) of parameter No. 1407 enabling multi-spindle control.)
In constant surface speed control with no M
position coder, when the spindle speed is The M series does not support the
clamped by the maximum spindle speed multi-spindle control function. Therefore,
parameter, the axis feedrate in feed per the second spindle cannot be used for feed
revolution is: per revolution.
0: Not clamped.
1: Clamped.
When 1 is set in this parameter, select the
spindle to be used for feed per revolution
by using the position coder selection signal.
(To use the position coder selection signal
requires enabling multi-spindle control.)

None.

None.
- 1600 -
B.27 SPINDLE POSITIONING (T SERIES)

T

Display unit of - Pulses - Make a selection using bit 0 (DMD) of
machine coordinates parameter No. 4959.
on the spindle
positioning axis Bit 0 (DMD) of parameter No. 4959
A machine coordinate on the spindle
positioning axis is displayed in:
0: Degrees.
1: Pulses.
Spindle positioning - Not available. - Spindle positioning using the second
using the second spindle is possible when multi-spindle
spindle control is enabled.
Number of M codes - Make a selection using bit 6 (ESI) of - Regardless of the setting of bit 6 (ESI)
for specifying the parameter No. 4950. of parameter No. 4950, the setting of
spindle positioning parameter No. 4964 takes effect.
angle Bit 6 (ESI) of parameter No. 4950
Select the specification of spindle
positioning.
(Bit)
0: Standard specification.
1: Extended specification.
When the extended specification is
selected, the number of M codes for
specifying the spindle positioning angle can
be changed from 6 to any number in the
range of 1 to 255, depending on the setting
of parameter No. 4964.
Rapid traverse rate - Selecting the extended specification by - Make a selection using bit 6 (ESI) of
unit for spindle setting 1 in bit 6 (ESI) of parameter No. parameter No. 4950.
positioning 4950 extends the upper limit of the
rapid traverse rate for spindle Bit 6 (ESI) of parameter No. 4950
positioning from 240000 to 269000 Select the rapid traverse rate unit for
(unit: 10 degrees/min). spindle positioning (bit spindle).
0: Not increased by a factor of 10. (Unit:
degrees/min)
1: Increased by a factor of 10. (Unit:
10 degrees/min)
Rapid traverse rate for - The feedrate set in parameter No. 1420 - The feedrate set in parameter No.
spindle orientation in takes effect. 1428 takes effect.
the case of an analog When 0 is set in parameter No. 1428,
spindle the value set in parameter No. 1420
takes effect.

None.
- 1601 -

Diagnosis data - None. - Diagnosis No.1544
indicating the spindle
positioning sequence
status (spindle)
Diagnosis data - None. - Diagnosis No.5207
indicating the
clamp/unclamp
sequence status
(servo)
B.28 Cs CONTOUR CONTROL

In-position check - The in-position check is not made. - Make a selection using bit 2 (CSNs) of
when the Cs contour parameter No. 3729.
control mode is off
Bit 2 (CSNs) of parameter No. 3729
When the Cs contour control mode is off,
the in-position check is:
0: Made.
1: Not made.
When 1 is set in this parameter, the
processing is the same as Series 0i-C.

None.

Position error display For the first spindle, diagnosis display No. For both the first and second spindles,
for Cs contour control 418 is used. diagnosis display No. 418 (spindle) is used.
For the second spindle, diagnosis display
No. 420 is used.
- 1602 -
B.29 MULTI-SPINDLE CONTROL

T

Number of gear - The first spindle has four stages. Set - Both the first and second spindles
stages for each the maximum spindle speeds for the each have four stages. Set the
spindle individual gears in parameter Nos. maximum spindle speeds for the
3741 to 3744, respectively. individual gears in parameter Nos.
- The second spindle has two stages. 3741 to 3744, respectively.
Set the maximum spindle speeds for (The data type of parameter Nos. 3741
the individual gears in parameter No. to 3744 is spindle.)
3811 and 3812.
Spindle override when When the override function is used for each axis in multi-spindle control type C, the
the override function following spindle override specifications apply during the tapping cycle mode (G84 or
is used for each axis G88) or threading mode (G32, G92, or G76).
in multi-spindle control - No function is available to clamp - Depends on bit 6 (TSO) of parameter
type C spindle override to 100%. (It does not No. 3708.
depend on bit 6 (TSO) of parameter
No. 3708.) Bit 6 (TSO) of parameter No. 3708
Modify the ladder code as necessary. During the threading or tapping cycle,
spindle override is:
0: Disabled (clamped to 100%).
1: Enabled.

Spindle command - The spindle command path - [When SPSP<G536.7> = 0]
path specification specification signal SPSP<G536.7> is When selecting a spindle using
signal not available. address P, it is possible to specify the
When selecting a spindle using spindle from either path.
address P, it is possible to specify the [When SPSP<G536.7> = 1]
spindle from either path. When selecting a spindle using
address P, it is possible to set the path
that can be specified for each spindle.

None.
- 1603 -
B.30 TOOL FUNCTIONS

Specification of a G - Not allowed. - Not allowed.
code of the 00 group Specifying a G code in this way causes
other than G50 (T alarm PS0245.
series) and a T code
in the same block
T
Number of digits of an - Set the value in bit 0 (LD1) of -
Bit 0 (LD1) of parameter No. 5002 is
offset number in a T parameter No. 5002. not available.
code command Use parameter No. 5028.
Method of wear - When 1 is set in bit 2 (LWT) and bit 4 (LGT) of parameter No. 5002, the method of
compensation wear compensation is as follows.
Compensation with tool movement Compensation with coordinate shift
Offset cancellation by - Select the cancellation operation using bit 3 (LVC) of parameter No. 5006 and bit 7
reset (TGC) of parameter No. 5003.
Parameter
Compensation method LVC="0" LVC="1" LVC="0" LVC="1"
TGC="0" TGC="0" TGC="1" TGC="1"
Wear
○ ○
Tool compensation
× (When axis is × (When axis
movement Geometry
moved) is moved)
compensation
Wear
× ○ × ○
Coordinate compensation
shift Geometry
× × * ○
compensation
○: Canceled ×: Not canceled
The operation marked by “*” differs between Series 0i-C and Series 0i-D.
Series 0i-C: × (Not canceled)
Series 0i-D: ○ (Canceled)
M
Behavior when G49 - Make a selection using bit 6 (GCS) of - Bit 6 (GCS) of parameter No. 5008 is
and G40 are specified parameter No. 5008. not available.
in the same block The tool always behaves as when 1 is
Bit 6 (GCS) of parameter No. 5008 set in bit 6 (GCS) of parameter No.
When G49 (tool length compensation 5008.
cancellation) and G40 (cutter compensation
cancellation) are specified in the same
block:
0: Tool length compensation is canceled
in the next block.
1: Tool length compensation is canceled
in the block in which the command is
specified.
- 1604 -

Specification of the - Depends on whether the order of - Not dependent on the conditions
tool length compensation amount numbers described at left.
compensation amount specified by the H code is that of tool In Series 0i-D, the H code is used to
length compensation types A, B, and specify the compensation amount number
C, whether the cutter compensation (select the compensation amount), and
mode is on or off, and the setting of bit G43, G44, and G49 are used to select
2 (OFH) of parameter No. 5001. For whether to enable or disable tool length
details, refer to Section 14.1, "TOOL compensation. For details, refer to
LENGTH COMPENSATION", in Section 6.1, "TOOL LENGTH
"OPERATOR'S MANUAL" COMPENSATION", in "OPERATOR’S
(B-64124EN). MANUAL (MACHINING CENTER)"
(B-64304EN-2).
Restoration of the tool - The restoration conditions differ - Not dependent on the setting of bit 2
length compensation depending on the setting of bit 2 (OFH) (OFH) of parameter No. 5001 or the
vector canceled by of parameter No. 5001, as well as on cutter compensation mode.
specifying G53, G28, whether the cutter compensation mode Depends only on the setting of bit 6
or G30 during tool is on or off. For details, refer to (EVO) of parameter No. 5001.
length compensation Section 14.1, "TOOL LENGTH
COMPENSATION", in "OPERATOR'S Bit 6 (EVO) of parameter No. 5001
MANUAL" (B-64124EN). For tool length compensation type A or B, if
the tool compensation amount is changed
during the offset mode (G43 or G44), the
vector is restored in:
0: Subsequent block containing a G43 or
G44 command or a H code.
1: Block buffered next.

None.

None.
- 1605 -
B.31 TOOL COMPENSATION MEMORY

Unit and range of tool - The unit and range of tool - Set the unit and range using bit 0 (OFA) and
compensation values compensation values are bit 1 (OFC) of parameter No. 5042.
determined by the setting unit.
Bit 0 (OFA) and bit 1 (OFC) of parameter No.
5042
Select the setting unit and range of tool offset
values.
Metric input
OFC OFA Unit Range
0 1 0.01mm ±9999.99mm
0 0 0.001mm ±9999.999mm
1 0 0.0001mm ±9999.9999mm
Inch input
OFC OFA Unit Range
0 1 0.001inch ±999.999inch
0 0 0.0001inch ±999.9999inch
1 0 0.00001inch ±999.99999inch
Automatic conversion - Make a selection using bit 0 - Bit 0 (OIM) of parameter No. 5006 is not
of tool compensation (OIM) of parameter No. 5006. available.
values upon Tool compensation values are always
inch/metric switch Bit 0 (OIM) of parameter No. 5006 converted automatically.
Upon inch/metric switch, automatic
conversion of tool compensation
values is:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
If the setting of this parameter is
changed, set the tool compensation
data again.
T
Number of tool - Up to 64 tool compensation values can - Up to 128 tool compensation values
compensation values be used per path. can be used per system. Using
for each axis during parameter No. 5024 whose data type
2-path control is path, set the number of tool
compensation values to be assigned to
each path.
NOTE
It is possible to increase to 200 tool
compensation values by the option.
- 1606 -

Tool compensation - Set this item using bit 5 (COF) of - Set this item using parameter No.
memory sharing parameter No. 8100. All tool 5029.
during 2-path control compensation memories can be shared The number of tool compensation
by the paths. Note that it is not memories to be shared can be set
allowed to share only part of the arbitrarily.
memories.
Bit 5 (COF) of parameter No. 8100

Paths 1 and 2:
0: Do not share tool compensation
memories.
1: Share tool compensation memories.

None.

None.
B.32 Y AXIS OFFSET (T SERIES)

T

Number of the axis for - Make a selection using bit 7 (Y03) of - Make a selection using parameter No.
which the Y axis offset parameter No. 5004. 5043.
is used When 0 or a value outside the data range
Bit 7 (Y03) of parameter No. 5004 is set, the Y axis offset is used for the Y
The Y axis offset is used for: axes of the basic three axes (X, Y, and Z).
0: 4th axis.
1: 3rd axis.

None.

None.
- 1607 -
B.33 CUTTER COMPENSATION/TOOL NOSE RADIUS

COMPENSATION

Cutter - In Series 0i-D, the cutter compensation C (M series) and tool-nose radius
compensation/tool compensation (T series) functions of Series 0i-C are collectively referred to as cutter
nose radius compensation/tool nose radius compensation.
compensation
Corner circular M - Available.
interpolation (G39) - Enabled by setting 1 in bit 2 (G39) of It is included in cutter
parameter No. 5008. compensation/tool nose radius
T compensation.
- Not available. Since corner circular interpolation
(G39) is always enabled, bit 2 (G39) of
parameter No. 5008 is not available.
Cutter - Neither cutter compensation C nor tool - Cutter compensation/tool nose radius
compensation/tool nose radius compensation is available compensation is also available in MDI
nose radius in MDI operation. operation.
compensation in MDI
operation
Single block stop - The single block stop position differs as shown below.
position during the
cutter
compensation/tool L
nose radius
compensation mode Workpiece
r α
L
Programmed path
r Cutter/tool nose radius
L center path
L L
Series 0i-D single block stop
Series 0i-C single block stop
Function to change - Not available. - At the start of or during the cutter

the compensation compensation/tool nose radius
direction intentionally compensation mode, specify I, J, or K
(IJ type vector, KI type in a G00 or G01 block. This makes
vector, and JK type the compensation vector at the end
vector) point of the block perpendicular to the
direction specified by I, J, or K. This
way, you can change the
compensation direction intentionally.
- 1608 -

Stop position upon an - If the specified radius value for circular interpolation is smaller than that for cutter
overcutting alarm compensation/tool nose radius compensation, as in the example below, performing
compensation inwardly through cutter compensation/tool nose radius compensation
causes overcutting, generating an alarm and stopping the tool. The stop position
differs.
N1
Cutter/tool nose radius
center path P1
P2
Programmed path
Workpiece N2
P3
N3
Cutting as
programmed causes
[When single block stop occurs in the preceding block in Series 0i-C]
Since the tool moves until it reaches the end point of the block (P3 in the figure),
overcutting may result.
[When single block stop does not occur in the preceding block in Series 0i-C]
The tool stops immediately after executing the block (P2 in the figure).
[In the case of Series 0i-D]
Since the tool stops at the start point of the block (P1 in the figure), regardless of the
single block state, overcutting can be prevented.
Single block stop in a - Not available. - Depends on bit 0 (SBK) of parameter
block created No. 5000.
internally for cutter
compensation/tool Bit 0 (SBK) of parameter No. 5000
nose radius In a block created internally for cutter
compensation compensation/tool nose radius
compensation, single block stop is:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
This parameter is used to check a program
including cutter compensation/tool nose
radius compensation.
- 1609 -

Setting to disable - Set 1 in bit 0 (CNI) of parameter No. - Not available.
interference checking 5008. (Bit 0 (CNI) of parameter No. 5008 is
and to delete In the example below, an interference not available.)
interfering vectors check is made on the vectors inside V1 To prevent overcutting, the
and V4, and the interfering vectors are interference check avoidance function
deleted. As a result, the tool center (bit 5 (CAV) of parameter No. 19607)
path is from V1 to V4. is used.
In the example below, interference
occurs between V1 and V4 and
between V2 and V3. Therefore,
vectors VA and VB are created. The
tool center path is fromVA to VB.
[In the case of Series 0i-C]
Tool center path
Programmed path
V4 V1
V3 V2
[In the case of Series 0i-D]
Tool center path
Programmed path
VA VB
V4 V1
V3 V2
Number of blocks to - Always 3 blocks - The number can be set in parameter

be read in the cutter No. 19625. The specifiable range is 3
compensation/tool to 8 blocks.
nose radius If the parameter is not set (0 is set),
compensation mode the same number as Series 0i-C (3
blocks) is assumed.
- 1610 -

When circular - Alarm PS0038 is issued, and the tool - Alarm PS0041 is issued, and the tool
interpolation is stops at the end point of the block stops at the start point of the block
specified that causes preceding the circular interpolation preceding the circular interpolation
the center to coincide block. block.
with the start or end
point during the cutter
compensation/tool
nose radius
compensation mode
Behavior when - Depends on bit 2 (CCN) of parameter - Bit 2 (CCN) of parameter No. 5003 is
automatic reference No. 5003. not available. The tool always
position return is behaves as when CCN is set to 1.
specified during the [When CCN = 0]
cutter The offset vector is canceled when the tool moves to the middle point.
compensation/tool Also, the start-up operation is performed from the reference position.
nose radius
Intermediate
compensation mode point
S G28 S S G01
G00 r
S
Reference position
(G42 G01)
[When CCN = 1 or for Series 0i-D]

The offset vector is not canceled when the tool moves to the middle point; it is
canceled when the tool moves to the reference position.
Also, the tool moves from the reference position to the next intersection point.
Intermediate
point
S G28 S S G01
r
G00
S
Reference position
(G42 G01)
- 1611 -

Travel distance - Depends on bit 5 (QCR) of parameter - Bit 5 (QCR) of parameter No. 5008 is
judgment method for No. 5008. not available. The tool always
circular interpolation in behaves as when QCR is set to 1.
cutter [When QCR = 0] [When QCR = 1 or for Series 0i-D]
compensation/tool B
C B L
nose radius
compensation Start point
Start point
D A
End End A
point point
Center Center
If the end point is on side A when viewed If the end point is on side A of line L
from the start point, the travel distance is connecting the start point and center, the
small. If it is on side B, C, or D, the tool travel distance is small. If it is on side B,
has traveled almost one round. the tool has traveled almost one round.
Compensation vector - Connected by linear interpolation. - Depends on bit 2 (CCC) of parameter
connection method No. 19607.
when the tool travels [When CCC = 0 or for Series 0i-C] [When CCC = 1]
around an external Connect vectors by linear Connect vectors by circular
corner during the interpolation interpolation
cutter
compensation/tool
nose radius
compensation mode
T
Virtual tool tip - Virtual tool tip directions 1 to 8 can be - All virtual tool tip directions can be
direction and plane used only for the G18 (Z-X) plane. used for the G17, G18, and G19
selection When the virtual tool tip direction is 0 planes.
or 9, compensation can be performed
for the G17 and G19 planes as well.
- 1612 -

Tool nose radius - [Outer surface turning/boring cycle - [Outer surface turning/boring cycle
center path for tool (G90)] (G90)]
nose radius Tool nose radius center path Tool nose radius center path
compensation in a
Tool nose radius center path Tool nose radius
canned cycle (G90 or 0
4,8,3 0 center path
G94) 8 8 3
5,0,7 4 3 All tool noses 4
5 7 5 7
2 1 6 2
1,6,2 1 6
All tool 8,0,6
4,5,1 All tool noses All tool
noses
3,7,2 noses
Programmed path Programmed path
- [Edge cutting cycle (G94)] - [Edge cutting cycle (G94)]

Tool nose radius center path Tool nose radius center path
Tool nose radius center path Tool nose radius
4,8,3 0 0
8 center path 8
5,0,7 4 3 All tool noses 4 3
5 7 5 7
1,6,2 2 1 6 2
1 6
All tool All tool
noses4,5,1 8,0,6 All tool noses
noses
3,7,2
Programmed path Programmed path
* Numbers 0 to 8 in the figure are virtual tool tip numbers.

Start-up/cancellation - The start-up/cancellation type cannot - Depends on bit 0 (SUP) and bit 1
type of tool nose be set. (SUV) of parameter No. 5003.
radius compensation When SUV and SUP are respectively
set to 0 and 1 (type B), the processing
is the same as Series 0i-C.

None.

None.
- 1613 -
B.34 CUSTOM MACRO

Keep-type common - The default value is <null>. - The default value is 0.
variable
- The Series 0i-D function (described at - The range specified by parameter Nos.
(#500 to #999)
right) is not available. 6031 and 6032 can be made
write-protected (read-only).
System variable to - Machine coordinates are always read - Machine coordinates are always read
read machine in machine units (output units). in input units.
coordinates Example) When the setting unit is
#5021 to #5025 IS-B, the input unit is the inch, the
machine unit is the millimeter, and the
coordinate value of the X axis (first
axis) is as follows:
Machine coordinate = 30.000
(mm)
Since the value of #5021 is read in
input units (inches), #5021 is 1.1811.
Logical operations in - Logical operations can be used by - Bit 0 (MLG) of parameter No. 6006 is
an if statement setting 1 in bit 0 (MLG) of parameter not available.
No. 6006. Logical operations can always be
used.
Bit 0 (MLG) of parameter No. 6006
In an if statement in a custom macro,
logical operations:
0: Cannot be used. (P/S alarm No. 114
is issued.)
1: Can be used.
Behavior of the GOTO - The command after the sequence -
If a move command is specified before
statement when a number of the block (to the right of the the sequence number (left side), alarm
sequence number is sequence number) is executed. PS0128 is issued.
not found at the start of If no move command is specified
the block before the sequence number (left
side), a block containing a sequence
number is executed from the
beginning.
* Use a sequence number at the start of a block.
Behavior of "GOTO 0" - The program jumps to the block - No jump occurs.
when there is a containing the sequence number. Alarm PS1128 is issued.
sequence number * Do not use a sequence number.
When another NC - In a program like the one shown in the - A program like the one shown in the
command is found in a example, G01 changes the G code example cannot be executed. Alarm
G65 block or in an M group to 01, while the move command PS0127 is issued.
code block where a X100. is not executed. X100. is A G65 code or an M code that calls a
macro is called by an regarded as an argument of G65. macro must be specified at the
M code beginning of a block (before all other
Example) G01 X100. arguments).
G65 P9001 ;
- 1614 -

Behavior when - When the machine is run under the conditions and program described below:
subprogram call using [Conditions]
an M code and ・ Subprogram call by T code is enabled (bit 5 (TCS) of parameter No. 6001 is set
subprogram call using to 1).
an T code are done ・ The M code that calls subprogram No. 9001 is M06 (parameter No. 6071 is set
to 6).
[Program]
O0001;
T100; (1)
M06 T200; (2)
T300 M06; (3)
M30;
%
In FS0i-C, blocks (1) to (3) of the program In FS0i-D, blocks (1) to (3) of the program
causes the machine to behave as follows: causes the machine to behave as follows:
1) Calls and executes O9000. 1) Calls and executes O9000.
2) Outputs T200 and waits for FIN. 2) Issues alarm PS1091.
Upon receipt of the FIN signal, the 3) Issues alarm PS1091 (when the
machine calls and executes O9001. program is run with block (2) deleted).
3) Outputs T300 and waits for FIN.
Upon receipt of the FIN signal, the
machine calls and executes O9001.
Block containing "M98 T - Bit 4 (NPS) of parameter No. 3450 is
Pxxxx" or "M99" - Using bit 4 (NPS) of parameter No. not available. The block is always
without any addresses 3450, it is possible to select whether treated as a macro statement.
other than O, N, P, and the block is treated as an NC (Single block stop is not performed.)
L statement or a macro statement.
Bit 4 (NPS) of parameter No. 3450

0: Treated as a single-block NC
statement without movement. (Single
block stop is performed.)
1: Treated as a macro statement.
(Single block stop is not performed.)
M
- Bit 4 (NPS) of parameter No. 3450 is
not available. The block is always
treated as a macro statement.
(Single block stop is not performed.)
* For details about macro and NC statements, refer to Section 16.4, "MACRO AND NC
STATEMENTS", in "OPERATOR’S MANUAL" (B-64304EN).
Subprogram and - The call nesting level differs as follows.
macro calls
Series 0i-C Series 0i-D
Model Independent Independent
Total Total
Call method nesting level nesting level
Macro call
4 in all 5 in all
(G65/G66) (G65/G66/M98) (G65/G66/M98)
Subprogram 8 in all 15 in all
4 10
call (M98)
- 1615 -

Local variable clear - Make a selection using bit 7 (CLV) of - Bit 7 (CLV) of parameter No. 6001 is
operation by reset parameter No. 6001. not available.
Local variables are always cleared to
Bit 7 (CLV) of parameter No. 6001 <null> when reset.
When reset, the local variables in the
custom macro are:
0: Cleared to <null>.
1: Not cleared.

None.

None.
B.34.4 Miscellaneous
Series 0i-D allows you to customize the specifications related to the maximum and minimum variable
values and accuracy by using bit 0 (F0C) of parameter No. 6008. When 1 is set in bit 0 (F0C) of
parameter No. 6008, the specifications are the same as Series 0i-C. For details, refer to Section 16,
"CUSTOM MACRO", in "OPERATOR’S MANUAL" (B-64304EN).
B.35 INTERRUPTION TYPE CUSTOM MACRO

Interruption type - Not available. - Available.
custom macro in DNC
operation
Program restart - When an interruption type custom macro is executed during return operation in dry
run after search operation invoked by program restart:
The interruption type custom macro is Alarm DS0024 is issued.
executed after all axes have restarted.

None.

None.
- 1616 -
B.36 CANNED CYCLE FOR DRILLING

M05 output in a - Make a selection using bit 6 (M5T) of - Make a selection using bit 3 (M5T) of
tapping cycle parameter No. 5101. parameter No. 5105.
Bit 6 (M5T) of parameter No. 5101 Bit 3 (M5T) of parameter No. 5105
When the rotation direction of the spindle is When the rotation direction of the spindle is
changed from forward rotation to reverse changed from forward rotation to reverse
rotation or from reserve rotation to forward rotation or from reserve rotation to forward
rotation in a tapping cycle (G84/G74 with rotation in a tapping cycle (G84/G74 with
the M series, or G84/G88 with the T series): the M series, or G84/G88 with the T
T series):
0: M05 is not output before output of M04 0: M05 is output before output of M04 or
or M03. M03.
1: M05 is output before output of M04 or 1: M05 is not output before output of M04
M03. or M03.
M NOTE
0: M05 is output before output of M04 or This parameter corresponds to bit 6 (M5T)
M03. of parameter No. 5101 of Series 0i-C.
1: M05 is not output before output of M04 With the T series, the logic of the values 0
or M03. and 1 is opposite from that of Series 0i-C.
Behavior when K0 is T - Make a selection using bit 4 (K0D) of
specified for the - Make a selection using bit 5 (K0E) of parameter No. 5105 for both T series
number of repetitions parameter No. 5102. and M series.
K
Bit 5 (K0E) of parameter No. 5102 Bit 4 (K0D) of parameter No. 5105
When K0 is specified in a drilling canned When K0 is specified in a drilling canned
cycle (G80 to G89): cycle (G80 to G89):
0: One drilling operation is performed. 0: Drilling operation is not performed, and
1: Drilling operation is not performed, and only drilling data is stored.
only drilling data is stored. 1: One drilling operation is performed.
NOTE
M With the T series, the logic of the values 0
- Drilling operation is not performed, and and 1 is opposite from that of bit 5 (K0E) of
only drilling data is stored. parameter No. 5102 of Series 0i-C.
Behavior of the first - The behavior can be selected using bit - While bit 1 (NRF) of parameter No.
positioning command 1 (NRF) of parameter No. 3700. 3700 exists, the normal positioning
(G00) for a Cs contour operation is performed in a canned
control axis in a Bit 1 (NRF) of parameter No. 3700 cycle, regardless of the setting of this
canned cycle After a serial spindle is changed to a Cs parameter bit.
contour control axis, the first move
command:
0: Performs the normal positioning
operation after executing the reference
position return operation.
operation.
- 1617 -
T
Retraction in a boring - Select the retraction operation using bit - Bit 1 (BCR) of parameter No. 5104 is
cycle (G85, G89) 1 (BCR) of parameter No. 5104. not available.
The retraction operation is always
Bit 1 (BCR) of parameter No. 5104 performed at the cutting feedrate.
The retraction operation in a boring cycle is In this case, the cutting feedrate of the
performed: at retraction operation can be multiplied
0: Cutting feedrate by the override value set in parameter
In this case, the cutting feedrate of the No. 5149. The override value range
retraction operation can be multiplied is 1% to 2000%.
by the override value set in parameter
No. 5121. The override value range is
100% to 2000%.
1: Rapid traverse rate
In this case, rapid traverse override is
also enabled.
Clearance value in a - Set the value in parameter No. 5114. - Set the value in parameter No. 5115.
peck drilling cycle
Drilling axis in the - Y axis cannot be used as a drilling axis. - Y axis can be used as a drilling axis.
Series 10/11 format P/S alarm No. 028 is issued.
M
Forward/retraction - When the I command (forward/retraction feedrate) is omitted and 0 is set in
feedrate for the parameter Nos. 5172 and 5173, the forward/retraction feedrate is as follows.
small-hole peck 0 Same feedrate as that specified by the F
drilling cycle (G83) command
Tool retraction - Set the direction using bit 5 (RD2) and - Bit 5 (RD2) and bit 4 (RD1) of
direction in a fine bit 4 (RD1) of parameter No. 5101 in parameter No. 5101 is not available.
boring cycle (G76) or combination. Set the direction in axis-type parameter
back boring cycle No. 5148.
(G87)
Address Q command - In a high-speed peck drilling cycle (G73), peck drilling cycle (G83), and small-hole
in a high-speed peck peck drilling cycle (G83), when the address Q (amount of each-time cutting)
drilling cycle (G73), command is not specified or Q0 is specified:
peck drilling cycle Select the operation using bit 1 (QZA) of Bit 1 (QZA) of parameter No. 5103 is not
(G83), or small-hole parameter No. 5103. available.
peck drilling cycle The tool always behaves as when 1 is set
(G83) Bit 1 (QZA) of parameter No. 5103 in bit 1 (QZA) of parameter No. 5103.
0: The tool repeats the upward and (Alarm PS0045 is issued.)
downward movement at the same
position without cutting.
1: P/S alarm No. 045 is issued.
Tool length - Select the axis for which to enable tool - Bit 4 (TCE) of parameter No. 5006 is
compensation (G43 or length compensation, by using bit 4 not available.
G44) in a canned (TCE) of parameter No. 5006. The tool always behaves as when 1 is
cycle when tool length set in bit 4 (TCE) of parameter No.
compensation type C Bit 4 (TCE) of parameter No. 5006 5006.
is selected (1 is set in When tool length compensation (G43 or
bit 0 (TLC) of G44) is specified in a canned cycle, tool
parameter No. 5001) length compensation is enabled for:
0: Axis selected according to tool length
compensation type C.
1: Drilling axis.
- 1618 -

None.

None.
B.37 CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES)/MULTIPLE REPETITIVE

CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES)
T

Machining plane - The plane on which the canned cycle is - The plane on which the canned cycle
performed is always the ZX plane. ca be selected arbitrarily (including a
parallel axis).
Note that, with G code system A, an
axis whose name is U, V, or W cannot
be set as a parallel axis.
Address R setting unit - The setting unit common to all axes is - The setting unit applies to a different
(Address I, J, or K for used. axis depending on the machining plane
the Series 10/11 and the command.
format) Second axis of the axes comprising
the machining plane for G90 and G92
First axis of the axes comprising the
machining plane for G94
Application of tool - Refer to Section 4.1.5, "CANNED CYCLE AND TOOL NOSE RADIUS
nose radius COMPENSATION" in "OPERATOR’S MANUAL (T SERIES)" (B-64304EN-1). The
compensation differences in specifications are detailed.
Inch threading by - Threading is performed as the lead - Inch threading is performed.
address E (Series threading command of address F.
10/11 format)
command:
operation.
- 1619 -

Chamfering signal CDZ *CDZ
name While the name has been changed, the meaning is the same. In either case, setting 0
executes chamfering.

None.
B.38 CANNED GRINDING CYCLE

Grinding axis T - Set the grinding axes for the individual
specification - The grinding axis is always the Z axis. canned grinding cycles in parameter
Nos. 5176 to 5179.
M If the same axis number as the cutting
- The grinding axis is the X or Z axis. axis is specified in any of these
parameters, or if a canned grinding
cycle is executed when 0 is set, alarm
PS0456 is issued.
command:
operation.
T
Exclusive control - When the grinding canned cycle option - When the grinding canned cycle option
against the multiple is specified, the multiple respective is specified, select whether to use the
respective canned canned cycle (standard function) multiple respective canned cycle
cycle (standard cannot be used. (standard function) or grinding canned
function) cycle, by using bit 0 (GFX) of
parameter No. 5106.
Bit 0 (GFX) of parameter No. 5106

When the grinding canned cycle option is
specified, the G71, G72, G73, and G74
commands are intended for:
0: Multiple respective canned cycle.
1: Grinding canned cycle.
- 1620 -
M
Dressing axis - The dressing axis is always the fourth - Set the dressing axes for the individual
specification axis. canned grinding cycles in parameter
Nos. 5180 to 5183.
If the same axis number as the cutting
axis or grinding axis is specified in any
of these parameters, or if a canned
grinding cycle is executed when 0 is
set, alarm PS0456 is issued.

None.

None.
B.39 MULTIPLE RESPECTIVE CANNED CYCLE FOR TURNING

(T SERIES)
T

Differences common to the Series 0 standard format and Series 10/11 format
Specifiable plane - The cycle can be specified for a Z-X - The cycle can be specified for an
plane, with the X axis set as the first arbitrary plane selected with the basic
axis and the Z axis set as the second three axes and their parallel axes.
axis.
Specification for a - Not allowed. - For G code system A, the cycle can be
plane including a specified when the name of the parallel
parallel axis axis is other than U, V, or W.
(To use U, V, or W as an axis name is
not allowed for G code system A.)
command:
operation.
- 1621 -

Cycle start point - The tool returns directly to the cycle - The tool returns to the cycle start point
return path when the start point. via a point offset by the finishing
finishing allowance is allowance.
specified in G71 or Cycle start point
G72 Cycle start point
Finishing Finishing
allowance allowance
The tool returns to
the cycle start point
Return to the via a point offset by
start point the finishing
allowance.
Monotonous - Depends on bit 1 (MRC) of parameter - Bit 1 (MRC) of parameter No. 5102 is
increase/decrease No. 5102. not available.
check in G71/G72 If monotonous increase or decrease is
type I Bit 1 (MRC) of parameter No. 5102 not specified for the first axis direction
(multiple respective When any target figure other than of the plane, alarm PS0064 is issued.
canned cycle for monotonous increase or decrease is If monotonous increase or decrease is
turning) specified in a multiple respective canned not specified for the second axis
cycle for turning (G71 or G72): direction of the plane, alarm PS0329 is
0: An alarm is not issued. issued.
1: Alarm PS0064 is issued. Note that, by setting a permissible
amount in parameter Nos. 5145 and
5146, it is possible to prevent the
alarm from occurring, even if the
monotonous increase/decrease
condition is not met, as long as the
permissible amount is not exceeded.
Monotonous - Not checked. - Always checked.
increase/decrease Bit 1 (MRC) of parameter No. 5102 If monotonous increase or decrease is
check in G71/G72 does not take effect for multiple not specified for the first axis direction
type II respective canned cycle for turning II of the plane, alarm PS0064 is issued.
(multiple respective (type II). Note that, by setting a permissible
canned cycle for amount in parameter No. 5145, it is
turning II) possible to prevent the alarm from
occurring, even if the monotonous
increase/decrease condition is not met,
as long as the permissible amount is
not exceeded.
Roughing after start - Not performed. - [Multiple respective canned cycle for
point return by G71 or turning I (type I)]
G72 Depends on bit 1 (RF1) of parameter
No. 5105.
[Multiple respective canned cycle for
turning II (type II)]
Depends on bit 2 (RF2) of parameter
No. 5105.
Bit 1 (RF1) of parameter No. 5105 Bit 2 (RF2) of parameter No. 5105
In the multiple repetitive canned cycle (T In the multiple repetitive canned cycle (T
series) (G71/G72) of type I, roughing is: series) (G71/G72) of type II, roughing is:
0: Performed. 0: Performed.
1: Not performed. 1: Not performed.
- 1622 -

Retraction operation - The tool retracts in the X axis direction - After chamfering, the tool first retracts
at the bottom of a hole after chamfering. in the 45-degree direction and then in
in G71/G72 type II the second axis direction of the plane.
(multiple respective
canned cycle for X axis
turning II) direction
45-degree
direction
G70 to G76 - [G70 command] - Bit 4 (RFC) of parameter No. 5102 is

commands during the Tool nose radius compensation is not available.
tool nose radius performed. [G70 to G73 commands]
compensation mode [G71 to G73 commands] Tool nose radius compensation is
While tool nose radius compensation is performed.
not performed, it is possible to apply [G74 to G76 commands]
tool nose radius compensation partially Tool nose radius compensation is not
by setting bit 4 (RFC) of parameter No. performed.
5102.
Bit 4 (RFC) of parameter No. 5102

For a G71 or G72 semi-finished shape or a
G73 cutting pattern, tool nose radius
compensation is:
0: Not performed.
1: Performed.
[G74 to G76 commands]

Tool nose radius compensation is not
performed.
Positioning in G70 to - Non-linear type positioning is always - [Start point return by G70]
G76 cycle operations used, regardless of the setting of bit 1 Non-linear type positioning is always
(LRP) of parameter No. 1401. used.
[Other positioning operations]
Depends on bit 1 (LRP) of parameter
No. 1401.
T code specified in the - Invalid - Valid
same block as G74 or
G75
Chamfering and - Cannot be specified. - Can be specified.
corner R commands Note that the last block of the target
and direct drawing figure program must not be in the
dimension middle of the chamfering, corner R, or
programming direct drawing dimension programming
command for a target command.
figure program
Approach to the - Approach by two cycles - Approach by one cycle
threading start point in
G76 Threading Threading
Approach by Approach by
two cycles one cycle
- 1623 -
Differences regarding the Series 0 standard format

Pocketing path in - The tool moves from one pocket to - The tool completes one pocketing
G71/G72 type II another for each cut. process before proceeding to cut the
(multiple respective (The numbers in the figure represent next pocket.
canned cycle for the tool path sequence.) (The numbers in the figure represent
turning II) the tool path sequence.)
Limitation on the - Up to 10 pockets can be specified. - Not limited.

number of pockets in Specifying 11 or more pockets causes
G71/G72 type II alarm PS0068.
(multiple respective
canned cycle for
turning II)
Number of divisions in - The number of divisions is also 2 for - The number of divisions specified by R
G73 the R1 command. For R2 and applies.
subsequent commands, the number of
divisions specified by R applies.
Differences regarding the Series 10/11 format

Pocketing path in - Depends on bit 2 (P15) of parameter - Bit 2 (P15) of parameter No. 5103 is
G71/G72 type II No. 5103. not available.
(multiple respective [When P15 = 0] The tool completes one pocketing
canned cycle for The tool moves from one pocket to process before proceeding to cut the
turning II) another for each cut. next pocket.
(The numbers in the figure represent (The numbers in the figure represent
the tool path sequence.) the tool path sequence.)
[When P15 = 1]
The tool completes one pocketing
process before proceeding to cut the
next pocket. (See the figure at right.)
Limitation on the - Depends on bit 2 (P15) of parameter - Bit 2 (P15) of parameter No. 5103 is
number of pockets in No. 5103. not available.
G71/G72 type II [When P15 = 0] Not limited.
(multiple respective Up to 10 pockets can be specified.
canned cycle for Specifying 11 or more pockets causes
turning II) alarm PS0068.
[When P15 = 1]
Not limited.
Specification of - Not allowed. - Allowed.
finishing allowance in The finishing allowance is ignored if
G71/G72 specified.
- 1624 -

Number of divisions in - The number of divisions is also 2 for - The number of divisions specified by D
G73 the D1 command. For D2 and applies.
subsequent commands, the number of
divisions specified by D applies.
Address E command - Threading is performed as the lead - Inch threading is performed.
in G76 threading command of address F.

Differences common to the Series 0 standard format and Series 10/11 format

Chamfering signal - CDZ - *CDZ
name While the name has been changed, the meaning is the same. In either case, setting 0
executes chamfering.

None.
B.40 OPTIONAL ANGLE CHAMFERING AND CORNER

ROUNDING (M SERIES)
M

Optional angle - Not available. - Available.
chamfering and corner Alarm PS0212 is issued.
rounding commands
for a plane including a
parallel axis
Single block operation - Single block stop is not performed at - Whether to perform single block stop
the start point of an inserted optional at the start point of an inserted block
angle chamfering or corner rounding depends on bit 0 (SBC) of parameter
block. No. 5105.
Bit 0 (SBC) of parameter No. 5105

In a drilling canned cycle, chamfer
cycle/corner rounding (T series) or optional
angle chamfering/corner rounding cycle (M
series):
0: Single block stop is not performed.
1: Single block stop is performed.
Negative value - The value is regarded as positive. - Alarm PS0006 is issued.
specified in a ,C_
or ,R_ command
- 1625 -

Number of dwells to - Not limited. - Only one block can be inserted.
be inserted between Inserting more than one block causes
two blocks for which to alarm PS0051.
perform optional angle
chamfering or corner
rounding
DNC operation - Optional angle chamfering and corner - Optional angle chamfering and corner
rounding are not available in DNC rounding are also available in DNC
operation. operation.

None.

None.
B.41 CHAMFERING AND CORNER ROUNDING (T SERIES)

T

Chamfering and - Not available. - Available.
corner rounding Alarm PS0212 is issued. The commands can be specified for
commands for a plane any plane, even one that includes a
other than the Z-X parallel axis.
plane
Single block operation - [Chamfering] - [Common to chamfering and corner
Single block stop is not performed at rounding]
the start point of an inserted Whether to perform single block stop
chamfering block. at the start point of an inserted block
[Corner rounding] depends on bit 0 (SBC) of parameter
Single block stop is performed at the No. 5105.
start point of an inserted corner
rounding block. Bit 0 (SBC) of parameter No. 5105
In a drilling canned cycle, chamfer
cycle/corner rounding (T series) or optional
angle chamfering/corner rounding cycle (M
series):
0: Single block stop is not performed.
1: Single block stop is performed.

None.

None.
- 1626 -
B.42 DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSIONS PROGRAMMING (T

SERIES)
T

Specification of the - P/S alarm No. 212 is issued. - No alarm is issued.
direct drawing The command can be specified for a
dimension plane other than the Z-X plane.
programming
command for a plane
other than the Z-X
plane
When two or more - No alarm is issued. - Alarm PS0312 is issued.
blocks not to be
moved exist between
consecutive
commands that
specify direct input of
drawing dimensions

None.

None.
B.43 RUN HOUR AND PARTS COUNT DISPLAY

Data range of the M Parameter No. 6710
code that counts the The data range of the M code that counts the number of machined parts is as follows.
number of machined
parts - 0 to 255 - 0 to 99999999 (8 digits)
Data range of the Parameter No. 6713
number of parts The data range of the number of parts required is as follows.
required
- 0 to 9999 - 0 to 999999999 (9 digits)
Data range of the Parameter No. 6711 Parameter No. 6712
number and total Number of parts machined Total number of parts machined
number of parts
machined The data range is as follows.
- 0 to 99999999 (8 digits) - 0 to 999999999 (9 digits)
- 1627 -

Data range of the Parameter No. 6750 Parameter No. 6752 Parameter No. 6754
power-on period, time Integrated value of Integrated value of time during Integrated value of cutting
during automatic power-on period automatic operation time
operation, cutting Parameter No. 6756 Parameter No. 6758
time, input signal Integrated value of time when input signal TMRON (G053.0) Integrated value of one
TMRON on time, and is on automatic operation time
one automatic
operation time The data range is as follows.
- 0 to 99999999 (8 digits) - 0 to 999999999 (9 digits)

None.

None.
B.44 SCREEN ERASURE FUNCTION AND AUTOMATIC

SCREEN ERASURE FUNCTION

Behavior of the - When an alarm is issued (including one - When an alarm is issued (including
manual screen associated with the other path), the one associated with the other path),
erasure function manual screen erasure function is the manual screen erasure function is
("<CAN> + function enabled. disabled.
key") when an alarm is ("<CAN> + function key" erases the ("<CAN> + function key" does not
issued screen.) erase the screen.)
Redisplay of the - When the operation mode is switched while the screen is erased:
screen upon mode
The screen is not redisplayed. The screen is redisplayed.
switching
(The screen remains erased.)
Please set "1" to screen clear invalidation
signal *CRTOF<G0062.1> to redisplay the
screen when operation mode is switched.
Function key input - Select the behavior using bit 2 (NFU) of - Bit 2 (NFU) of parameter No. 3209 is
when the screen is parameter No. 3209. not available.
erased or displayed The tool always behaves as when 1 is
Bit 2 (NFU) of parameter No. 3209 set in bit 2 (NFU) of parameter No.
When a function key is pressed to erase or 3209.
display the screen for the screen erasure or
automatic screen erasure function, the
screen change using a function key is:
0: Performed.
1: Not performed.
Time before the - Set the value in parameter No.3123.
automatic screen
The value range is 1 to 255 (minutes). The value range is 1 to 127 (minutes).
erasure function starts
- 1628 -

Redisplay of the - When the external message is input while the screen is erased:
screen upon external
The screen is redisplayed. The screen is not redisplayed.
message
(The screen remains erased.)
Please set "1" to screen clear invalidation
signal *CRTOF<G0062.1> to redisplay the
screen when external message is input.

None.

None.
B.45 MEMORY PROTECTION SIGNAL FOR CNC PARAMETER

T

Memory protection - The signal is different for each path. - The signal is common to all paths.
signal for CNC
parameter
KEYP, KEY1 to KEY4
<G046.0, G046.3 to
G046.6>
Parameter to enable - Enable or disable the signal using bit 7 - Enable or disable the signal using bit 0
the KEYP signal (PK5) of parameter No. 3292. This is (PKY) of parameter No. 3299. This is
a bit path parameter. a bit system common parameter.

Memory protection See B.45.1, "Differences in Specifications".
signal for CNC
parameter
KEYP, KEY1 to KEY4
<G046.0, G046.3 to
G046.6>

None.
- 1629 -
B.46 AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M

SERIES)/AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET (T SERIES)
M
B.46.1 Automatic Tool Length Measurement (M Series)
B.46.1.1 Differences in Specifications

Operation of the - Added to the current offset. - Select whether to add or subtract, by
current offset for the using bit 6 (MDC) of parameter No.
measurement result 6210.
Bit 6 (MDC) of parameter No. 6210

The measurement result of automatic tool
length measurement (system M) or
automatic tool compensation (system T) is:
Setting of the feedrate - Set the value in parameter No. 6241. - Parameter No. 6241
for measurement This is a parameter common to the This is a parameter for the measuring
measuring position reached signals position reached signals (XAE1 and
(XAE, YAE, and ZAE). GAE1).
- Parameter No. 6242
This is a parameter for the measuring
position reached signals (XAE2 and
GAE2).
GAE3).
NOTE
When 0 is set in parameter Nos. 6242 and
6243, the value in parameter No. 6241
becomes valid.
Setting of the γ value - Set the value in parameter No. 6251. - Parameter No. 6251
This is a parameter common to the This is a parameter for the measuring
GAE2).
GAE3).
NOTE
becomes valid.
- 1630 -

Setting of the ε value - Set the value in parameter No. 6254. - Parameter No. 6254
This is a parameter common to the This is a parameter for the measuring
GAE2).
GAE3).
NOTE
becomes valid.
B.46.1.2 Differences in Signals

Measuring position XAE, YAE, ZAE XAE1, XAE2, XAE3
reached signal name
G address measuring Not available. Available.
position reached
signals
GAE1<Gn517.0,
Gn517.1, Gn517.2> to
GAE3<Gn517.0,
Gn517.1, Gn517.2>
B.46.1.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display

None.
B.46.2 Automatic Tool Offset (T Series)
B.46.2.1 Differences in Specifications

Operation of the - Added to the current offset. - Select whether to add or subtract, by
current offset for the using bit 6 (MDC) of parameter No.
measurement result 6210.
Bit 6 (MDC) of parameter No. 6210

The measurement result of automatic tool
length measurement (system M) or
automatic tool compensation (system T) is:
- 1631 -

Setting of the feedrate - Set the value in parameter No. 6241. - Parameter No. 6241
for measurement This is a parameter common to the This is a parameter for the measuring
(XAE and ZAE). GAE1).
GAE2).
NOTE
When 0 is set in parameter No. 6242, the
value in parameter No. 6241 becomes
valid.
Setting of the γ value - Set the value in parameter No. 6251. - Parameter No. 6251
for the X axis This is a parameter common to the This is a parameter for the measuring
GAE2).
NOTE
valid.
Setting of the ε value - Set the value in parameter No. 6254. - Parameter No. 6254
for the X axis This is a parameter common to the This is a parameter for the measuring
GAE2).
NOTE
valid.
B.46.2.2 Differences in Signals

Measuring position XAE, ZAE XAE1, XAE2
reached signal name
G address measuring Not available. Available.
position reached
signals GAE1 and
GAE2
<Gn517.0, 1>
B.46.2.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display

None.
- 1632 -
B.47 SKIP FUNCTION

Setting to enable the - Set 1 in bit 5 (SLS) of parameter No. - Set 1 in bit 4 (HSS) of parameter No.
high-speed skip signal 6200. 6200.
for normal skip (G31)
when the multi-stage
Multi-stage Parameter to decide on use
skip function is enabled
skip Command of the high-speed skip signal
function FS0i-C FS0i-D
Disabled G31 (normal skip) HSS HSS
G31 (normal skip) SLS HSS
Enabled
G31P1 to G31P4 (multi-stage skip) SLS SLS
Target of - Compensation is performed for the - Compensation is performed for the

acceleration/deceleration skip coordinates obtained when the skip coordinates obtained when the
and servo system delay high-speed skip signal is set to "1". skip or high-speed skip signal is set
compensation to "1".
Method of - There are two ways to perform - Bit 0 (SEA) of parameter No. 6201 is
acceleration/deceleration compensation, as follows. not available.
and servo system delay [Compensating the value calculated There is only one way to perform
compensation from the cutting constant and servo compensation, as follows.
constant] [Compensating the accumulated
Set 1 in bit 0 (SEA) of parameter No. pulses and positional deviation due to
6201. acceleration/deceleration]
[Compensating the accumulated Set 1 in bit 1 (SEB) of parameter No.
pulses and positional deviation due to 6201.
acceleration/deceleration]
Set 1 in bit 1 (SEB) of parameter No.
6201.
Skip cutting feedrate - Feedrate specified by the F code in - Depends on bit 1 (SFP) of parameter
(normal skip) the program No. 6207. When 0 is set, the
processing is the same as Series
0i-C.
Bit 1 (SFP) of parameter No. 6207

The feedrate during the skip function
(G31) is:
0: Feedrate specified by the F code in
the program.
1: Feedrate specified in parameter No.
6281.
- 1633 -

Skip cutting feedrate - Feedrate specified by the F code in - Depends on bit 2 (SFN) of parameter
(skip using the the program No. 6207. When 0 is set, the
high-speed skip signal or processing is the same as Series
multi-step skip) 0i-C.
Bit 2 (SFP) of parameter No. 6207

When the skip function using the
high-speed skip signal (1 is set in bit 4
(HSS) of parameter No. 6200) or the
multi-step skip function is executed, the
feedrate is:
0: Feedrate specified by the F code in
the program.
1: Feedrate specified in parameter Nos.
6282 to 6285.
Axis to monitor to check - Depends on bit 3 (TSA) of parameter - Bit 3 (TSA) of parameter No. 6201 is
whether the torque limit No. 6201. not available.
has been reached Only the axis specified in the same
(torque limit skip) Bit 3 (TSA) of parameter No. 6201 block as G31 P99/98 is monitored.
To check whether the torque limit has
been reached, the torque limit skip
function (G31 P99/98) monitors:
0: All axes.
1: Only the axis specified in the same
block as G31 P99/98.
High-speed skip signal As the skip signal for the G31 P99 command, the high-speed skip signal:
input for the G31 P99 - Cannot be input. - Can be input.
command
(torque limit skip)
Setting of a positional - No parameter is available dedicated - The value can be set in parameter
deviation limit in the to setting a positional deviation limit No. 6287.
torque limit skip for the torque limit skip function.
command Parameter No. 6287
(torque limit skip) Set a positional deviation limit in the
torque limit skip command for each axis.
When G31 P99/98 is - The G31 P99/98 command is - Alarm PS0035 is issued.
specified without a executed as is.
torque limit being (No alarm is issued.)
specified in advance
(torque limit skip)

Signal address of skip - [First path] - Depends on bit 2 (XSG) of parameter
signal SKIP Fixed to <X004.7>. No. 3008. When 0 is set, the
T processing is the same as Series 0i-C.
[Second path]
Fixed to <X013.7>. Bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008
The signal assigned to the X address:
0: Has a fixed address.
1: Can be changed to an arbitrary X
address.
Set the address assigned by
parameter No. 3012.
- 1634 -
T
When using tool offset - Set 1 in bit 3 (MIT) of parameter No. - Bit 3 (MIT) of parameter No. 6200 is
value write signals 6200. not available.
±MIT1 and ±MIT2 as The tool offset value write signals
skip signals cannot be used as skip signals.
(normal skip)

None.
B.48 INPUT OF TOOL OFFSET VALUE MEASURED B (T

SERIES)
T

Setting of the X and Z - It is necessary to set the X axis as the - It is necessary to set the X axis as the
axes first axis and the Z axis as the second X axis of the basic three axes (set 1 in
axis. parameter No. 1022) and the Z axis as
the Z axis of the basic three axes (set
3 in parameter No. 1022).
Relationship with - By setting 1 in bit 3 (QSA) of parameter - Cannot be used together with arbitrary
arbitrary angular axis No. 5009, the function can be used angular axis control.
control together with arbitrary angular axis The correct value cannot be set for an
control. angular axis under arbitrary angular
axis control.
Relationship with - By setting bit 0 (MXC), bit 1 (XSI), and - Cannot be used together with
composite control bit 2 (ZSI) of parameter No. 8160 as composite control.
appropriate for the machine The correct value cannot be set for a
configuration, the function can be used composite axis under composite
together with composite control. control.

Tool offset number - [1-path system] - [1-path system]
select signal range G39.0 to G39.5 are used. G39.0 to G39.5 and G40.0 are used.
(The maximum tool compensation (The maximum tool compensation
number that can be selected is 64.) number that can be selected is 99.)
[2-path system] [2-path system]
G39.0 to G39.5 (first path) and G39.0 to G39.5 and G40.0 to G40.1
G1039.0 to G1039.5 (second path) are are used.
used. (The maximum tool compensation
(The maximum tool compensation number that can be selected is 200.)
number that can be selected for each
path is 64.)
- 1635 -

Signal address of tool - [First path] - Depends on bit 2 (XSG) of parameter
offset value write Fixed to <X004.2 to X004.5>. No. 3008. When 0 is set, the
signals ±MIT1 and [Second path] processing is the same as Series 0i-C.
±MIT2 Fixed to <X013.2 to X013.5>.
Bit 2 (XSG) of parameter No. 3008
The signal assigned to the X address:
0: Has a fixed address.
1: Can be changed to an arbitrary X
address.
Set the address assigned by
parameter No. 3019.
When using tool offset - Set 1 in bit 3 (MIT) of parameter No. - Bit 3 (MIT) of parameter No. 6200 is
value write signals 6200. not available.
±MIT1 and ±MIT2 as The tool offset value write signals
skip signals cannot be used as skip signals.

None.
B.49 PMC AXIS CONTROL

Differences common to 1-path control and 2-path control
Names of groups that - Groups A to D - Groups 1 to 4
use the signal addresses Group names A to D are used
of the first path (G0xxx respectively for each path.
and F0xxx)
Relationship with - PMC axis control can be applied for any - PMC axis control cannot be
synchronous control axis other than a synchronous slave applied for any axis under
(synchronous control of axis. synchronous control.
synchronous/composite
control)
Relationship with the - Enable or disable the functions by using - Neither the feed-forward nor
feed-forward and bit 7 (NAH) of parameter No. 1819, bit 3 advanced preview feed-forward
advanced preview (G8C) of parameter No. 8004, and bit 4 function is available for an axis
feed-forward functions (G8R) of parameter No. 8004 in under PMC axis control.
combination. Bit 3 (G8C) and bit 4 (G8R) of
parameter No. 8004 are not
available.
Data range of rapid - The data range is as follows. - 1 to 65535
Valid data range Unit of
traverse rate for rapid IS-A, IS-B IS-C data The data unit is as follows.
Data unit
Millimeter
traverse (00h), 1st to 4th Linear axis machine
30 to 15000 30 to 12000 mm/min
Linear Metric machine
IS-A to IS-C
1
Unit
mm/min
Inch machine 3 to 6000 30 to 4800 inch/min
reference position return Rotation axis 30 to 15000 30 to 12000 deg/min
axis
Rotation
Inch machine 0.1
1
inch/min
deg/min
axis
(07h to 0Ah), and
machine coordinate
system selection (20h)
- 1636 -

Data range of total - The data range is as follows. - The data range is as follows.
moving distance for rapid Input increment IS-B IS-C Unit IS-A IS-B,IS-C
mm unit input mm -99999999 to 99999999 (8 digits) -999999999 to 999999999 (9 digits)

traverse (00h), cutting ±99999.999 ±9999.9999
deg unit input deg
feed - feed per minute inch unit input ±9999.9999 ±999.99999 inch The data unit is the minimum setting
(01h), cutting feed - feed unit for the corresponding axis. (See
per revolution (02h), and the table below.)
S e t t in g M i n im u m
u n it d a ta u n it
skip - feed per minute IS - A
IS - B
0 .0 1
0 .0 0 1
(03h) IS - C 0 .0 0 0 1
Data range of cutting - 1 to 65535 - 1 to 65535

feedrate for rapid The specified feedrate must be within the
traverse (01h) and skip - range shown in the table below.
Valid data range Unit of
feed per minute (03h) Millimeter
IS-B IS-C data
1 to 100000 0.1 to 12000.0 mm/min
Linear axis machine
Inch machine 0.01 to 4000.00 0.01 to 480.000 inch/min
Rotation axis 1 to 100000 0.1 to 12000.0 deg/min
Function to increase the - Not available. - By setting 1 in bit 2 (JFM) of

specification unit by a parameter No. 8004, it is possible
factor of 200 for to increase the specification unit
continuous feed (06h) by a factor of 200.
Bit 2 (JFM) of parameter No. 8004

Set the specification unit of feedrate
data for specifying the continuous feed
command for PMC axis control.
Millimeter Rotation
Increment Bit 2 (JFM) Inch input
input axis
system of No. 8004 (inch/min) -1
(mm/min) (min )
0 1 0.01 0.00023
IS-B
1 200 2.00 0.046
0 0.1 0.001 0.000023
IS-C
1 20 0.200 0.0046
Maximum feedrate for - When an override of 254% is applied - When an override of 254% is
IS-B IS-C
continuous feed (06h) Metric input Inch input Metric input Inch input applied
166458 1664.58 16645 166.45
1 time IS-B IS-C
mm/min inch/min mm/min inch/min
1664589 16645.89 166458 1664.58 Metric input Inch input Metric input Inch input
10 times
mm/min inch/min 0mm/min inch/min
- When override is canceled 1 time 166458 1664.58 16645 166.46
IS-B IS-C 10 times 999000 16645.89 99900 1664.58

65535 655.35 6553 65.53 200 times 999000 39330.0 99900 3933.0
1 time
mm/min inch/min mm/min inch/min
10 times
655350
mm/min
6553.50
inch/min
65535
mm/min
655.35
inch/min - When override is canceled
IS-B IS-C
1 time 65535 655.35 6553 65.53
10 times 655350 6553.5 65535 655.35
200 times 999000 39330.0 999000 3933.0
Minimum unit of feedrate The minimum unit of feedrate is given by the expressions shown below. The value
for the speed command must be specified as an integer. No finer value may be specified.
(10h) A calculation is made according to IS-B.
Fmin: Minimum feedrate unit
P: Number of pulses per revolution of a detector for speed feedback
- Fmin = P ÷ 7500 (mm/min) - Fmin = P ÷ 1000 (mm/min)
Speed specification in A speed is specified according to the expressions shown below.
the speed command A calculation is made according to IS-B.
(10h) F: Speed command (integer)
N: Servo motor speed (min-1)
P: Number of pulses per revolution of a detector for speed feedback
- F = N × P ÷ 7500 (mm/min) - F = N × P ÷ 1000 (mm/min)
Setting range of torque - The setting range is as follows. - The setting range is as follows.
Valid data range Unit Valid data range Unit
data for torque control -999999999 to +999999999 (9 digits) 0.0000 1 Nm
-99999999 to +99999999 0.0000 1 Nm
(11h)
- 1637 -

Note on executing an - [For Series 0i-D]
absolute command from When you switch to PMC axis control to execute a move command during
the program for an axis automatic operation and then switch back to NC axis control to execute an
subject to PMC axis absolute command from the program for the moved axis, that PMC command
control during automatic needs to be executed using a non-buffering M code.
operation
For example, when an absolute command is executed in a N40 block after PMC
control is applied to Y axis, as in the example below, PMC axis control needs to be
executed in a non-buffering M code (N20 block).
O0001 ;
N10 G94 G90 G01 X20. Y30. F3000 ;
N20 M55 ; → Executes PMC axis control for the Y axis.
N30 X70. ;
N40 Y50. ;
N50 M30 ;
Execute PMC axis control as follows.

1. After the output of the auxiliary function strobe signal MF for M55, start PMC
axis control.
2. Upon completion of PMC axis control, input the completion signal FIN for M55.
- [For Series 0i-C]
Control does not need to be executed using a non-buffering M code.
Acceleration/deceleration - Depends on bit 2 (SUE) of parameter - Bit 2 (SUE) of parameter No. 8002
control for an axis No. 8002. is not available.
synchronized with The acceleration/deceleration of
external pulses using Bit 2 (SUE) of parameter No. 8002 the axis synchronized with external
external pulse With the external pulse synchronization pulses is controlled (exponential
synchronization (0Bh, command for PMC axis control, the acceleration/deceleration).
0Dh to 0Fh) acceleration/deceleration of the axis
synchronized with external pulses is:
0: Controlled (exponential
acceleration/deceleration).
1: Not controlled.
Inch/metric conversion - Depends on bit 0 (PIM) of parameter No. - Bit 0 (PIM) of parameter No. 8003
for a linear axis 8003. is not available. Parameter No.
controlled only by PMC 1010 is not available, either.
axis control Bit 0 (PIM) of parameter No. 8003 For a linear axis controlled only by
When the axis controlled only by PMC axis PMC axis control, set rotation axis
control (see parameter No. 1010) is a linear type B (set 1 in both bit 1 and bit 0
axis, inch/metric input: of parameter No. 1006) to avoid
0: Influences the axis. the influence of inch/metric input.
1: Does not influence the axis.
Setting to change all - Depends on bit 1 (PAX) of parameter - Bit 1 (PAX) of parameter No. 8003
axes to CNC axes or No. 8003. is not available. Parameter No.
PMC axes 1010 is not available, either.
Bit 1 (PAX) of parameter No. 8003 There is no parameter to change
When 0 is set as the number of CNC control all axes to PMC axes.
axes (parameter No. 1010), all axes are
changed to:
0: CNC axes.
1: PMC axes.
- 1638 -

If the PMC issues an - Depends on bit 0 (CMV) of parameter - Bit 0 (CMV) of parameter No. 8004
axis control command for No. 8004. is not available.
an axis when the tool is The axis control command from
waiting for the auxiliary Bit 0 (CMV) of parameter No. 8004 the PMC side is executed.
function completion If the PMC issues an axis control command
signal after moving that for an axis when the tool is waiting for the
axis according to a move auxiliary function completion signal after
command and an moving that axis according to a move
auxiliary function command and an auxiliary function specified
specified from the CNC from the CNC side:
side 0: Alarm PS0130 is issued.
1: The axis control command from the PMC
side is executed.
If the CNC issues a - Depends on bit 1 (NMT) of parameter - Bit 1 (NMT) of parameter No. 8004
command for an axis No. 8004. is not available.
when that axis is being A command that does not involve
moved by the axis Bit 1 (NMT) of parameter No. 8004 moving the axis is executed
control command from If the CNC issues a command for an axis without an alarm.
the PMC side when that axis is being moved by the axis (If the command involves moving
control command from the PMC side: the axis, alarm PS0130 is issued.)
0: Alarm PS0130 is issued.
1: A command that does not involve
moving the axis is executed without an
alarm.
Setting of - This item is determined by using bit 7 - Bit 7 (NDI) of parameter No. 8004
diameter/radius (NDI) of parameter No. 8004 and bit 1 is not available. The item is
specification for the (CDI) of parameter No. 8005 in determined by bit 1 (CDI) of
amount of travel and combination. parameter No. 8005.
feedrate when diameter
programming is specified Bit 1 (CDI) of parameter No. 8005
for a PMC-controlled axis In PMC axis control, when diameter
programming is specified for a
PMC-controlled axis:
0: The amount of travel and feedrate
are each specified with a radius.
1: The amount of travel is specified
with a diameter while the feedrate
is specified with a radius.
Individual output of the - Depends on bit 7 (MFD) of parameter - Bit 7 (MFD) of parameter No. 8005
auxiliary function No. 8005. is not available.
The individual output of the
Bit 7 (MFD) of parameter No. 8005 auxiliary function for PMC axis
The individual output of the auxiliary function control function is enabled.
for PMC axis control function is:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
- 1639 -

Function to exert position - Depends on bit 4 (EVP) of parameter - Depends on bit 4 (EVP) of
control for the speed No. 8005. parameter No. 8005. Note that,
command (10h) for the EVP=1 setting to take
Bit 4 (EVP) of parameter No. 8005 effect, 1 must be set in bit 2 (VCP)
The speed of PMC axis control is specified of parameter No. 8007.
by:
0: Speed command. Bit 2 (VCP) of parameter No. 8007
1: Position command. The speed command in PMC axis
control is:
0: FS10/11 type.
1: FS0 type.
In-position check for an - Depends on bit 2 (IPA) of parameter No. - Bit 2 (IPA) of parameter No. 8006
axis controlled only by 8006. is not available. Parameter No.
PMC axis control 1010 is not available, either.
Bit 2 (IPA) of parameter No. 8006 The check is performed when no
In the case of an axis controlled only by PMC move command is specified for the
axis control (see parameter No. 1010), PMC axis. Otherwise, the
in-position check is: processing is determined by bit 6
0: Performed when no move command is (NCI) of parameter No. 8004.
specified for the PMC axis.
1: Always not performed. Bit 6 (NCI) of parameter No. 8004
When the PMC-controlled axis is
decelerated, in-position check is:
0: Performed.
1: Not performed.
No in-position check - Depends on bit 0 (NIS) of parameter No. - Bit 0 (NIS) of parameter No. 8007
signal for a 8007. is not available.
PMC-controlled axis and The no in-position check signal
no in-position check Bit 0 (NIS) of parameter No. 8007 NOINPS<G023.5> and no
signals for individual For in-position check for a PMC axis, the no in-position check signals for
axes in-position check signal NOINPS<G023.5> individual axes NOINP1<G359> to
and no in-position check signals for individual NOINP5<G359> are disabled for
axes NOINP1<G359> to NOINP5<G359> in-position check for a PMC axis.
are:
0: Disabled.
1: Enabled.
Minimum speed for rapid - Set the value in parameter No. 8021. - Parameter No. 8021 is not
traverse override in PMC available.
axis control The minimum speed for rapid
traverse override cannot be set.
Operation when - Depends on bit 1 (RAB) of parameter - Depends on bit 1 (RAB) of
instructing in machine No. 1008. parameter No. 1008 and bit 4
coordinate system (R20) of parameter No.8013.
selection (20h) to the Bit 1 (RAB) of parameter No. 1008
axis to which roll-over is In the absolute commands, the axis rotates in Bit 4 (R20) of parameter No.8013
effective the direction: 0 1
0: In which the distance to the target is 0

Direction of Direction of
the shortest path the shortest path
shorter. Bit 1 (RAB) of
Direction of sign of
(Specified by the shortest path) parameter No.1008
1 the amount of the
Direction of sign of the
command value
1: Specified by the sign of command value. movement to be made
- 1640 -
T
Differences regarding 2-path control
Relationship with - PMC axis control can also be applied to - PMC axis control cannot be applied to
composite control axes subject to composite control. axes subject to composite control.
Setting when groups - 1 (group A) to 4 (group D) are set in - 5 (group A for the path 2) to 8 (group D
A to D in the path 2 parameter No. 8010 for the path 2. for the path 2) are set in the axis
is used parameter No. 8010 controlled in the
path 2.
Parameter No. 8010

Specify the DI/DO group to be used to
specify a command for each
PMC-controlled axis.

Feedrate override - *FV0E to *FV5E - *EFOV0 to *EFOV5
signal name Name change only. The addresses and functions are the same.
Override cancellation - OVCE - EOVC
signal name Name change only. The addresses and functions are the same.
Rapid traverse - ROV1E, ROV2E - EROV1, EROV2
override signal name Name change only. The addresses and functions are the same.
Dry run signal name - DRNE - EDRN
Name change only. The addresses and functions are the same.
Manual rapid traverse - RTE - ERT
selection signal name Name change only. The addresses and functions are the same.

None.
- 1641 -
B.50 EXTERNAL DATA INPUT

Number of external - [Number of messages that can be set - [Number of messages that can be set
alarm messages and at a time] at a time]
message length Up to 4 messages Depends on bit 1 (M16) of parameter
[Length of a message] No. 11931. When 0 is set, the
Up to 32 characters processing is the same as Series 0i-C.
Bit 1 (M16) of parameter No. 11931

The maximum number of external alarm
messages or external operator messages
that can be displayed in connection with
external data input or external messages
is:
0: 4.
1: 16.
[Length of a message]
Up to 32 characters
Display format of - [Alarm numbers that can be sent] - Depends on bit 0 (EXA) of parameter
external alarm 0 to 999 No. 6301.
messages [How to distinguish these numbers
from general alarm numbers] Bit 0 (EXA) of parameter No. 6301
Add 1000 to the number sent Select the external alarm message
specification.
0: The alarm numbers that can be sent
range from 0 to 999. The CNC
displays an alarm number, with 1000
added to the number following the
character string "EX".
1: The alarm numbers that can be sent
range from 0 to 4095. The CNC
displays an alarm number, with the
character string "EX" added in front of
it.
Number of external - Depends on bit 0 (OM4) of parameter - Bit 0 (OM4) of parameter No. 3207 is
operator messages No. 3207. not available.
and message length [Number of messages that can be set
Bit 0 (OM4) of parameter No. 3207 at a time]
The external operator message screen can Depends on bit 1 (M16) of parameter
display: No. 11931. Select either up to 4 or 16
0: Up to 256 characters in up to 1 messages.
message. [Length of a message]
1: Up to 64 characters in up to 4 256 characters or less
messages.
- 1642 -

Display format of - [Message numbers that can be sent] - Depends on bit 1 (EXM) of parameter
external operator 0 to 999 No. 6301. When 0 is set, the
messages [How to distinguish these numbers processing is the same as Series 0i-C.
from alarm and other numbers]
Messages from 0 to 99 Bit 1 (EXM) of parameter No. 6301
The message is displayed on the Select the external operator message
screen along with the number. The specification.
CNC adds 2000 to this number for 0: The message numbers that can be
distinction. sent range from 0 to 999.
Messages from 100 to 999 A message from 0 to 99 is displayed
Only the message is displayed on the on the screen along with the number.
screen without the number. The CNC adds 2000 to this number for
distinction.
As for the messages from 100 to 999,
only the message is displayed on the
screen without the number.
1: The message numbers that can be
sent range from 0 to 4095.
A message from 0 to 99 is displayed
on the screen along with the number.
The CNC adds the character string
"EX" in front of the number.
As for the messages from 100 to 4095,
only the message is displayed on the
screen without the number.
Data range of external Parameter No. 6310
operator message The data range of external operator message numbers is as follows.
numbers
- 0 to 1000 - 0 to 4096
When an external - An alarm is not issued; the search is - Alarm DS0059 is issued.
program number not done, either.
search is done with 0
set as the program
number
Input of an external - The input is ignored without issuing an - Alarm DS1121 is issued.
tool offset for an alarm.
invalid function
compensation value
- 1643 -

Data signals for - [Signal address] - Depends on bit 3 (EED) of parameter
external data input for ED15 to ED0<G001,G000> No. 6301. When 0 is set, the
external tool offset [Data range] processing is the same as Series 0i-C.
and external 0 to ±7999
workpiece coordinate Bit 3 (EED) of parameter No. 6301
system shift The data for external tool offset and
external workpiece coordinate system shift
is set using:
0: Signals ED15 to ED0<G001,G000>.
(The specifiable range of tool offset
and workpiece coordinate system shift
values is 0 to ±7999.)
1: Signals ED31 to
ED0<G211,G210,G001,G000>.
(The specifiable range of tool offset
and workpiece coordinate system shift
values is 0 to ±79999999.)
M
Target compensation - Only the wear compensation value for - Using the external data input address
value for external tool external tool offset can be modified. signal EA2<G002.2,G002.0>,
offset EA0<G002.2,G002.0>, the following
compensation values can be modified:
[Tool length compensation]
Wear compensation value and
geometric compensation value
[Cutter compensation]
Wear compensation value and
geometric compensation value

None.
- 1644 -
B.51 SEQUENCE NUMBER SEARCH

Return from a - The calling program is searched from - The calling program is searched in a
subprogram to the the beginning, and control is returned forward direction from the block that
calling program's to the first block found to have called the subprogram, and control is
block that has a sequence number Nxxxxx. returned to the first block found to have
specified sequence sequence number Nxxxxx.
number If the specified sequence number is
Sequence number not found, the calling program is
search when (M99 searched from the beginning, and
Pxxxxx) is executed control is returned to the first block
found to have sequence number
Nxxxxx.
Example) Main program Sub program
O0001 ; O9001 ;
N100 ; (1) M99 P100 ;
N100 ; (2)
M98 P9001 ;
N100 ; (3)
N100 ; (4)
M30 ;
- [For Series 0i-C] - [For Series 0i-D]
Control is returned to block (1). Control is returned to block (3).
WARNING
Be sure to avoid writing two or more identical sequence numbers in a program.
Doing so may cause the search to find unintended blocks.

None.

None.
B.52 IN-POSITION CHECK

None.
- 1645 -

In-position signals - The signal is set to 1 if the servo error - Even if the servo error of the
INP1 to INP5 of the corresponding control axis is corresponding control axis is within the
Condition for setting within the specified limit (in-position specified limit (in-position range), the
<Fn104.0> to range) even when the axis is moving. signal is not set to 1 when the axis is
<Fn104.4> to 1 moving or there is
acceleration/deceleration delay.

None.
B.53 DATA SERVER FUNCTION

Memory operation - The memory operation mode is not - In the memory operation mode, the
mode supported. following operations can be performed
for a program registered with the data
server:
1. Select the program on the data

server as the main program and
run it in the memory mode.
2. Call a subprogram or custom
macro in the same directory as the
main program on the data server.
3. Edit the program, including
inserting, deleting, and replacing
words.
T
Simultaneous call In a 2-path system, a simultaneous external subprogram call (M198) of a data server
from two paths program from both paths is:
- Allowed under the following conditions. - Not allowed.
[Storage mode] Use the subprogram/custom macro
Both paths must use the same work call for the memory operation mode
directory. instead.
[FTP mode]
Both paths must use the same
connection host.

None.

None.
- 1646 -
B.54 POWER MATE CNC MANAGER

4-slave display - By setting 1 in bit 0 (SLV) of parameter - Bit 0 (SLV) of parameter No. 0960 is
function No. 0960, it is possible to split the not available.
screen into four windows, enabling up One slave is always displayed.
to four slaves to be displayed. When there is more than one slave,
you switch the active slave by using
Bit 0 (SLV) of parameter No. 0960 the relevant soft key.
When Power Mate CNC Manager is
selected, the screen:
0: Displays one slave.
1: Is split into four windows, enabling up
to four slaves to be displayed.

None.

None.
B.55 PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER INPUT (G10)

Parameter input mode - Specify G10 L50. - Specify G10 L52.
setting

None.

None.
- 1647 -
B.56 EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAM CALL (M198)

Address P format - Depends on bit 2 (SBP) of parameter - To call a subprogram, the program
when calling a No. 3404. number must always be specified in
subprogram on the address P.
memory card (file Bit 2 (SBP) of parameter No. 3404 When calling a subprogram on the
number In the external device subprogram call memory card, the processing is not
specification/program M198, address P is specified using: dependent on the setting of bit 2 (SBP)
number specification) 0: File number. of parameter No. 3404.
1: Program number.
Multiple call alarm If a subprogram called by an external subprogram call specifies a further external
subprogram call, the following alarms are issued, respectively:
- Alarm PS0210 - Alarm PS1080
External subprogram - Enabled. - Depends on bit 1 (MDE) of parameter
call in MDI mode No. 11630.
Bit 1 (MDE) of parameter No. 11630

In MDI mode, an external device
subprogram call (M198 command) is:
0: Disabled. (Alarm PS1081 is issued.)
1: Enabled.

None.

None.
- 1648 -
B-64303EN-1/02 INDEX
NOTE
Volume 1 : Page 1 to 1008 / Volume 2 : P. 1009 to 1648
INDEX
Bell-Shaped Acceleration/Deceleration after Cutting Feed
<Number> Interpolation (M Series) ...............................................565
2ND REFERENCE POSITION RETURN / 3RD, 4TH Bi-directional Pitch Error Compensation .......................40
REFERENCE POSITION RETURN ...........................332
2-PATH CONTROL ....................................................578 <C>
2-path Functions...........................................................583 CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES) / MULTIPLE
8-Level Data Protection Function ..............................1178 REPETITIVE CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES)..........1111
CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES)/MULTIPLE
<A> REPETITIVE CANNED CYCLE (T SERIES)..........1619
Absolute Position Detection...........................................54 CANNED CYCLE FOR DRILLING................1096,1617
Acceleration/Deceleration after Interpolation ..............849 CANNED GRINDING CYCLE.................................1620
ACCELERATION/DECELERATION CONTROL ....555 CANNED GRINDING CYCLE (FOR GRINDING
Acceleration-Based Speed Control in Circular MACHINE)................................................................1121
Interpolation .................................................................521 Cautions on 2-path Control ..........................................585
ACTUAL SPINDLE SPEED OUTPUT (T SERIES) ..763 CHAMFERING AND CORNER ROUNDING (T
Adding workpiece coordinate systems (G54.1 or G54) (M SERIES) ............................................................1148,1626
series) .............................................................................98 Checking input data....................................................1456
ADVANCED PREVIEW CONTROL (T SERIES) / AI Checking the Stored Stroke Limit during the Time from
ADVANCED PREVIEW CONTROL (M SERIES) / AI Power–on to the Reference Position Establishment .....194
CONTOUR CONTROL (M SERIES) .......................1587 Chuck and Tail Stock Barrier (T Series) ......................197
ALARM SIGNALS......................................................209 CHUCK/TAIL STOCK BARRIER (T SERIES) .......1574
ARBITRARY ANGULAR AXIS CONTROL....144,1571 CIRCULAR INTERPOLATION ........................432,1583
Automatic Acceleration/Deceleration ..........................555 CNC Data Display, Setup, and Input/Output ...............583
Automatic Alteration of Tool Position Compensation (T CNC READY SIGNALS .............................................179
Function) ....................................................................1017 CNC Screen Dual Display..........................................1203
Automatic coordinate system setting .............................99 Command Format.........................................................870
Automatic Corner Override (M Series) ........................511 Commands for Feed Per Minute and Feed Per Revolution
AUTOMATIC OPERATION ......................................381 .....................................................................................849
AUTOMATIC REFERENCE POSITION RETURN AND Compact-Type MDI Key Input Function ...................1220
RETURN FROM THE REFERENCE POSITION ......327 COMPENSATION VALUE INPUT..........................1292
Automatic Setting for Grid Position Matching.............118 Composite Control .......................................................613
Automatic Slave Axis Parameter Setting .....................121 Connection Among Spindle, Spindle Motor, and Position
Automatic Tool Length Measurement (M Series)......1630 Coder............................................................................844
AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M CONSTANT SURFACE SPEED CONTROL ....755,1600
SERIES) / AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET (T SERIES) Continuous Threading (T Series) .................................447
...................................................................................1260 Controlled Axes Detach .................................................10
AUTOMATIC TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M CONTROLLED AXIS .....................................................1
SERIES)/AUTOMATIC TOOL OFFSET (T SERIES) COORDINATE SYSTEM ROTATION ....................1145
...................................................................................1630 Corner Control .............................................................567
Automatic Tool Offset (T Series)...............................1631 CORRESPONDENCE OF ROTARY SCALE WITHOUT
AUXILIARY FUNCTION...........................................682 ROTARY DATA .........................................................368
AUXILIARY FUNCTION LOCK...............................694 Cs CONTOUR CONTROL.................................797,1602
AUXILIARY FUNCTION/2ND AUXILIARY Cs Contour Control Axis Coordinate Establishment....818
FUNCTION ........................................................682,1598 Cs Contour Control Torque Limit Skip........................815
Available diagnosis number .......................................1448 CUSTOM MACRO...........................................1075,1614
Axis Configuration for Axis Synchronous Control ......113 Cutter Compensation (M Series) and Tool Nose Radius
AXIS CONTROL.............................................................1 Compensation (T Series) ............................................1027
AXIS SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL .................113,1565 CUTTER COMPENSATION/TOOL NOSE RADIUS
Axis Synchronous Control Torque Difference Alarm..120 COMPENSATION.....................................................1608
Cutting Feedrate Clamp ...............................................499
<B> CYCLE START/FEED HOLD ....................................381
Backlash Compensation .................................................28 CYLINDRICAL INTERPOLATION ..........................452
BALANCE CUTTING ................................................602
i-1
INDEX B-64303EN-1/02
NOTE
<D> FEEDRATE CONTROL..............................................496
DATA SERVER FUNCTION ...................................1646 FEEDRATE CONTROL/ACCELERATION AND
DECIMAL POINT PROGRAMMING/POCKET DECELERATION CONTROL....................................496
CALCULATOR TYPE DECIMAL POINT Feedrate override..........................................................509
PROGRAMMING .....................................................1059 Follow-up .......................................................................16
DEFINITION OF WARNING, CAUTION, AND NOTE FS10/11 Format Command ..........................................854
......................................................................................s-1 FSSB Setting ..................................................................60
DESIGNATION OF SPINDLE AXES ........................701
Diagnosis Display ........................................................867 <G>
DIAGNOSIS FUNCTION .........................................1429 G Code List in the Lathe System................................1061
Differences between Pitch Error Compensation, Simple G Code List in the Machining Center System............1063
Straightness Compensation, and Gradient Compensation G CODE SYSTEM ....................................................1061
(Reference).....................................................................47 GENERAL PURPOSE RETRACT..............................491
DIFFERENCES FROM Series 0i-C ..........................1560 Gradient Compensation..................................................37
DIRECT DRAWING DIMENSIONS PROGRAMMING Guidance table for machine alarm diagnosis..............1450
(T SERIES) .......................................................1150,1627
DIRECT OPERATION BY C LANGUAGE EXECUTOR <H>
.....................................................................................425 HELICAL INTERPOLATION ...........................448,1584
DISPLAY/SET...........................................................1166 High Precision and High Speed Functions (Advanced
DISPLAY/SET/EDIT.................................................1166 Preview Control (T Series)/AI Advanced Preview Control
DISTANCE CODED LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE339 (M Series)/AI Contour Control (M Series)/AI Contour
DNC OPERATION......................................................419 Control II (M Series))...................................................522
Dry Run........................................................................389 HIGH-SPEED M/S/T/B INTERFACE.........................697
High-speed Skip Signal ..............................................1274
<E> Hypothetical Cs Axis Control ......................................646
Each axis workpiece coordinate system preset signals.104
EDIT ..........................................................................1217 <I>
ELECTRONIC GEAR BOX (M SERIES) ..................156 I/O Link β MANUAL HANDLE INTERFACE ..........276
EMBEDDED ETHERNET FUNCTION ...................1407 In the Case of a Rotary Axis A Type ...........................377
EMBEDDED ETHERNET PORT AND PCMCIA In the Case of a Rotary Axis B Type whose Movable Range
ETHERNET CARD ...................................................1407 is over One Rotation.....................................................375
EMERGENCY STOP ..................................................177 In the Case of a Rotary Axis B Type whose Movable Range
Environment for making trouble diagnosis message..1449 is under One Rotation...................................................369
ERROR COMPENSATION ..........................................22 INCH/METRIC CONVERSION ...............................1070
EXACT STOP / EXACT STOP MODE / TAPPING Increment System.............................................................4
MODE / CUTTING MODE.........................................413 INDEX TABLE INDEXING (M SERIES) ................1128
Example of setting the FOCAS2/Ethernet function ...1411 IN-FEED CONTROL (FOR GRINDING MACHINE) (M
Example of setting the FTP file transfer function ......1416 SERIES) .....................................................................1120
Explanation .......................................................1228,1235 Inner corner automatic override (G62).........................512
EXTENDED EXTERNAL MACHINE ZERO POINT In-position check .................................................568,1645
SHIFT ........................................................................1390 In-position check independently of feed/rapid traverse570
EXTENDED FUNCTION OF THE DISTANCE CODED In-position check signal ...............................................567
LINEAR SCALE INTERFACE...................................361 Input of tool offset value measured (T Series) ...........1292
EXTERNAL DATA INPUT .............................1377,1642 Input of Tool Offset Value Measured B (T Series)
External Deceleration...................................................516 ..........................................................................1293,1635
EXTERNAL I/O DEVICE CONTROL .....................1254 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA .....................................1243
EXTERNAL KEY INPUT.........................................1395 Inputting data in the sheet for multi-languages ..........1461
EXTERNAL SUBPROGRAM CALL (M198) ..........1648 Inputting guidance data ..............................................1454
External Touch Panel Interface ..................................1188 Install..........................................................................1450
EXTERNAL WORKPIECE NUMBER SEARCH ....1393 INTERFACE BETWEEN CNC AND PMC ..............1465
Internal circular cutting feedrate change ......................514
<F> INTERPOLATION FUNCTION .................................426
Feed Forward in Rapid Traverse ..................................572 Interruption Type Custom Macro......................1093,1616
Feed Per Minute ...........................................................499 Inverse Time Feed (M Series) ......................................505
Feed per Revolution ...................................................1007
Feed Per Revolution/Manual Feed Per Revolution ......501
i-2
NOTE
<J> MANUAL REFERENCE POSITION RETURN 299,1577
JERK CONTROL (M Series).......................................572 MDI Key Setting ........................................................1219
JOG FEED/INCREMENTAL FEED ...........................256 MEASUREMENT .....................................................1259
Jump from CNC guidance table to MTB’s guidance table MEMORY COMMON TO PATHS.............................675
...................................................................................1458 Memory Protection Keys ...........................................1217
Memory Protection Signal For CNC Parameter 1218,1629
<K> Method of Using Heidenhain Rotary Scale RCN223, 723
Kind of additional alarm and operator message .........1448 and 220.........................................................................378
Methods of Alarm Recovery by Synchronization Error
<L> Check ...........................................................................119
Limitation...................................................................1234 Mirror Image ..................................................................14
Linear Acceleration/Deceleration after Cutting Feed MIRROR IMAGE FOR DOUBLE TURRET (T SERIES)
Interpolation .................................................................562 ...................................................................................1126
LINEAR INTERPOLATION.......................................430 Miscellaneous.............................................................1616
LINEAR INTERPOLATION (G28, G30, G53)...........483 MODE SELECTION ...................................................216
LINEAR SCALE WITH DISTANCE-CODED Multi Spindle Control...................................................856
REFERENCE MARKS (SERIAL) ..............................351 MULTIPLE M COMMANDS IN A SINGLE BLOCK695
LIST OF ADDRESSES .............................................1465 MULTIPLE RESPECTIVE CANNED CYCLE FOR
LIST OF SIGNALS ...................................................1502 TURNING (T SERIES)..............................................1621
List of Signals (In Order of Addresses)......................1541 MULTI-SPINDLE CONTROL...........................826,1603
List of Signals (In Order of Functions) ......................1502 Multi-step Skip...........................................................1279
List of Signals (In Order of Symbols) ........................1523
Local Coordinate System ....................................109,1564 <N>
LOG SCREEN OF THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET Name of Axes...................................................................2
FUNCTION ...............................................................1426 NANO SMOOTHING (M SERIES) ............................484
Look-Ahead Smooth Bell-Shaped NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL (M SERIES) .....480
Acceleration/Deceleration before Interpolation ...........576 Notes .....................................................................866,923
Notes on interface with the PMC .................................880
<M> Notice .........................................................................1461
M29 and G84/G74 are specified in the same block......887
M29 and G84/G88 are specified in the same block......897 <O>
MACHINE ALARM DIAGNOSIS............................1448 Offset..........................................................................1011
Machine Coordinate System ..........................................92 ONE TOUCH MACRO CALL ..................................1400
Machine Lock ..............................................................388 One-digit F Code Feed (M Series) ...............................502
MACHINE OPERATION MENU .............................1228 Operation on the FOCAS2/Ethernet setting screen ....1408
MACHINE OPERATION MENU TOOL..................1235 Operation on the FTP file transfer setting screen .......1412
MACHINING CONDITION SELECTION FUNCTION OPERATOR ERROR PREVENT FUNCTIONS.........246
............................................................................235,1574 Optimum Acceleration/Deceleration for Rigid Tapping860
MACHINING QUALITY LEVEL ADJUSTMENT (M OPTIONAL ANGLE CHAMFERING AND CORNER
Series) ..........................................................................241 ROUNDING (M SERIES) ................................1147,1625
MACRO COMPILER/MACRO EXECUTER...........1146 OPTIONAL BLOCK SKIP/ADDITION OF OPTIONAL
MAINTENANCE SCREEN FOR EMBEDDED BLOCK SKIP...............................................................395
ETHERNET FUNCTION ..........................................1422 Outline...............................................................1433,1448
Making a file to input trouble diagnosis messages.....1451 Outputting the Movement State of an Axis ....................13
Making a memory card format file.............................1457 Override ................................................................505,851
Making messages for multi-languages .......................1459 Override cancel ............................................................511
Making sheets for multi-languages ............................1459 OVERTRAVEL CHECK.............................................180
Making trouble diagnosis messages ...........................1453 Overtravel Signals ........................................................180
MALFUNCTION PREVENT FUNCTIONS...............243 Overview...........................................................1228,1235
MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON AND OFF ....................1581
MANUAL ABSOLUTE ON/OFF................................393 <P>
MANUAL HANDLE FEED ...............................262,1576 Parameter ...................................................902,1233,1446
MANUAL HANDLE INTERRUPT ............................271 Parameter Check Sum Function .................................1191
MANUAL HANDLE RETRACE ................................279 Parameters Related to Servo...........................................48
MANUAL INTERVENTION AND RETURN............422 PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE / NUMBER OF
MANUAL OPERATION.............................................256 REGISTERABLE PROGRAMS................................1069
i-3
INDEX B-64303EN-1/02
NOTE
PATH INTERFERENCE CHECK...............................593 Screen erasure function and automatic screen erasure
PATH INTERFERENCE CHECK (T SERIES (2-PATH function .............................................................1212,1628
CONTROL)) ..............................................................1591 Screen Hard Copy Function .......................................1214
PATH SELECTION/DISPLAY OF OPTIONAL PATH Screen Switching at Path Switching...........................1211
NAMES........................................................................679 Screen Switching by Mode ........................................1208
PATH SINGLE BLOCK CHECK FUNCTION ..........678 SEQUENCE NUMBER COMPARISON AND STOP 397
PATH SPINDLE CONTROL ......................................665 SEQUENCE NUMBER SEARCH ............................1645
PATTERN DATA INPUT .........................................1152 SERIAL/ANALOG SPINDLE CONTROL ........719,1599
PMC AXIS CONTROL ....................................1309,1636 Series 0i-C-compatible setting .......................................76
PMC CONTROL FUNCTION...................................1309 Series 0i-D-dedicated setting..........................................60
POLAR COORDINATE INTERPOLATION (T SERIES) Servo off/Mechanical Handle Feed ................................17
............................................................................449,1585 SERVO WARNING INTERFACE............................1429
Polygon Turning ..........................................................455 SETTING EACH AXIS ...................................................2
POLYGON TURNING (T SERIES)............................454 Setting Method by Rotary Axis Type and Movable Range
Polygon Turning with Two Spindles............................462 .....................................................................................368
Position Control Loop Gain Parameter Switching .......874 Setting of the FOCAS2/Ethernet Function .................1408
Position Switch ..............................................................19 Setting of the FTP File Transfer Function..................1411
POSITIONING ............................................................426 SETTING UNIT.........................................................1561
POWER MATE CNC MANAGER ...........................1647 Setting up DHCP........................................................1417
PREFACE .................................................................... p-1 Setting up DNS ..........................................................1416
PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION ........................177 Setting Up the DNS/DHCP Function .........................1416
PROGRAM COMMAND ..........................................1059 SETTING UP THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET
PROGRAM CONFIGURATION...............................1067 FUNCTION................................................................1408
PROGRAM RESTART ...............................................397 SETTINGS RELATED TO SERVO-CONTROLLED
PROGRAMMABLE PARAMETER INPUT (G10) ..1647 AXES .............................................................................48
SETTINGS RELATED WITH COORDINATE
<R> SYSTEMS......................................................................92
Rapid Traverse Bell-shaped Acceleration/Deceleration560 Signal .........................................................875,1234,1447
Rapid traverse block overlap........................................559 Signals for the rigid tapping function...........................875
Rapid traverse override ................................................505 Signals related to gear switching..................................876
Rapid Traverse Rate.....................................................497 Signals related to S code output ...................................875
READER/PUNCHER INTERFACE .........................1243 Signals related to the addition of multi spindle control 877
Reference Position Established by the G00 Command 361 SIMPLE SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL (M
REFERENCE POSITION ESTABLISHMENT ..........299 SERIES) .......................................................................949
Reference Position Establishment by Jog Feed............365 Simple Straightness Compensation (M Series) ..............33
Reference Position Return............................................853 Simultaneous Two Path Program Editing ..................1224
REFERENCE POSITION SETTING WITH Single Block .................................................................391
MECHANICAL STOPPER .........................................334 SINGLE DIRECTION POSITIONING (M SERIES)
REFERENCE POSITION SETTING WITHOUT DOG ............................................................................427,1581
.....................................................................................320 SKIP FUNCTION .............................................1267,1633
Related NC parameters .....................................1414,1420 Smooth Backlash............................................................30
RESET AND REWIND ......................................384,1580 Software Operator's Panel ..........................................1170
RESTART OF THE EMBEDDED ETHERNET.......1421 Specifying G84/G74 for rigid tapping by parameters ..891
Restrictions.................................................................1447 Specifying G84/G88 for rigid tapping by parameters ..899
RETRACE (M SERIES) ..............................................403 Specifying the Rotation Axis ...........................................7
RETRACTION FOR RIGID TAPPING ......................414 Speed Command Extension in Least Input Increment C
RIGID TAPPING.........................................................843 .....................................................................................552
Rigid Tapping Specification.........................................848 Speed Control with Change of Acceleration on Each Axis
Rigid Tapping with Servo Motor ...............................1002 .....................................................................................572
Rigid Tapping with Spindle of Another Path (T Series Speed Display Function of a Milling Tool with Servo
(2-ptah Control)) ..........................................................856 Motor..........................................................................1205
Rotary Axis Roll Over .................................................111 SPINDLE ANALOG OUTPUT ...................................715
Run Hour and Parts Count Display ...................1166,1627 SPINDLE CONTROL WITH SERVO MOTOR ..970,972
Spindle Indexing Function ...........................................996
<S> SPINDLE ORIENTATION..........................................945
SCALING (M SERIES) .............................................1138 SPINDLE OUTPUT CONTROL BY THE PMC.........749
i-4
NOTE
Spindle Output Control with PMC .............................1008 Tool Geometry Offset and Tool Wear Offset.............1010
SPINDLE OUTPUT SWITCHING..............................948 Tool Length Compensation ........................................1035
SPINDLE POSITIONING (T SERIES) ..............764,1601 Tool Length Compensation Shift Types.....................1038
SPINDLE SERIAL OUTPUT......................................705 TOOL LENGTH MEASUREMENT (M SERIES)....1259
SPINDLE SPEED CONTROL.....................................722 TOOL LIFE MANAGEMENT ..................................1042
SPINDLE SPEED FLUCTUATION DETECTION (T Tool Offset .................................................................1010
SERIES) .......................................................................960 Torque Limit Skip Function .......................................1286
SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION ...................................700 Touch Panel Check Signal .........................................1201
SPINDLE SPEED FUNCTION (S CODE OUTPUT) .700 Touch Panel Control...................................................1183
SPINDLE SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL ...................927 Translating data used with the former series(Series 0i /0i
SPINDLE WARNING INTERFACE ........................1431 Mate-B/C, Series 16i /18i /21i-B) ..............................1461
START LOCK / INTERLOCK....................................210 TROUBLE DIAGNOSIS ...........................................1433
STATUS OUTPUT SIGNAL.......................................222 Trouble diagnosis graphic screen ...............................1443
Stored Pitch Error Compensation..........................22,1562 Trouble diagnosis guidance screen.............................1435
STORED STROKE CHECK .....................................1572 Trouble diagnosis monitor screen ..............................1437
Stored Stroke Check 1..................................................182 Trouble diagnosis parameter screen ...........................1441
Stored Stroke Check 2, 3..............................................187 Trouble forecast level setting screen (only for servo axis)
Stroke Limit Check Before Move ................................206 ...................................................................................1444
Stroke Limit External Setting (M Series).....................196 Two Path Display .......................................................1222
Structure of the file to input trouble diagnosis messages TWO PATH DISPLAY AND EDIT ..........................1222
...................................................................................1452
SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL ....................................650 <U>
SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL (T SERIES (2-PATH UNEXPECTED DISTURBANCE TORQUE
CONTROL)) ..............................................................1596 DETECTION FUNCTION ..........................................225
SWITCHING BETWEEN THE EMBEDDED Uninstall .....................................................................1450
ETHERNET DEVICES .............................................1421
Synchronization Error Check .......................................118 <V>
Synchronization Establishment ....................................116 Variable Lead Threading (T Series) .............................447
Synchronous Control....................................................607 VRDY OFF ALARM IGNORE SIGNAL....................223
SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL AND COMPOSITE
CONTROL...................................................................605 <W>
SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL AND COMPOSITE WAITING M CODES..................................................591
CONTROL (T SERIES (2-PATH CONTROL))........1592 WAITING M CODES (T SERIES (2-PATH CONTROL))
SYNCHRONOUS, COMPOSITE, AND ...................................................................................1590
SUPERIMPOSED CONTROL BY PROGRAM When M29 is specified before G84/G74......................883
COMMAND ................................................................663 When M29 is specified before G84/G88......................895
Workpiece coordinate system ...............................94,1563
<T> Workpiece coordinate system preset ..............................97
TANDEM CONTROL .................................................136 Workpiece coordinate system shift (T series) ..............100
Temporary Absolute Coordinate Setting........................89 Workpiece Coordinate System/Addition of Workpiece
TESTING A PROGRAM.............................................388 Coordinate System Pair..................................................94
THREADING ..............................................................435 Workpiece Origin Offset Measurement Value Direct Input
THREADING CYCLE RETRACT (CANNED CUTTING ...................................................................................1306
CYCLE/MULTIPLE REPETITIVE CANNED CUTTING
CYCLE) (T SERIES) .................................................1583 <Y>
Threading Cycle Retract (Canned Cycle) (T Series)....440 Y AXIS OFFSET (T SERIES) ...................................1607
Threading Cycle Retract (Multiple Repetitive Canned
Cycle) (T Series) ..........................................................443
Timing Charts for Rigid Tapping Specification ...........882
Timing of the M code for unclamping (T series) .........901
Timing to cancel rigid tapping mode ...........................901
TOOL COMPENSATION .........................................1027
Tool Compensation Memory ............................1022,1606
TOOL FUNCTIONS.........................................1009,1604
TOOL FUNCTIONS OF M SERIES .........................1021
TOOL FUNCTIONS OF T SERIES ..........................1009
i-5
Revision Record
FANUC Series 0i-MODEL D/Series 0i Mate-MODEL D CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION) (B-64303EN-1)
02 Aug., 2010 Total revision
01 May, 2008
Edition Date Contents Edition Date Contents

Connection Manual (Function) : FANUC Series 0+-MODEL D FANUC Series 0+ Mate-MODEL D

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

Connection Manual (Function) : FANUC Series 0+-MODEL D FANUC Series 0+ Mate-MODEL D

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Connection Manual (Function) : FANUC Series 0+-MODEL D FANUC Series 0+ Mate-MODEL D

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

FANUC Series 0+-MODEL D

FANUC Series 0+ Mate-MODEL D

CONNECTION MANUAL (FUNCTION)

1.6.5 Methods of Alarm Recovery by Synchronization Error Check ...........................119

2 PREPARATIONS FOR OPERATION ................................................. 177

4.8 EXTENDED FUNCTION OF THE DISTANCE CODED LINEAR SCALE

5 AUTOMATIC OPERATION ................................................................. 381

6.10 NORMAL DIRECTION CONTROL (M SERIES)........................................ 480

8 2-PATH CONTROL ............................................................................. 578

8.5 SYNCHRONOUS CONTROL AND COMPOSITE CONTROL................... 605

10.13.15.2 Signals related to S code output.................................................................... 875

12.4 PART PROGRAM STORAGE SIZE / NUMBER OF REGISTERABLE

13.5 MACHINE OPERATION MENU TOOL.................................................... 1235

14 INPUT/OUTPUT OF DATA ............................................................... 1243

16 PMC CONTROL FUNCTION............................................................. 1309

18.2 SPINDLE WARNING INTERFACE.......................................................... 1431

B DIFFERENCES FROM Series 0i-C .................................................. 1560

B.3.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1563

B.28.3 Differences in Diagnosis Display .......................................................................1602

B.52.1 Differences in Specifications..............................................................................1645

11.1 TOOL FUNCTIONS OF LATHE SYSTEM..................................................................................1009

11.1 TOOL FUNCTIONS OF T SERIES

Meaning of T code(*1) Parameter setting and offset No.

11.1.1 Tool Offset

Offset amount on Z axis

11.1.2 Tool Geometry Offset and Tool Wear Offset

If tool geometry compensation and tool wear compensation are distinguished

- Compensation with tool movement

This move command block

Compensation by tool offset X, Z (offset vector)

Offset operation with tool movement

- Compensation with coordinate shift

The movement to this point is

Programmed path after workpiece

Tool path after offset

Offset operation with coordinate shift

- Starting and canceling offset by specifying a T code

Compensation method LWM (No.5002#6)=0 LWM (No.5002#6)=1

- Canceling offset with reset

Notes and restrictions

• Workpiece coordinate system preset (G50.3)

[Input type] Parameter input

[Input type] Parameter input

#0 DRP For relative coordinate display:

#1 DAP For absolute coordinate display:

[Input type] Parameter input

#1 LGN Geometry offset number of tool offset

#2 LWT Tool wear compensation is performed by:

#4 LGT Tool geometry compensation

#6 LWM Tool offset operation based on tool movement is performed:

[Input type] Parameter input

#7 TGC A tool geometry offset based on a coordinate shift is:

[Input type] Parameter input

#1 ORC The setting of a tool offset value is corrected as:

[Input type] Parameter input

5024 Number of tool compensation values

[Input type] Parameter input